M€m wmmMQER mimomm ^, r"^ HANDBOOK GEAMMAE OF THE GEEEK TESTAMENT. I y y HANDBOOK lO THE GEAMMAK or THE GREEK TESTAMENT TOGETHER WITH A COMPLETE VOCABULARY, AND AN EXAMINATION OF THE CHIEF NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. ILLUSTRATED BY NUMEROUS EXAMPLES AND COMMENTS. LONDON : THE RELIGIOUS TRACT SOCIETY, 66, PATERNOSTER ROW; 65, ST. PAUL'S CHURCHYARD; AND 164, PICCADILLY. [All rights reserved.] * . ^ « . t < 743 :■ PEEFACE. That a knowledge of tlie New Testament in its original tongue is a tiling to be desired by intelligent Christians none will question. No book can be tboroughly known in a translation only ; and tke Bible, although. " the most translatable of books," is no exception. Many, who would gladly undertake the study, are deterred by the manifold and unquestionable difficulties of the Greek Language. It seems worth while to ask whether this obstacle cannot, in some measure, be removed. Undoubtedly, the Greek of the New Testament, as a later dialect of an elaborate and polished language, can most eflfectively be studied through the medium of the elder forms of the tongue. This method, accordingly, is in general chosen ; and the historians and orators, the philosophers and poets of Greece, have led the way to the Evangelists and the Apostles. Yet many persons have no opportunity for Studies so extended and difficult. Are they, therefore, to be forbidden all access, save through translators, critics, and interpreters, to the words of the Divine revelation ? In attempting to reply, we note that the Greek of Scripture is, for most purposes, a language complete in itself. Its forms and rules are definite, its usages in general precise. Its peculiarities, though best approached from the classic side, may be reached by a shorter way, and be almost as well comprehended. Many circumstances, again, facilitate the special study of the New Testament tongue. The language of orators and philosophers had descended to men of simpler mind and less artificial speech. Com- paring the Sacred Volume with Greek literature generally, we find A36325 IV PREFACE. a smaller vocabulaty, fewer graminatical forms, less intricate etymo- logical rules, with scantier lists of exceptions, and a far less elaborate syntax ; wkile the student has the advantage of being confined for the time to one limited, but intensely interesting, field. The following pages are then intended as a sufficient guide to Biblical Grreek for English students, that is, for those who have not studied the classical languages'. It may also be of service to those who have made some progress in classical studies, but who wish to concentrate their chief regards upon the language and syntax of the New Testament. The plan of the volume, and the method recommended for its study, are sufficiently set forth in the Introduction. To specify all the sources, English and German, from which valuable aid has been derived, would be unnecessary. Winer's comprehensive work (Sixth Edition, Leipsic, 1855 ; Edinburgh, T. & T. Clark, 1859, by Masson) has of course been consulted throughout. Scarcely less useful have been the researches and discussions of the late Dr. Donaldson. The New Testament Grammars of the Bev. W. Webster, and of the Eev. T. S. Green, have afi'orded some very valuable hints. On Greek Testament Lexicography, it will suffice to name the admirable Clavis Novi Testamenti recently published at Leipsic by Dr. 0. L. W. Grimm. The work has been carefully revised throughout in MS. by the Eev. Dr. Jacob, late Head Master of Christ's Hospital, author of the Bromsgrove Greek Grammar ^ and other classical works; and, in the proof sheets, by the Eev. E. B. Girdlestone, M.A., Editorial Superintendent of the British and Foreign Bible Society. To the important suggestions of these gentlemen the volume in its present state owes very much. It is now commended to attentive students of the New Testament, in the hope that it may lead not a few to the better understanding, and therefore to the higher appreciation of the Divine oracles. SAMUEL G. GEEEN. Eawdon College. INTEODIICTION. The following work so far differs from other manuals of the Greek language, both in its method and in the persons for whom it is intended, that some preliminary words on the plan by which its several parts should be studied will not be out of place. On Orthography, the sections should be thoroughly mastered, not only for the sake of facility in reading, but because most of the difficulties and so-called irregularities in the inflection of substantives, adjectives, and verbs depend on letter- changes, of which the rules are comparatively few, and really simple. To know these laws at the outset is to be provided with a key to varieties and intricacies which might otherwise prove hopelessly bewildering. It will be advisable that no student should advance beyond this portion of the work before being able to read the lessons on pages 11, 12 with fluency, and accurately to transcribe the paragraph on page 13. Great attention should be paid at this stage to pronunciation, especially to the distinction between the long and short vowels ; and those who may be studying the work by themselves are strongly recommended to take an oppor- tunity of reading a chapter or two in Greek to some scholar who can criticise and correct their mistakes. In Etymology, the forms must be carefully and completely learned. Everything in the student's further progress depends upon this. It is believed that the systematic and VI INTRODUCTION. progressive plan on which the substantives and verbs, as the groundwork of the whole, have been discussed, will but lightly burden the memory, while the judgment will be kept constantly at work. The chief point to be noted is the place and power of the stem in Greek words. The first and second declensions of Substantives will be seen to be mainly reducible to the same law ; the third declension, instead of perplexing the learner by countless varieties, will exhibit one normal form. The inflection of Adjectives will appear but a repetition of that of the Substantives ; while the Pronouns only slightly differ. Of the Verbs, the termina- tions should in the first instance be carefully learned. The first Paradigm will be found to exhibit the simplest way in which these terminations can be combined with the verbal root ; those that follow being but variations on the same model, according to the character of the Stem. The Verbs in fit, or of the Second Conjugation,* are classified in a way which, it is believed, will give no serious difficulty to the student. The Exercises up to this point are simply for practice in declension and conjugation, consisting almost exclusively of words occurring in the " Sermon on the Mount : " they are fair specimens of the ordinary vocabulary of the language ; and the learner is strongly recommended to write them out in all their forms, not neglecting the accents, which, by the help of the rules given under the several heads, will present but little difficulty. A stock of words will thus have been acquired, with a * In strictness, of course the First. The normal forms of the Verb are really to be foimd here ; and the terminations of Verbs in a might be deduced from these, by the aid of "the connective vowels." See especially Professor Greenwood's Greek Orammar. It has not, however, been thought necessary, in the present work, to carry analysis so far. INTRODUCTION. VU knowledge of forms of inflection quite sufficient for ordinary- cases. Some chapters of greater difficulty follow, treating of the Yerbs, tense by tense, and exhibiting the chief variations and anomalies in particular words. These sections may be omitted on a first study of the volume, but it will be important to read them carefully afterwards. The aim has been, so to classify the verbal forms that most apparent irregularities may be seen to be only exemplifica- tions of some more extended rule ; and, without trespassing on the more extended field of classical literature, to leave no word in the New Testament without the means of ready analysis and explanation. The Exercises which succeed these sections are for still further test. Here for the first time some easy sentences are introduced for translation. Logically, these should no doubt have been deferred until some rules of Syntax had been laid down ; but the interest and utility of such Exercises may be held a sufficient defence of the irregu- larity, especially as they contain scarcely any usages but such as are already familiar to those who have gram- matically studied any language. Here, a Greek Testament Lexicon or Vocabulary will be found necessary. The chapters on the indeclinable Parts of Speech call for no remark. Their complete discussion belongs to Syntax: but it was held necessary to the completeness of the Ety- mology to give at least a general view of their formation and meaning. So far as they extend, these sections should be closely studied. The reader will then be prepared for the Syntax, the study of the intermediate chapters being postponed, if pre- ferred, to a subsequent stage. These sections, on the difierent Languages of which the New Testament contains the trace, and on New Testament Proper Names, will suggest topics of VUl INTRODUCTION. interesting inquiry, which, in a manual like the present, could be pursued only for a very little way. The Syntax embodies the simplest laws of concord, government, and the connection of sentences, as well as others of a more special and less obvious kind. The doc- trines of the Article, of the Preposition, and of the Tenses, have received careful attention, as throwing light on many obscure or misunderstood passages. The arrangement of the Syntax has been adopted with a view to the learner's con- venience, and for the most part follows the order of the Parts of Speech. The student is specially and strongly recommended to study the order of the whole work, and especially of this part, in the Analytical Table of Contents. To this Table much care has been devoted, in the hope that it might be convenient not only for ordinary reference, but as an out- line and conspectus of the volume ; suggesting at one view the leading principles of the language, and especially useful in recapitulatory examinations. The sentences from the Greek Testament, so numerous in this division of the work, are intended partly to exemplify the rules to which they are appended, the illustrative words being printed in a thicker type; partly also to form together a series of Preparatory Reading Lessons or Primer, introductory to the sacred volume.. The student is therefore earnestly counselled to study these sentences in order. Most of them, of course, belong to the easier parts of New Testament Scripture; others again are more difficult and unusual in their structure; while in very many will be discovered shades or specialties of meaning which the English Version does not exhibit, and which perhaps no translation could reproduce. The study, therefore, of these sentences will be an introduction to Biblical exegesis, INTRODUCTION. IX which may prepare not a few readers for more extended inquiries. A YocABULARY to the whole New Testament, and a brief discussion of the chief New Testament Synonyms, complete the plan of the work. The work claims, be it remembered, to be an Introduction only. By its means, a not inadequate beginning may be made in what is surely the noblest of studies. Its aim is to familiarise many readers, who else had despaired of the possibility, with the words of Christ and of His Apostles. Should its purpose in any way be accomplished, it will give access also to those criticisms by which expositors in our own land and age, as in others, have so variously and nobly illustrated the "living oracles." The labour followed by such rewards will have been well spent : and readers of the New Testament in its own tongue, whether they advance or not to that high critical discernment which only the few attain, will have found in the acquisition a pure and life- long joy. Note on the Eeferei^ces to Critical Editions of the New Testa- ment. — Several words and phrases of the New Testament differ in the best MSS. from the reading of the ordinary text. In a few cases the variations are of some grammatical importance, and it has been necessary, therefore, to refer to them. These references have mostly been made by the help of the Critical Editions of the New Testament published by J. J. Griesbach (1796- 1806); by Dr. Tischendorf, Leipsic, seventh ed., 1859; by Dr. Lachmann, Berlin (1842-1850) ; and by Dr. S. P. Tregelles (including as yet only the Gospels, the Acts, and the General Epistles), 1844-1861. MALYTICAL TAELE OF COISTTENTS. PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY. BECT. PAGE I. THE ALPHABET. Names, forms, and nmneral values of the letters 1 a. Notes on the Alphabet 2 3. The Vowels : (a) their pronunciation, long and short ... 2 (6) The diphthongs (regularly long) 2 (c) The "breathings" of initial vowels 3 (fZ) The "breathings "of initial p 3 (e) The lengthening of vowels in inflection 3 (/) Tae contraction of vowels. Table. Exercise 1. Vowel Contractions .... 4 {g) Diaeresis 4 (A) Hiatus, and the ways of avoiding it — 1. The nu sufifixed {v ecpeKKvorriKSy) 4 2. Elision (apostrophe) ....... 4 3. Crasis 5 4. The Consonants 5 (a) Division into mutes and liquids 5 (6) Classification of mutes 5 (c) The sibilant a; and its combinations . - ... 6 {d) Rules of consonant combination — 1. Labials or gutturals, with c 6 2. Labials or gutturals, with a dental .... 6 3. Dentals before s, cua^pSs, Ka\6s, fidyas ... .43 44. Declension of comparatives in -icov (fielCwv) 43 45. Irregular and alternative comparisons 44 a.ya66s, koucSs, fiiKpSs, iroXvs ....... 44 46. Defective Comparatives and Superlatives .... 44 47. Emphatic Methods of Comparison 44 Exercise 7. Adjectives for Practice .... 45 NUMERALS 46 48. The Cardinal Numbers . 46 (a) Signs of numeration ^ . . 46 (6) Disused letters as numeral signs 46 {c) Composite numerical expressions 46 49. Declension of the cardinal numbers 46 elr, S60, rpels, reaaapes 46 50. The Ordinal Numbers 47 51. Table of Cardinals and Ordinals, and Remark . . 47 Distributive Numbers 49 Exercise 8. Numbers : Numerical symbols, and phrases for translation . • 50 5» ETYMOLOGY. XV CHAPTER IV.— PRONOUNS. 8ECf. PAOB 53. PERSONAL PRONOUNS 51 1. Substantive-personal ("personal") 51 First person, iydl>, rjixels ; second, . . . . .5.3 (e) toioDtos, roTovTOSy rr}\iKovTos . . . . ..54 58. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN .54 (a, b) OS, t}, 8 ; (c, d) offris, oa-irep, Haye 54 (e) Relatives of quality, quantity, number, degree . . .55 59. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 55 (a) The simple Interrogative, ris ; ri; 55 (6) Correlatives of quality, q\xantity, number, degree . . .55 (c) Direct interrogatives in indirect construction . . .56 (d) Interrogatives properly indirect 56 60. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS . . . . . .56 (a, b) The ordinary Indefinite, ns, and negative compound . . 56 (c) The old Indefinite, 6 Selya 56 61. DISTRIBUTIVE PRONOUNS 56 (a) &\\os, (6) trepos, (c) aAArjAwj/, {d) (Kaaros . . . .56 62. Table of Correlative Pronouns 67 CHAPTER v.— THE VERB. THE VOICES 58 Four things predicated by the Verb 68 Threefold modification of the verbal stem- 58 Active, Middle, Passive ......... 58 THE MOODS 58 Four Modes or Moods 58 J. The Indicative, and its use 58 2. The Imperative .. . . .. . . . , . 58 The Subjunctive . . . . . . . . 69 6 >* XVI ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTEN'l'S. 8F.CT. PAOF 64.. 4. The Optative (properly a division of the Subjunctive) . 59 5. Interrogative Forms 59 0. The Infinitive, \ ^ ,. . . , 7. The Participles, 1 Pa^icipiah ..... 59 ^5- THE TENSES .60 Time and State jointly expressed 60 Nine possible Tenses. Scheme 60 Seven actual Tenses (in common use, six) . . . . .60 "Principal" and "Historical" Tenses 60 Arrangement of Tenses. Tenses oi Xl'ca 60 66. NUMBER AND PERSON 61 Gj. The Two Conjugations .61 Remark on the Greek and English typical forms . . . .61 68. The Verbal Stem . . 61 How ascertained : affixes and suffixes 61 69. Augment and Reduplication 62 (a) Augment in the historical tenses, indicative . . . .62 1. The syllabic augment — with initial consonants . . 62 2. The temporal augment — with initial vowels . . .62 (6) Reduplication in the perfect tenses throughout . . .62 An initial consonant repeated, with e 62 An initial vowel lengthened (like temporal augment) . . 62 (c) Augment and reduplication in compound verbs . . .62 70. Inflexional Terivhnations 6.1 {a) Denoting voice, mood, tense, number, and person . . . G.'{ (6) Personal endings originally fragments of pronouns . . 63 Normal forms 63 71. Tense-characteristics (consonant) 63 Active Future and First Aorist, , ireldu 86 85. Modification of the Present (and Imperfect) 90 (a) The stem of the Present not always the stem of the Verb . 90 1. Labial verbal stems, that add t 90 2. Guttural verbal stems, that change the stem-consonant to (TO- or C • • . . . . . . .90 3. Dental verbal stems, that change the stem-consonant to C CO (ft) All other tenses formed from the verbal stem . . .90 (c) Vowels changed to diphthongs in short stem-syllables . . 91 Here the Future and Perfect formed from the Present stem 91 85. The Secondary Tenses of modified Verbs 91 In these Tenses, the simple verbal-stem always appears . .91 87. The Second Aorist .91 Conjugated like the Imperfect Indicative (in other moods as Present) 92 Ilhistrations from (pvy- {(pevyw), rvir- [rinrroo) . . .92 Active, Middle, and Passive 92 Note on Accentuation 92 88. The Second Future (Passive) 93 Illustration from tutt- {tvtttw) 93 89. The Second Perfect (Active) > . 93 Illustration from irpay- (irpdaaw) 93 ft 2 •lu AJ^ALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. SECT. 90. 92. 93- 94. 95- 96. 97- 98. PAOB General Rules for the Second Tenses 93 1. In what verbs they do not occur 93 2, 3. Seldom found in First Tenses in the same verb, except in Passive 93 4. First and Second Perfects, Active 94 Exercise 11. On mute Verbs . . . . .94 Liquid Verbs. Special Rules 94 (a) Present stem mostly modified 95 (6) Future Active and Middle, contracted 95 (c) First Aorist Active and Middle 95 {d) Perfect Active, variations 95 (e) Perfect passive, variations . 95 Paradigms of Liquid Verbs 96 d77cAXo>, Kpivu), aipw . . . . . . . . . 96 Exercise 12. On liquid Verbs 100 Notes on the Tenses. [These Sections, to the close o/§ 99, dealing chiejly with minute variations and seeming irregularities in par- ticular verbs, may be omitted in the first study of the book.^ . . 101 The Present and Imperfect. I. The Present .... 101 1-4. Details of modification, as § 85 101 5. Modifications of pure and impure stems by v, ye, av . . 101 6. Alternative stems, consonant and e- 102 7. Inchoative forms in aK- or ktk- 102 8. Reduplicated stems 102 II. The Imperfect 103 Peculiarities of Augment 108 Double p-. Double augment. Attic augment in ^- . , 103 The Second Aorist, Active and Middle 103 Contains the simple verbal stem 103 (Reduplicated Second Aorist. Change of short stem-vowel) . 103 The Vowel Aorist, as of Second Conjugation .... 103 The Future, Active and Middle 104 (a) Lengthening or otherwise of pure stems .... 104 (6) The Attic Future of Verbs in -iS {iCa>) 105 (c) The digammated future of verbs in «f- (ew) . . . . 105 {d) Future in middle form, with active meaning .... 105 The First Aorist, Active and Middle 106 (a) Connection of Aorist with Future stem .... 106 (1) In pure and mute ; (2) in liquid verbs . . . .106 (6) Peculiarities of Augment 106 Note on Accentuation 107 The Aorists and Futures Pa.ssive 107 {a) Modified like the Perfect Passive 107 ETYMOLOGY. XIX SECT. 98. 99. 103, [O4, [O5, 106 107 108 [O9. St (6) Vowel stem-endings, lengthened, shortened, or with a (c) Transposition of vowel and liquids in short roots {d) Change of a weak vowel into a . . . (e) First and Second Tenses seldom in the same verb Notes on Irregularities of Augment, and on Accentuation Perfect and Pluperfect .... (a) Varieties in reduplication 1. e- before a double consonant 2. itXficpa from \a3- (Ao^jSaVcu) . 3. Double reduplication and augment 4. Pluperfect generally omits augment (6) Third person plural Perfect Active in -av (c) The Second Perfect active : its special sense {d) The Pertect Passive : its peculiarities . (e) The Future Perfect passive (or mid. ) Note on accentuation DEPONENT VERBS .... Active and Passive, as determined by the Aor: IMPERSONAL VERBS . Their use ...... List and usual forms of the chief Impersonals DEFECTIVE VERBS Originally caused by redundancy Principal Defective Verbs and their Paradigms aipew, epxo/J-ai, iadiw, Spdw, rpext^, >, (iirov . Exercise 13. On the Detective Verbs THE SECOND CONJUGATION, or Verbs in -^t The chief peculiarity of these Verbs Future, First Aori^t, and Perfect like Verbs in -w Modifications of the Verbal Stem .... (a) Vowel of a pure stem lengthened [h) Eeduplication prefixed .... (c) The syllable -w- [-vw-) affixed . {d) Two classes thus formed . . . . First Class— Paradigms in two divisions . First divmon—rQg\x\a,Y forms . . • . Paradigms of 'iffTnixi, ridijixi, Si8«/At Eemarks on the Paradigms .... 1. First Aorist Active, with -«- {riBujixi, SiScc/xi) 2. Peculiarities in augment of iVttj/xj 3. Active Aorists of 'iarriixi — their diJBference 4. The verb crr'fjKca ..... List of Verbs in this division . XX >\nai:ytical tahle of contents. BECT. 109. III. 112. 113. 114. 116. J 1 7. A-stems : a. Active ; h. Deponent E-stems : I)e])onent only .... Second Division— Stems ca- (cifii), <(67^t), i{'irifMi) Conjugation of ilfil ((hai), to be . i, 6*/i' (^f *'«*)> io go ,, 'hn-i in its compound alr)ixi Second Class — Verbs in -vu/j.i or -vw^i liemarks ....... Paradigms of hdKWjxi and (jcwufxi Ilemarks on Paradigms New Testament Verbs like SfiKuvjui . New Testament Verbs like '^uvvvfii A-stems E-stems O-stems Exercise 14. On the Verbs in -^i Exercise 15. General, on the Verbs (from Exercise 16. Short Sentences i. The Beatitudes ..... ii. Parts of John i. . .... iii. Selected Sentences .... r\GE . 124 . 125 . 125 . 126 . 127 . 128 . 130 . 130 . 130 . 134 . 134 . 134 . 134 . 135 . 1.35 . 135 2Thess.). 136 . 136 . 137 . 138 . 139 CHAPTER VI.— PKEPOSITIONS. 118. THE THREE CASES: general relations of place, &c. . 140 Prei^ositious extend these relations indefinitely . . . 140 They may govern the Genitive, Dative, or Accusative ; one, two, or all 140 119. Prepositions Governing the Genitive only, avri, airS, ^k {H), T^pi 140 120. Prepositions Govehning the Dative only, cV, avv . . 141 121. Prepositions Governing the Accusative only, avd, ds. . 141 122. Prepositions Governing the Genitive and Accusativk, 5ia, KOT(£, /iCTCt, vep'i, VVfp, vwo . . . . . . .141 123. Prepositions Governing the Genitive, Dative, and Accu- sative, ivi, irapd, -rpSs ]42 124. Synoptical Table of the Prepositions . . . .142 125. Note on the various meanings of the Prepositions . . . . 143 CHAPTER VII.— ADVERBS. 12O. Adverbs in their Origlnal Form, from SuBSTAyxivEs 144 ETYMOLOGY. XXI SPTT. 126. 127. 128. 129. 13c. 133- 134. («) As an Accusative Noun, Adjective, or Pronoun. (b) As a Dative ,, ,, (c) As a Genitive ,, ,, {d) As a Preposition, with its Case .... (e) Old Case-eudings in -dev, -61, and -Se . Adverbs from Adjectives (in -us) .... Comparison of Adverbs Peonominal Adverbs. Table, with Correlatives NuMEEAL Adverbs (in -kis or -aKts .... Adverbs from Verbs Ancient verbal forms, S^vpa, SeSre .... Derivatives from Verbs in t'fw Adverbs from Prepositions (or in -u)) . Prepositive Adverbs (" improper Prepositions Negative Adverbs, ov and fx-f} . List PAG« 144 144 144 144 144 145 145 14G 147 147 147 147 147 147 148 135- 36. 137- 138. CHAPTER VIII.— CONJUNCTIONS AND PARTICLES. Meaning of the word Particles . '. 150 Classification of Conjunctive Particles 150 1. Conjunctions of Aknexation 150 Comparison 150 Disjunction 151 Antithesis 151 Condition 151 Cause 151 iNiS-ERENCE 151 Intention or Result . . . .151 (a) Particles of Emphasis, ye, 5e, -vep, -toi ..... 151 (6) Particles of Interrogation, €<, ij, S.pa 151 Interjections 152 (a) Natural instinctive sounds 152 (6) The Interjection rSe, iSotJ! 6e7iO?(£./ 152 CHAPTER IX.— ON THE FORMATION OF WORDS. [CJiapters IX., X., XL, XII., may be omitted in the first reading o/tJtebook] 139. 1. ROOTS, with primary, tei-tiary, &c., formations . . . 153 2. Classes of Words .153 3. Modification of Stem -endings 154 XXll ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. SECT. , PAOK 140. Classes of Substantives 154 (a) First Declension 154 1. Masculine, in -ttjs 154 2. Feminine, in -'a, -ouvvn 154 (6) Second Declension 154 1. Masculine, in -1x05 154 2. Neuter, in -rpov, -iov {-dpiov, -iliov) .... 155 3. Masculine and Feminine Diminutives, -ktkos, icTKr] . 155 (c) Third Declension 155 1. Masculine, -cvs, rip, Tcep ...... 155 2. Feminine, - The Genitive .... Primarily signifying motion from . Moditications, 1 — 7 I, Genitive of origin After Substantives, to denote the source, or author After Verbs of sense, or mental affection (1) Of sense, as hearing, taste, touch (2) Of affection, as desire, caring for, despising (3) Of remembrance a,nd forgetting . After Verbs of accusation, condemnation, &c After Verbs and Adjectives oi plenty, want, fulnes, II. Genitive of separation or ablation After Verbs of separation, removal^ hindrance, &c &c 219 219 219 219 219 219 220 220 221 221 222 222 223 223 223 224 224 224 224 225 225 225 225 225 226 226 227 228 228 228 229 229 XXviii ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. BE(,T. , PARE *53* Gemtive ot comparison 229 (1) After Verbs . .229 (2) After Adjectives in the Comparative Degree . . 230 254. III. Genitive of Possession 230 After Substantives, " the Possessive Case " . . . . 230 jrr The Genitive Personal Pronouns so used . . . 231 2r6. Words of kindred, &c., omitted before Possessive, i — 7 231 257. Attributive Possessive Genitive . . . . . 232 258. Special Possessive phrases 232 259. The Genitive of Apposition 233 260. Position of the Genitive 233 (a) Generally after the governing Substantive . . 233 (b) Instances where the Genitive j^recedes . . . 234 261. IV. Genitive of Partition 234 262. After Partitive -4 c^/eciivea 234 Pronouns 235 Nmnerals . . . 235 Superlatives 235 263. Aiter Verba oi partaking , 235 264. After Verbs of taking hold of, attaining, &c. . . . 235 Different usage of Active and Middle .... 235 265. Aiiev Adverbs of time 230 266. Partitive Phrases of Time or Place 230 267. Partitive Genitive after Verb, to he 236 268. V. Genitive of Objoet 237 May be expressed by various Prepositions ; Illustrations . 237 269. Phrases that may be Possessive or Objective . . . 238 270. VI. Genitive of Relation 239 In respect of, as shown by the context ; Illustrations . . 239 271. After -4 c//ecje.s5, 7i? e Gong) 8 Theta 6orS th 9 Iota I L i 10 Kappa K K k 20 Lambda A X I 30 Mu M A* m 40 Nu N V n 50 Xi r: f X 60 Omicron O (short) 70 Pi n TT sometimes ZtT P 80 Rho p pov q r 100 Sigma s a final s s 200 Tau T r sometimes 1 t 300 TJpsIlon T V u 400 Phi 4> * ph 500 CM X X Ch (guttural) 600 Psi (long) 800 2 notes ox the alphabet — the vowels. [§ 2. 2. Notes on the Alphabet. a. The word Alphabet is derived from the names of the first two letters, alpha, beta. The forms of the Greek letters, which, it will be seen, greatly resemble those of our own language (the Roman letter), are originally modified from the Phoenician. h. The second forms of certain letters are used interchangeably with the first, but less frequently. Those of gamma and tau are almost obsolete. The final s, besides being always employed at the end of words, is often used in the middle of compound terms when a part of the compound ends with sigma. Thus, nposcpepto. c. For an explanation of the numeral use of letters, and espe- cially of omissions in the list, see § 48. 3. The Yowels. The vowels are a, e, rj, l, o, '.", o), a. In this country they are generally pronounced according to the English sounds. The Continental pronunciation of a, tj, i, is undoubtedly the more strictly correct ; but the matter is of little practical importance. Absolute conformity to the ancient mode is unattainable, and it is most convenient to adopt the method of pronunciation current among scholars of our own country. H and w are long vowels. Care must be taken to distinguish them from the short c and o. Thus, fxev is pronounced like the English men ; fxrju, like mean. In tou, the o is prouounced as in on ; in rcov, as in own ; a, i, v, may be either long or short. b. The diphthongs are at, av, ei, ev, ot, ou, pronounced as in Eng- lish ; also a, 77, o) (or, with capitals. At, Ht, Qt), where the t occurs with a long vowel, and is not pronounced, being, therefore, written underneath the vowel (excepting in the case of capitals), 8iid called iota subscript. It will be important to note this in the declension of nouns and the conjugation of verbs. Hv is pronounced like ev, eu ; and vi like tM. §3,(?.] THE VOWELS. 3 c. Every vowel, when standing as the first letter of a word, has what is called a breathing over it, written as an apostrophe, either turned outwards, as (') or inwards, as (* ). The former is termed the soft breathing, and shows that the vowel is simply to have its own sound ; the latter the hard, and is equivalent to the English h aspirated. To note the latter is most necessary for correct pro- nunciation. Thus o, rj must be pronounced ho, he. The initial v is always aspirated. So vnep, huper. d. At the beginning of a word, the consonant (or semivowel) p always takes the aspirate, becoming rh. When two p's come toge- ther in the middle of a word, the aspirate and soft breathing are successively employed. Thus peco, rhed ; app-qros, arrhetos. When a word begins with a diphthong, the breathing is placed upon the second letter : avrov, auton ; avrov, hauton. e. In the lengthening of vowels for purposes of inflection or derivation, a becomes d, or more generally r\ ; € becomes t], or €i ; T, V, become respectively i, ii ; o becomes «, or ov. /. Two vowels, or a vowel and a diphthong, occurring together in different syllables are often contracted into one, according to the following Table : — followed by ... a e rj o co at €l r] ot w ov a becomes aaa(Dcoaqa(aiiLiOi € „ a or r] €L f] ov CO rj et rj ol w ov „ (ti OU 60 ov 0) (O OL* OL OL

, 8 (see § 4, b). Thus, diro alrcov becomes cztt' avTcov, and OTTO eavTa)U, d(j) eavrcov j SO for fjieTo. dXkT]\a)V, fier dXXrjXciiVj but for fxera rjfxcov, fxed^ rjjxcov ', and for avrX oiu, dvB' hv. This elision was, in classical Greek poets, used much more fre- quently in words ending in a, €, i, o ', and hence, in one ])assage of the New Testament, in a poetical quotation, the adjective xpwt^ suffers this elision (1 Cor. xv. 33), XPW^' oixCklai. 3. Crasis. — An hiatus is sometimes prevented by a Crasis (lit. a " mixing "), or the union of the two words ; the vowels forming a long vowel, or diphthong. This takes place but rarely, and only when the former word is very short and closely connected with the latter. The breathing of the vowel in the second word is retained, to mark the fusion, and is then called a Coronis. Thus, for to. avrd, the same things, ravrd is sometimes written ; for Kal ey-sounds. ^-sounds, ^-sounds. The guttural -y is pronounced, before a ^-sound or |, like the nasal ng. Thus, dyyeXos, ang-gelos (the second y, as always, being Iiard) \ dyKvpoj ang-kura. c. 2 is the simple sibilant, which, in composition with a j9-sound, gives >/^ = ir X) being double letters. d. The following eight rules must be carefully observed, as they relate to the changes which are imposed by the necessities of oi-thography on the conjugation and declension of words, and will explain much hereafter that would otherwise be found very perplexing. 1. As above, a labial followed by » rv-KTOwn. §4, C?.] COMBINATIONS AND CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 7 6. A sharp mute before an aspirated vowel is changed into the cor- responding aspirate. Sometimes this change will take place when the mute occurs at the end of one word, and the vowel at the beginning of the next. Thus, a(t>' &v for air' &v ; ovx 6pao> for ovk Space. 7. When two consecutive syllables of the same word begin with an aspirate, the former often loses its aspiration. Thus, Qpixos is changed into rpixos ; and exf into ex** ^^^* afl&xes generally lose their aspi- ration in preference to the stem, whether they are placed first or last ; as Ti-de-ri, for ei-Be-Oi, where the last syllable is a mere adjunct to the root. 8. No consonant can end a Greek word, except v^ p, tr, f, 4' ; the last two being compounds of s. The preposition 4k before a consonant, and the negative adverb ovk before a vowel, are apparent exceptions ; hut, having no accent, they may be counted as parts of the following words. Exercise 2.— On the Combination of Consonants. Bule 1. Write down the proper forms of ypa^a^i, vlttto-o), Xeyaov, €;(o-cj, (rTp€Tai, \e\eyrai, ^e^pexraij crpi^drjv, irkeKdrjvai, "kiyO-qvai, eTrepTrdrjv. 4. Of T€Tpt^pai, yeypacjipai, ^e^pexpai, Trenfidpai, r}wrpai, neirXeKpai. 5. Of TravTToXvs, (rvv(f)T}pi, crvvyvcoprj, avvxaipco, (rvvCvyosj (rvvarpa TioiTTjs '} also of rravTSj Xvovtctl, XvdevraiP, 5. Changes of Consonants. Some other changes of consonants may be noticed, though they do not so invariably conform to general rules as the preceding. 1. Assimilation. — The labials ir, p, <}> before (ji, and v before the other liquids, are regularly assimilated to the following letters; i. e. changed into the same letter (see § 4 cf, 5). Sometimes a latter consonant is assimilated to a former one; as, oXXvpi for ok-vvpi. 2. Duplication. The letter p is regularly doubled when a vowel is placed before it. Thus, aTro-piWo) becomes anoppiiTTay. d 8 CONSONANT CHANGES — THE ACCENTS. [§ 5' Sometimes X is doubled, to compensate for the loss of a vowel ; as, fjioXXov for fxaXiov, ayyeXXo) for ayytXeco. In Comparatives and in verbs, . In some words, I appears instead of s. The acute and grave are placed a/ter the breathing, and the circumflex over it; as os, ovtos. The acute on the last syllable becomes grave, unless the word ends H sentence; except ris the interrogative, which always keeps its acute. Every unaccented syllable is said to have the grave torie; ? G, b.'] THE ACCENTS. 9 but tlie grave accent is not marked, except where it stands for a final acute. c. Words are called, with reference to accent — Oxytone (lit. sharp- toned), when the acute is on the last syllable, as {kirls ; Paroxytone, when the acute is on the penultiraa (last but one), as ovtco^ ; Fro- paroxytone, when the acute is on the antepenultiina (last but two), as <^tXtof ; Ferispomenon (lit. drawn-out), when the circumflex is on the last syllable, as avrov ; Froperispomcnon, when the circum- flex is on the penultima, as ovroi. The circumflex cannot be farther back than the penultima. If the last syllable of the word contains a long vowel, the acute accent must be on the last or last but one, the circumflex only on the last. Should, therefore, the final syllable of a proparoxytone be lengthened by declension, the accent is thrown forward, i. e. the word becomes paroxytone. Thus, avdpconos, au6pa>ir(ov. But if the final syllable of a properispomenon is lengthened, the accent is changed to the acute, i.e. the word becomes paroxytone. Thus, Xi^eprluos, "Ki^fpTivav. It should be observed that the circumflex accent is always the result of contraction, i.e. of an acute and grave ( ' '' ) — not of a grave and acute ( ^' ) — as will be shown under Etymology. d. Enclitics are words which merge their accent into the word immediately preceding, which are afiected as follows : — A pro- paroxytone or properispomenon takes an acute accent on the last syllable also. Thus, avOpconos ns, oIkos tis An oxytone that would otherwise (see above) take the grave accent retains the acute. Thus, fxadrjrrjs ns. Paroxy tones and perispomena show no alteration. e. Froclitics lose their accent in the words following. In an emphatic position, a proclitic becomes oxytone. Thus ov with a verb is not ; ov alone, no ! A proclitic followed by an enclitic is also oxytoned, as ov ns. The two may be written as one word. Special rules of accentuation will be given under the sections of Etymology. The learner is recommended to accentuate from the first, in writing Greek ; especially as the accent of very many words can only be known by acquaintance with the words themselves, and if neglected at first, will be extremely difficult to acquire afterwards. 10 ORTHOGRAPHY, GREEK AND ENGLISH. [§ 7. 7. On THE Transference of Greek Words into English. Most proper names, and some few other words, are literally transcribed from the one language into the other. The medium of transference is almost always the Latin, and therefore the ortho- graphy conforms to Latin rules. For the most part, the Greek letters are represented by the equivalents given (§ 1). The fol- lowing exceptions must, however, be noted : — K is always c, the letter k not being found in the usual Roman alphabet. Where the c would be soft in owiinary English pro- nunciation, it is generally so in Greek names, as Kvprjprj, Gyrene. In some words of infrequent use, good speakers sometimes deviate from this rule, saying, e. g. Aceldama, not Aseldama. The vowel v is represented by y, as ^vpla^ Syria. The diphthong at becomes ce, as Kaio-ap, Gcesar. Occasionally, the diphthong is made simply e ; so, Aiyu7rT(off), Egypt; Tpvtpaiva, Tryphena. The diphthong oi becomes ce, as #oi/3i;, Phcebe ; sometimes, as above, only e : thus, ^oivlkt], Phenice, The diphthong « becomes e or *, as AaodUcia, Laodicea ; evdreipa, Thyatira : sometimes (in practice) ?, as ^e\evK€ia, Seleucia. But the i ought really to be long, or long e; so Attalia. The diphthong ov appears as u^ as Aov*caf, Luke; or, before a vowel, as v, as, 2tXouai'd$-, Silvanus. The initial I before a vowel becomes «/, as lovbas, Judas. The initial P, always aspirated in Greek (§ 3,6^), is generally without the aspirate in English. Thus, 'Pa/SiSt, Rabbi. But 'Prjyiovj Rhegium ; *P68r], Rhoda ; and *PdSoy, Rhodes, are exceptions, being original Greek words. Changes in the terminations of these transferred words belong to Etymology. No rule can be given but usage why some should have their endings changed, while others are exactly transcribed. Occa- sionally, the same word appears in two forms. Thus, Marcus and Mark, Lucas and Luke. The learner is recommended to read carefully parts of the New Testament where many proper names occur, comparing the English witli the Greek. No better portion for the purpose could be found than Romans xvL § 8.] PUNCTUATION — READING LESSONS. 11 8. Punctuation. Four marks of punctuation are used for the division of sentences ; the comma, the colon, the period, and the note of interrogation. The comma ( , ) and the period ( . ) are like our own. In modem typography, it is very usual not to begin new sentences with capital letters; reserving these for proper names, for the com- mencement of quotations, and for the beginning of paragraphs. The colon (sometimes called semicolon) is expressed by a point above the line, thus ( • ). Interrogation is marked by a sign, after the question, resembling our semicolon ( ; ). Inverted commas, as marks of quotation, are sometimes, though rarely, employed in printed Greek. The Greek equivalent for &c., et ccetera, is in the initials k. t. X,, for Koi TCL XotTra, and the rest. The following sentence exhibits the different marks of punctu- ation (John ix. 40) : — Kai iLTTov avTw, Mj) koL fjfjiels rv(j)\oi ecTficv ; enrev avrois 6 'if/croCy, Ei TvcpXol ^re ovK av el^ere afiapriav' vvv de Xeyere, "Ort jSXeVo/ici'. r] oxr" ajxapria vficl>v fievei. READING LESSONS. I. Acts ii. 1-13. Write the following in Roman letters, carefully inserting the initial aspirate wherever it occurs, and discriminating between the long and the short o and e, as in Lesson III below : — Kal €V TO) avixirXrjpovcrOaL ttjv* rjixipav rrjs IlevTrjKoarrjs, 2 '^aav airavTes opLodvixabov CTrt to avro.f Kal eyivcro a^vo) €k. Tov ovpavov ^x^^ axTirep (pepofilvris irvorjs jSiaCas, kol eTrX?/- 3 p(i)(r€V okov TOV oIkov ov '^orav KaO-qiievoi. kol oiv virb rov ovpavov. revofxivrjs be rfjs ^oavq^ TavrriSf avvijKOe to ttXtjOos kol avvexyOr]' otl tJkovov eh 7 eKao-Tos Tj] ibia biaXeKTOi XaKovvTcav avT(0V' ^E^CaTauTO be TTavTes KOL edavfiaCov, XeyovTes irpbs aXXi^Xovs, Ovk Ibov 8 TTCLVTes ovToC* elcTiv ol XaXovvTes TaXiXaioL ; kol ttwj ■tj/j.e'is CLKOvoixev eKaa-Tos Trj ibia biaXeKTia rjfJL(oi> ev f] eyevvrjdrjfjLEV, 9 ndpOoL KOL MrjboL kol 'EAa/xtrat, koI ol KaTOLKOvvTes ttjv MeaoTTOTapLLav, 'lovbaCav re koI KaiTTraboKiav, Tlovrov Kal 10 T-qv ^kaiav, (i>pvyiav re Kal Ylap.v D. r(3 TTJ r(^ rots rats rots A. TOV TTIV TO TOVS ras t6. Accentuation. — The nominative, masculine and feminine, singular and plural, is proclitic ; the genitive and dative of both numbers are perispo- menon; the rest oxytone. 13. Indefinite Pronoun : anyy a certain^ a. Stem, tlv - SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. and F. N. M. and F. N. N. rts Tl rtz^es TLVa G. TWOS TLVOS TLVCOV TLVOiV D. TlVl TLVl TLCTL Ticri A. rti'a TL Tivas TLVa Accentuation.— The word is generally enclitic, as here given; the accent being regarded as transferred to the previous word (§5, d). When accented, the forms are oxytone, except the genitive plural, which ia perispomenon. Thus, rivSs, ncri, tivS>v. 14. A comparison of the two forms now given will show four particulars, applicable to all nouns, adjectives, and pro- nouns ; and, therefore, at the outset, important to remember. a. Neuters have but one form in each number for the nomina- tive and accusative. Perhaps this might have arisen from things without life being regarded as objects only. Neuters plural, nominative and accusative, always end in a (short), except when contracted, as reixr] for Tei'xea (Heb. xi. 30). b. The dative singular always ends in t ; though, where the letter preceding is a long vowel, the iota is subscript. c. The genitive plural always ends in «v. d. Masculine and neuter forms are always alike in the genitive and dative. 18 GENDER AND DECLENSION. [§ 15. 15. Gender of Substantives. General Eules, Many names of inanimate objects ai'e of the masculine or femi- nine gender. This fact, no doubt, arose from the habit of personi- fication, common in early ages. The English, indeed, is the only great language in which masculine and feminine, with almost undeviating strictness, denote male and female. The French idiom, in the opposite extreme, entirely rejects the neuter. Considerable difficulty, therefore, is felt by beginners in deter- mining the gender of many nouns. In some cases, it will be neces- sary to consult the Lexicon ; in others, the termination of the word will be a guide, as is shown under the several declensions. The following rules, however, are of general application : — a. The names of males are Masculine* ; so of rivers and winds, which were regarded by the early Greeks as gods. b. The names of females are Feminine*; so also of trees, countries, islands, most towns, and abstract terms. c. Diminutives in -ov are Neuter, even though the names of persons. To the class of neuters also belongs the verbal substan- tive, or infinitive verb, with indeclinable nouns generally. 16. Declension of IToxjns Substantive. There are three leading types of inflection, under one or other of which all declinable nouns may be classified. These are called the Three Declensions, and, as has been stated, the model of each may be traced in the Article and the Indefinite Pronoun. The First Declension corresponds with the feminine of the article, ^. The Second Declension corresponds with the masculine or neuter of the article, 6, to. The Third Declension corresponds with the form of the indefinite pronoun, ris, tL A model of each declension is here given. • The generic names of animals are sometimes eommoriy i.e., of either maae. or fern, gender, according to circumstances (so also va7sy child) -^ more fre- quently epic(Bne, i.e., of one gender, used indififerently for both sexes. Th'ia in Greek, VHtlfiB always zuasc., fox always fern., even in Luke xiii. 32. §16.] LEADING FORMS OF THE DECLENSIONS. 19 First Declension. ttvXt], a gate. Stem, irvXa- t SINGULAR. PLURAL. N. irvXr], a gate (subj.) irvXaif gates {subj.) G. -TT^Ar^j, of a gate TTvXcav, of gates D. TrAr/, to a gate TrvXats, to gates A. TTvX-qv, a gate (obj.) TTvXaSy gates (obj.) V. irvkr], gate ! TTvkaLy gates ! N. G. D. A. V. Second Declension. avOpoairoSf a man. Stem, avOpcoiro SINGULAR. MpcoTTosj a man (subj.) avOputirov^ of a man avdp(aTT(D, to a man avOpoaiiov, a man {obj.) avOpcDire, man ! PLURAL. avOpcoTTOL, men {subj.) avOpcoTToov, of men avdpcaTTOLs, to men avOpcaiTovs, men {obj.) av6p(OTT0L, men ! N. G. D. A. V. Accentuation. — The reason why the place of the accent varies in the genitive and dative is explained, § 6, c. Third Declension. TTOLs, a child, boy, servant. Stem, ircuS" (Accent of this word irregular. ) SINGULAR. iraiSf a child {subj.) iraihos, of a child 7rai8t, to a child iralha, a child {obj.) TTOL, child ! PLURAL. TTOibes, children (subj,) TraibcDv, of children Trato-t, to children TTatSas, children {obj.) iralbes, children ! These three paradigms having been committed to memory, the several declensions, with their rules of formation, their analogies and variations, may now be more particularly discussed. A certain likeness will, on examination, be detected between the First and Second, especially in the plural number. The plural terminations may be set side by side, thus : — 20 THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. [§16. N. and V. First Declension, -ou G. J, -«v D. „ ais A. „ as Second Declension, -oi „ -«v „ -OlS „ -ovs In the former, the predominant vowel is evidently a; in the latter, o. So in the singular, the first declension in the dative has Tj (for a lengthened, § 3, e) ; the second, w (for o lengthened). In the accusative, the first has av, or tjv ; the second, ov. The two may accordingly be discriminated as the A declension and the O declension ; a distinction which the further examination of their structure makes yet more plain. Both, again, are distinguished from the third by admitting the termination which marks the case into the last syllable of the word ; while the latter adds the termination as a distinct syllable. The First and Second Declensions are, on account of this last peculiarity, called the Inseparable^ or JParisyllabic ; the Third, the Separable, or Imparisyllabic declension. All three admit, however, of many variations, as will now be shown in detail. 17. First (inseparable), or A Declension. This declension includes both masculine and feminine nouns. The stem invariably ends in a. As the feminine has already been given as containing the typical form, that may be placed first. 18. Feminine Paradigms. First Declension. rjyiipa, day. bo^a, opinion. Stem, rjfjLepa- Stem, So^a- SINQULAR. PLURAL. SimULAR. PLURAL N. r]fxipa 7j/xepat bo^a bo^ai G. rifiipas r)ix€pv J). TLlxfj Ti/xats (TKia CTKLOLS A. TLfxriv rt/xas (TKldV o-Kias V. TLlll] rt/xat (TKtci (TKLaC REMARKS. a. The stem- ending a becomes i] in the nominative and accu- sative singular whenever preceded hy a consonant ; except by the liquid p, the double consonants, or va ; Kr)(f)as, Gejjhas, gen. Kjy^a ; Bapm/3as, gen. Bapvd^a ; 'lovdas, Judah or Judas, gen. 'lovda. The accent of the genitive corresponds with that of the nominative. But ^Avbpeas, Andrew, makes 'AvSpeouj 'Haatas, Isaiah, 'Ho-atov. These names are from the Hebrew, with the exception of 'Avdpeas. h. In Acts V. 1, we find 2a7r(j)clpr], dative of the proper name Sapphira ; and in Acts x. 1, a-Trelprjs is used as the genitive of a-ne'ipa, cohort — in both cases contrary to the rule in § 19, a. Similar variations from the regular form are found in good MSS. in the case of other substantives. 21. Second (inseparable), or O -Declension. This declension contains masculine, feminine, and neuter nouns. The stem invariably ends in o, to which -s is added to form mascu- line and feminine nominatives, and -v to form the neuter. 22. Masculine and Feminine Paradigms. Declension. Second \6yos, word, masc. Stem, Xoyo- SINGULAR. FLURAL. N. Xoyos \6yoL G. Xoyov K6y(t)v D. Koyco XoyoLs A. Xoyov koyovs V. Xo'ye Xoyoi 6b OS, way, fern. Stem, 6 do- SINGULAR. PL URAL. obos oboL obov ob&v 66(3 oboLS 6b6v dboijs 6b4 6boC 24 THE SECOND DECLENSION. [§'22. EEMAEKS. a. As before noticed, tliJs paradigm corresponds with that of the first declension, o- being substituted for a-. The difierences are, that in the nominative singular the stem-vowel is not lengthened, and that the vocative singular changes this vowel into e In the accusative plural, the termination ovs is for -ovs (§ 4, d, 5), as in the first declension -ds is for -avs; in each case, s being added to the accusative singular. Accentuation. — The remarks on the first declensiou are mostly apph- cable. The syllable accented in the nominative retains the accent throughout wherever possible ; oxytones becoming perispomena in the genitive and dative of both numbers. The genitive plural of other nouns is not, as in the first declension, perispomenon. In the nomina- tive plural, the termination oi is treated with reference to the accent as a short syllable. 23. Neuter Paradigm. Second Declension. (TVKov, fig-tree. Stem, crvKO- PLURAL. (TVKa aijKOiV (TVKOiS (TVKa (TVKa REMARKS. The only difference between this paradigm and that of the masculine and feminine is that already stated, § 14, a. The accu- sative of all neuters is the same form with the nominative and vocative ; and in the plural these cases end in a. Accentiiation, — For the accentual changes in the declension of V D. {void) V(} [voois) vols A. (voov) VOVV (voovs) vovs V. iyoe) VOV (vool) vol Exercise 4.— Nouns of the Second Declension, for Practice. Selected from the *' Sermon on the Mount." 1. Masculine. ab€\(p6s3 brother \vkos, wolf ^X^pos, enemy avOpcaiTos, man tjXlos, sun a/x/iios, sand 2. Feminine. vofjLos, law SipOaXfjLos, eye iroTafjLos, river 6oKos, beam 26 THE THIRD DECLENSION. [§26. 3. Neuter. h(£>pov, gift €pyov, work fiirpov, measure KpCvov, lily TTpo/BaTov, sheep T^Kvov, child 26. Third (or Separable) Declension. Nouns in this declension are masculine, feminine, or neuter. Their varieties necessitate the giving of several paradigms, although all are reducible to a simple form, already illustrated in the inde- finite pronoun tls, and shown in the two nouns declined below. The one essential thing, in this declension especially, is to know the stem^ which may end in a consonant (impure, mute or liquid), or in a vowel (pure). From this the nominative, as well as every other case, is derived ; but the stem-ending is better seen in the genitive, which, in Vocabularies and Lexicons, is therefore given with the nominative. The termination of the genitive singular in this declension is always os. Take this away, and the remaining part of the word is tlie stem. 2i7, General Paradigm of the Third Declension. M. or F. N. al(i)v, age, duration, masc. prjixa, word Stem, alcov Stem, prjIXOLT^ SINQULAR. PLUJIAT.. SINGULAR, PLURAL. N. alcav alcoves prjfia pruiara G. aicovos ai(avci)V prjpLaTos pTJfxdTOiV d. aloiVL aL(io(n(v) prifiaTL prip.acn[v) A. aloova alcovas pijfxa priiiara V. aidiv alcoves prjtia pT^fiara § 28.j the third declension. 27 28. Terminations of this Declension. These paradigms are essentially alike in termination, setting aside the invariable differences between neuter and other forms (§ 14, a). We thus find that the terminations of the third declension are, in the singular — Genitive, os, appended to the stem. Dative, I, also appended to the stem. Accusative, a. This, however, is realli/ a substitute for v, which we find in the first and second declensions, and which in pure stems often appears in the third also. Vocative, the stem, subject to necessary modifications (§ 4, d, 8), or like the nominative. In the PLURAL — Nominative, cs, appended to the stem. Genitive, wv, appended to the stem. Dative, o-i, added to the stem, with necessary modifications (§ 4, d, 1, 5). On the v €(})€\kv(ttik6u, see § 3, h, 1. Accusative, as, the a short or s added to the accusative singular. Compare the First and Second Declensions, § 22, a. Vocative, like the nominative. Accentuation. — The accented syllable of the nominative, as in other nouns, retains the accent throughout, wherever possible. For a special rule respecting monosyllables, see § 29. In the above paradigms, aid^y in the nominative is written for alwv. 29. Varieties in the Third Declension according TO STEM- endings. The stem of this declension may end in any consonant (except (I. and the double consonants, I, |, tj/) and in the vowels i and v. First Rule. — The most usual termination of the nominative singular is s added to the stem, in accordance with the orthographic law, § 4, c. 28 VARIETIES IN THE THIRD DECLENSION. [§ 29. Thus (1), a labial stem makes the nominative in i|r. Examples. "ApayJTf Arabian, from dpap-, gen. apa^os AWioylr, Ethiopian, „ alOioir-, gen. aWloiros (2) A guttural stem makes the nominative in g. Examples. (jAo^, flame, from <})Xoy-, gen. ^Xo^o's K77pu^, herald, „ kt^pvk-, gen. KJ]pvKos vv^, night, „ wkt-, gen. wktos Bpii, hair, „ Opix-, gen. rpix^s {§i,d,7.) (3) A dental stem drops the stem-termination before s. Examples. Trots, child, from iraiS-, gen. rraidos opvis, bird, „ 6pvi9-, gen. opvidos Xapis, favour t „ Xap^^-, gen. xapiros 68ovs, tooth, „ oSovT-, gen. 686vtos (§ 4, d, 5.) (4) Vowel stems add s simply. Examples. 7r6\is, city, from iroXi-, gen. noKeas, for 7r6kiog IxOvsyflsh, „ ixQv-, gen. Ixdvos Second Rule. — Stems ending in v and vt {generally), in p {almost always), and in s {invariably, except in neuters), form the nomi- native, by lengthening the vowel preceding the termination. Examples. Troififjv, shepherd, from 'iroi|i€v-, gen. Troifxtvos Xecoi/, lion, „ XcovT-, gen. Xeovros pfjTcopt orator, „ ^tjrop-, gen. prjTopog aldu>s, modesty, „ alSos-, (gen. aiSoVoy) The genitive of this last word is contracted by dropping the s between two short vowels, and combining themj alddos, aldovt, (See § 3,/, Table and Note.) § 29.] VARIETIES IN THE THIRD DECLENSION. 29 Certain nouns with the stem-ending p preceded by € are synco- pated, ^.e., omit this vowel in some of their cases. One, avf}py man^ dvcp-, in omitting €, inserts the letter 8 between v and p. (See ^b^5.) The dative plural of these nouns also adds a after p. (See the Paradigms.) Third Rule. — Stems in €v, av, ov, while adding s in the nomina- tive singular, according to the first rule, drop the v in the genitive singular and other cases, thus forming an apparent exception to the rule that the genitive gives the stem by taking away the termination os. The irregularity is only apparent, as the v of the stem is in reality the old consonant v (written in Greek f, and called, from its shape, digamma)^ which originally belonged to the genitive, like the other consonant stem-endings. Thus, ^oi}y, ox, pof-, gen. ^oFos, now written ^o6s. Some of the cases of these nouns are also contracted, as the paradigm will show. Stems in eu take a special form of the genitive singular, called the "Attic Genitive," ending in sws. Fourth Rule. — Neuter stems in €s change this termination in the nominative into -os, and suffer contraction in other cases by § 3,/. Example. — opos^ mountain, 5p6s-, gen. {opea-osy opeos) opovs, nomina- tive and accusative plural {opeaa, opea) oprj. (See Paradigm.) Fifth Mule. — Other neuter nouns, 'together with those masculines and feminines which hare liquid stems preceded by a long vowel, retain the stem in the nominative unchanged, save by the general orthographic law. Thus, alav, prjfxa, already given. The latter becomes prjp,a from py\v-o.r-, according to § 4, d, 8. Accenttuition. — ^Monosyllabic neuters are oxytone in all their dissyl- labic forms, except the genitive plural, which is perispomenon. Mascu- line and feminine monosyllables accent the penultimate in the accusative singular and nominative and accusative plural j in other cases follow the rule of neuters. so THIRD DECLENSION — PARADIGMS. [§ 30. 30. Paradigms illustrating the Five foregoing Eules. I. The letter s affixed to the stem. a. Consonant Stems {mute\ labial and guttural. N. G. d. A. V. "Apaxjr, Arabian Stein, 'ApajB- aiNQULAR. Apa\lr "Apa^os "ApajSi "Apafia "Apa^ PLURAL. "ApafS^s 'Apd^oiv "Apayj/iiv) "ApajSas Krjpv^, herald, masc Stem; KTjpvK" SINGULAR. Kripv^ KtJpVKOS K-qpVKL KTipvKa Kripv£ PLURAL. K7JpVK€S KripvuuiV KTlpV^liv) KTIpVKaS KTi]pVK€S For example of a dental stem (neuter), see Introductory Paradigm of the Declensions, § 16. The feminine noun ^apts {x'b^*-'^-), favour, makes ace. x^P'-^f f'^ei's, key, fern. (kXciS-) has ace. sing. KKelda ', ace. plui*. hy syncope and contraction, kXcis (Matt. xvi. 19 ; Rev. i. 18). b. YowEL Stems. ixdvsyfish, masc. Stem, IxOv SINGULAR. N. i)(dvs i)(dv09 lydvi lx6i PLURAL. ixdvciv l\6v(n{y) {iyQyas) lyOvs IxOvcs ttoKls, city, fern. Stem, ttoXl- SINGULAR. PLURAL. TToAts (TTO/Vecs) flToAets TTokccaS (Attic gen.) TTokeUiV (TToAet) 770 Act '7roAeo-t(r) ttoKlv (TToAeas) TTokeis TToAt (TTokees) iroXtti REMARKS. One neuter noun, a-ivam, vnustard (singular only), is declined like TToXts, excepting that the accusative is, of course, like the nom. Accentuation. — For accentual purposes, the genitive terminatioQ, €«s or €««/, in these nouns, is considered as one syllable^ and does not, there- fore, require the acute accent to be thrown forward. §30.] THIRD DECLENSION — PARADIGMS. ^31 II. The vowel of the "last syllable stem lengthened. TTOLixriv, shepherd, masc. Aecoz;, lion, masc. Stem, iroLixev- Stem, Aeoz/r- SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL. N. TTOLlXriV V;0LIJL€V€S X4(i}V XioVT€9 G. TTQilxivOS TlOlllivQiV XiovTos XeovTctiV D. TTOLllivL '1T01^€(Tl{v) XiovTi Xiov(n{v) A. TTOLfJiiva TTOLixivas XiovTa Xeovras V. TiOLfXriV 7:0LlJLiv€S Xi(ov AeWres albm, modesty, fei n. Stem, at&y- SINGULA R ONLY. N. alhcos G. {alb6((T) os) albovs D. (ai8o(cr' t) alboL A. {aib6{a) a) at6a) V. alb(os Syncopated !N"ou:^ ^s OF THIS Form. iraTrip, father. avrjp, man. Stem, Trarep- Stem, dpep- SINGULAR, PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL. N. irarrip Tiarepes avrjp avbp€S G. 'jraTpos iraripwv avbpos avbpcov D. irarpC liarpao-iiv) avbpC avbpa.(n(v) A. TTaripa Tiaripas avbpa avbpas V. ircLTcp TTaripes avep avbpes REMARK. To this class of syncopated nouns belong ii-qrqp, mother ; Svydrrjp, daughter ; yao-rrjp, belly. Aarrjp, star, has darpdo-i (y) in the dative plural, but is not syncopated in any other case. Accentuation. — These words are paroxytone in the cases that retain «, and throughout the plural (excepting avf)p, which is irregular). The syncopated cases of the singular are oxytone, and the vocative throws back its accent as far as possible. 32 THIRD DEC3LENSI0N — ^PARADIGMS. '.. Nouns in -avs, -cvs, -ovs. with original digamma. /3ao-iA.ev9, kincfy masc. Stem, ^acTLXeF' S/iV^eZ7ZAR. PLURAL. N. ^a(rL\€vs ((Baaikies) /Saa-ikeh G. jSacnkeais ^acnKioav I). (fiaa-LXi'C) ^ao-tXet ^a(nk^V(n{y) A. jSaaiXea ^aa-iXias V. ^aa-ikev (j3ao-iA.ees) j8ao-tXet$ ^ovs, oXf masc. Stem, iSof- S/JTffiZZ^iJ. PLURAL. N. ^oi;s ^oes G. /3oos jSocoi; D. ^ot /3oi;(rt(z;) A. ^ow (/3(;a9) ^oiJs V. /Sou /i^O€S REMARK. C§ 30. Nouns in -CVS form tlie accusative singular in -€a (the a lorvg) ; those in -avs and -ovs take v. AccentiuUion. — Nouns in -f"S are all oxytone in the nominative singular, and perispomenon in the vocative. IV. Neuter nouns in -os, from the stem ending €S- yivos, race. Stem, yeves' SINGULAR PLURAL. N. yivo^ {yive(a)a) yivq G. [yive{(T)o^) yevovs y€V€(tiv and yevQv D. (yiv€(p, KeSpeoi/, 'lfptx&. 32.] NOUNS OF THE THREE DECLENSIONS. 35 To this class may be referred the indeclinable neuters, irdaxa, pass- over ; aUepa, Strong drink (Luke i. 15). The last two are, in fact, but adaptations of Hebrew words, ^lara, jot (Matt. v. 18),''AX0a and S/zeya (Rev. i. 8), the names of Greek letters, are also treated as neuter nouns without inflection. Exercise 6.— Promiscuous List of Nouns, for Practice. *** The Genitive case is given, to show the Declension and the Stem. Learners should, wherever possible, infer the gender from the form. a^Tos, ov, m, eagle atixa, arcs, blood av6os, ovs, flower apviov, ov, lamb ^ovXr\, 7js, counsel yovevs, eos, parent boLKpv, vos, tear bivbpov, ov, tree bibda-Kakos, ov, teacher iXiTLs, Cbos,/. hope kopTYj, ijs, festival ^Hpi^brjs, ov, Herod I dvyaTrjp, rpos, daughter KaKia, as, vice Kiddpa, as, harp IxdcTTL^, iyos,f. scourge fiipos, ovs, part 6(f)Ls, €(os, m. serpent TToXiTrjs, ov, citizen iroi'os, ov, m. labour TTpaypia, aros, thing (jak-Kiy^, lyyos, trumpet (TTOfxa, aros, mouth copa, as, hour 36 ADJECTIVES. [§33. Chapter III. ADJECTIVES. 33. Adjectives in Greek foUow precisely the inflection of Substantives. Every declension, almost every form, re- appears, but in different combinations. In respect of form, adjectives are divided into three classes : — 1. Those which combine the first and second declensions. 2. Those which combine the first and third. 3. Those which follow exclusively the type of the thii-d In the first two, the form of the first declension is feminine. 34. First Form. Paradigms. (Stems, o- m. a- f. 0- n. ayaOo-, -a-, good. SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. F. l!i. M. F. N. N. ayaOos ayadri ayadov ayaOoL ayaOaC dyaOd G. ayaOov ayaOris ayaOov ayaOQv ayaOQv dyaOcov D. aya6(a ayaOfj ayaO^ ayaOoXs ayaOais dyaOols A. ayadov ayaOriv ayaOov ayaOovs ayaOds dyaOd V. ayadi ayaQi] ayaOov ayaOoL ayaOaC hyaOd All participles in .\uvos are dec] ihed like dyaOos. diKaio-y -a-. Just. N. bUaios biKaCa bUaLov bUaiOL bUaiai bUaia G. biKaCov biKaCas ^LKaCov biKaiiav biKaCcov biKaioav D. StKato) biKaia biKaico blKaLOLS biKaCais blKaCoLS A. hUaiov biKaCav bUatov bikatovs biKaCas bUaia V. bUau biKaia biKaie flLKpO'y H biKaiOL a-, little. bUataL biKaia N. fiLKpos flLKpd fJLLKpOV HLKpoC [MiKpaC fJLLKpd G. IXLKpOV fiLKpas pLLKpOV jXLKpOiV [llKp(dV fJLLKpOiV D. iiiKpq fXLKpa lllKp^ jLlUpOtS fJLLKpali /XlKpOtS A. iXLKpOV yuKp&v jXLKpOV fXLKpOVS [JLLKpds fXLKpd V. liiKpi fUKpd IXLKpOV pLlKpoC lUKpai fUKpd §34.] ADJECTIVES FIRST FORM. 37 REMARKS. a. The feminine singular of these adjectives, as will be seen in the above paradigms, is formed in strict analogy with the usage of the first declension. The rule is, that where the masculine has -os preceded by a vowel or p, the feminine ends in a long, which vowel is preserved through all the cases of the singular.' Os preceded by a consonant becomes i], which also runs through the singular. h. Several adjectives belonging to this First Form employ the masculine terminations for the feminine also, conforming thus throughout to the second declension. This is especially the case with polysyllables and compound words. But as there is no definite rule to distinguish these "Adjectives of Two Termina- tions " from those of three, it will be necessary in doubtful cases to consult the Yocabulary or Lexicon. c. Accentuation. — The rules in § 18 are strictly observed. Observe, however, that the feminine plural is not, like that of the first declension, necessarily perispomenon, but like the other cases, follows the stem of the word. Thus from ZiKaios, f. pi. gen. ^iKaiuv (the accent being thrown one syllable forward by the terminal long syllable (§ 5, a) ; but fjuKpSs makes fiiKpuv. 35. Contracted Adjectives of the First Form. Adjectives in co- and oo- belong to this class. The explanations given with Contracted Substantives (§ 24), and the scheme in § 3/ will sufficiently show the reason of each contraction. ■)(pvcr€0-, -a-, golden. By contraction, xpvcrovs (eos), "V i^v)* "ow (eoz;). SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. F. N. M. F. N. N. Xpvaovs XP'^^V Xpvcrovv Xpvo-o'i ■yjpva-aZ Xpvo-a G. Xpvcrov xpv(ri]s Xpvo-Qv Xpva&v yjivaSiV \pV(TQiV d. XpvcT^ Xpv(T^ XPV(T(? Xpvo'o'iS XpvaaLS Xpyaols A. Xpvo-Qvv XP^^^ XPV(T0VV Xpvcrovs Xpvo-as Xpva-a V. Xpv(T€e XP^aij Xpvo-Qvv XPV(T0L Xpvo-OL Xpvcra 38 ADJECTIVES — SECOND FORM. [§35. REMARKS. a. 'Apyupeoff, ^Iver (adjective), occurs in the New Testament in two forms : ace. plur. dpyvpovs, neut. nom. and ace. plur. dpyvpa. h. These adjectives occur very infrequently. It will be observed that the feminine of xp^o-^os is formed irregularly; as -os preceded by a vowel, according to rule, requires -a. The adjective arepeos, ed, eovjjlrm, is declined without contraction. c. Accentuation. — The final syllable in these adjectives, when con- tracted, is circumflexed throughout. Thus we have, not only air\ovs from ottAo'os, simple (regular, see § 6, c), but XP"^'^^^ from xP^<^^os, and apyvpovs from apyvp€os, anomalous. 36. Second Form. General Eemarks. Masculine. — The nominative is formed from the stem, according to the methods of the Third Declension. Thus, o|v- gives nom. masc. o^vs, sharp (§ 29, i. (4) ; iravT- becomes nds, all (§§ 29, i. (3) ; Add); and Ikovt- gives iKv iravTcov D. TiaVTi TTCLO-rj iravTL TTaaiiv) TTCLCraLS iraai^i;) A. TTCLVTa iraaav irav TTCLvras naaas TTCLvra V. iras iraaa irav TTCLVTeS Tiao-aL iravra Participles in -as are similarly declined (stem, avr-) as Xvoray, having loosed. The participial stem-ending €vt- makes, nom. -efs, -€io-a, -^v, gen. -^vtos, -ciotjs, -^vtos, &c. ; as /SovXev^eis, having been counselled. Ikovt-, 'ovaa-^ willing. SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. F. N. M. F. N. N. kKiav kKOvaa €k6v €k6vT€S kKOvaai kKOvra G. kKOVTOS kKOV(Tr]S kKOVTOS kKOVTOiV kKovcroiiV kKOVTOiV D. kKOVTL €K0V(r7] €k6vTL kKovaiiy) kKOvaais kKova-L^v) A. kKovra €KOvcrav €k6v kKOVTas kKov(Tas knovTa V. hK(xiV kKOVcra kKOV kKOVTOS kKova-ai kKovra Participles in -wv, -ovs. M. kcfTd)T(j>V k(TTb)(TCiiV k(TT(aT(aV kaT(opov-, only two. By far the largest and most important class of adjectives in this division are those in -tjs, neut. -€s, where the stem-ending €s is not changed into os in the nominative and accusative singular, as in the corresponding class of substantives (§ 29, iv.), but where similar contractions to those of nouns take place in the other cases. 41. Paradigms of the Third Form, akqOes', true. SINGULAR. M. and F. N. N. akr]6ris ^XrjOh G. {a\7]dios) aXrfOov^ aXrjOovs D. (kXr^eil) 6Xr]eei aXrjOei: A. (akneia) akrjerj iiXrjdis V. aXr]6€9 PL URAL. aXrjdh M.. and F. N. N. (a\r]0i(s) dXTjeels (aXrjeia) aXTjOTJ G. {aXr]6ioov) aXrjOcov aXr]do)p D. aXr]di(TL{v) aXr)0€(n(v) A. (aXr]6ias) aXTjO^ls (iiX-neia) d,XTier} V. (aXrjdies) aXr^e^is {&X7jeia) 6,Xrierj 42 ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. [§41 crco(j)pop -, sober-minded. SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. and F. N. M. and F. K. N. (T(0(f)p(t)V (ppOVOS a(a(f)povos (T(i)(pp6v(JiV (T(0(l}p6v(i)V D. acacfypovL a-povL (r(a(f)po(TL (T(a(j)poai A. (T(i>(^pova (T(a(f)pOV a(£i(f)povas (r(o(f)pova V. (jGxPpov (r(o(f)pov (r(a(f)pov€9 (raxppova To this class belong comparatives in a>v. (See § 44.) COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 42. There are two regular methods of forming the Greek comparative and superlative. The first and most usual is by adding to the stem of the positive the further stem-ending T€po- for the comparative, TttTo- for the superlative. These forms are then declined exactly like the first form of adjectives. Thus, from ttco-tos, Jhithjul, stem irwrro-, we have — Comparative, nom, sing. via-Torepos, nia-TOTepa, maroTepov. Superlative, nom. sing. Trto-Toraroy, Tna-TOTdrq^ TrioroTaToi/. From dXrjdfjs, true, stem dXTjOcs- Comparative, dXr^dfo-Tepos, oKrjdeoTepa, dXrjdea-Tfpov. Superlative, dXrjdea-TaTOS, dXrjdcarTdTrj, dXrjOeo-Tarov. Adjectives of the first class which have a short syllable before the stem- ending o- change this vowel into «. Thus, aocfios, wise, makes — Comparative, cro(f)a)T€pos, o-ocfjcoTepa, aocfxiiTepov. Superlative, o-ocfiaTaTos, a-ooiTaTov. From vios, neWy we have in hke manner — Comparative, veoirepos, vearepa, Ptar^pov. Superlative, veararos, vfardTrj, vediTarov. Accentuation. — Comparatives and superlatives of this form are always proparoxytone, except when the final syllable is long ; then paroxytone. In other words, the accent is thrown back as far as possible. § 43.] ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. 43 43. The second form of comparison is by adding, generally to an abbreviated form of the positive stem, -i«v (stem-ending wv-) for the comparative, and -iotos (stem-ending wrro-) for the superlative. Examples. raxvs, swiftj Taxiav* Ta)(t(TTog alcrxpos, disgraceful, alo-xicov, a'larxio-Tos KoXos, J^aiVy KaXXicov, KoXXiaros fieyas, great, /net^cai/ (for /xeytcoi/), fieyiaros Accentuation. — In these, as in other comparative and superlative forms, the accent is thrown back as far as possible. 44. Paradigm of Comparatives in -iwv or -wv. These follow the third form of adjectives (see o-axfipaiv, § 41), but are sometimes contracted by the omission of the v before a or e, and the combination of this vowel with the o of the stem. This con- traction is, however, infrequent in the New Testament. fxei^copy fxel^oi^^ greater, SINGULAR. M. and F. N. N. jnetfwy fie'iCov G. fxeC(ovos lx€iCovos D. fieCCovL fl€L(0VL A. fieCCovcL or fxeCCio fJLclCoV V. Ijl€lCov PLURAL lX€lC0V M. and F. N. N. Ijl€lCov€s or jjceC^ovs fjLeCCova or juei^o) G. fJL€LC6v(iiV /aetfoVcoz; D. li€CCo(n{v) lJL€LCo(n{v) A. fxciCovas or [i^iCovs fjieCCova or juetfo V, fj.€LCop€s or /xetfoDs Ijl€lCov€s or fxeiiovs * See John xx. 4. In classic Greek, OdTTuv is the form generally used. 44 ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. [§ 45. 45. To this form of comparison belong several irregular comparatives and superlatives, of which the following list will suffice : — ayaBos, gOod, comp. ^eKriav, sup. ^cXtio-tos j> Kpelcracov, V KparioTos KaKos, bad, i) KUKLCOV, V KaKiaros fxiKposy little, >> p-iKporepos iXdo-aoiP, (regul ar) iXaxiOTOS noXvs, many, T](T(ra)v, TrXeicou or TrXecov, ^KKTTOS nXeiaTos Some adjectives, it will be seen from the above, have an alterna- tive comparison, having recourse to different roots for the purpose. The respective forms are now interchangeable, or nearly so. For shades of difference between them, see Vocabulary and the Chaptw: on Synonyms. 46. The following comparatives and superlatives have no answering positives : — (From ava>, adv. up) dvarepos, upper ; dvaraTos, topmost. (From AcarcD, adv. down) KaTdyrepos, lower ; KararaTos, lowest. (From eo-o), adv. within) ea-atTepos, inner; eVcorarop, inmost (From Trpd, prep, be/ore) nporepos, former ; npSiTos, first. Many of these forms are but seldom used. 47. Emphasis in Comparison. (o) An emphatic comparative is made by the adverb fioKKov, more. So Mark ix. 42, KaK6v ea-Tiv avr^ piaKXov, " it is far better for him." The same adverb is sometimes prefixed to a compara- tive, as in Mark vii. 36, paWop irfpio-aoTepov, " much (lit. more) the more abundantly." In Phil. i. 23, yet another adverb of intensity is affixed to paXKov with the comparative, ttoXXg) paXXov Kpeiaaov (lit. " by much the more better "). Compare " most unkindest § 47.] ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON — EXERCISE. 45 cut of all" in Shakspeare (Julius Caesar, iii, 2). So Psa. ix. 2 ^Prayer Book version) "0 Thou Most Higlicst." (6) Another form of securing emphasis is by affixing a compa- rative termination to a comparative or superlative form. Thus, from /xetXcDi/, greater (3 Ep. John 4), [xeiCorepav ovk. e^fo x"P"-^) " -'- ^^^^^ no greater (more greater) joy ;" and from iXax^a-Tos, least (Eph. iii. 8), ra iXaxi-crTOTepa iravToav rSiv ayicov, well rendered in E. Y., ^^ less than tJie least of all saints." Exercise 7.— Additional Adjectives, for Practice. Selected from the "Sermon on the Mount." First Form. ayios, holy abiKos, unjust apxa'i^os, ancient Kadapos, pure TTovrjpos, wicked TTTcoxps, poor, pauper arevos, narrow reAetoy, full-grown, perfect (f)av€p6 CtKOOTOS Kat TTpa)TOS 22, etKoo-i Kat 8^0 etKOOTO? Kol b€VT€pOS 30, rpLCLKOvra TpiCLKOO-TOS 40, Tea-crapcLKOvTa T€(TcrapdKO aro s 50, TievTriKOVTa irevTTjKocrTos 60, ((rjKOVTa €^K0(Tt6s 70, k^bop.riKovTa e^bopLrjKoa-Tos 80, 6yboriKOVTa dyborjKoa-Tos 90, hevrjKOVTa lv€VriKO(TTO'S 100, kKarov CKaTOOTOS 200, biaKoa-LOL biaKoa-LooTos 800, TpidKOa-LOL TpiaKoa-ioa-Tos 400, T^TpaKocrioi T€(T(rapaKO (tioctto s 500, TTivraKoa-LOL irerraKOO-tooTos §51.] 1 NUMERALS. CARDINAL. ORDINAL. 600, k^aKoa-LOi k^aKOo-Loa-Tos 700, klTTdKOa-LOL klTTaKOaLOCTTOS 800, OKTCLKOaLOL OKTaKoaLoaros 900, IvaKOCTLOl kvaKOCTLOGTOS 1,000, XiXioL XiktOOTOS 2,000, biox^kiOL bicrxikioa-Tos 3,000, Tpiayikioi TpLcrx^LkioaTos 4,000, T€TpaKl(T^iklOl TeTpaKLo-x^ikLoaTos 0,000, fXVpLOL IxvpLoa-Tos 49 KEMAEK. In compound numbers, the largest is placed first,* and the smaller follow in order, with or without the conjunction koIj and. The smaller numbers are in many copies treated as enclitics, and attached to the larger as one word. Examples. — Tea-a-apaKovra dvo, " forty-two" (Rev. xi. 2, xiii. 5) ; cKarbv TrevrrjKovTa rpL&v, "of a hundred and fifty-three" (John xxi. 11); dpovoi etfcoo-4 rea-o-apei, "twenty-four thrones" (Rev. iv. 4); T€(TarapdKovTa Koi e^ ereaiv, "for forty-six years" (John ii. 20); erav oydoTjKovTaTea-a-dpcov, " of eighty-four years" (Luke ii. 37) ; St/ca kgl oKTO) e-nj, "eighteen years" (Luke xiii. 16); ra ivevrjKovTaewea, "the ninety-nine" (Matt, xviii. 12; Luke xv. 4). 52. Distributive Numbers. The distribution or repetition of a number is variously expressed. In Mark vi. 7, the simple cardinal is repeated : bvo Suo, " two and two ;" Luke x. 1, for the same thing, more classically employs a preposition, dva 8vo; Mark xiv. 19, and John viii. 9, combine another preposition with the cardinal : els Kad' eis, " one by one." ♦ The rule in classic Greek is to place the smaller number first, Mrith fcal, or the larger without koL. 50 NUMERALS. [§ 52. Exercise 8.— Numbers. 1. Interpret the following numerical symbols : — ^, i?;', /c5', /ir , 2. [FocaJw^ary. — ©pa, -a?, hour; ^fiepa, -as, day ; a-d^^arov, -ov (lit sabbath), week, sing, or plur. ; firiv, nrjvosj m. month; eros, -ovs, n. year ; iT}^eia>u, comp. adj. more; koI, and; ij, or ; iv (prep., proclitic), in, governing the dative.] Translate the following : — 1. iv €T€i TrevreKaibeKaTco. 2. €V TW fJLTJvl ra €KTm. 3. rj (opa f] deKarrj. 4. iv Ta> iv\ Koi e^uKocnoarT^ erei, iv ra Sfurepw [irjvi. 5. f] fxia {riiiipa) rav cra^^drav. (See John XX. 1, &C.) 6. 17 TTparr] aa^^aTov. (See Mark xvi. 9.) 7. T7 TpiTTj ripipa. Supply on, to express the force of the dative. 8. fjpipai nXeiovs okto) tj dtKa. Supply than, after the com- parative. 9. hiaKoa-toi i^iopfjKovra e^. 10. €TT) 6y8ofjKovTa riaarapa. 3. Render the following into Greek : — 1. Thirty years. 2. Eleven months. 3. In the fourth month, on the sixth day. (See 7, above.) 4. Twelve hours in the day. 5. On the first day of the week.* * In what two ways might /r»< and week respectively be expressed? See 5, 6, above. §53.] PRONOUNS — ^PERSONAL. 51 Chapter IY. PRONOUNS. 63. Personal Pronouns. These are divided into (1) the simple substantive-pronoun, (2) the reflexive, and (3) the adjective-personal or possessive. The Substantive Pronouns of the first Two Persons. N. First person — SINGULAR. PLURAL. eyco, I ^/x€tj, we Second SINGULAR. (TV, thou person — PLURAL. vfjLels, you G. kixov or fxov 7]fX(oi; (TOV or (TOV vixcov D. e/uot or ixoL rjfuv (TOL or (TOL VjJUV A. e/xe or //e r)[ias (ri or (T€ vixas Accentuation. — In the singular, genitive, dative, and accusative, the uuemphatic pronoun is enclitic. (See § 6.) 54. For the third personal pronoun, he, she, it, the New Testament employs the three genders of the adjective-pronoun avTOs, self (airo-j -a-). SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. F. N. M. F. N. N. avTos 5 / avTJ] avTo aVTOL avrat 5 r avTa G. avTov avTTJ^ avrov avTU>v avTuiv avTG>v D. avT^ avTj} avT<2 avTols amah avTols A. avTov avTTiv avTo avTovs avTav D. io V oh ah oh A. 6v iiv o{;s h 6. (b) The similarity between this pronoun and the ai-ticle will be seen at once. In the nominative singular feminine and the nomi- native plural masculine and feminine, the only difference is that tlie article in proclitic. The stem of the relative is 6-, wliile that of tlte article is to-. (c) An indefinite relative, wlioever, whatever, is made by com- bining the enclitic ns with or, i;, o. Both parts of the word are declined, as follows : — §58.] PRONOUNS RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE. 55 SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. F. N. M. F. N. N. 6(TTLS TJTLS 6,Tl OILTLV€S aLTLV€S (XTiva G. OVTLVOS rja-TLvos OVTIVOS ^VTlVOiV (^VTLVCtiV (x>VTLl'(iilf D. (Etlvl fJTLVl (^TLVL oloTTLOrL alaTLCTL OLO-TLCTL A. OVTLVa ijvTLva 6,Ti ovaTLvas ao-TLvas ariva The nominative and accusative neuter singular is divided as above (sometimes J)v a space without the comuia), to distinguish the word from the conjunction on, that. The genitive masculine singular is sometimes written orov, used in the New Testament only in the adverbial phrase ecus otov, as long as, until (Matt. v. 25, &c.). (d) Sometimes the relative is declined with the particle -irep (marking emphatic identity), and means the very one who. Thus (Mark xv. 6) omep rjTovvTo, the very person whom they demanded. Other indeclinable suflGlxes are often used, e. g., Sayi (Rom. viii. 32), wSTjiroTe (John v. 4). (See Syntax, on the Particles.) For the relative adverb ov, consult § 129. (e) Derivative relative pronouns are employed to express quality, quantity, and number. Quality, oins, such as. Quantity, Sa-os, so great as. 2^ umber, oa-oi, plural of oo-os-, so many as. Also the relative of degree, -qXiKos, of what a size, used only in bwo passages (Col. ii. 1 ; James iii. 5). 59. Interrogative Pronouns. (a) The simple interrogative is rU; tL; vyho ? or what 2 The declension of this pronoun is identical with that of the indefinite Tis (§ 13), except that in the interrogative the i of the stem syllable is accented throughout, the dissyllabic forms being paroxytone. For the adverbial interrogative form, /m^n, see § 134, c. (6) Other interrogative forms are employed, correlative to the 9 56 PRONOUNS — INTERROGATIVE, INDEFINITE. [§ 59. relative pronouns under § 58, e, and, like them, denoting quality, quantity, number, and degree. They all prefix the letter ir- to the relative forms. Quality, Trotoy, of what kind ? Quantity, noa-os, how great ? Number, ttoo-oi, how many ? Degree, nrjXUos, how great ? used in the New Tes- tament only indirectly: Gal. vi. 11, "with what large letters" (probably to mark emphasis) ; Heb. vii. 4. (c) Direct interrogatives are often themselves used in the indirect construction, as John v. 1 3, " He that was Maled knew not who (tls) it was." (d) The properly indirect interrogatives prefix the letter 6- to the direct forms beginning with the letter it. ^Ottoios, of what kind? is the only one of these employed in the New Testament. 60. Indefinite Pronouns. (a) The ordinary indefinite pronoun tls, any, a certain, one, has been given, § 13. The genitive and dative singular are occa- sionally Tov, T ; yi-ypa and from 8t]Xo-, StS-qXwK-. But Xv- makes XcXvk-. c. The Future and (First) Aorist Passive take -0-, lengthening the vowel where lengthened in the Perfect Active. Thus, from the verbal stems already given, irKrrcvO-, XvO-, ti|i,ti9-, StjXwO-. d. In the Perfect and Pluperfect Middle and Passive, the normal forms (see § 70, 6) are affixed to the verbal stem without any connecting letter. The successive paradigms will show how the tense-characteristics are modified by the consonants of the verbal stem. 72. Modal Yowels. The modal vowels will be sufficiently traced in the Summary of Tei-minations. It will be especially noted how the Subjunctive throughout lengthens the vowels of the Indicative, and how the Optative abounds in diphthongal forms. In the third person plural, it will also be seen that the Subjunctive takes the termina- tion of the principal tenses, the Optative of the historical. The Imperfect and Pluperfect tenses occur only in the Indi- cative Mood ;* the Future, also, is absent from the Imperative and Subjunctive. ^ 73. Terminations of the Several Moods and Tenses. The following terminations are, in the simplest foim of verbs in • -», affixed directly to the verbal stem, and will all be found exem- plified in the conjugation of TnoTcixo. The preliminary/ study and comparison of tlie terminations wiU much facilitate tlie acquisition of the Verb. * It will be seen under Syntax that the Optative Mood really is the historical Subjunctive. Hence the Present and Perfect Optative are the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive. The ordinary names have, however, been retained to prevent unnecessary diflBculty to the learner. I § 73.] VERBS IN « : THEIR TERMINATIONS. 65 It will be observed that the Middle and Passive Voices are alike in four tenses : — Present, Imperfect, Perfect, and Pluperfect. Accentuation. — The accent of Verbs is generally thrown as far back as possible. Observe, however, some exceptions in the following scheme. Indicative Mood. Present Tense. Active — Sing. -«, -€is, -€i; Plur, -o|x.ev, -ere, -ov Plur. -(TL(v) Perfect. / may have believed. SINGULAR. PLURAL. TreTTtore^/cr/re TreTTtoTevKO) 0-1(2;) r^ THE VERB IN -« : ACTIVE VOICE. [% 74. OPTATIVE MOOD. {Or, Stbbjunctive of the Historical Tenses.) Present (or Imperfect). I might believe. SINGULAR, TTLO-TeVOLfJLL 7ri(JT€VOt5 TTLcrrevoL Future. SINGULAR. 'KLOre'VO'OLflL 71 LOT €"6(7015 TTtorrewot PLURAL. in(TT€VOllJL€V TTLO-TeVOLTC TILO-T^VOUV I should believe. PLURAL. 'nL(TT€VaOLfJL€V ina-TivaoLTe 'nL(TT€V(rOL€V Aorist. SINGULAR. TTiaTeva-aLixL TTLorevaaLS 7naTevcri(i') OPTATIVE MOOD. (07% Subjunctive of tlie Historical Tenses.) Present. / might confide, or be entrusted, PLURAL. TTLaT€VOLIJ.€0a SINGULAR. TL, to loosen (com- pound derivatives, diroXva, to put away ; icaraXvco, to abrogate) ; trrjoTfva), to/dst ; 7rpo(f>rjT€va), to prophesy ; (f>ov€va), to murder.^ Analyse and translate the following forms : — bovXeveiv, KaraXvo-aiy Xvajj, r}Kov(TaT€, tA?]s Sr/Aots -11 Tiiia 1 or - j)»7 (piKol or -otT] St^Aoi or -0677 -Ol[l.€V rijuwjucy or (Pl\oIijl€v or SryAotjutez; or -t\^> -et brjXoL -erai rtuSrat \ . \(f)L\dTaL br]XovraL .($p.€ea Tt/xw/xe^a \ ^^iXovjjLeOa brjXovfxeOa -€VTaL (^tAoui^rat b-qXovvrai. * The latter are the more usual terminations. 82 ( CONTRACTED VERBS — MIDDLE AND PAssi^^. [g 79. Stem, rlfxa- ^t'Ae- 597X0- Indicative— Imperfect. i- . . -VTO €(pL\0VVT0 ibrjkovvTO Imperati VE — Present. -ov TLfJiQ (f)lX0V br}kov -€'0-00) TLiiacrOui (})L\€L(rdoi br]\ov(r6(a -6o-0e TLfjiaa-Oe <5f)iXeto-0e brjXova-dc -€o-0ft)o-av TLixaaObicrav (^iXucrOina-av brjXova-dcticray or -^o-0«v TLjida-Ocov i\S> 5j/Xa> Future active TifiTjaroi (j>i\r)cra> drjXoicrco Perfect active TerifirfKn 7r€(f)i\r]Ka BedrjXoDKa 1st Aor. passive CTififjBrju e(f>i\rjdT)v €8r]Xa>dr]v Perf , mid., and pass. TCTlfJiTJIial ire(f)i\T]fjiat dedrjXiOfxai Exercise 10.— On pure Contracted Verbs. [Vocabulary/ of Verbs, selected from the " Seriiion on the Mount." — ayaTrao), to love ; alTeo), to ask ; bi^doi, to thirst ; dedofiai, to behold (dep.*); BefxfXioco, to found; C^riw, to seek; /xerpeo), to measure; /xicreo), to hate ; otKoSo/xeo), to build ; 6fxoi6, to hunger ; Troie'o), to do, make.] Analyse and translate the following words : — neivavres, diyJAcovres, TTOiel, dya7rT]aeis, fxtcrrjaeis, dyanTjo-Tjre, dyaTravras, TTOirjcrai, TToiovcrt, iroiUTe, TToieiv, deadrjvai, ttoitjs, alrria-ai, Cv^elre, fierpeire, alTrja-j], aiTovaiv (dat. jylur.^, TTOLcocnVy TTOiovp, ofioioxrco, wKodofiTjae, redeixeXiaro, ofioicodrjaerai. Also the following : — 6ed(raa6ai, reOeaTai, rjydTrrjaev, dyuTra, TjyaTrrj- fi€VT]v, dyairdp, aWflcrde, tJtovpto, rJTrjfTavTO, alrcoficp, e^rjrovv, (r]Ta)P, ^rjTelTco, e'^^relro, 6/ioia)^i;/Lifj/, iireipaara (see § 96, a), ndPa, fSiyj/rjo-a, dL-yf/a. * Deponent, i.e., middle form with active meaning: an active form not being used. See § 100. 84 mute verbs their conjugation. [§ 81. 7*^ 81. Mute Yerbs. — Special Eules. Tiie large class of mute verbs conies next in order — i.e., verbs whose stem-ending (or "characteristic") is either a labial, ir, p, <|) ; a guttural, ^, y,\] or a dental, t, 8, 9. It will be convenient to retain the names of (§ 4, 6) ju>- sounds (labials), ^-sounds (gut- turals), and ^-sounds (dentals). The cross-division, into sJuirp^Jlatj and aspirate, must also be remembered. 82. Whenever, in the conjugation of a verb, the stem is followed immediately by a vowel, the mute stem-ending is unaffected. In the Present and Imperfect tenses, therefore, the mute verb precisely resembles TTiorevo). 83. a. Many tense forms, however, begin with a conso- nant : as those of the Future and First Aorist with -o--, that of the Perfect with -k-, that of the First Aorist passive with -0- ; while in the different parts of the Perfect middle and passive, there occur four several consonants immediately fol- lowing the stem, the terminations being -iiai, -. K- and 7- „ X- T-, 8-, 0-, „ 0-. (3) Before -t (mid. and pass., Perf. ind., third pei-son sing.)— ir-, p-, «^-, become ir •«-, 7-, X-, „ •«• T-, 8-, 0-, „ -, become p.. «-> 7-, Xtj » 7. T-, 8-, e-, „ TretVoj 1st Aor. I-. .- ireiVa) Perf. redup. -w T€TpC(f>CO 7/xa) TreTretKu) OPTATIVE. Present, -otjit TpC^OLfJiL ayot/xt TTcCdoLfU Future, - TjX^diV TTCTTeiO-OoiT i 88 MUTE VERBS MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. Stem, Tpi^- ay- ireiO- [§ 84. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present, -wfiat Perf. part, with S rptjScojoiai ayoipiaL TeTpLjijiivos oi rjyfjievos o) OPTATIVE. TTeCOwfjiaL 7:€7T€L(rpi€V0S tt) Present ol^-'^v TpL{3oifX7]v ayoLfxriv ireidoifjLrjv Perf. part, with-v T^Tpiiniivos -qyjxivos a.r}v etrjv INFINITIVE. TreTreicr/xeros etr Present, -€o-0ai Perfect, -(pa8-, tell, comes the Present <^pafpa8-, , P\d\j/'(0 J) ^€^Xacf)a pLTTTCOf to throw Pt<|>- )) piyj/co 5» cppt(f)a Taoau), to arrange rav- jj Ta|u> >) reraxo- KpdCo, to cry Kpav- J5 Kpd^co 5J KiKpaxa (j^paCoi, to tell <}>pa8- JJ (ppdcrco )} 7r€(ppaKa c. Every class of mute verbs (as well as others, on which see hereafter) may receive modification by the insertion of a vowel in a short stem-syllable, so as to form a diphthong. Thus ^vy-, Jlee, gives (pevycc, and Xmt-, leave, XeLiro). Only, in this case, the Future and Perfect are formed from the stem of the Present, as XeiVcD, Xei>//'co, XeXeiCpa. 86. The most important point connected with the modifi- cation of the stem is the introduction, into the verbs so characterized, of a set of "secondary'' tenses, in which the unmodified stem appears. These tenses, except in special cases, are of precisely similar meaning to the corresponding ''primary'' tenses. For example, the difierence between the First and the Second Aorist is a difierence of form only. The same remark can hardly be applied so unreservedly to the First and Second Perfect ; but the instances of difierence belong rather to the Lexicon than to the Grammar, and will be explained in the Vocabulary. A few verbs unmodified, as exw, have a Second Aorist, as will be afterwards noted. Occasionally, too, the Second Aorist differs in meaning from the First. The above rule, however, is general. 87. Secokd Aorist. The Second Aorist Active in the Indicative resembles the Imperfect, in the other moods the Present, except that the Imperfect is taken from the modified, the Second Aorist from the original stem. 92 THE SECOND AORTST. [§87. Thus from (fxvya) (v7-), fojlee — Imperfect, €(f)evyov, €({)evy€s, f(})€vy€(v), i(f)€vyofieVf k.t.X. Sec, Aorist, ecjivyov, ecpvyes, 6<^vye(i/), €(f)vyo[xev, k.t.X. The augment and the terminations of the two tenses will be seen to be exactly alike. In the moods after the Indicative, the Second Aorist drops the augment and follows the Present in termination, but accentuates the final syllable of the Infinitive (perispomenon) and Participle (oxy tone) . With these explanations, the Second Aorist Active paradigm will present no difficulty. TVTTTO), to strike, keCiKo, to leave. Stem TVTT- Xltt- Indicative, irUTTOV iXlTTOV Imperative, TV7T€ AtTre Subjunctive, TVTTCO AtTTO) Optative, TV-nOUll AtTTOt/Xt Infinitive, TVTT€lv Xiireiv Participle, TVTTIOV, OV(Ta, 6v XlTTO)!' h. The Second Aorist Middle follows exactly the same analogy. The Imperative, however. is perispomenon, the Infinitive paroxytone. Indicative, hvTTOfJL'qv eXLTToixriv Imperative, TVTTOV XlTTOV Subjunctive, TvircofMat AtTTCo/xat Optative, TVTToC^irjv XnToCfirjv Infinitive, TV-nicrdai Xntiadai Participle, TVTTO/xerOS XiTTOfM^VOS c. Second Aorist Passive. — Here the mood and tense-endings are like those of the passive Fii*st Aorist, the difference being that the unmodified root is used instead of the aspirated form with -0-. First Aorist, €tv6t]v ; Second Aorist, (Tvmjv. In the Imperative § 87.] SECOND AORTST, FUTURE, AND PERFECT. 93 second person, -0t is found instead of -ti. One paradigm of this tense will suffice : — Indicative, hvir-qv Imperative, TvirrjOi, TVirrjrai Subjunctive, Tvirca Optative, TvireC-qv Infinitive, TVTrrjvai Part. TvneiSi Tvna.cra, rviriv 88. Second Future. a. In the Passive vbioe, there is a Second Future connected with the Second Aorist, exactly as the First Future is connected with the First Aorist. Thus from tvttto) we have, First Aor. pass., eTv(})dr)v ; First. Fut., Tv^6r)(ToyLaL \ Second Aor., ervTrrjv; Second Fut., tuttjJ- (Tonai. The paradigm is as follows : — Indicative, Tvirrjaoiiai Imperative, Tvirr^a-oCixrjv Infinitive, TvnricrecrOai Participle, Tvirrja-ofx^vos 89. Second Perfect. b. The Second Perfect belongs to the Active voice only, and is distinguished from the ordinary Perfect of mute verbs by having the unmodified stem without the aspirate. Thus : rvTrro) (tvtt-). First Perf., reVu<^aj Second Perf, rervTra. The tense is of rare occurrence, and its special significance will have to be explained in individual cases. It occurs in some verbs that do not modify their stem. The Second Pluperfect accompanies it, where found. One paradigm here also will be sufficient. Second Perfect of TTodo-o-G) (-n-pa-y-), to do: — Indicative, niitpaya „ Plup. (€)7r677p(iyeii; Subjunctive, ireTrpdyo) Optative, 'TreTrpayot/xt Imperative, iriTrpaye Infinitive, ircirpayevaL Participle, ireiTpaycas, -via -6s. 90. GrENERAL EuLES FOR THE SeCOND TeNSES. (1) These do not occur in the pure verbs, or in verbs having a dental, t, 8, (t), for their characteristic. (2) The same verb very seldom takes both First and Second Aorists in the Active or Middle. 94 MUTE VERBS — EXERCISE. [§ 90. (3) The Passive may have both First and Second Aorist and Future. (4) When both First and Second Perfect active are found, the former is often transitive, the latter intransitive. Trenpaxa, I have done; Trenpaya, I have fared (compare Eiiglish, "How do you do?''). Kemark. — For the vowel -modifications of the second tenses, see the sections on Tense-formation, §§ 93 — 99. Exercise 11.— On Mute Verbs. [VocahularT/, from the ^'Sermo^i on the Mount" — (1) Labial Stems: ySXeVco, to see; dXelcfia}, to anoint; BXi^Scoj to straiten; KpvnTco, to hide ; vIttto), to wash ; o-rpecpai, to tuni ; rpe'^o) (9p6-), to nourish. (2) Guttural Stejis : ayo), to lead; 5ta>Kto, to pursue ; e;^a) (Ix), to Imve ; Xeyco, to say ; 7rpoa€vxop.ai, to pray (dep.). (3) Dental Stems : ^evbojxai, to lie (dep.); oveiblCo), to reproach; do^dCcOf to glorify; vopiC(o, to suppose ; vrjOco, to spin ; ayidCoi, to hallow. Analyze and translate the following words : — SeSKoy/ieVot, oveidi- (TodcrtVj Sia)£ou(7t, yJAevSopevoi^ edico^av, Kpv^rjvaiy do^da-cocri, vo/iioT/re, cp^et, aTpeyj/ov, 7r/30crev;(CCT^e, 8t(oic6uTci)u, '^X^'^^i ^XenaVf irpocrevxjlt ifpocrev^aiy 7rpoaev)(6p€voif dyLaa-BrfTCi}, aXeiyl/ai, vi\lrai, /SXeVcoj/, KkenTOVcrij vrjdeij Xeyovres, (TTpd. 91. Liquid Yerbs. Verbs with the stem-endings X, ji, v or p, present many variations from the foregoing models, which will be noticed § 91.] LIQUID VERBS. 95 in the sections on Tense-formation. It will be sufficient, as introductory to the paradigm, to observe — a. The stem of these verbs is generally modified in the Present: e. (/., stem d7"yeX-, announce^ Present act. ayy/XXcoj <|>av-, appear, Pres. (pa'ivu), b. The Future active originally ended in -i, „ eavpa d. In the Perfect active, as v- and jjl- cannot come before -k, various expedients are adopted. KptVo), to judge, kXlvco, to bend^ TrXvvco, to wash, drop the v {KeKpiKa, &c.) Other verbs, as (jyalvw, adopt a Second Perfect, lengthening the vowel as in the Aorist {Trecprjva). Others, again, form the Perfect as from a pure root in €-, as /xeVco, to remain, pejievijKa, as if from fieveoj.' e. In the Perfect passive, v- is changed into > if dyyeAets KptVUS d/oeis »' )} ayyekel KpLV€L ap€L „ plur. ayy€\ovfi€v Kptvovfjiev apovixev » » dyyeAetre KpLvelre ap€LT€ >> » ayy€\ov(TL(i ) Kpivov(n[v) apovaiiv) 1st Aorist, riyy^ika €Kp7va ripa Perfect, jjyyeXKa miKplKa flpKa Pluperfect, i]yyiXK€LV {k)K€KpiKeiV fipKeiv 2nd Aorist, rjyyeXov [MPERATIVE. rjpov Present, dyyeAAe KptVe alpe Ist Aorist, dyyetAoz; KpivOV dipov Perfect, 7;yyeAKe K^KplKe ypK€ 2nd Aorist, ayy€\€ ap€ SUBJUNCTIVE. Present, dyyeAAo) KpCvOi atpoj 1st Aorist, ayyeCkd) KpCvOi apo) Perfect, riyy^kKGi K€KpLK(0 fjpKO) 2nd Aorist, ayyikoi OPTATIVE. ap(t) Present, ayyikXoLfXL KpCvOLfXl atpoipiL Future, ayy ekoliML or oLTjv KpivoXiii or oLr]v apoXixi or oim Ist. Aorist, ayyeCkaifiL KpCvaifJLL apaifXL Perfect, -qyyekKOLixL K€KpiKOHJ.l flpKoiiu 2nd Aorist, ayyikoLiki apoL^t ^92.] LIQUID VERBS PARADIGMS. 07 Stem, ayyeX- Kptv Strengthened, ayyeXk- Kpiv- Present, Perfect, Present, Perfect, alp- INFINITIVE. Present, ayyikkeiv KpLV€LV a'Lp€W Future, ayyekciv Kpiveiv apelv 1st Aorist, ayyelKaL Kplvai dipai Perfect, riyy€\K€vai K€KplKivai ^pKivai 2nd Aorist, ayyeXelv apeXv PARTICIPLES. Present, ayyiWoiV KpLVOiV atp(av Future, ayyek&v KpLVOiV apSiV 1st Aorist, ayydXas Kpivas &pas Perfect, riyy€XK(as K€KpLK(aS llpK OPTATIVE. dpO(a ap(o 1st Future, 1st Aorist, 2nd Aorist, 2nd Future, dyy€X6riaoLfir]v KptOrjcroifjiriv dyyekOeirjv KpiOeLrji; dyyeX^LTjv dyy€Xri(joL[X7]V INFINITIVE. dp6r](roL[jLr]v dpdeLTjv dp€L7]U dpr](TOipiriv 1st Future, 1st Aorist, 2nd Aorist, 2nd Future, dyyeXOrja-^arOaL KpLOtjaeaOat dyycXBrjvai KpidijvaL ayyeXijvaL ayy^Xria^crOai, dpOrfcreaOaL apOfjvaL dpTJvai aprjcreaOaL lUU LIQUID VEKBS. [§ ^2. Stem, ayyeX" Kpiv ap- Strengthened, ayyeXX- Kp'iv- alp^ PARTICIPLES. 1st Future, 1st Aorist, 2nd Aorist, 2nd Future, ayy€X6r}ar6[Ji€Vos KpiOrjaopievos ayyekOeis Kpt^ets dyyeXets ayy€\r](r6fji€Vos VERBALS. apd-qaopievos ap0€LS apeCs aprjo-opievos ayyeXros Kpiros ayy€\T€os Kpirios apTos aprios '*^* It is not to be supposed that all tlie above forms are actually in use. They are given as TropaSfiy/xara, examples, of words that may occur. Exercise 12.— On Liquid Verbs. I. [Vocabularv, from the *^ Sermon on the Mount" — av^duo), to grow, to increase; /SaXXo), to throw, cast; 6e\(o, to will (augment with Tj, see § 94, ii.) ; Kpiva, to jlldge; fioipaivco, to corrupt; aneipa, to sow ; (f>aiv(o, to show (Second Aorist, passive or middle, appear) ; Xaipo), to rejoice.] II. Analyze and translate the following forms : — ;(aipfTf, fio)pavd^, ^Xrjdrjvat (see § 98, c), ^Xr]Brj(T7], ^aXe, ^XtjOtj, deXovTi., KpiOrjvai^ av^if a-ireipovaiv, av^dvei, ^aWofievov, Kpidrjre, KpLdt^crea-de, ^dXrjTe, dfKrjTe, Also the following : — diKei, rjdikov, fjdiXrjo-a, dfXovres, Kpivet, Kpivei, Kpivare, (^(opavdrjcrav, efxaipavev, cnrfipcov, (rnapeis, eaTrapfieuov, fcfidvrjy (paiveade, (fiapeiTai, /3aXf, ^XrjdrjTif ^dWeiv, ^aXelvy /3aXXa), /SoXw. § 93.] ON TENSE-FOR^tATlON^^ ' , 101 93. Notes on the Tenses. The foregoing paradigms have fully given the typical forms of the First Conjugation, i.e., of the great majority of verbs, and of most of the tenses in all verbs. Many minute variations must now be noticed, with apparent irregularities, which for the most part can themselves be reduced to rule, or explained by some early usage of the language. Accentuation. — It may be repeated at tlie outset from § 7.'>, that verbal forms mostly retract the accent, i.e., throw it back as far as possible. Exceptions are noted below under the different Tenses. When the accent falls on the penultimate, e.g., in dissyllables, along vowel is circumflexed, in certain forms, as has been already shown. 94. The Present and Imperfect : Active, Middle AND Passive. I. The Present Indicative Active, first person (the form usually given in Lexicons, Yocabularies, and Concordances*) contains the verbal stem, often modified. The principal forms of modified stem are as follows : — 1. Labial stem-endings, strengthened by t-. (See § 85, a, 1.) 2. Short stem-syllables lengthened. (See § 85, c.) 3. The euphonic o-a-, tt-, for a guttural characteristic; t- for a dental, or occasionally for y-. (See § 85, a, 2, 3.) 4. XX- for the characteristic X-. (See note, § 85.) 5. The letter v- affixed to the stem-syllable. This may take place in different ways. ; First Aor. pass., iMdxOvf. Verbs of this class are very various in form, as exhibited in the Lexicon or Vocabulary. 8. Reduplicated stems, the initial consonant repeated with i. Four verbs of this class are of very common occurrence. a. yivofxai (deponent intransitive), to become, stem yfp-, by reduplication yrytv; shortened into yiyv-, the second 7- being dropped for the sake of euphony; Impf., 4yiv6iJL7)v; Inf., ylvtaBai; Second Aor., iytvSfirjy, ytvhecu. § 94.] ON TENSE-FORMATION. 103 6. yivdcTKo}, to become acquainted with, to know. Stem yvo-, which becomes yvcoffK-, after the model of class 7 ; then by reduplication yiyvwaK-, when y- is dropped, as in the last instance; Fut., yvcoaofiai ; Peri, fyvuKa-, Second Aor., ^yvav {like second conjugation). c. HiixviiCKoyiai, to remember (deponent), from fifa-, fjivf)(xojxai, ffxviiaerjv, d. nriirra), to fall. This is not a labial verb strengthened by t-. Its root is TTCT-, by reduplication vnreT-. The weak vowel -e- is then dropped, leaving viiTT-. Second Aor., errea-ou, the c- being softened from t- ; Fut., Treo-oCuat ; Perf., TTciTTWKa. (Compare § 96, d.) II. The Imperfect Tense always follows the stem of the Present, the Augment being prefixed. For the Augment, consult § 69. After the Augment, an initial -p- is doubled, as from pvofiai; Impf , eppvofirjv; First Aor., ippvcrOr^v. A few verbs have the Attic double augment tj instead of c. Thus, /leXXeo, to he about to do a thing, has ep^XXov and ^jxeXXov inter- changeably. 'Opdco, to see, has a double augment also : Impf., fcopcov ; Perf, (oipaKu. (See further, under the Aorist, § 97.) 95. The Second Aorist, Active and Middle. This is the simplest of the Tenses (see § 87), and in general contains the exoA^t verbal stem. Hence it is mainly found in verbs whose Present-stem is modified. So Imperf , ervnTov; Second Aor., iTVTTov. In one verb, ayco, to lead, where the Present-stem is un- modified, the Second Aorist is distinguished from the Imperfect by a reduplication : Impf, ijyov ; Second Aor., ijyayov; Inf., ayayelv. Note. — Some short stem-syllables with f- change this into a in the Second Aorist, as from aneipo}, to sow (o-Tre/j-), %(rirapov. The Vowel Aorist. — A few pure stems (like the second conjuga- tion, or " verbs in -jii ") affix the tense-endings to the stem, with lengthened vowel, rejecting the usual modal vowel. Thus, yivma-KUi ("yvo-, see § 94, 8, h), eyvcov. bvvQi, to set, as the sun (8v-), eSuv. fiaivw, to go (pa-), e^rju. 104 ON TENSE-FORMATION. [§ 95. For the conjugation of these forms, see paradigms of verbs in Accentuation. — The Second Aorist active infinitive circumflexes the final syllable ; rvireii/ ; in the participle accents the stem-syllable -oj't, with a circumflex on the fern, where possible, tittc^j/, rvnovaa, rvirSv. In the middle the imperative is perispomenon, rvvov ; the inf. paroxytone, rvntadai. 96. The Future, Active and Middle. For the relation between the Future stem and the simple stem of the verb, consult § 85, b, c. a. In pure stems, the vowel is lengthened before the Future characteristic -a--. The stem-endings , Ttfirja-o) ; (PiXeay, (fjiX^a-a ; drfKoco, BrjXacra} ', XfO), Xvarco, Exceptions: (L) a- becomes d- after a vowel or p. Thus : — ida, to permitf Fut. fdaofiai. Idofxai, to healy „ ld(rofiai. ireipdofi-ai, to try^ „ -rreipdcrofiai. So Treivdcoj to hunger^ „ Tretmo-o). \aKda)^ to loosen^ „ \akdcra>. But xpdofiai, to USBy makes )(pf]cropai, (ii.) The following verbs do not lengthen their stem-endiugs for the Future : — * o-forms : yeXciw, to laug\ Fut. yeXda-a. icXdo}, to breaky ,, KKdaa>. «-forms : dpKea>, to suffice^ „ op*c, iXTTiCo), to hopCy „ eXzrtw. KOfML^co, to carry, „ Kofjuco, mid. Koixiovfiai. Kadapi((ii, to purify, „ Kadapico aiud KaOapiaui. ^aiTTiCco, to baptize, „ /SaTrn'o-o) only. (raXni^o), to sound a trumpet, „ (xaXniaat only.* But the verbs of this class which drop -tr- in the Future, resume it in the First Aorist ; so far diflfering from the liquid verbs. c. Three verbs in -i) io pour, omits the and K\av(rop.ai (Luke vi. 25 ; Eev. xviii 9). (See d.) d. Several active verbs of frequent occurrence have a Future in the middle form, still with active meaning ; as — oKovo), to hear, Fut. aKovcropaij or okovctq). Cda>, to live, ,, (rjcropai or Cw^- Xap^dvco, to take, „ Xrjyjropai (from Xap-, X-q^r-) BavpdCa, to wonder, „ davpda-opat, once. (f)evyco, tojlee, „ cfifv^opat. TTiVco, to drink, „ Trlopat, -ecrai, -erai (Luke xvii, 8). * In classic Greek, aaXtriy^eo, from stem aakiriyy-. 106 on tense-formation. [§ 97. 97. The First Aorist, Active and Middle. a. Connexion of the Aorist stem with that of the Future. — 1. In the pure and mute verbs, the o- of the Future is retained. 2. In the liquid verbs, the Aorist lengthens a short vowel before the stem-ending. Thus, o-irep-, to sow; Fut., r}T€V(ra, instead of 7rpo€(f)r]T(V(ra. The prefix, €u, well, is sometimes augmented into r\v-, sometimes left unaltered. So from €v8oK€Q), to be well pleased, evboKija-a (Matth. iii. 17), and TjvdoKria-a (Luke iii. 22). But a verbal stem after ev, beginning with a, €, o, is itself augmented. So from ewayyeXiXo/xat, to preach tlie Gospel, we have evrjyyfXia-dprjv, not rivayyiKi6rjv and aeo-coo-fiai, b. The chief variation in the stem-syllable of these tenses from the ordinary model is in the case of pure verbs. Usually, these lengthen the vowel stem-ending. In several verbs, however, the short vowel remains, as in ibeOr^v, iXvdijv, and others. In many, again, the letter cr is inserted after the stem, as in eTeXea-drju (Perf , rereXeo-/Ltat), ixd^acr^rjv (2 Cor. xi. 33), and from pvoixii, to deliver, ippvaOr^v (2 Tim. iv. 17). Thus, also, from aKova, to hear, rjnovadrjv, dKOvcrdf}cropaL, ^'/coucr/xac. c. The transposition of a vowel and liquid, in short monosyl- labic roots, is very common in these tenses. Thus, paX-, to throio, becomes pXa-, and gives e^XrjdtjVy ^Xrjd^aoixai, ^e^Xrjfiai, The root 108 ON TENSE-FORMATION. [§ 98. KoXe-, to call, is treated as koX-, K\a-; First Aor. pass., ckXtjOjiv; Fut., K\T]6r)Q-n, in many copies of John viii. 4; aireKaTeardOri (e after both prepositions) : Matth. xii. 13. From avolyca (compare ^ 99, a, 3), we l&nd ^vofx^i?". a.pe({>X^W> V'^^VX^V*' (Rev. XX. 12); and Second Aor. i)volyTiv, with Second Future, avoiyftaofj-ai. Accentuation. — The Aorists passive circumflex the Subjunctive mood- vowel throughout, and the penultimate of the Inf. -rjvai. The participle accents the stem-syllable -evr throughout, with a circumflex on the fern., wherever possible. Thus: XvOfls, \v6fiaa, KvQev, XvdfVTOs, Xvdelarjs, \v6^vtos, K.r.X. 99. The Perfect and Pluperfect, Active, Middle, AND Passive. a. For the Reduplication, see § 69. The following variations must be noted : — 1. A verb beginning with two consonants, other than a mute § 99.] ON TENSE-FORMATION. 109 followed by a liquid, or -with a double consonant, takes €-. Thus, (TTecPavoco, to crowriy eo-Tecjydvaxaf i(rTe(f>du(Ofxai ; ^ijpalvayj tO wither, f^T]pafj,iJ,ai. So when v follows -y-, as from 7V0-, tyvaxa. 2. The verb \dfi^ava>, Xap-, takes ct- instead of the reduplication,* etXjyc^a. 3. Some verbs beginning with a, c, or o, take a double redupli- cation in the active. GKouo), to hear, aKrjKoa. (iXve-), to come, eXrjXvda. See § 103 (2). The verb dvoiyco (see §§ 97, 98) may have a double augment in the perf. pass., rjueayfxevr} (Rev. iv. 1). 4. The Pluperfect in the New Testament generally omits the augment, taking only the reduplication, as redefieXicoTo, it had been founded (Matt. vii. 25). b. Termination of the Active Perfect third person j)lur at. — Many MSS. frequently give this as -av, like the First Aor. In John xvii. 7, the rec. text reads eyvaxav. c. The Second Perfect active takes the termination of the First without the characteristic -k- or aspirate, and often modifies a vowel in the stem-syllable, preferring o. Thus, XetVo), XeXoma, ndaxto (alternate stem, irevG-), nmovOa, This tense is often intransitive ; as from ire'ew, to persuade. First Perf. , ireirciKa, I have persuaded ; but Second Perf., tmroiQa, I have confidence, I folly believe. To the class of Second Perfects belong the forms €oiKa, I am like (ftK-) ; olSa, / know (ft5-). (See § 103.) "When the stem-ending of the verb is an aspirate — mute, labial or guttural — the Perfect is in the Second, or unaltered, form : as from 7pa4)-, to write, yeypacfya. d. Some peculiarities of the Perfect Passive have been noted under the head of the Aorist. Yowel changes in the stem-syllable are given in the Lexicon or Vocabulary. So, also, the insertion or otherwise of -o-- after a vowel stem-ending. * So in classic Greek some other verbs, as Ko.yx^vw, elfAijxO' 110 TENSE -FORMATION — DEPONENT VERBS. [§ 99. E.g., Tpi<^a}, to nourish (0pe<(>-), Terpoffia, redpafxfxai. Again, Bpavw, to crush, makes redpavafiaL (Luke iv. 18); but %avo}xai, to cease, ,niTvavp.ai (1 Pet. iv. 10). c. The Future-Perfect (passive in classic Greek ; called often the paulo-post Future) is but the middle Future reduplicated. Luke xix. 40, is the only instance in the New Testament : KeKpd^ovrai, will immediately cry out. Accentuation. — The Perfect Infinitive accents the penultimate -hai. In the active Participle, the stem-syllable, masc. -or, fern, -ut, is accented all through, the latter circumflexed wherever possible. AeXwKws, \i\vKvia, \i\vK6s, \€\vk6tos, \e\vKvias, \€\vk6tos. In the middle and passive, the Infinitive accents the penult., circumflex on diphthongs and long vowels, ffe^ovKevadai, T€Tt^7j(r0ot, reTvtpOai. The participle accents the penultimate ; as \e\vfi4uos, \f\vix4uri, \e\vix4vov. 100. Deponent Yerbs. Deponent verbs have no active voice, but may be either middle or passive in form. This is decided by the Aorist. Thus : Se'xo/iai, to receive; Fii-st Aor., ide^dpLTjv (middle). /SovXofiai, to wish; First Aor., e^ovXrjdrjv (passive). alarddvoiiai, to perceive ; Second Aor., yadop-Tju (middle) Some verbs have both Aorists, active and passive, with the same meaning; as diTOKplvop.ai, to answer; First A.ov., dneKpivdixriu And diT€Kpi6r]v, I answered ♦ Deponent transitives often have each tense with its proper force. Thus : Idopai, to heal; laadfjujv, I healed; Iddrjv, I was healed. Xoyi(oiJLaL, tO reckon ; fKoyiadfirjv, I reckoned ; eXoyiadrjv, I was reckoned. The verb ylyvop.ai, to become (yev-, see 94, 8, a) has the forms, Fut., yevfjcrop.ai ; First Aor., eyevrjOrjv; Second Aor., fyfvofxrjv ; Perf., yiyova (Second Perf); rarely yeyevrjiiai. Indio. Pres. 5er, Imperf. First Aor. iSel, Subj. Inf. Se'77 Selu, Part. Pres. 5iou, § 101.] tinipersonal and defective veiibs. ill 101. Impersonal Yerbs. Impersonal verbs are used only in the Third Person singular, and are generally rendered into English with the pronoun it. For the grammatical construction of impersonals, see § 171. The chief impersonal verbs are dei, it is necessary ; one ought; Xpri, it is expedient, ot fitting ; irpiirei, it becomes; doKu, it seems; fieXei, it is a care. Tlxe following forms of these verbs almost all occur in the New Testa- ment. The participle, it will be observed, is neuter. Some of the verbs ai-e also found personally : — ^XP^^t e7ifjf7re(j'), e^oK^i, XPWai, irpeirov, Sokovv, From elfjLi, the substantive verb, is formed the impersonal e^ea-ri, it is lawful ; part., e^ov. 102. Defective Verbs of the First Conjugation. The explanations given under the several Tenses have suf- ficiently accounted for most of the so-called " irregularities " in the conjugation of verbs in -». Some verbs, however, of very frequent occurrence, are anomalous in another way. The ancient Greek tongue, like all early languages, while destitute of words expressing the more complex ideas, had a redundancy of terms denoting some of the simplest actions. Hence arose many synonymous words, some of which, being* evidently unnecessary, were afterwards dropped. But in. several instances, of two or three verbs meaning the same thing, different tenses were discontinued in each, so that forms of distinct verbs had to be brought together to con- stitute a whole. Compare in English go, without a Preterite, and ivent, without a Present, except in some phrases, wend. 112 DEFECTIVE VERBS. [§102. Occasionally, again, where the same tense of two syno- nymous verbs has been retained, it expresses two different shades of meaning. 103. The following are the principal verbs which thus derive their forms from different roots : — (1) alp€(o, to fake (in comp., KaBaipeco, to take down ; irpoaipecof to take beforehand, &c.) ; Mid., alpovpai, to choose ; Principal Tenses, alpr}(Tco, alprjaofiai, ^prjKa, yprjfiai, rjpedrjv, alpedr)(ro[xai. From stem cX- j Second Aor. act., elXov ; Inf., fkeiu ; mid., elkofirjv ; Inf., iXeaBai. (2) tpxop.ai, to go, come; Impf., rjpxoni^v. Other tenses from stem IXvO-, lengthened into IXcvO- (Fut.), contracted into 1X0- (Second Aor.) ; Fut., ikcvaofxai ; Perf., eXrjXvda 'j Plup., eXrjXvdciv j Second Aor., ^\9ov ; in the several moods, eXde, e\6a>, eXdoifii, iXdelv, iXdav. So many compounds. (3) ea-dio), to eat ; Impf., ^o-Biov ; Second Aor. from ^ay-, tcjiayov, (jiayeiv'f Fut , , shall know (Heb. viii. 11). (5) Tp€x<^i lo run ; Second Aor. from Spcp.-, fbpa\iov ; Fut., bpa- fiovfiai (LX.X.) (6) (j)€pa>, to bear ; Fut. from stem ol-, otaca. Tenses from 4vryK- or ^v€K-: First Aor. act., fjvfyKa; Second Aor., ijveyKov, eveyKflv; First Aor. pass., tjvexBrjv ; Perf, ivrjvoxa, with double reduplication. Compare irpoa-cfyepo), €la(liepa>, k.t.X. (7) etirov ; Second Aor., / said (supplies Present and Imperfect from (fyrjfjLt, second conjugation) ; stem, lir- ; First Aor., «?7ra. Tenses from 4p- : Fut, epeco, epSy ; Perf, etpriKa ; Perf. pass., elprjfiau Tenses from (>t- : First Aor. pass., fppidtjv or epprjdrjv ; Part., prjOeig, § 103.] SUMMARY OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 113 ^ ft ^ • ft C3 eg- o o. ft o w ft o I- • ?5 (ft ft u» C5 ^ Si 3 3 ^-§->e^C3 ft ^ S b ;:i i, =i l-|-> t^t" 3 c^ IS ^ iS 11^ iS VQ vvy >tQ ""S «VW "VW w o *J^ vw O .^^ vw . . . ft r I . o • • • >* s |l '< ^ ^ y< '< '< 3 ;i ^ ;i S» vw C^ ^« h cs rvy -e- C r^ ^ ^ x^ ^Q.^ "W ft I- C5 a. -e- -e- >3 -o cS.ft C3 ^ e =J. ft S b i.^ C5 o ft .^ ^ f '■ ^ fH Ci_; ;-! o DO O o 114 DEFECTIVE VERBS. [^ 103. These forms are not all actually found in the New Testament, though most of them are. Other forms occur in Greek authors, and, if required, may easily be formed by the usual analogies. Exercise 13.— On the Defective Verbs. [The following forms, which should be carefully analyzed, are all from the " Sermon on the Mount," and illustrate the frequency with which this class of verbs occurs. In addition to the meanings of the verbs- given in their para- digms, and unnecessary, therefore, to repeat, it must be noted that the prefix els denotes into ; e^, out of; napa, by or aside {napepxofiai, to pass away) ; and Trpos, in addition to. For further details, see § 147, a, 1, and the Vocabulary.] Forms. — oyjrovrai, tScoo-iv, o?5e, oiSarf, eiTraxn, ippedrj, fiTr?;, epf??, epovcriy rjkOov, TrapiXdrj, eiaeXBrjTe, €\6a>v, 'e^ekdr^s, eicreX^e, iXderco, €l(re\$€T€, ela-epxopevoi) ela-eXevcreTat, Trpoarcjieprjs, irp6(T(^epey €l(r€veyKrjs, f^eXe, (pdyrjTe, (pdycopev. 104. The Second Conjugation, on Yerbs in -jit. The chief peculiarity of the Second Conjugation is that the Present and Imperfect tenses, and in many verbs the Second Aorist active and middle, affix the ancient terminations (see § 70)* to the stem, without a connecting vowel. The mood- vowels, however, of the Subjunctive and Optative are retained. The old Infinitive ending, -vat, reappears. The other tenses conform to the paradigm of the First Conjugation, with occasional exceptions, that will be noted in their place. * These terminations are, in the Active, for the Present (as a principal tense), singular, -/i«, -cri, -n ; plural, -yitv, -re, -vci ; for the Imperfect and Second Aorist (as historical), singular, -v, -s, -v (generally dropped) ; plural, -Hfv, -T6, -aav. The ancient Imperative ending, -0», also appears. In several oases the terminations are slightly modified, as the paradigms will show. The analogy to the AorUts passive of the i'irst Conjugation will be observed throughout, in form and accentuation. §105.] VERBS IN -H-t. 115 105. Modifications of the Stem. Yerl>s in -^i modify tlie verbal stem in one or more of three ways. a. A pure stem lengthens the vowel in the active indicative singular. Thus from a-, say, we have first person, <\>r)-\i.l\ third person, (\)r\-(yL h. Most stems prefix a reduplication in the Present and Imper- fect tenses. Thus, 8o-, give, first becomes Sw-, as above ; then, diBoi-fxi. So TiBrjfjii, from 0€-, put. The vowel prefeiTed in this reduplication is I. The root trra-, place, accordingly makes taTijfxi, and €-, send, Irjui. Sometimes the stem is reduplicated within itself (the Attic reduplication, see § 99, a), as, from ova-, profit, oviurifii. In other cases, a nasal -v- is inserted, modified before labials into -jt-; thus irpa-, burn, gives nlfjLTrprjfu. c. Several verbs add the syllable -w- to the stem before the per- sonal endings in the Present and Imperfect tenses. Pure stems take -VW-. Thus, SeiK-, show, gives deUvvfii ; and orpo-, strew or spread (with lengthened vowel, as above), orpcowu/xi. d. It is convenient, then, to mark two chief classes of verbs in -fit. The first exhibits the simple lengthened stem, generally with reduplication preceding. The second inserts -w- or -vvu- between the stem and the per- sonal endings. 106. Paradigms of the First Class. These also fall into two divisions. The former exhibits the normal forms ; the latter contains a few verbs, with short mono- syllabic stems, somewhat irregular in their conjugation, and, from their importance, requiring separate treatment. To the latter class belongs the substantive verb : et/ii, / a^^j; flvaij to be. 116 VERBS IN -|ii — FIRST CLASS — ^PARADIGMS. [§107. 107. Regular Forms, Stems A-, E-, 0-. The tenses conjugated like those of verbs in -« will be given at the end of the paradigms. The accent throughout is generally thrown back as far as possible. Exceptions will be noted. tarrjiiL, to place ; TCOrjfXL, to put ; 6i8(t)/xt, to give. Stem, o-ra- Oe- do- Active. INDICATIVE. Present, LO-TrifXL ridriiiL bCbcOHL toT-qs rCdris bCbios L(m](rL{v) TLdr](n{y) bLb(t)(Tl(v) Lardfjiev* TiOefxcv biboixev tardre HdcTC bib0T€ t(TTda-L{v) TLOiaaL(v) bLb6a(n(v) Tm perfect. tarrjv hier)v ebCbdiv Lorrjs hi6r]s ibCbois tcTT] hidr] or Irie^d ibCboi or ibCbovt tcTTdfjiev €TLd€fieV €bLbo[Ji€V tordre hCdcTc cbiboTc to-rdcrav hCdca-avf ibiboaav 2nd Aorist, €(TTrjV €(TT7]S €arTrjfX€V eO^jJLev eSo/xei; €(7TriT€ ^e€T, eboT€ €(m](rav €6€(rav cboaav * Rom. iii. 31, has la-rufxev, a doubtful heading, as from a form of the First Conjugation contracted. t 2 Cor. iii. 13 ; Acts iii. 2, have iTlBovv, as from a form of the First Conjugation contracted. X Matt. XX vi. 2G, &c. As from a form of the First Conj, contracted. § 107.] VERBS IN -I" FIRST CLASS — PARADIGMS. 117 Stem, ara- Oe- So- IMPERATIVE. Present, taTT] for ta-radL Tie^i for TiOen bChov for UboOi toraro) Tl6€T(0 biboTO) ta-Tare TiOere bCb0T€ la-rdTCDaav TiBirooaav bLboTdicrav 2x1(1 Aorist, (TTqdl or (TTOL* ee(n(v) 2nd Aorist, oTw, K.r.A. 6(0, K.T.X. b(0, K,T.\. like Pres. like Pres. like Pres. OPTATIVE. Present, iarat-qv TideC-qv biboLTJV laraC-qs rt^etrys biboCrjs loraCri TLdeir] btboLV IcrTOiixev TiOeiiiev biboTfjiev laTOLTe TiOelre 6t8otT€ iaraiev TiBeUv bibolev 2nd Aorist, o-raC-qv ddriv boir]u or 8(i)7;y a-Taiqs Oeirjs boi7]s or bc^ri TLdiaOui biboa-Ooi taraa-dc TideaOe bCboo-Oe iaTda-Oiacrav TiOeaOuiaav 6t6oV^&)(Tav bocrOooarav I 120 VERBS IN -jii — FIRST CLASS PARADIGMS. [§ 107. Stem, 0"ra- <9€- 5o- 2ad Aorist, 2nd Aorist, 2nd Aorist, 2nd Aorist, SUBJUNCTIVE. 6S)fiai dfjrai OPTATIVE. Oelo Oelro e€iix€6a INFINITIVE. Biadai PARTICIPLES. 6€[X€V0S 6c3/xat 8(1) b&raL b(oiJL€6a bcavTai b0LfX7]V ^ 0010 Sotro boCix^da bolcrO^ bolvTo bocrOai bofievos Tenses after the Model of the First Conjugation. Active. INDICATIVE. arrjaci} drjau) bcaao) €(rTr](ra €dr]Ka (bcoKa ^(rn)Ka re^etxa S/Soo/ca €(TTr]Kas ' or €(rTafji€V* Future; 1st Aorist, Perfect, • This syncopated or shortened form ia very usual So in Perf., Inf. and Part. § 107.] VERBS IN -Jii— FIRST CLASS — PARADIGMS. Stem, ora- Oe- So- 121 Perfect, INDICATIVE — continued, karriKaTe or €(TTaT€ • Pluperfect, kcrTriKa(TL{v) or 'i(TTa(n{v) €i(TTrjK€Li; or (e)re^e^K€«^ IMPERATIVE. {k)h€h(aK€lV 1st Aorist, Perfect, (TTTJa-OV i(TTr}K€ Ti6€LK€ bib(i)K€ 1st Aorist, Perfect, SUBJUNCTIVE. arrjaQ} 8a>o-co* bebcaKoi OPTATIVE. Future, 1st Aorist, Perfect, a-TTia-OLfiL (TTYia-aiixi kcPT7\K0llXl Orja-oifjiL TeOeiKOLiJLi Swo-oi/xt bebcaKOifXL INFINITIVE. Future, 1st Aorist, Perfect, (TT7}r)iiij to say (stem ^o^). The Present Indicative is usually enclitic, except second person singular, otherwise oxytone ; third person singular, (f)rji]v; third person singular, fcfit], (See § 103, 7). * To this remark there is one exception if the reading S<&, / set, or seat; eoixai, I seat myself (like eCofiai ; see also KaOi^a) ; ^p.ai, I have seated myself, and so am now sitting. Only found in the New Testament compounded with the preposition Kard, dovjn. KaO^fxai, I am sitting down, second person, Kad^, for KaOri^ai ; Imperative, KdOov, for Kddrjo-o; Infinitive, KadijaBai; Participle, KaOrjfievos ', Imperfect Indicative, cKaOrjprjv, properly a Pluperfect. 2. Ke^fiai, to lie down (stem kc-), properly also a Perfect, "I have laid myself," or " have been laid down ;" Infinitive, Keta-dat ; Par- ticiple, Keifievos ; Imperfect Indicative, iKciprjv, -ao, -to. 110. The three stems, lo--, 1-, and h, being marked by special peculiarities, must be placed alone. The first of the three is by far the most important, as the stem of the sub- stantive verb, esse, to be. With the personal termination, -p, the stem (€o--/xt) becomes d^iC, I am ; and with the Infinitive ending, -vai, etj^at, to be. 126 VERBS IN -(11 — FIRST CLASS — SPECIAL FORMS. [§ 110. Several tenses are wanting in the conjugation of this verb, which is as follows : — Stem, ^cr- INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, am. €t for eo-o-t €Ofl€V kcrri ecrrt €1(tC{v) Imperfect or Aorist, was. Tjv or rj}x7]v rjfjiev or ijfjLcOa Future, shall be. eaofJLaL €(rri €(TTai (for eo-erat) ^(TOVTai IMPERATIVE MOOD. Be thou. taOi ioTTc iaro) or tJt(o ecrrojcray SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD , Present, mai/ be. j5 OPTATIVE MOOD. Present, might be. €tr)aav § 110.] VERBS IN -1*1 — FIRST CLASS SPECIAL FORMS. 127 INFINITIVE. Present, to he, elvai. Future, to be about to be, eo-ecr^at. PARTICIPLES. Present, beinc/, wi', ova-a, ov ; gen. ovros, oiVrys, ovtoSj k-tA.. Future, about to be, ea-oixevos, -t), -ov, -ov, -r]s, -ov, k.t.X. Note on Accentuation. — In the Present Indicative, with the exception of the second person singular, this verb is an enclitic, excepting (1) where it follows a paroxytone, when it retains its accent as above ; and (2) in the third person, where it is di. predicate, when it becomes paroxy- tone, as ^(TTi ©eds, there is a God. It is also paroxytone after ws, ovk, €t Kolf TovT, ciAA,'. Thus, ovK effTt, it is not ; tovt* eari, that is to say. 111. !N^ot unlike tlie substantive verb in conjugation, and therefore to be carefully distinguished from it, are tlie verbs et/ut (stem 1-), go, and tryjut (stem I-), send. Neither of them is found in the ISTew Testament,* except in composition. It will suffiQC to give a few forms of etfxt, to show the differences between it and the substantive verb ; while the most impor- tant compound of tr/jut is subjoined in full. Forms of et/x6, to go (stem 1-) : — Ind.- -Pres. etjoti d elcTL LfJL€V LT€ iao-i(i;) f) Imp. fl€LV fl^LS y€L fl€i[Ji€V fl^LT^ fjecrav Imper. Wl LTCO ire LTuxrav SUBJ.- -Pres. tco trjs Iv LODfJieV XrjT^ tcocniv) Opt.- -Pres. 'iOLfJiL toLS XoL L0LIX€V to ire LOL€V Inf.— -Pres. Uvai Part. —Pres. I6v lovaa lov * Some MSS. read in John vii. 34, .S6, for tlfxi, I am, elfii, I {will) go. This present tense has in classic Greek a Future significance, equivalent to the English idiom, I am going. 128 VERBS IN -|ii — FIRST CLASS. [§ 112. 112. Conjugation of trjfiiy to send, in its Compound, acpCrjixL. The stem is I-, which, reduplicated, gives Irjfxi. Prefixed is the preposition dno, from, away from ; the o being lost before t by- elision, and the it changed by the aspirate into irjni, to send away, let go (permit), forgive. The tenses which follow the analogy of the First Conjugation are included, so far as necessary, in the following paradigm, and will readily be traced. INDICATIVE. Active. -Lr]s or -ets,* -Lr](n{v) -L€T€ -La€laav IMPERATIVE. Pres., a(f)L€L 2 Aor., a(f)€s acfyUro) ad-r]Vi -t;?, -r/ infinitive. Pres., d<|)teVai participles. Pres., dU[Ji€da, -aOe, -vto Perf., sing., a(f)€liJiaL a^eiaai , a(^etrat „ plur., a(f)eLfM€0a acfyeicrde CK^eivTai or d(/)ea)i;rat* Plup., a(f)€LiJLr]V acpclcro acfyelro, k.t.X, IMPERATIVE. Pres., a(f)i€(To or acpCov a^iiaOoi, k.t.X. SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres., d(|)ta)/[xat, -irj, -f^rat, k.t.X. -LcafieOa, -CrjaOe, -ioiVTai OPTATIVE. Pres., a(pLOLiJ.r]v or cKpi^i^riv, -oio or -eto, -cnro or -etro, k.t.X. INFINITIVE. Pres., acpCeo-Oai PARTICIPLE. Pres., acf)L£iJi€vos Middle only. INDICATIVE. Put., acfyrja-ofxaL 2 Aor., dc^et/xrjr, as Plup. IMPERATIVE. 2 Aor., a(f)0Vf a(l)4(T0iiai, -fj, -rJTat, k.t.X. OPTATIVE. Put., acprjcroLiJLrjv 2 Aor., acpoifJLrjv, -oio, -otro INFINITIVE. Put., a(f)ria-€ efaKw OPTATIVE. Fut., beC^oLixt ^(acTOiiJLL 1 Aor., Se^^ai/zt C'^a-aifxt Perf., beb^CxpLfiL kQaKoiiii INFINITIVE. Fut., hd^eiv C^a€iv 1 Aor.,8etfat fScrat Perf., Sedeix^Vat ffo/ceWt Middle and Passive. INDICATIVE. Perf., bibcLyixaL efcoo-juat Plup,, ibcbeCyfirjv ^(t)fa>(rjUT;i; IMPERATIVE. Perf., 6e8eifo SeSet^^co, /c.r.A., Ifocro efwo-^co, k.t.A. SUBJUNCTIVE. Perf,, bebeuyixevos Si i^^a-fiivos ca OPTATIVE. Perf., 5e5eiyjueW e??7P ^ftotr/x^vos etrjj' § 114.] VERBS IN -V-i — SECOND CLASS. 133 Stem (consonant), deiK- (vowel), ^o- INFimTlVE. Perf., behelxOcLL cfwo-^a- Middle only. INDICATIVE. Fut., 8et£ojuiat ^(aaoixat 1 Aor., €8etf(i/xr/z^ €C(a(rdfi'i]v IMPERATIVE. 1 Aor., Set^at fcSo-at SUBJUNCTIVE. 1 Aor., 8e^fa)/!xat fc5.iy-), only found in the New Testament in forms like the First Conjugation; First Aorist, efic^a; Perfect Participle, fxcjiiyiuii. 2. oXXv/xt, to destroy, to lose (stem, 6X-, or -oXc) ; hence oX-wyn, and with the v assimilated, oKkvfXL), only found in the New Testa- ment wdth the prefixed preposition, airo. Present Indicative, aTToXXu/it ; Middle and Passive, oTroXXv/iai. Chiefly found in tenses derived from collateral stem diroXe-, Active Future, aTroXeVoj, once aivokai y* First Aorist, oTrciXeo-a ; Perfect, with neuter meaning, I perish ! diroXoiXa ; Middle Future, a.7r6Xovfxai ; Second Aorist, aTTcoXo'/LiTyi/ ; Present Participle, ol aTroXKvfxevoi often, tJie perishing. 3. ofivvni, to swear (stem, -6^ or -6}jio-). The forms used in the New Testament are Present, as of First Conjugation, ofxvvoi, oiivveu (but in Mark xiv. 71, the best MSS. read ofivvvai) ; First Aorist, afjioaa \ Infinitive, ofioa-ai, from 6^6-. 4. pTjyvvni, to tear (stem, paY-). Present Passive Indicative, third person plural, pr)yvvvTai (Matt. ix. 17); but generally with forms as from prjo-cra, pr]^(i>. 117. Yerbs with Yowel-stems, like C^vwiml. 1. A-STEMS. — Kcpdvuvfiij to mix (stem, K€pd-). Only twice, First Aorist, (Kepaaa (Rev. xviii. 6) ; Perfect Participle Passive, kckc- paa-pevos (Rev. xiv. 10). ♦ 1 Cor. I 19, from LXX. § 117.] VERBS IN -p — SECOND CLASS. 135 2. E-STEMS. — ej/wfit, to clotJie (stem, fc-), only found with the preJSxed preposition, ayi(^i, about. Present Active Indicative, third person singular, a^<^teWuo-t(i/) (Matt. vi. 30 ; Luke xii. 28), and Perfect Passive Participle, with augment prefixed to the prepo- sition, TjfKpiea-fifvov (Matt. xi. 8 ; Luke vii. 25). Kopevpvfxi, to satisfy (stem, Kop€-), First Aorist Passive Participle, Kop€(r6ds (Acts xxvii. 38); Perfect Passive Participle, Ke, dibov, OTJoSaJy^ TTapaSft), ScoTf, eTTtScocrei, dodrjcreTai, didovai, a(p€S, dcpiepev, d(f)^Te, acptrji ft, bvvaaai, bvvarai, bvvao'de, Keipevi], dnoXijrai, opoaai, opoajjs, prj^ci'TiVf dp(f)uvvvaip. m 136 VERBS EXERCISES. [§ 117. Exercise 15.— General, upon the Verbs. *^* The learner should now be expert in trackig any verbal form to its stem. As a test of proficiency, the following list of verbs is subjoined, taken in order from the Second Epistle to the Thessalonians. Let the stem,, conjugation, class, voice, mood, tense, and, when necessary, the number and person, of every one be written down ; if possible, without reference to any paradigm. Prefixes not belonging to the root are printed in thick type. The Yocabulary or Lexicon must be consulted for the meaning of the words. CHAPTER I. 3. Ei;(api(rTeif, 6(^eiko}xev, vtvipav^dvei, TrXeovd^ec. 4. Kav^dcrdai (how do you distinguish in such a word between the First and Second Conjugations 1), avex^aBe. 5. KaTa^ia)dr]vai, ndax^Te. 6. avTarrodovvai, OXl^ovctiv (Participle). 7. ffki^o^evois. 8. SiSoi^oy, dboa-i, itraKovovai (Participle). 9. riaova-iv. 10. eXBrj, Ivbo^ao-dTJvai, Oavfiaa-drjvai, iriarev- ixciv (Participle), iiricrTevdr]. 11. irpoa-evxofxeOa, d^Kao-rj, Trkqpoicrrj. 12. ivbo^a(T6rj. CHAPTER II. 1. *Epo)Ta>fiev. 2. aaXevdrjvai, OpoeiaOai, IvearTjKev. 3. ^aTrarrja-Tj, eXdrjj atroKakvv, yevrjrai. 8. atroKaXvcpdrja-eTai, avaXaxrei, Karap- yT)a€t. 10. atroXXvpevoiSf ide^avro, acoBrivai. 11. nepyJAei, TriareCo-at (distinguish this from Optative forms, as in ver. 17). 12. KpiBaa-i, TicTTevcravTes, €v8oKT)(ravT€^, 1 3. oc^eiXpfiei/, ^vxapiarelv, rjyamjpevoi,, elXero {iCXaro is read by Lachmann and Tischendorf; see § 97, note). li. €KdXe(T€v, 15. (TTrjKeTe (see § 108, 4), /cparetre, eSibdxBrjTe. 16. dyaTTTjdas, dovs. 17. irapaKoXeVai (Optative), arrjpL^ai (Optative). CHAPTER III. 1 . IIpop-€V. 3. aTrjpl^ci, (pvXd^ei. 4. 7r€7roi6ap.ev, 'irapayyeXXopev, iroielTe, Troi^a-ere. 5. Korevdvvat (Opta- tive). 6. (TTeXXeadai, trtpnraTovvros, trapeXa^e. 7. pip.elcrOai, fjraKTr)- crapev (from dra/crc'o)). 8. €(f)dyop€v, epya^opevoi, Ivi^apijo-ai. 9. exop.fv, ba>p,€V, 10. TJixev,Trapr)yyeXXop,ev,deX€i,epyd^e(r6ai,e(T6UTa>. 11. aKovofitp, § 117.] EXERCISES. 137 fpya^'o/zeVou?, TTipKepya^ofievovs- 12. irapaicaXovfxev, icrQlwcTLv. 13. cK/ca- KrjcrrjTe, KoXoTToiovvTes. 14. viraKoveij (TTjfxeiova-de, frvvavafxiyvvade, ivrpaTrt], 15. fjyclo-6ef vovdeTelre. 16. dcorj. 17. ypdv. 2. pampLOi ol rrevdovvTes '^ on avrol 7rapaK\r}6rj(TOVTai. 3. puKapioL ol irpaels '* on avTo\ KXijpovopr^crovcn ttjv yrjv. 4. fiaKapLoi ol TreivcovTes Koi bi-\lra>vTes^ ttjv diKaioavvrjv ' on avrol X^P' TacrOrjcrovTai. 5. paKapioL ol iXerjpoves' on avTo\ i\(r]dr)(T0VTai. 6. fiampioL ol Kadapol rrj Kap8ia ' on avrol tov Qeov oyj/ovrai.^ 7. paKdf)ioi ol elprjvoTTOioi ' on avrol viol' Qeov Kkrjdrjaourai. 8. fiaKaptoL ol debicoypevoL eveKev° diKaioavvrjs ' on avrav ecrnv rj jSacTiXeia tS>v ovpavav. 1 Dative : in {the) spirit, as hereafter explained, § 280, /. Compare rr} Kapdiq,, 6. 2 Of them = theirs. 3 The mourning ones = those who mourn, § 200. Compare the Parti- ciples in sentences 4, 8. * See § 39. 5 Hungering and thirsting /or righteousness (ace), § 281, a. 6 See § 103^(4). 7 Nominative after a copulative verb. See § 165, note. 8 For the sake of (gen. ), § 133. 138 EXEKCISES. [§ 117. II. From John i. Prepositions, anoy with Gen., /row, of (a place). didj „ 6y means of. e'K, „ out of. cv, with Dat., in, with plural, among. TTapd, with Gen., from (of persons). npos, with Ace, unto, with (§307, r,2). Further details, Ch. VI., and Syntax. Adverb used as Preposition. Xtoplsi with Gen., without. Negative Adverbs. ov, not. ov8e, not even. Conjunctions. Kai, and (§ 136, 1). CDS, as (§ 136, 2). Yerses 1-5. *'EiV d.p)(rj rjv 6 Xoyos , Ka\ 6 \6yos rjv rrpos tov Qfbv, Koi Geoy rjv 6 "koyos.^ ovTos rjv ev dpxij npos tov Qeop. Tlavra 8i avTov eyevero,^ Koi xoapls avTov eyevero ovdc ev, o ykyovev. iv otrw ^(bj) rfv, Koi tj ^coff rjv TO (f>S)5 Ta>v dv6pa>Tr Koi oi 7rpo^i]TaL,^ evpf)Kapev, 'lT](rovv^ tov vibv tov 'laxrrjKf) Tov'^ dnb tia^apeT. koX eiirev auro)^ NadavarjX, *Ek Na^apcr bvvaTai ti ayadov elvai',^ Xeyei avTa^ ^iXiinros,''Epxov koi i5f. ^ 6 \6yos is the subject, § 206. 2 Singular verb, with plural neuter nominative, § 173. 3 To him, dative after the verb of saying, § 278, b. * Understand /«*?» as antecedent : "him whom," § 347, * Understand ^ypai^iav. « (Namely) Jesus, in apposition (§ 177) with the antecedent (2) above, ? Simply refers to vl6u (§ 230, a), not to be translated. ■ The infinitive dependent on Svvarcu (§ 389, a) : can anything good be. § 117.] EXERCISES. 139 III. Selected Sentences. be, but. ort, tllCtt, Prepositions (additional). i Conjunctions, fls, with Ace, into. \ eVi, „ to. j fXfTci, with Gen., together with. \ 1. ^'Eroifidaare^ ttju 686v Kvpiov. 2. *Ij/cro{), eXerja-ov [xe. 3. Qapcrei^f eyetpot^, (^com (re. 4. H 7rl(rTi9 (Tov aecroiKe ere. 5. *A(fie(ouTaL (tov al afxapTiai. 6. 2vvedpafi€'" irpos avTovs nas 6 Xaos. 7. MereKaXeo-aro tovs Trpea-^VTepovs Trjs iKKXrjatas. 8. MaKapiov ecrri 8i86uaL paXkov rj Xap^dveiv, 9. Knlaapa^ eTnKeKXrjaai, enl Kaicrapa TTopeva-r]. 10. *Avd(TTT]di^, KOI arrjOi enl tovs Tro'Say (Tov. 11. *H TTiaris vpoov KaTayyeXXeraL iv oX(o T<5 Koa-pto. 12. ^Ev(ppdvdr]T€^f edinj, pera tov Xaov avTov. 13. *Qs cro(f)6s apx^iTCKTOiV SepeXiov TedeiKa, aXXos 5e eVot/coSo/xet. 14. ^Oelpovcnv rjOrj xpw6*^ opiXiai KaKai. 15. *H dya.TT'q tov XpiiTTOv avvex^i- rjpas. 16. Xa}pf}(raTe ^pas, ovdeua r)bLKr]crapev, ovbeva ecpdelpapev, ovheva eTrXeoveKTT] crapev. 17. ILdvTa boKipd^eTe ''■ to koXou kutcx^'''^' ^.tto navTos €i8ovs novrjpov^ diT^X€] PREPOSITIONS. 141 eK, e^ (motion from the mteiior), from, out of, npo, before, whether of time or place. To these may be added most of the "improper" prepositions, as they are often called ; being really adverbs with a prepositional government. (For a list of these, see § 133.) 120. Prepositions governing the Dative only. iv, in, of time, place, or element ; among, avv (union of co-operation), with. 121. Prepositions governing the Accusative only. dvd (up in), used in the phrases dva fiea-ov, in the midst of; dva Hfpos, in turns (1 Cor. xiv. 27). els (motion to the interior), into, to, untOy with a view to. 122. Prepositions governing the Genitive and Accusative. dtd, through. Gen (through, as proceeding from), through, by mean£ oj. Ace. (through, as tending towards), on account of, or owing to. Kara, down. Gen. (down from : so, literally, 1 Cor. xi. 4), against. Ace. (down towards), according to, throughout, during, over. fieTa (union of locality ; compare avp). Gen., together with, among. Ace, after. Trepi, around. Gen., about, concerning, on behalf of; once, above (3 John 2). Ace, about, round about, virep, over. Gen., above, on behalf ofjor. Ace, beyond. vno, under. Gen., by (of the agent or efficient cause). Ace, under, in the power of, close upon (as Acts v. 21, close upon morning, i.e., " very early"). h2 prepositions. [^ 123. 123. Prepositions governing the Genitive, Dative, AND Accusative. eVi (superposition). Gen., wpon (as springing from), over, in the presence of, in the time of. Dat., wpon (as resting on), in addition to, on account of Ace, up to (used of place, number, aim), over (of time, j)lace, extent). Trapd (juxtaposition). Gen. (from beside), from, used of persons, as OTTO of places. Dat. (at the side of), near, with, of persons only, except John xix. 25. Ace. (to, or along the side of), beside, compared with, i.e., so as to be shown beyond, or cordrary to, instead of TTpos (in the direction of). Gen., in favour of, only in Acts xxvii. 34. Dat., at, close by. Ace, towards, in referen^ce to. 124. Synoptical Table of the Prepositions. The Prepositions are here exhibited in groups, both because their meaning may thus be more easily remembered, and because the com- parison, both in meaning and form, suggests some interesting points of relationship. For further details the student may consult Dr. Donald- son's "New Cratylus," Book ii., chapter 2. Only the general meaning of every preposition is given in the following table ; and the initial capitals denote the cases governed. Cases found in classic Greek, but not in the New Testament, with certain prepositions, are bracketed. G. *A7ro', in reference to the exterior, from. *Ek, in reference to the interior, ^rom, proclitic. 'Ev, „ „ m, „ *Ets, „ „ to, „ 'Az/a, up ; opposite of Kara. Kara, dovm ; opposite of ava. *E7ri, superposition, upon. Uapd, juxtaposition, beside. Xlpd?, propinquity, towards. G. (d.) a. Ilfpi, circumvention, entire ; around. (g. d. a.) 'A/x(/)«', circumvention, partial; ahouL 0. D. A. (D.) A. G. A. G. D. A. G. D. A. G. D. A. § 124.] PREPOSITIONS. 143 {G. A. 'YTr/p, over ; (super). G. A. 'Ytto, under; {sub). !G. A. Mera, association, toith, after. D. 2jJi/, co-operation, with. {G. ^kvTi, opposition, specific, over against. G. n/}d, opposition, general, in front of before. Q. A. Aia, through^ kindred with dvo, and regarding the object as divided into two parts. 'A/i<^i is not used in the New Testament, except in composition. In classic Greek, its use is comparatively rare. With all three cases it means about, or around. Accentuation. — The Prepositions are all oxytone except the proclitics, els, in, iv. 125. For further details as to the meaning and use of the prepositions, see Chapter X., especially the Table, § 147, a ; also Syntax. In explanation of the very various significance which may belong to the same preposition, two points should be noted : (1) that its meaning will be necessarily modified by the signification of the verb that it may follow, and by that of the noun which it governs, as also by the case of the latter; and (2) that as all lan- guages have a far smaller number of words than there are shades of thought to express, one word must often have many applications. Then, as no langiiage is exactly parallel, word for word, with any other, the variations of meaning included under one Greek term, for instance, will not be the same as those embraced by the nearest English equivalent. Thus, vnep may often be translated for / but the applications of the two words, though perhaps equally various, are very far from being identical. ] H ad\t:rbs. [§ 126. Chapter YII.— ADVERBS. 126. The simplest, and perhaps the original form of an Adverb, is some case of a substantive, a pronoun, or an adjec- tive agreeing with a noun understood ; fixed absolutely in that shape to express some quality, manner, place, or time. a. The Accusative is very often thus employed, as ok/x^v (Matt. XV. 16), yet, lit., " up to (this) point;" Trepdv, on the otiier side. In like manner is used the accusative neuter of many adjectives, both singular and plural ; often with the article : as, t6 \onv6v, further- more (once, rou XotTrov, Gal. vi. 17) j to. ttoKKo, for the most part. So, possibly from obsolete adjectives, (rrjfiepov, to-day; avpiov, to-morrow ; x'^^h yesterday. h. The Dative (sometimes in an obsolete form) is also frequently found: as i8ia, privately ; TreCij, by land. Here the iota subscript is often omitted : navrr), always (Acts xxiv. 3, in some copies, navTrj) J fiKq, without a causc. c. The Genitive occurs in avrov, tliere, as well as in other forms, which will be noticed immediately. d. In some instances, a preposition with its case written as one word, is used adverbially, as -napaxprnia, immediately, lit, "along with the business ;" €^ai(f>vr}s, suddenly, lit., "from a steep descent;" KaOe^^s, in order, lit., "according to a special course." e. The older form of the language employed the terminations -06V, -01, and -Be as case-endings of nouns (Gen., Dai, Ace), and when they became obsolete in ordinary declension, they were retained as adverbial terminations to denote whence, where, and whither. Thus : ovpavoOev, from heaven ; naibiSBev, from child Jiood (Mark ix. 21); irepvai (the -ai standing for the older -0i), last year (2 Cor. viii. 10; ix. 2). These terminations are also found in adverbs derived from prepositions and other adverbs, on which see § 132. § 127.] ADVERBS. 145 127. Adverbs in -«s. The most common form of adverbs is, however, that in -ws. This termination, which answers exactly in meaning to our final syllable -/?/,* is affixed to adjective-stems of all forms, the stem- ending, where needful, being modified. For example : First form (§ 34), diKaios, just, 8iKaio- ; diKaiois, justly. Second form (§ 37), nds, all, -rravr- ; ndvrcos, wholly. Third form (§ 41), aXrjdrjS) true, dXT]6€v, stem 6vT-) really. Sometimes an adverb formed from an adjective appears in two forms ; as raxv and raxecos, quickly ; evOvs (probably a corrupt form of evOv) and evdecos, immediately. 128. Comparison of Adverbs. The comparative of adverbs is generally the neuter singular accusative of the corresponding adjective ; the superlative, the neuter plural. Thus : raxecas (or raxv) quickly ; raxiov, more quickly (John xx. 4); rdxi-a-Ta, most quickly (Acts xvii. 15); ev, well (probably from Us, an old equivalent of dya66s) ; ^eXrlov, better (2 Tim. i. 18). Adverbs of other than adjective derivation con- form to this model. So from avco (see § 132) is found dvarepov. Some comparatives take the termination -cos-, as irepiacroTepcoi, more abundantly. An irregular comparative and superlative are fiaXkov, more; fidXiara, most. So, aacrov, nearer (Acts xxvii, 13), attributed to the adverb (in classic Greek); ayxh near; superlative, ayxtcTTa. * It is possibly an old dative plural : -ws = -ois. The accentuation generally follows that of the genitive plural of the adjective; as diKalaVt biKaiws, a\T)6wv, aXriQus. 146 ADVERBS. [§129. 129. Pronominal Adverbs, used also as Conjunctions. Several adverbs are formed indirectly or directly from pro- nouns ; and, like pronouns, are demonstrative, relative, inter- rogative, dependent interrogative, and indefinite (enclitic). The following Table gives the chief pronominal adverbs found in the New Testament : — Demonstrative. Relative. Interrogative. Dependent Interrogative. Indefinite. Time... t6t€, tJien 3t6, wlien fftJrc; when? 6ir6T€, when iroTf, some- vvv, vvvl, now 7]viKa, when, in parti- cular time Place... avTov, here SSe, Jiere there, thither ived5€, hither ov, where irov'y where? dtrovy where irov, some- wJiere ivTive^v, hence. '69ey, whence ir69ev; whence? thence Maimer o0Tcij(s), thus. as, as iTws; how? Bttus, how vwis), some- so vdnpov, whe- ther how The correlatives in the above Table will be immediately per- ceived. For further details compare under Pronouns, especially §62, and Syntax. OiJra), so, becomes oCras before a vowel, and the indefinite na is always Troas, except in composition. It will be observed that the scheme of adverbs is incomplete in the relative and interrogative divisions, by the omission of the (accusative) form whitlier. Classic Greek supplies the omission by the words oi, ttoI; ottoi, but these are not found in the New Testament, the genitive forms oZ, ttoO; ottov being used. Compare in English the tendency to say ^^ Wliere are you going?" for " Whither are you going ]" § 130.] ADVERBS. 147 130. Numeral Adverbs. Numeral adverbs end in -is, -kis, or -aKis, as bis, twice ; rpis, thrice; eTTTaKLs, seven times ; i^dofjLrjKovTdKis, seventh/ times (Matt, xviii. 22) ; TToWaKis, many times, ana^, once for all, is exceptionally formed ; ocraKis, as often as (1 Cor. xi. ^b, '2Q>), is from the relative. 131. Adverbs from Yerbs. Ancient verbal forms, used as adverbs, are bevpo, hither, with its plural, bevre. These are generally employed as imperatives, " Come thou (or ye) hither 1" The imperative aye is also employed as a kind of adverb, Go to ! (James iv. 13 j v. 1.) Some verbs in -tt«, expressing national peculiarity, form an adverb in -itrrL. Thus, from iXXrjviCco, we find iXXrjvLorri, in the Greek language ; similarly, i^paiari, in the Hebrew language. 132. Adverbs from Prepositions. Many prepositions have a corresponding adverb in -« (par- oxjiione). Thus, from dvd is formed apa>, upwards; and from Kardf Kdro), downwards. So, 60-&), within; e'^co, without. The termination -Qiv is added to these adverbs also, with a genitive force ; as avcodev, from above ; e^codev, from without. Once a preposition without change is employed as an adverb (2 Cor. xi. 23), {mlp eyS, I {am) more.* 133. Prepositive Adverbs, or Improper Prepositions. Several adverbs may be used like prepositions to govern nouns, and are then termed "improper" or "spurious" prepositions. The following is an alphabetical list of the principal found in the New Testament : — apa, together with. av€v, without. axpi{s), or p€xpt{s), until. ♦ So, vp65, too, often in classical Greek. 148 ADVERBS. [§ 133. eyyusj near, in time or space. eyLTvpocrBcVy hefore. ivavTLov, in front of, ag%lnst. fvcKa (-ev), for the sake of. evaniov, before, in the presence of. e^coj without. eVai/o), above. €o-(B, vnthin. ecoff, as far as. fieaovf in the midst o/'(Phil. ii. 15, MSS.). fiera^Vf between. dnio-Wf oTTcaBev, behind, after. oyjre, at the end of (Matt, xxviii. 1). ttXtjv, except. irXijaiov, near ; TrapairXrio-iov, very near. vTrepcKciva, beyond (2 Cor. x. 16). Xapi-V) by favour of, for the sake of. X«piff, separated from, without. Some of the above, it is evident, are originally adverbial forms of adjectives and substantives. All govern the Genitive, except afia (Matt. xiii. 29), and TrapaTrXrjo-iov (Phil. ii. 27), which take the Dative ; as does eyyvs sometimes. 134. Negative Adverbs. a. The negative adverbs are ov (before a vowel, ovk ; before an aspirated vowel, o^x), not, and firj, not Accentuation. — ov is proclitic, excepting where emphatic ; as oC, No.' (John i. 21). b. For an explanation of the difference between these two words, see Syntax. It must suffice now to say that ov denies absolutely, fiT), on some expressed or implied condition. The former is called the "categorical," or "objective" negative; the latter, the "con- ditional," or " subjective." Both words are used in composition § 134.] ADVERBS. 149 with Tis, Ti (see § 60) ; also with the indefinite adverbs in the Table, § 129, as ovTrco, not yet; fxrjTTOTe, never in any case. c, M.r] is also used as an interrogative adverb, expecting the answer, no ; and, in composition with the interrogative n'?, adds a kind of appeal to the hearers, as though enlisting their assent to the negative : thus, /Ajjrt eyw; (Mark xiv. 19), 7s it I ? ^. e., "It is not I, is it?" 150 CONJUNCTIONS. [§ 135. Chapter YIII.- CONJUNCTIONS AND OTHER PARTICLES. 135, Besides the Conjunctions properly so called, used, as in other languages, to unite words and sentences, there are in Greek several indeclinable words, employed sometimes separately, often in combination with other words, for the purpose of emphasis. These cannot always be translated, the degree of emphasis being too slight for the words of other languages to convey. These indeclinable words, together with the conjunctions themselves (and sometimes the primitive adverbs), are gene- rally called Particles, It belongs to Syntax to discuss the place and power of the particles in a sentence. All, therefore, that is now necessary is, to classify the chief of them, and to indicate their general meaning. 136. ClASSIFICATION OF THE CONJUNCTIVE PaRTICLES. The Conjunctions denote (1) annexation, (2) comparison, (3) dis- junction, (4) antithesis, (5) condition, (6) reason, (7) inference, or (8) result. The relative forms of the adverbs (see § 129) ai-e also really conjunctions. 1. Annexation. — The copulative conjunctions are Kal, and^ also, even; re, and, also. The latter is generally subordinate: re ... »cat, both . . . and, not only . . . hut ; sometimes koX ... t€, or tc ... re. Very generally, however, both... and is expressed by /cat... /eat, as in 1 Thess. ii. 14, 15, &c. 2. Comparison. — As conjunctions of comparison, the particles wy, as ; ucmfp, just as ; Kudas, like as, are used ; generally in cor- relation with the adverb ovroiSt so. (Compare § 129, Table). ^ 136.] coNJUNCTioxs. lol 3. Disjunction. — The disjunctive particles are ^, or; ^ ... If, either ...or, (in general); fJTOL...rj, either ...or, (as an exclusive alternative) ; e'lre ... elVe, whether ... whether. 4. Antithesis. — The antithetic conjunctions are aWd (originally neuter plural of oXXo?) and be, both signifying hut. The adversative sense is much stronger in the former than in the latter. With 5e the particle fxev often stands in the preceding sentence, and may be rendered indeed or on the one hand {hi, on the other), or, more frequently, may be left untranslated, marking simply that the two clauses stand in real or formal antithesis. Etymologically, fi4v is (probably) "the first thing;" be, "the second thing:" the anti- thesis is, therefore, often very slight, a distinction rather than opposition. 5. Condition. — The conditional particles are el, if; etye, if at least ; emep, if at all; edv {el av), if (possibly). For the important rules as to their use with verbs, see Syntax. 6. Cause. — Particles expressive of a reason (causal) are, ort, that, because; ydp,for; bton, because; inei (see § 129), since. 7. hference. — The chief inferential particles are, oZv, there- fore ; To'ivvv, then ; apa, consequently ; b^o, wherefore ; roiyapovv, accordingly/. 8. Result. — The "final" conjunctions are Iva, in order that; wy and oTTcas, so that ; tx-fj, that not, lest. 137. Particles of Emphasis and Interkogation. a. The chief emphatic particles are ye, at least, hideed (enclitic); and bi], certainly, now. To these may be added the enclitics irep, very, verily, and tol, certainly, found in combination with other words, as eTreibrjnep (Luke i. 1), since verily ; fxevToi, however. b. As interrogative particles the following are employed : ft, if, used elliptically, "Tell us if — ;" jj, simply denoting that a question is asked, and requiring no English equivalent save in the form of the sentence; and apa (not to be confounded with apa, § 136, 7), which makes the question emphatic (only in Luke xviii. 8j n 152 PARTICLES. [U37. Acts viii. 30; Gal. ii. 17). For the interrogative adverbs, see §129; and for tlie structure of interrogative sentences, consult the Syntax. 138. Interjections. a. An Interjection is generally but the transcript of a natural instinctive sound, and therefore scarcely ranks among the " paiis of organized speech." Words of this kind in the New Testament are «, ! oh ! ea, ah ! expressive of pain and terror (Mark i. 24 ; Luke iv. 34); ova, ah! expressing scorn and hatred (Mark xv. 29); ovaij woe I alas! often governing a dative; oval vixiv, woe unto you! alas for you! b. The imperative form, tSe, see, is often treated interjectionally, but still more frequently the old imperative middle of the same verb is employed, accented as a pattiuie : *Sov, lo ! lehold I 139.] WORD-FORMATION — SUBSTANTIVES. 1 33 Chapter IX.— ON THE FORMATION OF WORDS. 139. 1. Roots. — Words of all kinds are derived from some Root. For the distinction between root and stem^ see § 10. The root is that part which remains after taking away from a whole family of kindred words all the parts which are different in each. Thus, AK- is the root of aK-ftrj, UK-poSj aK-nv6a. The root expresses the leading idea, or general meaning, which runs through all the kindred words, thougli differently modified in each; thus, AK- expresses the general meaning of "sharpness" or "pointedness." In the formation of words, some are derived directly from the root; as aKfir}, from AK-. Others take as a ("secondary") root the stem of words already^ formed ; as a^/na^oj, from uKfifj (aK|Aa-). Hence we find primary, secondary, tertiary, &c., formations.* Thus :— Primary. Secondary. Tertiary. *AK-;ij;, point 'AKjt-a^eo, to flourish "AK-posy pointed 'AKpi-/3^y, accurate 'AKpipc-m, accuracy. 'AKpip-ws, accurately. 2. Classes of Words. — ^Without attempting here any extended statement of the methods and laws of derivation, it will be useful to specify some of the leading terminations which occui' in the formation of Greek words. Each of these terminations has a particular force and meaning of its own, whatever be the root or stem to which it is joined : thus, Kpi-TT]s, Cv^co-rris, KkeTr-Trjs, TToXi-TTjSj have all the same termination, -ttis, and with the same meaning. * Classes of words may thus be formed, by arranging logetlier * See, for greater detail, the "Bromsgrove Greek Grammar,*' by Dr. G. A. Jacob, § 78. 151: WORD- FORMATION — SUBSTANTIVES. [§ 139. those which have the same terminations, and marking their signi- fication; and this may be done with words of all kinds — sub- stantives, adjectives, pronouns, verbs, and particles. 3. Modification of Stem-endings. — The final vowel or copsonant of the root or stem will be affected by the termination according to the general usages of the language, as illustrated especially in the inflections of tlie verbs. Thus, iroLij-rrjs, from ttoic- (compare § 96, a, &c.), and KaXvjr-ro, KoXvfx-fia (see § 4, d, 4), from koXvit- or KoXvp-. 140. Classes of Substantives. a. First Declension. — 1. Masculine nouns in -ttjs express a niale agent, or pei"son belonging to something. Thus, Kplrrjs, a judge; TToirjrrjSf a maker, doer, poet. Some nouns of this termination are formed from the root of simpler nouns : as ttoXItijs (noXts), citizen ; oiKiTTjs (oiKos), domestic. Accentuation. — Dissyllables of this class, and polysyllables with short penultima, throw back the accent as far as possible, except Kptrfis. So rpevarrjs, Seairdrrjs, if/evo-rat, Stairora (voc.) The rest are oxytone, except iroXirrjs. 2. Feminine Nouns. — i. The termination -£d (paroxytone) ex- presses quality. Adjective stems in cs- or oo- give the forms (pro- paroxytone) -eta, -ota. So, (ro(pia, wisdom (^(ro(f)6s) ', akrjdeia, truth (d\rj&T]s) ; evvoia, good-will (evvovs). A few nouns in -iia, (paroxy- tone) are from verbal stems in -€v, and denote the result of action ; as ^aa-iXcLa, kiTigdom (/Sao-iXeuco) ; TraiBeia, instTtcction {naibevo)). ii. Substantives in -oo-vvt] connected with adjective stems in ov-, rarely in o-, also denote quality; as aaxjipoavvij, prudence, from crv, stem ov- ; ekfrjuoavvq, compassion (cXeiiJ/xtaj/) ; diKatoavvT], righteou^Tiess (dUaioi) ; ayKoavvrj, holiness (dyios), the o- becoming -w, because of the short preceding syllable. (Compare § 42.) b. Second Declension. — 1. Masculine Nouns. — The termination -jtos (oxytone) appended to verbal stems denotes action; as Ironi 6v(o (6v-), to rage, 6vp6sy passion. Sometimes o- intervenes, as in § 140.] ^VORD-FORMATION — SUBSTAJ^TIVES. 155 beanos, bond, from Se-, Se'co, to bind ; or 0, as KkavOyios, lamentation, fi'om KXaf-, /tXa/o), to weep. (See § 96, c) 2. Neuter N'ouns. — i. The ending -rpov, from verbal roots, denotes instrumefit. Thus, Xv-, Xuco, to release ; Xvrpov^ ransom. ii. The termination -lov, from substantive stems, is diminutive: as from -nah (iraiS-), a child ; Traidiov, a little child. To -tov is sometimes prefixed the syllable ap- or i8- : as Traibdpiov, a little boy; KkLvldiov, a little bed, from kXIvij, a couch ; da-o-dptov, a farthing, from Latin as. (See § 154, a.) Diminutives in -lov must be distinguished from neuters of adjectives in -toy, used as substantives : e. g., iKaarrifnov, propitiatory. The masculine and feminine terminations -io-kos, -ia-Kt], are also occasionally used as diminutives. Thus, veavlas (stem, a-), a youth ; vcavloTKos, a lad. So Traibiam], a damsel. Accentuation of Neuters. — Neuter nouns generally retract the accent. Diminutives in lov are, however, paroxytone, except when a short syllable precedes this termination. c. Third Declension. — 1. Masculine Nouns.— i. The suffix -*vs (oxytone), stem cF-, denotes an agent : as ypap.p,aTevs, a scribe, from Ypap-jjiaT-, ypdppa, a letter. (For the declension of these substantives, see § 30, iii.) ii. The terminations -nqp (oxytone) and -rwp (paroxytone, stem Top-) also signify an agent : as (pcca-Trjp, luminary, from ^ws-, light ; pTjTap, an orator, from pc- (in the obsolete verb, pea, to speak). 2. Feminine Nouns. — i. The ending -i-, round about. dva-, up, back again. avTi-, instead of, against, in return for. diro-, away from, dismission, completeness. 8ia-, through, thorough, between. €ls-, into. €K- (l|- before a vowel, iy- before a guttural), out of, forth, utterly. Iv- (ky.- before a labial mute, or |t), in, upon, intrinsically, eirt-, upon, to, in addition. Kara-, down, downright, against. jiera-^ with, participation, change, irapa-, beside, beyond, along, ircpi-, around, over and above, excess. irpo-, before, forward, irpos-, towards, in addition to. ervv- (crvji- before a labial, mute, or jij -, well, prosperously. iraXiv-, again, only in naKiyyeveaiof regeneration (Matt. xix. 28 ; Titus iii. 6). irav-, all (from neuter of iravr-). TTjXc-, afar off, only in n^Xavywy, distinctly (Mark viii. 25). § 147.] WORD-FORMATIOX COMPOUNDS. 163 c Inseparable Particles in Composition. d- (from ava\ intensive : perhaps only in art i/t^co, to gaze steadfastly. d- or dv-, not, tlie usual negative prefix, answering to our un-. 8us-, hardly or ill, like our dis-, mis-, or un-. Tjiii-, half (Latin, semi-), only in fjfiidavfjs, half dead, and Tjfiia>pLov, Iwlf an hour. The Prepositions (Table a), when used in the composition of nouns and adjectives, generally mark a secondary formation, i.e., a derivation from a compound verb. Thus, aTroo-roXos, aiiostle, is not from aTTo and (ttoKos, but from aTrooreXXo), to send forth. So a-rroa-ToXT], apostleship. Again, from eKkeyofxai, to choose out, come €k\€kt6s, chosen, elect ; and cKKoyrj, election. Some such nouns and adjectives, however, are found, without any corresponding com- pound verb. The Adverbs and Inseparable Particles (Tables b, c) (except d- negative) are generally used with substantives and adjectives, not with verbs. Two Prepositions may be combined in the formation of a word, the characteristic formative force of each being retained. Thus, Kadio-TTjixi, to establish, aTroKaQla-T-qixi, to restore; TrapaKoXeofiai, passive, to be comforted,* arvpirapaKakeoixai, to be comforted together ; dcrdyo), to introduce, napeiadycd, to introduce by the bye (2 Pet. ii. 1 ) . So TTiipeia^XBev (Romans v. 20), entered by the way. Again, avriXajj. ^dvop.ai is to help, generally (lit., "to take hold of, over against"), but (rvvavTi\ap^dvop.ai is to help by coming into association with (as Luke X. 40 ; Romans viii. 26). 148. Synthetic Compounds. In synthetic compounds the former word is a noun or a verb, never a particle. When the former word is a noun, if its stem does not already * Literally, to be called to one's side : i.e., for purposes of consolation, or, it might be, of exhortation, or advocacy. Hence the word UapaKXrjTos has the threefold meaning of Comforter, Exhorter, Advocate. (See John xiv. 16, 26; 1 John ii. L) 164 WORD-FORMATION — COMPOUNDS. [§ 148. end in -o, tlie vowel -o- is commonly added as a connective, when the latter word begins with a consonant, as, from /capSt'a, Kapdi-o- yvaonjs. When the former word is a verb, the connecting vowel is usually -1-. as from apxay, dpx-i-a-vvaya>yos ; but sometimes -o-, as fdeX-o-BprjaKela. The form of a verbal noun is often used, as from Sei'Sco (Seicrts'), ^eia-i-dalpcov. Compound verbs of this class usually take their form from a compound noun; the verb thus appearing in a shape which it cannot have out of composition : as, evxapiarea), to give thanks^ from cvxapiaros, not from ev and x^P'-^^^^ > ^CkoTiiicopai^ to he ambitious, from (j)i\6Tipos, not from (pCKos and TLp.iop.ai. In synthetic compounds the latter word generally has the leading significance, and is defined or modified by the former. The following compounds illustrate the foregoing remarks : — oiKo-hecnTorriSf householder. KaK-ovpyoSy evildoer (v\ov (neuter substantive), ten tribes (Acts xxvi. 7). 8evT€p6-7rp(OTos, second-Jirst (Luke vi. 1), probably, *Hhe first Sahhath in the second year of the Sabbatical cycle (tf seven yeai-s." See Wieseler's " Chronological Synopsis of the Four Gospels," II. ii. 4. Wieseler fixes the year bs 782, A.U.C. 149. Illustration of the Varieties of Deriv^ation and Composition. The root Kpi-, verbal stem Kpiv-, primary meaning- ^o separate^ may be taken as illustrating the variations and combinations of a Greek word. First, we have simple derivatives, formed as in Chapter IX. : — Kpivoi, to separate, ot judge. Kpicrisj the process of separation, ov judgment. § 149. J WORD-FOKMATION — COMPOUNPS. 165 KpifMOf the act or result of judgment, sentence. KpiTTiptov, a standard of judgment, or tribunal. Kpirrjs, a judge. KpiTiKos (adjective), able to judge, a discoverer (Heb. iv. 12). Next, we note the composition of the verb with different prepositions : — avaKplvca, to inquire, estimate biaKplvco, to distinguish, separate, decide ; middle, to hesitate, eyKpluco, to judge, or reckon, among (2 Cor. x. 12). fTTLKplvco, to adjudge (Luke xxiii. 24). KaraKpivo), to give judgment against, condemn. ) ^o anoint, being everywhere else employed. t^apio-atos-, Pharisee, from a Hebrew word, meaning to separate^ and l-ahhovKoios, Sadducee, from another, meaning to he righteous, are of constant occurrence — " Separatists" and " Moralists." ^ayL}X(ovas (gen. -a, dat. -a), Mammon, riches (Matt, vi. 24 ; Luke xvi. 9, 11, 13). Its derivation is uncertain; but there is no reason for supposing that it was anywhere the name of a false deity. dppa^oiv, -wvos, a pledge, or earnest (2 Cor. i. 22, v. 5). On (Tci^^aTov, sabbath, see § 32, b. yeevpa, -rjs, from two words signifying valley of Hinnom ; hence, metaphorically, for the place of future punishment (see 2 Kings, xxiii. 10 ; Isa. xxx. 33 ; Jer. vii. 31). b. Indeclinable words are more numerous, i. The following may rank among proper names, on which class of words see fur- ther, § 157 : — ^ KKikha\ia, field of blood (Acts i. 19). * BeeXCe^ovX, lord of dung (Matt. xii. 24, &c,), a contemptuous Jewish turn to the name of the Ekronite god Beelzebub, " lord of flies" (see 2 Kings i. 2, 3). Hence " prince of the demons." 'Qoavepyis, Sons of thunder (Mark iii. 17). Ta^^a6dy the Pavement, or Tribunal (John xix. 13). 170 HEBREW WORDS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. [§ 153. Tokyoda, the Place of a skuU, or of skulls (Matt, xxvii. 33 ; Mark xv. 22; John xix. 17), called in Greek Kpaviov (Luke xxiii. 33), where our word Calvary is taken from the Vulgate. 'P€H(f)dv, probably the planet Saturn (Acts vii. 43, from Amos V. 2G, LXX.) ii. Other Syro-Chaldaic nouns are as follow : — 'A/3i3a, Father, in confidence, endearment, or entreaty (Mark xiv. 36 ; Rom. viii. 15 ; Gal. iv. 6). Kop^av, gift (Mark vii. 11), Kop^avas (decl. Matt, xxvii. 6), p.dvua, lit. "what is this 1" manna (Exod. xvi. 15 ; John vi. 31, 49, 5S; Heb. ix. 4; Rev. ii. 17). /lojpe, fool 1 (Matt. V. 22) may be a Greek vocative (/ztupdy), but is more probably an Aramaic word of similar sound, denoting utter mental and moral worthlessness. 7racr;^a, PasSOVer. pa^^i, my master! lit. "my great one!" (Matt, xxiii. 7, &c.) So pa^^ovi (Mark x. 51), and pa^jSovul (John xx. lb). paKa, a term of contempt, from a Hebrew root signifying emptiness, or vanity (Matt v. 22). (ra^aa>6, hosts, i.e., the hosts of heaven (Rom. ix. 29 ; Jas. v. 4). (rUepa, strong drink (Luke i. 1 5) . Xfpov^ifi, cherubim, Hebrew plural of cherub (Heb. ix. 5). c. Aramaic Phrases. — d\\r}Xoma, praise ye Jehovah! (Rev. xix. 1, 3, 4, 6.) dprjv, after ascriptions of praise, so let it be; before assertions. €(f)(j)add, be opened ! (Mark vii. 34.) 'HXt, *HXt, \apa (xa^axBavi', My God, my God, wliy hast Thou forsaken me ? (Matt, xxvii. 46,) from Ps. xxii. 1 ; the last word being the Aramaic equivalent of the original Hebrew verb. *HXt is my God, from the Hebrew El. Mark xv. 34, reads 'E\m. fiapavaBd, The Lord cometh ! (1 Cor. xvi. 22 ) (The word pro- ceding, dvddcpa^ accursed, is pure Greek, and should be followed by a colon or period.) § 153.] HEBREW WOUDS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 171 ToKida Kovfxi, Maiden, arise! (Mark v. 41.) wa-avva, Save now ! (Matt. xxi. 9 ; Mark xi. 9, 10 j John xii, 13,^ takeu from Ps. cxviii. '15. 154. Latin Words. a. Names of Coins. — Ko8pdvTT]s, " quadrans," ybr^AiVi^ " (Matt. V. 26 ; Mark xii. 42), the fourth part of the da-o-dpiovy "as," (diminutive term), also rendered /ar^Am^ in E.Y. (Matt. X. 29 ; Luke xii 6), the sixteenth part of the drjvdpiov, "denarius," rendered penny (as in Matt, xviii. 28, &c.), silver coin, worth about 7^d. b. Judicial. — a-iKaplos, "sicarius," assassin (Acts xxi. 38). (jjpayeXXiov, . Such forms are generally oxytone. So 'EfxfxauovrjX, God with us. b. The following names are found both in indeclinable and declinable forms : — 'Upova-oKrjiJL and *lepocroXvfia, -wi/,* Jerusalem, 2aov\ and 2av\oSf Saul.f 'laKw/S, Jacob (Old Testament), and 'laKcojSoy, James (New Testa- ment). * Once 'Upoa6\vfxa appears as a feminine singular (Matt. ii. 3; so, perhaps, iii. 5?). t The Hebrew form occurs only in the accounts of Saul's conversion (Acts ix., xxii., xxvi., except xiii. 21, in reference to the Old Testament king). 174 PROPER NAMES. [§ 156. Sujucwv, Simeon (Old Testament), and S/fioi/, -&)j/oy, Simon* (New Testament). Aevt, Levi (Old Testament), and Aevts, Levi (Matthew, New Testament). Compare § 32. c. Hebrew names in ah appear in the form -as (see § 20, a). Those in iah, or jah, a form of the name of the Supreme Being, Jehovah, are rendered into Greek by -las : as 'HXias, Elijah ; ^Ha-atas, Isaiah. These, however, take a genitive in -ov. (Meaaias, Anointed J is of a different derivation.) d. The circumflexed termination -as (gen. -a) marks some names belonging to the later Hebrew (or Aramaic) : as Kr}(})as, Bapa^^as. To these must be added, 'lavas, Jonah, Jonas, or Jona. More frequently, however, -os indicates the contraction of a Greek or Latin name, as shown §§ 158, b, 159, d. 157. Double Names. a. When two names are applied to the same person, one is sometimes the Hebrew (or Aramaic) appellation, the other its translation into Greek. Thus, Tabitha (Hebrew) and Dorcas (Greek) both signify " gazelle ; " Thomas (Hebrew) and Didymua (Greek) both stand for "twin." So also Cephas (Hebrew) is translated by Peter, " stone." h. Some Greek names are mere vocal imitations of the Hebrew, the sound being imperfectly transferred. Thus, Judah, or Judas, becomes Theudas (Acts v. 36) ; while Levi may have given rise to the form Lebbceus. Some, again, have thought Alphceios (Matt. X. 3, &c.), and Clopas (John xix. 25), to be only two forms of the same Hebrew word. Cleopas (Luke xxiv. 18) is a different name from the latter. It is possible that Paul, TJaiiXos, may in like manner have sprung from the Hebrew Said; or it had a Latin origin; see § 159, c. 0. In many cases, again, where two names are borne, one is * Twice, however, the Apostle bears the Old Testament name (Acts rv. 14 ; 2 Pet. i. 1). § 157.] PROPER NAMES PIEBREW. 17<5 a surname, eitlier (1) from some characteristic circumstance, as Cephas or Peter of Simon, and Barnabas of Joses ; or (2) a patronymic formed by the Aramaic Bar, " son," as Bar-jesus (son of Joshua, *Ii]aovs) of Elymas, and possibly Bar-tolmai, BapdoXoixaios, of Nathanael ; or (3) a local appellation, as Iscariot (Hebrew, " a man of Kerioth," see Josh. xv. 25), and Magdalene (Greek, *'a woman of Magdala"). Observe that Canaanite, properly " Kananite," YLavavLTrjs (Matt. x. 4 ; Mark iii. 18), is not a local name, but probably the Greek form of the Hebrew word for zealot, rendered (Luke vi. 15; Acts i. 13), ZijXarrjs. d. When the name of the same person appears in a Grsecised and a Hebrew style, the former would naturally be employed among the Gentiles and Hellenists ; the latter among the Pales- tinian Jews. So Saul becomes Paul, when he starts on his first missionary tour (Acts xiii. 9), and ever afterwards retains the name. 158. Greek Names. a. Pure Greek names are common, whether of Hellenists {%. e., Greek-speaking, or foreign Jews) or of Gentile converts. It has often been noticed that the names of all "the seven" (Acts vi.) are Greek. So throughout most of the Epistles. "Euodias," Evobia (Phil. iv. 2), is a feminine form, and should have been rendered Euodia. b. Many Greek composite names are contracted into forms in -as : as Epa.phroditus into Epaphras (Col. i. 7; iv. 12) ; Artemi- dorus into Artemas (Titus iii 12) ; Nymphodorus into Nymphas (Col. iv. 15); Zenodorus into Zenas (Titus iii. 13); Olympiodorus into Olympas (Rom. xvi. 15); Hermodorus into Hennas (Rom. xvi. 14). The termination dorus is from ba>pov, gift; and the former parts of these compounds are from the Greek mythology. Other contractions are, Parmenas for Parmenides (Acts vi. 5) ; Demas, probably for Demetrius ; Antipas, for Antipater ; Apollos, for Apollonius. ^oDnarpos (Acts xx. 4) and 'Stoo-LTrarpos (Rom. xvi. 21) seem to be the same name in different forms. 176 PROPER NAMES— LATIN. [§.159. 159. Latin Names. a. The Latin names occur chiefly where we might expect them, in letters written to or from Rome. The chief are Comeliics, Aquila, Priscilla or Prisca, Caius, ie., Gains, Urban, Rufus,-^- Julia, Tertiics, Quartus, Fortunatus, Marcus or Mark, Clement {KXrjfirjs, -evTos), Pudens, Claudia, and perhaps Linus (2 Tim. iv. 21). Some have thought that the last-mentioned was a Briton, Lin, of the household of Caractacus. h. Three names of Roman Emperors are also found in the New Testament in a Latin form, Augustus, ^Avyova-ros (Luke ii. 1 ; but the Greek equivalent, Sc/SaoToj, is found, referring to Nero, Acts XXV. 21, 25); Tiberius, Ti^epios (Luke iii. 1); and Claudius, KXavdios (as Acts xi. 28). The surname Ccesar, Kaia-ap, is applied to Augustus (Luke ii 1), to Tiberius (Luke iii 1, &c.), to Claudius (Acts xi. 28), to Nero (Acts xxv. 8 ; Phil. iv. 22, &c.). Caligula is not mentioned. c. If the word TlavXos be not, as is most likely, an imperfect Greek transcript of the Hebrcjw name Said, it must also be referred to the class of Latin words, as in Rome it was the name of a noble house. Some have thought that the Apostle's family, on receiving the rights of Roman citizenship, had been adopted into this house ; others, with even less likelihood, connect his assumption of the name with the conversion of Sergius Paulus (Acts xiii 7—12). d. Latin names, like Greek, may be contracted. Thus LukSy AovKas (rendered Lucas in E.V. ; Philem. 24), is an abbreviated form of the Latin name hucanu^. Similarly, Silvanus (2tXovavo$-) and Silas denote one person. Amplias (Rom. xvi. 8) is probably a contraction of the Roman name Ampliatus. For the significance of these various names, the Lexicon may be consulted. ♦ Rom. xvi 9. This name ia written in E.v. "Urbane," but it must be pronounced as a dissyllable. k... § 161.] SUBJECT — COPULA — PREDICATE. 177 PAET III. SYNTAX. Chapter L— CONSTRUCTIOISr OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. Subject — Copula — Predicate. Tlie laws of Universal Grammar, with regard to the con- struction and arrangement of Sentences, should be clearly borne in mind, that their special exemplifications in the Grreek language may be understood. For the most part, it will be convenient to show the application of these laws under the heading of the parts of speech or forms of inflexion severally affected by them. A brief summary may, however, first of all be given, with the essential rules of construction. 161. A Sentence, or "thought expressed in words," consists of one or more Propositions, 162. The essentials of a Proposition are, the Subject and the Predicate. 163. The Subject expresses the person or thing of which something is afHrmed, desired, or asked, and must, therefore, be a noun substantive, or the equivalent of one. Equivalents to nouns substantive are (1) personal pronouns, or (2) substantivized expressions, for which see § 202. 164. The Predicate expresses that which is affirmed, denied, or asked respecting the subject ; and in its simplest form it is (1) a noun substantive or its equivalent, or (2) an adjective or its equivalent. The equivalent of an adjective is a participle. 178 SUBJECT— COPULA PREDICATE. [§ 165. 165. The simplest form of Proposition is that which connects Subject and Predicate by a tense of the substantive verb, to 6e, called the Copula. Acts xxiii. 6 : eycb ^apio-alos eljiS ^ ^^ ^ Pharisee. Matt. xvi. 18 : av d nerpos, thou art Feter. Matt. xiii. 38 : 6 dypos € / vrrite^ is very nearly equivalent to eyto cljjii -ypd^Mcv, / am writing. § 167.] SUBJECT — COPULA — PREDICATE. .179 The careful student will observe that the term predicate is applied to the adjective and the verb in different senses. In the latter case, it really means copula and predicate combined. An adjective or sub- stantive predicate is sometimes called the "complement" of the verb with which it stands connected. 168. The substantive verb may become itself a Predicate, involving the notion of existence. John viii. 58: ... eyd) d\Li, Before Abraham was, / am. Rev. xxi. 1 : 17 BdXao-aa ovK ta-riv ert, the sea is no more. But the phrase, ^7:^ elfii, it ts /, occurring in the Gospels (as Matt, xiv. 27 ; Mark vi. 50 ; John vi. 20, xviii. 5, 6, 8), may mean one of three things; iyc& being (1) subject or (2) predicate, or (3) the verb being predicate. 169. The Subject, when a personal pronoun, is generally omitted, if no special emphasis or distinction is intended ; the number and person of the verb sufficiently showing its reference. Thus, Xeyco vfxLv (Matt. V. 18, 20 ; viii. 10, 11, &c.), / say unto you, is unemphatic ; but in c-ycl) Xeyw v/xli/, / say unto you (v. 22, 28, 32, 39, 44), our Lord pointedly contrasts his own teaching with that of the Rabbis. So (v. 21) ou cj)ov€va€is, thou shalt not rifhurder. Had the reading been (ri, when they reproach and persecute you, i.e., men in general. John XX. 2 : •fjpav top Kvpiov, they have taken away the Lord, i.e., some persons or other have. See also Matt. viii. 16, Mark x. 13, they were bringing, i.e., from time to time ; Luke xvii. 23, John xv. 6, where E.Y. reads "men;" Acts iii. 2, &c. 171. Verbs in the third person singular, without a subject expressed, frequently imply some necessary or conventionally- understood Subject of their own. 1 Cor. XV. 52 : o-oXiriVei, lit., he shall sound the trumpet, a clas- sical expression, implying 6 o-aXTri-yxTiys, the trumpeter, equivalent, as E.Y., to the trumpet shall sound. To this head are to be referred many so-called impersonals : as pp(\ii, it rains (in First Aorist, James v. 17). The Greeks originally understood and sometimes expressed Zcvs, or Qeos, with all such words. " He rains, thunders," &c. ; hence passing into the im2:)ersonal usage. Again, ^r\a-L, X^-yci, he or it says ; once ftpriKc, he or it hath said (Heb. iv. 4) ; once etirc, he or it said (1 Cor. XV. 27), are used as formulas of quotation ; 17 ypa(f)rj, the Scripture, to be supplied (compare Kom. iv. 3, &c.) ; or 6 Qeos, God (see Matt. xix. 5). See, for Xiyn, 2 Cor. vi. 2; Gal. iii. 16; Eph. iv. 8, &c. ; for <|>Tja(rC. 172. The Nominative is the case of the Subject, and the Sub- ject and Predicate must correspond in number and person ; wheuco the gmmmatical rule called the § 172.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 181 First Concord. A Verb agrees with its nominative ease in number and person. For other uses of the Nominative, see §§ 242-244. All these are connected with its true use as Subject. It cannot be too strongly im- pressed upon the learner that the key to every proposition, however complicated, is in the nominative case and verb ; that is, in the Subject and Predicate. To these all the other words are only adjuncts. 173. The great apparent exception to the First Concord is that a Neuter Plural nominative often takes a singular verb. John ix. 3 : tva av€pca0fj toL dv!] ^^l these things happened^ . . . and were written. The uncertainty of the usage in this matter has been a fruitful source of various readings. It is often difficult, if not impossible, to decide whether the singular or the plural is in the original text. 175. a. When the Subject is a collective noun in the singular, denoting animate objects, the verb may be put in the plural number. This construction is known as Rational Concord.* Matt. xxi. 8 : o Sc irKeiaTos ^x^^s ?orTp«p^ap eori paOu, tlie well is deep. 1 John V. 3 : at IvroXal avTov papctai ovK tla\v, his commonajnents are not grievous. Rev. vii. 14 : ovroi elaiv ol lpx6^ivoi, k.t.X., these are tliey that are co/mna out of the great tribulation. § 179.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 185 179. When the Subject is a collective noun, the adjective Pre- dicate is sometimes plural. (Compare § 173.) John vii. 49 : 6 fix^o* ovtos ... ^irdpaToC elaw, this multitude, are accursed. 180. An adjective Predicate is occasionally generalized by being put in the neuter gender, though the Subject is masculine or feminine. 1 Cor. vi. 11 : Tavra. Tiv€s ^re, lit., some of you were this (these things). 1 Cor. vii. 19 : J? TrcpiTop,'^ ovhiv earn, circumcision is nothing. 181. The laws of apposition and concord, as above applied, may be restated in the form of the following rule : — Copulative verbs require the Nominative case after as well as before them. For the chief copulative verbs, see § 165, note. John i. 14 : 6 A670S l^lvero o-dp|, tlie Word became flesh. Acts xvi, 3 : "EXX-qv virfipxcv, he was a Greek. 2 Cor. xiii. 7 ; tva iwuls 8oKip.oi <}>av«n€v, tliat we should appear approved, or " be manifestly approved." Matt. V. 9 : viol 0€ov KXTjOrjo-ovrai, they shall he called sons of God. Acts X. 32 : ^ificova, 8s eiriKoXetTat II^Tpos, Simeon (accusative), who is surnamed Feter. Romans v. 9 : dp.apT«\ol KaTcoTaOrjo-av ol iroXXoi, SfKatot KaraoTa- 0TicrovTai oi iroXXoi, the many were made (lit., st^t down as) sinners, the many shall be made (lit., set down as) righteous. 182. Hitherto the rules and examples given have been designed to show the main elements alone of the simple sentence. Other words, however are very generally added to the Subject to the Predicate, or to both, for the purpose of further explanation 186 COMPLEMENTS OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. [§ 1S2. These words are called the complements of the simple sentence, and are variously said to complete, to extend, or to enlarge the Subject or the Predicate, as the case may be. 183. The Subject, which is essentially a noun substantive, may be extended by apposition with another noun, by the qualifying force of adjectives, pronouns, or the article, by depen- dent nouns, or by prepositional phrases. For Apposition, see § 177. For Adjectives, see Chapter IV. For the Article, see Chapter II. For the dependence of nouns one upon another, and for pre- positional phrases, see Chapter III. 184. The Predicate, when a noun, may be extended in the same manner as the Subject. 185. Wlien an adjective is Predicate, it may be extended by dependent nouns, by adverbs, or by prepositional phrases. 186. Verbal Predicates may be variously extended. Any verb may be qualified by an adverb. Prepositional phrases may be employed in this connection also. Especially, the meaning of a verb transitive requires to be completed by the Object or Objects, direct or indirect. For the direct Object, see § 281. For indirect Objects, see on the Genitive and Dative cases, Chapter III. 187. The complements of a simple sentence cannot include a verb, as this would introduce a distinct predication. Verbal clauses, therefore, forming part of a period are termed accessoi'y clauses, and a sentence with one or more accessory clauses besides the principal one, is called a compound sentence. Accessoiy clauses, as related to the principal, are either co ordinate or subordinate. § 188.] COMPOUND SENTENCES. 187 188. Co-ordinate accessory clauses are similar iu construction to tlie principal, and are often connected with it and with one another by conjunctions. (See § 402, seq.) 189. Subordinate clauses are dependent upon the principal or upon the accessory clause-^, or upon single words or phrases in either. It is plain that subordinate clauses may be co-ordinate with one another. 190. The methods of introducing subordinate clauses are very various. The chief are, by the Relative Pronoun (§§ 343, 344), by the use of the Participials (participle or infinitive) (§§ 385 — 396), and by the Particles (§§ 383, 384). Otherwise : subordinate clauses are Substantival^ Adjectival, or Ad- verbial. A substantival clause expresses the subject or object of a verb, or stands in apposition, and usually employs the infinitive ; an adjec- tival" clause, qualifying a word or sentence, is introduced by a relative pronoun or conjunction, or employs a participle; and an adverbial clause is introduced by a conjunction, or employs a participle, or the oblique case of a noun. 191. It is often difficult to determine whether a certain phrase is a complement of the Subject, or of the Predicate. Many illustrations might be given from the Epistle to the Romans. For instance : ch. i. 17 (ii. 4), 6 bUaios €k Tn'o-rewy ^jyo-erat. Jit. the righteous (man) from faith shall live. Are we to under- stand the prepositional phrase ck TriVrfo)? as the complement of the Subject o bUaios, or of the Predicate ^rjo-erai'i In other words, are we to translate " The righteous man from faith (he that is righteous, or justified by faith) shall live f or, " The righteous man shall live from faith V Again, iv. 1 : are we to attach the prepositional phrase, Kara orapKa, accordioig to the flesh, with the word npoiraropa, forefather, in apposition with Abraham, the Subject of the accessory clause, or to the Predicate hath found ? — that is, does the Apostle ask, " What shall we say that Abraham, our father as pertaining to the flesh, 188 COMPOUND SENTENCES. [§ 191. bath found T or, " What shall we say that Abraham our lather hath found as pertaining to the flesh ]" The true connection of accessory clauses is also occasionally doubtful. For instance, in Acts iii. 21, it may be fairly discussed whether the relative clause, which God hath spoken by the mouth of all his holy prophets, belongs to the word times, or to all things. Such questions of interpretation are not proposed for consideration here ; their settlement must often depend, not only on the laws of construction, but on the signification of individual words. Reference is made to them only to show the necessity, to a right interpretation of a passage, of distinctly analyzing the parts of every compound sentence, and of assigning to each its right position. In our own language, this is comparatively easy, as the order of the sentence in general indicates the mutual relation of its parts ; in Greek, through the number and variety of the inflections, the order is of little importance to the structure of the sentence, though of much to its emphasis. 192. As hints for disentangling a compound sentence, the following may be valuable : — Search first for the predicate, or thing affirmed — usually, of course, a verb — then for the subject. These once fixed, every other verb will mark an accessory clause, which will have to be regarded apart. The remaining words, generally in close grouping with the Subject and Predicate, must be assigned to them respectively as their complements, according to the usages of the several parts of speech and forms of inflection. To these it is now necessary to turn, in order. § 193.] THE ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. 189 Chapter II. -THE AETICLE. Latin, Articulus; Greek, &p0pov (a Joint). Hence, anarthrous, " without an article." Construction of the Article. 193. The Article, 6, ^, rh, the (see § 12), is usually em- ployed, as in other languages, with nouns substantive. The Second Concord applies to this relation ; the article agreeing with its noun in gender, number, and case. 194. This general usage, however, admits of many varia- tions, attributable to the fact that the Article was originallt/ a demonstrative pronoun.* Its demonstrative use is clearly seen in the Apostle Paul's quotation (Acts xvii. 28), rov yhp koX yevos iafiev, we are his offspring. 195. A remnant of the old demonstrative use is, that the Article often stands without a noun expressed, like our this, thut ; the sense of the phrase showing wlio or what is to be understood. For example, the phrase 6 |i.Jv . . . 6 8^ signifies this . . . that, or the one . . . the other. Acts xiv. 4 : oi ^\v rjo-av avv tois 'louSaiois, oi Bl avv to'is dnoaToXois, some were with the Jews, others with the apostles. In Matt. xiii. 23, be is repeated : o ^\v Uarov, 6 8i i^rjKouTa, 6 Bk rpiciKovTa, some a hundred, some sixty, some thirty. See also Matt. xxii. 5; Mark xii. 5 ; Acts xvii. 32; Gal. iv. 22; Eph. iv. 11; Phil. i. 16, 17 ; Heb. vii. 20, 21. * The student may be reminded that the EngHsh article they the German (ier^ the French le, are also original demonstratives. So in other laaguagea. li)v) THE ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. [§ 195, When & 54 is used in narration, even without a preceding /teV, it always implies some other person previously mentioned, as- Matt, ii. 5 : 01 Se eliroy, and they said. Mark xiv. 61 : ^ Se iaidnra, and he was silent. Acts xii. 15 : ^ 5e Stto-xvpfffo, and site steadfastly asserted. So in innumerable passages. 196. The Article, disconnected from a noun, is often followed by a genitive. Matt. X. 2 : 'laKw/Soy 6 tov ZepeSaiou^ James the (son) of Zebedee. Mark xii. 17 : oTroiSore ri Kaio-apos, render the (things or rights) of Ccesar. Gal. V. 24 : ol rod Xpto-rov, the (servants or disciples) of the Christ J i.e., of the Anointed one. 2 Pet. ii 22 : to ttjs aXrjdovs irapoi{i.Cas, the (saying) of the truthful l>roverh. The plural neuter tL is very frequently used in this construction, as in the second of the above instances. So toL tov vojiov, the things of the law ; toL tov IIvfivnaTos, the things of the Spirit ; toL cavTwv, their own interests (lit. the things of themselves), and so on. 197. Similarly, the Article precedes a preposition with its case. Matt. V. 15 : Tots Iv t^ oIki«j, to those in the house. Mark i. 36 : 2t/ia>j/ Kai ol |A€t' avToO, Simon and those with him. Luke ii. 39 : to, KaTA t^v v(Jhov, the (things) according to the law. Eph. i. 10: tA. ^ ToTs o^rpavots .. taL M Tf)s y^s, the (things) in the heavens . . . the (things) on the earth. Acts xiii. 13 : ol ircpl t^v IlavXov, tliose about Paul, including himself (by a classic idiom), i.e., Paul and his associates. (See John xi. 19, Martha and Mary with their friends.) Any of the prepositions may follow the Article ; for their several significance, see Chapter II. § 288, &c. § 198.] THE ATITICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. 19 1 198. A construction essentially similar is that of the Article with adverbs, the noun being supplied in thought. Instances of this are : rh vvv, t/ie (thing) now : the present (Matt. xxiv. 21; Luke v. 10); r\ or^|j.€pov, to-day; i\ afipiov, the •morrow (feminine, as if from ^/i€pa, day ; Matt. vi. 34; xxvii. ^2), So, in many passages, 6 irXiio-iov, the (man who is) near, one's neighbour; rd ava>, the (things) above; to. KaT«, the (things) beneath ; ot l^, those without ; toL oTriVco, the (things) behind ; rd 2jjLirpoo-0€v, the (things) before, &c. In effect, the Article with an adverb is equivalent to an Adjective. 199. The Article is frequently placed before adjectives, the substantive being implied. This construction belongs to all genders, and to both numbers. Instances of its occurrence are numberless. Thus : — Mark i. 24 : 6 d^ios, the Holy (one). Matt. vii. 6 : rh d7iov, the holy (thing). Matt, xxiii. 15 : ttjv g'npav, the dry (land). Luke xvi. 25 : rd a^aGd, the good (things) . Eph. i. 3 : iv rots lirovpaviois, in the heavenly (places). 1 Thess. iv. 16 : ot veKpol iv Xpicrrw, the dead in Christ. Titus ii. 4 : Iva o-axfypoviCoai rds v^as, that they may school the young (women). Compare the ordinary English phrases, the good, the great, the wise, with the abstracts, the true, the right, the heantiful. In Greek, however, the usage is much more extended, and is exemplified also by anarthrous adjectives. 200. The Article is commonly also used before pai-ticiplcs ; the sense again supplying the noun. Matt. i. 22 : to ^r\Uv, the (thing) spoken. Matt. V. 4 ; oi ircvOoCvres, the (persons) mourning. Matt. xi. 3 : 6 epxop-cvos, the coming (One). 192 THE ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. [§ 200. Matt. xiii. 3 : o (nreipwv, the (man) sowing, i.e., "a sower." Matt, xxiii. 37 : tovs dir€ov€vo-€is, ov jaoixcvo-cis, tlie (command) " thou shall not steal, thou shalt not commit adul- tery ^ See also Luke xxii. 37 ; Eom. xiii. 9 ; Gal. iv. 25, rh ''Ayap, the (name) Ilagar; Eph. iv. 9; Heb. xii. 27. Expressions of the latter class are as in Luke i. 62 : rh rC dv QiXoi KaXei6aXp,cs, the light of the body is the eye. 206. Hence arises the general rule, that in the simple sentence the Subject takes the article, the Predicate omits it. The subject is definitely before the mind, the predicate generally denotes the class to which the subject is referred, or from which it i3 excluded, but the notion of the class is itself indeterminate. 194 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 206. Matt. xiii. 39 : oi dipitrraX ayyAoi elaiv, the reapers are angels. John iii. 6 : rh •ai, the writing, writings, ie., the Holy Scriptures, as Matt, xxii, 29 ; John x. 35 ; Kom. iv. 3, xv. 4. 196 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 210. ^ ?pTl|Jtos, the desert, i.e., that of Judaea, Matt. xi. 7 ; or that of Sinai, John iii. 14, vi 31 ; Acts vii. 30 ; and perhaps Matt. iv. 1.* 6 -ircipdtctfv, the tempter (participle, according to § 200), i.e., Satan. 6 €pxo|J.€vos, the coming one (participle, present), i.e., the Messiah. Matt. xi. 3, xxi. 9, xxiii. 39 ; Heb. x. 37. Compare Rev. i. 4, 8, iv. 8. 211. Singular for Collective. — A noun in the singular number with the Article occasionally stands for the whole class. Compare such English expressions as " he looked the king," "the good man is a law to himself" Matt. xii. 35 : 6 d-yadbs avOpuiros, tJie good man, denoting good men generally. Matt. xii. 29 : toO l^t]v, the cloud, " rising out of the west," of that peculiar character which foretells much rain. (1 Kings xviii. 44, 45.) John iv. 22 : ^ v, the Synagogue of the Jews, i.e., the chief or only synagogue of that particular district. Acts XX. 9 : €771 -riis 0vpi8os, at tlie window, or open lattice of the apartment. Acts xxi. 38 : tovs TerpaKicrxiX^ovs, the Jour thousand, the noto- rious band of desperadoes. Acts xxiv. 23 : rv(ris BiddaKeL ; doth not Nature itself teach ? So when the abstract term is used for the whole mass of individuals. E,om. xi. 7 : ■^ Se ^kXoyt), the election, i.e., the mass of the elect. Phil. iii. 3 : ■i\ ircpiroft^, the drcumcisiony i.e., the community of the circumcised. h. When the abstraction is made a separate object of thought. 1 John iv. 10 : eV to{jtyfjLevot eueKfv SiKaiotrvvTjs, the persecuted Jbr righteousness' sake, such being an element in their character. Romans v. 13 : ajiaprfa rjv iv koct/jlco, sin was in the world, i.e., as an attribute of human conduct; illustrating the more general assertion of verse 12, that Sin, in the abstract, rj dpiapTia, entered into the world. 1 Cor. xiii 1 : 6,-^Lin\v firf e^fo, (If) I have not love, as a feature in my character. In determining the reason of the omission or the insertion of the Article before abstract nouns in any given case, it should be considered whether there is any grammatical rule requiring it, apart from the meaning of the term. (See especially § 212.) 215. A definite attribute or property of an object is marked in Greek by the Article. Thu8, instead of saying, He has large eyes, the Greeks would say, He has the eyes large. But when the connexion was only accidental, the Article would be omitted ; thus, He had a deep wound would be ex- pressed without the Article, unless the wound had been previously mentioned, when the case would come under § 212. The Article may, therefore, iu such sentences as the following, be rendered by the pos- sessive pronoun. Acts xxvi. 24 : 6 ^riaros [J-eydXrj T^ ^(avr\ e(f)r), Festus said ivith his voice upraised, or "with a loud voice," as E. V. So ch. xiv. 10. 1 Peter iv. 8 : t-?|v els eavrovs ayiirriv €kt€vi] exovres, lit., having your love to one another fervent. Heb. vii. 24 : dnapd^arov e^et t^v i6pa»... Him who knew not sin, He made sin on our behalf, that we might become hiKaioa-vvT} ©€ov, God's righteousness," partakers of a Divine righteous- ness, " in Him." b. The name Kvpios, Lord, generally prefixes the Article. The contrary usage, when not accounted for by ordinary rules, arises from this word having been adopted in the Septuagint as the Greek equivalent for the Hebrew name Jehovah. In the Gospels it usually signifies God; in the Epistles it commonly refers to Christ, f Instances of its occurrence without the article are (1) in direct renderings from the Old Testament, as 1 Cor. iii. 20, Kvpios yivQ>aK€i Tovs dioKoyto-fjiovs, k.t.X., Jehovah knows the thoughts, tkc. So 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; Heb. vii. 21, xiii. 6. In 1 Pet. i. '2o, it is substituted for the other Hebrew Divine name (LXX., 0€ov) ; (2) after prepositions, as in the ordinary phrase, Iv Kvpiw; or in the genitive case (very often) (3) preceding the appellation, 'Itio-o€s * Or, with whom, a less probable interpretation. t The name above every name, Phil. ii. 9, is Kvpios, Jehovah. 204 ARllCLE WITH THE DIVINE TS'AMES. [^ 217. XpMrrrfs, Jesus Christy as in tlie superscriptions (Rom. i. 7 j 1 Cor. i. o ; Gal. i. 3). So in Eph. vi. 23, and strikingly Phil. iii. 20. c. The title vlbs 0eov, a or tlie Son of God (more emphatically 060V vto's, GocTs Son), is fouDd both with and without the Article. The usual form is 6 vlbs tov ©eov, the Son of the (revealed) God (comp. under 0e<5s). Ytbs tov 0€ov occurs, as in the Tempter's interrogatory (Matt. iv. 3), where the supremacy of the revealed Deity is recognised, but the exclusive relationship of our Lord to the Father is at least left an open question ; while vlhs 0€ov expiesses a view altogether less definite of our Lord's dignity. Thus, in their first confession, the disciples said, " Truly thou art ,':on of God," 0€ov vWs. But afterwards Peter acknowledges, "Thou art the Son of the living God," 6 vibs tov 0€ov, k.t.X. (xvi. 16). The centurion amid the miracles of Calvary expresses a certain measure of faith : " Truly this man is Son of God,'* 0COV vto's, without an Article to either (Matt, xxvii. 5i ; Mark XV. 39 ; compare Luke xxiii. 47). But we read of Saul, the convert, how he preached at once in tlie synagogues of Damascus that " this man is the Son of God," 6 vlhs tov 06ov (Acts xi. 20).* d. The name *It]o-ovs, Jestis, when used alone, in the Gospels and Acts, almost always has the Article. The reason undoubtedly is that the word is strictly an appellative, being but the Greek form of the Hebrew for "Saviour." To the disciples, therefore, and the evangelists, the significance of the word was ever present : the Saviour. When others employed the name, or it was used in converse with theib, the Article might be omitted. See John vL 24 (where for the moment the point of view taken is that of the spectators). So viii. 59 (and, in critical edd., xi. 51, xviii. 8); Acts v. 30, xiii. 23, 33, and a few other passages. When the name stands in apposition with others, as Kvpios or XpwrT» 'ItjotoDs 6 Kvpios... ... 1 „ 6 XpicrrSs 95 }i 6 K. 'I. Xpiar6s... ... 5 „ Xpi(Tr6s 122 ii Kipiosn.X. ... ... 17 „ *l7j(Toi/s 6 XpiarSs 1 j> d X. 'I. (5 Kipios ... 1 „ 6 Xpiarhs 'Irjaovs (read- Xpicrrhs 'I. K. ... ... J » ings doubtful) 4 j> 'I. X. 6 K. iifiwv ... 3 „ 'lr}» 6 K. r)fiS)V 'I. X. ... 35 „ Xpiarhs 'hiaovs ... 58 >» X. 'I. 6 K. Vfiay ... 9 *> 206 ARTICLE WITH THE DIVINE NAMES. " [§ 217. rence, as in Col. iii. 1-4 : " If ye be risen with the Chj'ist, seek the things that are above, where the Christ sitteth . . your life is hid with the Christ ... when the Christ shall appear." Without the Article, we have the name thus recurrent in Phil, l 18-23. After speaking of those who preach the Christ out of envy and strife, the Apostle adds, as with a more personal love, " nevertheless ChHst is preached" ... uttering then his earnest hope "that Christ shall be magnified ... for me to live is Christ ... yet to depart and to be with Christ is far better." It is not asserted that the thoughtful reader will always discern the reason of the employment or the omission of the Article in connexion with these sacred names. Often, however, unquestionably, most inte- resting and valuable suggestions will arise; and the whole subject is worth the most painstaking investigation. * /. The name of the Holy Spirit, Ilvcvfia dyiov, requires the Article when he is spoken of in himself; but when the reference is to his operation, gifts, or manifestation in men, the Article is almost inva- riably omitted. In other words, " the Spirit " regarded objectively t^kes the Article, regarded subjectively is frequently anarthrous. Apparent exceptions to this rule are but instances of more general > grammatical laws, as, for instance, when the term, although definite, follows a prei)osition or precedes a genitive. Accordingly, when disciples of Christ are said to be Jilled with the Spirit, to receive the Spirit, to walk in the Spirit, the Article is omitted. See, e. g., Luke i. 15, 41, 67, ii. 25, xi. 13 ; John iii. 5, XX. 22 ; Acts i. 5, ii. 4, iv. 8, vi 3, viii. 15, 17 (the Article in 18 is a case of renewed mention), xi. 16 ; Romans viii. 9, ix. 1, xv. 13, 16 ; 1 Cor. ii. 4, 13, vii. 40 ; 2 Cor. iii. 3 ; Eph. v. 18, vi 18; Col. i. 8; 2 Thess. ii. 13 ; 1 Pet. i. 2 ; 2 Pet. i. 21 ; Jude 19 ; Rev. i. 10, , sufficient to such a man (as the offender of whom I write). Matt. ix. 6 : ^ovon'av ToiavTTjv, such (kind of) power. John ix. 16: ToiavTa trTjueta, such (kind of) miracles. It is observable, however, that the two forms of expression, being separated by so slight a shade of difference, may often be used indif- ferently. The Article is generally omitted in the Gospels, generally inserted in the Epistles, except that to the Hebrews. 221. The distributive pronominal adjective ^Kao^os, eachy never takes the Article in the New Testament. * The demonstrative 35« only once occurs in the adjective construction, and follows the same rule : James iv. 13, els T^i/5e rV v6\iv, into this city. t The learner should be cautioned against rendering, *' Is this Jesus not the son of Joseph ?" which would have required 6 'Irjaovs. The comma at Jesus in the E. V. conveys the proper § 221.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 209 Before too-ovtos, so much (plur, so many), the Article is not found in the oSTew Testament, with the exception of Kev. xviii. 17, 6 ToorovTos irXovTos, the wealthy which was so great. 222. The Article prefixed to the pronoun avros gives it the meaning of the sarne. (See § 57, d.) 2 Cor. iv. 13: to airh irvevpa, the same Spirit. But Rom. viii. 26 : avrh rh irveOjia, the very Spirit, the Spirit himself. The New Testament MSS. often vary between the contracted plural ravrd and Tavra (plur. neut. of oZros). See Luke vi. 23, vi. 26, xvii. 30 ; 1 Thess. ii. 14. 223. a. A possessive pronoun agreeing with a noun not a Pre- dicate, invariably takes the Article. John xvii. 10 : tcL ejid Trdvra ad iariv Ka\ rd ord i^d, all (things) TTiine are thine, and thine are mhie. Acts xxiv. 6 : /cara rhv r^^inpov vop-ov, according to our law. John vii. 6 : 6 Kai'pos 6 vfi^rtpos, your opportunity. h. The possessive sense is, however, generally given by the geni- tive of the personal pronoun ; the article preceding the noun, as 6 TTttT^p (lov, my father ; ot -iraTc'pcs 4(t«v, your fathers. 224. a. The adjective irds, all, in the singular number, without the Article, signifies every ; with the Article, it means the whole of the object which it qualifies. Thus, irdo-a irdXis is every city ; iraora y\ iroXis, or 1^ iracra irdXis,* the whole of the city. ^ ttoXis irdo-a would have a meaning sJightly ditferent — the city, all of it — "the city in every part." So with abstracts. Luke iv. 13: avvreXea-as irdvTa -ircipao-iidv, (the devil) having ended every temptation, i.e., every form of temptation. 2 Cor. iv. 2 : npos irao-av T^ QeoTrvevaros, k.t.X. ^ Every writing (i.e., of those just mentioned, v. 14) is divinely inspired* &c., or Every divinely inspired writing is also profitable, f &c. Luke ii. 10 : iravrl tu Xaw, to all the people of Israel. The phrase in ch. ii. 31 is diflfereut : ^^ before the face of all the peoples,''^ i.e., the nations of mankind. 1 Cor. xiii. 2 : eav exa irdo-av ttjv iricrriv, k.t.X., if I have all the faith requisite for such a task. Col. i. 23 : eV imo-Tj rfj KTiVct, in the whole of the creation ; not "to every creatiire," as E.V. Compare ver. 15, irdoTjs ktio-cws, where the rendering is accurate, of every creature. 1 Tim. i. 1 6 : tt|v irdo-av jiaKpoGuniav, all the long suffering which belongs to the Divine cliaracter. John V. 22 : n^v Kpio-iv irdo-av, k.t.X., the judgment (of men), all of it. The Father has committed this wholly to the Son. With proper names, as of countries, cities, &c., the Article after •nas may be omitted by § 216; -the signification being still the whole. (Matt. ii. 3 ; Acts ii. 36.) h. The plural, irdvT€s, almost always has the Article when the substantive is expressed; almost always omits it when the sub- stantive is implied. The few exceptions to the former are chiefly when the noun is &v0p«irot, men.X The excei)tions to the latter are where the idea is collective. Thus, iravra is all things, seve- rally ; tA irdvTa, all things, as constituting a whole. « Middleton. t Ellicott. X See also Acts xvii. 21, xix. 17 ; 1 Cor. x. 1 ; 1 Thess. v. 26 ; Heb. I G; 1 Pet. ii. I. 8 224.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 211 Phil, i V. 13: iravra la-xvoD, I can do all things. Col. i. 16: TOL iravra 8C alrov, All things are hy Rim (Christ) . See also 1 Tim. vi. 13; Heb. ii. 8, &c. The usual position of the plural, trivris, is before the Article and substantive. Twice (Acts xix. 7, xxvii. 37) with a special meaning, it stands between them: ol irdvres &vSpes, the men in all; at iracrcu rl/vxal, the souls (persons) in all. Occasionally, employed after the Article and substantive, it talces a strong emphasis : as John xvii. 10, TO ifjih Ttivra ad eVrt, Mine are all thine. 225. The construction of 8\os, whole, in respect of the Article, is similar to that of vra?. Generally the Article stands between it and its noun, as 8Xos 6 Kdo-jjios, the whole world (Rom. i. 8). Occa- sionally the noun and Article precede, with an added emphasis on oKos, as 6 Koo-jjios 8Xos, the world, (yea) the whole (of it) (Matt, xvi. 2Q).* A few times it is found without the Article, and its force is expressed by the English indefinite, as John vii. 23, 8Xov AvOpwirov, a wlhole man I have restored to health. The other instances are Acts xi. 2Q, xxi. 31 (before a proper name), xxviii. 30 j Titus i. 11. 226. The employment of the Article with the adjective pro- nouns fiXXos, other (numerically), and ^repos, other (properly implying some further distinction), is analogous to the English idiom. t Singular, the other ; plural, the others (^rcpos only once so used, Luke iv. 43).J John XX. 3 : 6 dXXos fiadrjrfjs, the other discq^le. John XX. 25 : ol dlXXot naBijTai, the other disciples. ■\ Matt. vi. 24 : rhv ^rcpov dyairrjaei, the otlier (master) he will love. Luke iv. 43 : rais cWpais noXeaLv, to the other cities. * The observant reader may trace the emphasis in the other passages where this order is found : Matt. xxvi. 59 ; Mark i. 33, viii. 36 ; Luke ix. 25, xi. 36; John iv. 53; Acts xix. 29, xxi. 30; Kom. xvi. 23; 1 Cor. xiv. £3; 1 John V. 19; Rev. iii. 10, xii. 9, xvi. 14. t In classical Greek, 6 aWos means the rest of. J Perhaps also Matt. xi. 16 (Tischendorf). !212 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [ij 227. 227. The Article with the neuter ttoXu (" the much ") is equi- valent to ^Hhe abundance." (See 1 Pet. i. 3.) More common, however, is its use with the plural, iroXXoC, noWai, rroWd, many, to which it gives the significance of the many, the generality, the whole mass of the particular objects of thought. The onlj instances arc the following : — Matt. xxiv. 12 : 17 dydTTTj t«v iroXXwv, the love of the many shall wax cold. Luke vii. 47 : at afiapTtai ... at iroXXaC, her sins — t/ie man^', i.e., the whole of them — are forgiven. Acts xxvi. 24: to, ttoXXA ypdfifiaTa, lit., the many letters; the mass, the quantity of thy learning. Rom. xii. 5 : 01 iroXXoi, the many of us — the whole mass — are one body in Christ. So 1 Cor. x. 17. 1 Cor. X. 33 : rh twv iroXXwv, the (advantage) of the many. 2 Cor. ii. 17 : « ot iroXXoC, (we are not) as tlie many. Kev. xvii. 1 : rav Iddrav r&v iroXXwv, of tlie many waters. Rom. V. 15-19 : This most important passage, containing this idiom, has been thus translated * : — [We have noted by italics the Articles which the English version omits.] 15 Howbeit not as the trespass, so also is the gift of grace. For if by the trespass of the one tlie many died, much more did the grace of Grod and his free gift abound imto the many by the grace of tJie one man Jesus Christ. 16 And not as through on6 that sinned, so is the gift ; for the judg- ment came of one unto condemnation, but the gift of grace came of many trespasses unto justification. 17 For if by the trespass of the one death reigned through the one, much more shall they which receive the abundance of the grace and of the free gift of {the'f) righteousness reign in hfe through tlie one, Jesua Christ. * " The Epistle of St. Paul to the Eomans, after the Authorized Version, newly compared with the original Greek, and revised. By Five Clergymen. Second edition. Parker & Son. 1858." t In the Greek, but not in the "Five Clergymen's" translation. §227.1 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 21'6 18 Therefore as through one trespass, [the issue was] unto all men to condemnation, even so through one righteous act [the issue was] unto all even to justification of life. 19 For as through the disobedience of the one man the many were made sinners, even so through the obedience of the one shall the many be made righteous. 228. When the Nominative is used for the Vocative in direct address, the Article is prefixed. For an explanation of the idiom, see § 244. Matt. xi. 26 : va), 6 iran^p, ^ven so. Father I Luke viii. 54 : t| irais, eyclpov, Damsel, arise ! John xix. 3 : x"*P^ ° pao-iXevs, Hail, King 1 John XX. 28 : 6 Kvpids \xov koI 6 ©cds fiov, My Lord and my God! Heb. i. 8 : 6 Opouos trov 6 ©eds, 27iy Throne, God ! See also ver. 9, and x. 7. 229. The Ai'ticle is often separated from its substantive by qualifying or explanatory words. a. These are, generally, a preposition with its case, other dependent words being sometimes added. Matt. vii. 3 : t^v 6e iv ra aa 6da\n^ SoKov, but the beam in thine own eye. Luke xvi. 10 : o iv eXaxLcrra &8tKos, the (man) unjust in the least. 1 Pet. i. 14 : rats nporepov iv rrj ayvoia vp.cov eiriGvuiais, tlie former (lit,, formerly) lusts in your ignorance. b. Adverbs also are often thus employed : — 2 Tim. iv. 10 : ayaTD^o-as Tov vvv alwva, having loved the 'present (lit., now) world. 230. a. The Article is very frequently repeated after its noun, to introduce some attributive word or phrase. Clearly, this is a result of the original demonstrative force of the Article. The phrase introduced may be an adjective or participle, a preposition with its case, oi* (rarely) an adverb. The Article so employed gives the attributive a certain prcminence or emphasis. 214 EMPHATIC USE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 230. Matt. xviL 5 : 6 vlos fiov 6 d7aTnjTv, Upon the foundation of the apostles and prophets, all together constituting but one basis. Eph. iii. 18 : ri to irkaros Ka\ /jirJKos kol ^ddos Koi v\//-os, what (is) the h^eadth and length and depth and height, one image of vat-t extension being before the mind. Col. ii. 22 : to. ivTakixara KaX hihacTKaklas twv auOpedirayv (obs. the different genders), the commandments and tea/:hings of men, toge- ther constituting one system. 2 Pet. i. 10 : ttiv Kk^aiv kol eKXoyrju, (your) calling and election, each mutually implying the other. 216 THE ARTICLE IN ENUMERATIONS [§ 232 Matt. xvii. 1 : rhv Uerpov koI 'laKco^ov /cat ^ladvvrjVy Peter and James and John^ one inseparable group. Titus ii. 13: t^v fiaKapiav iXnida Koi eTri(f)dveiav t^s bo^rjs Tov ixeyaXov Ocov Koi (ra>TTJpos rjfia>p ^Iijcrov Xpio-rov, the blessed hope and mani- festation of the glory of our great God and Saviour Jesus Christ. Here are two cases of enumeration, each with a single Article : (1) the "manifestation" is but another expression for the "hope;" and (2) the latter phrase may imply, on the above-stated principle, either that God (the Father) and Jesus Christ the Saviour are so inseparably conjoined, that the glory of each is the same ; or else, as many of the best interpreters have it, and as Ellicott renders it in the translation above, that God in this passage is, like Saviour ^ an epithet of Christ. Comp. Eph. V. 5 ; 2 Thess. i. 12 ; 2 Pet. i. 1. See also the phrase, *'the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ" Eph. i. 3; 1 Pet. i. 3; Rom. XV. 6 ; 2 Cor. i. 3, xi 31 (1 Cor. xv. 24) : not God, even the Father, &c. h. Separate enumeration. — Luke xii. 1 1 : eVl toLs (rvvaya>yas Ka\ Tots dpxas Ka\ tcLs i^ovaias, to the synagogues, and tJie magistrates, and the powers, three different classes of tribunal. The reader may compare Mark xv. 1, wht re the elders and scribes are spoken of as constituting but one class, i.e., in the Sanhedrim. James iii. 1 1 : rh yKvKv koi rb Tri/epo , the sweet and tJie bitter ^ from their very nature separate. 2 Thess. i. 8 : rots pf) etSoo-t Geoj/, Ka\ rots p^ vTraKovovari, *c.r.X., to tJwse who know not God, and those who obey not the Gospel of our Loi'd Jesu^s Christ ; two distinct classes, incurring different degrees of punishment. Heb. xi. 20 : iv\6yr](Tiv *Ia-aaK rhv 'laKcoiS Ka\ rhv *H(rav, Isaac blessed Jacob and Esau. Both received a blessing, but not together, and not the same. The same enumeration may be found in different places, with and without the separating Article. This arises from a difference in the writer's point of view in each particular case. So in 1 Thess. i. 7, the Apostle writes, r^ yiaK€Bovlos', ye shall find a babe, which shall be the sign that the promise is fulfilled. Acts i. 7 : xpovovs ^ Kaipovs, times or seasons, generally. Acts xvii. 23 : ayvdt^m^ 0€w, to an unknown God. Acts xx\T.. 2-7 (Tischendorf) : iyKoXovfiai viro 'Iov8a£«v, / am accused by Jews ; that they should bring such a charge being the wonderful feature in the case. Rom. ii. 14 : otov yap t^vr\, k.t.X., For when Gentiles do the things contained in the law ; not the Gentiles, as though the case were ordinary. 1 Cor. iii. 10 : 0€ji^iov i6r]Ka, I laid a foundation. 1 Cor. xiv. 4 : ^KK\T]pcL, place. This is, however, most imlikely. § 240.] THE NUMBERS OF NOUNS. 221 (John X. 22) ; a^vfia, feast of unleavened bread (Matt. xxvi. IV, &c.) j ytrea-ia, birthday feast (Matt. xiv. 6 ; Mark vi. 21). So ydfj.oi, marriage feast, from the various observances and festivities accompanying. Alwves, ages, is plural, to mark the successive epochs of duration, especially of the Divine plan ; the singular either referring to one such epoch, or including all as one mighty whole. Hence the phrase for ever may be represented either by els rhv aXwua (Matt. xxi. 19 ; John vi, 51, 58 ; 1 Pet. i. 25, from Isa. xl. 8, &c.), or by ets tovs awvas (Luke i. 33; Rom. i. 25, ix. 5; Heb. xiii. 8, &-c.) ; while the emphatic /or ever and ever is expressed by e»s toxjs alwvas ruu ai(i>va)v, to the ages of ages (Heb. xiii. 21 ; 1 Pet. iv. 11, v. 11 ; and Rev. often). Ovpavoi, heavens, is found with meaning indistinguishable from ovpdvos, heaven. The plural usage probably arose from the Hebrew, where the word is always dual : " the two parts of the firmament." There is also "the third heaven." Matthew almost always has the plural; Luke almost always * the singular ; Mark most usually the singular ; John, the singular always, except in Rev. xii. 12. The other parts of the New Testament vary between the two almost equally. Other plurals of this kind will be sufficiently explained in the Voca- bulary. h. I. In the second above-mentioned class may be included those cases where persons are said generally to do what was really done by one of their number. Thus, Matt, xxvi 8, " his disciples said, To what purpose," &c. ; while in John xii. 4 we read, " one of his disciples, Judas." Compare Mark vii. 17 with Matt. xvi. 14; Matt. xiv. 17 and Mark vi. 38 with John vi. 8, 9 ; Matt. xxiv. 1 with Mark xiii. 1 ; Matt, xxvii. 37 with John xix. 19 ; Matt xxvii. 48 and Mark xv. 36 with John xix. 29. So in Luke xxii. 67, X4-yovT€s, when in all probability only one is meant. See also the same idiom in John xi. 8 ; Luke xx. 21, 39, xxiv. 5 (clirov) ; Matt. xv. 1, Xc'-yovTcs; xv. 12, etirov.f These instances will help to explain apparent discrepancies. Thus it may be that only one of the crucified malefactors actually blasphemed, notwithstanding the plural in Matt, xxvii. 44 ; and the narrative of the cure of the bhnd men at Jericho (Matt. xx. 30-34 ; Mark x. 46-52 ; * Perhaps always, except xii. 33, with Acts ii. 34, vii. 56 ; the other pas- sages where the recognised text gives the plural being all doubtful : x. 20, xi. 2, xxi. 26. t Stuart's "New Testament Syntax." 222 THE NUMBERS OF NOUNS. [§ 240. Luke xviii. 35-43) may possibly be harmonized in a similar way, although the probability seems to be that two different transactions of the kind then took place. * 2. Somewhat different from the above, yet related under the same head, are those cases in which a general statement suffices, although a particular one might also have been made. John vi 45 ; Acts xiii. 40 : The propJiets is a general reference, as when we quote from " the Bible " without specifying a parti- cular part. Matt. ii. 20 : redufjKaa-iv ot t'HTovvTes, K.r.X., thei/ are dead vjho seek, &c., when Herod specifically is meant. (See Exodus iv. 19.) Matt. ix. 8 : rbv doura e ^ova-lav toiovttjv tois dvGpwirois, who gave such povjer to men, i.e., as instanced in the case of Christ. Rom. i. 4 : e^ di/aoTao-ecos vcKpcov, by the resurrection of tJie dead ; the context showing the reference to be to the one great illustration, in the case of Christ, of this general fact. It is, however, incor- rect to interpret 1 Cor. xv. 29, on the authority of this passage, as referring to baptism "in the name of Him w^ho was dead, i.e., Christ." Heb. ix. 23 : kpcCttoo-i Ovcriais, with better sacrifices, i.e., whatever those sacrifices might be; the question being, as it were, left open for a moment, although the aim was to show that in reality only one sacrifice could avail. For the use of singular adjectives, pronouns, &c., in agreement or apposition with plural nouns, or the contrary, see § 317. CASE. The Nominative and Yocative. 241. Th3 Nominative is properly the case of the Subject ; hence also of the Predicate after copulative Verbs. See §§ 163-165. * Lee on Inspiration, p. 393 j Burgon's "Inspiration and Interpretation," p. 67. See, however, "Bible Hand-book," Part II., § 148; Trench on the Miracles, p. 429. § 242.] NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE CASE. 223 242. In some passages a Nominative is found, unconnected with the grammatical structure of the sentence ; calling attention, emphatically, to the thing or person spoken of. This is called a Suspended Nominative (" nominativus pendens "). Matt. xii. 36 : irav p^jp-a Lp'^hv...cnrobai(TOV(TL rrepl avrov "Koyov, every idle word... they shall give account of it. Acts vii. 40 : 6 Mwo-tjs ovTos-.-ot-K otdafxev, k.t.X.. This Moses... we know not, &c. Rev. ii. 26 : 6 vikwv kol 6 Trjpwv... Soxro) aura i^ova-lav, he that overcometh, and that keepeth ...to him I will give authority. So iii. 12, 21. See also Matt. x. 42 ; Luke xii. 10 ; John vii. 38, &c A "suspended Nominative" is occasionally employed in expressions of time. Matt. XV. 32 ; Srt, ^Stj rjnepai rpus, Trpoaixepova-l fioi, because they con- tinue with me, noio three days. So Mark viii. 2. * Luke ix. 28: iy€V€To...u}(ri\ Tifiipai oktu, it came to pass, about eight days after the sayings. Such cases may possibly be resolved into ellipsis, as, in the former case, of the substantive verb ; in the latter, of some such word as Sida-TTjixa, interval, the true Subject of iyfvero ; and in apposition with T]fi4pai. Some so-called " suspended Nominatives" are really instances of appo- sition. Thus (Mark vi. 40), Trpao-tat irpacnai, rank by rank, is in apposition with the Subject of avfireaov. f In ver. 39, «vt| e/c rSav ovpavciv, heJwld (there was heard) a voice from the heavens. Heb. ii. 13 : tSoi» l-ycb Ka\ toL iratSCa, k.t.X., Behold (here am) /, and the children which thou hast given me. * In both passages the ordinary text has riixepas, the usual case in such construction. (See § 286.) But all critical editions give the Nominative. t See Rev. T. S. Green's "Greek Testament Grammar," p. 86. 224 NOMINAllVE AND VOCATIVE CASE. [§ 243. 5. The word ^vo^ta, introducing the name of a person or place, is generally found in the Dative, ovd/zart, hy name. (See § 280.) Occasionally, however, it occurs in the Nominative, with the name as predicate and the copula omitted. So John i. 6, eyevero AvOpcoTTos ... 6vo|jia avTov 'latdvvijs, tliere was a man ... his name (was) John. Luke xxiv. 13 ; its Kafirjv ...§ fivona *E/iftaous, to a village ... whose name (was) Ummatcs. c. A peculiar Nominative phrase is used in the Revelation as an indeclinable noun, equivalent to the Hebrew name J ehovah (ch. L 4), diro 6 «v Kttl 6 ^v Kal 6 kp\6]i€vos, Jrom Him who isy and who waSf amd who com^th. 244. The use of the Nominative for the Vocative has been already noted, § 228, where see Examples. The usage is in fact elliptical, the true Vocative being in the personal pronoun, 7rf, tras i Kpfvwv, man I (thou) who judgest, (I mean) every one ! In Luke xii. 20, the Article is omitted, "A^pwv, and, accordingly, we must imderstand, not a direct address, as E.V., Tlwu fool! but an exclamation, **How foolish thou art!" A parallel instance is to be found in Romans viL 24 : ToAai'ira'pos fycb dv6p7ros, vrretched man that I am! and xi. 33, 5 ^os -kKovtov^ the depth of the riches! 245. With the Vocative proper, the interjection « is employed, chiefly in vehement expressions. Matt. XV. 28 : «J Y^vewj /icydXi; crov 17 mwv, the comfort of tlie Scriptures. Col. i. 23 : oLTTo T^ff ik7ri8os Tov eiayyeXCov, from the hope of the Gospel. Col. ii. 12: dia ttjs Triareas ttjs evep-ycCas rov Qeov, through tlie faith of the mighty worhing of God, i.e., mightily wrought by him. 249. The Genitive, after many verbs expressive of sense or mental affections of various kinds, indicates the source from which the sensation or affection proceeds. The full force of the Genitive is evident also in these cases. Thus, to smell a flower, really means to receive a certain impression from the flower. Compare the ordinary phrase, to taste of different viands. In another use, the object of sense itself becomes subject of the verb, and its quality is expressed by the following Genitive, as this rose smells of musk. Again, to recollect is to remind myself of the object of thought ; the influence being regarded as passing from the object to the person. In hke manner may be explained the phrases denoting other mental affections. »• Verbs of Sense. (1) a.Kova>, to hear: Mark ix. 7 ; Luke ix. 35 : ovtov aKovcre, Hear him ! John X. 3 : ra irpo^ara ttjs «j>«vfis avTov aKovei, the sheep hear his voice. Luke XV. 25 : ^kovo-c v£as koI xop"**? ^^^ heard music arid dancing. It will be seen that this verb is construed with a Genitive either of the person or the thing. Generally, however, the thing is in the A ecu* § 249.] THE GENITIVE OF ORIGIN. 227 sative, as the immediate object (especially \6yov, \iyovs, Matt. vii. 24, xiii. 20, &c.) When both are expressed together, the thing is iu the Accusative, and the person in the Genitive (Acts i. 4) ; sometimes with a preposition (2 Cor. xii. 6 ; Acts x. 22). The Genitive of the thing probably inclines to the partitive sense. Compare Acts ix. 7, where of Saul's companions it is said, aKovovres r^is (pcavTJs, hearing the voice, with ch. xxii. 9, tV (pav^v ovK ijKovaav, they heard not the voice. They heard of the voice, i.e., its sound, but not what it said. (2) yevofxai, to taste: Luke xiv. 24 : ovbeh ... yeva-eraL fxov tov t^iirvov, no one shall taste if my supper. Mark ix. \ '. ov p-ri yeva-covTui Oavdrov, shall hy no means taste death. So Luke ix. 27 j John viii. 52; Heb. ii. 9. In Heb. vi. 4, 5, the Genitive and Accusative are used in successive clauses, yevaafxevovs rr^s Swpeas, having tasted of the Gift ; yevarafievovs Qeov pr]\i.a, havi7ig tasted the word of God.* (3) dtyyavoij to toUch I Heb. xii. 20 : kov drjpiov Olyrj tov fipovs, and even if a beast touch the mountain. So xi. 28. rl/'n\a oa-tiaiiy received in this life; while 'the Word' essentially belongs to us now." But see Alford'a note, comparing the Accusative with that in John ii. 9. 228 THE GENITIVE OF ORIGIN. [§ 249. Titus iii 8 : tva (^povri^axri koXwv ^p^wv, that they may he zealous of {careful to maintain, E.Y.) good works. 1 Tim. iii. 5 : ivm iKKXTjo-Cas f»eo€ (TriiifXrja-eTai, how shall he care for the church of God ) Heb. xii. 5 : /x^ oXiywpet iraiSeCas Kvpiovy do not slight the chastise- ment of tJie Lord. c. Verbs of remembrance and forgetting: Luke xvii. 32 : fivqfiovevere T-^s Y^vaiKos Aa>r, remember Lois wife. Heb. xii. 5 : eKKiKrjo-de ttjs irapaKXTjo-cws, ye have forgotten the exhortation. Many grammarians prefer to class the Genitive after all these verbs under the head of "Partition." (See § 261, seq.) 250. Verbs of accusing, condemning, &c., take a Genitive of the charge, i.e., of the source of the accusation. Acts xix. 40 : iyKokela-Bai <5s. Luke vi. 16; Acts i. 13 : 'lovSas 'laKa^ov, Judas (the brother) of James; as expressed, Jude 1. 5. yw^. Matt. i. 6 : ck Ttjs tov Ovpiov, from the (wife) of Uriah . So John xix. 25. 6. oVkcioi. 1 Cor. i. 11 : vtto tS^v XXorfs, hy the (kinsfolk) of Chloe. 7. oTkos or 8«|jitt. Mark v. 35 : otto tov apxia-wayayov, from (the house) of the ruler of the synagogue. This is clear, as the ruler was himself with Jesus. So, perhaps, John xviii. 28. Acts ii. 27, 31 : els abov, " thou wilt not abandon my soul" to 8 232 THE POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. [§ 256. {the habitations) of Hades ; a classical phrase; or, "to (the power) of the imseen world." In Ps. xvi. 10, some copies of the LXX. read aSou, others abrjv. In Luke ii. 49, ^v rots tov TrarpSs ij.ov have been variously read, in my Father's business, or in my Father's house (plural, as in John xix. 27, rh Uia). The former gives the wider significance : *' among my Father's matters " (Alford). So all the versions of the EngUsh Hexapla, Luther, De Wette. 257. Attribute or quality is often expressed by the Possessive Genitive of an abstract substantive. In such cases the person or thing is spoken of as belonging to the virtue, vice, or other abstraction. The phrase may often be idiomatically rendered by turning the Genitive into an adjective. Thus, Luke xvi. 8, Thi oIk6voh.ov rris aSiKias, the steward of injustice, may be read the unjust steward. But such renderings lose the force of the original Rom. i. 26 : 7rd0r) an^Cas, lusts of dishonour. Heb. ix. 10 : diKaiayfiaTu 0-ApKos, ordinances of flesh. 1 Pet. L 2 : eV ayiao-fxa irv€vp.aTos, " in sanctif cation of spirit, " a spiritual sanctification." James i. 25 : aKpoarfis liriXrjo-novfjs, a hearer of forgetfulness, "a forgetful hearer." James ii. 4 : Kptral SiaXo-yto-jiwv irovtipttv, judges of evil tJioughtSy " evil-thinking judges." 258. To the strictly Possessive Genitive belong several phrases which have been otherwise interpreted — 2 Cor. iv. 6 : rris yvdoaews r^s S6^i]s rod &€ov, of the knowledge of the glory of God, i. e, the glory which belongs to God, and which He reveals in Christ; not, certainly, "the glorious God." Eph. L 6 : 6*5 ^TTaivov 56^ris rrjs x^p^tos ahrov, to the praise of the glory of His grace, i.e., the glory wliich characterizes Divine grace; not "glorious praise" or "glorious grace." CoL i. 11 : Kara rh Kphos TTjy 5J|tjs, according to the power of His glory ; "not 'his glorious power' (Auth., Beza, &c.), but 'the power which is the peculiar characteristic of His glory ;* the Genitive belong- ing to the category of the Possessive Genitive" (ElUcott). § 258.] THE POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. 233 Heb. i. 3 : t5 prjuan rris Buvanews avrov, by the word of His power ; belonging to it, as its true utterance, "not," says Alford, "to be ' weakened into the comparatively unmeaning ' by His powerful word.' " See also Ptom. vii. 24 ; Col. i. 13 ; Rev. iii. 10. 259. The Genitive is occasionally used by way of apposition, as if with some such ellipsis as consisting of, or bearirig the name of. Compare the English idiom, the City of Jerusalem^ where Jeru- salem is the city. This rule is an exception to the ordinary construction. The usual idiom in Greek is the city, Jerusalem. 2 Pet. ii. 6 : iroXcis 2o8d}jiwv Kal ro|idppas, (the) cities of Sodom and Gomorrah. John ii. 21 : Trepl toO vaov tov (rv earip, all things are yours. ] Cor. vi. 19 : ovk eVre kavrSiv, ye are not your own. In general, the verb to he, followed by a Genitive, implies an ellipsis, such as part, cliaracteristic, property, &c. Y. Ohject. 268. The Genitive case is often objectively employed,* that is, it expresses the object of 'some feeling or action, and may be rendered by various prepositions, as below. The fundamental meaning of the Genitive is here also very apparent, the object of a sentiment being, in another view of it, the source or occasion of its existence. Thus exere wlcrnu 0eou (Mark xi. 22), have faith in {or towards) God, realty means, "have such faith as His character excites. " Compare Col. ii. 12. Luke vi. 12 : iv t^ irpooreuxTi tov ©eov, in prayer to God.f John ii. 17: 6 tfjX.os tov oUkov o-ov, the zeal concerning thy house ; compare Titus ii 14. John xvii. 2 : Igovo-iav irdo-iis o-apK^s, power over all flesh. For similar constructions of i^ovala, see Matt. x. 1 ; Mark vi. 7 ; 1 Cor. ix. 12. Acts iv. 9 : evep-yecrtcj, dvOpcoirov dv tov Xpiorrov, the reproach in con- nexion with the Christ (as the hope of Israel). 1 Pet. ii. 19 : bi.a a7f]s, sheep doomed to slaughter. Rom. vii. 2 : dtrb rdv v6p.ov rov avSp6s, the law of the husband, i.e , that which defines the relation. § Rom. xiii. 3 : (polBos t«v ayaQav ^p^wv, a terror in respect to good works. Ephes. iv. 16 : Sta irda-qs d(f)TJi TT]s lirixopK^YCas, through every joint (which is) for the purpose of the supply. See Ellicott, in loc, who com])ares the phrase with to. a-Kevr) r^? XeirovpyUs, Heb. ix. 21, the vessels of the ministering. * So the Gospel of God, Rom. i. 1, &c. t Compare the phrase. Gospel of the Kingdom, Matt. iv. 23, ix. 35. X In the language of the Apostle Paul, my Gospel is evidently the Gospel entrusted to and preached by me, Rom. ii. 16 ; xvi. 25; 2 Tim. ii. 8. § See Winer, who quotes Old Testament parallels, Lev. vii. 1 ; xiv. 2, XV. 32; Numb. vi. 13, 21. 240, THE GENITIVE OF RELATIOX. [§ 270. Phil. iv. 9 : 6 Geo? tt^s «ipi^vTjs, the God who bestows peace, or perhaps a Genitive of quality. In most of these instances, a preposition with its case -woiild be an equally idiomatic usage. 271. The Genitive is also used after adjectives, as after nouns (§ 256), to denote various kinds of relation. Examples of this in the general sense are such as the following : — Heb. V. 13 : aizcipos Xd-yov SiKaioirvvrjs, unskilled in respect of the word of righteousness. Heb. iii. 12 : Kaphia Trovr^ph airwrrCas, a heart wicked in respect to unbelief (Winer). James i. 13 : cmelpaa-Tos KttKwv, unversed in things evil (Alford). 272. Adjectives, especially, signifying worthiness, fitness, or their opposites, take a following Genitive. So also their adverbs. Matt. iii. 8 : Kapnbv dgiov tI]s jieravofas, yWti^ tneetfor repentance. Matt. X. 10 : dgios 6 ipyd-njs T^s Tpo<|>fjs aiiTov, the workman is worths/ of his maintenance. 1 Cor. vi. 2 : dvdgioC core KpiTTipCwv eXaxio-TOiv, are ye unworthy of (incompetent for) tJie least decisions ? Rom. xvi. 2 : d^iws t»v a7i«v, " worthily (in a manner becoming) the holy^^ " as becometh saints," E.V. See also Eph. iv. 1; Phil. i. 27; CoL i. lOj 1 Thess. ii. 12 j 3 John 6. 273. So, in general, price, equivalent, penalty, and the like, are expressed by the Genitive. Matt. X. 29 : ov^t Suo arpovdia dois KCKoviajUvois, ye are like unto whited sepulchres. Luke xiii. 18 : rivt ofMoicDaoa avrfju; to what shall I liken it ? James i. 6 : cotKe kXvSwvi BaXdo-arjSj he is like a wave of tlie sea. Eph. V. 3 : KaOois TTpeTrei a"yiois, as it becometh saints. Matt. XX. 12 : laovs ■qH-tv avrovs enoirja-as, thou madest them equal with us. c. After a substantive verb, the Dative often denotes possession or property. Matt, xviii. 12 : iav yevTjral Tivi dvOptSirw eKarov 7rpo/3ara, if a Tiian have (if there be to any man) a hundred sheep. Acts viii. 21 : ovk eVrt crot /xepls oufie KKrjpos eV tw Xoyto tovtcoj thou hast not (there is to thee) part nor lot in this matter. The verb is sometimes omitted. 2 Cor. vi. 14 : rls yap p^fToxr) SiKaioo-tJvrj koI dvo[ji{a, for what participation have righteousness and iniquity ? II. Transmission. 278. a. Yerbs of giving, whether active or passive, are fol- lowed by a Dative of the person. After the active verb, the thing (Accusative) is the direct, the person (Dative) the indirect object. (See § 186.) Matt. vii. 6 : p.Tj dare t6 aytov Tois Kva-i, give not that which is holy to the dogs. Matt. vii. 7 : aire ire, koI dodrjo-cTai i»jiiv, ask, and it shall be given unto you. 244 THE DATIVE OF TRANSMISSION. [§ 278. Rom. i. 11 : tva n fierabo) x^apia-fia i^lv TrvcvfiariKov, that I may impart to you some spiritual gift. Heb. 11. 5 : ov yap dyytXois vnera^e rrjv olKovp.evqv t^v fie^ovaaPy for he did not subject tJie world to come unto angels. b. The Dative also indicates the receiver of information, tidings, command. So in the common \4y d8€X<{>w, he who is angry with his brother.* With eVt, Rev. xii. 17. * The following word ctfcJ), without a cause, should probably be omitted. Lachmaan, Tischeudorf, &c. § 278.] THE DATIVE OF TRANSMISSION. 245 Gal. i. 10 : CrjTco dvOpcoirois dpeaKciv ; do I seek to please men ? Matt. ii. 2 : rjXdoyLev TTpoaKvvria-ai avT<5, ive are come to worship him; always with Dative in Matt., Mark, and Paul (except Matt, iv, 10, from LXX.), in other books with Dative or Accusative. Matt. xxi. 25 : ovk emo-Teva-aTe avTw, ye believed him not; also with eVi (Dative), eVi (Accusative), and els. Acts V. 36, 37 : oaoi evreiOovro avrw, as many as obeyed him. Rom. X. 16 : ov navres vnrjKovaav t^ tvayyACto^ they did not all obey the Gospel. III. Reference, 279. The person or thing in respect of whom or which any- thing is done, whether to benefit or injure,* or in any other way, may be expressed by the Dative. This reference may generally be expressed in English by the preposition ybr. Matt. iii. 16 : aveiox.^r]aav avTw ol ovpavoi^ the Jieavens were opened for him. Matt. xvii. 4 : Troirjo-o) SSe rpels aKrjvds, o"ol plav Koi Mwiicrci fxiau KOL 'HXCq, fxiavf let me make here three tabernacles, one for thee, and one for Moses, and one for Julias. 'Rom. vi. 2 : oItlvcs d7r€6dvop,€v rfj in-aprCa, we who died to sin. 2 Cor, V. 13 : eiVe ydp €^e(rTr]p,€v, 0€«, ei're ac3(f)povovpev, vjiiv, for uh ether we were beside ourselves, (it was) for God, whether we are sober, (it is) for you, James iii. 18 : Kapirbs ... o-TreipeTai tois iroiovo-tv^ elprjvijv, the fruit of righteousness is sown for them that make peace. Heb. iv. 9 : apa dTroKeiTrerai (ra^^ariapos tw Xo^ tov Geov, there remaineth therefore a sabbath-keeping for the people of God. Matt, xxiii. 31 : fiapTvpelre kavrols, ye bear witness against your- selves. See also James v. 3 ; and compare 1 Cor. iv. 4. Rom. vi. 20 : iXevdcpoi rjre rp SiKaiocrvvT), ye were free in regard to righteousness ; not simply " from righteousness," which would have required the Genitive. * Latin, Dativus commodi vel incommodi. 246 THE DATI\'E OF REFERENCE. [§ 279. To this use of the Dative may be attributed the phrase, ri efiot Kai o-ot ; what Jiave I to do with thee ? lit., what is for me and thee 1 i.e., what have we in common 1 Mark v. 7 (Matt. viii. 29) ; John ii 4, &c. TV. Accessor^/ Circumstance, 280. a. The mode of an action is expressed by the Dative. Acts XI. 23 : TrapeKoKn rravras t^ irpoQ^cei rrjs Kapdias rrpoa[X€veiv rto Kvpiaiy lie was exhorting all to cleave to the Lord with the purpose of the Jieart. 1 Cor. X. 30 : ft iyat x^^pirt fi€T€xa>, if I partake vnth thank- fulness. Phil. i. 18 : iravrl TpoirWj etrf irpo<|>p€o-iv dWd t% KaKlt}. vTjmdCfTf^ be not children in understanding, but be infants in malice (Dative of mode). Eph. ii. 3 : rjpcv rcKva 4)v(r€t opy^s, we were in nature children of wrath. This use of the Dative evidently springs from its original local import. The "local Dative" is not found in the New Testament, excepting (1) in the phrase hy the way, or ways, bZ^, bZois, where the way is regarded as the instrument : James ii. 25 ; 2 Pet. ii. 15 ; and (2) connected with the figurative use of iropt^o/uot, TrepiiroTcco, to walk, as Acts ii, 31, xiv. 16 ; 2 Cor xii. 18, &c. § 280.] THE DATIVE OF ACCESSORY. 249 g. Accessories of time are marked by the Dative, as — (1) A space of time, /or. Acts xiii. 20 : cos ina-i TcrpaKoo-iois koi irevT^KOvra cScofce Kpirds, foT about four hundred and fifty years he gave judges. See also Luke viii. 29 ; John ii. 20 ; Acts viii. 11 ; Rom. xvi. 25. The Accusative is more frequently used. (See § 286 ; also under StcJ, §299.) (2) A point of time, at^ on, when particularized or specified. Mark vi. 21 : *Hp&)8j/y tois ycvco-iois avrov 8eiTTvov eTTolrja-e, Herod on his birthday made a banquet. But where the point is not specified, the Genitive is used. (See § 266. ) Matt. XX. 19 : rfj rpLr-^ "hv-^?^ eyepdrjaerai, on the third day he shall be raised. Luke xiv. 3 : et t^io-Ti t« o-aPpaTO) depaTreveiv ; is it lawful to heal on the Sabbath ? The preposition eV is frequently inserted in this connexion. (See § 295. ) The Accusative. 281. The Accusative primarily denotes that towards which motion is directed. Hence its use to complete the notion of the Predicate.* The Accusative expresses the immediate Object of a transitive verb. Matt. iv. 21 : elbev 6XKovs Svo d8eX(-ov, he purchased a field (transitive deponent). a. It should be noted tliat some verbs which in English are intransitive, i.e., complete in themselves as predicates, and which extend their meaning by the use of prepositions, are transitive in Greek, and therefore require an Accusative to complete their meaning. Thus, English : " whosoever shall be ashamed of me and of my works." Greek : 6s yap iav inaiaxwdrj |X€ /eat tovs Ipovs Xo-yovs (Mark viii. 38). Acts xiv. 21 : fuayyeXttrd/xevoi re Tf|V iroXiv Ikcivtjv koi fxaBrjTCvaavres iKavovs, and having preaclied the Gospel in that city and made many disciples, lit., "having evangelized that city and discipled many." The two verbs in this passage, however, with some others, vary in their use. (See Vocabulary. ) h. Generally, the employment of the same verb in different places as transitive and neuter may be explained by change of meaning, or a variation in emphasis. So 1 Cor. vi. 18 : ^evyere ri\v TropviCav, fee fomicoiionf avoid it. 1 Cor. X. 14 : cfievyere airh Tfjs elStaXoXarp^ias, flee from idolatry, make good your escape from it. Matt. X. 28: /x^ (^o^eiaQc dirb twv &TroKT€tvos ; but why seest thou the splinter ? Mark iv. 24 : pX^rreTe ri aKovfTt, look to (take heed) what ye hear. § 281.] ACCUSATIVE OF THE OBJECT. 251 In Mark viii. 15, xii. 38, jSXcTrerc diro — lit., "look away from!" — signifies bewure of. But in Phil. iii. 2, /SXeVere tovs Kvvas, ic.r.X., literally signifies " look to the dogs, look to the evil-workers, look to the concision ! " caution being implied.* d. The immediate Object is omitted after certain verbs, which are nevertheless strictly transitive. So especially .rrpoa-exo}, to apply (ora. t6v vovv, tite mind), to give heed. Luke xvii. 3 : irpoo-excre eavroiSj give heed to yourselves. With OTTO, to beware of, lit., to give heed (so as to turn) from. Matt. vii. 15 : irpoo-ex^TC Se dtrb roov yjrevboTrpocfiTjTcov, but beware of false propJiets. For the usage of particular verbs, consult the Vocabulary or a Lexicon. 282. Any verb, whether transitive or intransitive, may extend its meaning by a "cognate Accusative," or "internal Object." This Accusative is always connected with the verb in signification, often in etymology. For a similar use of the Dative, see § 280, b ; and for the Participle, § 394, i., 3, d. Matt. ii. 10 : ixapr](Tav xo-po-v (te-ydXiiv, lit., they rejoiced a great joy, i.e., "rejoiced greatly." Luke ii. 8 : ^vKdaa-ovres vXaKds ttjs wkto^, lit., watching watches by night, i.e., keeping watch. Col. ii. 19 : av'^ei TT]v ai5|T]criv rov Gcov, increoseth the increase of God, i.e., yields the increase. See also John vii. 24 ; 1 Tim. vL 12 ; I Pet. iiL 14, &c. Eph. iv. 8 : fJxp-oKoiT^va-ev alxfiaXftxriav, he led captive a captivity^ i.e., a train of captives. Ps. Ixviii. 18.t ♦ Ellicott. f This passage is rather an instance of a cognate external object, the abstract noun representing a multitude (Numbers xxxi. 12, LXX., "they brought the captivity.") So Ostervald's translation, "il a meng captive une grande multitude de captives ;" and De Wette's, "er fiihrte Gefangene." 262 ACCUSATIVE OF DEFINITION. [§ 283. 283. An Accusative is often used by way of more exact definition of the Predicate.* John VI. 10 : dvenea-av oi av8pes, rhv apiO|Jibv axrel nevTaKio-xtXioif the men sat down, in number about Jive thousand. Phil. i. 1 1 : 7reTrXT)pa)iJ.€voi Kapirbv diKaiocrvvijs, filled with the fruit of righteousness. So Col. i. 9. Compare under Genitive, § 251, and Dative, § 280, d. The Accusative strictly denotes the respect in which fulness is attained. More generally, however, the Dative of accessory circumstance, § 280, is employed. In Acts xviii. 3, the approved reading is t^ T^vTI (Lachmann, Tischendorf) for the received ttiv rexvTjv, "6y occupation they were tent-makers." 284. Many transitive verbs may have two objects, and be, therefore followed by two Accusatives; generally of a person ("the remoter object") and a thing ("the nearer object"). So verbs of asking, teaching, clothing and unclothing, anointing, with many others. This Accusative of the thing is analogous to the "internal object" of the verb. (See § 282.) Matt. ^^. 9 : 8v al-nia-ei 6 vibs avrov dprov, wJwm his son shall ask for a loaf (Occasionally the person with prepp., napd, oTrd.) John xiv. 26 : eKciuos vp-as di8a^€i irdvra, he sJiall teach you all things. (Once with Dative of person, Kev. il 14.) Mark xv. 17 : eudibvaKovanv avTov 'irop<|>vipav, they clotlie him in purple. (The preposition ev sometimes found, as Matt. xi. 8.) Heb. i. 9 : expiore o-e . . . ^aiov dya\\idcrea)s, he anointed thee with tJie oil of gladness, LXX. ; Ps. xlv. 7. (But the Dative of material is sometimes used, Acts x. 38, and with dXcC6) always.) * This Accusative is often said to be governed by Kard, in respect of^ understood. "It is only a variety of the cognate Accusative. It defines more exactly the act or state described by a verb or adjective by referring it to a particular object, or part affected. It is the Accusative of an equXvaleani notion — the part wherein the act or state consists." — Dr. Jacob. § 284.1 THE ACCUSATIVE. 253 The Passive retains the Accusative of the nearer object. Luke xvi. 19 : eveSiSuo-KeTo -rropcpvpav koI ^vaaov, he was clotlied toith purple and fine linen. Acts xxviii. 20 : tV a\v(nu Ta.vTT]v irfpLKei/jai, I am hound with this chain. (See Heb. v. 2.) 2 Thess. ii. 15 : Kparelre tos irapaSScrsis as iSiBdx97]T€, hold fast the tra- ditions which ye were taught. 1 Tim, vi. 5: Zuu avQpdynayv rhv uovv, of men corrupted in mind. The same remark applies to verbs which in the Active express the remoter object by the Dative. 1 Cor. ix. 17 : oIkovoixIuu ireirfo-Teu/nai, / have been entrusted with a stewardship. So Eom. iii. 2 ; Gal. ii. 7 ; 1 Thess. ii. 4 ; 2 Thess. i. 10 ; 1 Tim. i. 11. 285. The Subject of an Infinitive Verb is put in the Accusative. In translation, the Infinitive is generally to be rendered as a finite verb, and the Accusative as the nominative, with the con- junction that prefixed. For the Infinitive, see § 387. It is really a verbal noun, and is used to complete the predication. The Accusative thus becomes an Accusative of definition* (§ 283). 1 Tim. ii. 8 : ^ovXo^ai ... irpo(r€vx€or0ai, " I wish for... a praying;" ^ovXoixai irpoo-evxeo-Oat tovs &v8pas, " I wish for a praying on the part of men," / wish that men should pray. Luke xxiv. 23 : ot Xeyovo-iv avrbv t^jv, who say that he is alive. Acts xiv. 19 : vojxia-avTes avrbv TeOvTjKevat, thinking that he was 1 Cor. vii. 10, 11 : TrapayyeXko) ... yvvaiKa dno dvdpos fifj \i6vai, / enjoin that a wife should not he separated from (her) husband^ and that a man should not desert (his) viife. Luke i. 75 : toi) hovvai fj^uv ... pvo-devras ... Xarpevciv avrw, to grant unto us that we being delivered (fi(ias implied in pvaOevras) should serve him. * Compare Dr. Donaldson's Grammar, § 584. 254 ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE. [§ 285. When the Subject of the Infinitive and of the principal verb is the same, it is not repeated except for emphasis, and adjectives, &c., in agreement with it are put in the nominative case. Rom. XV. 24 : eXTri^o) 8tairop€v4vai, / do not reckon that I myself have attained. So Romans ii. 19 ; Luke XX. 20. When the Infinitive is substantivized (see § 201) by the Article, the relations expressed by the Genitive after nouns are denoted by the Accusative. Inf. gen. Acts xxiii. 15 : vph rov ^yyia-ai avrSp, before his approach. Inf. dat. Matt, xiii 4 : ip r^ (rveipeiv avrov, in his sovnng. So xxvii. 12. Inf. ace. Matt. xxvi. 32 : nerh rh iyfpdrjpai ju«, a/ier my rising again, 286. Relations of time and space are denoted by the Accu- sative. a. Space. — Luke XxiL 41 : amtnTaa-Or) air* avrav coQ-el \i6ov PoX^v, he withdrew from them about a stooie's cast. John vi. 19 : iXijXaKOTcs ovv as vf)o-ai ... eK brjvapiov t^v ^|i^pav, having agreed for a denarius a day (or perhaps, rather, this is another instance of (2) the Accusative of duration — a denarius for the day's work). § 287.1 THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 255 287. The Accusative is sometimes found in elliptical or apparently irregular constructions. Matt. iv. 15 : &Uu BdKa0aXnov, eye for an eye. Matt. XX. 28 : \vTpov avrl iroXXwv, a ransom for many. Heb. xii. 2 : avrl tt]s TrpoKeijxevrjs avra xo-^o-s, in return for the joy set before Mm. John i. 16 : iXd(So[iev ... x«P*^ o-vr^ X'^P'-^os, we received grace for grace, i.e., grace within, as correspondent with grace without, the Divine gift being as the Divine source ; or (with most commen- tators), one measure of grace to succeed and replace another: " grace upon grace." t This preposition is employed with the neuter relative plural in the adverbial phrase, av6' wv (in return for which things) = because. (Luke i. 20, xii. 3, xix. 44; Acts xii. 23 ; 2 Thess. ii. 10.) * The primal significance of each preposition will be shown by small CAPITALS. t " Ununterbrochene, immer sich erneuernde Gnade." — Winer. 258 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE, OTTO. [§ 292. 292. II. *A7ro, FROM THE EXTERIOR. 1. Separation, the preposition expressing removal, the governed noun the point of departure in place or time : from. Matt. i. 21 : (raxrn ... dirJ> twv ctjiapTiftiv, Ae shall save ...from their sins. Matt. iii. 1 3 : dirb ti]s raXiXaias, from Galilee. Matt. ix. 22 : airh ttjs «pas eKeivrjs, from that hour. Matt. vi. 13 : pva-ai ^fxas o-trh tov irovTjpov, deliver US from evil, or, the Evil one. 2. Derivation, source, descent : from, of. Matt. vii. 16 : dirb rp 1^6X0) v o-vku^ figs from thorns. Matt.' xi. 29 : fiddere dir' Ijiov, learn of me. 3. Hence, especially, cause, occasion : from, on account of Matt. xiv. 2Q : dirb tov (jpov cKpa^au, they cried out for fea/r. Matt, xviii. 7 : oval . . . dxb t«v o-KdvSaXcov, Woe, on account of tite offences ! So, according to some commentators, Heb. v. 7, fiaaKovadeU anh i^y euXo/Selas, Jieard on account of his fear (godly fear, or piety). Others, N ^ however, imderstand "heard (and delivered) from his fear," i.e., from the calamity which he apprehended. * 4. This preposition is sometimes used (after transitive verbs) elliptically, a word like some (as the real object of the verb) being understood. John xxi. 10 : eveyKart dirb t«v ^^^apW, bring of the fish. Acts ii. 17 : e/cp^ew dirb Toi) IIvev|iaTos fiov, I will pour out of my Spirit. 5. *A7ro is frequently joined with adverbs, as dirb t6t€, from then^ Matt. iv. 17, &c. ; dw dpri, henceforth, Matt, xxiii. 39, &c. ; dwi * The verb flcruKova has a similar extended meaning in Ps. cxviii. 6, LXX. But see Alford in loc, who cites Luke xix. 3, xxiv. 41 ; John xxi. 6; Acta xii. 14, XX. 9, xxii. 11, as passages where inrh means on account of. § 292.] PREPOSITIOJNS \VITH THE GENITIVE, CLTTO, €K. 259 ^aKp6Q€v, Jrom afar; arrh &viXovs Ik tov p,a|Jia)va ttjs ddiKias, make to yourselves friends by the m^ammon of unrighteousness, i.e., by (the proper use of) your wealth. Rom. V. 1 : biKaKodivres Ik ttCo-tcws, being justified by faith. So in many passages. 1 Cor. ix. 14 : Ik tov cvayyeXiov (tjv, to live from the Gospel. 4. The material or mass from which anything is made or taken, oJ. Matt, xxvii. 29 : a-recfiavov l| AKavGwv, a crown ofthoriis. 5. Belonging to a class, of; often with abstract nouns. John xviii. 37 : 6 oip Ik ttjs dX-qOcfos, he wlio is (on the side) of the truth. 260 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITnTE, €K, [§ 293. Rom. ii. 8 : ol k^ IpiOeCas, fliey who are of a self-seeJdng spirit. Gal. iii. 9; Kom. iv. 12 : oi Ik tticttcws • ol Ik irepiTour)?, tliey who are of faith — of circumcision, i.e., wlio range tliemselves under these opposite symbols. So Rom. iv. 14, ol Ik vojjlov, they who are of law, &c. This meaning is closely allied with (3). 6. Springing from : of the state of mind giving occasion to any action, yrom, out of. 2 Cor. ii. 4 : Ik iroXXiis 6\£xj/€«s typa^a, I wrote out of^ much ajfliction. 1 Thess. ii. 3 : 17 irapdKKrja-is fjfiav ovk Ik itXAvtis, ov8e 1^ aKaOapo-Cas, our exhortation was not from deceit nor from uncleanness. 7. Used of time, from, the future being infolded in, and springing out of the present. John vi. 66 : Ik tovtov, from this time. Acts ix. 33 : l| It«v itKr&,for eight years. 294. TV. Upo, IN FRONT OF. 1. Before, in respect of place. Acts xii. 6 : c^vkaKis re irpb ttjs Wpas, the guards before the door. So ch. xiv. 13 ; James v. 9. Matt. xi. 10 : irp^ irpoo-wirov trov, before thy face, from LXX. So Mark i. 2 ; Luke i. 76, &c. 2. Before, in respect of time. John xvii. 24 : irpb KarapoXfjs Koa-fiov, before the foundation of the world. 1 Cor. iv. 5 : fi^ irph KaipoO ri Kpivere, judge nothing before the time. 2 Cor. xii. 2 : vph h&v 8cKaT€or irpbs Ifxas ; am I to conie to you with a rod ? 1 Cor. V. S : fifj Iv tvp-r) iraXai^ . . . aXX' h atv|iois, not in old leaven ...but in unleavened bread. 1 Tim. i. 18 : tva a-rpaTevrj Iv avrats, tliat thou mayest fight in them (prophesyings), i.e., armed with tliem. Heb. ix. 25 ; 6 dpxiepeiis ela-epxerai ... kv atjiari dWorpiaij the high priest enters ... in the blood of others. Compare ch. x. 19; xiii. 12. So, perhaps, Eph. vi. 2 : ivrokr] npciTr) kv lirayyeXC^, tJie first commandment in, or with promise. To this notion of investiture that of action is sometimes superadded (Luke i. 51). Hence *'the eV instrumentaL" Luke xxiL 49 : et irard^ofifv iv fiaxalpa ; shall we smite vxith the sioord ? See also Heb. xi. 37, and the Kevelation frequently, as ii. 16, vi. 8, xiii. 10, xiv. 15. In Matt. v. 13, Mark ix. 50, 4v tIpi; may be rendered wherewith ? 4. The sphere in which the subject is concerned, as dwelling or acting, in. So the phrases Iv afiaprCa, in sin ; Iv irCorrci, in fiaith ; kv a-o^U^, in wisdom; Iv dYclinj, in love; kv nveviian, in spirit, or, in i/ie Spirit. Matt. xxii. 43 ; E-ev. i. 10 (Rom. vii. 5). The frequent phrase, iv Xpiar^ (so ^i' Kwp/y, &c.), means, not simply attached to Christ as a follower, but in Christ, in the most intimate abiding fellowship.* So "Chiist in us," GaL i. 16, &c A similar phrase is used of the revelation of God himself. 2 Cor. V. 19; ^ehs ^v Xpia-r^, k.t.X., God in Christ was reconciling, &c Eph. iv. 32: i &ehs iv Xpurr^ Ix^P*"'""''*' ^M*''* (^od in Christ forgave you. See also Acts xvii. 31 : *'ina man whom he hath ordained." 5. In the power of, by. Matt. ix. 34 : Iv t^ Apxovr* W>v daifioviav, by the prince of the demons. * "Nicht bios durch Ohr. heneficio Christi sondern in Chr., in gcistig, kraftiger Gemeinschaft n^it Chr." — Winer, §295.] PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE, h, avv. 263 Matt. V. 34 : 4v tw ovpav^ ... kv t-q y% hy heaven ...by earth. So elsewhere in asseverations. In Matt. iv. 4, the best copies read kv irdvri p^jJtaTi, hy every word of God. Compare 1 Thess. iv. 15. 'Ev6|ioC, 1 Cor. ix. 15; Mark xiv. 6, must be rendered in my case; 1 Cor. xiv. 11, in ony apprehension. 6. This preposition with its case is often equivalent to an adverb. Compare (4) preceding. So we may render Iv 8vvdp.€i, ia power, or powerfully ; iv 8oX«, craftily ; Iv rdxei, speedily, (fee. In John xviii. 20, Iv KpvirTw is in secret, secretly, different from kv to* Kpvnrw, Matt. vi. 18. 7. Of time, in, upon. Matt. ii. 1 : Iv -^jilpais *Hpw5oi;, in the days of Herod. Matt. X. 15 : Iv Tjiiep^ Kpiaeas, in the day ofjudgjnent; xii. 36, tkc. Often with the infinitive treated as a noun. Matt. xiii. 4 : Iv tw crirdpnv avrov, while he was sowing. With the relative pronoun, iv ^, whilst, as Mark ii. 19 ; iv oTs, whilst, as Luke xii. 1. The only difference between the singular and the plui'al is that the latter is more general. 8. Constructio prcegnans, — This preposition seems occasionally to include the sense of els, and so is used after verbs implying motion : — " into, so as to be in." Matt, xxvi 23 : 6 l)Jipd\{/as ... Iv rto rpv^Xia, he who dipped ... in the dish. Luke xxiii. 53 : ^6t]K€v avrh Iv ixvrjfjiaTi Xa^evra, they laid it in a rock-hewn sepulchre. Romans ii. 5 : Otio-avpCtcis o-eauroj 6pyj)v Iv rjpepa opy^y, thou treasurest to thyself wrath (to be poured forth) u2:)on a day of wrath. 296. II. 2vv, CONJUNCTION WITH (union, or co-operation). With, together with. Matt. xxvL 35 : aX^v yavlas, it became the head of tlie comer. So Mark xii. 10 ; Luke xx. 17 ; from LXX., Ps. cxviii. 22. Compare Luke iii. 5 (from Isa. xl. 4), xiii. 19; John xvi. 20; Acta vii. 21, xiii. 22 ; Rom. xi. 9 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 22, xv. 45 (see Gen. il 7, LXX.); 2 Cor. vi. 18, viii. 14; Heb. i. 5; James v. 3. Acts xix. 27 : t6 ... Upbv els ov8^v Xoyto-^^vai, the tem,ple to be esteemed as nothing. Rom. ii. 26 : olxi fj aKpo^va-ria avrov els irepiTOjATjv Xoyiad^atrai ; sliall not his undrcumcision be accounted as circumcision ? Rom. ix. 8 : Xoyi^erai els <^^•^pne^ it is accounted /or a seed. Rom. iv. 3, 5, 9, 22 ; Gal. iii 6 : tXoylaOrj avrco els BiKau>s 8i' ^ji«v, neither hy Spirit, nor hy word, nor hy letter as from us (through us as the mediate authors). * la clasaic Greek, ircpt and vit6 may take a Dative ; also /lercC in poets. § 299.] Atci, WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 269 Eph. i. 1, &c. : 8ioL 0€\%aTos Oeov, hy tlie will of God. Eph. ii. 8, &c. : o-eo-coo-fieuoi 8ia ttjs iri^o.ros, the things (wrought) by means oj tlie body. 3 John 13 : ov diKa 8ia ft^avos ku KoXdjtov ypd(l)€iPf I do not wish to write with ink and pen. This preposition is used, especially in such phrases as 5ik 'Iriffov Xpiarov, of Christ's mediatorial work in all its manifestations.* (Rom. ii. 16, V. 1; 2 Cor. i. 5; Gal. i. 1; Eph. i. 5; PhiL i. 11 ; Titus iii. 6; and perhaps 1 Peter ii. 14. ) Very rarely it seems to indicate the primary agent. 1 Cor. i. 9 : vurrhs 6 ®ehs 5i* ov iKX-ftBrtre, k.t.X,, God is faiHiful hy whom ye were called, &c. Yet even here the proper force of Sjo is not lost. The Father is represented as acting on behalf of his Son, to bring Christians into fellowship with him. 3. In reference to time, it marks the passage through an interval : (a) during, or (6) after the lapse of. (a) Luke v. 5 : 8i' 8Xtjs t<)s wktv IlaT^pa, / live because of tlie Father y i.e., "because he liveth." Heb. V. 12 : 8iA rhv xp°vov, on account of^ i.e., considering the time that you have been Christians. Rom. viii. 1 1 : StoL xh Ivoikovv ahrnv nvwfta, on account of his indwelling Sjnrit. The distinction between the Genitive and the Accusative should be marked in such passages as Rom. xii. 3, xv. 15. "I say to you," writes the Apostle in the former, SaX{)s Zx^oavj having a covering on (depending from) the head. See also Mark xiv. 3 ; Acts xxvii. 14 ; 2 Cor. viii. 2. 2. Hence the more usual signification, against^ in opposition to (the reverse of vTrep, which see). Mark xi. 25 : ci rt «x*''« ''*''^ Tivot, if ye Iiave anything against any one. § 800.] Kara, WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 271 Acts xiv. 2 : inf]yeipav KaroL t«v d8€Xwv, they rose up against the brethren. 3. Occasionally in asseverations, by — Matt. xxvL 63 : i^opKiCco o-e Kara tov 0€ou, I adjure thee by God. So Heb. vi. 13-16. 1 Cor. xv. 15, is probably to be referred to the same rule. "We have called God to witness," though the rendering against might be admissible. " Of God " is plainly incorrect. 4. As with the Accusative, over, throughout^ a usage confined to Luke, and to the following passages — , Luke iv. 14 : KaO* SXtis rfjs irtpixwpov, through all the region round about. Luke xxiii. 5 : Acts ix. 31, 42, x. 37. j3. With the Accusative, down upon, or along — 1. ThrougJwut (see a, 4), with singular or plural. Luke viii. 39 : KaO' 8Xt]v t^v iroXiv, through the whole city. Acts viii. 1 : Kara toLs X"P<^s t^s lovbalas, throughout the regions of Judaea. Acts xxvi. 3 : roiv Kara 'lovSatovs e^coi/, of the customs among the Jews. 2. Over against, locally — Luke ii. 31 : Karol irpoo-wTrov irdvroiv Ta>v Xacov, before the face of all the peoples. So Acts ii. 10 ; Gal. iL 1 1, iii. 1, &c. 3. In reference to time, at or in, "correspondent with," "at the period of" (" over against") — Matt. i. 20, &c. : Kar 8vap, in a dream. Acts xvi. 25 : Kara rh |i€^ovs ircpl avrbv, seeing multitudes around him. Used of dress, &c., Matt. iii. 4 : ircpl t^v 6, OVER. a. With the Genitive, " over and separate from." 1, On belialf of, as though bending "over" to protecf; (the opposite of Kara). Of persons. g 303.] ^776/3, WITH THE GENITIVE. 275 Matt. V. 44 : rrpoarevxeo-Oe inrlp t«v Suokc^vtov vfxaS) pra^/foQ'* those who persecute you. Mark ix. 40 : 6? yap ovk ecm kqB^ vpav vir^p vfi.wv ea-riv, he who IS not against us is for u^. Compare Rom. viii. 31. 2 Cor. V. 14, 15 : vnrlp irdvrwv dneOaueVj he died for all. So Rom. V. 6, 7, 8j Gal. ii. 20, iii. 10; Eph. v. 25; Heb. ii. 9; 1 Pet. ii. 21, &G. Philemon 13 : tm virlp o-ov not diaKovfj, that he might minister to 7m for tJiee. As a service is often rendered on behalf of another hy heing offered in his stead, the notion of vitip may become interchangeable with that of avri, as in the last passage. The distinction is, that virip of itself leaves undetermined the way in which the service is performed, simply affirming the fact; avrl, on the other hand, is definite. See Winer, § 47, I, n. 2. 3. Of things : for their sake, in various ways. John xi. 4 : vir^p rfjs 8o|t]s tov Qeov, for the glory of God, i.e., to promote it. Rom. XV. 8 : virkp dXTjOctas Qeov, for the truth of God, i.e., " to confirm his promises." 2 Cor. xii. 19 : iiirep Tt]s vpCiv oiKoSofi'fjs, for your edification, i.e., to minister to it. Phil. ii. 13: vtrlp rfjs evSo k tas, ybr (his) good pleasure, i.e. to accomplish it. Acts V. 41 : vtrkp TOV ovdjittTos, on behalf of the Name of Christ, i.e., to glorify it. Compare ix. 16 ; 3 John 7, (fee. 1 Cor. XV. 3 : an^davev vir^p t«v a(x,apTia)v T]pa}v, he died for our sins, i.e., to take them away. Compare Heb. v. 1, tfec. ; and see under Trepl, a. 3. About, "in reference to," simply; the notion of benefit or service having disappeared. 2 Cor, viii. 23 : eire vtikp Titov, whether (you enquire) about Titus, * More emphatic than jtipi in the same connexion. 276 'TTre'p, iirS. [§ 3C3. 2 Thess. ii 1 : ^ir^ rr\s irapovvos, at the time of tlie deportation to Babylon. Romans i. 10 : lirl t«v Trpo iraXaiu, no OTie putteth ... upon an old garment. y. With the Accusative, " upon, by direction towards." 1. Upon, with motion implied. Matt. V. 15 : rcdeaa-iv IttX ri\v XvxvCav, they put (it) upon the lampstand. Matt. vii. 24 : (OKodofirja-c lirl T^v -irtTpav, he huilt upon the rock. Matt xiv. 29 : irepieiraTrja-cv lirl to, vSara, he walked upon the waters. Matt. xxiv. 2 : Xidos €irl XiGov. See the Dative in the same connexion, /3, 1. The notion there is of rest, simply ; here, of downward pressure. So after the verb iXiri^a, to hope; iiri, with the Dat., 1 Tim. iv. 10; with the Ace, v. 5. In the one case, the hope is said to rest upon, as a fact ; in the other, to be i)laced upon, as an act. So after ttc'Sw, 2 Cor. i. 9, compared with ii. 3. The difference is so shght, that the expressions are easily interchangeable. Constructio prmgnans. — In Matt. xix. 28 ; 2 Cor. iii. 15, and some other passages. 2. Over, of authority, superintendence. Luke i. 33 : ^ao-ikeva-ci lirl rhv oIkov 'la/cwjS, he sludl reign over ^e house of Jacob. Heb. ii. 7 : Karearqa-as avrov iirX toL gp-ya, /c.r.X., tIlOU didst set him )ver iJie works of thy liands. The three cases in this connexion seem ** interchangeable," t.e., the notions which they respectively express are so nearly allied that any of them may be employed without materially altering the sense. The Dative, however, and not the Accusative, is used when the preposition follows a verb of existence ; the Accusative, and not the Dative, when the verb is transitive. The Examples (o, 2) show that the Grenitive may be with either. 3. To, implying an intention (for, against). Matt, iii 7 : (p^oftevovs hrl rh pdirrwrna airovf coming for hia baptism^ § oOo.] 'Ettl, with the accusative. 281 Mark v. 21 : o-wrjx^r] ox>' 5o-ov, inasmuch as. So of time, as long as, Matt. ix. 15. With numeral adverbs, Acts x. 16, xi. 10. So in the compound adverb, €^a7ra|, once for all, at once (Rom. vi. 10 ; 1 Cor. xv. 6 ; Heb. vii. 27, ix. 12, X. 10). 6. Of time, over, during on. Luke X. 35 : eirl t-^jv aiJpiov, in the course of the morrow, Luke xviii. 4 : ovk rjOeXija-ep €irl xpovov, he would not for a tim£. Acts xiii. 31 : w(jidr] IttI "qixepas irXciovs, he was seen during several days. So in the phrase, iirl rh uvr6, at tJie same place or time, '* together" (Luke xvii. 35 ; xYcts ii 1 ; 1 Cor. vii. 6, «&c.) 282 Uapd, WITH THE GEKITIYE. [§ 306. 306. II. Uapdj BESIDE (of juxtaposition). a. With the Genitive : "Beside and proceeding from." With persons only : frorrij generally with the notion of some- thing imparted. Matt. ii. 4 : invvQavcTo irap' avTwv, he enquired of them. Phil. iv. 8 : bf^afxevos irap' '£j'irapo8CTOV to. nap* vpoiVy having received of Epaphroditus the things from you. John xvi. 27 : irapSi tov 0€ov i^rjXdov, I came forth from God. Compare John i. 14. Matt. xxi. 42 : irapa Kvpiov eyevero avrrj, this wasfrom Jehovoh — "his doing," from LXX., Ps. cxviii. 23. Mark iii. 21 : ol irap' avroC, tlwse from him, i.e.y from his home or family. ^. With the Dative, "beside and at." 1. With, near, of persons only, except John xix. 25. John xiv. 1 7 : irap' vp.iv fieva, he remains with you. Acts X. 6 : ^eui^erai irapd Tivi SCpwvt, lie lodges with one Simon. John xix. 25 : irapa tw oTavpw, oiear tlie cross. 2. With, in the estimation or power of. Matt. xix. 2Q : irapa AvOpcoirois ... dSvvaTOV, irapoL Sc 0€« navra dvvaTa, vnth men . . . impossible ; but with God all things are possible. Rom. ii. 13 : biKaioi irapdrtp QiM, jy^t vjith God. Kom. xii. 1 6 ; (fjpovifiot irap' lavrots, ivise in your own esteem. y. With the Accusative, " to or along the side of." 1 . By, near, after verbs implying motion ; also rest by an extended object, as the sea. Matt. xiii. 4 : (irea-e irapA ti^v 68ov, it fell by tlie wayside. Matt. XV. 30 : eppiyj^av airrovs irapd tovs iro8as, tliCy COSt t^iCm at his feet. § 306.J llapdj WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 283 Acts X. 6 : to eo-Tiv oIklu iraptt GoXao-trav, wlwse llOUSe 18 by t/ie seaside. 2. Beside, as not coinciding with, hence contrary to. Acts xviii. 13 : irapa vucriv, contrary to nature. Rom. iv. 18 : Trapa IXiriSa, contrary to expectation. Rom. i. 2,5 : Trapa tov KTio-avra, instead of the Creator ; or possibly, rather than, as (3). 3. Beside, with the notion of comparison, superiority, above.* Luke xiii. 2 : aiiaprcoXol irapa irdvras, sinners above all. Romans xiv. 5 : Kpivei fjpepav irap' i\\i.ipav, esteems day above day^ i.e., one above another. Heb. ix. 23 : KpelrToa-i Bvalais iraptt ravras, better sacrifices than these. So i. 4, iii. 3, xi. 4, xii. 24 ; Luke iii. 13. 4. From juxtaposition arises the notion of consequence, t in the phrase irapa tovto, 1 Cor. xii. 15, 16, therefore. 307. III. Hpoj, TOWARDS. a. With Genitive, "hither wards." Belonging to the part or character of, J conducive to, vn. one instance only — Acts xxvii. 34 : tovto yap irpbs rfjs i)|Ji€T€'pas (rcoTT]ptas vTrdoxei, for this is for your deliverance. /3. With Dative, "resting in a direction towards." Near, hard by — Luke ix. 37 : irp^s tfj Kardpao-et, close to the descent. • See virep. The difference is, that virip affirms superiority, irapd. institutes comparison, and leaves the reader to infer superiority. + So in Latin, propter, because of, from prope, near. J So in classical Greek, irphs kukov av5p6s. ' 284 Upds, WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. [^ 307. John xviii 16 : irpbs t^ 6vpaX-g koI eva irpbs tois irocriv, Olie at the head and one at tJiefeet. E,ev. i. 13 : irpbs rots (laarois, about the breast. These are the only undoubted instances in the New Testament. Some copies add Mark v. 11, John xx. 11, in the same sense. y. With the Accusative, " hitherwards." 1 . To, of literal direction. Matt. XL 28 : SeCrc irpiJs |J.6, come hitlier to me I Matt, xxiii. 34 : oTrooreXXa) irpbs iijios 7rpo(firjTas, I send to you propJiets. Luke i. 19 : XoKriaai irpcJs o-c, to speak to thee. 1 Cor. xiii. 12 : Trpoo-taTroi' irpbs irpoo-wirov, yace to face. 2 John 12; 3 Jojin 14. 2. After the substantive verb {constructio prcegnans)^ with. Matt. xiii. 5Q: olxi iraaai irpbs T|(jias ela-i; are they not all with us 9 John i. 1 : 6 Aoyos rjv irpbs TOV 0€bv, THE WORD WAS WITH GoD. 3. Of mental direction, towards, agai7ist. Luke xxiii. 12 : ev ex^P9 ovres irpbs lavTovs, being in enmity towards themselves. 1 Thess. V. 14 : naKpoBvixeiTe irpbs irdvras, be long suffering towards all. Acts vi. 1 : yoyyva-fibs •n-pbs tovs 'Eppaiovs, a murmuring against tJie Hebrews, In Heb. i. 7, simple reference is denoted ; Tphs rohs ayy4\ov5 A ^761, in regard to tJie angels he eaith. 4. From the general notion of mental direction arises (i) that of estimation or proportion, in consideration of. Matt. xix. 8 : irpbs t^v o-KXripoKapSCav v/xwi/, in consideration of His hardness of your hea/rts. § 307.] Ilpos, WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 285 Luke xii. 47 : trphs rh QiKr\]ia. avrov, in consideration of (in accordance with) his vy'dl. Kom. viii. 18 : ovk a^ta ... irpbs t^v |iiXXovo-av 8' vjxwv ovt€ dir' dXXwv, nor seeking glory from men, either of you or of others. See also John xi. 1. In these passaiges it is immaterial whether the phrase " owf o/ a thing " or "from a thing" be employed; but in the following there is an evident distinction : — John vii. 42 : ew rov a-irepfiaros Aaj8i'5 Kol anh Br}d\e4ix, from the seed of David and from Bethlehem. 2 Cor. iii. 5 : ovx on iKavol iafxev a(p* lavTuv XoyhaaOai ri, &s e| eavrwu, not that we are sufficient of ourselves to think anything, as from ourselves. 311. 'El/ is occasionally interchanged with a simple Dative. So Col. ii. 13: vcKpol Iv rots irapairrwiJiao-i, dead in transgressions ; Eph. ii. 1 : vcKpoi rots irapaorTttfAaa-i. So Matt. vii. 2 : €V Ti|iias, /or a good work we stone thee not, but for blas- phemy. 2. For vnep. See under vnep and Trepl, §§ 302, 303. Verbs signifying prayer, thanksgiving, &c., may be followed by either indifferently. / pray about you, inpC, "you are the subject of my prayers; or, / pray for you, inre'p, "j^our welfare is the object of my prayers." So in the many passages in respect of the death of Christ, which theological inquirers will do well to examine. In some, as in Gal. i. 4, the reading of good MSS. varies between virc'p and irepf. 314. A preposition governing several words in one regimen is repeated before each of them if a distinction, severally, between them is to be marked ; but if they are combined in one notion, the preposition is not repeated. This rule is analogous to that respecting the repetition of the article * (§ 232). Yet the article is often repeated where the preposition is not. Thus with the repeated preposition — Matt. XXli. 37 : €V oXtj rrj Kapbla (Tov, Koi Iv 0X77 r^ ^I^'^XV ^°^i '^"'* ^^ oAp t5 bLavola (rov, with all thy heart, and with all thy soul, and 290 ' INTEllCHANGE OF PREPOSITIOI^S. [§ »314. with all thy understanding. Compare Mark xiL 30 (e^, see § 311, note). For other instances, see Mark vi. 4 (eV) j Luke xxiv. 27 (cttcJ) ; 1 Thess. i. 5 (tV) ; John xx. 2 {Trp6s), &c. "With the preposition not repeated — John iv. 23 : Iv Truevfian Ka\ aXrjBeia^ in spirit and truth, one state of mind, viewed under a twofold aspect. In like manner we interpret iii. 5, ^ v8aTos kqi Uvevfiaros, of one spiritual baptism, not of two things (as the outward and the inward). So Matt. iii. 11. For other instances, see Luke xxi. 26 {air6) ; PhiL i. 15 {Sid) ; and very frequently with proper names when closely connected, as Phil. i. 2 Acts vi 9, &c. "Where the nouns after the preposition are connected by tins disjunctive or, the preposition is always repeated; as also where they stand in antithesis. Acts iv. 7 : ev ttolu bwafiei fj kv ttolco ovo/iaTi €7roiT](raTe tovto v/xfls ; in what name or in luliat power did ye this ? John vii. 22 : oi;;^ on €K tov Mcovaeas eoriV, aXX' Ik rav narepcov, not that it is from Moses, but from the fathers. But where the anti- thesis is formed by two adjectives agreeing with the same noun, the preposition need not be repeated. 1 Pet. i. 23 : ov< Ik (nropas a(f)OcipTTJs, (iXXa (f>ddpTov, not of corruptible, but of incorruptible seed. § 315.] ADJECTIVES—CONCORD. 291 Chapter IY.— ADJECTIVES. 315. According to the Second Concord, § 178, Adjectives, as also Participles and Adjective Pronouns, agree with their Substantives in Gender, Number, and Case. An adjective may' be an Epithet or a Predicate, the rule applying in both cases. For the adjective as predicate, see §§ 178-180. 316. Where the reference of the Adjective is plain, the Sub- stantive is often omitted. Compare § 199. Matt. xi. 5 : tv<|>XoI dva^Xfirovo-i kql x^Xol TrepinaTovo-i, Xcirpol Kadar fH^ovrai Koi K(a^o\ aKovovai, vcKpol iydpovrai Koi irT«xo^ evayyekl^ovTai^ blind (men) are restored to sight and lame (men) walk, leprous (men) are cleansed and deaf (men) hear, the dead are raised and destitute (men) have glad tidings brought to them. Rom. V. 7 : poKis yap virep ZiKaiov ris dnodavfiTai, VTrep yap tov d7a0ov rdxa ti9 Ka\ ToXpa d-KoQavdv, for scarcely for a righteous (man) will one die, for on behalf of the good (man) one perchance even dares to die^ 1 Cor. iii. 13 : irvevnaTiKots irvcvuaTiKa a-vyKpivovre^, jyutting together spirituals with spirituals, i.e., " attaching spiritual woixls to spiritual things," Alford ; or, " interpreting spiritual things by spiritual ;" or, " explaining spiritual things to spiritual men," Stanley; or, "adapting spiritual language to spiritual matters," Beza. The last example shows how an occasional ambiguity will arise. Such cases can only be decided by a careful study of the context and of the words employed. In general, however, the application of tho adjective will be perfectly plain. See further, Eph. i. 3, &c. J Among the substantives most frequently omitted after Adjoo- 292 A»DJECTIVES — CONCORD. [§ 316. lives, beside the words for man, woman, thing, with the three genders respectively, are the following — Xftpj hand, as i\ 8e|ia, " the right." yri, land, as rj oIkovjjl^vtj, the inhabited, "the world." (Luke ii. 1, &c.) r}fi€pa, day, as tq ^ttiovctti, " on the morrow." vha)p, water, as •n-oTripiov ^vxpov, " a cup of cold." (Matt. x. 42 ; compare James iii. 11.) Acts xix. 35, is peculiar: tov Aioirerovs, of that which fell from Zeus : not precisely " an image," probably a great meteoric stone. For the neuter article, especially, as substantivizing the Adjec- tive, i.e., making it an abstract noun, see § 199. Matt. vi. 13: pva-ai f)p.as airo tov iroviipoi), deliver us from evil. So V. 37, 39 ; John xvii. 15. Some with less appropriateness render "the Evil one." In 1 John ii. 13, 14, the adjective (Accusative) is certainly masculine ; in Rom. xii. 9 (Accusative), certainly neuter ; but as the Genitive and Dative of both genders are alike, passages like Eph. vi. 16; 2 Thess. iii. 3; 1 John iii 12, V. 19, can only be determined by the context. In Matt. xix. 17, the best editors concur in the remarkable reading, Tt /w€ epwT^s irepi rov ayadov; Why dost tJiou ash me concerning the good? instead of Why callest thou me good? In Mark x. 18, the received reading stands without any variation. 317. The number and gender of adjectives, participles, and pronouns are often determined (according to Synesis, or Rational Concord) by the sense rather than the form of their substantives. Compare §§ 175, 179. Acts iii. 11 : o-w^dpafie iras i Xabs ... 2K0ajipoi, all tlie people ram. together, greatly wondering. Acts V. IG : avvTipx€To...rh irXfj0os... <}>^povTcs, k.t.X., tlie multitude came together, bringing, &c. So Luke xix. 37, &c. Eph. iv. 17, 18: tA Xoina 80vij TrepiTrarcI ... lo-Korwpivot ... fivrts § 317.J ADJECTIVES — CONCORD. 293 dirqXXoTpiwu^vot, the rest of the Gentiles walk . . . darkened . . . heinc/ estranged. Luke ii. 13 : 7r\rj0os o-rpaTtds ovpavlov, aivovvrwv top Qeov Kai Xe-ydvTwv, a multitude of a heavenly host, praising God and saying. Kev. xi. 15 : iyivovro <}>«val fieyaXai ... X^^ovTcs,* the7'e were great voices, saying. In Matt. xxL 42, iraph. Kvplov eyepero avrr] Koi eari Qavnaari], this (thing) was from the Lord, and it is wonderful, the feminine gender is to be explained by the Hebrew idiom. That language, having no neuter, employs the feminine for abstract notions. See Ps. cxviii. 23 (LXX., cxvii.) For Synesis with Pronouns, see §§ 335, 345. 318. An Adjective referring to two or more substantives, if an epithet, commonly agrees with the nearest, or is repeated before each ; if a predicate, is properly in the plural number, and follows the rule, § 179. Luke X. 1 : ets irao-av rrokiv koI tottov, into every city and place (diflferent genders, agreeing with nearest). James i. 17 : *ira»T€pov t«v dvflpwirwv tort, /c.r.X., the foolishness of God is wiser tJian men, &c. The beginner must beware of translating these genitives as possessives governed by an understood object of the comparative: "than John's (testimony)," "than men's (wisdom)," &c. This the construction * Other translations have been proposed to escape the chronological diffi- culty. Thus, the enrolment first took effect, when, &c., it having been originated some years before ; or the enrolment tocM made before Quiriniua was governor (compare irpSsrSs nov, John i. 15). But Dr. Zumpt has i*ecently shown the great probability of Quirinius having been governor of Syria at this early date, as well as a.d. 6, on the deposition of Archelaus. (See Smith's "Dictionary of the Bible," Art. "Cyrenius"). 320.] ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. 295 will not admit. The form of expressioa is one of the utmost generality : "God's 'foolishness' is wiser," not only than men's wisdom, but "than men " themselves, with all that they are or can do. So of the other 321. The comparative particle 7, than^ may also be employed ; the object then being in the same case with the subject of com- parison. Luke ix. 13 : ovk daXu rjfuv irXetov ^ neure aproi koI IxBves Svo, we Jmve no more than five loaves and two fishes. 1 Cor. xiv. 5 : jicC^wv Se 6 7rpo(f)i]Tevcov '!\ 6 \aka>v yXoicraaiS) greater is he who prophesies than he who speaks with tongues. This particle is specially employed (1) after the comparative adverb fjLoXXov, more. Acts iv. 19 : vfxcov oKoveiv jioXXov i^ tov Geov, to hear you rather than God. It may be hardly necessary to remind the learner that 0€oS is in the Genitive, not because it is the object of comparison, but because coupled by ^ with ujuwy. Gen. after aKov^iv, by § 249, a. So Matt, xviii. 13; John xii. 43 (^jrep), &c. MSXAoj/ ^ may connect two adjectives, as 2 Tim. iii. 4, where a Greek classical idiom, of which there is no instance in the New Testament, would have admitted two comparatives. (2) When the object of comparison is a clause. Rom. xiii. 1 1 : lY-ytiTcpov . . . i^ 8t€ eirwrrcvcrajjicv, nearer (our sal- vation) than when we believed. (3) When a Comparative governs, as an adjective, words other than its object. Matt. X. 15 : dvcKTOTCpov earat yfj 2o86fxa)v ^ iro'Xei ^KeCvrj, it shall be more tolerable for the land 0/ Sodom (Dative, by § 279) than for that city. After irXeiwv, TrXeZoi/, m^ore, and eXdTTwv, eXuTTov, less, the particle may be omitted before numerals. * Winer, § xxxv. 5. 296 ADJECTIVES— COMPARISON. [^321. Acts xxiv. 11 : ou irXeCovs elcri fxoi iqix^pat ScKaSiio, ktX, lit., there are to me no more days (than) twelve. So iv. 22, xxiii. 13. Matt. xxvi. 53 : irXcCovs SwScKa Xrycwvas, more than twelve legions. In some of these passages the received text inserts ^. A peculiar comparative is occasionally made by (ioXXov after the positive. Mark ix. 42 : kixXov ianv avrw (jloIXXov, k.t.X., it is better /or him. Acts XX. 35 : iiaKdpuJv eVrt ndXXov dibouai <\ Xafx^dveiVj it is more blessed to give than to receive. Sometimes ^akXov is omitted. Matt, xviii. 8, 9 : koXcJv v ovpavav ; who then is greater (than the rest) in the kingdom of heaven ? So Mark ix. 34; Luke ix. 46, xxii. 24. In Matt. xi. 1], & fxiKpSrepos may be rendered, he that is less than all others, i.e., "he that is least," as E.V., or he that w less than John (in fame and outward honour), i.e., Christ himself ; the sentiment being that of 'John i. IS.f The following examples further illustrate this usage of th€ comparative : — John xiii. 27 : that thou doest do more quicTdy, rdxiov, ^.€., than you seem disposed to do. Acts xvii. 21 : ^0 tell or to hear some newer thing, n Kaivorepov, than the last things that they had heard, "the later news." Acts xvii. 22 : 2/e we^ of Athens, I perceive that in all things ye are more addicted to worship, 8ewri8aifjiov€erlative. 324. The Superlative denotes the highest quality of any kind, and may be u&ed when the objects of comparison are not explicitly intimated. 2 Pet. i. 4 : ra iii-yio-ra /cat rt/zta enayye'kfxaTa, the greatest and precious i^romises, or as E.Y. happily, "exceeding great and j)recious." In Luke i. 3, we read KpuTto-Tc SfocpiXe, most excellent T/i^eophUtis ; » Huther. t Winer, Alford, &c. § 324.] ADJECTIVES — THE SUPERLATIVE. 299 but in Acts xxiii. 26, xxiv. 3, the same title is applied to Felix, and in xxvi. 25, to Festus. It was simply a designation of rank. 325. For tlie Superlative followed by a partitive Genitive, see § 262. An emphatic Superlative is made by the addition of ■n-dvTwv, Mark xii. 28, the first eommandment of all (not naaoiv, as received text). The particle as (otl), with a Superlative, means " in as great a degree as possible." Acts xvii. 15: lua «s rdxtorra eXOcoai irpoi ai/rbv, tJiat tliey would come to him as speedily as possible. 326. The Superlative TrpZros, fi/rst, may be used where but two things are compared. Acts i. 1 : Tov [xeu irpwTov Xoyoi' iiroirjadfirjv, the first (former) treatise I made. So 1 Cor. xiv. 30 j * Heb. x. 0, So the expression 'irp«T 2 Cor. i. 12; CoL ii. 19; Rev. xv. 2, &c. . NUMERALS. 328. The Cardinal efy, besides its ordinary use, is employed in the following ways. i. As an indefinite pronoun,t nearly equal to tls. Matt. viii. 19 : ih ypafifiuTevs eiTrev avra, a scribe said unto him. Matt. xxvi. 69 : TrpoarjXdeu avT^ |iia naidlaKT], there came to him a maidservant. John vi. 9 : ian iraibapiov hf &Sc, there is a lad here. So Matt. x\'iii. 24, xix. 16; Mark x. 17, xii. 42; Rev. viii. 13, &c. Often with a Genitive following, as Matt. xvi. 14 ; Mark v. 22. Some- times with ^K, as Matt. xxii. 35, xxvii. 48. Occasionally, efs ris combined, as Luke xxii. 50. ii. For the correlatives, one ... the other ^ eU is sometimes employed in both clauses. Matt. XX. 21 ; Mark x. 37 : ets «< St^tcoi/ aov^ koI cts i^ fvcavvixav vovj one on thy right hand, and the other on thy left. John XX. 12; 1 Cor. iv. 6; Gral. iv. 22; 1 Thess. v. 11. But «AXo5, Jfrcpos are more frequently used in the second clause, as Matt, vi 24 ; Rev. xviL 10. * See Winer and others. t The indefinite article in the European languages is but a form of the numeral " one." We say " a or an ;" we should rather say " an or a," the longer being the original form, and an = Scottish ane=one. So French, u»; German, em, &c. § 328.] ADJECTIVES — THE NUMERALS. 301 iii. For not one (ovbeis, ftJ^Sfts), the New Testament writers, following the Hebrew idiom, sometimes Bay one . . . not, combining the negative with the predicate. Matt. X. 29 : ^v e| avroiv ov neaeirai, -One of them shall not fall, i.e., not one of them shall fall. So ch. v. 18 ; Luke xii. 6. But the adjective iras, every, is still more frequently employed in such expressions. Thus, ^^ everything is not..." means "nothing is." Luke i 37 : ovk ddwarrjo-ei napa rS Qeat irav prjfia, everything is not-impossible with God, i.e., nothing is impossible. So Matt. xxiv. 22 ; Mark xiii. 20 ; John iii. 15, 16, vi. 39, xii. 46 : Rom. iii. 20 ; 1 Cor. i. 29 ; Gal. ii. 16 ; 1 John ii. 21 ; Rev. xviii. 22. *' Forget not all his benefits^' (Ps. ciii. 2), of course means "forget not any." But when ov is connected with iras, the meaning is simply not all. So Matt. vii. 21, ov iras \eyuv ... ciaeKevaeTat, not every one ... shall enter. Had the reading been tras \4yuv . . . ovk elaeKevaerai, it would have meant "no one ... shaU enter." (See Matt. xix. 11; 1 Cor. xv. 39; Rom. X. 16 : ov irdyres inrfjKovcrav, not all obeyed. irdvTes ovx inr-nKOvaau would have been, " they all disobeyed. " iv. Instead of the ordinal rr/wrof; the cardinal els is used in the designation of the first day of the week (again a Hebraism). Matt, xxviii. 1 : els \i-Cav orappdiTwv, lit., on the day one of the week. So Mark xvi. 2 (but ver. 9, -irpcoTrj) ; Luke xxiv. 1 ; John xx. 1, 19 ; Acts XX. 7 ; 1 Cor. xvi. 2. In Titus iii. 10 ; Rev. vi. 1, 3, ix. 12, we find one and the second as correlatives. 329. The particles a»s, wo-ci, about, &c., are used with numerals adverbially, i.e., without affecting the case. Matt. xiv. 21 ; Mark v. 13; Rom. iv. 19, &c. So with cTrdv«, above, which in other connexions is followed by a Genitive. 1 Cor. XV. 6 : a>(f)Or} eirdvw irevraKoo-fois d8€Xois, he was seen by above five hundred brethren. So Mark xiv. 5 (where the Genitive is that of price). 330. .The names of measures and coins may be omitted after numeral designations. Acts xix. 19 : dpYvpi'ov jivpidSn* "r^vr* ^five 302 ADJECTIVES — THE NUMERALS. [§ 330. myriads), jifty thousands of silver j i.e., dpax^icov — densirn. Else- where the plural dpyOpia (pieces of silver) is used, as Matt. xxvi. 16, &c. 331. The Greeks used the phrase " himself third" for " he and two others," avrbs rpCros. So avrbs TeTapros, he and three others, &c. Sometimes avros was omitted. This idiom occura once in the New Testament. 2 Pet. ii. 5 : S-ySoov Nwc ... ecjivXa^e, he preserved Foah, and seven others. The Distributive Numerals have been sufficiently explained, § 52. § 332.] PRONOUNS PERSONAL. 303 Chapter Y.— PRONOUNS. The Personal Pronouns. 332. The rules respecting tlie cases of nouns, and their employment with prepositions, for the most part apply to the personal and other substantive Pronouns also. For the oblique cases of the third personal pronoun, in both numbers and all genders, forms of the adjective pronoun aiT6s are employed. For the other uses of avrSs, see § 335. The Nominative of the personal pronoun, when the subject of a verb, is omitted, except where emphasis is required. (See § 169.) 333. The Genitive is very frequently used in a possessive sense ; the adjective possessive pronoun being comparatively rare. (See § 255.) Matt. vi. 9, 10 : IIciTCp i^[i,«v 6 iv rots ovpapois, ayiaa-6f}Tai rh 6vo^& orov, eXOeTO) r\ paos to iv rto 6(})da\fjLa tov d8eX<|>o€ o-ov (personal pronoun), ttjv de iv t^ o-^ 6<})0aX|Aw (adjective pos- sessive) boKov ov Karavoels \ and why seest thou the mote in the eye of thy brother, but discernest not the beam in thine own eye ? The only possessive for the third person in the New Testament is the Genitive of a^rds. Conversely, an objective genitive may be expressed by the possessive adjective pronoun. 304 PRONOUNS PERSONAL. [§ 333. Luke xxii. 19 ; 1 Cor. xi. 25 : tovto ttou'ltc els ri\v k\ir\v dvd|j.in](riv, this do for my remembrance, i.e., " for remembrance of me." So Rom. xi. 31, ^' through mercy shown to you ;"*' xv. 4 ; 1 Cor. xv. 31, "Jy my glorying in you;'' xvi. 17, " the lack of you." John XV. 9 : \i.dva.Te Iv t^ d-ydirg t^ k^% abide in my love, has sometimes been taken in a similar sense ; but it seems better to take the pronoun there as a true possessive. (Compare § 269.) In one striking passage, Eph. iii. 18, there seems the omission of a genitive pronoun, '''-what is the breadth f &c., i.e., "of the love of Christ."* 334. Occasionally in a lengthened sentence, a seemingly redundant personal pronoun is found. Matt. viii. 1 : Kara^dvTt Se airw arro tov opovs fjKoXovdrja-au ovry oxXoi noXkoij and when he had come down from the mountain, great multitudes followed him. Acts vii. 21 ; iKredevra Be avrhv dveiXero avrhv r) dvyarqp ^apad), cmd when he was cast out, the daughter of Pharaoh took him up. Where the object of a verb is expressed in the nominative absolutely, for the sake of emphasis, its place in the sentence is supplied by a pro- noun. (See § 242.) Kev. lii. 12 : 6 vikuv rroi'fjcrco avrov arvKov, He tlmt overcometh, I will make him a pillar. 335. As avrds properly means very, self, it is used in apposition with nouns of both numbers and of all cases and gendei-s, as well as with the personal pronouns of the first and second persons. When employed in the nominative for the third person, it is always emphatic, t i.e., not He simply, but He himself Kom. vii. 25 : a, I myself serve. John iv. 42 : ainoX yap diajKoafxev, for we ourselves have Jiea/rd. 1 Thess. iv. 9 : airrol yap tijwis BeobibaKToi et\o7rpa>Teva>v airwv AioTfie(f)Tjs, k.tX, I wrote somewhat to the church, hut Diotrephes who loves pre-eminence over them. So in reference to oxkos, nX^BoSf &c. (3) This pronoun may also refer to a substantive implied in some previous word or phrase. Matt. xix. 13 : ol 8e fiaBrjrai eTreTlfxija-av avTOts, hut the disciples rebuked them, i.e., those that brought the children; Mark x. 13. John viii. 44 : -^evcTTTji eo-rl koi 6 Trarfjp avTov, he is a liar and the father of it, i.e., of lying. So Matt. iv. 23; Acts viii. 5; 2 Cor. v. 19, "to them," i.e., the inhabitants of the world. Rom. ii. 26, the concrete imphed in the abstract, aKpo^varla ; Eph. v. 12, "by those who walk in the darkness," or (Ellicott) "the children of disobedience," ver. 6. Possessive Pronouns. 336. On the possessive use of the Genitive of Personal Pronouns, and the employment of the Possessives as equivalent to the objective genitive, see § 333. For the Article with posses- sive pronouns, see § 223. The various use of the Possessives as Adjectives, epithetic and predicative, may be exemplified by the following phrases: — John V. 30 : f} Kplais tj i\>-^ BiKaia iariv, mi/ judgment is just. Rom. X. 1 : ^ evSoKia TTjs i\t.i\9 Kapdias, the desire (goodwill) of my heart. Phil. iii. 9 : p.r\ txiav \.y.r\y 8iKaioa-vvT]v t^v eK vopov, not Jiaving a righteousness of my own, viz., tJiatfrom law. John xvii. 10 : tcL I|jioL Trdvra ord eWt, Ka\ tcI ^w(Tiv, taking i^uypiqixfvoi vtt' avrov as parenthetical. Ellicott : ^^and that they may return to soberness out of the snare of the devil {though holden captive by him) to do His will, " i. e. , God's. For other explana- tions, see Alford, Ellicott, &c. 341. A Demonstrative often repeats the notion already expressed by a substantive. The pronoun thus occasionally seems redundant, but perhaps was always intended to convey some additional emphasis. Matt. xiii. 20-23 : 6 Se ... (nrapeis ... ovtos ianv, that which was Bown . . . this is he, ots' 8 koi irroiTjarav, they determinedy each of them, to send to the brethren dwelling in Jerusalem fw their relief ; which they also did. See also Gal. ii. 10; Col. i 29; Heb. v. 11, &c. ; and with plural relative, Acts xxiv. 18 [iv oh), xxvi. 12 ; Col. iL 22. 345. SynesiSf or rational concord, is very frequent with the Eelative. (See § 317.) a. Gender. Acts XV. 17 : navra toL IOkij I<}>* ovs, /c.t.X., all the Gentiles, upon whom, &c. So xxvi. 17 ; Gal. iv. 19 ; 2 John 1; 2 Pet. iii. 16. h. Number. Phil, ii, 15 : yevia^ a-Ko\ias koI biearrpapiifvrjs, Iv ots (ftaiveaOe, k.t.X., of a crooked and perverted generation, among wJwm ye appear, kc. A plural may be implied in a singular phrase; hence sometimes a plural relative with a singular antecedent. Acts xv. 36 : Karek iraaay ir6\iy, iv oTs, through every city, in which {cities). So 2 Peter iii. 1. On the contrary, a singular may be impHed in a plural phrase. Acts xxiv. 11 : Tififpai ScKaUo itxp' ^s, twelve days from tlmt on which ; Phil, iii 20: olpayois ... i^ ol. But here i^ ov may be adverbially taken, whence. In John i 42, 8 agrees with 6yona, name, impHed. 346. The Relative is often drawn, or " attracted,*' out of its proper gender or case by some other word. Attraction is of two kinds. a. Attraction of the Relative to the FrediccUe, — The Relative § 346.] PRONOUNS RELATIVE. 311 •Subject may take the gender of its own Predicate rather than that of the Antecedent. Mark xv. 16 : co-co Tf]s ovXfis S iori irpaiTcopiov, within the hall which is the Prcetorium. 1 Cor. iii. 17 : 6 vabs tov Qeov ayios icTTLv, olVtvcs fare vixds, the temple of God is holy, which (temple) ye are. Gal. iii. 16 : Tw oTrepiiarC aov '6s ea-Ti Xpwrrds, " to thy seed"" which is Christ. Col. i. 27 : TOV |XV0-TT]p{0V TOVTOV . . . 8s e(TTi XpKTrbs €V V/LtTv, K.T.X., of this mystery ... which is Christ in yoUy &c. This text explain.s the meaning of 1 Tim. iii. 16, provided the reading of most modern editions be adopted. " Co7ifessedly great is the mystery of Godliness, 8s 6<|>av€p«0T] kv aXiara 'lo>6.wr\v, ovros rjyepdrj, this John whom I beheaded arose, instead oi hv ... ovros *laidvvr)s, Rom. vi. 17 : vTrrjKovaare ... els 8v 7rapfd6$T]T€ rvirov didaxrjs, ye obeyed the form of doctrine into which ye were delivered, for uttt^/c ... TO) rvTro) ... ils OP, See also Luke xii. 48 ; Acts xxi. 16, xxvi. 7 ; 1 Cor. x. 16, &c. ; and the repeated quotation from Ps. cxviii. 22. \ldov hu airfSoKlfMuray ... ovtos iyevrtdT], k.t.?^, Matt, xxl 42; Mark xii. 10; Luke xx. 17; 1 Pet. ii. 7 (in this last passage Lachmann has \ldos). 347. When the Antecedent would be a demonstrative pronoun, it is very often omitted, being implied in the Relative. So in English, for "he gave me that which I asked for," we say " he gSivemewhat I asked for;" the relative form "what" implying both words. But in Greek the same form is used whether the demonstrative antecedent is expressed or implied. Matt. X. 27 : 8 Xeyo l/uv ep rf] aKOTia ... Koi 8 els to ovs aKovere, what I say to you in the darkness ... and what ye hear (into, § 298) in the ear. The Relative and the implied Antecedent may be in different cases. Luke vii. 47 : ^ Se 6\iyop dcfiCerat, oXiyop dyarra, (he) to wliom little is forgiven, loveth little. John iv. 18 : 8v ex^is ovk eo-rt (Tov dprjp, {he) wJiom thou now hast is not thy husband. Heb. V. 8 : tfiadep d(j) (Sv enade rfjp vnaKofjp, hi leo/med his obedience from those things which he suffered. 348. The pronoun avros is occasionally inserted in apposition with the Relative, as a kind of complement to it. This is a Hebrew idiom; the relative in that language being iadc- clmable, and requiring to be complemented by a pronoim. Matt. iii. 12 : ov t6 tttvov iv rg x**p'' o-vroU, whose fcm is in his hand. § 348. J PRONOUNS — RELATIVE. 313 Mark vii. 25 : r]S ei^f fh dvydrpiov avTTjs TTvevna oKaQaprov, whose little daughter had an unclean spirit Acts XV. 17 : e(^' ous e-mKeKKrjTai ro ovofxd fxov err* avTOvs, Upon whom my name has been called ; LXX. ; Amos ix. 12. So also Mark i. 7 ; Luke iii. 16 ; 1 Pet. ii. 24 (not Lachmann), &c. 349. The Compound Relative, Sims, Ls strictly indefinite. Thus iras 8s dKov€L, every one who hears, would denote " every one who is now hearing ;" but ttos Scttis olkov^i^ as Matt. vii. 21, is " every one, whoever he be that hears." Matt. V. 39 : Soms paniaeL ... So-tis dyyapeva-ei, whosoever shall »mite . . . vjhosoever sh-all impress. Luke X. 35 : 6, n av Trpoa-daTravTjarjs, whatsoever thou shalt have spent more, John ii. 5, xiv. 13, xv. 16, tfec* From the indefinite meaning of oans arises a suggestion of character, kind, reason, as marking the class to which this Relative is applied. For example, oans, and not os, is used in the following pas- sages : — Matt. vii. 15 : " beware of false prophets, who come to you,'' i.e., such as come. Matt. vii. 24, 26 : *' a wise man who built his house upon the rock, a foolish man who built his house upon the sand ;" in each case the kind of man who did what is described. Matt. XXV. 1 : " ten virgins who took their lamps and went forth to- meet the bridegi-oom," i.e., who acted in accordance with their function. In this way the compound Relative acquires a kind of logical force. Romans vi. 2 : "we who died to sin, how shall we longer live therein," i.e., inasmuch as we died. Compare Phil. iv. 3. * The instances of 8, rt, neuter, are very few ; and there is much varia- tion of reading, on, conj., being often preferred (as, e.g., in 2 Cor. iv. 14). 314 PRONOUxVS RELATIVE : INTERROGATIVE. [§ 349. With proper names, So-rts is frequently preferred to 8y. See Luke ii, 4, ix. 30, xxiii. 19 ; John viii. 53 ; Acts viii. 15, xvi. 12 (on the attraction, see § 346), xvii. 10, xxviii. 18 ; Rom. xvi. 6, 12 ; Gal. iv. 26 ; 2 Tim. ii. 18. In all these passages there is an implied reference to character, position, calling. Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns. 350. The interrogative pronoun tis', tI; is used in various ways. i. Simply, with or without a Substantive — Nominative. Matt. iii. 7 : tCs Inebet^ev v/xIj^ ; who warned you ? Genitive. Matt. xxii. 20 : tivos fj eluibv avrrj koL rj cViyp acp/) ; wliose is this image and superscription ? Dative. Luke xii. 20 : a 8€ rjTolixao-as rivi earai ; the riches vjhich thou didst amass, for whom shall they he ? Accusative. Matt. v. 46, 47 : rCva fiiadov ex^re ; ... rl nepiaaop TToieiTf ; what reward have ye? ... what do ye over and above ? AYith Prepositions. Matt. v. 13 : Iv rCvi oXitrBrjcreTai ; wherevnih shall it be salted ? Matt. IX. 11 : SiarC {8ia ri) fxcra rmv reXcovav Ka\ afiapraiXoov eadlei j wherefore eateth he with the publicans and sinners 1 So Matt, xiv. 31 ; Mark xiv. 4 ; John xiii. 28. il Elliptically, with mi, that (" that what may haj^pen ? " or wherefore 1) — Matt. ix. 4 : Vva ri tpdvfxelafie novrjpd ; wherefore are ye infia^ining malignant things ? 1 Cor. X. 29 : Vva rC yap t) tXevdepia pov Kpiuerai ; for wherefore is my liberty judged ? In quotations from the Old Testament, written tVar^; Matt, xxvii. 40; Acts iv. 25, vii. 26. iii. Adverbially, neuter, tL', why ? (or as an exclamation, How !) rl on ; /lOW (is it) l/uU ? — § 350.1 PRONOUNS— THE INTERROGATIVE t(s. 315 Matt. vi. 28 : Tvepl ivhviiaTos ri nepifivars ; whi/ are ye anxious about raiinent 1 So vii. 3, viii. 26, xvi. 8, &c. Matt. vii. 14 (Lachmann, &c.) : t£ frr^vi] t] •nvKx) ! how na/rrow is the gate 1 But this rendering is doubtful, as well as the reading itself. Luke ii. 49 : t£ on e^r/relre pe ; hov) IS it tlmt ye were seeking me ? See also Acts v. 4, 9. iv. In alternative questions, where the classical idiom requires TTorepos, a, ov ; whether of the two ^ the New Testament employs n'y. Matt. ix. 5 : tC yap l(Triv evKOTruirepov, for which is easier ? (of the two). Matt. Xxi. 3 1 : t^s e/< rcov 8vo inoirjcre to deXrjixa rou rrarpos ', which of the two did the will of his father ? So xxiii. 17, 19, xxvii. 17, 21 ; 1 Cor. iv. 21 ; PhiL i. 22 (see § 382). 351. The simple interrogative, rls, tI, is also used in indirect questions, and after verbs of knowing, thinking, &c., in objective sentences. See § 382. The classic Greek idiom requires cJo-rty, 6', n, though not without exceptions. Matt. XX. 22 : ovk otdare Tt alrelade, ye know not what ye ask. Luke vi 47 : vTroZd^co vpXv rivt iariv opoios, I will shew you to whom lie is like. John XVlll. 21 : epatTrjcrov Tovs dKTjKooras Ti eXakrjaa avToiSj ask those who have heard what I said to them. So in many other passages. 352. The transition from the interrogative to the indefinite pronoun can easily be traced. It comes to almost the same thing whether we say, " What man is there among you wlio will give his child a stone for bread?" or, "Is there any man among you who wilir'&c. 316 PRONOUNS — THE INDEFINITE 7 IS. [§ 352. So the only difference between the forms of the two is in accent and the position in the sentence. The indefinite, ns, n, may be used (i.) simply, with or without Substantive expressed — Nom. Matt. xii. 47 : (iKe 8e ns avray and one said unto him. Luke i. 5 : iyivero . . . Upevs tis, there was ... a certain priest. So very often, dtvOpwirds ns, a certain man. Gen. Luke xxii. 35 : /^i^ nvos viTTeprjcraTe ; did ye lack anything ? Dat. Mark viii. 26 ; iirjbe etn-ijs tivI eV r^ Kpovf'iT€, and if in anything ye be otherwise minded (for Ace, see § 283). So ppaxv ti, for some short time, Acts v. 34 ; Heb. ii. 7 ; i^^pos n, in some part, partly, 1 Cor. xi 18. With a Genitive following — 1 Cor. vi. 1 : mXpa ns vpi«, to turn, generally intransitive in the Middle, but some- times in tlie Active also. Compare Matti v. 39 with Acts vii. 42. Some verbs vary between the transitive and intransitive meaning according to form. Thus, torj^/xi, a regularly transitive or causative verb, has (with some few others) an intransitive sense in the Per- fect (with Pluperfect) and the Second Aorist. (See § 108, 3.) di7w, to lead, has imperative, &y€, go ; subjunctive, &7«p,€v, let us go. The intransitive imperative only occurs in the New Testament iuterjectionally, go to I (James iv., 13, v. 1). The verb ?x**j ^o have, becomes neuter before an adveib, through the ellipsis of a pronominal object, " to have one's self in such a manner;" hence "to he so," the adverb being often translated as an adjective. Matt. iv. 24 : rovs KaK«s ^ovras (those having themselves evilly), those who were ill ; Mark v. 23 : dvyajpiou fiov 4vXdvXs ^erarCQio-^ I marvel tJcat ye are 80 soon changing. § 361.] THE TENSES — PRESENT. 325 b. Ife is also used to denote an habitual or usual act. Matt. vi. 2 : (oaivep ol vnoKpiToX irotovo-iv, as tJie hypocrites do. Matt. vii. 8 : nas 6 alrcdv XanPdvei, /cut 6 ^j^tcdv eiipio-Kci, eve7'y one who asks receives, and he who seeks finds. c. In vivid narration, the Present is employed of past time (the Historic Present). Matt. iii. 1 : ev 8e rais Tjfiepais cKeiuais irapa-YivcTat ^ladvvrjs, and i7l those days cometh John. John i. 29 : rfj iivavpiov px^irci Tov *Ir}crovp ... Kat X^Y€t, on the next day he seeth Jesus, and saith. Sometimes the Historic Present is used with Aorists in the same narration. Mark v. 14, 15 : l<}>D'yov koI dir^ yyciXav . . . koi fjXGov ... koI '^pxovrai... KOL 0€ci)povoP'<]0T]ch man shall hear his own load. So with a negative. Rom. iii. 20 : e| ^pyav y6fwv ov SiKcuaO^ffeTai vaaa ^^Pli ^y ^(yrks of law wiU nojiesh be jiistijied. d. A strong negative is expressed bj the Future with the double negative ov fxrj. The Subjunctive, however, is more generally employed ; and the idiom will be found explained, § 377. Instances with the Future are, Matt. xvi. 22 : this shall never be 1 Mark xiv. 31 : 7 wiU n£ver deny thee I Luke x. 19 : nothing shall ever harm you. e. A Future imperfect ("resolved future") is formed by the Future of the verb to he with the Present pai'ticiple. Luke L 20 : ia-^ cri«Tr«v, thou shalt he silent. So Matt. X. 22, xxiv. 9 ; Mark xiii. 25 ; Luke v. 10, xvii. 35 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 9. (See § 394, 1.) The Future Perfect has been sufficiently explained, § 101, i. f. Auxiliary Future Verbs are (x^XXu, to he ahout to ; and 0^«, to will. The former, which is scarcely ever represented in the E.Y., gives emphasis to the notion that the thing is to happen, and hence is often used of fixed and appointed purpose.* The reader may study the following passages in which /xeXXw occurs — Matt. ii. 13, xvii. 12, 2,^, xx. 22, xxiv. 6 ; Mark xiii. 4 ; Luke viL 2 (was at the point of death), ix. 31, 44, x. 1 ; John vL 6, xiv. 22, xviii. 32; Acts v. 35 (what are we to do?), xvii. 31; Rom. viii. 13 (you are sure to die); 1 Thess. iii. 4; Heb. xL 8 (which lie was to receive), and many other passages, to fieXXov, part, neut., is tJte future. Once the verb is used in the sense of delay, rL \UKKm; why tarriest thou ? Acts xxii. 16. Still more important is it to mark the use of Q(Ka, what I have written, I have written. It denotes also a past act whose consequences remain, as yiypt.trra.i, "it has been written, and abides ;" " it is written ":|: * Alford interprets differently. See his note, t T. S. Green. X Luther, stehi geschrieben. 334 THE TENSES ^PERFECT. [§ 365. h. The distinction between the Aorist and Perfect is thus very marked : reOv^Kao-i (Matt, ii. 20), they are dead. iQavov (dneOapov) would have been, they died. Compare Mark xv. 44. Even where either tense would be suitable, the proper force must be given to the one employed. Matt. ix. 13 : ov yap •^X0ov Kokea-ai diKaiovs, for I came not to call righteous persons. Luke V. 32 : ovk IXi^XvOa KoKea-at diKatovs, I am not come, &c. In the following passages, among many others, the distinction of tenses is strikingly apparent : — Mark iii. 2^ : do "^aravas o.vi(rrt\ ecf) edvrov, koI |i€|i^piv ', wilt thou not cease from, perverting ? the affirmative answer being intimated as that which ought to be given. So Mark xiv. 60 : dost thou not ansvjer anything ? Once ovKoOv is found. John xviii. 37 : thou art not then a king, art thou 1 b. ji^ expects a negative answer. Matt. vii. 9 : ^i\ \i6ov eViSaxret avT^i will he give hiin, a stone ? Rom. ix. 14 : ji.^ dSucia itapa r&) Gew, is there unrighteousness with God ? c. ji^Ti suggests an emphatic negative. Matt. vii. 16 : ii-^ti crvWeyova-iv dno aKavdcov (TTa elpi • |Jti| 4>opcio-0€, it is /, be not afraid. 338 THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. [§ 372. 372. The form of command is sometimes employed where simple permission is intended.* Matt. xxvi. 45 : KaOevScTc to Xoittov koI dvairavccrOg, sleep on noWy and take your res^.t See also 1 Cor. vii. 15, xiv. 38. "Rev. xxii. 11 is a summons (^w^or- derung) : 'the fate of all is as good as already determined.' " f 373. Of the Imperative tenses, the Present expresses a com- mand generally, or implies continuance or repetition. The Aorist implies that the action is instantaneous, or complete. The Perfect (very rare) refers to an action complete in itself, yet continuous in its effect. Its meaning coincides with that of the Present in verbs where the Perfect indicative has a Present meaning. a. The Present, Matt. vii. 1 : ^^ KpCvere, judge not. 1 Cor. ix. 24 : ovTa> rp^cre iva KaraXdpTjT^ so run that ye may ohtain. 1 Thess. V. 16-22: Travrore yjxlpm, aStaXeiVrcos irpoorevxco-Qc, iv TTavri €vxapioT6iTe, ^.r.X., rejoice evermore; pray without ceasing ; in everything give thanks^ &c. h. The Aorist. Matt. vi. 6 : elVeXOc ety to TafiictSv aov /cat . . . Trp6€S. John xi. 44 : Xvoxitc avT^v, koI dcT« avTov vndyeiVf loose hinif and let him go. c. Tlie Perfect. Mark iv. 39 : (ruaira ! irc«j)C(t« TO (f)a)s vjxav, k.t.\. Here the Present might have been employed : — "let your light beam continuously." The Aorist means, let your light shine forth at once. John xiv. 15 : iav dyanaTe fxe, ras ivroXas ras efxas TT)pVjo-aT6, if ye love me, keep my commandments: adopt this as the law of your lives. Komans xv. 11 : alveire t6v Kvpiov ndura to. edvr] koI iiraivio-araxrav avTov navTcs ol Xaoi, praise the Lord, all the nations : and let all the peoples burst into a song of praise to him. See also John ii. 8, 16 ; 1 Cor. xv. 34. The consideration of such examples will bring to light many subtle beauties of expression, which no translation, perhaps, could accurately represent. The Subjunctive Mood. 374. The Subjunctive, strictly speaking, cannot stand in an independent sentence. Where it appears to do so, there is in reality an ellipsis. Thus loj/^iei/, let us go, is really a final clause (tm understood) dependent on some implied verb or phrase. In 310 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. [8 374. snch cases as the following, however, this distinction may be disregarded, and the sentences taken as to all intents and purposes independent. The tenses in the Subjunctive and Optative are distinguished as in § 373. Compare also § 386. The Present implies continuity^ the Aorist completion. 375. The Subjunctive is used as a hortatory Imperative of the first person. John xix. 24 : n^ op^9iis, fear not. Matt. V. 17 : y.^ voy.L(rx\ri, think not. Matt. vi. 2 : p.-^ o-oXirio-xis, sound not a trumpet. This usage also depends upon the ellipsis of some phrase Hke " see," *• take heed," &c., with Xva. In a few instances, a positive command is expressed by W with the subjunctive (Mark v. 23; 2 Cor. viii. 7; * The MS. evidence for this reading is very strong ; indeed, in any ordi- nary case would be overwhelming. Ou internal grounds, however, Tischen- dorf and others prefer the rec. text, we have peace. In such a case, even the testimony of MSS. must be taken with great caution ; as it seems to have been a practice with some ancient transcribers to make Scripture, as they thought, more emphatic by turning a declaration or a promise into an exhortation. It could easily be done, as nothing more was needed than to change the o of the indicative into the a of the subjunctive. So John iv. 42, "let us believe;" Rom. v. 10, "let us be saved;" Rom. vi. 8, "let us believe;" 1 Cor, xiv. 15, "let me pray ;" 1 Cor. xv. 49, " let us bear the image of the heavenly" (so Lacbmann) ; Heb. vi. 3, "this let us do;" James iv. 13, "let us go," &c., and many similar passages. (See Alford's note on Rom. v. 1.) Mr. Westcott adopts the reading, Ix^'M*". t This is the regular classical idiom. § 375.] THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 341 Eph. V. 33). For the complete phrase, see I Cor. xvi. 10 ; and with ellipsis of %va, Matt. viii. 4 But the third person of the Aor. Imp. may be used with (li) (Matt, vi. 3 ; Mark xiii. 16). 376. The Subjunctive is used iu questions expressive of deliberation or doubt ; thus, ri xoia)(ji€v ; (John vi 2d)) what a/re we to do ? but Ti iroiov|i€v ; (John xi. 47) what are we doing ? " what are we about ]" and ri iroii^ariK ; (Matt. xxi. 40) v)hat will he do 7 Mark xii. 14 : 8»|jl€v tj fxrj Swiicv ; are we to give, or not to give ? Matt. xxvi. 54 : irms ovv irXiipwOwo-iv al ypa(f)aL, how then should the Scriptures be fulfilled ? 1 Cor. xi. 22 : ri el'irw vfiiv ; iiraivia-m vfias ', wlmt am I to say to you ? Am I to praise you ? The second of these verbs might be the fut. indie, the connexion only showing it to be aor. subj. As the two tenses are alike in the first pers. sing., it is often doubtful which is meant. So in the pres. of contracted verbs, ri ttcuw ; 377. A strong denial is expressed by the Subjunctive Aorist with ov fir), as ov \Lr\ a-e dv», ovS' ov (iifj ae cYKareiXi'ira) (Heb. xiii. 5), / wUl assuredly not leave thee, nor will I at all forsake thee. This idiom arises from a combination of two phrases : jn^, with the subjunctive elliptical, *'fear lest^^ (see § 384); preceded by ov, with the word (understood) on which fi^ depends. ' ' There is not any fear or possibiHty lest I sliould.^^ Matt. V. 18 : Icara €1/ rj fiia Kepaia ov ji.'fj irap^XOrj, one iota (the smallest letter of the alphabet), or one tittle (the fragment of a letter*) shall hy no means pass. Matt. V. 20 : ov p,^ €icrA.0TiT6, ye shall in no wise enter. Mark xiv. 25 : ovKen ov ix-fi iriw, never will I drink at all. t See also Matt, xxi v. 2, xxvi, 35 ; Mark ix. 41 ; Luke vi. 37 (twice), xviii. 17, xxii. 67, 68; John vi. 37, viii. 51, x. 28, xiii. 8; Acts * As, for instance, that which distinguishes A from A, or in Hebrew, n from n. t The additional negative adds strength to the negation. 342 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. [§ 377. xxviii. 26 (twice, from the LXX. ; so elsewhere) ; 1 Cor. viii. 13 ; 1 Thess. iv. 15 {shall by no means precede), v. 3 ; Heb. viii. 11, 12 (LXX.); 2 Pet. i. 10; Rev. xviii. 21-23; with many other passages. The study of these emphatic negatives of Scripture is fraught with interest. In the following passages only (in the best MSS. and edd. ), the future is found (see § 363, d) :- -Matt. xvi. 22, xxvi. 35 ; Mark xiv. 31 ; Luke X. 19 ; John iv. 14, x. 5, xx. 25 (qy ?)* For the Aorist Subjunctive in a Future-perfect sense, see § 383, ^. The Optative Mood. 378. a. The Optative is used in independent sentences to express a wish, as 2 Pet. i. 2 : x'^P'-^ ^Z^*'' '««* ci/j^i/j; irXTj9vv0€Ct|, grdce and peace he multiplied unto you 1 As stated with regard to the Subjunctive (§ 374), the independence of the sentence is seeming only, a verbal notion on which the Optative depends being implied, as desire, pray. The Optative is in fact only another form of the Subjective mood, " the Subjunctive of the historical tenses. " But this characteristic is almost lost in the New Testament, where the Optative is comparatively rare. Rom. XV. 5 : 6 be Qcbs ... Swt] vixIv, now may God grant unto you ! Philemon 20 : va\, dSeX^c, ey« aov 6va£|iTiv €v Kvpla, yea, brotlier, let me have joy of thee in the Lord ! So Acts viii. 20 ; 1 Thess. iii. 11, 12 ; 2 Thess. iii. 5, &c. So with the negative, jjirj. Mark xi. 14 : jirjK^Ti e'/c . . . Sn \!aTai, she perceived that she is Jiealed. So John xi. 13, xx. 14. When the verb in the principal clause is in past time, the subordinate verb is either put in ■present time [Indicaiive), or else in the Optative. 382. a. In the New Testament, quotation is generally direct, and is introduced without any conjunctive particle. Matt. viii. 3 : i7\//'aro auroC, Xe'ywi/ 0A.a), Ka6apCar9t)Ti, he touched him, saying, " I will, be tJwu clean.^^ The particle on, however, is often used to introduce the quoted words, and is not to be translated, as it answers exactly to our inverted commas ( " " ). Matt. vii. 23 : o/xoXoyj^o-© avroh, 8ti ovdeTrore Zyvoav vfiaSf I will avow unto tJiem, " / never knew you'* Luke viii. 49 : epx^rai ns irapa rov apxta-vpayoiyov . . . Xeyap avT^f frri TedurjKiv f) OvycLT-qp (rov, fifj aKvWe top 8i8d(rKaXop, then COmeth one from the house of the rider of the synagogue, saying unto him, ** Thy daughter is dead, trouble not the Master." b. In indirect quotation (oratio obliqua) the substance of the speech is given, not the words. Here, also, the Indicative is generally employed. Mark iii. 21 : eXeyoi/ yap 6ti Ig^oPTTj, for they said that he was beside himself. It is, however, possible that the verb here is a direct quotation ( Aorist, see § 364), as E. V., they said, " he is mad." • ** Verba sentiendi et declarandL " § 382.] OBJECTIVE CLAUSES INTERROGATION. 345 Of the Optative in the oratio ohliqua, so common in Greek classics, there is no example in the New Testament excei)t in indirect inter- rogatives, as in the following paragraph, c, y. c. Indirect interrogations, another form of the oratio ohliqua, may be connected with the principal clause by interrogative pro- nouns or adverbs, or by the particle d, if, whether. In such clauses, (a) the Indicative shows that the inquiry con- cerns matter of fact; (3) the Subjunctive expresses objective possibility — what may or should take place — and always has respect to present or to future time ; (y) the Optative denotes subjective possibility — that which may be conceived to exist — and refers especially to the past. a. Mark xv. 44 : idavixaaev d ^8t) ri9vr\Ki, he wondered whether Ite were already dead. Acts xii. 18 : ^v rdpaxos ov< oXtyos iv rols (TTpaTimTai^ rl dpa 6 Hirpos €"ye'v6To, there was no small stir among the soldiers — whatever had become of Peter. Acts X. 18 (Pres. after Imperf.) : liajvOdvovro d 2ifi(ov ... ev6d8^ ^ivilerai, they were asking whether Simon . . . lodges here. Luke xxiii. 6 (Pres. after Aor.) : e-rrcpwrt^o-cv el 6 avdpcoiros TaXiXalos loTTt, lie asked if the man is a Galilean. For the Future in the dependent clause, see Mark iii. 2 ; 1 Oor. vii. 16 ; Phil. i. 22. /3. Matt. vi. 25 : fxrj peptpvare ... ri 4»a'7i]T€ koI tC iriTiTe, be Qiot anocious ... what you are to eat and what you are to drink. Com- pare Luke xii. 22. Luke xix. 48 : ov^ evpio-Kov rb rl itoii^tToxrKv, they found not what they should do. Compare Mark xv. 24. In Rom. viii. 26, the reading varies between irpoff^vicajjicOa (rec, Lachmann) and irpoa-cv^oneGa (Tischendorf), y. Luke i. 29 : bLiKoyi^ero iroTairbs €1't) 6 dairaapos ovtos, she was discussing with herself qf what kind this salutation might be. 346 OBJECTIVE CLAUSES. [§ 382. Acts xvii. 1 1 : avaKpivovres ras ypai^ds^ el 'iyj:i\. ravra ovtws, Searching the Scriptures if these things were so. Acts xvii. 27 : CV'^^^ ^^z/ Geoi/, d &pa -ye x|/T)\a6s p.ov IreOvirJKei, Lord, if thou hadst been here, my brother would not have been dead. Mar J, ver. 32, uses the Aorist. See 1 John ii. 19. John xiv. 7 : el b{vd>K&.ri /ne, koX tov narepa fxov eyvtoKtiTc &v, if ye Jiad known me, ye would have known my Father also. Intentional Clauses. 384. Intentional clauses are those which express a purpose or design, following the particles tva, to the end that (with emphasis on result) ; 8irws, in order that (emphasis on method) ; ^<\, {that) not or lest. a. (1) In intentional clauses, the Subjunctive is employed in its general meaning, to signify objective possibility or intention. Matt. xix. 13: 7rpoo-r)V€)(dT]a-av ... iva ras x^'^P^^ tiriGf] avrois Ka\ •irpoav«dTJpai Vficov ras afuiprlast 8ir«s dv IX0«povViorT]T6 ivos twv pi.Kp5>v Tovrav, see that ye do not despise one of tJiese little ones. So 2 Cor. viii. 20 ; Gal. vi. 1 ; Heb. xil 15, 16. * See Olshausen on Matt, i 22. Grotius, and those who have followed hb criticisms, attach to the verb some such meaning as consummated. § 384.] INTENTIONAL CLAUSES. 353 After verbs of fearing, nrj may be translated lest, or that. 2 Cor. xii. 20, 21 : (f)o^ovixaL yap, \ii\ irws iX6a)v ovx otovs de\a) evpw vfjias, k.t.\., for I fear that when I come I shall not find you such as I desire, &c. Acts xxiii. 10, xxvii. 17. b. A particle of intention may be followed by an Indicative Future (never with Snas. In Mark v. 23, read Cwv)- The instances of this idiom are few, and most of them are contested readings. The Future, where admitted, must be taken as conveying the idea of duration more vividly than the Aorist Subjunctive. Gal. ii. 4 : tva rjfias KaTa8ovX(tf(roviriv, that they should enslave us. Hev. xxii. 14 : [xaKaptoi oi TrXvvouTes ras crroXas avrcov, iva ^OTai rj e^ovala avrcov, k.t.X., blessed are they who wash their robes,* that theirs may be the access, &c. John xvii. 2 j 1 Cor. xiii. 3 ; 1 Pet. iii. 1 ; Kev. iii. 9, xiv. 13. In all these cases the received text has Subjunctive Aorist. |jt^ (vrore) is found with the Indicative Future, Heb. iii. 12 : /SXeTrere, aSeXc^ot, \i.'{\ iroTC ^orrai ev rivi vfi5)V Kap8ia ivovqpa, ania-rias, take heed, brethren, lest tliere should (shall) be in any one of you an evil heart of unbelief . Col. ii. 8. The Indicative present or perfect after fi)) shows the ellipsis, not of Iva, but of '6ti ; i.e., the sentence is not intentional, but objective. Luke xi. 35 : "lest the light is darkness." Gal. iv. 11 : "lest I have laboured." There are three passages in which the Indicative present seems to be used in intentional clauses : — 1 Cor. iv. 6 : 'Iva fiij eTs tnrep evhs tpvaiovffQe Kara rov erepov, tliat ye be not puffed up one for another against yet another. Col. iv. 17 : 'iva outV TrXr]po7s, that thou fulfil it (the ministry). Gal. iv. 17 : 'Iva avrohs ^TjAoure, in order that ye may zealously affect them. It will, however, be noted that all these verbs are of the contracted conjugation in -Sea ; and it is easier to suppose them examples of an irregularly formed Subjunctive than of a syntax so anomalous as an Indicative would be. * Note here the various reading, accepted by the besif critics. 354 THE INFINITIVE. The Infinitive. .[§385. 385. a. The Infinitive Mood is a Verbal Substantive, and expresses tbe abstract notion of the verb. Like the verb in other moods, it admits the modifications of tense and voice. It may have a subject, or may govern an object, near or remote ; and it is qualified by adverbs. Like a substantive, it may be the subject or object of a verb ; it is often defined by the article, and is employed in the different cases. h. The Negative Adverb with the Infinitive may be ov or fir]. Since ov denies as matter of fact, fii} as matter of thought, and since the Infinitive generally depends on some verb or clause implying thought, will, design, the latter will generally be the appropriate particle. Matt. ii. 1 2 : xP'?/^"'''**^^^''^^^' . . . |Aif| dvaKdp.tJ/ai npos *Upa>br)v, being divinely warned not to return to Herod. Matt. V. 34 : Xeya> vfxiv li'fi 6n6 Siairope-uojievos dfaaaa-Oai vfjias, I hope to see you (in) passing through. 2 Cor. X. 2 : deofiat Se, TO iif) irapwv, but I pray that I may not (when) present be bold. 388. The Infinitive, with or without the Article, may form the Subject of a sentence. Rom. vii. 18 : to yap OeXeiv napaKeirai poi, to Se KaTep-ydteo-Gai to Kokov oij, for to will is present with Tne, but to accomplish the good Is not. Gal. vi. 14 : c/iot Se /i^ ye'yoiTo Kavxdo-0ai, but far be it from me to glory I Eph. V. 12: alaxpop eari koi XiyaVy even to mention ...is dis- graceful. A peculiar kind of extended subject is formed by the Infinitive with iyeyero, it came to pass that... Thus, Acts ix. .3: iydvero ahrhv iyytCeiv if AafLaaK^, it came iopass that he was approaching Damascus, lit, "His 356 THE INFINITIVE. [§ 388. approach to Damascus occurred." So Mark ii. 23; Luke vi. 1, 6; Acts iv. 5, xvi. 16, &c. Acts xxii. 17 has a combination of construction: It happened to me when I had returned [ixoi vnoaTpc^avTi) to Jerusalem^ and as I was praying {irpoafvxo/ifyou fiou, gen. abs.) in the temple that I was {yey^adai fie) in an ecstasy, &c. - The Subject Infinitive may have its own Accusative Subject. Matt. xvii. 4 : koKov icmv T||jias &Se civat, it is good for us to he here. 1 Cor. xi. 13 : Trpenov iari ^vvaiKa dKaTaKdXvTrrop rS Qea npoa-ev- X^adai, it is becoming /or a woman to pray to God uncovered. Matt, xviii. 8 : koKov aoi eoTiv eiaeXSciv els rfjv ((ofju X**^^^ ^ KvXXdv, it is good for thee to enter into life Imli or maimed^ the pronoun vk being understood from aoi before elaekQeiv. 389. a. The Infinitive regularly stands as the Object of verbs denoting a mental faculty, impression, or act — such as to he ahle^ to hear, see, believe, know, wish, hope, endeavour, &c. ; and an assertion of thought or will, as to say, announce, proclaim, com- mand, forbid, &c,* In this connection also the Infinitive may have its own Subject, and may take or omit the Article. Matt. vi. 24 : ovbeXs SvvaTcu bvcrX Kvpiois SovXevciv, no man is able to serve two masters. Rom. i. 22 : <|»(l |i^ €vp€iv pe Tirov top d8e\(f>6p aov, I had no rest through my not having found Titus my brother. In 1 Thess. iii. 3, ry, rec. , should be t6. The above instance ia tha only one. c. The Genitive, Dative, or Accusative, with Prepositions. A few illustrations of this usage will be sufficient, as the pre- positions are taken in their ordinary meaning. (See §§ 288-307). 8id, with Genitive, "through."- Heb. ii. 15 : 8id iravro^ tow t'Hv, through all their lifetime, 8iA, with Accusative, " on account of." Matt. xiii. 5 : Sia Tb p,^ "k^iw ^dOos ... 8toL rh ii-?) ^civ pl^av, OTi account of its Jtaving no depth ...on account of its having no root So, with ace. subject, Matt. xxiv. 12; Mark v. 4; Luke ii. 4, xi. 8, &c. «ls, "to the end that." Matt. XX. 19 : ds rh Ifiirailai koI \iairT6ta, SO that the foundations were shaken. So in a great number of passages. Twice only aare is found in this meaning with the Indicative. John ili. 16 : ooras ydp rjydnija-fv 6 Qebs tov Koajiov ucm rov vlor c c ZC»0 THE INFINITIVE. [^ 391. avTov Tov fiovoycuTj ^8»K6v, K.T.X., God so loved the world that lie gave his ordy-hegotten Son, &c. So also Gal. ii. 13. The proper distinction between the Infinitive and Indicative in this connection is, that the former expresses the result as the natural and logical consequence of what has been previojiisly enunciated the latter states it simply as a fact which occurs or has occurred. * 392. In Phil. iii. 16, we find the Infinitive employed for the Imperative : ets 6 eipddo-afMevy r&J avr<5 oToixiiv, whereto we have attained, in the same direction walk ye onward.\ The use of y^oX^wv in salutation is similar, "greeting," Acts XT. 23, xxiii. 26 ; James i. 1 (2 John 10, 11, suggests an ellipsis here). This habitual phrase reappears as a more decided Impera- tive, Rom. xii. 15, with an antithetic verb : xf3X^\.\ fiera xf^i-povrayv, KXaCciv fiera Kkaiovrayv, rejoice with the rejoicing, weep with the weeping. Participles. 393. The Participles " partake " the nature of Yerbs and of Adjectives. Like verh.% they have the modifications of Voice and Tense; and may have an object, immediate or remote. Like adjectives, they agree with substantives, expressed or understood ; and are subject to the exceptional constructions of /Synesis, or "rational concord." On these points, therefore, nothing need be added to the ndes already given. The tenses of the Participle conform iu meaning to those of the Indicative. Their various use will be seen in the examples given under the following sections. The negatives used with Participles follow the general law. Thus, ovK eiSoTfy, "not knowing," as a matter of fact ; ji^ ftSoVfr, " not knowing," as a matter of supposition, such ignorance being presumed as the ground of any further assertion respecting them. * See Bishop EUicott on Gal. ii. 13. He adds, *' The distinction is not always observed." t ElUcott The rest of the verse (rec. ) is omitted by the best critics. § 393.] PARTICIPLES. 3t)l Compare Gal. iv. 8, with 1 Thess. iv. 5 ; 2 Tliess. i. 8. As, however, the Participle is generally expressive of some condition, the negative employed is in most cases |jt^. When a Participle has a Subject of its own in a separate clause, the construction is the Genitive Absolute,' for which see § 27d The following rules give the use of Participles I'eferring to th' Subject or Object of another verb. 394. Participles are predicative or attributive. Their pre dicative uses may be classified as follows : — 1. After the forms of the substantive verb, a Participle may be used as a simple or "primary" predicate. This construction is confined to tlie present and perfect Participles, With the latter, certain parts of the verb to be make regular compound tense-forms, as the third person phir., perf. and plup. Passive. (See Paradigms.) The usage is extended, however, to the singular number and to other persons. Luke iv. 16 : o§ ^v Tedpafifj-evos, whet^e he had been brought up, John iii. 28 : cmeaTaKii4vos elfji.1, I have been sent. With the present Participle, the substantive verb gives a continuous sense, forming what are called the "resolved tenses." (See §§ 362, e, 363, e.) The resolved tense must be distinguished from the use of the Parti- ciple as secondary predicate. For example, 2 Cor. v. 19 is not to be read, God was reconciling the world in Christ, but as E.V., God was in, Christ reconciling, &c. Luke xxiv. 32 : oux^ ^ Kapbla fjfxcov Kaiop.^vTj -fiv cV ^fiiv ; was not our heart burning within us ? Sometimes this construction appears very nearly equivalent to the simple verb, as Mark xiii. 25 (compare Matt. xxiv. 29. ) So Acts ii, 2 : James i. 17, iii. 15. In other cases, there is a greater stress upon the notion of state or duration: Pres., Acts xxv. 10; Rev. i. 18; Matt. X. 26; Luke vi. 43; 2 Cor. ix. 12; Gal. iv. 24 (not "which things are an allegory,''^ but are allegorized, i.e., susceptible of allegorical application; anva being used, not a, see § 349.) ; Col. ii, 23; 1 Cor. XV. 19; 2 Cor. ii. 17; Impf., Matt. vii. 29, xix. 22; Mark i 39; Luke i. 22, xv. 1, xxiii. 8 ; Acts xxi. 3 ; GaL i. 22, 23 ; Put., Matt. x. 22; Luke i. 20, v. 10, xxi. 24. In Luke iii. 23, avrhs •^j/ 6 'It}avt,s rots av6pa>iTois vtiJ)v TifJioOeov diroXcXvucvov, know that our brotlier Timothy/ has been liberated. Acts viii. 23 ; Heb, x. 25. Some of these verbs may also be followed by an inf. or by a finite verb with 8ti. Thus compare 2 Thess. iii. 11, with John xii. 18 and 34. When the predicative Participle is used, the real Object of the verb is in the noun. In the infinitive construction, the Infinitive contains tiie Object, and Sri reduces the thing heard to the form of a proposition. * A very common classic idiom. § 394.] PREDICATIVE PARTICIPLES. 363 So 3 John 4 : 6,Kov(a to ifih tckj/o iv o\7j0eto TrcpiiraTovuTa is / hear of my children, that they walk in truth. irfptvare^v would have been, "I hear of the conduct of my children, that they walk," &c. Srt irepiiraTovffiv would have meant. The tidings brought to me are these, that, &c. Again ; 1 John iv. 2 ; 6iJ.o\oyei 'IrjcroCj' Xpiarhu iv aapKi i\T]\v6oTa, con- fessen Jesus Christ come in the flesh (not who came, which would have required Thv i\...). fKi^Kveeuai would have signified, that Jesus Christ has come. (Comp. 2 John 7. ) So with neuter verbs : Sircas receding that of the other. Or we may render by some such preposition as aftej', upon, with the verbal noun ; or by a temporal clause with wlien. Acts iii. 3 : 6s I8«v , . . Tjpwra, who saw . . . and asked ; or, on seeing . . . asked ; or, wlien he saw . . . asked. So ver. 4, 7, 12, iv. 7, 8, 13 {while beholding (pres. ) and having ascer- tained), 15, 18, 19, 21, 23, 36, 37, &c. In fact, there is scarcely any usage more common in the New Testament. (iii) Fut. Acts viii. 27 : 6s iXrjXvdei irpoo-KWi^o-wv els 'lepouo-aXj)/x, who had come to Jentsalem to worship. This idiom (the Fut. Part, to express a purpose) is rare in the New Testament. (SeeActsxxiv.il.) c. A Participle often expresses some relation of cause, condition, &c., to the principal verb. This relation the general sense of the passage will show. Causal. Acts iv, 21 : airekvaav avrovs, \ir\Zkv ti)plovTa TOV Xaov, ye brought before me this man on the charge of perverting the people. 1 Cor. vii. 25. In like manner, the particles Kalirep, Kairoi, although, may be em- ployed. Heb. V. 8 : Kai-rrep wv vl6s, although he was a son. So Heb. iv. 3, with gen. abs. ; vii. 5, i^ehrjKvdSras, in apposition with obj. ; 2 Pet. i. 12. 395. Participles as epithets are used like adjectives. Acts xxi. 26 : rf) IxoF^Tl 'hV'^P^i ^^ l^^ next day. 1 Tim. i. 10 : ei rt erepov ttJ v-yiatvovo-r] SiSacrKoXCi}. avrUeirai, if anything else is opposed to the healthful teaching (of the faith). For other instances of this participle, see vi. 3 ; 2 Tim. i. 1 3, iv. 3 ; Titus i. 9, ii. 1. 396. With the Article, the Participle is equivalent to the relative with the finite verb. It may thus stand in apposition with a noun in any relation to the sentence, or may be used alone, the substantive being understood. Matt. i. 16 : ^Irjaovs 6 Xc^ojicvos Xpiaros, Jesus who is called Christ. Mark vi. 2 : ^ o-o^ta tj 8o0etu lKXvv<5|t«vov, this is my blood which is being shed (i.e., to be shed) /or many. So 8i8($|jLcvov, being given, Luke xxii. 19 ; KX(&(i€vov, 1 Cor. xi. 24. In other cases, the ordinary meaning of the Present is to be taken. Acts ii. 47 : " the Lord was adding daily to the church," Toiis to|Ji^vovs, those wlu) were being savedy i.e., in the course or • Stier, Ellicott, Alford. ^ 396.] ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLES. 367 way of salvation. 2 Cor. ii. 15 : " we are of Christ a sweet savour unto God, in those who are being saved, and in the perishing " (rots o-(a^o|jL6Vois Koi ev rots diroXXvii^vois). 2 Cor. iii. 1.3: "so that the children of Israel could not look to the end of tlmt which was vanishing awaif (tov KaTap-yovjx^vov), viz., the glory on the counte- nance of Moses. 397. In some cases, a participle seems to stand alone, the verb to which it is an adjunct being at a distance from it, or the con- struction of the sentence being broken.* Rom. V. 11 : Kavxt&p.€vot must be connected with (ropoi5(i€vai, v irk^Oos ttoKv yvvaiKcov T6 Tcov 7rpdiTs dneaTeiXe fie 6 (S>p narrjp, K.T.X., as the living Father sent me, &c. There are two following clauses with Koi, either of which might supply the second member of comparison : "«o / live ... and," or (as E.V.) " and I live ... so." Gal. i. 9 : «S irpoeiprjKaixfv Kal aprt nakiv Xe'yw, as we have said before, so now also I say again. Hence the use of Ka\ to introduce the apodosis after hypothetical and temporal clauses. Luke ii. 21 : then also his name was called Jesus; 2 Cor. ii. 2 : for if I grieve you, then who is he that gladdens me ? often with tSou, then behold ! as Matt, xxviii. 9 ; Acts i. 10, &c. In the rising climax, oi |ii6vov is generally found in the former clause, dXXd KaC in the latter. Acts xxi. 13 : €yai yap oit |Ji<$vov hfOrivai iXXd, Kal cmoBavdv ... fToifias (x^f /^^ ^ ^^ ready not only to be bound, but also to die. Horn. xiii. 5 : o4 ^6vov 5ta ttjv 6pyi)v &XXoL Kal dia ttjv avvddrjcriv, not only on account of tlie wrath, but also on account of conscience. For the combination Kal yip, see § 407, d. • Some still refer tovto to wlcrrfcts (quite allowable on the score of gender, by synesis) ; but this seems against the Apostle's argument. (See EUicott, Eadie, Allord.) ^ 404. J CONJUNCTIONS OF ANTITHESIS. 375 Conjunctions of Antithesis, dXXd, Se. 404. i. *AXXd, hut (emphatic as coDtrasted with fie), is used to mark opposition^ interru2Dtion, transition. a. Opposition, simply. John xvi. 20 : v/xels fie Xvirrjaeade^ dW' r, y^vTTT} vfjicov ds x^p^v yevqa-eriu, ye shall grieve, but your gmef shall be tamed into joy. Frequently after negatives — Matt. V. 17 : ovk rjXOuv KaraXvaai, dXXtt TrXrjpaxTaif I came not to destroy, but to fulfil. liom. iii. 31 : fn) yevoiro ' dXXd vonov iarcoiJLev, assuredly not ; but 'loe establish law. b. Interruption. When a train of thought is broken, by some limitation, modification, correction. John xii. 27 : Harep, acoaov jxe eK rrjs (opas ravriji ' dXXd fiia roiiro, K.T.X, Father, save me from this hour I but for this cause came I unto this hour. Often in such connections the conjunction carries with it the force of Nay, especially after questions (Matt. xi. 8, 9 ; Luke vii. 25). c. Transition : the point of contrast being that the succeeding phrase is a new subject, or the same in a different aspect ; like our Well, the7i; Moreover; Luke vi. 27, xi. 42; Gal. ii. 14, &c. Special uses of this conjunction are (1) to throw emphasis on the 1 oil owing clause. J ohn XVI. 2 : dTroawayoiyov^ ,,^j,;]aov(Tiv Ipas ' dX\' epx^Tai u>pa, k.t.X., they shall cast you out of the synagogues — yea, the hour cometh, &c. So with a negative — Luke xxiii. 15 : ovbev evpov ev tc3 dvdpdiTrco ... oXk" ovBs 'Hptt'S/??, / found no blame in the man ...no, nor yet Herod. (2) In a conditional sentence, dWd may stand in the apodosLs with the meaning, yet, nevertheless. dd 376 CONJUNCTIONS OF ANTITHESIS. [§ 404. 1 Cor. IX. 2 : ft SXXois ovk elfii drroa-ToXos, aXXoL y^ vfilv flui, if 1 am not an apostle to others^ yet at least I am so to you. So E,om. vi. 5, &c. (3) After the interrogative, aXX* rf means other than, except. 1 Cor. iiL 5 : tCs ovv eort UavXos, t£s 5e 'AttoXXo)?, dXX* 9^ Sia/covot, K.T.X., who then is Paid, and who Apollos, but ministers, (fee. In 2 Cor. i. 13 we find the combination, &X\a... oAA' ^, other things^ — than. ii. A4 (postpositive) is also most properly adversative, though less emphatic than aWa. It is to be carefully distinguished, on the other hand, from the copulatives Kal, re, with the latter of which it is, however, often interchanged in MSS. Thus, the frequent phrase, k^ot Z\ \iy(riv, t^v a9ovov, <|>ovov. These are instances of alliteration proper, there being no con- nection between the words in meaning. Where such a connection exists, the effect of the sentence is rather in the sense than in the sound. Matt. xvi. 18 : av el Ile'Tpos, Kai eVt ravT?] r?/ ir^Tpiji, k.t.X. Acts viii. 30 : apd ye 7tv«crK€is a dva-yivtoo-Keis ; Rom. xii. 3 : prj vir€p(|)pov€iv nap' b 8(1 pov€iv, dXXa <}>pov6tv els to a-a^pove'v. 1 Tim. i. 8 : koXos 6 vo^os, edp ns aiVco VO|JiijJiO)S xpijTai. In the Epistlo to Philemon there are probably allusions to the name of Ouesimus, otrfiaifios, profitable. (See ver. 11, and ovaifirju, ver. 20.) b. As the characteristic of Hebrew poetry is to run in parallel clauses, it might naturally be expected that in passages of strong v[413.] RHYTHM AND PARALLELISM. 387 and sustained feeling, the same peculiaritj would be found in the New Testament.* There are some decided instances, as 1 Tim. iii. 16 : ' ecfiavepwdr] iv (xapKL ... eSiKaioiSr] (f)dT] dyyeXoLS ... €Kr]pvxOr) ep edveaiv. eTTia-Tevdr] iv Ko'cr/xo) ... dveXrjffiOr] iu 86^rj. This passage was probably part of a rhythmical creed of the early Church, or of a primitive Christian hymn. For true hymns, see also Luke i. 46-55, 68-79, ii. 29-32; Eph. v. 14; Jude 24, 25 ; Eev. v. 12-14, &c. Rom. ix. 2 : Xvirrj ixoc earl [xeyaXj], Koi udiaXeiTTTOS odvpt] rrj Kapdia uov. Here we have the tone of strong emotion. For similar rhythmic constructions, see John xiv. 27 ; Rom. xi. 33 ; 1 Cor. XV. 54-57 ; Col. i. 10-12, and many other passages. The parallel clauses often contain strong contrasts, as John iii. 20, 21 ; Rom. ii. 6-10, where a long series occurs. Sometimes the construction is more elaborate ; a second series of clauses corresponding with the first, but in reverse order. This is called " reverted parallelism," or chiasmus,'\' or epanodos (lirdvoSos). See a simple illustration, § 312, 1. Simpler still is Matt. xii. 22 : "the blind and dumb, both spake and saw." Compare Matt. vii. C. So Phil. iii. 10 : " to know Him, and the power of his resiurection, and the fellowship of his sufferings, being made conformable unto his death, if by any means I might attain to the resurrection [ilavdaraaiv) of the dead." Other more elaborate harmonies of the kind might easily be traced. The whole subject connects itself with the study of the influence of the Old Testament upon the New — an important field of enquiry, as yet; only very partially explored. * See Jebb's "Sacred Literature," and especially the versions of the Epistle to the Romans by the Rev. J. H. Hinton, a.m., and by the Rev. Dr. Forbes. t From the letter chi, X. 388 POETIC QUOTATIONS — IIHYTHM. [§ 413. c. (1) Three quotations of Greek poetry have been found in the New Testament, all by the Apostle Paul. Acts xvii. 28 : tov yap koL yevos fafiev ' (the former half of a hexa- meter), by Aratus, a native of Tarsus, b.c. 270 ; found also with a little variation (eK avTairobovvaL rots OXi^ovaiv vfxas OXiyj/LV, ^ koI vixiv rois Oki^OfiivoLs avedLV fieO' rjixutv, kv rrj CLTTOKaXvyj/eL tov KvpCov ^lr}aov air ovpavov fxer ayyikmv bwdpieios avTOVf ^ kv TTvpl (f)\oybs, bibovros enbUrja-LV tols /xr) cibocn 0eor, Kol rots fJLT] viraKovova-L rw evayyeXiia tov Kvpiov rjiiGtv ^Ir}(rov Ver. 5. (Which is) a token, nom. (pred. to an implied relative clause, 6 ia-Tiv) ; the token being the endurance and faith of the Thessalonians. of the righteous judgment of God, genitives of origin or source, 248 ; article again employed, in order that ye may be counted worthy, for inf., see 390, c; tense, 386; vijius, 285. The clause expresses the intent of God's righteous judgment ; and hence its result, in proving the fitness of the faithful for God's kingdom, of the kingdom of God, fiacT. gen. after compound of 6|tos, 272. Ver. 6. For the sake of which ye also suffer, for vnep, see 303, 2. The Koi combines into one the thought of the sufifering and the being counted worthy, if truly it is righteous (as it is, implied by 'TTcp), copula omitted ; 8tK. neut., because referring to inf. with God, for irapd (dat.), see 306, jS, 2. to repay to those who afllict you, aflO-iction, in the verb, air6 marks the debt, avri the return ; for the aorist, see 386. (This verb is used both in a good and a bad sense in the New Testament : to "repay" or to "retaliate," Rom. xii. 19.) For the art. and participle, see 395 ; dat. secondary object, and ace. primary object after the verb, 278. Ver. 7. And to you, the afflicted, B\ifi. is passive (not middle). rest with us, /iero, as 301, a, I ; rjtiwv, referring to the three, ch. i. i. at (eV, 295, 7) the revelation of the Lord Jesus from heaven, the time when the recompense shall take place, referred to dvTair,, ver. 6 ; dVJ, 292, I ; ovpavov, singular, 240, a, note, and without article, 218. with the angels of his power, compare 258. The angels are the ministers of his power. The art. is unnecessary before 0177., as the following gen. defines it, 208. Ver. 8. In a fire of fiame, eV of investiture, dependent upon K. Itjo-., 295, 3 (Lachm. and others read eV (pXoyl irvpSs, in a flame of fire) ; rec. reading, v €(^' v^aSy kv rrj r)p.ipa €K€Cvrj, ^^ eiy 6 koI TTpoctevxopieda Travrore irepi vpicav, tva {ifxas a^LuxTrj ttjs KA7j)S a-a\€v6rjvaL vfias airb tov vobs, /urjre Opo^'iaOai, fJLi]T€ bta TTi'evjtxaro? /Lt?]re bta \6yov /xt^re bt cTrtcrroA^? cos be' rjfxoyv, 0)5 character, so corresponding with the next clause, and work (also quali- fied by iraaav, see 318) of faith (248) in power (295, 6), qualifying irXripdar), "powerfully fulfil." Ver. 12. In order that the name of our Lord Jesus (Christ), Zttws, as distinguished from Iva, seems to denote the Jiow as contrasted with the where ; but the line cannot be very clearly drawn. Xpiarov is omitted by most edd. may be glorified (384, a, i ; tense, 374, note) in you (see on ver. 10), and you (understand ivZoloffBrtre) in him (or in it, i.e., tlie name, but less probably. See Alford, and 295, 4, note), according to, for KaTti, see 300, )8, 5. the grace of our God and Lord Jesus Christ (or of our God and the Lord Jesus Christ), see 232, a, note on Titus ii. 13, where, however, the phrases are different. Kipios is so often properly anarthrous (217, h) that the former of the above renderings is at least doubtful. (See Ellicott here). Ver. 1. But (Se transitional, 404; the writer's mind passing from his own prayers to the duty of his readers) we entreat you, brethren, in reference to, 303, a, 3 (not by, as if in adjuration. See Alf.) the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ, and our (gen. obj., 268) gathering together unto him, for M, see 305, 7, 3 (Mark v. 21), not up to, although the reference is to the final gathering. Ver. 2. That ye be not (lit., in order tJiat ye shoidd not be) soon shaken, for els, see 298, 4. The purpose of the entreaty was to prevent their being shaken. For t6, substantivizing the inf., see 390; for fi-fj, 385; for v/xas, 285, and note, from your mind (or conviction), airS, as 292, I ; the article as an unemphatic possessive, 215. nor yet be troubled, for fj.7)^4 disjunctive (not /u^re, as rec), see 405 ; epoelcrBai, pres. inf., denoting an enduring state, the aor., aaXevO., referring to a single effect, 386. neither by spirit nor by word nor by letter, as by us, 394 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE. OTL €vi(rTr}K€V rj rnxipa rod XpL(TTov. ^ MrJ rts v/xas e^airaT-qcni Kara fjLTjbeva TpoitoV otl €av jjlt} €K6r] rj aTToa-raa-ia TTpStrov, Kal a7roKa\v(f)6fj 6 avOpoiiros ttjs afJiaprCas, 6 vlbs ttjs aTrcoXeta?, * 6 avTiK.€LiJi€vos Kol vTTepaipoixevos cTTt irdvTa Xeyofjievov 0€oy r/ (T^^aa-fxa, coo-re avrbv els rov vaov tov Qeov cos 0eor KaOicraif iiTrobeLKVvvTa kavrbv otl eorl 0eos. ^ ov [jivr]ixov€V€T€ otl €tl (op the repeated fi-fire here breaks up the negation into three parts, and connects them. For Sid, see 299, a, 2. {Spirit no doubt refers to a pretended pro- phecy ; word, to a pretended saying on inspired authority ; letter, therefore, according to the parallel, should mean a pretended epistle. That the refer- ence is not to the First Epistle, the ws seems further to indicate), as that (2 Cor. V. 19 shows that the &s does not in itself imply deceit, but only that the thing was so represented — "to the effect that"), the day of the Christ (or Lord ; Kvpiov is the accepted reading, instead of Xpia-rov) is already come (or, is imminent, immediately), not simply is at handy for the verb always refers to the present; the part, iveards expressly signifying the present in distinction from the future (Rom. viii. 38 ; i Cor. iii. 22.) Ver. 3. Let no one deceive you, ^|air., subj. in imper. sense, 375; aor., 373, b. in (Kard, 300, fi, 5) any way, the two negatives strengthen the denial, 401. because, unless the apostasy, definite, 213. shall first have come (383, /3, note), and the man of sin {the sin, 214, 6) shall have been revealed, — the Apostle does not conclude the sen- tence, see 412, e, but passes on to describe the characteristics of the " man of sin." the son of perdition (genitives of quality). Ver. 4. He that withstands, and exalts himself (middle, 355, i). Obs., the single article shows that the two participles refer to the same subject. But avTiKtifievos cannot take ivl following ; an object must, there- lore, be understood, Christ. On the tense, see 395. above (305, y, 2) every one called God, observe irdvra, masc. or an object of worship, &€6y and ffcfiaafia, accus., in apposition with vdvra after copulative verb, so that he sits, for So-re, see 391 ; Kcudiffai, intrans. aor., "he took his seat," and so now is seated in — literally, into — i.e., "entered into and sits in," constrvctio prcegnans, 298, 8. exhibiting himself that he is God, avotuK., ace. by abrSv preced., present, as expressing his habit. For the object and object-sentence, see 411, b, 4 ©eo) iravTOTC ircpl vixQv, d5eA0ot rjyoLTTriixivoL virb Kvptov, otl etAero vp.as 6 0eos dir apxijs els (ra)Tr]pLaif kv ayLa(rp.<^ Ylvevp-aros kol iria-Tei dXrjOetas, gen. of origin, 248 (these things being severally born of falsehood), or per- haps gen. of quality, as E.V. Ver. 10. And in all {every kind of, as ver. 9) doceit, parallel to the former prepositional clause with eV, the two together explanatory of /car. ivepy. 2aT. of iniquity (the article should be omitted), gen. of quality. among {or for) the perishing (omit iv, with all the best modern edd.), dat incommodi, 279. For the force of the participle, see 200 (note), and 396. because, for avS' wv, see 291, note, they received not, aorist, viewing their lifetime as past, the love of the truth, gen. obj., 268. in order that they might be saved, const, as vers. 2, 6. Ver. II. And on this account, 299, h, i.e., because they received not, &c. God will send (or, is sending ; ire/iirej, not Trefiypei, is the ap- proved reading), explanatory of the airoWvfievois. to them (dat. of trans- mission) a working of delusion, parallel to iuepyetav above, gen. of characteristic quality, 257. so that they should believe (the intent, and so the result, of the delusion, 390, c) the falsehood, dative, 278, d; article of *' renewed mention," 212. Ver. 12. That they might all be judged, a second intentional clause, 384, growing out of the preced. who believed not the truth, 395, b ; for negative, see 393. but took pleasure, the conduct viewed as past from the point of view of their condemnation, in the iniquity, art. as 212. Ver. 13. But we, emphatic pron., 169. are bound to give thanks to God always concerning you, see on ch, i. 3. brethren be- loved by the Lord {i.e., by Christ, see 217, b), because God (for art., see 217, a) chose you (var. read., ei'AoTo, see 97, b, note), causal sen- tence; comi^are the on in cli. i. 3. from the beginning, 219, unto salvation, dependent upon c'tA. ; for cty, see 298, 4. in sanctification of the Spirit, iy denoting the sphere (295, 4) in which the salvation is reahzed. Uufvfi. is gen. of the author, 248; for omitted article, see 217, / and belief of truth (or, the truth), irlarti without the art., like ayianfi.^, under the common regimen of iv, 314; see also 208. Truth is abstract, 214, 2 THESSALONIANS IT. 14-17. 397 ^* et? €Kd\€(T€V vfxas bta rod evayyeXiov rjixcaVf ets iTcpnroLrjcrLV ho^rjs Tov KvpLov 7]ix5>v 'I?7(roO Xpiorof). ^^ apa ovz^, ah€\(po\, (TTrjK€T€, Kol KpaTelre ras TTapab6(r€is hi ebibdx^drjre, €lt€ bia Xoyov €tre hC €Tn(TTo\r\i rjjjiutv. ^^ avrbs be 6 Kvpto? rjiioiv *lr](Tovs Xpio-Tos, KOL 6 Oeoi KOL Trarrjp rjfxwv, 6 dyaitria-as i)p.ai KoX bovi irapdKkrjaiv aloivCav kol eXTTiba dyaOrjv kv xdpiTi, ^7 irapaKakea-ai vp.G>v raj KapbCas, kol orrrjpL^aL v/xas €V iravTl Xoyco KOL epyco dya6(2. and is used in the utmost generality ; not so much the specific truth of the Gospel, but the Gospel considered as truth ; the disposition given being that of harmony with truth in itself, whatever it might be. Ver. 14. Unto wllicll (state of salvation), the neuter relative referring to the whole object of thought; compare 344. he called you, aor., as before, of specific time, by means of, 299, a, 2. our gospel, ie.y the Gospel as preached by us, see 270, note, for the attainment of the glory, ets, connected with and explanatory of els arwr. ; 5o|., gen. obj., 268. (The gloiy of Christ is regarded as in a sense the heritage of Chris- tians ; compare John xvii. 24.) of our Lord Jesus Christ, possess, gen., 254. Ver. 15. Accordingly therefore, for the inferential conjunction, see 406. brethren, stand fast (derivative of ea-TrjKa, see 106, 4), and hold fast the instructions, ace. obj. of kjoot., compare 264. which ye were taught, S.s, secondary object, with pass. eStSc^x- > see 284, note, and 356. whether by word, 299, a, 2. or by our (248) epistle. For eifre, see 405. Ver 16. But may our Lord himself, 5e, as usual, adversative, 404; avrSs, very emphatic, 335. Jesus Christ, and (may) our God and Father (or, God and our Father, see Ellicott on GaL i. 4). For our God, see ch. i. II. who loved us, referring to the last antecedent, God the Father (aor., as referring to a single and complete act). and gave eternal consolation and good hope, abstract, anarthrous ; better rendered without indef. art. in grace, connected with Sovs, 295, 6 and 4. Ver. 17. Comfort, for opt., see 378: sing., indicative of the close union between the Father and the Son ; so the following, your hearts, plur. , see 237. and establish you, vfxas omitted in chief MSS. in every good work and word (such being the order of the best authorities), 4if denotes again the element; that in which the confirmation is given. 398 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE. CHAPTER III. TO XoLTTou, TTpoaevx^o-Qe, dSeA^ot, TTcpC rjfjicov, tva 6 Xoyos Tov Kvp[ov rpixrj kol bo^d^rjTai, /cameos koI irpbs vims, * Koi. tva pv(r6aiiJi€V CLTTo tS>v aroTTOiv koI irovqp&v avOpcairoiV • ov yap TTCLVTOiV rj Tlia-TlS. ^ TTLCTTOS hi k(TTlV 6 KvplOS, 6? v • ^ ov\ on ovk. e)(o/uei^ (^ova-Cav, dAA tva kavTovs tvttov bSyfxcv v\uv et? to /xi/xeto-^at 7/jua9. ^^ /cat yap ore ?7/:x€i; Trpos v/aas, roOro TTaprjyyikXofxev vixiv, otl et T19 Oi» deAet kpya^eadai, p.i]h'k €(t6Ut(i). ^^ aKovofX€v yap TLva<5 ii^pL- iraTovvTas ev viuv aTCLKrois, iMrjbev €pya^op.ivovs, aXka irepLcpya' CoiJL€vovs. ^'^ Tols 6e TOLovTOL^ TTapayyiWofxev kol irapaKakovpicv bia Tov KvpCov -qjx&v ^Irja-ov Xptorou, tva {jlctcl -^a-vx^^as €pyaC6iJL€V0L make a living "). for nought, Supedv, an old ace. aa adv., 126, a; com- pare its use in Matt. x. 8, "without an equivalent;" so in other passages, from any one, 306, a. but in (accompaniment, 295, 3) toil and travail (we did so) labouring night and day, 286, b, 2. Both these clauses depend on icpdyoixcy, implied, in order not to be burden- some, for TrpSs with inf., see 390, c. to any of you, for ace, compare 281, a; vfjiwv, partitive gen., 262. Ver. 9. Not that, a frequent elliptical formula, correcting a possible misapprehension, "do not suppose me to say that" (see Ellicott on PhiL iii. 12). we have not a right (to maintenance), but (we do so) in order that we may present ourselves, Sw/iev, aor. of one definite determination; for kainovs, see 335, 2, 6. an example, secondary predi- cate, in apposition with eovr. to you, to the end that, us as in ii 11, &c. (ye) should imitate us. Ver. 10. For even, see 407, note, when we were among you, for vp6s, compare ii. 5. we used to enjoin this upon you, impf., 362, h ; for irapayyfWto and its regimen, see ver. 4, 6. that, introducing objective sentence explanatory of tovto, but thrown into a quotation form, 382, a; hence icrO. imper. "if any one wills not to work," for €t, see 383, a; for d4\€i, 363,/. " neither let him eat," neg., 371. Ver. 1 1 . For, introducing the reason of the command, we hear that some are walking, predicative participle, 394. among you, iy as ver. 7. disorderly, doing no work, but being busybodies, par- ticiples in ap})Osition with vepiir. ; for the paronomasia, see 41 3, a, 2. The verb irtpiepy. does not again occur in the New Testament, although the subst. wfpiepyoi is found, i Tim. v. 13. Ver. 12. But to such as these, pron. definite, 220. we command and exhort, the dat. obj. belongs grammatically to irapayy., as in ver 4, &c. ; irapaKoX. takes the ace. by (or tn, the rec. Zii is less fully supported than iv ; see Ellicott) the Lord Jesus Christ that, working with quietness, for /ierd, see 301, o, 2. they eat, subj. by iVo; tense, 374. Obs. vapayy. with the inf., ver. 6; with object and obj. clause, 8t*, ver. 10 2 THESSALONIANS III. 13-17. 401 Tov kavTcav apTOV ia-Oicoa-LV, ^^ vjxtls he, abe\(l)ol, jxi] €KKaKi]a-r]T€ Ka\.OTTOLOVVT€S. ^* €t b4 TiS 0V)(^ V7TaK0V€L T(Z \6y(£> TJfJiQv blO. Tjjs €7Ti(rToXT]S, TovTov (Tr]ix€Lov(r6€ ' Kol fXY} avvavafiiyvvcrOe avr<}, tva evrpairfj • ^'^ nal }xr] a)S i^Opov Tjyelcrde, aXXa vovOere'LTe ws abckipov. ^^ avTos 6e 6 Kvptos rrjs eiprjvijs hcoi] vjjllv T7]V elprjvrjv bia iravTos iv iravrl rpoTTO). 6 Kvpcos ixera ttclvtcdv vjjlcov. ^'^ *0 acnracrixos rfj 6ju.r/ x^^P' YlavXov, o eort a-r][ieiov ev iraoi] here with the intentional particle. The command is given in order that the result may follow, their own bread, emphatically, not that of others. Ver, 13. But ye, emphatic, by way of contrast to those just mentioned. brethren, be not weary, subj., with imper. force, 375. The reading varies between ^kk. and iyu. ; the latter (from iv) being to grow weary or cowardly in any enterprise ; the former, to go out of it through weariness or cowardice. But ckk. is altogether doubtful., in well-doing, pres. part., adjunct to pred., 394, 3, h, "whilst well-doing" being implied; or causal, as c. Ver. 14. But if any one obeys not, 383, a. our word, 278, d. through, conveyed by, 299, a, 2. the epistle, i.e., this epistle, note this man, for ott?^., middle, see 355, 2, "mark for yourselves." and keep no company with him, dat. of association, 277, a. The pres. imper. in both cases enjoins the conduct as habitual. that he be ashamed, the purpose, again, not simply the result, Ver. 15. And, not adversative, but simply conjunctive; another parti- cular of the conduct to be observed, esteem (him) not as an enemy, Cos, a particle of apposition connecting ex^/c. with tovtov, understood from preced. but admonish (him) as a brother, Ver. 16. But (the antithesis being between the persons addressed by the Apostle and those just specified, "as for you," "to return to you") may the Lord of (the) peace, gen. of quality, himself, emphatic pron. give (the) peace to you, S^'tj, opt. in the usual sense and the ordinary const, of the verb. The article before elp. both times is emphatic, recognising peace as the peculiar and well-understood Christian blessing. always, XP^von understood with iravrds, an adverbial adjunct to S^'77. in every way, Lachmann reads tJtt^, place. The Lord be, ctr? as i. 2. with, 301, a, I. you all. Ver. 17. The salutation, nominative, in apposition with ver. 18, as a kind of title : "This is the salutation." of me, Paul, with my own hand, for const., see 336, p. 307; ^^ipt, dat. of instr., 280, d. which, neuter rel. pron., 346, a. is the sign, pred. om. art., see 206. in every epistle, 224, a. so I write, the other member of the comparison being 402 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE. eiriaroXfi • ovtco ypdcpoi. ^^ tj xapis rov KvpCov rjixfav 'Ir/o-ou X/otoTOv fjL€Ta TTOLVTcov vfxCiv. afjirjv, mpos Secra-aXovLKcls bevrepa iypdcprj cltto ^ A6r]vanf. omitted, as obvious to the orig. readers; compare examples under 412, e. Probably the phrase alludes to some peculiarity in the handwriting. Cora- pare Gal. vi. 1 1. Ver. 18. The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be, (h, as i. 2. with (301, o, i) you all. (Amen is omitted by Tischendorf ; but see Ellicott. ) The subscription to the Epistle, The second (epistle) to the Thessalonians was written from Athens (see also subscription to First Epistle), is undoubtedly spurious, and is also incorrect. It arose probably from a careless and mis- taken interpretation of i Thess. iiL i. NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. Probably no two words in any language are precisely synonymous^ although many are interchangeable. It has already been shown (p. 256) that words in different languages seldom, if ever, perfectly correspond. Hence arise some of the chief difficulties of transla- tion. It has often been unthinkingly suggested that, in the New Testament for instance, the same Greek word should always be rendered by the same English one. This rule would constantly lead to glaring incorrectness : although, undoubtedly, capricious or unnecessary variations should be avoided. The word suffer, for instance, covers so great an extent of meaning, that we are hardly surprised to find it employed in the Authorized Version for ten distinct Greek words, beside various combinations of the same roots. To provoke, again, occurs twelve times in the English Yersion for eight different Greek words. To provide is found eight times, representing six distinct originals. The verb ordain occurs eighteen times : once for noieco, which Greek word has in different places thirty-six English equivalents ; once for ylvofiai, the various equivalents of which are almost innumerable ; twice for optica, which is translated in four different ways ; once for npoopiCco, which has three English equivalents ; twice for rWrjyn, a verb translated in fifteen ways ; twice for rao-o-co, which is rendered by five different words; thrice for biaTaao-o}, a verb with five renderings ; thrice for Kadia-Trjixi, which we find translated in six 404 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. ways ; once for Karaa-Kevd^a}, a verb with four English equivalents ; once for Kpivo), which is rendered in fifteen ways ; and once for X^ipoTovecOf a word occurring twice, and in each place differently rendered. In addition to these, we have to ordain beforey by 7rpoypu(f>a> and irpo^Toipd^a). Such instances suggest the largeness of the field that is open to the inquirer into the so-called Synonyms, whether of the Greek or the English New Testament. To cover that field, in however perfunctory a manner, would be plainly impossible in the compass of a few pages. All that can be attempted is to point out the main distinctions between some important words in general use, of kindred meaning, and often translated alike in the Authorized Version. For further detail, the English reader is referred to Tittmann's " Remarks on the Synonyms of the New Testament," translated in Clark's Biblical Cabinet^ 1833-37 ; to Archbishop Trench's " Synonyms of the New Testament ;" and to the " Syntax and Synonyms of the New Testament," by the Kev. W. Webster, m.a. NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 405 WORDS ILLUSTRATED. NO. 'kryaBSs, ayaQaaivr^ . 21 Sal/xotv, Sai/xSviov . , » . ayairdo}, aydin) • • • . 19 SaKpvw . ayios, a-yp65 • . . . 23 SfTjcris .... ayv6r}fj.a • . . . 39 Set . . . . ay opa^oi , . . . 43 5fi\65, deiKia aSris . , . • 5^ SetaiSatfMwv, deiaidaifioyia &S1KOS, aSiKia . • . . 32 SfaTr6Tr)s a'iSios . , . 58 Srj/jios .... ulvio), c^vos . • • . . 47 Sid5r]fMa KtVew, atrrifia t . . 9, 38 Sidttovos, BiuKoyia, SiaKoveco * 3^ ald'V, aldytos . . . 58 5ia\4yo/xai . dA.ei^« . . 18 Biduoia .... a\r}6r]s, a\7}6eia, a K-neivdi . 24 Starayi] . . . &Wos . . • 76 SiSdaKco, Si5a(rKaA.05 14 afiapToiva), a/xaprta aixdpTrjiJ.a . • 39 SiKaios, SLKUioivfT], SiKalwfjLa 21 aix(\>'iBX7](TTpov . 70 S'lKTVOV aydO-q/JLa, at/ddefia, a.va9ffj.aTl((a • 51 i6yiJLa .... dvaKaiv6o}, avavtSw . . . 26 SoKew, S6^a . *6 aviip . . . 62 Sov\os .... ^udpCOTTOS . . 62 Svyafiai, Svvafiis . 45 dvofxia . , • 39 Su/xa .... dvoxh . . • 31 dvrlKvTpov . . • 43 'EBpaTos .... kiroKvTpttXTis . . . 43 efiyos, e0j/77 .... OMTTO/iaj , . 7 eJdov, €i5os, fXdu\ov 5 dperii . . . 21, 47 cIkuv ..... ■ipxaios . 25 elixl .... abX-h . , • 72 eTiroj/, CTTOS .... cKplrifii, &(j>f . . . . eyrjrSs ... . . . 54 /ueAAw ...... dprjcTKOS, OpiqaKela . . 44 H^ptfivdotf fiepifiva .... dvfjids . . 3z fiiTajmeXoficu ..... eipa . . . . 71 fieravoea, nerdyoia Bvaia, Qvaicurriipiov . 37 f^ofxp^ Upevs . . 37 votJs . . . . Up6s, Up6v . . *3, 35 vfKpos, veKp6ot .... i^daKOfxou, IXacfiSs . 43 V€os, yedrris ..... tfidriov. . 66 1*^401 'lovhaios, *l(TpaT}\lTr}S . 50 vlTno) ...... Icx^df, iffx^s. • 57. vot/^, p6r}fJia ..... KaQap6s . 23 ^7^05 Kaiv6sy KaivSrris . 26 oSvp/iJs KcupSs . . . . 64 olSa kokSs, Koutia. . 22 oIkoS, OlKia, olKfTTJS Ka\6s . . 21 oiKOvfjLfvr] ..... Kaphia . • 55 olKTtpfjt.6s ..... KarayytWu) . • 15 6\6K\r]pos, 0A.0T6A.17s Kar-nx^c . 14 ^pao), bpaiio, 5 wpoacpopd TTpOC^TjTTJS, irpo(t)T)TeiiOfiai . irTux6s irii\7], TcvKwv . irwddvofiai . pea), prjfia, crdp^, (TapKiK6s Sarai/, 'Saravas ai^ofxai, crefidCoixai (Tvydofiai, (ncuirdca CKtd airovSr) . (TTrvpis . NO. 30 43 75 39 13 17 55 2 6, 72 22 2 38 36 37 15 30 71 9 59 70 55 53 36 45 56 II 69 67 56 62 T6A0S, TeAe'w, rehfios, Te\ei6w repas . . • VfXVOS . . . VTrdpxi\eci}, (piXavOpayirla, (pi\ade\(p> da ipvxv, ^vxifcSs 13, 27 45 43 I 60 3^ 6 22 65 8 19 33 68 55 11 6) 65 56 41 66 12 21 18 64 48 7 54, 55 408 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. First, some groups of Yerbs in ordinary use may be selected, with their related Substantives. 1. To Be, Exist, Become. Elfil is the ordinary verb of existence; inrdpxco implies essential or original condition (Phil. ii. 6), and so is directly contrasted with yivofiouy to become (James i. 22). See further, Acts xvii. 24 ; Heb. xi. 6. 2. To Do, to Make. IT tew seems to denote more sustained effort than tr p 6. , "I learn," in any way, ex])resses the knowledge as existing in the mind, subjective know- ledge. Hence, when knowledge involves experience, yivda-Kco is always used (Eph, iiL 19; PhiL iiL 10 ; i John ii., iii., iv. ); iir'nnafxai. (an old dialectic form of the middle of i and its derivatives from elSoj/, in that the former is objective, and the latter sub- jective, v^opiai. being a middle term. Compare '6pafia, flSos, S^/is. It is doubtful, however, if this distinction can be maintained in the use of the verbs, dsdofiai (referred to the subject) and dewpeco (referred to the object) are to look at purposely, or attentively to gaze upon (Matt. vi. i, xi. 7 ; John xii. 45 ; Acts vii. 56). 6. To Appear. Ao/ceo? "expresses the subjective mental estimate or opinion about a matter which men form, their 5a|a concerning it, which may be right (Acts XV. 28 ; I Cor. iv. 9, vii. 4c), but which may be wrong, involving, as it always does, the possibility of error (Matt. vi. 7 ; Mark vi. 49 ; John xvi. 2; Acts xxvii. 13);" ipalyofxai "expresses how a matter phenomenally shows and presents itself, with no necessary assumption of any beholder at all." — Trench. This "phenomenon" may represent a reality (Matt. ii. 7 ; Phil. ii. 15, "appear," not "shine") or a mere show (Matt, xxiii. 27, 28). 7. To Touch. "Airrofiai (middle of airrco, to kindle) is the usual word ; Oiyydycc denotes a lighter touch (compare the two" in Col. ii. 21, where, as Archbishop Trench observes, the order of our translation should be reversed ; and see Heb. xi. 28); rpT]\a(()da} is to feel (" to feel after," Acts xvii. 27), to handle. Vves. part., palpable, material (Heb. xii. 18). 8. To Speak, Say. Aa\((o is simply to speak, to employ the organ of utterance ; \4yci) is referred to the sentiment of what is spoken (compare jSAeVco and opdcc above) j (prj/xi, p4(j), epw, ilirov, to the words; pv/xa isi a, wo?-d. in itself considered ; X6yos, a spoken word, with reference generally to that which is in the speaker's mind; ctos is only found (Heb. vii. 9) in the phrase as eiros eirny, so to speak. 410 XEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 9. To Ask. AiVeaj is to ask for something, to beg, pray ; epwTcicc, to question, to ash in genei'al, specifically : "In that day ye shall ask me no questions ... -what- soever ye shall pray the Father in my name." Observe, ipurdco is elsewhere used of Christ's prayers to the Father (John xvii. 9, 15, 20), never of ours. Compare the two in John xvi 23; and in i John v. 16. llvi/Qdvouxi, to ask for information, to inquire. 10. To Come. "Epxoiiai denotes the act, "I am coming;" t^/cw, the result, "I am come." John viii. 42: "I came from God, and I am here." See also Heb. X. 9. 11. To Care. ^poveo), (ppovrlQw, implies solicitude (Phil. iv. 10; Titus iii. 8); jneXeracB (and impers. fi^Xei),- solicitude ex])ressed in forethought, or the employment of means to the desired result ; ixcpifxvaw, anxious or distracting care. So the substantive fiepifiya. See especially i Peter v. 7; airovdii ("haste") is earnestness, diligence, generally. 12. Ought. A6i (impers.) denotes the duty or necessity as existing in the thing itself, often used for the ougJU arising from prophecy (Luke xxiv. 26, 46) ; d Paley's). 13. To Accomplish, Fulfil, Perfect. TeXos expresses the end of a course or series : so TcAew, to reach the end ; r€\ei6w, to complete; wXTjpdo) denotes the accomplishment of a plan or pui*pose, to fulfil ; Te\e» gives the finishing stroke (John xix. 30) ; vKupSta adds the completing element : the former brings the topstone, the latter, the keystone. Hence they are often interchangeable. Compare Acts xx. 24, where the prominent thought is the completeness of the Apostle's life-work, with 2 Tim. iv. 7, where to this is superadded the thought of its approaching close. The fultilment of pro])hecy is expressed by tTK-r\p6(a, except John xix. 28, which has reMiSw. UXijpwfjia is generally active, that which brings com- pleteness, fulness, to anything (Matt. ix. i6 ; i Cor. x. 26); but may be used passively, that which is filled (Eph. L 23), or abstractedly, /«Z?ie«« (CoL ii. 9). NEW TESTAMENT SYXONYMS. 411 14. To Teach, Instruct. Ai^d(a, anointing iov festal purposes (Luke vii. 46), for health (James v. 14), or for embalmment (Mark xvi. i). 19. Love, to Love. ^Ayairiw denotes the love of esteem or of kindness, love to character ("diligo"); aydvT], its cognate substantive, "is a word born within the bosom of revealed religion. It occurs in the LXX., but there is no example of its use in any heathen writer whatever ; the utmost they attained to here 412 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. was (piXavQponTr'ia and i\ade\(pla, and the last, indeed, never in any sense but as the love between brethren in blood." — Trench. Wherever we have " charity" in the E.V., the original is ayavn, but it is more generally and better translated "love;" ^i\4w expresses the love of the feelings, instinctive, warm- affection ("amo"). The force of the two verbs is very beautifully illustrated in John xxi. 15-17, on which see Trench and others. 20. To Weep. KKaloi is the verb generally employed ; SaKpio), "to shed tears," is found but once, John xi. 35 : "Jesus wept." In Matt. ii. 18, dprjt/os (reading doubtful), K\av6fA.6s, dfivpfjiSs, form a climax, "lamentation, weeping, and mourning. " II. Some important words, chiefly Adjectives and Substantives, expressive of moral quality, may now be considered. 21. Good. 'A 7 000 s is good ; S'lKatos, right In the former, the notion of beneficence prevails, in the latter that of justice. So with ayadoxrvvri, SiKatoarvvrj. Still, the two are not opposed. In Rom. viL 12, both are predicated of the Divine law. In Rom. v. 7, the ayados is one of the SIkcuoi (as proved by the article and hy yap). In Matt. vi. i, seq., SiKaioaiwn* refers to almsgiving, prayers, and reUgious fasting ; Ka\6s contains the notion of giving pleasure^ "beautiful," "fair," "honourable." It may be interchanged with aya66s (compare, e.g., 1 Tim. i. 19, with Heb. xiii. 18), or combined with it, as Luke viii. 15. (So in classic Greek, Ka\oKare aperii, "virtue," really courage, found only in the New Testament, Phil. iv. 8; I Pet. ii. 9, where see 47; 2 Pet. i. 3, 5.) BeArtoi', as an adverb, ia found 2 Tim. i. 18. • Undoubtedly the true reading. NEW TESTAMENT SYAOJSYMS. 413 22. Evil, Bad. KaK6s is bad, generically, including every form of evil, physical and moral. So KaKia, badness, specially in its forms of meanness, cowardice, malice, adiKos, aSiKia (opposed to Si/catos, SiKaioavvr]), lorong ; Trov7]p6s expresses especially the more active form of evil, malignani (so 6 irovnp6s, not 6 kukSs, for the Evil one, Satan); iroprjpla, malignity; ^avKos is worthless, "good for nothing," like the old Eng., "naughty," from " naught." 23. Holy. "Otrtos is holy, intrinsically ; referred once to the Divine purposes (Acts xiii. 34, from Isa. Iv. 3), generally to interior purity; predicated both of God and of men ("pious"); ayios, ayv6s, are both derived from a root denoting separation, the former, when applied to men, expressing consecra- tion to God (see x Pet. ii. 5, 9), the latter, purity, chastity; Up6s, very infrequently (except in its neuter substantival form, Up6v, on which see 35), is "dedicated to God," and is only used in the New Testament of things ; Kadap6s, literally clean, free from impure admixture. 24. True. 'A\ri0^s is "ti'ue," morally, and is applied to persons or to declarations ; &.\7}div6s is "genuine," "real." The former epithet, for instance, applied to God, denotes His attribute of faithfulness (John iii. 33); the latter expresses the reality of His Godhead, as distinguished from false deities (John xvii. 3), The use of ahtj9iv6s in the Revelation is an exception to this rule (see xix. 9, 11). The substantive aKijdeia includes the idea of both adjectives, though generally correspondent with the former. 25. Old. no\otos is "old," as Tiaving existed long; apxalos, "old," as having existed formerly ; apxcuos fiadrtTT^s (Acts xxi. 16), one of the original disciples. Compare 2 Pet. ii. 5 ; Rev. xii. 9, xx. 2. Ua\at6s sometimes connotes the idea of decrepitude, decay (opposed to kuivos, see 26), Matt. ix. 16 ; j Cor. V. 7, 8 ; and for the verb, Heb. viii. 1 3. 26. New. Nfos is new in reference to time, having recently come into existence (young); Katv6s, new (fresh) in reference to quality, different in kind. (See Trench on the words.) So vea 5to97;K?j (Heb. xii. 24) is "a covenant recently given;" Kaivii Siadi]KT} (Heb. ix. 15), "a covenant new in character*" at/aye6a> (Eph. iv. 23), to renew in youth; avaKaivSco (Col. iii. 10), to rene\» in character and spirit. So v€6rr}s, youth ; kuivStiis, newness, fi-eshness. 414 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 27. Perfect TeXeios, "full-grown," applied to character, means that which haa attained the moral reKos — manhood in Christ ; " however, it may be true that having reached this, other and higher ends will open, out before him, to have Christ formed in him more and more." — T'rench. The attainment of their highest end is expressed by the perfect TercAefco/xa: (Phil. iii. 12). '0\6k\7]po5 is complete in parts, no Christian grace lacking; ^AoreAijj denotes maturity in each separate element of character (i Thess. v. 23). 28. Blessed. Two different adjectives are translated blessed: fiandpios, happy, as in the Beatitudes, and notably i Tim. i. 11, vi. 15; and 6i'Ao7rjTopd is any offering to God, priestly or otherwise. In Eph. v. 2, some refer Trpoacpopdv to Christ's consecrated life, Qvcridv to his atoning death. 416 * NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 38. Prayer, to Pray. Eux^ is a prayer (James v. 15) or a vow (Acts xviii. 18) ; eUxofiai, to pra}'^, or to wish strongly (Rom. ix. 3); vpo, see 9 ; air-rifia is any particular request; in plur. , the individual petitions in the trpoaivxi]. See Phil. iv. 6. 39. Sin, to Sin. "Sin," says Archbishop Trench, "may be contemplated as the missing of a mark or aim; it is then afiaprla or afxdprrjfia (auaprdvco) : the over- passing or transgressing of a line ; it is then vapd^aais (irapa^alvw): the disobedience to a voice; in which case it is irapaKo^ {irapaKuvw) : the falling where one should have stood upright; this will be irapdirrwfia: ignorance of what one ought to have known ; this will be ayvdri/xa (Heb. ix. 7) : diminishing of that which should have been rendered in full measure; which is ^TTTjiia: non-observance of a law; which is avofila or irapavofj.ia: a discord; and then it is 'ir\r]/x/x€\eia: and in other ways almost out of number." Note also 6lace. So ayriAvrpov, with the further idea "in room of," denoting e:cehange, the price paid for procuring the liberation of another by ransom or forfeit; A^rpoxris, u'iro\vTpa}(ris, the process of deliverance; tAao-juos, i^i\a(riu.6s, are the same as KvTpov, with the leading idea of propitiation." — W bder. See the use of iKaaKo/jLai in the publican's prayer, Luke xviii. 13; iAao-TTjptoj/, properly an a Ijective, "propitiatory," of the mercy-seat in LXX. and Heb. ix. 5 ; of Christ's sacrifice, Rom. iii. 25; irfpiiroieofiai, TTipiiroirjais, denote acquirements for one's self, purchase, generally, Acts xx. 28 ; i Pet. ii. 9 ; Eph. i. 14. 44. Piety, Religion. Ev(r€&i}s, ev(T4$eia, denote worship or piety rigr/i^??/ directed, in human relations as well as divine; Qeoaefiiis, Beoffe^eia, worship directed towards God; evAajSrjs, euAo^eio, denote the devoutness springing from godly f&ir ; 6p^ "stamp, engraving." 57. Power. Avuafiis, used also of miracles (see 45), inherent power, might ; ^|ow, imply service, ministry, in every form; dtpdnwy is attendant (only in Heb. iii. 5); Bepairtvco (efparrfla) have special reference to healing ; o'lKerris, a household servant, Acts x. 7 (so iroTs, see 62). NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 421 61. Family, Tribe, House. u\r{ is a tribe, as of Israel; iraTpid, a family, in the wider sense, descendants of a common ancestor (oaly in Luke ii. 4; Acts iii. 25; Eph. iii. is; in E.V. different each time); oJkos, oIkIu, both mean household, the former referring to the inmates, the latter to the building and that which ic contains (Soj^o always in the New Testament of the building, with eVi, "house-top.") 62. Child, Infant. TcKvov, child by natural descent (from tIktco) ; TraTs, a hoy or girl, a child in legal relation, also a servant (liuke xv. 26 ; Matt. xii. 18 ; Acts iv. 27, 30); vaiSiov, a young child; $p4^os, a babe; vi^vios (from fij, negative, and eliroj/), a child in power and character. 63. Man. "Av dp coir OS, a man, member of the human family (homo) ; avifp, a man in sex and age (vir). 64. Time. XpSvos, time as duration ; KaipSs, a definite time, with reference to some act or crisis, *' opportunit3^ " 65. Lamp, Light. *«s, light, generally; (pwa-Ttjp, luminary (Phil. ii. 15); A.ifx»'os, a. lamp ( John V. 35), [Kv^via, a lampstand) ; \afiirds, a torch (Matt. xxv. i; Acts XX. 8) ; v, 6 (Heb.), Aaron. 'AfiaSnav, 8 (Heb., "destruction"), Abaddon, Rev. ix. 11. a-Paf,-f]s, c'y (cf. fidpos), loithout weight; hence, not burdensome, unexacfmg, 2 Cor. xi. 9. 'AB^a (Heb. in Chald. form) Father! only as an invocation, Mark xiv. 36 j Rom. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6. "AjSeA, b (Heb.), Abel. 'A^id, 6 (Heb.), Abljah, the king, Matt. i. 7 ; the priest, Luke i. 5. *A$id6ap, 5 (Heb.), Abiathar. 'A/3iAt?i'77, irjs, 7), Abilene, a district in the E. of Anti-Libanus, named from Abila, its chief city, Luke iii. i. A^Lovd, 6 (Heb.), AUud. 'A^padu, 6 (Heb.), Abraham. a.-Bv(raos, ov, 77 (originally adj. bottom- less), abyss; generally, as Rom. x. 7 ; specifically, Luke viii. 3 1 ; Rev. ix. I, XX. I. "AyaBos, ov, 6, Agabus. ayado-epyea}, u> (or ayaOovpyeco), to do good, I Tim. vi. 18. ayaQo-iToieci.', &, [i) to do good, bene- ficently ; ace. of pers., Luke vi. 33, (2) to art wdl, generallj'^. ayaQo-Tzoda, as, 1?, well-doing, in sense (2) of preceding, i Vet. iv. 19. ayaeo-TroiSs, ov, 3 (orig. adj.), well-doer. ayad6s, -f}, 6v {Kp^larcroov, KparicrTos), good, intrinsically or benelicially ; used of both persons and things, rh ayaddv^ goodness; rh ayaOd, goods, wealth, blessings. ayadwavvK), rjs, % goodness; as virtue or beneficence. ayaWiaais, ecos, 7), exultation, gladness. ayaXhiduj, w, daw, to leap for joy ; hence, exult, rejoice; generally de- ponent. Followed by ha. (subj.), eVi (dat.), or 4v (dat.) a-yanos, adj. 6, rj, unmarried, abso- lutely, or in widowhood, i Cor. vii. &yavaKTea), a, •ncrcojobeindignant, angry ^ or vexed. With -n-epi (gen. ) or on. ayavaKT-qais, eais, rj, indignation. ayairdw, S>, ■f]au>, to love. See Synonyms. ayd-K-q, -qs, rj, love. See Synonyms. Object with els, h, or genitive, on which see 254, 5. ay diraL (Jude 12), love- feasts. ayaiTTjTSs, -t), vv, beloved ; of Christ, "the Beloved Son," and of Chris- tians in their relation to God or to one another. "Ayap, 7] (Heb.), Hagar. ayyap^vw, au (from the Persian), to impress into the public service ; hence, to compel. ayyelov, dou, r6, vessel, idensil. ayyeXia, as, t], message. ^776 A OS, ov, 6, messenger ; spec, of God's messengei's to men, angel. So of fallen S})irit3. "Angel of a church" (Rev. i. 20, ii. iii.), either messenger, or elder, or a symbolic representation of the spirit, the genius of each church VOCABULARY. [&7€ — &ym hye, adv. (see &'yai), come now, go to, James iv. 13, v. i. ayehj], tjs, tj, a flock or herd. a-yeu(a-A6yT]Tos, ou, adj., of unrecorded genealogy, Heb. vii. 3. a-yiv-qs, 4s (cf. yiuos), low horn, ignoble, I Cur. i. 28. ayid^w, aw (see ayios), to set apart from common use. Hence to luillow, or regard with religious reverence ; to consecrate to religious service, whe- ther persons or things ; to cleanse for such consecration ; so to purify, sanctify. 01 ayia^S/xePoi, those who are being sanctified; oi rjyiaaixivoi, those who are sanctified. ayiaiT/xds, ov, 6, consecration^ sanctifica- tion. ayios, a, ov, set apart from common use, spec, to the service of God ; hence /lallowed, worthy of v3neraiion, holy, consecrated, whether persons, places, or things, ol ayioi, '■'■ tlte Saints ;^'' Th S.yiov, the Temple; to ay^a, the Sanc- tuary; ayia ayiwu, the Holy of Holies. a.yi6Tr)s, rnros, 7], holiness. ayiioavPT), Tjy, t], holiness. The "Spirit of holiness" (Rom. i. 4) is Christ's Divine nature. ayKaKi], Tjy, 7), the (curve of the) arm, Luke ii. 28. &yKiaTpou, ov, t6, fisJdlOok. ayKvpa, as, r), anchor. > a-yva, i]), (i) not to know, to be ignorant {ayvouv, igno- rant ; ayvoovfxivos, unknown person- ally. Gal. i. 22; ignored, disesteemiid, 1 Cor. vi. 9) ; (2) not to understand, Mark ix. 32 ; perhaps Acta xiii. 27 ; I Cor. xiv. 38. ayv6T]fji.a, arus, t6, a Sin of ignorance, error, Heb, ix. 7. ar^voia, as, t], ignorance, spec, (in X. T.) of xuli;;iou.s subjects. ayuSs, ^, 6v, pure, of God, as i Johu iiL 3 ; of men, as 2 Cor. vii. 11; spec, of female chastity, 2 Cor. ix. 2, &c. ayv6T-(]s, T7JT0S, tj, purity, 2 Cor. vi. 6. a^ftaaia, as, 7}, ignorance, spec, wilful ignorance, i Cor. xv. 34.; i Pet. ii. 15. 6.yvoo(TToz, ou, unknown. Acts xvii. 23. ayupd, as, 7] {aysipoi), a place of public resort ; hence market place or open street; spec, market, Mark vii. 4; the forum, or place of public as- semblies, trials, &c.» Acts xvi. 19, xvii. 17. ay opdXd), (r«, to purchase, buy, with gen. of price, or 4k, once eV, Eev. V. 9; tig. to redeem, ransom; act. of Christ ; pass, of Christians. ay opalos, ou, adj., belonging to the forum; hence {7]fi4pat) court day* Acts xix. 38 ; {6.udpu)Troi) idlers, loun- gers, xvii. 5. &ypa, as, 7] (hunting), fishing, Luke V. 4; met. draught, ver. 9. a-ypdixfxaros, ov, adj., unlearned, i.e., in Kabbinical lore. Acts iv. 13. ayp-av\4(D, &, to remain in the fields^ Luke ii. 8. ay p^vtu, (Tu> (to take in hunting), fig., to ensnare, Mark xii. 13. aypi-4\aios, ov, 6, wild olive, oleaster, Kom, xi. 17, 24. ^ypios, ia, lov, wild, of honey, Mark i. 6; of waves, Jude 13. * Ay piinras, a, 6, Agrippa, i.e., Herod A grip pa Ti. See 'Hpd>^s. &.yp6s, ov, 6, field, spec, the counU-y ; plur., country districts, hamlets. ^ypvitviu, u) {iiirvos), "to be sleepless ;" hence, met,, to watch, to be vigilant "With vTt4p (gen.), Heb. xiii. 17, to watch over; with els, Eph. vi. iS, to give attention to. ay pvTTula, as, 7), watching, i.e., assidtiov^ care, 2 Cor. vi. 5, xi. 27. &y(t), ^w, ijyayov, trans., to lead, bring; with vpds (ace. ), ews, els, of destina- tion ; with iTri (ace), of purpose, as Acti5 viii. 32 ; also in the sense of b'fore, as, e.g., for trial. Hence t spend, as of time ; to kt, w, to be sad or dejected. aSrjs, ov, 6 (d priv. and fiS- in iSelu), t)ie invisible world. Hades ; fig. of deep degradation. See Synonyms. iri/Kai q,Sov, the powers of the unseen world. See TTL'Arj. a-Std Kpiros, ov (James iii. 17), either act., not distinguishing, impartial, or pass. , not distinguishable, or dubit- able, unambiguous, honest. a-Sid-heiinos, ov, without intermission^ unceasing ; adv., -ws, unceasingly. a-Sia-(f)dopia, as, rj, uncorruptness, purity. aSiKfO), u), iierca {&Bikos), intrans., to act unjustly, commit a crime ; trans., to wrong, injure ; hence to hurt, with- out any notion of wrong, Luke x. 19, and Rev. often; pass., to be loronged. dSiKrj^a, aros, r6, a crime. aSiKia, as, r], wrong, injustice, iniquity, absolutely, vnnghtemsness, or in the relations of life ; in man's relation to God, wickedness generally, opposed to diKaiucTvuT]. In Luke xvi. 9, " the mammon of unrighteousness " (d5(Kias) denotes riches, which in their nature are deceitful, transitory. See Synonyms. &'diKos, ov, unjust, (i) absolutely, (2) wicked generally, opposed to SiKaios, as Matt. V. 45, or dxn^-qs, as 2 Pet. ii. 9; adv., -ws, unjustly, un- deservedly, I Pet. ii. 19. a-^6KifjLos, ov (tested, but not ap- proved), (i) reprobate, (2) ivorthless generally. 6.-^oKos, ov, without fraud, genuine, 1 Pet. ii. 2. *A.ZpanvTTiriv6s, 7}, 6v, of Adramyttium, an JEoIian seaport, Acts xxvii. 2. 'ASpfas, a, 6, the Adriatic, embracing the Ionian sea, Acts xxvii. 27. dJporrjs, ttjtos, r}, largeness, abundance, 2 Cor. viii. 20. a-hvvar^w, 6u, to be impossible, withdat., or wapd (dat. ) a-hi'varos, ov, adj., (i) of persons, act,, powerless ; (2) of things, pass,, im- possible. (fSco, &iru) (contr. from deiSco), to sing, with cognate ace, (fhiiv, a song ; with dat., to sing (praise) to, celebrate. aei, adv. , always ; of continuous time, unceasingly ; of successive inter- vals, from time to time, on every occasion. derJs, ov, 6, an eagle, gen. bi)-d of prey, as Matt. xxiv. 28. VOCABULARY. [£Utv|j,os — at, to have a flux or issue of blood. Matt. ix. 20. AiVeas, a, 6, jEneas, Acts ix, 33, 34. aivicis, 6WS, Ti, praise, Heb. xiii. 15. aiveo}, w, ecru and ^ao), to praise, only of God. See Synonyms. aiviyixa, aros, t6, a dark intimation, an enigma, i Cor. xiii. 12. alvos, ov, 6, praise, only of God. Alvwv, ff (Heb.), ^non, John iii. 23. a'lpeais, ews, rj {aipeofiai), cJwice, its act or result ; hence a religious sect or party, party spirit, dissension. alpirl^u), aw, to choose, with preference and love, Matt. xii. 18. aiperiKSs, ov, 6, one who acUifrom party spirit, a factious person, "heretic," Titus iii. 10. aipew (irreg., see 103, i), to take, only in mid. in N. T., to c/toose, prefer. aXpoj (see 92), (1) to takeup, lift, carry, used of carrying the cross, lit. , Matt, xxvii. 32; lig.. Matt. xvi. 24; so of raising the eyes, the voice, the mind; hence to keep in suspense; (2) to take away, authoritatively or forcibly, as to abrogate a law, to remove by death; imp., a?p€, S/Jov, Away with! i.e., to execution ; (3) to take away sin, de- scriptive of the redeeming work of Christ, John i. 29 ; 1 John iiL 5. aladdvofxai, t)s, sordidly. alaxpo-^oyia, as, rj, fovl langvnge, scur- rility. Col. iii. 8. alaxp^s, d, 6v (orig. deformed, opposed to Ka.\6%), base, disgraceful, morally (gen.), or as contrary to usage. al(TXP^''^VS, T7JT0S, 7), prob. obscenity, Eph. V. 4 only. al(rxvvrj, rjs, 7], shame, in personal feel- ing or in the estimation of others, disgrace, shameful conduct. cutrxivoixai, ovfiai, mid., to feel ashamed; pass., to be put to shame, confounded. aireo}, w, -fjao), to ask, require, demand; with two aces., or ace. of thing, and air6 or irapd (gen.) of person; spec, to pray, to desire. Acts vii. 46 ; mid., to ask for one\s self, beg. airrifia, aros, t6, desire, object of desire. alria, as, 7], cause, (i) as the reason or ground of anjrthing; (2) in Matt. xix. 10, the state of the case; (3) forensically, an accusation, a crime. ahiaixa, aros, r6, accusation, charge. Acts XXV. 7. Some read ahiM/xa. airios, ia, lov, causative of used as subst. masc, the cause, author; neut., a cause, reason, espec. of punishment ; a crime, like aWla. aA ^^i i(^ lead captive. alxu--d\oyTos, ov, 6, 7], a captive, Luke iv. 18 (from Isa. Ixi. i). aldv, -vivos, 6 (ael), continuous duration, (i) time limited, an age, as the ages before the Messiah (i Cor. x. u), the ages afterwards (Eph. ii. 7), or gen. in plural, the ages ; (2) the world, considered under the aspect of time, as Luke i. 70, espec. with odros, this world, in contrast with the world to come {6 /xeWav, 6 ipX^fievos), the world generally, Heb. i. 2, xi. 3 ; (3) ti7ne unlimited, the age of eternity, past, as Acts xv. 1 8, future, 2 Pet. iii. 18, especially iu the following phrases : els rbv al&va, for ever, with negative adv. never ; els Tohs aiwvas, a stronger expression, for evermore; els rohs alwuas rwv aldovwv, stronger still, for ever and ever. Phrase slightly varied, Eph. iii. 21 ; llev. xiv. 11. al, to reach the point of perfec- tion; so, of frnit, to ripen, Rev.xiv. 1 8. cLKuriu, ace. as adv., up to this point, hitherto. Matt. xv. 16. aKori], 7?s, 7) {aKoiui), hearing, (i) the sense or faculty ; (2) espec. the organ, the ear; (3) the act of hearing ; (4) the thing heard, as a report, speech, doc- trine. aKofj, dat. , qualifying aKoveiv, "to hear with hearing," i.e., atten- tively. aKoXovQio), a, •fiffa, (i) to accompany, folloio, or attend, with dat. , or fierd. (gen.), or omaw (gen.), espec. of the disciples of Christ; so, met., to obey and imitate; (2) to succeed, in order of time, or retribution. OLKOvu}, fTca or aofiai, pf., aKi\Koa, to hear, (i) intrans., i.e., to possess the faculty ; (2) trans, (ace. or gen.), to hejar, listen to, heed, understand, ot cLKovevres, hearers or disciples. In pass. , to become notorious. a-Kpatria, as, i], intemperance, inconti- nence, I Cor. vii. 5. a-Kpar{]s, fs {KpaTos), powerless, i.e., over one's self, 2 Tim. iii. 3. &-KpaTos, ov {KepdvvvfjLi), unmixed or un- diluted ; hence intoxicating. Rev. xiv. 10. aKpi^na, os, i], precision, strictness. Acts xxii. 3. aKpi&i]s, e'y, accurate, strict ; -as, adv., diligently, accurately, perfectly. aKpi^6a>, u>, dau, to enquire closely (or ascertain exactly). Matt. ii. 7, 16. uKpls, iBoi, 7), « locust. anpoari^piov, iov, n. [iiKpoiofiai, to hear), the place of hearing judicially. itKpoaT-f]s, ov, 6, one wfio listens to, a liearer, Rom. ii. 13 ; Jas. i. 22. &Kpo$v(TTla, as, r), the foresJciti, uncir- CUTUcision ; aKpo^variav exoj/res, un- circumcised; collective ior paga^is or uncircumcised Gentiles. hLKpo-ywviaios, o, ov, belonging to the foundation; with XiQos understood, ^^ foundation stone," ref. to Christ, Eph. ii. 20 ; 1 Pet. ii. 6. oLKpo-elviov, iov, r6, first fruits, i.e., the best of the produce, applied (plur.) to spoils taken in battle, Heb. vii. 4. i.Kpos, a, ov, outermost, pointed ; neut., th &Kpov, the end, extremity, as of a finger, rod, &c. 'AKvXas, ov, 6, (Latin) Aquila. a-Kvp6a}, S), to deprive of power, set aside, as a law. a-KcoK^Tcos, adv., freely, without hin- drance. Acts xxviii. 3 1. i.K(av, ovffa, ov (d, %kuv), unwilling, I Cor. ix. 17. aKdPa(TTpov, ov, t6, alabaster, a vessel for perfume, Matt. xxvi. 7 ; Mark xiv. 3 ; Luke vii. 37. aKa(oveia, as, rj, boasting, show, osten- tation. aha^wv, 6vos, 6, a swaggering, boastful person. a\a\d((o, daw, to raise a cry, or loud sound, as in mourning, as Matt. v. 38 ; of cymbals, i Cor. xiii. i. SL-XdXrjTos, ov, not to be uttered in wordSj Rom. viii. 36. &-\a\os, ov, dumb, making dumb. &\as, aros, t6, salt; fig., wisdom, pru- dence. oAcf^oj, yf/w, to anoint, festally, or in homage ; also medicinally, or in embalming the dead. iAeKTopo-ipwvla, as, ^, the cocTc-crounng, between midnight and dawn. aK^KTotp, opos, &, a cock. The name signifies sleepless. ' AXe^avSpevs, fws, &, am, Alexandrian , i.e. , a man of Alexandria. *AXfiavhpiv6s, i], 6v, Alexandrian, used of a ship, Acts xxvii. 6, xxviii. 11. ^AKilavZpos, ov, b, Alexander. Four of this name are mentioned, Mark XV. 21; Acts iv. 6; Acts xix. 33; 1 Tim. i. 20. hXtvpov, ov, T«{, fine meal or flour. dXifj0€ia — &|iaxos] VOCABULARY. a\-fieeia, as, tj, truth ; generally, as Mark v. 33; espec. , ( i ) freedom from error, exactness, as (2) The Truth, or Word of God ; Jesus is called the Truth, John xiv. 6 ; (3) truthfulness, veracity, sincerity, inte- grity, opposed to ahiKia, Rom. ii. 8 ; I Cor. xiii. 6. o.\7)6i]s, 6s (o, XaQ- in \av6duu), uncon- cealed, true, valid, sure, sincere, up- right, just. 8ee SynonvQis for com- parison with the following. -ws, adv., truly ; in truth, really ; in very deed, certainly. a\.7}eiv6s, 7], 6v, real, genuine, contrasted with " fictitious," " pretended ; " also with "typical," as John vi. 32; Heb. viii. 2, ix. 24. h.\-i\Q). dfieXfO}, a, i](TO), not to care for, to dis- regard, neglect ; gen. or inf. d-fxefiiTTos, ov, without blame, faultless. Adv., -cos, unblameably, faultlessly. a-nipiixvos, ov, free from solicitude or anxiety, secure, easy. a-ixcTa-Qeros, ov, unchangeable. a-fxeTa-Kivr)ros, ov, adj., immoveable, firm, I Cor. xv. 58. a-fj.(Ta-iJ.4\r]Tos, ov, adj., not to be re- gretted or repented ), requital, i Tim. V. 4. &lxTTeXos, ov, 71, a vine, (i) lit. ; (2) fig., as John xv. i ; Rev. xiv. 18. hlxTteh-ovpyos, ov, 6, t\, a vine-dresser, Luke xiii. 7. afiTTfXdy, S3V0S, 6, a vineyard. *Afnr\ias, iov, 6, Amplias, Rom. xvi. 8. i/tuvftj, w, only in mid., N.T., to defend, assist, Acta vii. 24. afi(pi-fi\'r]iTTpov, ov, t6. a fishing net. a/xcpi-evvv/jLi, 4aa>, to put on, as a gar- ment ; to clothe, adorn. 'AficpiiroXis, ecus, rj, Amphipolis, a city in the S. of Macedonia. &fi(p-oZov, ov, n., a place where two ways meet, a street. aficpSrepoi, ai, a, both, only of two. a.-ix'J}fji.r]Tos, ov, without blame or fault, Phil. ii. 15; 2 Pet. iii. 14. &fMwiLLov, ov, r6, a spice plant. Rev. xiii. 13. d-ficafios, ov, without spot; fig., blame- less. *A(xdov, 5 (Heb.), Amon, Matt. i. 10. 'Afiws, 6 (Heb.), Amos, Luke iii. 25. &v, a particle, expressing possibility, uncertainty, or conditionality. avd, prep., lit., upon; in composition, up, again. See 297 and 147, a. ava-^aOfids, ov, 6 (/3aiVa>), steps, stairs, means of ascent. ava-&aiua>, B-ficrofiai, (i) to ascend, espec. to Jerusalem, on Ijoard ship (John xxi. 3), to heaven ; (2) to spring up, as plants, &c. ; used of a rumour. Acts xxi. 31; of thoughts coming into mind, Luke xxi v. 38. ava-$d\\, to drato up, as a net to shore. dj/a-j8Ae7r», (i) to look upwards, (2) to recover sight, (3) to look attentively. dvd-fi\e\\/is, fias, 7), recovery of sight, Luke iv. 18. ava-^odw, S>, to exclaim, cry aloud. hva-^oKi], ris, ri, putting off or delay. Acts XXV. 17. dj'-a77eAAai, to tell, to declare openly, to show forth, confess, foretell. &va-yevvda), w, to beget again. iva-yivwaKo, to know well, to read, espec. aloud, to know by reading; used chiefly in the last sense. oLvayKd^w, daw, to force, to compel by force or persuasion. iivayKalos, ala, aiov, necessary, fit, ser- viceable; also close ox near, as friends, Acts X. 24. avayKocTTws, adv., necessarily or by con- straint, I Pet V. 2. aVttYKT] — a vaXt:< VOCABULARY. 9 hvajKr), 77 J, ^, (i) necessity, constraint; (2) distress, z Cor. vi. 4, xii. 10. ava-yj/wpi^w, to make known, aor. pass., Acts vii. 13. avd-yvccais, eos, rf, reading, whether private or public. hv-ayw, to bring, lead, or take up; to offer up, as sacrifices; pass., to put to sea, to set sail. ava-deiKw/M, to shoio, as by uplifting, to show plainly, appoint, avd-deilis, ews, t}, a shoioing or public appearance, Luke i. 80. dm-Sexo/iat, dep., to receive with a welcome, as guests. Acts xxviii. 7 ; promises, Heb. xi. 17. ctva-St'Sco/ii, to give up, deliver, as by messengers, Acts xxiii. 33. oj/a-Caco, w, to live again, revive. h.va.-Q(\ri(ii, ia, to look or search for with diligence. o.va-C(iivvviJii., to gird or bind up, as a loose dress is ffirded about the loins : fiir. Pet. i. 13. a.va-^a>ivvpiu>, « (Tryp), to re-kindle or rouse up ; fig., 2 Tim. i. 6. a.va-6dx\u}, to thrive or flourish again, Fhilip. iv. 10. ava-Qifxa, aros, r6, a person or thing a.ccursed, an execration or curse. Later form for avdO-rj/jLa, which see. auadefiari^w, iaco, to bind by a curse, to declaim on pain of being an ana- thema. aua-OeaipfCti, w, to look at or behold atten- tively, to consider. avd-6riixa, aros, t6, anything consecrated and laid by, a votive offei^ing, Luke xxi. 5. See dvaSejua and Synonyms. av-aiheia, as, r), importunity (shame- lessiiess), Luke xi. 8. avaip€aa, to consume, destroy, abolish. ava-\oyia, as, rj, proportion, analogy, Rom. xii. 6. ava-XoyiCoixai, to think upon, consider attentively. &v-a\us, ov, without saltness, insipid. avd-Kvais, «ws, 7), a loosening, as of a ship from her moorings ; hence de- parture, 2 Tim. iv. 6. ava.-\v(a, to depart from, as from life, Phil. i. 23 ; to return, Luke xii. 36. 10 VOCABULARY. [avandpn^Tos — dv€K- ay-afiApTTjTos, ov, without blame, fault- less. ava-ij.€v, to await, i Thess. i. lo. ava-fiifivijaKb), to remind, admonish; two aces. , or ace. and inf. ; pass. , to remember, to call to mind; gen. or ace. avd-fivTims, (as, t], remembrance, a me- morial. aua-pedo), (a, to renew; mid., to reneio oneself, to be renewed, Eph. iv. 23. hva-vr], to pervert, unsettle, destroy . dva-iTird(i>, to draw up or back. dvd-aTams, eoos, r], a rising up, as op- posed to falling, Luke ii. 34 ; rising, as from death or the grave, resur- rection, the future state: met., the. Author of tfie resurrection. dva-marSw, S>, to unset-lle, put in com- motion. dva-(rTavp6, to spring up or rise, as the sun or a star; spoken of the Messiah, Heb. vii. 14; trans., to cause to rise, Matt. V. 45. dua-Tie-qfii, mid., to place before, declare, make known. dvaroK-i], 7)$, t), the dawn, the east, where the sun rises; sing, and plur., see 240, a. dvarpfiro}, to subvert, overthrow. dva-rp4(a, to nurse, bring up, educate. dva-s, ^, a pouring out ; hence excess, i Pet. iv. 4. dm-xcpew, S>, to depart, withdraw. dvd--^v^is, fws, T}, refreshment. Acts iii. 20. dva-y^vx, to invigorate, to revive, 2 Tim. i. 16. *Avdpfas, ov, 6, Andrew. hvSpairodia-T'f^s, ov, 6, a man-stealer, I Tim. i. 10. ivSpiCo), i(T(t}, mid. , to act like a man, to be brave, i Cor. xvi. 1 3. *Avhp6viKos, ov, 6, Andronicus, Rom. xvi. 7. dv^p6-, to draw from a vessel, John ii. 8. &PT\7]fji.a, aros, t6, a bucket, John iv. 7, 15. aPT-o€\-fis, h, unprofitable^ serving no purpose. diivri, "ns, rj, an axe, Matt. iii. 9. 6^105, ia, lou, adj., worthy, dtserving of good or evil, suitable (gen.) Adv., -(OS, worthily, suitably (gen.) d^iSco, u, to deem worthy (ace. and gen., or inf.), to desire, think good. d-6paTos, adj., invisible, unseen, Rom. i. 20 ; Col. i. 15, 16. d7r-a77€AAftj, to report, relate, make known, declare. cZ7r-«£7X«, mid., to hang or strangle one- self, Matt, xxvii. 5. dir-dyw, to lead, carry, or take away ; pass., to be led away to execution, to lead or tend, as a way. o-7ro(5euTos, ov, adj., uninstructed, inept, 2 Tim. ii. 23. dir-aipca, pass., to be taken aioay (with aiT6). oTT-aiTeco, to ask back, require, reclaim (with d-n6). dir-a\y€(o, to be unfeeling, Eph. iv. 1 9. ttir-oAAaa-j-w, mid., to remove oneself from, to depart; pass., to beset free (with drr6). div-aXKoTpi6(a, to estrange, alienate (gen.) diTdk6s, % 6v, tender, as a shoot of a tree. cLTT-avTaa, So, to meet, to encounter (dat.) dir-di/T7](Tis, €a>y, rj, a meeting, an en- countering ; els dirdi/TTjcriv (gen. or dat.), to meet any one. a-rraf, adv., of time, once, PhiL iv. 16; once for all. d-Tvapd-^dros, adj., not passing from one to another, not trayisient, uncJmnge- able, Heb. vii. 24. a-Trapa-o-Keuao-Tos, ov, adj., unprepared, unready, 2 Cor. ix. 4. aTrapviofiai, ovfjuti, to deny, disown. diT-dpTt, adv., of time, henceforth, here- after, even now. dTr-apTi(Tix6s, ov, 6, completion, Luke xiv. 28. dtr- apx^, V^, T\i the first fruits, conse- crated to God, the first. a-vas, aaa, av, all, all togetJier, the whole. aTrardca, u, ^aoff, to deceive, lead into error. anaTrj, rjs, rj, that which deludes or deceives, fraud. u-iraTup, epos, 6, t\ {irar-i]p), witJiouJ father, i.e., in the genealogies, Heb. vii. 3. dir-avyoAfia, aros, t6, refiecied splendour, effulgence, Heb. i. 3. air-i7Sov, 2 aor. of d, to refuse belief, be disobedient, d-ireid-ris, 4s, unbelieving, disobedient aTrejAeco,- w, "fjaca, to threaten, forbid by threatening, rebuke. direiX-f], rjs, i], threatening, harshness, severity. &Tr-ei(xi {elfii, subst. verb), to be absent, 1 Cor. V. 3, &c. dire7fii {dfii, to go), to go away, to depart. Acts xvii. 10. air-eiirot/, mid., to renounce, dviowny 2 Cor. iv. 2. d-TTeipacrros, ov, adj., incapable of being tempted, James L 13. S-Treipos, ov, adj., inexperienced, un- skilful, Heb. v. 13 (gen.) d-ir-€K-S4xofJi.ai, to wait for, expect ear- nestly or patiently. dTT-eK-Svoy-at, to strip, divest, renounce. dneKdviTis, eas, rj, a putting or stripping off, renouncing. Col. ii. 11. ttTT-eAaww, to drive away. Acts xviii. 16. a.ir-eXi'yix6s, ov, 6 (^A67X«), refutation, disgrace, disi-epute, scorn, Acts xix. 27. dir-e\fvO(pos, ov, 6, 7], made entirely free^ I Cor. vii. 22. 'ATreAATjy, ov, 6, Apelles, Rom. xvi. 10. dir-eAjrtX«, ffw, to despab; Luke vi. 35; /ATjSef dTreATTi^oi'Tes, rendered, E.V., "hoping for nothing again;" more probably, "not despairing," i.e., without anxiety about the result. air-ivavTi, adv., gen,, over against, in the presence of, in opposition to. d-vepavTos, ov (irepay), interminable, I Tim. i. 4. d-Trepiairaa-Tws, adv. {iripi(nrdci}), loithout distraction, 1 Cor. vii. 37. dvepiTfiriTos, ov, uncircumcised. Acts vii, 51 ; "hearts" so covered as not to obey, and "ears" so covered as not to hear. 14 VOCABULARY. [dir-€pxo|itti — a,ir($-Kpi}xa av-ipxofiai, to go or come from one place to another, to go away, depart; to go apart; to go back, to return; to go forth as a rum jur, Matt. iv. 24. i,n-4xco, to Jinve the whole of, as reward; impers., aTe'xei, it is enough; mid., to abstain from. aTTiaTeco, m, t > disbelieve, to be unfaith- fxd, 2 Tim. ii. 13. oxtCTTfa, OS, ^, unbelief, distrust, a state of unbelief, 1 Tim. i. 4 ; renunciation of faith, apostasy, Heb. iii. 12, 19. i.-Tri(TTos, ov, not believing, incredulous; hence an unbeliever or infidel, faith- less, perfidious; also pass., incredible. a-vK6os, ovs, Tj, ovv, simple, sound ; of the eye, clear-sighted. Adv., -ws, sincerely, bountifully. air\6T7]s, T7JT0S, 71, simplicity, sincerity, purity. airh, prep, gen., from. See 292; and for the force of the prep, in com- position, 147, a. UTro-^aivo) (for ^aiva, see 94, I., 6, d; fut., -fi-ftcro/xai), to go or come out of, as from a ship ; to result, befall. oTTo-jSaAAo;, to throw away, renounce. oTro-jSA-eTroj, to look away, i.e., from all besides ; hence to regard with atten- tion, Heb. xi. 26 ; with etj. a.Tr6-^\riJos, ov, verbal adj., to be throum away, refused, 1 Tim. iv. 4. a.iro-Bo\-fi, vs, 7], a casting away, re- ject on, loss. airo-'yivoixai, to die, I Pet. ii. 24. airo-ypa(f>i}, ^s, 7), a record, register, enrolment, Luke ii. 2 ; Acts v. 3 7. airo-ypdcpu, to enrol, inscribe in a register. aTTo-SeiKi/vfii, to sfiow by proof, demon- strate ; to set forth, designate. &irs, ^, redemption, deli- verance, through paying a ransom, as Eph. i. 7 ; or generally, without ransom, Luke xxi. 8; Heb. xi. 35. airo-Xvu), to release, let go, to send away; spec, to divorce, to dismiss from life; mid. and pass., to depart. airo-uda-aa), |«, to unpe off, as dust from the feet. ajro-v€fiw, to assign to, to give, i Peter iii. 7. aTTo-viiTTw, mid., to wash (one's self), Matt, xxvii. 24. airo-TriTTTO), to fall from. Acts ix. 24. ctiro-TrAoi/ctw, w, to seduce ; pass., to wander from. dTTo-TTAew, evaco, to sail away. dwo-irXvvw, to wash or rinse, as nets, Luke V. 2. dTro-TTviyco, to suffocate, choke. d-iropfu, S> {'ir6pos, resource), only mid. in N.T., to be in doubt, to be 2)er- plexed. dTTopia, OS, 7], perplexity, disquiet, Luke xxi. 25. dirop-piirTta {plirToo, to cast), to th7'0W or cast down or off. Acts xxvii. 43 ; cavTovs understood. dTT-opcpavl^o) (^/j(|)avos), pass., " to be made orphans of ; " to be bereaved, * separated from, i Thess. ii. 17, dTro-(TKivd(ofiai, to divest one's self of. Acts xxi. 1 5. dTro-(rKia(T/JLfL. aros, to {aKia^o)), a shade; met., o. slight trace, James i. 17. diro-(rnd(o, u, daca, to draw out, un- sheathe; to withdraw, to draw away diro-ffTaaia, as, 7], defection, departure^ .apostasy. Acts xxi. 21 ; 2 Thess. ii. 3. diro-ardaiov, ov, t6, desertion, repudia- tion, divorce; met., bill of divorce. diro-a-reyd^co {(TTeyT)), to unroof Mark ii. 4; probably to remove the awning of the courtyard. diro-o-TeAAcu, to send away, to send, as a messenger, commission, &c., spoken of prophets, teachers, and other mes- sengers ; to thrust forth, as a sickle into corn, Mark iv. 29. oTTo-cTTepecw, u3, •i)(j(a, to defraud, abs. ; deprive ofhj fraud, ace. and gen. dtro-iTToK-f], ^s, f., apostleship. Acts i. 25. dir6-(TTo\os, ou, 6, (1) a messenger; {■z)an apostle, i.e., a messenger of Christ to the world ; used of others beside Paul and the Twelve, Acts xiv. 4, 14 ; I Thess. ii. 6; 2 Cor. viii. 23. Christ himself is so called, Heb. iii. i. oTTo-trTo/iaTiXw ((ttJjlio), to provoke to speak, Luke xi. 53. dTTo-(rrp4, to turn avjay ; trans, (witli dir6), restore, replace; mid., to deserty reject, ace. hh 16 VOCABULARY. [airo-arrvy^o) — ^'ApCorrapxot caro-ffTvyica, w, to detest, to ahhor, Rom. xii 9. atro-avviyoiyos, ov, excluded from the synaijogue, i.e., from the rights and privileges of the Jewish people, John ix. 22, xii. 42, xvi. 2. diro'Tdaaco, f», mid., "to set one's self apart from;" to take leave of, re- nounce, send away, dat. o7ro-T6Ae«, «, ccrw, to perfect, James i. 15. dirorierjfii, mid., to lay off or aside, to renounce, Acts vii. 58; E-om. xiii. 12. niro-rii-aa-aco, to sluike off, Luke ix. 5 ; Acts xxviii. 5. airoMvo) (or -riot), riaw, to repay, Philemon 19. diTo-To\fxd(i), u, to dare boldly, Rom.x. 20. diro-TOfjLia, as, 7} {rffivoj, to cut), severity, Rom. xi. 22. diro-rSfxtos, adv., severely, sharply. dno-Tpiirw, mid., to turn away from, shun, ace, 2 Tim. iii. 5. . dx-ovaia, os (i^Trej/ut), absence, Phil. ii. 12. aTrod4yyofjLai, to speak out, declare. dvo-, «, to go away, depart. oLTro-xvpi^oi, to separate, rend away from. d?ro-4/uX«, "to breathe out," to faint, as from fear, Luke xxi. 26. "Ainrios, ov, 6, Appius. "Amriov ^6pov, the Appian Way, a road from Rome to Brundusium, constructed by Appius Claudius Caesar. a-irpSs-iTos, adj. (irpos, ftfii), not to be approached. a-irp6s-KOTro5, ov {k6vtu), to stumble), ( 1 ) not giving offence or causing to sin; (2) not caused to sin, witJiout offence. i-irponuTTo-K-frirrwi, adv., not taken by appearance, impartially, i Pet. i. 17. i-irrataros, ov (vToiu), to fall), without stumbling or falling, Jude 24. irr», y^w, to kindle^ as light or fire; mid., to toudi^ See Synonyms. *Air^to, OS, 71, Apphia, Philemon a; perhaps Philemon's wife. airwOfw, u, airdaw, mid., to repulse, to reject. aircoKcia, as, rj {airSWvfii), consumption, waste, of things ; destruction, of persons; death by violence; per- dition. apd, as, rj, curse, imprecation, Rom. iii. 14. UpOf conj., illative, tlwrefore, tlience, since. See 406. Spo, adv. inter- rogative, where the answer is nega- tive. *Apa&ia, as, v, Arabia, Gal. i 17, iv. 25. "Apa^i, 6 (Heb.), Aram, Matt i. 3 ; Luke iii. 33. "Apa^, ojSoy, 6, Arabian, Acts iL 11. dp-yew, «, to linger, to delay. apy6s, ov (a, fpyov), "doing nothing," idle, inactive, unprofitable. apyvpeos, ovs, a, ovv, made of silver. apyipiov, lov, t6, silver, a piece of silver, a shekel, money in general. apyvpo-K6vos, ov, 6, one who tvorks in silver, a silversmith. ipyvpos, ov, 6, silver; met., anything made of silver. "Apfios irdyos, ov, 6, Areopagus, or Mari hill,a.n open space on a hill in Athens, where the supreme court was held. Comp. "Campus Martins;" "Champ de Mars." ^Apeovaylr-ns, ov, 6, a judge of the Areo- pagite court. ipeffKeia, as, rj, a pleasing, a desire of pleasing. Col. i. 10. apeaKco, ap4aw, to be pleasing to, to seels to please or gratify, to accommodate one^sselfto, dat. ape, to reckon by number, apidfids, ov, 6, a number, whether defi- nite or indefinite. 'Apifiadaia, as, rj, ArhnatJuxa, 'ApiffTopxos, ov, 6, Aristarchus, &pi(rTdM — apxi-o^vctYw-yos] VOCABULARY. 17 api, offo) (2 aor. pass., TjpTrdynv), to snatch, seize violently, take by force; to carry off suddenly. &pira^, ayos, adj., rapacious, ravelling, extortionate. a^f)afid!)v, uvos, 6 (from Heb. ), a pledge, an earnest, ratifying a contract. &^^a(pos, OP, not seaTneJd or sev>n. &p(n]v, iv (or Upcrrjp, ev), of the male sex. &^pr]Tos, ov, a.dj., unspoken, unspeakable, 2, Cor. xii. 4. &^^(i}(TTos, ov, adj. (pdivvvfjii), infirm, sick. apaevo-Koirr]s, ov, m. {&par}v koittj), a sodomite. 'Aprefias, a, 6, Artemos, Titus iii. 12, '^Aprefxis, i!)os or los, 77, Artemis (by the Latins called Diana), the heathen deity of hunting ; also, the goddess of the Moon. She was worshipped at Ephesus as "the personification of the fructifying and all- nourishing powers of nature. " dpre/Jiav, ovos, m. {aprdw, to suspend), prob. the foresail), Acts xxvii. 40. &pTi, adv. of time, now, already, lately, well nigh; with other particles, as 6«s &pTi, till now ; air' &pTL,from now or henceforward. dpTi-yevvrjTos, ov, new- or recently born, I Pet. ii. 2. &p7ios, OV, adj., perfect, complete, want- ing in nothing, z Tim. iiL 17. &pTos, ov, 6, bread, loaf or cake of bread, /00c?, necessaries of life ; fig., spiritual nutriment. apTiLiQ) i&pu), to fit), to sexuon, to flavour ^ as with salt; fig.. Col. iv. 6. *Ap^a|c£5, b (Heb.), Arphaxad. dpx-dyy€^o9, ov, 6, an arch- or chief- angel, I Thess. iv. 16; Jude 9. dpxouos, a, ov, old, ancient. 'Apxe\outs, ov, 6, Archelaus, Matt. ii. 22. dpxVj V5, f., beginning, as of time or space ; the outermost point. Acta X. II. So often absolutely, "the beginning." Applied to the com- mencement of anything. Used of Christ, CoL i. 18; Rev. iii. 14, xxi. 6, xxii. 13. Met., pre-eminetice^ Jude 6. 6.pxo-^, pi-, rulers; mt dpxvs, from the beginning, i.e.,from eternity, from the first, as to any particular thing ; iv apx!?", Mi the beginning, i.€., of all things, or of the Gospel dis- pensation ; €| apxv^, from the begin- ning or from the first ; kot* dp^as, at the beginning, r^v apxhv, originally. apx-'rry^5, ov, 6 {dpxij, dya), the beginner^ i.e., author or leader, captain. apx-tipariKSs, i], 6v, belonging to the office of the high piriest, pontifical. apx-i^pfvs, 4cD5, 6, ( I ) the high priest , so of Christ ; (2) a chief priest, i.e.^ the haad priest iu his class. See I Chron. xxi v. 4-18. apXi-voiixrjv, fvos, 6, the cJdef sJiepherd, a title of Christ, i Pet. v. 4. "Apx'TTTos, ov, 6, Archippus. iLpXi-a-vvdyaryos, ov, 6, '/residing officer of a synagogue. 18 VOCABULARY. [dpxt-TSKTWv — -a-o-uvGcroS apxi-T^KTcov, ovos, 6, a head builder, an architect, i Cor. iii. lo. apxi-T€\(iv7}s, ov, 6, a chief farmer or collector of taxes, a chief publican. apxi-TpiKKivos, ov, 6, a president of a feast. apxo, to reign, to rule (gen.) ; mid., to begin, often with iniin. ; also to venture, attempt, as Mark x. 28. ap^aixivos airS, beginning with. &PX(^v, ovros, S, prop, particip., ruler, chief person, prince, magistrate. ipcDfia, aros, r6, spicery, an aromatic, 'had (Heb.), Asa, Matt. i. 7. d-caAeuTos, 01^, unshaken, immovable. &-a^e(TTos, ov, adj. {(r$€uvvni), not to be quenched, inextinguisJiable. dff€j8e*a, as, ti, impiety, ungodliness, wickedness. See Synonyms. aa-elSew, w, 'fjffio, to act or live impiously, wickedly. d-(re3^y, 4s {ad^ofuu), impious, ungodly, wicked. a-aeXyeia, as, ri, excess, indolence, licen- tiousness, debauchery. &- nearer, very nigh, close by. Acts xxvii. 13. "Affaos, ov, ri, Assos, Acts xx. 13. d-, w [ottSxos), to miss in aim^ swerve from, i Tim. i. 6, vi. 21 ; 2 Tim. ii. 18. aarpairf], Tjs, if, lightning, vivid bright- ness, lustre. itarpdirTQ), to flash, as lightning, Luke xvii, 24 ; to be lustrous, xxiv. 4. &(TTpov, ov, t6, a constellation, star. 'AffvyKpiTos, ov, 6, Asyncritus, Rom. xvi. 14. a-avfxipwvos, ov, dissonant, discordant^ Acts xxviii. 25. a-avv^ros, ov, without understanding, foolish, impious. a-(Tvv6eTos, ov, covenant-breaking, treach- erous, Rom. i. 31. do-(j>dX€ia — avx|i.iip<5s] VOCABULARY. 19 d(T, au, to look intently upon. &Tep, adv., as prep, with gen., without, in the absence of, Luke xxii. 6, 35. ari/xd^a}, cca, to dishonour, contemn, whether persons or things, by word or by deed. arifiia, as, ri, dishonour, ignominy, dis- grace, ignoble use. &-rlfjLos, ov (Tt(U7]), contemned, despjued. arlix6w, S> (or -e'w, Lachmann), to dis- honour, treat with indignity, Mark xii. 4, oT/iis, tSos, T], a vapour, James iv. 14 ; of dense smoke. Acts ii, 19, from Joel ii. 30. &-T01XOV, ov, t6 [TCfivw), an atom of time, 1 Cor. XV. 52. &-Toiros, ov (tSttos), misplaced, unbe- coming, mischievous. 'ATTd\eia, as, r), Attalia, Acts xiv. 25. avyd(a, to shine upon, to enlighten (dat.), 2 Cor. iv. 4. avyf], ris, v, splendour, daybreak, Acts XX. I I. AiiyovffTos, ov, 6 (Lat.), Augustus, Luke ii. I. Compare SeiSocrT^j. avQd5r]s, es {avrSs, ijSo/iot), self-pleasing, arrogant, Titus i. 7 ; 2 Pet. ii. 10. avOaipcTos, ov [avrSs, alpiofxai), of one^s own accord, a Cor. viii. 3, 17. avdevTeoi, u>, to exercise authority over (gen.), I Tim. ii. 12. avXeea, u, "fjaca, to play on a pipe ov flute. au\i], 7js, 7] (So), to blow), (i) an open space, court, fold ; (2) a hall, court, as of justice. av\7)T)]s, ov, 6, a player on a pipe or flvte. Matt. ix. 23 ; Rev. xviii. 22. avKi^ofiai (to lodge in the open air), to lodge, take up a temporary abode. avX6s, ov, 6 {&(a), a flute, pipe, i Cor. xiv. 7. av^dvd), also aij^ca, av^^cro), trans., to make to grow; pass., to arrive at maturity; intrans., to grow, increase. aij^r](Tis, €ws, r), growth, increase. aijpiov, adv. {avpa, morning breeze, &a}), to-morrow ; i] {rj(ji.4pa, sc.) aijpiov, the morrow. av(TTT]p6s, d, 6v, (dry) harsh, austere, Luke xix. 21, 22. avrdpKeia, as, 7], sufficiency, 2 Cor. ix. 8 ; contentment, i Tim. vi. 6. avT-dpKr]s, es (ap/cew), content, satlsfled (sufficient to self), Phil. iv. 11. avTo-Kard-KpiTos, ov, self- condemned, Titus iii. 11. avrSixcLTos, ov, spontaneous, of its own accord, Mark iv. 28 ; Acts xii. 10. avT-6irTr)s, ov, d, an eye-witness, Luke i. 2. avT6s, 7], 6, pron., he, she, it. Properly demonstrative, self, very; joined with each of the persons, / myself thou thyself; with the article, the same; with a dat., indicating like- ness. Acts xiv. I ; I Cor. xi. 5. ctti TO avrS, Kara rh avT6, together, for the same purpose or at the same time or place. See 335. avTov, 7}s, ov, pron. reflex, (contr. for cavTov), of himself, herself, &c. auToO, adv., of place, here, tliere. avT6-(pci}pos, ov {-aip€ — ^XP"* a.ainos, ov, disappearing, not seen, Luke xxiv. 3 1. a(j)-fbpu>y, wvos, 6, " di'augJit," latrine. Matt. XV. 17; Mark vii. 19. a-eidia, as, 7} {ei8ofiat), severity. Col. ii. 23. a6ap(Tla, as, rj, incorruption, immor- tality, I Cor. XV. ; Rom. ii. 7 ; 2 Tim. i. 10; perpetuity, Eph. vi. 24. ^-(pdapros, OP {(p6eipu>), incorruptible, im- mortal, as God, Rom. L 23 ; i Tim. i. 17; the bodies of the saints, I Cor. XV. 52 ; unperishing, i Cor. ix. 25, &c. atp-irjfji.1 (see 112), to send away, as {1) to let go, emit, dismiss, in senses varying according to the obj. ; spec. , to disregard, pass by, send away, divorce ; hence (2) to forgive, very often ; (3) to permit, concede, abs., or with inf., or ace. (dat., Matt. v. 40), or ^va, subj., or subj. alone; (4) to leave, depart from, abandon, leave behind, as at death. a4>iKU€ofjLai, ovfjiai {2 aor., ui\-dpyvpos, oy, not loving money, not covetous, I Tim. iii. 3 ; Heb. xiiL 5. 6.(pi^is, fus, 17, "arrival;" hence depar- ture, Acts XX. 29. kdf-itrTruMi, a.iro(rTi]oo), trans, in pres., imperf., i aor., fat., to lead away. to seduce; in trans, in perf., plup., 2 aor., to go away, depart, avoid, withdraw from (often with and) ; mid., to fail, abstain from, absent one's self. &, », to become useless or corrupt. &-Xjyn(TTos, ov, useless, unprofitable^ Philemon 11. 6.Xpi and ixP*^» ^^^- ^ prep., with gen. , to, unto, as far as, whether of place, time, or degree. &XP^s ov or &XpiS alone, with the force of a con- junction, until. See fi^xp^ &Xvpov — Bap-voipas] TOCABULARY. 21 Sx^po^ owj T<5, cAo^, s^raw;, Matt. iii. 12 ; Luke iii. 17. d-i/'6u5r;s, es, free from falsehood, truth- ful, Titus i. 2. & (cf. ^dpos), in N.T. only pass. ^apeofiai, ovfiai, to be wdghed down, to be oppressed, as by sleep, Luke ix. 32 ; excess or anxious care, Luke xxi. 34 ; calamity or affliction, 2 Cor. i. 8, V. 4; expense, i Tim. v. 16. fiapews, adv. , heavily or with difficulty. Matt. xiii. 15 ; Acts xxviii. 27, from Isa. vi. 10. Bap-6o\ofjLa7os, ov, 6, Bartholomew, sur- name (prob.) of Nathanael. Bap-vriaovs, ov, 6, Bav-jesus, Acts xiii. 6. Bap-iuvas, a, b, Bar-jonas, surname of Peter, Matt. xvi. 17. Bap-vd^as, a, 6, Barnabas, "Son of exhortation" or "comfort." See Tro/Jct/cArj (Tts. VOCABULARY. [pdpos — jSScXvYiJia fidpos, ovs, t6, weight, burden, as of toil, Matt. XX. 12 ; of ceremonial require- ment, Acts XV. 28 ; of authority, I Thess. ii. 6 ; of abundance or ful- ness, 2 Cor. iv. 17. Bap-aafias, a, 6, Barsabas. Two are mentioned, Acts i. 23, xv. 22. Bap-Tifiaios, ov, 6, Bartimceus. fiapvs, e7a, v (cf. )8apo$), (i) lieavy. Matt, xxiii. 4 ; (2) important, Matt. xxiii. 23 ; (3) grievous or oppressive, i John v. 3 ; (^) fierce, severe. Acts xx. 29. fiapv-TifjLos, ov, of great price. Matt. xxvi, 7. fiaa-aul^o) (cf. fidaavos), to examine, as bytortur§; hence to afflict with pain, vex, Juirass ; pass., to be tossed, as by waves in a storm. $aaavL(rfji6s, ov, 6, torture, sharp pain. 0a(TaviaTT}s, ov, 6, one who tortures, a jailer, Matt, xviii. 34. Pdaavos, ov, rj (lit., a touchstone), tor- ture, the torment or sJuirp pain of disease. Matt. iv. 24 ; of punish- ment, Luke xvi. 23, 28. ^aai\da, as, 7}, a hingdom, province of a kingdom, Matt. iv. 8 ; royal power or dignity, reign. rj fiaaiXeia tov 66OV, rod xP^^'^o^i """^^ ovpavuv (the last form only in Matt.), the divine, spiritual ki7igdom, or reign of Mes- siah, in the world, in the individual, or in the future state. viol rrjs fiaai\flas, sons of the kingdom, Jews, its original possessors, Matt. viii. 12; true believers, Matt. xiii. 38. In Eev. i. 6, V. 10, for $a(Ti\€is Koi, the best editors read iSao-iAe/cw, a king- dom consisting of priests. fiaffiAeios. of, royal, regal, i Pet. ii. 9, from Exod, xix. 6. ra ^aaiXna, as subst., a regal mansion, palace, Luke vii. 25. >. fia, eiao) (-cf), to have authority, to reign, or to possess or exercise dominion ; to be fiaaiKevs generally. With iiri (gen. ), of the kingdom ; 4irl (ace. ), of the persons governed. fia(Ti\iK6s, i], ov, adj., belonging to a king, royal; as a courtier, John iv. 46, 49 ; a territory, Acts xii. 20 ; apparel. Acts xii, 21. Fig., James ii. 8, of law, all-commanding. fiaaiKiaaa, tjs, t], a queen. Matt, xii 42 ; Acts viii. 27. jSoffis, eas, rj {^alvw), that which supports the steps; hence the foot. Acts iii. 7. ^aaKaivd), avoo, to bewitch, bring under malign inHuence, ^^ fascinate," mis- lead. Gal. iii. i. $aaTd((o, daw, to lift, lift up; often with the sense of bearing away. Thus, (i) to carry, as a burden, Luke xiv. 27; John xix. 17; sandals. Matt. iii. 11 ; (2) to take on one^s self, as disease or weaknesses, Rom. XV. I ; condemnation, Gal. v. 10 ; reproach. Gal. vi. 17; (3) to bear, as tidings. Acts ix. 15 ; (4) to bear ioith or endure, Rev. ii, 2 ; (5) to take away, Matt. viiL 17 ; John xii. 6. ^d-ros, ov, 6, 7], a thorn-bush or bramble, Luke XX. 37; Acts vii. 30, 35. "The Bush," Mark xii. 26 ; Luke xx. 37, denotes the section of the O.T. so called (Ex. iii.) fidros, ov, 6 (Heb.), a bath, or Jewish measure for liquids containing 7^ gallons, Luke xvi. 6. fidrpaxos, ov, 6, a frog. Rev. xvi. 13. fiaTTo-Koyew, u (prob. from ^ar-, an unmeaning sound ; cf . fidp^apos), to babble, talk to no purpose. Matt. vi. 7. fiSeXvyfia, aros, rS (cf. fiZ^Xvaaw), something unclean and abominable, Luke xvi. 1 5 ; spec, (as often in 0. T. ) idolatry, as accompanied by im- purity, Rev. xvii. 4, 5, xxi. 27. "Abomination of desolation," Matt, xxiv. 15, from Dan. ix, 27, refers to the pollution of the temple by some idolatrous symbol (by Antiochua Epiphanes, afterwards by the Ro- mans) ; whether image, altar, or military standard, is uncertain. pStXvKTOS BXdffTOs] VOCABULARY. 23 ^ScKvktSs, i}, 6u, disgusting, abominable, Titus i. i6. j8Se>vo-(rw, |t«j, to defile, only mid, ; to loathe, Rom. ii. 22 ; and pass. perf. part., defiled, Rev. xxi. 8. fie^aios, a, op, steadfast, constant, firm. fie$ai6w, cD, to confirm, to establish, whe- ther of persons or things. Pe$aiw(ns, 6&>s, i], confirmation, Phil, i. 7; Heb. vi. 16. ^efi7]\os, ov ()8o- in jSotVw, "that on which any one may step"), common, unsanctified, profane, of things or persons. $€Pr]A6(a, 60, to make common, to pro- fane, as the Sabbath, Matt. xii. 5 ; or the temple, Acts xxiv. 6. BeeA-^eiSouA, d(Heb.), Beelzebul, "Lord of dung," a contemptuous play upon Beelzebub, " Lord of flies," the Ekronite deity (2 Kings i. 2), ap- plied to Satan, as the ruler of the daemons. BeAi'oA, 6 (Heb., perverseness, malice), or BiXiap, "Lord of forests" or "thickets," a name for Satan, 2 Cor. vi. 15. ;8eAos, ovs, r6 (fidWu), a missile, such as a javelin or dart, Eph. vi. 16. fieXTLOiP, ov, ovos (a compar. of a-yaQos), better. Adverbially, 2 Tim. 1. 18. Bev-ia/xlv, 6 (Heb., ^e7i = son), Ben- jamin. BepyiKtj, Tjs, ^, Bernice. Bepoia, as, Berosa. Bepoialos, a, ov, Beroean. B-qd-, a Hebrew prefix to many local names, meaning House or Abode of. Br}9-a$apd, as, rj, Bethabara, "house of the ford," John i. 28. Some read Bethany. BtiQ-avia, as, % Bethany, "house of dates." There were two places of the name : (i) John xi., &c. ; (2) on the Jordan (?), John i. 28. See B7j0a/3op(£. BTj0-eo-Sa, as, r], Bethesda, "house of compassion," John v. 2. Br]d-Ke4ix, 7], Bethlehem, "house of bread." BT}d- a a'CSd, tj, Bethsaida, "house of hunting" or "fishing." There were two places of the name : one in Galilee, John xii. 21 ; the other on the east of the Jordan, Luke ix. 10. Brid-fayi], i], Bethphage, "house of ^figs." firjfia, aTos, t6 {0a- in fialvco), a step; a space, with iroSSs, for the foot. Acts vii. 5 ; a raised space or bench, as a tribunal, Matt, xxvii. 19; or throne. Acts xii. 21. )8i7pi/T\Aos, ou, 0, Tj, a beryl, a gem of greenish hue. Rev. xxi. 20. 0ia, as, 7], force, violence. 0id(a}, to use violence; mid., to enter forcibly, with tls, Luke xvi. 16; pass,, to suffer violence, to be as- saulted. Matt. xi. 12. fiiaius, a, ov, violent, vehement. Acts ii. 2. fiia(TT7}s, ov, 6, one who employs force. Matt. xi. 12; of those who were eagerly entering Messiah's kingdom. fii^KapiSiov, ov, a little book, Rev. x. Pi^Klov, ov, t6 (dim. of following), (i) a roll, book, volume, as Luke iv. 17 ; Rev. V. I ; (2) a scroll, a billet, as Matt. xix. 7. 0ifi\os, ov, 6, a written book, roll, or volume. The word means the inner bark or rind, of which ancient books were made, 0L0pu(TK(a i^po-), perf. fiefipccKO, to eat, John vi. 13. Bidvvia, as, t], Bithynia. fiios, ov, 6, (i) life, Luke viii. 14; (2) means of life, Luke viii. 43 ; (3) goods or property, Luke xv. 12 ; I John iii. 17. See Synonyms. Pl6(i), w, to pass onis life, \ Pet. iv. 2. fiicocTis, ews, 7], manner or habit of life, Acts xxvi. 4. fiiaTiK6s, -i], 6v, of or belonging to 'life, Luke xxi. 34 ; i Cor. vi. 3, 4. P\a0€p6s, adj., hurtful, i Tim. vi. 9. fiKd-TTTw (i8Ao)8-), 0\dtp(a, to hurt or injure, Mark xvi. 18 ; Luke iv. 35. ^Xaardvco (or fiXaardw, Mark iv. 27), 0\aaTi)cr(a, (i) intrans., to sprout, to spring up, as a plant or corn ; (2) trans. , to put forth, as buds, Matt. xiii. 26 ; Heb. ix. 4. B\daTOi, ov, 6, Blastus, Acts xii. 20. 2i VOCABULARY. [pXa(r(}>T][i,Ea) — ^pa\(4a¥ fi\aff^r)fiia>, w, to speah calumniously, as Acts xiii. 45 ; to calumniate, speak evil of with ace. or els; often of men or things. Spec, of God, Acts xix. 37 ; the Holy Spirit, Luke xii. 10 ; the Divine name or doc- trine, I Tim. vi. I. ^\cuT), that ought to be put. Boavepyes (Heb.), Boanerges, "Sons of thunder," Mark iii. 17. fiodo, 5) {$0-}}), to shout for joy, Gal. iv. 27 ; to cry for grief. Acts viii. 7 ; to publish openly, to cry aloud; with vp6s (ace), to appeal to, Luke xviii. 7, 38. fior), rjs, 7), a loud cry, James v. 4. fioijdeia, as, rj, help, succour, Acts xxvii. 17; Heb. iv. 16. Porie4w, w, to go to tlie help of, to suc- cour (dat.) ^otidSs, ov, d, 7} (properly adj.), a helper, Heb. xiii. 6. fi66vvos, ov, 6, a cavity, ditch or well. fioK-i], rts, V, a throwing ; \ldov fioXi\, a stone^s throw, Luke xxiL 41. /3oAfC«, fTt», to heave the lead, tofatliom. Acts xxvii. 28, twice. fioKis, iios, rj, a weapon thrown, as a dart or javelin, Heb. xiL 20. B06C 6 (Heb.), Booz or Boaz. fiSp^opos, ov, 6, dirt, mire, filth, 2 Pet. ii. 22. Bo^ftas, a, 6 {Boreos, the north wind), the North, Luke xiii. 29 ; Rev. xxi. 13. fi6w (lit., to act as arbiter in the games), to prevail or govern, CoL iii. 15. fipaSvvu, vSi {PpaSvs), to delay, to be slow, I Tim. iii. 15; 2 Pet iii. 9 (gen). BpaSv-irXo^a, ii, to saU slowly. Acts xxvii. 7. fipaSvs, ela, v, slow, with (Is, James i. 19 ; fig- > of dull compreliension ; dat. of sphere. fipaSvrf)s, rrJTOs, rj, tardiness, 2 Pet. iii. 9. fipaxiof, ovos, 6, the arm; met, strength^ Luke L 51; John xii. 38; Acts xiii. 17. Ppax^s — vdjJLOs] VOCABULARY. 25 ^pax^s, 6?a, V, short, little; of time, Luke xxii. 58; Acts v. 34; place, Acts xxvii. 28 ; quantity, John vi. 7 ; Heb. xiii. 22. Ppaxv 'n, Heb. ii. 7, 9, Jbr a short time, or in a small degree. $pi4>os, ovs, t6, a child unborn, Luke i. 41, 44 ; a babe, Luke ii. 12, 16 ; 07ie in early youth, 2 Tim. iii. 15. jSpe'xw, |«, to moisten, Luke vii. 38 ; to rain, to send rain, Matt. v. 45 ; impers., James v. 17 ; trans., Luke xvii. 20. ^povri], 715, 7], thunder, John xii. 29, &c. Ppoxfi, rjs, 7] (j8pex«), rain. Matt. yii. 25, 27. ^poxps, ov, 6, a noose or snare, 1 Cor. vii. 35. $pvyij.6s, ov, 6, a grinding or gnashing. fip^X^^f I'") io grind or gnash, as the teeth, for rage or pain. Acts vii. 54. 0pv(o, ao), to send forth, as a fountain, James iii. 11. /Spwytto, aros, neut. (see ^i^pclxTKO)), food, solid food of any kind, Matt. xiv. 15; 1 Cor. iii. 2. fipdaifjLos, ov, eatable, Luke xxiv. 41. fipwais, ews, 7], (i) the act of eating, 2 Cor. ix. 10 ; (2) corrosion. Matt. vi. 19, 20; {1) food, Heb. xii. 16; fig., John vi. 27, &c. fivdiCd}, au, to droum ; mid. , to sink, Luke V. 7 ; fig., i Tim. vi. 9. fivQ6s, ov, 6, the deep, the sea, 2 Cor. xi. '25. fivpaevs, ecus (ef ), a shin-dresser,a tanner. Acts ix. 43, X. 6, 32. ^vaaivos, 17, ov, made of byssus, Kev. xviii. 16, xix. 8 twice, 14. ^{)(Taos, ov, 7), byssus, a species of flax, and of linen manufactured from it, highly prized for its softness, white- ness, and delicacy. fiufios, ov, 6, an altar. Acts xvii. 23. r. r, 7, yajxiia, gamma, g hard, the third letter of the Greek alphabet. In numeral value, 7' = 3 ; 7,= 3000. rajS/eaea, ^ (Heb., Chald. form), Oab- hatha ; an elevated place or tribunal, John xix. 13. See MBSarpuTov, Tafipi-fiK, 6 (Heb., man of God), the archangel Gabriel, Luke i. 19, 26. ydyypaiva, tjs, t), a gangrene, mortif ca- tion, z Tim. ii. 17. rcCS, 6 (Heb.), Gad, Eev. vii. 5. Ta8apT]v6s, i), 6v, belonging to Gadara, See TepyeaTjvSi. yd^a, i]s, 7] (Persian), treasure, as of a government. Acts viii. 27. Tc^^o, us, 7] (Heb.) Gaza, a strong city of the ancient Philistines in the W. of Palestine, Acts viii. 26. (The adj. epijjuos, desert, refers to 6d6s. ) ya^o-, ij(T(a, 1st aor. iydix7i(ra and iynixa, abs. or trans, (with ace), to m/irry ; active properly of the man ; pass, and mid., of the woman, with dat., as Mark x. 12, rec. ; but in N.T. the act. also is used of the woman. yafiiCo, or yafiiaKw, to give in marriage (a dauglrter). ydfjLos, ov, 6, mxirriage, spec, a mar- riage feast, sing, or plur. See 240. 26 VOCABULARY. [7(lp— Yf| •yi.p (76 &pa), "truly then," a causal particle or conjunction, for, intro- ducing a reason for the thing pre- viously said. Used in questions to intensify the inquiry ; often with other particles. For the special uses of 'y&p, see 407. yatTT-ftp, rp6s (sync), 7), (i) the womb, Matt. i. 18; (2) the stomach, Tit. i. 12; from Epimenides, "idle bellies," gluttons. y4, a particle indicating emphasis, at least, indeed. Sometimes used alone, as Rom. viii. 32; i Cor, iv. 8 ; some- times in connection with other par- ticles, as aWa, &pa, ef, ei Se fx-fiye, stronger than et 8e /xtj, if othervdse indeed; Kalye, and at least, and even; Kairoiye, though indeed; fnvovvye, yea, indeed ; fjivriye, "to say nothing of,'''' 1 Cor. vi 3. reSecov, it (Heb.), Gideon, Heb. xL 32. Te-eVo, 7JS, ^(Heb., Valley of Hinnom), met., jplace of punishment in the future world. Matt. x. 28, &c. Sometimes with toD ttu^c^s, as Matt. V. 22, Compare 2 Kings xxiii. 10. re0-(T77/iovf), or -vkx, t] (Heb., oil-press), Getlisemane, a small field at the foot of the Mount of Olives, over the brook Cedron. yeiTcov, ovos, 6, t), a neighbour, as Luke xiv. 12, XV. 6; John ix. 8. yeAdoi, w, daw, to laugh, to be merry, rejoice, Luke vi. 21, 25. yiXws, (oTos, 6, laughter^ mirth, James iv. 9. y^fii^a, aw, to fill, with ace. and gen. (also aTr6 or in) ; pass, abs., to be full, Mark iv. 37 ; Luke xiv. 23. 7e/i«, only in pres. and impf., to be full of, with gen. {iK, Matt, xxiii. 25; ace. Rev. xviL 3). 761'ea, as, t}, generation, as (i) offspring, race, descent; (2) the people of any given time; (3) a» age of tJie world'' s duration. y^pta-Koyew, w, to reckon a genealogy or pedigree, pass, with 4k, Heb. vii. 6. 7e»'6a-\o7ro, os, fern., genealogy, N.T. plur., I Tim. i. 4; Tit. iii. 9; prob. of Gnostic speculations on the origin of being. yeveala, uv, rd, the festivities of a birth- day, a birthday. Matt. xiv. 6. yeveais, fws, rj, extraction, genealogy, Matt. i. I. James i. 23 : tS tr p6awwov T^s yeveaews avrov, the countenance of his birth, or, as E.V., "his natural face." James iii. 6: rhv rpoxhv rris yeveaews, the orb of the creation, the whole of nature. yeviri], 7JS, i), birth, John ix. 1. yevrjixa, utos, t6. See yivtrqixa. yivvdw, S>, •i]aw, to beget, give birth to, produce, effect ; pass. , to be begotten, born (often in John, of spiritual renewal). yevvriixa, aros, r6 (in many MSS.7e»^Ata), (1) progeny ; (2) produce generally. Y\g., fruit, result, as 2 Cor. ix. 10. Tevvnaapir (Heb., in Chald. form), Gennesareth {Chinnereth, or Chinne- roth, in O.T.), a region of Galilee, with village or town of the same name. Used of the adjacent lake, as Luke v. 1. y4vvt)ais, €ws, rj. See yeveais. yepyrj'r^s, -fi, 6v, verb, adj., born, brougJd forth. Matt. xi. i r ; Luke vii. 28. 76V0S, ovs, t6, (i) offspring; {2} lineage; (3) nation ; (4) kind or species. Tepyeaw^Sy "h, ^v, or Ttpaa-nvos, Gerge- sene, belonging to Gergesa or Gerasa. The copies vary between these forms and Tahaprjvos, Matt. viii. 28 j Mark V. I ; Luke viii. 26, 37. yepovala, as, t) {yepwy), an assembly of elders, seriate. yipwv, ovTos, t, an old man, John iii. 4. 7eT;ft>, to make to taste, only mid. iu N.T. ; to taste, as abs., to take food. Acts X. 10; or with obj., gen., or ace. See 249, a (2). Fig. , to expe- rience, as Matt. xvi. 28 ; once with grt, 1 Pet. iL 3. yewpyew, w, to cultivate or till the earth. ye^pyiov, ov, r6, a tilled field. Fig., I Cor. iiu 9. ytwpySs, liv, 6, one who tills the ground, a husbandman. So a vine- dresser. yrj, y^s, i), contr. for 7*0 or ya7a, land or earth, as (i) tJt^ material soil, YTJpas — Yoyyvo-fios] VOCABULARY. 27 I Cor. XV. 47 ; (2) the producing soil ; {3) the ground ; (4) land, as opposed to sea; (5) earth, as opposed to heaven, the habitable world ; (6) region or territory. yiipas, {(ws), cos, dat. -a or -et, r6, old age, Luke i. 36. yrjpdaKo}, or yi]pd(a, daw, to become old, John xxi. 18; to be infirm, Heb. \aii. 13. yivojxai, for yiyvofiai. See 94, 8, a, yeyffaonai, iyevdfirjv and €yevr}dr]v, yiyova (with pres. force) and y^yivT]- fiai, to become, as ( i ) to 6egri?i to be, used of persons, to he born, John viii. 58 ; of the works of creation, to be made, John i. 3, 10; and of other works, to be zorought or per- formed. So, to pass out of one state into another, to grow into, to be changed into, John ii. 9 ; often Avith €i'$, Luke xiii. 19. (2) Of ordi- nary or extraordinary occurrences, to happen, to take place, to be done ; of the day, the night, Mark vi. 2; of thunder, earthquake, calm, &c. ; of feasts or public solemnities, to be held or celebrated ; frequently in the phrase koI iyevero, and it came to pass (with Kai, or following verb, or inf.) ; also /x^ yivoiro, let it never happen! or God forbid! (3) With adj. or predicative subst. , to become, where quality, character, or con- dition is specified; often in prohi- bitions, 11^ yivov, fi^ yiveade, become not, as Matt. vi. 16. (4) With the cases of substantives and the prepo- sitions, the verb forms many phrases, to be interpreted according to the meaning of the case or prep. See Syntax. For the distinction be- tween yivo^ai and other copulative verbs, see Synonyms. ylv(i)aKi\, i?s, ^, (1) a writing ; (2) spec, j) ypcuph or al ypcupai, the Scriptures, writings of the O.T. ; (3) a parti- cular passage. ypdtpw, }li(i>, y4ypa &€ov, met., by itte power of God, Luke xi. 20. Comp. Matt. xii. 28. AdhfiavovBi, 77, Dalmanutha, a town or village near Magdala, Mark viii. 10. /ioXfiaTia, as, t), Dalmatia, a part of Illyricum near Macedonia, 2 Tim. iv. 10. ZafidCao, co-5uo, more frequently SdoSeKo, twelve. Acts xix. 7. SeKa-Treme, fifteen, for vetneKaiSfKa. AfKd-voXis, (ws, 71, Decapolis, a district E. of Jordan comprising ten towns. It is uncertain what they all were, but they included Gadara, Hippo, Pella, and Scythopolis. SfKa-reaaapes, a, ay, fourteen. SeKdrtj, Tjs, ij, a tenth part, the tithe^ Heb. vii. 2, 4, 8, 9. liKoros, rj, ov, ordinal, tenth, th StKaroy, Rev. si. 13, the tenth part. SfKaT6w, w, to receive tithe of, ace, Heb. vii. 6; pass., to pay tithe, Heb, viL 9. htKT6s, -fi, 6p (verbal adj. from 5exo/*a')» accepted, Ojcceptdble, Phil. iv. 18 ; Acts X. 3 5 (dat. ) ; propitious, favour- able, Luke iv. 19 ; 2 Cor. vi. 2, from Isa. xlix. 8. ScA-ed^ft) (54\€ap, a bait), to take or entice, as with a bait, James i. 14 ; 2 Pet. ii. 14, 18. SevSpov, ov, t6, a tree. Se^i6'\afios, ov, 6, " holding in the right hand;'' plur., spearmen. Acts xxiii. 23. 5e|i(Js, d, 6v, the right, opp. to apiaTcp6s, the left. 7} Se^id, the right hand ; rh Se^td, the rigid-hand side ; 5e|(3tr liUvax, to give the right Iiand, i.e., ta 30 TOCABULARY. [Seonat — 87]}JLi-ovp-yoi receive to friendship or fellowship. For e/c and h with this word, see 293, a. 54oixai, istaor., eSe^flTji' (3rdpers. impf., cSecTo, Luke viii. 38), to have need of (gen.), as mid. of Sew (see Se?) ; to make request of (gen. ) ; to beseech^ pray, abs., or with et, lyo, or Sttw^, of purpose. Se'oj/, ovTos, r6 (particip. of 5e?, as subst. ), tlie becoming or needful; with iffrl = Set. Plur., I Tim. v. 13. AepjBoios, ov, 6, belonging to Derbe, Acts XX. 4. Ac'pjStj, 77$, 7}, Derbe, a city of Lycaonia, Acts xiv. 6, xvi. i. Sepua, aros, t6 {S4pa>), an animaVs skin, Heb. xi. 37. Sepfidrn'os, rj, ov, made ofshiuy leatJiem, Matt. iii. 4 ; Mark i 6. S^pw, 1st aor., ISejpa, 2nd fut. pass., Sap^aofjLai, to scourge, to beat, so as to flay off the skin. a4pa Sepwy, see ar)p. Secr/uevw, (r«, ^0 6md, as a prisoner, Acts xxiL 4 ; as a bundle, Matt. xxiii. 4. Scafj-eca, w, to bind, Luke viii. 29. SeafiTj, 7}s, T}, a bundle. Matt xiii. 30. SeVjLiios, iov, b, one bound, a prisoner. 5e(T/ioy, ov, 6 (Seoj), a ligament impeding the tongue or some other member. Sea/xoi or (ra) Sefffid, plur., bonds or imprisonment. S€(rfjLo-(pv?T-{)piov, lav, t6, a pnson. SecTjUWTrjj, ov, o, a prisoner. SeaircJTTjs, ov, 6, a foreign lord or prince^ a mastery 1 Tim. vi i ; apphed to God, Luke ii. 29 ; Acts iv. 24, 29 ; Jude 4 ; Rev. vL 10 ; to Christ, 2 Pet. iL I. See Synonyms. SeOpo, adv., {i) oi place, here, hitJier ; used as an imperative, com/> hitlier. Matt. xix. 21, &c. J (2) of time, Rom. i. 13. SeCre, adv., as if plur. of htvpo (or contr. from 5eCp' ire), come, come hither. Matt. iv. 19, &c. Sci/TepaTos, ato, atov, oil t/ie second day, Acts xxviii. 13. SeirrepJ-irpaTos, adj., the second-first^ Luke vi. i. See 148. Scurepos, a, ov, ordinal, second in number, as Matt. xxii. 26 ; in order. Matt. xxii. 39. t^ Seurepov or Seu- Tfpov, adverbially, the second time, again, as 2 Cor. xiii. 2. So e/c Sevrdpov, Mark xiv. 72 ; eV tcjJ Seure'p^;, Acts vii. 13. 5e'xo/tat, istaor., ide^dfi-qv, dep., to to^e,. receive, accept, as from another, Luke ii. a8, xvi. 6, 7 ; as letters, Acts xxii. 5 ; to receive, i.e., kindly, as persons, Mark vi. 11; to bear with, 2 Cor. xi. 16; to approve, welcome, as a doctrine, the kingdom of heaven, &c., Mark x. 15 ; 2 Cor. xL 4. Se'o), to want. See Set and 84ofiai. Se'co, ist aor., iSrtcra ; perf., SdSfKa', pass., 5e'5e/iiat ; ist aor. pass, inf., dedrjvai, to bind together, as bundles. Acts X. II ; to swathe, as dead bodies for burial, John xi. 44; to bind, as persons in bondage. Matt. xxii. 13 ; Mark vi. 17 ; to hinder from going forth freely, 2 Tim. ii 9 ; met. , to compel in any way, spec, to inter- dict. Matt, xviii. 18. SeSe/^eVos t^ Tryfu/juxTi, Acts xx. 22, bound in spirity under an irresistible impulse. S^, a particle indicating certainty or reality, and so augmenting the vivacity of a clause or sentence ; truly, indeed, by all means, tlierefore. Used with other particles, hirKorfy Srrn-ov, which see. SrjKos, 7j, ov, manifest, evident; neut. sc, 4(TTt, it is plain, with Srt, as I Cor. XV. 27. dri\6(a, w, to manifest, to reveal, to bring to light ; to imply or signify, i Cor. L 1 1 ; Heb. ix. 8, xii, 27. ATifias, a, 6, Demas, CoL iv. 14 ; Philem. 24; 2 Tim. iv. 10. Srjfi-rjyopda, «, to deliver a pvJ)lic oration OT harangue; with •Kp65, Acts xii. 21. Arifi-(]Tptos, ov, 6, Demetrius. Two of the name are mentioned. Acts xix. 24; 3 John 1 2. Zi)iJii-ovpy6s, oO, i ('*a public worker"), one wlio makes or is tlie autJior of anything Heb. xi. 10. Sfjuos — ^SittKoa-ioil VOCABULARY. 31 S^fxoi, ov, 6, a peonle; a multitude publicly convened. See Synonyms. S'n^idffios, a, ov, public, common, Acta V. 1 8. Dat. fern., as adv., S7//*oo-iot, publicly. Acts xvi. 37. trivdpiov, iov, t6, properly a Latin word (see 154, a), denarius. d'fi-iroTe, adv. , at any time soever, John r. 4. 8ri-irov, adv., indeed, truly, verily, Heb. ii. 16. Sid, prep, (cognate with Svo, ^i«o; 5is twice), throuyh ; ( 1 ) with gen. , through, during, by means of; (2) with ace, through, on account of, for the sake of See 299. ^la- in composition has the force of through, thorough ; also of separation, division, between. Sia-fiaivo), to pass through, trans., or intrans, with irpSs (person), fls (place). Sia-^dWw, to accuse, Luke xvi. i. Sia-Be^ai6(a, S>, in mid., to affirm, assert strongly, i Tim. i. 7 ; Titus iii. 8. Sia-^Keirw, to see through, to see clearly (inf., of purpose), Matt. viL 5 ; Luke vi. 42. 8idfio\os, ov, 6 {Sia^dWco, orig. adj.), an accuser, a slanderer, an adversary, 1 Tim. iii. 1 1 ; 2 Tim. iii. 3. b Sid- Bo\o5, the accuser, the devil. Equi- valent to the Hebrew Satan. 5i-ayye\\a>, to tell, publish abroad, divulge, Luke ix. 60 ; Acts xxi. 26 ; Eom. ix. 17. 5id-y€, or Sih ye, yet, on account of, Luke xi. 8. 5ia-yipofxai, to pass, elapse; in N.T. only, 2nd aor. part., gen. abs., having elapsed, Mark xvi. i ; Acta XXV. 13, xxvii. 9. Sia-yivditTKw, to examine and know thoroughly, i. e., judicially, Acts xxiii. J 5, xxiv. 22. dia-yvwpi(, to cleanse thorougJdy, Matt. iii. 12; Luke iii. 17. Sia-KaT-f\eyxop.ai, to confute entirely. Acts xviii. 28. SiaKoveoD, «, to serve or wait upon, espe- cially at table ; to supply wants, I Pet. iv. 10 ; to administer or dis- tribute alms, &c. (dat. pers., ace. thing; occasionally abs. ) Of prophets and apostles who ministered the Divine will, 1 Pet. i. 12 ; 2 Cor. iii. 3. iioKovia, ay, ri, management, as of a household, Luke x. 40 ; ministering relief, or the relief ministered. Acts xii. 25 ; 2 Cor. viii. 4 ; ministry or service in the church of Christ, fre- quently. ZidKovos, ov, 6, 7}, a servant, specially at table, Matt, xxiii. 11 ; a servant of God, as magistrates, Rom. xiii. 4; one who serves in the Chmxh, deacon or deaconess, Phil. i. i ; i Tim. iii. 8, 12; Rom. xvi i. See Syn- onyms. SiaKoaiQi, ai, a, card, numb., two hun- dred. 52 VOCABULARY. [Si-aKovci) — 8ia-o-6i(d (Si-uKovo), to Tiear thoroughly, Acts ■sxiii. 35. 5ia-/fpjVa>, to discern, to diMinguish, Acts xvi. 9; I Cor. xi. 29. Mid. (aor,, pass.), (i) to doubt, to hesitate, Matt, xxi. 21 ; James i. 6 ; {2) to separate one^s self from, Jude 22 ; (s) to dis- pute with, Acts xi. 2 ; Jude 9. did-Kpiais, fcos, 7), the act of dvitinction, discrimination, Rom. xiv. i ; i Cor. xii. 10 ; Heb. v. 14. dia-KccXvca, to forbid, to hinder. Matt. iii. 14. ^ia-\a\ia), £, to discuss, Luke vi. 11 ; to spread abroad by speaking of, Luke i. 65. Zia-Xiyw, in mid. , to discourse, to reason, to dispute. Matt, ix, 34 j Acts xx. 7 ; Jude 9, &c. 5ia-A.6i7ra>, to cease, to intermit, Luke vii. 45. 5id-\eicT05, ov, r), speech, dialect, lan- guage, Acts ii. 6, xxi. 40, &c. Si-aAkddaco, to cJiange, as the dispo- sition ; pass., to be reconciled to. Matt. V. 24. Sia-KoyiCofiai, to reason, to discourse, to ponder, to reflect, to deliberate, to debate, Mark ii. 6-8, viii. 16, ix. 33, &c. Zia-Xoyi(rii65, ov, 6, reflection, thought, Luke ii 35 ; reasoning, opinion, Rom. i. 21, xiv. i ; dispute, debate, Phil. ii. 14 ; i Tim. ii. 8, &c. Sia-\vca, to disperse, to break up. Acts V. 36. Sia-napTvpofiai, dep. mid., to testify ear- nestly, Acts ii. 40; to enforce, Acts viii. 25, &c. Sia-fidxofjiai, dep. mid., to contend or dispute warmly, Acts xxiii. 9. Sia-fifvo), to remain, vrith. adj. or adv. ; to persevere, with if. Sia-fiepiCoo, (j) to divide or separate into parts. Matt, xxvil 35, &c. ; to dis- tribute, Luke xxii. 17 ; (2) to be at discord with, Luke xi. 17 ; with ivi, ace. or dat., xii. 52. hM-fifpi(Tn6s, ov, d, dissension, Luke xii; 51. Zia-v4yL0), to divulge, to spread abroad. Acts iv. 17. Sia-veucu, to make signs, by nodding, &c., Luke i. 22. 8iav6T]fxa, arcs, t6, a thought, imagina- tion, device, Luke xi. 17. Sid-voia, as, i), the mind, i.e., the. intel- lect, or thinking faculty , Mark xii. 30 ; the understanding, i John v. 20 ; the mind, i.e., the feelings, disposition, affections, Col. i. 2 1 ; plur. , tJte thoughts, as wilful, depraved, Eph. ii. 3. St-avoLyc0, to open fully, i. e. , the ears, Mark vii. 34, 35 ; the eyes, Luke xxiv. 3 1 ; the heart, making it wil- ling to receive, Acts xvi. 14; the Scriptures, explaining them. Acta xvii. 3. Sia-vvKTepevco, to pass the night through, Luke vi. 12. Si-av6a), to perform to the end, complete^ Acts xxi, 7. ^la-iravrSs, adv., always, continually, Mark v. 5, &c. Sia-nrapa-Tpifii), rjs, t], contention, fierce dispute to no purpose, 1 Tim. vi. 5. Sm-irepcJoj, Si, dffco, to pass, to paS8 through, to pass over. Matt. ix. i ; Mark vi. 53, &c. 5io-7r\6«, fvau, to sail through or over, / Acts xxvii. 5. Zia-irovfoo, &, mid., aor. pass., to grieve one's self, to be indignant. Acts iv. 2, xvi. 18. Sta-irop6i5o)uot, to go or pass through, Luke xiii. 22 ; Acts xvi. 4, &c. hia-Trop4(a, d, to be in great doubt or per- plexity, Luke ix. 7 ; Acts x. 1 7, &c. hia-irpaytiaa-fvoiJMi, to gain by business or trading, Luke xix. 15. 5to-7rpjft>, in pass., to be enraged, to be greatly moved vnth anger. Acts v. 33, vii. 54. hi-aptrd^o}, to plunder, to spoil by rob- bery, &c., Matt. xii. 29; Mark iii. 27. Sux^-^ij-yuvfii and Sia^^-fiaffco, ^a, to tear, as garments, in griet or indignation, Acts xiv. 14 ; Matt. xxvi. 65 ; to break asunder, as a net, Luke v. 6 ; as bonds, Luke viii. 29. SM-(Ta^4u>, CO, to make fully manifest, to tell all. Matt, xviii. 3 1 (xiii. 36, MSS.) Sia-ffciw, to treat with violence, so as to extort anything, Luke iii. 14. Sia-orKOpn-Ct« — SiSaorKoXCa] VOCABULARY. 33 Jiia-arKopTrl(a}, to strew or scatter, Matt. XXV. 24, &c. ; to disperse in conquest, Luke i. 5 1 ; to waste or squander, Luke XV. 13, xvi. i. dia-airdw, ist aor. pass,, Biea-irdaOT]!/, to pull or pluck asunder or in pieces, Mark v. 4 ; Acts xxiii. 10. 5ia-(Tireipa}, 2nd. aor. pass., SieairdpTjv, to scatter abroad, as seed ; so of Chris- tians dispersed by persecution, Acts viii. I, 4, xi. 19, tia-airopd, as, t], dispersion, state of being dispersed. Used of the Jews as scattered among the Gentiles, John vii. 35; James i. i; x Pet. i. i. dia-(TT€?\J\co, in mid., to give hi charge, to comraand expressly ; with negative words, to forbid, to prohibit. Matt, xvi. 20 ; Acts XV. 24. Pass, part., TO hiaareKkSixivov, Heb. xii. 20, tlie command. hid-(TTT]fxa, aros, t6, neiit., an interval of time, Acts v. 7. Sia-rrroAr], rjs, r}, distinction, difference, Rom. iii. 22, x. 12; i Cor. xiv. 7. dM-(rTp€(()a>, to seduce, turn away, Luke xxiii, 2 ; Acts xiii. 8 ; to pervert, to ivrest, Acts xiii. 10. Perf. part., pass,, SieaTpafifievos, perverse, vicious, Matt, xvii. 17. diaad!>Cend, as time. Acts xiv. 3, 28 ; abs., to sojourn, John xi. 54. Sia-rpo^T}, rjs, rj, food, nourishment, 1 Tim. vi. 8. 5i-avyd((o, to shine through, to dawn, 2 Pet. i. 19. 5ia(pavr]s, es, shining through, transpa- rent. Rev. xxi. 21. In some MSS., Siavy-fjs in same signif. 5to-(J)ep«, (i) to carry through, Mark xi. 16; (2) to bear abroad, Acts xiii. 49, xxvii. 27 ; (3) to differ from (gen.j, I Cor. xv. 41 ; hence (4) to he better than, to surpass. Matt, vi. 26, &c, ; (5) impers,, Sto^epet, it makes a difference to (dat.), matters to. Gal. ii. 6, &c. Zia-ipev-yoo, to escape by flight, Acta xxvii. 42. Sia-((>r}iiiCa}, to report, publish abroad, divulge. Matt, ix, 31, xxviii. 15; Mark i. 45, dia-(f)9€lp(a, to injure thoroughly, as rust does, Luke xii. 33 ; to destroy. Rev. xi. 18; to decay, to peruh, 2 Cor. iv. 16. 0pp. to avaKaivow, to reneio. dna-^9opd, as, t}, decay, corruption, i.e., of the grave, Acts ii. 27, 31, xiii. 34-37 (LXX.) 5id-(f>opQs, ov, (1) diverse, of different kinds, Rom. xii. 6 ; Heb. ix. lo ; (2) superior to, Heb, i. 4, viii, 6. Sia-(pv\d(T(ru), to guard carefully, protect, defend, hnke iv. 10 (LXX.) dia-x^ipiCca, mid. N.T,, to lay hands on, put to death. Acts v, 30, xxvi. 21. 5ia-x«p'C<"» P^ss. N.T., "to be sepa- rated," to leave, to depart from, (dird), Luke ix. 33. 5iSaKTiK6s, 7}, 6p, apt at teaching, i Tim. iii. 2 ; 2 Tim. ii. 24. Si5aKT(5s, Ti, 6v, taught, instructed (gen., by), John vi. 45 ; i Cor. ii. 13. SiSafTKaXto, as, v, teaching, i.e., (i) tJie manner or art of teaching, Roia. 34 VOCABULARY. [8 iSdo-KoXos — 8 CKr\ xii. 7, &c. ; or (2) tJie doctnne taught, precept, instruction. Matt. xv. 9, &c. 5i5££(T/coA.os, ov, 6, a teacher, master; often, "teacher of the law," Luke ii. 49 ; a censor, James iii. i ; spe- cially of Christ the Teacher. iiSdcTKco, SjSo^o), to teach, to be a teacher ; abs., to teach, with ace. of pers., generally also ace. of thing; also with inf. or on. SiSaxh, vs, 7], doctrine, teaching, i.e., (i) the act, (2) the mode, or (3) the thing taught. With obj. gen., per- haps, in Heb. vi. 2. See 260, b (6), note. St'-Spox^ov, ov, T(J{prop. adj., sc. vSixurfia, coin), a double drachma, or silver half-shekel (in LXX, th^. shekel), Matt, xviL 24. AiSv/tos, 1), ov, double, or twin; a, sur- name of Thomas the apostle, John xi. 16, &c. SiScD/xi, to give (ace. and dat. ) Hence, in various connections, to yield, de- liver, supply, commit, &c. When used in a general sense, the dat. of pers. may be omitted, as Matt. xiii. 8. The thing given may be expressed by 4k or ottJ, with gen. in a parti- tive sense instead of ace. So Matt. XXV. 8 ; Luke xx. 10. The purpose of a gift may be expressed by inf., as Matt. xiv. 16 ; John iv. 7 ; Luke i. 73- See 107, 278. Si-eyeipw, to wake up thoroughly, Mark iv. 38 ; to excite, as the sea by the wind, John vi. 18 ; fig., to arou^Cy 2 Pet. L 13. 8t-6|-oSos, ov, 71, lit., **a crossway of exit ;" so, a meeting-place of roads, a public spot in a city. Matt. xxii. 9. Si-fpfiTjvevrrjs, ov, 6, an interpreter. Zi-ep(ir)vivu, to interpret, explain, Luke xxiv. 27 ; Acts ix. 36. Si-epxoiJixu, to pass through, ace. or Siet (gen.), destination expressed by «s or €«y ; to pass over or travel, abs., Acts viii. 4 J to spread, as a report, Luke V. 15. 8t-€pwTaa>, w, to find by inquiry. Acts x. 17 II €Tr,s, h (S/y), of two years, Matt, ii, 16. Si-eria, as, t], the sjyace of two years. Acts xxiv. 27, XX viii. 30. Si-rj-yeofiai, ovfxai, to lead through, to recount perfectly, to declare tJie whole of a matter, Luke ix. 10. Sii)yr)a-i5, ecus, 7], narrative or history, Luke i. I. 8i-7]veKi]s, €s, continuous, perpetual, els rh diTjveKes, adverbial, /or* ever, Heb. x.^ I, 14. Si-ddXaararos, ov (5ts), washed by the sea on two sides. Acts xxvii. 4 1. 5i-iKv4ofiai, ovficu, to pass through, as a sword piercing, Heb. iv. 12. 8i-ia-T7)p.i, to put apart, to interpose; in time, Luke xxii. 59 ; by space, Acts xxvii. 28. Si-i(rxvpl(ofiat, to affirm strongly. Acts xii. 15. diKcuo-Kpiffia, as, tj, just judgment, Rom. ii. 5 SUaios, aia, ov, just, right, Mark vi. 20 ; upright, righteous, Luke i. 6 ; impar- tial, as a judge, 2 Tim. iv. 8 ; Tnght with God. Applied to things, to per- sons, to God, John xvii. 25. Adv., ■ws, justly, deservedly. See Synonyms. ZiKaioaivri, ijs, tj, righteousness, justice. Acts xvii. 3 1 ; rectitude, righteous- ness. Matt. vi. 33 ; goodness -gene- rally, Matt. vi. I ; justification, Kom. V. 17, 21, as ZiKaittffis. SiKaiSu, «, *' to make just," generally in N. T. in the declarative sense ( i Tim- iiL 16; Rom. iii. 4, LXX. ) ; spe- cially, to hold guiltless, to justify. Matt. xii. 37 ; I Cor. iv. 4 ; to pro- nounce or treat as righteous, Kom. iii. 20, 26, 30, &c. SiKalwfxa, aros, r6, a righteous decree or statute, Rom. i. 32,' es])ecially a decree of acquittal; opp. to KaraKpifxa, condemnation, Rom. v. j 6 ; a righteous act, Rom. v. 18 ; Rev. xix. 8. SiKaiuffis, eus, 7}, acquittal, justification, Rom. iv. 25, V. 18. HiKaffT-fts, ov, d, a judge, Luke xiL 14 ; Acts vii. 27. SiKTj, 7JS, 7], a judicial sentence. Acts XXV. 1 5 ; punishment, 2 Thess. i. 9 ; vengeance, the name of a heatJien deity. Acts xxviii 4. 8£ktuov — 8ovXtj] VOCABULARY. 35 SIktvov, ov, to, a fishing net. ^i,-K6-yos, ov (5i$), double-tongued, deceit- Jul, 1 Tim. iii, 8. lio, conj. (S.ct aud o), therefore, on which account, wherefore. St-o5eu«, to journey or jiass through, Luke viii. i ; Acts xvii. i. di6-7rep, conj., for this very reason, i Cor. viii. 13. Aio-ireriis, e's, fallen from Zeus or Ju- piter, Acts XIX. 35. Zi-6pdoo(n$, €us, Tj, an amendment, re- formation, Heb. ix. to. Si-opva-acD, io), to dig through. Matt. VI. 19, xxiv. 43. Ai6(T-Kovpoi, uv, oi (children of Zeus), Castor and Pollux, Acts xxviii. 1 1. Si-6ti, conj. ( = Sia toOto, on), where- fore, on this account, because, for. ALo-rpe^ijs, ovs, d, JJiotrephes, 3 John 9. SiirXoos, Otis, ij, ovv, double, twofold, 1 Tim. V'. 17 ; comp., dnrXdrepos with gen., Matt, xxiii. 15. SiTTAJo), u, to double, Kev, xviii. 6. Sis, adv., twice. Ais, obsolete nom. for ZeiJs, gen. Ai6s, ace. Aia, Zeus or Jupiter. Siff-Tctfw, , u, to deceive. Impf., 3rd pers. plur., iSoMovaav, an Alexandrian form from LXX. , Rom. iii. 1 3. d6\o5, ov, 6, fraud, "deceit, craft, 2 Cor. xii. 16. Bo\6u}, &, to falsify, adulterate, 2 Cor. iv. 2. S, "favourable estima- tion"), (1) honour, glory, yielded to God ; manifestation of character, as of God, Kom. iii. 7 ; applause, given to men; sple*ndour, lustre, dazzling light, al h6^ai, dignities, on earth or in heaven, 2 Pet. ii. 10 ; Jude 8 ; future glory, Horn. ii. 7, 10. So^d^o), (r«, to ascribe glory to, tohonour, glorify. AopKOLs, dSos, 7), Dorcas, Acts ix. 36, 39. S6ais, ecus, t], a giving, Phil. iv. 15 ; a gift, James i. 17. 8(^T7js, ou, 6, a giver, 2 Cor. ix. 7. Soi/A-a7, u, to bring into subjection^ I Cor. ix. 27. 8ouA€ta, OS, T), slavery, bondage. SouKevw, aa>, {i) to be a slave, absolutely; (^) to be subject to, to obey, dat. SouArj, T}s, 7], a handmaid, a female slojve. 36 VOCABULARY. [8ovXos — lav dovKos, ov, 6, (i) a slave, i.e., one of servile condition; (2) a servant of any one, correlative to Kvpms. See Synonyms. Sov\6(o, u, (ixTca, to reduce to bondage (ace. and dat.) ; pass., to he held subject to. Sox^i?, ^s, 17 (56X''A*«0> "a receiving of guests," a banquet, Luke xiv. 13. SpaKCDv, ovTos, 6, a dragon or huge ser- pent ; symb. for Satan, Rev. xii. Spdcrffoficu, dep., to grasp, take, catch; ace, I Cor. iii. 19. SpaxfJ-'fi, V5, V, cb drachma, an Attic silver coin equal to the Roman denarius, or worth between sevenpence and eightpence of our money, Luke xv. 8. Spe/xca, obs. (see rpdxco), to run. Zpitravov, ov, r6, a sickle or pruning- hook, Mark iv. 29 ; Rev. xiv. 14. TipSfios, ov, d, "a racecourse;" fig., course, career. ApovaiWa, tjs, t], Drusilla, Acts xxiv.24. dvi/aficu, dep. (see 109, b, 1 ), to be able, abs., or with inf. (sometimes omitted) or ace. ; to have a capacity for ; to be strong, as i Cor. iii. 2 ; to have power to do, whether through ability, dis- position, permission, or opportunity. Zivu^is, 6«s, ?7, (i) power, might, abso- lutely or as an attribute ; (2) power over, expressed by etj or M (ace), ability to do; (3) axrcise of power, miracle ; (4) forces, as of an armj'-, spoken of the heavenly hosts, as Matt. xxiv. 29 ; (5) force, as of a word, i.e., significance, i Cor. xiv. 11. See Synonyms. Zvva4Ji6w, «, to strengthen, confirm, CoL i. II. 5i/j^d, to insert, as a bud or graft; fig., Hom. xi. 17, &c. ey-K\r)iJLa, aros, t6, a charge or accusa- tion. iy-Kop.fi6o/xat, ovfiai, to clothe, as with an outer garment tied closely with knots, I Pet. v. 5. iy-Koni], ris, 7], om> impediment. iy-KSiTTw, ^(1), istaor,, eje/coi/zo, to inter- rujyt, to hinder {a.cc., or inf. with roO). iy-Kpdreia, as, rj, self-control, tempe- rance, continence. iy-KpaTivojxai, dep,, to restrain one\s self, in sensual pleasures ; to be temperate. iy-Kpar-fis, 4s, having power over, self- controlled, temperate, abstinent. iy-Kplvco, to adjudge or reckon, to a particular rank (ace. and dat,), 2 Cor, X. 12, iy-KpvTTTco, to hide in, to mix with, as leaven with meal. ^y-Kvos, ov, pregnant, Luke ii. 5. iy-Xp'^(o, to rub in, anoint, Rev. iii. 18. iyd>, pron., pers., /; plur., ^^els, we. See 53. ida(pi(co, fut. (Attic), -i£>, to lay level with the ground, to raze, Luke xix. 44. ebacpos, ovs, t6, the ground, Acts xxii. 7. eSpoios, aia, aiov, stedfast, firm, fixed. fdpaicofjLa, aros, t6, a basis, stay, sup' port, 1 Tim. iiL 15. 38 VOCABULARY. ['EtcKias — dpTjviKos 'ECeKias, ov, 5, ffezehiah, Matt. i. 9. i0e\o-6p7jcrKela, as, 7], vMl-worshipy Col. ii. 23 (see dprja-Kela). 4e€\(a. See 0e'A«. idiC'jo, to accuj^tom ; pass., perf. part., neut., T^ eldifffMevov, the accustomed practice, the custom. ieydpxn^, ou, 6, a pre/net, lieutenant- govei-nor, ethnarch, 2 Cor. xi. 32. eeviK6s, -f), 6y, national, of Gentile race, heathen. Adv., -ws, heathenly, after the manner of heathens. cdyos, 01/9, t6, the people of any country, a nation, rh idv% the nations, the heathen world, the Gentiles. €005, ovs, t6, a usage, custom, manner. ido), pf., ftuQa, to be accustomed, rh ilwdhi ai/T^, his custom, Luke iv. 16 j Acts xvii. 2. €j, a conditional conjunction (see 383), if, since, though. After verbs indi- cating emotion, el is equivalent to Srt, Mark xv. 44, As an interro- gative particle, d occurs in both in- direct and direct questions, Mark XV. 45 ; Acts i. 6. In oaths and solemn assertions, it may be rendered by that... not. u firf and ei fxiin, unless, except, d Se fi-f], but if not, otherunse, J ohn xiv. 2. et Trtp, if so be. el iroos, if possibly. €tT€.,.e?Te, whether ...or. flSos, ovs, r6, (1) outward appearance, 2 Cor. V. 7; (2) foi'm, aspect, John V. 37 ; (3) species, kind, i Thess. V. 22. filw, obs. See bpda, olBa. fl8u\€7ov, ov, t6, an idoPs temple, i Cor. viii. 10. tl8wK6-6vTos, ov, sacrificed to idols ; used of meats, as Acts xv. 29. €i5a'A.o-AaTp6ia, as, 77, idolatry. flSwXo-XdrpTjs, ov, 6, an idolater. eUtaXop, ov, t6, an idol, a false god worshipped in an image. elKtj or flicp, adv., (1) without purpose ; Rom. xiii. 4 ; (2) in vain, i Cor. XV. 2. ttKoai, indec, num., twenty. etKw, to give way, to yield. Gal. ii. 5. «iK«, obs., whence 2nd perf. Hoiko, to resemble; with dat., James i, 6, 23. etKcSr, 6vos, rj, o-n image, copy, repre- sentation, likeness. elXiKpipeia, as, t], clearness, sincerity. ilhiKplvi]s, 4s, sincere, pure, without spot or blemish (perhaps from dXi,, sun- light, and Kfjiva, tojiulge, " capable of being judged in the light"). ftxla-aoo, to roll together, as a scroll, Rev. vi. 14. elfti (see 110), a verb of existence, (i) used as a predicate, to be, to exist, to happen, to come to pass ; with an infin. following, iari, it is convenient, proper, &c., as Heb. ix. 5; (2) as the copula of subject and predicate, simpl}' to be, or in the sense of to be like, to represent, John vi. 35; Matt, xxvi. 26 ; I Cor. X. 4. With parti- ciples, it is used to form the "re- solved tenses," as Luke i. 22, iv. 16; Matt. xvi. 19, &c. With gen., as predicate, it marks quality, posses- sion, participation, &c. ; with dat, property, possession, destination, &c. For its force with a prep, and its case, see Syntax of Prepositions. The verb, when copula, is often omitted. Participle, &v, being ; rh 6v, that which is; ol vvrts, rh ovra, persons op things, tJiat are. This also is often omitted. el(xi, to go, in some copies for ei/t/, in John vii. 34, 36. cIvcKO, -€v, for ei/ewo, -fv. ftirep, uirus. See in ei. fJirov (see 103, 7), from obs. ?7r«, or ft-KU), to say; interrogatively, to enquire. Acts viii. 30; or in reply, to ansv}er, Mark xv. 34. In narra- tion, to tell. Matt. viii. 4; in pre- dictions, to foretell, Mark xiv. 16; in authoritative directions, to bid or command, Luke vii. 7. *lpr\vivfa, to have peace or to be at peace. flpi]vrj, r}s, fi, peace, the opposite of dissension or war ; peace of mind, arising from reconciliation with God; health, prosperity, every good, tem- poral and spiritual. Often employed in salutations, as in Heb. flpriviK6s, ii, 6v, (i) peaceable, James €lpTJVO-irOll« €K-8l«K«] VOCABULARY. 39 iii, 17 ; {z) peaceful, wholesome, Heb. xii. 1 1. clprjvo-iroieo}, a, to make peace, reconcile, Col. i. 20. flprjvo-TTotSi, ov, 6, a peacemaker, one disposed to peace, Matt. v. 9. fls, prep, governing ace., into, to (the interior). See 124, 298. In cona- position, it implies motion into or towards. (h, fila, fv, a card, num., one; used distributivfilv Matt. xx. 21 ; by- way of ^siiphasis, Mark ii. 7 ; and \:. indefinitely, Matt. viii. 19. Conip. ^ Mark xii. 42. As an ordinal, the first. Matt, xxviii. i ; Rev. ix. 12. elff-aryd), 2nd aor., ^lariyayov, to bring m, introduce. il, to dojusti e to, avenge (ace. ) ; to defend (ace. and a.n6), Luke xviii. 5 ; to punish, 2 Cor. x. 6 ; to demand requital for (ace), /rom (ex or a.ic6). Rev. vi. 10. iK-UK-qcTis, eojs, rj, an avenging, vindi' cation, punishment, Luke xviii. 7 ; Rom. xii. 19. cK-Si/coy, ov, 6, f), an avenger, one who adjudges a culprit (dat. ) to punish- ment for {iTfpi) a crime, Rom. xiii 4 ; I Thess. iv. 6. iK-SidoKw, to persecute, to expel by perse- cuting, Luke xi 49 ; i Thess. ii 15, 40 VOCABULARY. [Ik-Sotos — ^K-irXT^pworis 4K-d6T05, Of, delivered up. Acts ii. 23. iK-5oxv, vs, 7], a toaitingfor, expectation, Heb. X. 27. ^K-Svu, to vnclcthe, to strip off (two aces. ) iKei, adv., there, thither. iK€7eev, adv., from that place, thence. iKeivos, 7], 0, pron., demons., that, tliat one there ; used antithetically, Mark xvi 20, and by way of emphasis, Matt. xxii. 23. See 338, 340. ^Kelcre, adv., thither, in const, prceg.. Acts xxii. 5. iK-Cv"^^, ^i ^^ *66^ 0M« with diligence ; to seek for, e.g., God, or to turn to him, Rom. iii. 11 ; to require, judi- ciaUv, Heb. xi. 6; Luke xi. 50, 51. iK-6aiJ.^4ca, w, N.T. pass., to be amazed, greatly astonished, Mark ix. 15. eK-dafi^os, ov, surprised, greatly atnazed. Acts iii. II. eK-6cros, ov, cast out, exposed to perish. Acts vii. 19. iK-Kadalpw, ist aor., (leKddapa, to purge out, to cleanse, i Cor. v. 7 ; 2 Tim. ii. 4. iK-Kaiw (f), to burn vehemently, as with lust, E,om. L 27. 4K-KaK€a}, w (see iyKOuceto), to faint, to despond through fear. iK-K€vr4o}, a>, to pierce through, to trans- fix, John xix. 37 ; Rev. i. 7. 4K-K\dQ>, to break off as branches from a stem. iK-K\eico, aw, to shut out, Rom. iii. 27 ; Gal. iv. 27. iKKhrjaia, as, rj {eKKoXeia), an assembly, a congregation ; legally called, Acts xix. 39 ; or tumultuously gathered. Acts xix. 32, 40. In a Christian sense, the Church as a whole, or a church in one place, i Cor. xii. 28 ; Acts xi. 26. So often plural, as Acts XV. 41. iK-K\lvca, to decline, turn away from {and). iK-Ko\vn$dw, w, to mdm out or away. Acts xxvii. 42. iK-Kofii^w, to carry out to burial, liuke vii. 12. iK-K&mm, (1) to cut down or off, as a tree or a branch, Luke iiL 9 ; or as a limb, Matt. v. 30; (2) fig., to hinder, as prayer from being effec- tual, I Pet. iii. 7. CK-Kpefiafiai (mid. of eKKpe/Juivvvni), to hang upon, or to be earnestly atten- tive to, Luke xix. 48. eK-\a\4o), &, to speak out, to disclose (dat. and '6ti), Acts xxiii 22. iK-\oiiiira>, to shine out or brightly. Matt, xiii. 43. €K-\avddf(i), in mid., to forget entirely, Heb. xii. 5. iK-\fy(o, mid. in N".T., ist aor., eje- \e^dfji.T{v, to cjioose out for one's self, to elect. €K-\eliru, 2nd aor., i^ekiirou, to fail, to cease, to die, Luke 1. 6, 9 ; Heb. i. 12. €K\eKT6s, i], 6v, (i) chosen, elect; (2) choice, approved. cKXay-f), 7js, T), a choice, selection. Acts ix. 15; the chosen ones, Rom. xi. 7. eK-Kvtt), in pass, or mid., to become weary in body, or despondent in mind. ^K-fxdaaw, |«, to wipe, to wipe dry, John xi. 2. €K-fivKTT]piC(i), to deride, intensively ; to scoff at (ace.) eK-v€(t> (eva-co), to withdraw, John v. 13. iK-vf)(a, to awake, as from a drunken sleep, I Cor. xv. 34. kKovaios, ov (€/cc6v), voluntary, spon- taneous. Adv., -CDS, willingly, of one^s own accord. tK-TraXoA, adv., of old, of long standing, 2 Pet. ii. 3. ^K-veipd^w, (Tw, to put to the test, to make trial of, to tempt. Matt. iv. 7 ; I Cor. X. 9. 4K-ir4fiira>, to send out or forth, Acts xiiL 4. iK-irerdi/vvfii, ist aor., i^eveToura, to stretch forth, as the hands in suppli- cation, Rom. X, 21 (LXX.) eK-viTTTw, (1) to fall from (iK) ; spoken of stars, Mark xiiL 25 ; of flowers, James i. 11 ; of a ship falling or driven from its course. Acts xxv-ii. 17 ; (2) fig., of moral lapse, as Gal. v. 4 (g''^) ; (3) to fail, abs., i Cor. xiiL 8. €Kir\4a>, fvaw, to sail out, to sail from {an6, fls): 4K-ir\np6tt), to fulfil entirely. Acts xiiL 3*. iK-'ir\i}pwai5, ews, ^, entire fulJilmenU iK-irX^o-trcD — €Xa<{>p<$s] VOCABULARY. 41 iK-TrK-fjaarw, 2nd aor. pass., i^eir\dy7]v, to strike xoith astonishment. iK-TTuitt), evao), to breathe out, as the spirit ; to expire, to die. iK-iropevofxai, dep., to go out {airh, ck, •napd, and ets, i-Tri, irf)6s) ; to proceed from, as from the heart; or as a river from its source, &c. iK-Tropv€vw, to be given, up to lewdness, Jude 7. iK-TTTvcD, to reject as distasteful, Gal. iv. 14 ; to loathe. €/c-pt^(^co, a>, to root out or root up, Matt, xiii. 29, XV. 13 ; Luke xvii. 6 ; Jude 12. eK-a-raais, etas, rj, "ecstasy," (1) trance. Acts X. 10; (2) overwhelming asto- nishment, Mark v. 42. iK-arpeclxa, perf. pass., i^effTpafifiai, to turn out of a place, to corrupt, to pervert. Tit. iii, 11. iK-Tapdacrco, ^co, to agitate greatly. Acts xvi. 20. ^K-nivw, vS), ist aor., i^ereiva, to stretch out, as the hand ; to throw out, as anchors from a vessel, Luke v. 1 3 ; Acts xxvii. 30. e/c-TeAew, u, eaoo, to complete, Luke xiv. 29, 30, iK-reveia, as, v, intentness. Acts xxvi. 7. iK-T€vy}s, 4s, intense, vehement, Jervent. Adv., -us, intensely, earnestly. 4k- revea-repov, comp. as adv. , more ear- nestly, Luke xxii, 44. €K-ridr]fxi. (see 107), (i) to put out or expose, as was the infant Moses, Acts vii. 21; (2) to teach fully or accu- rately, to expound. Acts xvdii. 26. iK-Tivdaaoj, |co, to shake off, as dust from the leet. Matt. x. 14. 6KT0S, 7], ov, an ox'd. num., sixth. €kt6s, adv., generally as prep., with gen., without, besides, except, ixrhs €t fJl, nevertheless except, i Cor. xiv. 5, &c. eK-rpeiroD, to turn from, to forsake, I Tim. V. 15. iK-Tpi(po}, (i) to nourish, sustain, Eph. V. 29 ; (2) to educate or train up, Eph. vi. 4. eK-rpufia, aros, r6, an abortive birth, an abortion, 1 Cor. xv. 8. iK-(a, to carry outf as to burial, Acts V. 6 ; or as sick persons ; to produce, spoken of the earth, Heb. vi. 8. eK-^evyw, to flee out from, escape (abs., or with €«) ; to avoid (ace.) iK-(l>o^i(o, a>, to terrify g^-eatly, 2 Cor. x, 9. ^K-(po^os, ov, frightened, Mark ix. 6 ; Heb. xii. 21. €K-(pv(a, 2nd aor. pass., i^evTty, to put forth, as a tree its leaves, Matt. xxiv. 32. €/c-xew, also eKxvvu ; fut., ckx^w ; ist aor., e^e'xea (see 96, c), to pour out, as wine spilled, Luke v. 37; as money thrown down, John ii. 15 ; as blood shed in sacritice. Matt. xxvi. 28 ; to kill, by pouring out the blood. Eig. , to shed abroad, or give largely, E,om. v. 5 ; to rush into, Jude II. iK-xop^o), S), to depart from, to go out, Luke xxi. 21. eK-\pvxo}, to expire, to die, Acts v. 5, 10, xii. 23. €Kwv, ovaa, 6v, willing; used adverbially, E,om. viii. 20 ; i Cor. ix. 17. i\aia, as, rj, an olive tree ; its fruit, the olive. Tb opos ruv iXaiwv, the Mount of Olives. %Kaiov, ov, t6, olive oU. iAaiwv, wvos, 6, an olive grove. Olivet, Acts i. 12. 'EAo/AtTTjs, ov, 6, an Elamite, or inha- bitant of Elam, a region of Persia, Acts ii. 9. kKaaaav, or -ttwv, ov, compar. of eAoxvv for fiiKpds, less; in quality, John ii. 10; in age, Rom. ix. 12; indig- nity, Heb. vii. 7. ^KarTov, adv., less, 1 Tim. V. 9. eXaTToyeca, u, to have too little, to lack, 2 Cor. viii. 1 5 (LXX. ) iXarTdcD, u, to majce lower or inferior, Heb. ii. 7, 9 ; pass., to decrease, John iii. 30. iXavvw, iAdaw, i\i\\aKa, to drive, Luke viii. 29 ; to impel, as the winds, the clouds, James iii. 4 ; or oars, a ship; hence to row, John vi. 1 8. iKacppia, as, rj, levity, inconstancy, 2 Cor. i. 17. i\a(pp6s, o, 6v, light, as a burden easily borne, Matt. xi. 30 ; 2 Cor. iv. 17, 42 VOCABULARY. [iXAxwTTos — Ijiain-oi) 4\oivTivos, 7), ov, made of ivory. Rev. xviii. 12. *E\iaK(iix, 6 (Heb.), Eliakim, Matt. L 13 j Luke iii. 30. *E\U(fp, 6 (Heb.), Eliezer, Luke iii. 29. *EA.iou5, 6 (Heb.), Eliud, Matt. i. 14. 'E\ia, to mock, deride, scoff at (abs. or dat.) ; to deceive, delude, pass.. Matt. ii. 16. ifi-TralKTi\s, ov, 6, a scoffer, deceiver, 2 Pet. iii. 13; Jude 18. €fj.-TrfpLiraT(co, u, "fiaca, to walk about in, to dwell among (eV), 2 Cor. vi. 16 (LXX.) ifj.-irifj.TrXrjfii, ifjirX^a-w, 4veir\7]aa, part. pres., ifxniirXMv (Acts xiv. 17), to fill up, to satisfy, as with food, &c. (gen.) ifx-Tvlinci), to fall into or among {us) ; tig., to incur, as condemnation or punishment, 1 Tim. iii. 6 ; Heb. x. 3 1. CjU-TrAeKW, 2nd aor. pass., cVeTrAcifCTjv, to entangle, implicate, 2 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Pet. ii. 20 (dat. of thing). ifi-TcXi)B(ji. See ifnrifnT\r]fii. ifj.-TT\oK-i], ris, 7), a twUting or braiding, as of hair, 1 Pet. iii. 3. ifi-irv4w, to breathe out (gen. ), Acts ix. i. ifi-itopevofiai, dep,, "to go about;" he ace to trade, to traffic, abs., James iv. 13 ; to make gain of (ace), 2 Pet. ii. 3. ifx-TTopia, as, r], trade, merchandise,M3i.tt. xxii. 5. ifi-irdpiov, ov, t6, "emporium ;" a place for trading, John ii. 1 6. efi-TTopos, ov, 6, a traveller, merchant, trader. Matt. xiii. 45 ; Kev. xviii. 3, &c. ifj.-irpi)da}, aw, to set on fire, to bum. Matt. xxii. 7. , S), to strengthen, to furnish withjJower ; pass., to acquire strength. iv-8i)v(a and ivhva, to clothe or to invest with (two aces.) ; mid., to put on, to clotlie 0'ne^s self with (ace, ) ; often fig., to invest with ; to enter stealthily into, 2 Tim. iii. 6. f^v-8vai$, cwy, 7], a putting on or wearing of clothes, I Pet. iii. 3. iv-fSpa, OS, r], an ambush, a snare. Acts xxiii. 16, XXV. 3. iv-fdpfvw, to walch, to entrap, to lie in ambush for (ace), Luke xi. 54; Acts xxiii. 21. iv-et\((», cD, ist aor., iv(i\tj, to exert one's power, to work in one, as Gal. ii. 8 ; trans., to accom- plish, as I Cor. xii. 1 1 ; mid. , to be effective, to be in action. Part., ivepyovfifVT}, James V. 16, earnest. iv-cpyTjfia, wros, t6, working, effect; plur. with gen., 1 Cor. xii 6, 10. iv-epy-fjs, 4s, effectual, energetic, i Cor. xvi. 9 ; Heb. iv. 12 ; Philem. 6. iv-€, &, to disturb, to occasion tumult, Heb. xii. 15. ey-oxos, ov, bound by or in (gen.); guilty of (gen. of the crime, or of that which is violated) ; exposed to (dat. of court, gen. of punishment, ets of the place of punishment). fv-Ta\fia, oTos, t6, a commandment, an institute. Matt. xv. 9 ; Col. ii. 22. iv-ra(l)id((o, to prepare for burial, as by washing, swathing, adorning, anoint- ing the corpse, Matt. xxvi. 12. iv-racpiaafiSs, ov, 6, the preparation of a corpse for burial, John xii. 7. eV-TfAAct), in N.T. only mid. and pass.; fut. mid., ivTeXovfjLai ; perf., ivre- raXfiat, to charge, to command, to commit (dat. of pers., or irptJs with ace.) ^vT^vQ^v, adv., henjce; from this place or cau^e, repeated John xix. 18 ; ow this side and tJiat. ^v-T€v^is, eas, % prayer for another, or intercession, i Tim. ii. i ; sometimes supplication for one's self, i Tim. iv. 5. ev-Tt>os, ov, held in renown ; so precious, highly esteemed, Luke xiv. 8 ; 1 Pet. ivTo\i), ris, 7), a divine precept or prohi- bitutn ; of God's commands, 1 Cor. vix. iq; Christ^ s precepts or teachings, I Cor. xiv. 37 ; i Tim. vi. 14 ; tradi- tions of the Rabbis, Tit. i. 14. al ivToKai, the commandments, i.e., the ten. 4v-T6Trios, ov, 6 (prop, adj.), an inha- bitant. Acts xxi. 12. ivT6s, adv. as prep., with gen., within, rb ivrSs, the interior. Matt, xxiii. 26. iv Tpewd), rpci), fut. mid. , ivrpawiiffofiai ; 2nd aor. pass., iverpdinjv, to put to shame, i Cor. iv. 14; mid., to revei^ ence, to be in awe of. Matt. xxi. 37. 4v-Tp4^a), to nourish in (dat.) ; pass., fig. , 1 Tim. iv. 6 ; nurtured in. ev-Tpo/xos, ov, terrified, trernbling through fear, Acts vii. 32 ; Heb. xii. 21. iv-rpoir^, 7js, r], a putting to shame, i Cor. vi. 5, XV. 34. iv-rpv(pa.co, w, to live luxuriously, to ban- quel, to revel (with h), 2 Pet. ii. 13. iv-Tvyxdvca, to come to, to address ; with virep (gen. ), to intercede for ; with Kard (gen. ), to accuse or complain of iv-Tv\i, to engrave, sculpture, 2 Cor. iii. 7. iv-v^pi(ca, (Tci), to treat contemptuously or in despite, Heb. x. 29. iv-vTrvid(oiJ.ai, dep. pass., to dream (cog- nate ace). Acts ii. 17; to conceive wild or impure thoughts, Jude 8. iv-virviov, ov, t6, a dream. Acts ii. 17. ivdmiov (neut. of hdinnos, from iv uirl, in view), as prep., with gen., before, in sight or presence of Luke i. 17; Rev. iii. 9. ivdnriov tov ©eov, in the sight of God, Rom. xiv. 22 ; used in obtestation, i Tim. v. 21. x"P'^ ivctiiriov TOV ®€ov (Acts vii. 4), favour with God. 'Evds, 6, Enos, Luke iii. 38. iv-wTiCofiai, dep. mid. {iv utIois, in the ears), to listen to, Acts ii. 14. 'Ej/wX? 0, Enoch, Luke iii. 37 ; Jude 14. e|, prep. See e/c. el, 01, al, TO, card, num., six. i^-ayyeWo}, to declare abroad, celebrate, I Pet. ii. 9. i^-ayopd^o), to buy or redeem from (ck). Gal. iii. 13. rhv Kaip6v (Eph. v. 16), buying bach, i.e., redeeming the opportunity /rom being lost. €|-a7<», 2nd aor., iii]ya'yov, to lead OUt, to send forth, Mark viii. 23 ; Acts vii. 40 (with e|cB, e'/c, els). i^aipew, 0} (see 103, i), to take or pluck out. Matt. V. 29 ; mid., to select or separate. Acts xxiii. 27. i^-aipa> (see 92), to take out or away; to expel or excommunicate^ 1 Cor. V. 13. 46 VOCABULARY. [^-aiT^O) 6^-OpKlO-TTJS €|-ajTea>, w, N.T., mid., to require, to ask for, Luke xxii. 31. i^-ai <^, only in pass. K.T., to he sounded forth, propagated vridely^ 1 Thess. i. 8. €|i4, 6«s, ^ (^X'^)* habit, use, Heb. v. 14. c{-I(rT77/it, -lardu and -larTdviD (see 107), * ' to remove from the (natural) state, " (1) trans., to astonish, Luke xxiv. 22; Acts viii. 9 ; (2) 2nd aor., perf. and mid., intrans., to be astonished, con* founded, to be beside onels self, 2 Cor. V. 13. ^|-t(rxy«, to be perfectly able, Eph. iii. 18. ^l-odos, ov, 7}, "exodus," a going oiUf Heb. xi. 22 ; departure, as from life, Luke ix. 31 ; 2 Pet. L 15. 4^-oKo6pfvu, to destroy utterly. Acts iii. 23. 4^-ofio\oyeQ}, u, to confess fully, to make acknowledgment of, as of sins, &c. ; in mid. , to acknowledge benefits con- ferred, to praise (with dat.) Once, to promise, Luke xxii. 6. 4^-opKiCo, to adjure, pxU to oath, Matt. XX vL 63. i^-opKiar-fts, ov, 6, one who puts to oath or adjureSf "exorcist," Acta xix. 13. kt-opva, to dig out. Gal. iv. 15; hence, to force vp, Mark ii. 4. i^-ovZiviu, or i^ouQivica, « (ouSe^s), to set at nought, to treat with cordempt, Perf. pass, part., i^ovdevT]/u.evos, con- temned, disesteemed, i Cor. i. 28, vi. 4. i^-ov7\ev6(i}, u), as preceding, Mark ix. 12. i^-ovaia, as, rj (e^eo-rt), {1) power, ability, John xix. 11; (2) liberty, licence, privilege, right, Rom. ix. 21; (3) com- mission, authority. Matt. xxi. 23. (4) at i^ouaiai, the powers, i.e., rulers, magistrates, Luke xii. 1 1 ; angels, good and bad, E|)h. i. 21, vi. 12. In I Cor. xi. 10, i^oualav, emblem of power, or subjection to the power of a husband, i. e. , the veil. il-ovcna^w, to have right over, to exercise authority over (gen. ) ; pass. , to he under the power of (uttJ). ^^-oxh, Vi, V, eminence, distinction. In the phrase /car i^oxv^, hy way of distinction. Acts xxv. 23. i^-vvi/i^ca, (TO), to wake from sletp, John xi. II. e^-vTTj/os, ov, roused out of sleep. Acts xvi. 27. e|w, adv., abs., or as prep, with geu., without, outside, ol e|a), tliose with- out; as out of the Church, or out of the number of Apostles, &c. Used often after verbs of motion compounded with e/c. f^coflei/, adv. of place, from without, rh e^wdiv, the outside, ol eiwdeu, those from without, i.e., not Christians, I Tim. iii. 7. As prep, geu., Mark vii. 1 5 ; Kev. xi. 2. l|-a)0€w, w, (a(Tw, to drive out, expel. Acts vii. 45 ; ^0 propel, as a vessel, Actb xxvii. 39. i^wrepos, a, ov (comp. of e|«), outer, in the phrase " outer darkness," Matt, viii. 12. loi/ca. See €?««, eoprdCia, to keep or celebrate a feast, I Cor. V. 8. lopTT], Tjs, 7], a solemn feast or festival. Used of Jewish feasts, John vii, 2 ; especially of the Passover, with its accompanying feast of unleavened bread, Liike ii. 41, xxii. i. iir-ayyeKla, as, rj, (i) a message, com- mission. Acts xxiii. 21; (2) a pi'O' mise, as 2 Cor. i. 20, generally ])lur. ; the promises, specially, e.gr., to Abra- ham, or those of the Gospe], 2 Tini. i. i; (3) met., the thing ])romise.d. Acts ii. 33; Heb. xi. 13, 33, 39, &Cf irr-ayyeWco, mid. in N.T., except pass., Gal. iii. 19, (1) to promise, with dat., or ace. and dat., or inf., once cog- nate ace, 1 John ii. 25 ; (2) to make profession or avowal of (ace.), i Tim. ii, 10, vi. 21. iir-dyyeAfxa, aros, t6, a promise, 2 Pet. i. 4, iii. 13. i-K-dyoi, to bring upon, z Pet. ii, i, 5 ; so to charge (eVi, pers. ) with and make answerable for (ace), Acts v. 28. iir-ayocviCofiai, to contend or strive ear- ntstly for (dat.), Jude 3. 4Tr-aQpoi((a, pass., to gather togetlier, to crowd, Luke xi. 29. 'ETT-aiVcTos, ov, 6, Epmnetus, Rom. xvi. 5. iir-aiv^w, u, earca, ist aor., iir/jueaa, to commend, to praise, Luke xvi. 8 ; I Cor. xi. 2. iiT-aivos, ov. 6, commendation, Rom. ii. 29 ; praise, Eph. i. 6, 12, 14; Phil. i. 11. itr-alpca (see 92), to raise up, as hoist- ing a sail, Acts xxvii. 40 ; to lift up, as the eyes, the hands in prayer, the head in courage, the heel against, 01 in opposition ; pass., to be lifted up, to become elated, z Cor. xi. 20. Of the ascension of Christ, Acts i. q. iir-currxvyofxai, to he ashamed, abs. ; to be ashamed of (ace. or eTn', dat. ) €7r-aiTew, a, to beg, to osk alms, Luke xvi. 3. iir-aKo\ovQ€(i>, u>, to follow (dat.) ; fig., to imitate, 1 Tim. v. 24. ; i Pet. ii. 2 1 ; to pursue, of conduct, i Tim. v. 10; part., attendant, Mark xvi. 20. iir-aKovo), to hearken to favourably (gen. pers.), 2 Cor. vi. 2 (LXX.) iv-aKpodofxai, ufiai, to hear, listen to (gen. pers). Acts xvi. 25. cTrdv, conj. (eVei 6.v), if after that, when. Matt. ii. 8. iir-diayKss, adv., of necessity, necessarily (with art.). Acts xv. 28. eir-ay-dyet, trans., fo put (a vessel) out kh 48 VOCABULARY. [€ir-ava-[xt[iW]crK« — citi-PoXXm to sea, Luke v. 4 j intrans., to return. Matt. xxi. 18. i'ir-aya-iJ.ifj.vi](TKa), to remind, put in re- membrance (ace), Rom. xv. 15. hc-ava-iravo^ai, to rest upon {iiri, ace), Luke X. 6 ; to rdy, to trust in (dat,), Rom. ii. 17. iir-av-epxo/Mai, to come back, return, Luke X. 3 5. 4rr-av-larrifii, N.T., mid., to rise up against (eVt, ace), Matt. x. ai. iir-av-6pGci}(jLs, cws, ^, correction, reforma- tion, 2 Tim. iii. 1 6. iv-dvo), adv. abs., or as prep, gen., above, upon ; more than, in price or number ; sxiperior to, in authority. iir-apK€(a, w, eaai, "to suffice for," to re- lieve, suppo7't {(\a,t.), I Tim. v. 10, 16. i:r-apx'^a, as, tj, o. province, division of the Roman empire, Acts xxiii. 34. €7r-oi;Xjs, ews, 7}, a dwelling, a habitation. Acts i. 20 (LXX.) i-K-avpiov, adv., on tlie morrow, rf {vfjLepa.) iiravpiov, on the next day. iir-a\no-(p(i)p(f. See avrS-^wpos. *E'!ra, {i) to interrogate, to ques- tion (two aces., or ace and -jrepi, gen., or with el, rls, &c.) ; to question judicially, John xviii. zi ; to enquire after God, Rom. x. 20 ; (2) to request of (a,cc. and inf.), Matt. xxi. i. 4ir-€pciT7]fm, aros, t6 (i Pet. iii. 21), probably enquiry after God ; " the seeking after God in a good and pure conscience " (Alford). iir-4xco, {1) to apply (the mind) to, dat., Acts iii. 5 ; (2) to hold out, to exhibit, Phil, ii. 16; (3) "to detain (one's self)", to tarry, Acts xix. 22. iv-TjpedCco, to injure, to treat despite- fully. Matt. V. 44; to traduce, to accuse falsely (ace of charge), iPet. iii. 16. iiri, a preposition governing gen., dat., or ace General signification, upon. For its various applications, see 305. iiri-, in composition, signifies motion upon, towards, or ajairist; rest on, over, or at; addition, succession, re- petition, renewed; and it is often intensive. imfiaiyo), to go upon or embark, to mount, to come to or into {inl ace. €ts, or simple dat. ) ivi-^dXKn, (i) trans., to cast on or over, Mark xi. 7 ; (o put on, as a patch on .a garment, Luke v. 36 ; (2) intrans., to rush violently on, Mark iv. 37 ; te fx the mijid stedfastly on anything. Mark xiv. 72; (3) part., ivifidWwy, falling to, Luke xiv. 12. ein-Papea) — lirt-XeYO)] VOCABULARY. 49 fiTi-^apfii}, S>, to burden; fig., to he chargeable to, -z Cor. ii. 5. iTTL-aiBa^w, to pvt or to set upon, as on a beast to ride, Luke x. 34. e7rt-;SAe7rft>, to look upon with favour (with iiri), Luke i. 48 ; James iL 3. eVi-jSATjAio, aros, r6, a patch on a gar- ment, Matt. ix. 16. €7rt-)8oaa), w, to cry aloud. Acts xxv, 24. iiri-^ovxi], Tjs, ^, a design against, a plot, an ambush. Acts ix. 24, xx. 19 (plur.) iTri-yaixl3p€va}, to marry by right of affinity (ace), Matt. xxii. 24. eTri-7eios, op, earthly, belonging to the earth, tqi €7rt7eja, earthly things. iTri-yluofjLai, to arise or spring up, as a wind, Acts xxviii. 13. iTn-yivcitiaKco, {1) to know clearly, under- stand, discern. Matt. vii. 16, 20; (2) to acknowledge, i Cor. xvi. 18; (3) ^o recognise; (4) to learn (oti), become acquainted with (ace. ) ^iri-'^uunns, €»5, 7}, knowledge, acknow- ledgment, Horn. iii. ao ; i Tim. ii. 4. iiTL-ypacpT], 77s, 7], an inscription, a super- scriptio7i, Luke xx. 24, xxiii. 38. iiTi-ypdcpw, to inscribe, engrave, write upon, Mark XV. 26; Rev. xxi. 12. eVi-SeiKWjUt (see ]14), (i) to show, ex- hibit; (2) to demonstrate, prove by argument. (Tri-Se^ofjiai, to receive kindly, 3 John 10. iTTL-h7]fji4w, to), to sojourn, as foreigners in a country, Acts ii. 10, xvii. 21. iiriSia-Td(rcroiJ.ai, to superadd. Gal. iii. 15. tTri-5toto>,ut, to deliver, to give up (ace. and dat.), Matt. vii. 9; Acts xv. 30. iiTL-di-opOow, to set or bring into order (additionally), Titus i. 5. iTTi'Svu, to set, as the sun, Eph. iv. 26. iiri-e'iKeia, ai, i], clemency, gentleness, Acts xxiv. 4 ; 2 Cor. x. i. iiri-eiKijs, es, gentle, mild, kind, Phil, iv. 5 ; I Tim. iii. 3. iiri-C7]T4w, u, to seek earnestly or con- tinuously (ace. of pers. or thing; also TTipl, gen. or inf.) ; to beg earnestly, to desire. iTTi-davdrios, ov, appointed to death, condemned, 1 Cor. iv. 9. ini-deais, eoss, 7], a laying on, as of hands, Acts viii. 18. iTri-dvfj,€oo, £, to desire, to long for, to covet, Eom. vii. 7 ; to lust after. Matt. V. 28 (Luke xxii. 15; see 280, h.) tTri-dvixriri]s, ov, 6, an eager desirer of, I Cor. X. 6. iTTi-Qvyiia, as, t), desire, eagerness for ; often in a bad sense, inordinate desire, lu^t, cupidity. iiri-KadiCw, to seat upon or sit upon. Matt. xxi. 7. (Trans, or intrans., according to the reading.) im-icaXeiv, a, icu, to call upon, to call by name, to invoke in prayer. Acts vii. 59 (abs.); Eom. x. 12, 14 (ace. or €is) ; mid., to appeal to (ace.). Acts xxv. II ; pass,, to be called or surnamed, Luke xxii. 3 ; Acts xv. 17. iiri-KdAvijLfjia, aros, t6, a covering, a cloak, a pretext, 1 Pet. ii. 16. iTTi-KoKvirTw, to cover, of sins; to hide, to give over to oblivion, llom. iv. 7 (LXX.) iiti-Kardparos, ov, accursed, doomed to punishment or destruction, John vii. 49; Gal. iii. 13 (LXX.) iiri-K€tfjLaL, to lie upon (dat)., John xi. 38, xxi. 9 ; so to pr^ess upon, as the mul- titude upon Christ, Luke v. i ; as a tempest on a ship. Acts xxvii. 20; fig., to be laid on, as necessity, 1 Cor. ix. 16 ; to be laid or imposed upon, as by a law, Heb. ix. 10; to be urgent with entreaties, Luke xxiii. 23. 'EiriKovpeioi, ov, 6, an Epicurean, a fol- lower of Epicurus, Acts xvii. 18. ivi-Kovpia, as, rj {Kovpos, help), assistanc<^ help, aid. Acts xxvi. 22, iiri-Kpiv(i3, to decide, to give judgment (ace. and inf.), Luke xxiii. 24. iin-hafi^dvw, N.T., mid., to take hold of (gen.), as in kindness. Acts ix. 27 ; Heb. ii. 16; to seize, as a prisoner, Acts xxi. 30, 33 ; met., to lay hold of, so as to possess, i Tmh. vi. 12, 19, iiri-Xayddt/ofiai, dep., to ^vgef {iwi.)^ Mark viii. 14 ; to neglect, Heb. vi 10 (gen. or ace. ) ; PhiL iii. 14, part. , perf. pass. iTri\e\r]afiiyov, forgotten, Luke xii. 6. e7ri-A.e'7w, in pass., tobenamed or caUed, John V. 2; mid., to clioose, Acta XV, 40. 50 VOCABULARY. [Iiri-Xetirw — cirt-trroXTJ eVj-XeiVcu, not to suffice, to fail, Heb. xi. 32. i7ri-\r)Tixovr], ris, '/), forgetfulness, James i. 35. See 257. eVt'-AoiTTos, ov, remaining, i Pet. iv. 2. iiri-XvcLs, i(Ds, tj, solution, interpreta- tion, 2 Pet. i. 20 ; either, " No pro- phecy of Scripture is self-interpret- ing," or "of exclusive interpreta- tion," i.e., to the immediate outward event alone. See on X^tos. ini-Kvo), to solve, explain, interpret, Mark iv. 34 ; to determine on, as a debated question, Acts xix. 39. eTTt-fiapTvpicD, w, to testify earnestly, i Pet. V. 12. iTri-(j.4\fia, as, v, ccire for, study, atten- tion. Acts xxvii. 3. iin-fieKofxai and toixai, ovfiai, to take care of (gen.), Luke x. 34; i Tim. iii. 5. •irt-jU6\ws, adv., carefully, diligently, Luke XV. 8. itri-fiivw, {i)to remain, abide, continue; (2) met., to he constant, ov persevering in (dat.) eVt-veuw, to nod, to assent by nodding, i.e., to consent. Acts xviii. 20. iirivoia, as, tj, tliought, device, purpose of mind. Acts viii. 22. i-Ti-opKeca, u, to swear falsely, Matt. V. 33- firi-opKos, ov, perjured, i Tim. i. 10. ivL-ovaios, ov, adj., enough for support, daily. Matt. vi. 11; Luke xi. 3. fTrt-iriTTTOj, to throw oneself upon, to fall on, to recline on (^irf, ace), rwih upon, Mark iii. 10 (dat); fig., to come upon (dat., or iiri, ace. or dat.), as an emotion, &o., Luke i. 12; Acts viii. 16. *i-v\i}tra, to become uncircumcised, I Cor. vii. 18. iiri-aTafjiai, dep., to know well, to under- stand (ace), to know, with on, ws, &c. See Synonyms. iiri-(TTdTr]s, ov, 6, master (only in Luke, in voc, iviardTa), addressed to Jesus = Rabbi. See Synonyms. iirt-(n4?J^(i), to semi by letter to, to give directions by letter, to write. Acts xxi. 25, XV. 20 ; Heb. xiii. 22. iiriarrjfjLuv, ov, skilful, knowing, James iii. 13. 4Tri-a-T7}plC, (i) trans., to cause to turn (ace. and eir»), as to God, or to the worship of God, Acts ix. 35; (2) intrans., to return, to turn back, as to evil, 2 Pet. ii. 21 ; to return upon, as a refused salutation, Matt. x. 13 (eTTt, fls, Trpds). lwi.-aTpo(pi], ris, r}, a turning, conversion. Acts XV. 3. iin-(Tvy-dya), id gather together, into one place, a5 Matt, xxiii. 37. ^TTi-crw-ayayif, r]s, rj, a gathering to- gether, 2 Thess. ii. i ; Heb. x. 25. 4iri-(rvv-Tp^x(^, io run together, to a place, Mark ix. 2 5. iin-(ri)-ffTa(Tis, ecus, t], (i) a seditious concourse, Acts xxiv. 12; {%) pres- sure of business, 2 Cor. xi. 28. iT7i-(Tdueia, as, rj, an appearance, a manifestation, 2 Tim. i. 10; 2 Thess. ii. 8. iirt-(pavfis, es, glorious, illustrious. Acts ii. 20. €irL-(f>av(o, or -(pavaKCt), fut. (ra>, to shine upon, give light to (dat.), Eph. v. 14. eiTL-^ipoi (see 103, 6), to bring to {iiri, ace). Acts xix. 12 ; ^o superadd {to, by dat. ), Phil. i. 16; to bring upon, inflict, as punishment, Rom, iii. 5 ; to bring against, as an accusation. Acts XXV. 18. em-cpuv^a}, w, to cry out, or aloud, to cry against, Luke xxiii. 21. iiri-cpdoa-Kco, to shine upon, to dawn. Matt, xxviii, i ; Luke xxiii. 54. iivL-x^ipiu), a>, to take in hand, under- take, Luke i. I ; Acts xix. 13. cTTi-xew, to pour upon, as medicaments on wounds, Luke x. 34. iiri-xopTiyea}, cb, to superadd, 2 Pet. i. 5 ; to supply abundantly, z Cor. ix. 10; Gal. iii. 5 ; pass.. Col. ii, 19; 2 Pet. i. II; to be furnished or supplied. iiri-xop-nyia, as, 7}, a supply, minis- tration, Phil. i. 19 ; Eph. iv. 16. iirt-xp'i(o, to rub, or smear up)on {iiri, ace), John ix. 6, 11. iir-oiKodo/Meca, «, to build upon, fig., to edify, to incre/ise, as in knowledge, excellence, &c., i Cor. iii. 10; Eph. ii. 20. iir-oKeWco, to force forward, to run (a ship) aground. Acts xxvii. 41. iir-ovofid^o), to name, or call by a name of honour, pass, only, E,om. ii. 17. eV-oTTTcuft), to be witness of, i Pet. ii. 12. eTT-oTTTTjs, ov, 6, an eye-witness, a he* holder, 2 Pet. i, i6. 52 VOCABULARY. [?iros — ^pxoH-*^ fTTor, ovs, r6, a word; ws evos diruy, as I may say, Heb. vii. 9. ivovpdvios, iov, heavenly, celestial, of God, Matt, xviii. 35 ; of intelligent beings, Phil. ii. 10 ; of the starry bodies, I Cor. xv. 40. So of king- dom, country, &c. Neut. plur., t^ Jnovpdvia, celestial things, or places, John iiL 12; Eph. i. 3, 20, iL 6, iii. 10; Heb. viii. 5; ix. 23. liTTot, ot, at, Ta, card, num., seven, "the perfect number." So often symbol, in Revelation, oi kvTa, the seven deaco.'is, Acts xxi. 8. iTTTOKty, num. adv., seven times, Matt, xviii. 2 1 ; Luke xvii. 4. eirra/ctax/Aioj, at, a, card, num., seven thousand, Rom. xi. 4. €7ra). See flTTov and 103, 7. "Epaaros, ov, 6, Erastus, Acts xix. 22. ipya^ofxai, aojxai, dep., perf. iXpyoffixai, pass., (i) abs., to work, to labour , (2) to accomplish, bring to pass, per- form; (3) to -practise, as virtues ; (4) to acquire by labour, John vi. 27. ipyaa-ia, as, v, {i) effort, diligent labour, Luke xii. 58 ; (2) working, doing, i.e., the practice or performance of, t'ph. iv. 19 ; {3) work, gain l>y work. Acts xvi. 16, 19; (4) trade, craft, Acts xix. 25. ipydrrjs, ov, 6, one who works, as a labourer. Matt. ix. 37; applied to workers in the church, 2 Tim. ii. 15; a doer, of iniquity, Luke xiii. 27. ipyov, ov, t6 {fepy-; so Germ., werk), a work, a deed, an enterprise, Acts V. 38 ; a miracle, John viL 3, 21; act, contrasted with x6yos, speech, Luke xxiv. 19; any action, good or bad. Acts ix. 36; John iii. 19; a thing wrought by God, Acts XV. 18; by men, Acts vii. 41 ; by the devil, i John iii. 8. ipedl^w {epis), to provoke, to excite, to exasperate, 2 Cor. ix. 2 ; Col. iii. 21. ipeiSco, a (a, to stick in, to stick fa»t, Acts xxvii. 41, ipevyofxai, |o/4ot, to throw out of the mouth, to utter freely. Matt xiii. 35. iptvvaw, u, -{ffTu, to search diligently, John V. 39 ; Rom. viii. 27; Rev. ii 23. ipeco, obsolete. See (prjH-i, slirov, an(' 103, 7. ipTlfiia, as, tj, an uninhabited tract, a desert. eprifios, ov, deserted, desolate, waste, barren, Gal. iv. 27 ; used in the fem., as a subst., for a desert, Luke i. 80 ; %pT]iJ.os TTis 'louSaios, Matt, iii. I ; the wilderness of Judea, the tract west of the JJead Sea ; ri epTj/jLos, the desert in which the Israelites wandered. ipTjp.6M, u, only in pass., to be made desolate. Matt. xii. 25 ; to be reduced to nought, Eev. xvii. 16, xviii. 17, 19. ipr^ficaais, ews, t), desolation, a laying ivaste, Luke xxi. 20 ; Mark xiii. 14. iplCo (epts), to contend, dispute. Matt, xii. 19. ipideia, as, t] [ipiBos, z. worker for wages, perhaps connected with eptov), "the spirit of a mercenary," self-seeking, or party -spirit, Rom. ii. 8 ; Phil, i. 16, ii. 3 ; James iii. 14, 16 ; plur. in 2 Cor. xii. 20 ; Gal. v. 20. epiov, ov, t6, wool, Heb. ix. 19 ; Rev. i. 14. epis, iSos, 71, contention, strife, quarrel, love of contention. epios, ov, 6, a kid, a little kid. 'Epfjids, a, 6, Hermas (sometimes written 'Ep)U,f)s), Rom. xvi. 14, epIJLTfiAfia, as, t], interpretation, explana- tion, I Cor. xii. 10. epHi]V€v, to interpret, explain, translate from one language to anotJier, John i. 39, 43 ; Heb. vii. 2. 'Epfirji, ov, d, the Greek deity Hermes (in Latin, Mercury), Acts xiv. 12. 'EpuLoyfvris, ovs, 6, Hermogenes, z Tim. i. 15. kpTTer6v, ov, rd, a creeping creature, a reptile. Acts x. 12; R.«m. i. 23. ipvQp6s, a, 6v, red. ipvOph daXaxraa, the Red Sea, Acts vii. 36 ; Heb. xi. 29. ^PXOfJMi (see 103, 2), to come, to go, of persons or oi things; 6 4px^h(fos, the coming one, i.e., the Messiah, Matt. xi. 3. In Rev. i. 4, 8, IJe wIm is, vjho loas, and wh^ is to come; to come, after, before, to, agaiust. IptoTaco — €v-a77eXitw] VOCABULARY. &c., as determined b}'' the prepo- sition which follows ; to come fortliy as from the grave, i Cor. xv. 35 ; ?!o come hack, as the prodigal, Luke XV. 30. ^paidu), «, to interrogate. Matt. xxi. 24, to ask, to request, to beseech. «(T07]s, rJTOs, -n {eyvv/jii, 1 aor., eaO-nv), a robe, raiment, Luke xxiii. 1 1 ; Acts xii. 21. See Synonyms. ^adrjfTis, ecos, tj, raiiiient, Luke xxiv. 4. iffQiw, 2nd aor., ecpayov (see 103, 3), to eat, to partake of food, used abs. or with ace. of food, or e'/c, a word like some being understood; with fierd, gen., to eat with; with dat. (as Kom. xiv. 6), to eat to the honour of ; met., to devour, to consume, as rust does, James v. 3 ; or fire, Heb. X. 27. ■ "Eaxi, 6, Esli, Luke iii. 25. ia-oTTTpov, ov, t6, a (polished metal) mirror, James i. 23; Si' i(T6TrTpov, 1 Cor. xiii. 12, into, lit., a mirror, as the image appears on the opposite side. eairepa, as, 7 (prop. adj. with &pa), Luke xx\r. 29 ; the evening. Acts iv. 3, xxviii. 23. *E(TpdoiJL, 6, Esrom, Matt. 1. 3 ; Luke iii. 33. effxaros, 7], ov, (i) the last, remotest, m situation, dignity, or time, rh €. ecroodep, adv. of place, from within; rh eacDdev, the interior, i.e., the mind or heart, 2 Cor. iv. 16. iawT^pos, o, ov (comp. of eau), inner, interior. Acts xvi. 24. kraipos, ou, 6, a companion, an asso- ciate, a friend ; eroTpe, voc, as in English, my good friend. Matt. XX. 13, xxii. 12, xxvi. 50. eT6p6-y\6i)(T(ros, ov, 6, one of another tongue, or language, i Cor. xiv. 21. eTepo-didaaKoXiO), 00, to teach otherwise, to teach a different doctrine, from that of the apostle, i Tim. i. 3, vi. 3. kTcpo-^vyica, (3, to be yoked unfitly, or lieterogeneously, 2 Cor. vi. 14. %r€pos, distrib. pron., a,nother ; inde- finitely, any other; definitely, the otlier, diverse, different from ; adv. -w«, otherwise, differently. €Ti, adv., any more, any longer, yet^ still, even-, Luke i. 15; also, Heb. xi. 36; implying accession or addi- tion, besides. 6Toifid((i>, dffw, to prepare, make ready, to ordain, to appoint. eroLfxaa-ia, as, rj, preparation, prompti- tude. froifios, Tj or OS, ov, prompt, prepared, of things or persons; 4v eToifx-cp exetf, to be in readiness, 2 Cor. x. 6 ; adv. -wy, in readiness, with €%(», Acts xxi. 13; 2 Cor. xii. 14. tros, ovs, t6, a year, Luke iv. 25 ; kcJt' _^eTos, yearly, Luke ii. 41. eS, adv. (old neuter, from i'vs), well; eS TToiilv (ace), Mark xiv. 7, to do good to; eu irpdo'crfiv, to fare v^eil, i.e., to prosper, Acts xv. 29; used .in commendation, well! well done! Matt. XXV. 21. In composition, eu retains its proper meaning. EijcL, as, r]. Eve, 2 Cor. si. 3 ; i Tim. 6u-o77eA.i^<», (TO), i aor., fxruyyeXKra, perf. pass., evriyyeMa-uai, (1) act., to be a messenger of good, to bring glad tidings to (ace. or dat.), Kev. x. 7, xiv. 6; (2) mid., t> announce, to publish (ace. of message), to announce 54 VOCABULARY. [ev-a77^iov — ev-Xo^ia the gospel (abs.), to preach to, evan- gelize (ace. pers. ) ; pass. , to be an- nounced, to liave glad tidings an- nounced to one. See Matt. xi. 5 ; Heb. iv. 2. (v-ayy^Kiov, ov, rS, the good tidings, the gospel. In the epistles, (i) the announcing of the tidings, (2) the gospel scheme, (3) the work of evan- gelization. ev-a77€At(TTTjs, ov, 6, a messenger of good tidings, of the gospel, an evangeUM, Acts xxi. 8 ; Eph. iv. 1 1 ; 2 Tim. iv. 5. fbapearrfw, Si, to be. wdl-pleasing to (dat.), Heb, xi. 5, 6; pass., to be pleased loith, Heb. xiii. 16, fv-dpearos, ov, acceptable, well-pleasing, Rom. xii. i ; adv. -cos, acceptably, Heb. xii. 2^. Ev8ov\os, ov, b, Eubalus, 2 Tim. iv. 21. ivy^viis, 4s, well-born, noble, ingenu- ous, generous, Luke xix. 12; Acts xvii. II. evSla, as, rj (from Zeis, gen. Ai6s), fair weather, a serene sky. Matt. xvi. 2. fv-SoKcea, 0), aca, ist aor., €v56Kr]aa and rjuS(^K7jn-a, to think well of, to be pleased with. Matt. xvii. 5 ; 2 Pet. i. 17; to resolve benevolently, Luke xii. 52. fv-doKia, as, t], pleasure, good -will, favour, Phil. ii. 13; 2 Thess. i. 1 1 ; Matt. xi. 26. fv-epyeaia, as, t], a good work done, a benefit bestowed. Acts iv. 9, i Tim. vi. 2. fv-epyfrea, to do good, to confer kind- ness. Acts X. 38. tv-epy(Tr]s, ov, 6, one who does good to, a benefactor, a patron, Lukexxii. 25. ({j-OeTos, ov, well placed, ft, useful, Luke xiv. 35. fheews, adv., immediately, soon, speedily. Matt. xiii. 5 ; fortliwiih. Acts xii. 10. fvdv-Spofifa, a>, to run in a straight course. Acts xvi. 1 1, xxi. i. ei/ dv/xfu), a>, to be in good spirits, to be c/ieerful. Acta xxviL 22, 25; James V. 13. 9tf-dvuos, ov, cJieerful, having good courage. Acts xxvii. 36 ; adv. -cos, with alacrity, cheerfully. fvdvvoo, vob, to make straight, John i. 23 ; to guide, to direct, as a ship, James iii. 4. evQvs, fia, V, straight; met., right, true; adv., of time, straight, i.e., immediately, forthwith, as evOfws, Matt. xiii. 20. 6U0UT7JS, T-rjTos, 7], Hghtness, rectitude, ^equity, Heb. i. 8 (LXX.) €v-Kaip4ci}, CO, to have leisure, or oppor- tunity, Mark vi. 31; Acts xvii. 2 1 ; I Cor. xvi. 12. ev-Kaipia, as, v, convenient time, or opportunity, Luke xxii. 6. iv-Kaipos, ov, well-timed, timely, oppor- tune, Mark vi. 21 ; adv., -cos, oppor- tunely, Mark xiv. 1 1 ; opposed to aKaipas, 2 Tim. iv. 2. ^fj-Koiros, ov, easy, neut. compar. only; fvKoircaTfpov, easier. Matt. ix. 5. ev-Xdfieia, as, r), reverence, fear of God, piety, Heb. v. 7, xiL 28. See Synonyms. ev-\aB4oiuiai, ovfiai, dep., pass., to fear; with /XT), to take precaution, Heb.xi. 7. eu-AojSrjs, 4s, cautious. God-fearing, de- vout, Luke ii. 25 ; Acts ii. 5. ev-\oy4(a, S>, iiaa, to bless, speak well to, to praise, i.e., God; to invoke bless- ings on, i. €. , men ; to bless, or to ask blessing on, i.e., food, Luke ix. 16. So of the Lord's supper, Matt, xxvi. 26; I Cor. X. 16. Used of what God does, to bless, to distin- guish with favour. Hence pass, part., ev\oyr]iJ.4vos, blessed, favoured of God, Matt. XXV. 34. See Syno- nyms. ev-XoyrrrSs, 6v (verbal adj. from pre- ced. ), worthy of reverence, of bless- ing, Mark xiv. 6 1 ; Rom. ix. 5 ; I Pet. i. 3. iv-\oyla, as, ^, "eulogy," commenda- tion, in a good sense, and in a bad Ben$,e adxdation, Rom. xvi. 18; bless- ing, praise, to God, Rev. vii. 12 ; benediction, Le., wishing or conferring good upon, Heb. xii. 17 ; 2 Cor. ix. 5 ; bounty, the blessing which the gospd secures, i Pet. iii. 9. 6l5-{X€Td-8oTOS ci^XOP'O"'''] VOCABULARY. 55 fv-fifrd-SoTos, ov, ready to impart, I Tim. vi. 1 8. FA'viKri, Tjy, 7j, Eunice, z Tim. i. 5. ev-voew, w, to he well affected to, to be reconciled to. Matt. v. 25. eij-voia, as, v, good-will, benevolence, I Cor. vii. 3 ; Eph. vi. 7. cvvovxiC^, '^«, Tst aor. pass., ^wov- Xio-drip, to make a ennuclt o/(pass.), to live as a eunuch. Matt. xix. 12. ihvov-x'^s, ov, 7], a eunuch, a minister at court. Acts viii. 27. EvoSia, as, Euodia, Phil. iv. 2. «?u-o5oa>, (o, pass, only, to be led in a good way, to be made 2irosperous, Horn. i. 1 o ; i Cor. xvi. 2 ; 3 John 2. iv-ireiQ^s, 4s, bland, easily entreated, compliant, James iii. 17. fv-ireol-araros, ov, easily besetting, or well circumstanced, of a temptation or sin, which has every advantage in favour of its prevailiug, Heb. xii. I. ev-TToita, as, 7}, doing good, beneficence, Heb. xiii. 16. eu-TTopeo), Sj, mid. ill N. T. , to be well to do, to be prosperous. Acts xi. 29. ey-TTopfo, as, ^, substance, wealth, pros- joerity. Acts xix. 25. ev-irpfTreia, as, rj, beauty, gracefulness, James i. 1 1. cv-irp6(r-SeKT05, ov, well received, accept- able, Eom. XV. 16 ; I Pet. ii. 5. cv-TTpocr-edpos, ov, assiduous, constantly attending on, i Cor. vii. 3 5. eu-TTpoo-wTrew, &, to make a fair appear- ance, to try to please. Gal. vi. 12. evpicTKca, fvp^ffoi), perf., fvprjKa; 2nd aor., evpov ; ist aor. pass., evpedrjv; (i) to find, to discover, to light upon; (2) to ascertain, to find by computa- tion, or by examination, as a judge ; (3) to obtain, to get; (4) to find hoio, to be able.; (s) to contrive ov find out Iww, by thought and inventing ; Luke xix. 48. ivpo-K\vdwv, (uvos, 6 (from eZpos, the east wind, and K\v^cav, wave), euroclydon, a stormy wind, a hurricane, Acts XX vii. 14. Another reading is evpa- KvXwv, Lat. euraquilo, a north-east gale. €vpv-x, to exercise piety, to wor- ship, to reverence, Acts xvii. 23 ; I Tim. v. 4, €v-(T€^-f)s, 4s, religious, devout, Acts x. 2 ; 2 Pet. ii. 9 ; adv. -o)?, de- voutly, rdigiously, 2 Tim. iii. 12 ; Titus ii. 1 2. eij-a-qfios, ov, significant, distinct, easy to be understood, i Cor. xiv. 9. e{;-(r7rAo7x»'os, ov, full of pity, tender- hearted, Eph. iv. 32 ; I Pet. iii. 8. eu-o-xrjjtK^j/ws, adv., honourably, becom- ingly, gracefully, Eom. xiii. 13. €v-axvf^o(Tvv7), Tjs, 7), dccorum, becom- ingness, i Cor. ii. 23. ev-axvfiuv, ov, reputable, decorous, of high standing, Mark xv. 43. ev-rivccs, adv., strenuously, earnestly, Luke xxiii. 10 ; Acts xviii. 28. eu-rpoTreAio, as, 7], jesting, frivolous and indecent talk, Eph. v. 4. Ei/Tuxos, ov, 6, Evtychus, Acts xx. 9. (v-, to bear plentifully, to bring forth largely, Luke xii. 1 6. ev-(ppalvci>, vu>, ist aor. pass., €v^pdv67]V and 7]u, to be in good spirits, to he animated, Phil. ii. 19. €v-wSia, OS, 71, fragrance, good odour, 2 Cor. ii. 15. (vwvvfxos, ov, used in neut. plur., ivdiwixa ifieprf), the left, ie., the hand, Acts xxi. 3 j the foot, Eev. X. 2. i€(ros, ov, 7}, Ephesus. i^-€up6Tr}s, ov, 6, an inventor, one who fivids out, Kom. i. 30. i-i(TTr}fxi, 2nd aor., cTreorTrjv ; perf. part. , is ; always iutrans. or mid. in N.T., (i) to stand by, or near, to come in, or near; {2) to come upon, with hostile intent ; (3) to be earnest, 2 Tim. iv. 2 ; {4) to befall one, as evil; (5) fo 6e a< liand, to be present, i.e., suddenly, unex- pectedly. itp-opdoa, w, 2nd aor., i-rrfTSov, to look upon, Luke i. 25 ; Acts iv. 29. E<|)potM, ^> Ephraim, John xi. 54. i—^] VOCABULARY, 57 Cdo), w, 0s, Cf), inf., ^Tjv; fat., CV» or -ofjLai; ist aor., €Cv<^a; to live, as (i) to be alive; part., d (civ, the Living One, a description of God, as Matt, xvi. i6 ; (2) to receive or regain life, John iv. 50 ; (3) to spend life in any- way, Gal. ii. 14; 2 Tim. iii. 12 ; (4) to ^*ye, in the highest sense, to pos- sess spiritual and eternal life; (5) met. , as of water, living or fresh, opposed to stagnant, as John iv. jo. Ze/SeSaios, ov, 6, Zebedee. ^earSs, if, 6v [C^a), boiling, hot, fig., Rev. iii. 15, 16. C^vyos, ovs, t6, (i) a yohe {Cevywfii, to join), Luke xiv. 19; (2) a pair, Luke ii. 24. (evKT-npia, as, rj, a band, a fastening, a chain. Acts xxvii. 40. Zeus, Al6s, ace, Ato, Zeus (Lat., Jupiter), the chief of the heathen deities, Acts xiv. 13. Ceo), part., C^oiv, "to boil," fig., to be fervent, ox earnest, Rom. xii. 11. QiKos, ov, 6, {1) fervour, zeal, in a good sense, John ii. 17; (2) heartburning, jealousy, in a bad sense; Acts xiii. 45; anger. Acts v. 17. CWw, w, w(jo>, (i) to have zeal for or against, to desire earnestly (ace), I Cor. xii. 3 1 ; 2 Cor. xi. 2 ; {2) to be envious or jealous. Acts vii. 9 ; James iv. 2. (riXwTijs, ov, (i) a 2ea?o«, one very zealous for (obj., gen.). Acts xxi. 20; (2) as a surname, Zelotes, Luke vi. 15; Acts i. 13. See KavaviT-ns. Cni^ia, as, 7\, damage, loss. Acts xxvii. 10, 21 ; Phil. iii. 7, 8. {Vj/xtf^o?, w, pass., to 6e endamaged, to suffer loss (ace. of thing lost), Matt, xvi. 26; PhiL iii. 8. ZtjvSs, 3, Zenas, Titus iii. 13. ^TjTew, a), Tjo-ft), (i) to see^, absolutely, as Matt. vii. 7 ; (2) to endeavour after, to seek for (ace). Matt. vi. 33 ; John V. 30; (3) to desire, to wish for. Matt. xii. 46, 47 ; Col. iii. i. (■f]Tr}iJ.a, aros, t6, a question, dispute, controversy (gen., or irepl, gen.) ^jT-ncrts, €«s, question, debate, alterca- tion, John iii. 25; Acts xxv. 20. QtCoLVLOv, ov, T({(E.V., "taxes"), darnel^ a kind of bastard wheat ; Matt, xiii. 25-40. Zopol3d^€\, 6 (Heb.), Zerubbabel, Matt, i. 12 ; Luke iii. 27. C^(pos, ov, 6, darkness, thick gloom, 2 Pet. ii. 4, 17 ; Jude 6, 13. Cvy^s, ov, 6, a yoke, (i) met., of ser-' vitude, I Tim. vi. i ; (2) fig. , of any imposition by authority, Matt, xi. 29 ; Acts XV. 10; (t,) the beam of a pair of scales. Rev. vi. 5. Cvfif], r}s, T), leaven. Matt. xvi. 6; fig., corruptness, 1 Cor. v. 6, 7, 8. CvfiSo), &, to ferment. Matt. xiii. 33 ; Gal. V. 9. Quypeca, S> {Co>^^, h.yp4a>), "to take alive," to catch, take captive^ Luke V. 10 ; 2 Tim. ii. 26. Coi), r\s (cf. C^u>), (i) life, literal, spiritual, eternal ; (2) living, imply- ing duration, Luke i. 75 ; i Cor. iii. 22 ; Rom. vi. 4 ; (3) a title of Christ, as the source of life, John v. 26. See Synonyms. Cc^vr], T]s, 7}, a girdle, Acts xxi. 11 ; a purse, for which the girdle usually served, Mark vi. 8. Qdiivvvfii, or -vvvw, see 114, to gird, John xxi. 1 8. (luo-yovi(a, w, -iiao), to preserve alive, Luke xvii. 33 ; Acts vii. 19. CHoov, ov, r6, a living creature^ an animal, Heb. xiii. 11 ; Rev. iv. 6, 7. (a)0-Troi4, tjo-w, to make alive, to catise to live, i Cor. xv. 45 ; to inspire life, i.e., to invigorate, John vi. 63 ; pass., to be quickened, made alive, I Pet. iii. 18; i Cor. xv. 22, 36. H. H, Tj, "^HTa, Eta, e, the seventh letter. As a numeral, ?j' = 8 ; fl= 8000. ff, a particle, disjunctive, or; interro- gative, whether (see 405) ; or com- parative, than (see 320). With other particles, oAA' ^, except; fi Kal, or else; ^Trep, than at all. John xii 43 ; ^Toi ... ^, whether ... Of' (ex- 58 VOCABULARY. [iq7£|iOV€V(«) — eluding any other alternative), Eom. ri. i6 ; ff fi{]v, Heb. vL 14, fnost r^yffjLovevco, to he governor, as proconsul, Luke ii. 2 ; procurator, Luke iii. i. ^jyefxovia, as, t], rule, as of an emperor, Luke iii. 1. rjyffidov, 6vos, governor, as the head of a district. Matt. ii. 6 ; especially the procurator of Judaea, as Pilate, Felix, Festus. Tjyeofiai, ov/xai, dep. mid., (1) to be leader, 6 riyov^i^vos, the leader, or chief (gen.); (2) to deem, regard, reckon (two aces., or ace. with OJS). ^Seojs, adv. (^8us, sweet), gladly, with good will ; superlative, ^S«rTo. ^577, adv. of time, now, already, as Matt. iii. 10; of the immediately future, Rom. i. 10. 7)^ov{], 7)s, 7}, pleasure, i.e., sensual; lust, strong desire. ijhvofffJLOV, ov, t6 {rjBvi 6(Tixri), mint. ^Oos, ovs, t6, as edos, manner, custom; plu., ^0rj, moralsy i Cor. xv. 33. V«, l« (perf., ^Ka, only Mark viii. 3), to he come, to he present, see 361, d, note. 'HAf, o (Heb.), Heli, Luke iii. 23. H\i, a Hebrew word, my God, Matt. xxvii. 46. 'HAio;;, «ti, 6, Elias, i.e., Elijah. rjXiKia, as, ri, (i) stature, size^ Luke xix. 3 ; (2) age, full age, vigour, John ix. 21. Soi prob., ' Matt. vi. 27. rjKiKos, 77, oy, how great, how much, how little. l^Kios, ov, 6, the sun, the ligJd oftlie sun. 7)^05, ov, 6, a nail, John xx. 25. Vfiepa, as, fi, a day, i.e., the time from sunrise to sunset. TjfifTf pos, a, ov, our, our own. TjfjLiOdviis, 4s, half dead, Luke x. 30. ^tiiavs, fia, V, gen., rjfihovs, lialf ; in neut. only, rh ^yuav, ra vfila-ri. rjfiuipiov, ov, t6, a half-hour. Rev. viii. 1. fjviKa, adv., wJien, wlienever, 2 Cor. iii. 15, r6. fyt^p, see ^. ¥iTrios, a, ov, placid, gentle, i Thess. ii. 7 ; 2 Tim. ii. 24. "Hp, 6 (Heb.), Er, Luke iii. 28. ilpfnos, ov, quiet, tranquil, i Tim. ii. 2. 'HpcoSrjs, ov, 6, Herod. Four of the name are mentioned : (i) Herod the Great, Matt. ii. ; (2) Herod Antipas, or H. the tetrarch. Matt. xiv. ; Luke xxiii. ; (3) H. Agrippa, Acts xii. ; (4) H. Agrippa the younger, called only Agrippa, Acts xxv. 'UpwSiavoi, a>v, ol, Herodians, partisans of Herod Antipas, Matt. xxii. 1 6. 'Bpoidids, dSos, T], Herodias, Matt. xiv. 3, 6. 'HpcaUcov, u)vos, S, Herodion, Rom. xvi. 1 1. 'Hcrdias, ov, 6, Esaias, i.e., Isaiah. 'Hf/oO, 6 (Heb.), Emu. ?j(ruxaC"> f^^f (0 ^o **65^ from work, Luke xxiiL 56 ; (2) to cease from altercation, to he silent, Luke xiv. 4 ; (3) to live quietly, i Thess. iv. 11. 7](rvxia, as, ij, (i) quiet, silence. Acts xxii. 2 ; (2) tranquillity, quiet, mo- desty, 2 Thess. iii. 12. r](Tvxios, ia, lov, quiet, gentle, i Tim. ii. 2 ; I Pet. iii. 4. iJToi, see Ij. rjTToiofjLai, pass., (t) to he inferior (abs.), 2 Cor. xii. 13 ; (2) to he overcome by (dat.) ; 2 Pet. ii. 19, 20. ^TTifxa, aros, r6, inferiority, diminu- tion, Rom. xi. 12; loss, i Cor. vi. 7. ^TTwi/ or ?i(r(ra>v, irreg., compar. of KaK6s, inferior, neut. as adv., 2 Cor. xiL 15 ; ih^TTov, assubst., tJie worse, 1 Cor. xi. 17. ijX^o, ^j io sound, as the sea, Liike xxi. 25 ; as brass, 1 Cor. xiii. i. ^Xos, ov, 6, sound, Heb. xii. 19 ; Acts ii. 2, fame, or report, Luke iv. 37. e. 0, d, and ^, e^To, theta, th, the eighth letter. Numerically, ^ = 9 ; ^^ = 9000. 0aSSaios — Oeo-crTV'yiqs] VOCABULARY. 59 ©aSSatos, ov, 6, Tliaddceus, a surname of the apostle Jade (also called Lehhcem), Mark iii. 1 8). Odkaaaa, rjs, ^, (i) the sea; (2) sea, as the Mediterranean, the E.ed Sea; (3) Hebraistically, for the lake Gen- nesaret, Matt. viii. 24. OdXTTco, to cherish, nourish, i Thess. ii. 7. ^ Qdjxap, 7], Tamar, Matt. i. 3. eaixfiew, w, to be astonished, amazed. Acts ix. 6. So pass., Mark i. 27 ; with iirl (dat.), Mark x. 24. Bdjx^os, ovs, t6, astonishment. 6ai'd(TiiJ.os, ov, deadly, mortal. dayaT7]-(p6po5, ov, death-bringing, James iii. 8. Qdvaros, ov, 6, death, lit. or fig., im- minent danger of death, 2 Cor. i. 10 ; tlte cause of death, Rom. vii. 1 3 ; spiritual death, the second death, the pestilence. Rev. xviii. 8. davardca, w, daw, to put to death, pass. , to be in danger of death, Rom. viii. 36 ; fig., to mortify, subdue, as evil passions, Rom. viii. 13 ; pass., to be dead to (dat.), Rom. vii. 4. QdiTTO}, rpco, 2nd aor., eracpov, to bury. &dpa, 6, Terah, Luke iii. 34. Bappiw, a, -fjaa, to be of good cheer, to have confidence in, els or iv. In imperative, forms from Oapafco are used, 6dp(Tii, dapaelre, take courage, ddpaos, ovs, TO, courage, Actsxxviii. 15. davfjLa, oTos, r6, wonder, amazement. Rev. xvii. 6, Qavixd^Q), cro), or aofiai, to wonder, abs. , with ^id, ace. ; eVi, dat.; iie/jt, gen., or on, et ; to wonder at, admire, ace. ; pass., to be admired, or Ivonoured. Qavjxdaios, ia, lov, wonderful. Matt. xxi. 15. Bavnaaros, 17, 6v, wonderful, marvellous, Mark xii. 11, &c. 06a, as, 7), a goddess. Acts xix. 27. dedofxcu, ufxai, dep., ist aor., iOeaad/xTjv, and with x^^^s. sig,, ididdr]v, to behold, to contemplate earnestly, to see, to visit. fifaT/ji^w, to make a spectacle of so to expose to contempt, Heb. x. 33. dearpov, ov, to, (i) a place for public shows, a theatre, Acts xix. 29 ; (2) spectacle, 1 Cor. iv. 9. df^os, e/a, elov, divine, 2 Pet. i. 3, 4 ; T^ Buov, the Deity, Acts xvii. 29. Oe'iov, ov, r6, sulphur (from the pre- ceding, "a magic fume"), Luke xvii. 29. BeioTTjs, TTjTos, 7], godhcad, deity, Rom. i. 20. deiu)57]s, €s, sulphureous. Rev. ix. 17. 6e\rj/jui, OTOS, t6, will, desire, an object of pleasure, tJie faculty of willing, a decree or decision, lust, sensual in- stinct. 64\r]ais, ecus, 7), will, pleasure, Heb. ii. 4. ee'Aw, impf., ijeeXov; ist aor., eQihrqaa; to wiih, delight in, prefer, to will, in the sense of assent, requirement, or determination. See Synonyms. d€ixe\ios, ov, fundamental. Hence masc. (\l9os), a foundation, or t^ BefieKiov (Luke), in the same sense. Fig. for the elements of sound doc- trine. 6€lj.e\i6(i},' S>, diXTca, to lay a foundation, to found; fig., pass., to be firm and stable. Oeo-diSaicTos, ov, taught of God, i Thess, iv. 9. 6e6-\o'Yos, ov, 6, tlie divine, or tJie theologian, of the apostle John in the title to Rev. Oeo-fxaxeoo, w, to fight against God, Acts xxiii. 9. 0€o-/idx«s, ov, 6, a fighter against God, Acts V. 39. Oio-TTvevaTos, ov (Trvew), God-breathed, inspired by God, 2 Tim. iii. 16. &e6s, ov, 6, voc, once 0ee, Matt. XX vii. 46; (i) God; 6 @e6s, the revealed God, John i. i ; Acts xvii. 24, &c.; (2) a. god, generically. Acts vii. 43, xii. 22 ; 2 Cor. iv. 4 ; Phil. iii. 19 ; John x. 34 (quoted fromLXX.). 0eo-(re/8eta, as, 7], piety, towards God, I Tim. ii. 10. eeo-o-e$i]s, 4s, God-worshipping, devout, John ix. 31. Qeo(rrvj7]s, is, God-7iatin{r, or God- hated, Rom. L 30. 60 VOCABULARY. [0€OTT]S OvYttTTJp BeSTTjs, T7JT0S, ^, deity, godhead, the divine nature, CoL ii. 9. &6d-, only mid in N.T., to warm oneself. QepixTt], 7JS, T), heat, burning. Acts xxviii 3. Oipos, ovs, TO, summer, Jiarvest-time. &io-, to hum incense, Luke i. 9. dvfjLOfMax^c, w, to be in great rage with (dat. ), Acts xii. 20. 6vfx6s, ov, 6, passion, or violent commo- tion of mind, great anger. Qvix6oD, u>, to pi'ovoke to great anger; j)ass., to be greatly angry with, Matt. ii. 16. 6vpa, as, 7], a door, means of access, Luke xi. 7 ; Matt, xxvii. 60 ; met. , John X. 7, 9. 6vp€6s, ov, 6, a (door-shaped) shield, Eph. vi. 16. dvpii, tSos, 7), an> opening, used for a window or wicket, Acts xx. 9 ; 2 Cor. xi. 33. 6vpcup6s, ov, 6, 7], a door-keeper, porter, John X. 3. 6vc ia, as, ^, ( i ) the act of sacrificing ; (2) the victim sacrificed ; (3) religious service, generally, Phil. iv. 18. QviTiaariipLov, ov, t6, an altar, for sacri- fices, for burnt offerings, Matt. V. 23, 24 ; Heb. xiii. 10, dvo), (TO}, (i) to slay in sacrifice. Acts xiv. 13; (2) to hill animals, for feasting. Matt. xxii. 4 ; (3) to slay, generally, John x. 10. Gw^as, o (from Heb. = SiSuftos), Thomas. Qwpal, aKos, masc. , a breast-plate, Eph. vi. 14 ; I Thess. v. 8. I, I, 'IwTo, Iota, the ninth letter. As a numeral, f ^= 10 ; ^i 10,000. *ia.iipo5, ov, d, Jairm. *laKdl>P, b (Heb.), Jacob, (1) the patri- arch; (2) the father-in-law of Mary, Matt. i. 15. 'laKco^os, ov, 6, Greek form of preced., James, (i) the son of Zebedee; (2) the son of Alphseus ; (3) the Lord's brother. Some identify (2) and (3). iafxa, aros, ^6 healing, cure, plur., 1 Cor. xii. 9, 28, 30. 'lan^pris, ov, 6, Jambres, with 'Icwtjs, 2 Tim. iii. 8. 'lavvd, 6 (Heb.), Janna, Luke iii. 24. 'lavuris, ov, 6. See *lafi0prjs. idofiai, wfiai, Idirofiai, dep., mid. aor., but passive in aor., perf. and fut., to heal, to restore to health, of body or mind ; with clttS, of malady. 'lapeS, 6 (Heb.), Jared, Luke iii. 37. laais, i(as, tj, a cure, healing. Acts iv. 22, 30. m«T7r, perf., pass,, part,, Ifiantrfievos, to clothe. Ifmnov, lov, t6 (dim of Tfia = fl/jia, from ^vvvfii), (i) clothing; (2) the outer garment, disting. from x»'»'<«Ji'. ifiarifflX6s, ov, 6, dothes, raiment. ifxiipofMi, to luxve a strong affection for, to love earnestly, i Thess. ii. 8. ij/o, conj., (i) tJkat, to the end tlutt ; 'iva fii], that not, lest; (2) after words of time, wfien that. (See 384.) ivaTl; or Iva Ti; conj., to what end f 'li^TTirrj, 77s, 7), Joppa. 'lopSdvrjs, ov, 6, t/te Jordan. tos — 'Iwpdp,] VOCABULARY. 65 Jfos, ov, 6, (i) poison, Rom. iii. 13 ; (2) rust, James v. 3. louSoio, OS, 71 (really adj., fem., sc. yrj), Judea. lovSai^u}, to conform to Jewish prac- tice, to " Judaize," in life or ritual, Gal. ii, 14. 'lov^a'iK6s, T?, 6v, Jeioish, or Judaical, Tit. i. 14; -ws, adv., Jewishly, in Jewish style, Gal. ii. 14. louSoIos, aia, ov, belonging to Judah, Jewish. Often with subst. under- stood, as aviip, a Jew, &c. 'lovZdiffyios, ov, 6, Judaism, the Jewish system. Gal. i. 13, 14. 'Iou5o9, a, b, J-.idah, (i) Son of Jacob; (2, 3) other ancestors of Christ, Luke iii. 26, 30 ; (4) Jude, the Apostle; (5) Judas Iscariot; (6) Judas Barsabas, Acts xv. 22 ; (7) a Jew living in Damascus, Acts ix. 11; (8) a leader of sedition, Acts v. 37 ; (9) a brother of our Lord, Matt, xiii. 55 ; perhaps identical with (4). See 'IdKcujSos. 'louAia, as, r), Julia, E,om. xvi. 15. *lov\ios, ov, 6, Juliu^y Acts xxvii. 'lovv'ias, a, 6, Junias, Rom. xvi. 7. 'lovaros, ov, 6, Justus. Three of the name are mentioned. Acts i. 23, xviii. 7 ; Col. iv. 11. iirivfvs, ecus, b, a horse- soldier, Acts xxiii, 23. lir-KiK6v (prop. neut. adj.), cavalry. Rev. ix. 16. ?7r7ros, ov, b, a horse. Ipis, ipiSos, T}, the rainhoio. Rev. iv. 3. 'WadK, b (Heb.), Isaac. laa, in pass. , to he seen clearly, E,om. i. 20. KOd-oTi, adv., as, according as, Acts ii. 45 J because iJiut, fovy Luke xix. 9. Kad-ds, adv., according as, John vi. 58; even as, i Cor. i. 6; when. Acts vii. 17. Kal, conj., cop., aw(Z, also, even. For the various uses of this conjunction, see 403. Kdiacpas, a, 6, Caiaphas. Kai-ye, conj., and indeed, certainly, truly. Kdiv, 6 (Heb.), Cain. Kouudv, 6 (Heb.), Cainan. Two are mentioned, Luke iii. 36, 37. Kouu6s, 17, 6v, new, (i) materially, as a garment, Luke v. 36 ; (2) in reve- lation, &c., as Acts xvii. 19; Mark xvi. 17. See Synonyms. Kaivorrjs, rjros, rj, newness, renovation, (moral and spiritual), Kom. vi. 4, vii 6, Kai-irep, conj., although. KaipSs, ov, 6, time, season, opportunity, Gal. vi. 10 ; a particular season, Gal. iv. 10 ; an allotted time, John V. 4 ; Acts xvii. 26 ; a year (in prophetic style). Rev. xiL 14. See Synonyms. Ka7(rap, apos, 6, Ccesar, applied to Koman Emperors after Julius, Luke ii. I, XX. 22; Acts xi. 28; PhiL iv. 22. Kaiaapfia, as, % Ccesarea. Two cities of Palestine, one in Galilee [Ccesarea Philippi), Matt. xvi. 13 ; the other on the coast of the Mediterranean, Acts viii. 40, &c. Kot-Toi, conj., nevertheless, though in- deed. fcot'w (of), pf., pass., KiKavfmt, to hum, to kindle ; pass. , to he on fire ; fig. , to be moved ivith ardour, Luke xxiv. 32. Kofcet (koi and ewei), and there. KaKeldev [koL and iKeidev), and thence, and from that. KMilvos, Tj, (koI and iKelvos), and he, she, it. Kcucia, OS, 7], badness, (i) of character, wickedness, Acts viii. 22 ; (2) of disposition, malice, ill-will, i Cor. V. 8 ; (3) of condition, ajfiiction, calamity, Matt. vi. 34. KOKo-rjdeia, as, r], malevolence, Rom. i. 29. /ccuto-\o7€«, w, to revile, to speak evil of (ace. ). Kaxo-tToiQiia, as, rj, a suffering of evil or affliction, James v. jo. KaKo-iraOeo), u, to suffer evil, to endure affliction, 2 Tim. ii. 3, 9 ; James V. 13.^ KOKo-iroUa}, w, abs., to do injury, as Mark iii. 4 ; to commit crimes, as I Pet. iii 17. KOKo-TToiSs, 6v, as subst., an evildoer, malefactor, John xviii. 30 ; i Pet. ii 12. KaK6s, -f], 6v, evil, wicked, malignant; rh KUKhv, wickedness. Matt, xxvii. 23 ; also, calamity, affliction. See Syno- nyms. Adv., -ws, wickedly; kokws €X€iv, to he ill, or in trouble. KOK-ovpyos, ov, as subst., an evil- worker, malefactor, Luke xxiii 32. KOK-ovxfOi, «, only in i)ass,, part., treated ill, harassed, Heb. xi. 37, xiii. 3. KaK6co, «, dffo), to ill-treat, Acts vii. 6, 19 ; to exasperate, Acts xiv. 2. KaKcoa-ts, €ws, t}, evil condition, affliction, ill-treatment, Acts vii. 34. KoKdiJLT), rjs, T]. stubble, i Cor. iii 12. KoKafios, ov, 6, a stalk, as (i) a reed, growing. Matt. xi. 7 ; (2) a reed, as a mock sceptre. Matt, xxvii. 29; (3) a pen, 3 John 13; (4) a measuring- rod. Rev. xxi 15. KoXiO), a, 4aw, KiKKtiKa, to call, hence {\) to summon, Luke xix. 13 ; (2) to name. Matt, i 21, x. 25 ; (3) to invite, John ii. 2 ; (4) to appoint, or select, for an office, Heb. v. 4; (5) pass., to be called, or accounted, ie., to be. Matt. v. 9, 19; James ii. 23. KoKKi-^Kaios, ov, 7), a good olive tree. KaXK'uau (compar. of Ka\6s), better; adv., KdwTov, Acts xxv. 10. KoAo-SiSao-KaAos, ot/, b, 7], a teacher of what is good, Titus ii. 3. 66 VOCABULARY. [KaXol — Kar-a-yycXevs KaA.ol At/ueVes, Fair havens. A place of good harbourage iu the island of Crete, Acts xxvii. 8. KoXo-iroteo), w, to act well, or honour- ably, 2 Thess. iii. 13. KaK6s, 7], 6v, fair, hence (i) physically beautiful, of good quality ; (2) morally good, honourable, noble; (3) excellent, advantageous; adv., -S)S, well, fairly. KdXvfifia, aros, t6, a covering, veil, 2 Cor. iii. 13. KaXvTTTa), xpco, to cover, Luke viii. 16 ; 1 Pet. iv, 8 ; to hide, as for protec- tion, Luke xxiii. 30. Kdfxt)\os, ov, 6, rj, a camel. Kafilvos, ov, 71, a furnace. Rev. i. 15. Kafi-fivu {Kara, and ju.ua)), to shut, close, e.g., the eye-;, Matt. xiiL 15; Acts XX viii. 27. Kciixvci), Kaixa, pf., K(Kixt]KOL, to be weary, faint, to be sick, Heb. xiL 3 ; James V. 15. K^iioi, Ka/xe (see Korydo). KdfjLvra}, t|/a>, to bend, as the knee, Rom, xiv. 1 1 ; Phil. ii. 10. K&u (Kal i&v), and if, even if, but, at least, although, Matt. xxvi. 35 ; John viii. 14. Kava, T] (Heb.), Cana. KcwoviTrjs, ov, 6, a Cananite (from the Hebrew, meaning the same as Ze- lotes), Matt. x. ^4 ; Mark iii. 18. Some read Kayowa^os. KcwStJ/cTj, Tjs, 71, Candace, Acts viii. 27. ^ • KooftAiv, ouos, 5, (i) a rule of conduct; (2) a limit or sphere of duty, z Cor. X. 1-5 ; "canon." Kairf/)-i.oou)U,, or Ka, to condemn, to pronounce sentence against. Matt. xii. 7 ; Luke vi. 37. Kara-^wKoj, to follow closely, to pursue intently, Mark i. 36. Ka.Ta-hovK6(a, So, doaoo, to reduce to slavery, 2 Cor. xi. 20 ; Gal. ii. 4. KaTa-5wa>TTfv(a, to exercise power over, to oppress. Acts x. 38 ; James ii. 6. KaT-aicTxvvca, to dishonour, i Cor. xi. 4; to put to sliame, i Cor. i. 27 ; to shame, as with disappointed ex- pectation, I Pet. ii. 6 ; pass., to be ashamed, Luke xiii. 1 7. Kara-Kaib) {af), avtrto, to burn up, to consume entirely. Matt. iii. 12; Heb. xiii. II. KaTa-Ka\vTrTCi), in mid., to wear a veil, I Cor. xi. 6, 7. Kara-Kavxdofiai, cD/iai, to glory, to re- joice against, to glory over (gen.), Kom. xi. 18; James ii. 13. Kard-Keifxai, to recline, as the sick, Mark i. 30; as at table, Mark xiv. 3. KaTa-K\dco, «, to break tfc pieces, Mark vi. 41 ; Luke ix. 16. Kara-KXeiu, to shut up, confine, Luke iii. 20; Acts xxvL 10. Kara- Khripo-doT 4(0, w, to give by lot, to distribute an inheritance by lot. Acts ]dii. 19. KaraKXlvco, v'2, to cause to lie doum, or recline; mid., to recline, as at table, Luke ix. 14. Kara-K\v((a, crw, to inundate, deluge, pass., 2 Pet. iii. 6. KaTaK\v(rfjL6s, ov, 6, a deluge, flood, 1 Pet ii. 5. Kar-aKoKovOea, w, to follow closely (abs. or dat. ), Luke xxiii. 5 5 ; Acts xvi. 17. KaTa-KOTTTO), ^co, to wound, Mark v. 5. Kara KprjfjLvi^co, aw, to cast down head- long, Luke iv. 29. Kard-Kpifia, aros, r6, condemnation, E,om. viii. 1. KaTa-Kpifcd, vS), to give judgment against, to adjudge worthy of punishment (gen. and dat.), to condemn, Matt. XX. 18; Rom. ii. i, viii. 3. Kard-Kpicris, f a>s, i], the act of condemna- tion. Kara-Kvpiivta, to exercise auihoHty over. Matt. XX. 25 ; to get the mastery of, Acts xix. 16 (gen.). K!zra-Xa\eoo, 5>, to speak against (gen.), James iv. 11; i Pet. iii. 1 6. Kara-KaXla, as, fem., evil speaking, obloquy, reproach. KardkaXos, ov, 6, rj, a calumniator, detractor. KaTa-kafi&dvca, Xri^ojjLai, to seize or lay hold of, John viii. ^, ^ ; to grasp, as the prize in public games, Phil, iii. 12 ; mid., to comprehend, i.e., to hold, with the mind ; to perceive, to apprehend, on, or ace. and inf., Eph. iii. 18. Kara-Kiyw, in pass., to be reckoned among, i Tim. v. 9. Kard-K^i^ixa, aros, t6, a remnant, a residue. Kaja-Xdiroi, i//cd, to leave utterly, as ( 1 ) to depart from, to forsake ; (2) to re- serve, or leave remaining, Kom. xi. 4. KaraXiddQM, aoa, to stone, to destroy by stoning, Luke xx. 6. KUT-aWay^, rjs, % reconciliation, Rom. V. 1 1, xi. 15. Kar-aWda, to reconcile, ace. and dat., 2 Cor. v. 18, 19; pass., to be, or to become reconciled, i Cur. vii. 1 1 ; 2 Cor. v. 20. BS VOCABULARY . [KaTa-Xoiiros — KaTa-, to be idle, or idly burdensome to (gen.), 2 Cor. xi. 8. Kara-V€va>, to nod, to make signs to, dat., Luke v. 7. Kwra-voiU), S>, {i) to observe carefully, remark, consider; (2) to have reject to, to regard (aec. ). Kar-avrda), &, to come to, to arrive at, to attain, with «s, Acts xvi. 1 ; Phil. iii. 1 1. Kard-vv^is, «»s, ^, stupor, deep sleep, Rom. xi. 8. Kara-vicraci), {», 2nd aor. pass., icaT€- virynu, pass., to be pricked through, to be greatly moved. Acts li. 37. KaT-a^iSa, w, doaw, pass., to be counted tvorthy, or Jit for (gen.), Luke XX. 35 ; 2 Thess. i. 5. KaTo-iraTcw, w, to trample on, to tread underfoot (ace), Luke viii. 5. KaTd-Travffis, fos, v, rest, place of rest, Heb. iv. I, 3, 10, II ; Acts vii. 49. Kara iravw, (i) trans., to hold back, or restrain, ace. (also toQ /i^, and inf.), Acts xiv. 18 ; to give rest, or to cav^e to rest, Heb. iv. 8 ; (2) iutrans. , to rest, or cease from, airh, Heb. iv. 4. Kara-ir^TcuTixa {Trerdyvv/jLi), aros, t6, a veil, or curtain, Luke xxiii. 45. KaTa-irivw, 2nd aor., /coTeVtov ; ist aor. pass., KarevSOTiv ; to drink up, or swallow completely. Matt, xxiii. 24 ; fig., to overwhelm, Heb. xi. 29; to destroy, i Cor. xv. 54, KaTa-viTTrw, and aor., Kar4ire(rou, to fall down prostrate, or dead. Acts xxvi. 14, xxviil 6. *caTo-TrA.€cw (ef), cvaofiou, ist aor, kotc- ir\evaa, to sail to, Luke viii. 26. KOTo-iroj/ew, w, in pass., to be worn down, as by affliction, 2 Pet. ii. 7 ; to be oppressed. Acts vii. 24. Kara-Trovri(iu, to sink down, to be drowned. Matt. xiv. 30, xviii. 6. Kardpa, as, rj, cursing, James iii. 10; curse, of the law, Gal. iiL 10. Karapdofiai, ufiai, to imprecate, to devote to destruction, to wish evil to, Mark xi. 21; Matt. V. 44; pass., i>erf., part., accursed. Matt. xxv. 41. KaT-apyeco, w, i\(T(a, to render useless, to make vain, or to no purpose, Luke xiii. 7 ; Rom. iii. 3 ; ^o bring to an end, to cease from, i Cor. vi. 13, XV. 24 ; to cease to be connected with, to apostatize. Gal. v. 4. KaT-apidfi4, era), to overshadow, Heb. ix. 5. KaTa-a-KOTrecD, «, to inspect narrowly ^ to plot against, Gal. ii. 4. Kara-arKOTrSt, a scovt, a spy. Kara-aofl^ofxai, aofjiai, to deal deceitfully vjith, to employ craft against. Acts vii. 19. Kara-GT^hXa), \S>, ist aor., KareVretAa, to ajypease, restrain. Acts xix. 35, 36. KaTd-aTrjfia, aros, t6, behaviour, con- duct, Tit. ii. 3. Kwra-ffToXi], ri$, rj, raiment, outer cloth- ing, I Tim. ii. 9. KaTa-ffTpfcpa, ?|/a>, to overthrow, Matt. xxi, 1 2 ; Mark xi. 1 5. Kara-ffTpriVLda), w, dffw, to grow wanton against (gen. ), i Tim. v. 1 1. KaTa-(TTpo(pi], ■ Tjs, ri, an overthrow, "catastrophe," 2 Tim. ii 14; 2 Pet. ii. 6. Kara-ffTpctivvvfii, ffrpdiffa), to strew down, or about, i Cor. x. 5. Kara-crvpo}, to drag, to trail along, Luke xii. 58. KaTa-adC(», |ft), to slay, to slaughter, Luke xix. 27. Kara-trcppayl^a), aa, to close, to seal up, as a book, Kev. v. i. KaTa-axeffis, eus, rj, a possession. Acts vii. 5, 45. KaTa-riO-qfii, 6^aw, ist aor., KUTedr^Ka, to deposit, as a body in a tomb, Mark xv. 46 (mid.); to exhibit, or to shoio to, ace, (x^ptv) and dat., Acts xxiv. 27, XXV. 9, "to lay up kindness for one's self." KOTa-To^Tj, ^s, 7], paronomasia with irepnofir}, mutilation, Phil. iii. 2. Karo-To^euo), to transfix, Heb. xii. 20. KOTo-Tpex*^? ^'^^ aor., KareSpafiov, to run down (eVt, ace), Acts xxi. 32. Ka.-Ta-eTi., KaT€(p6apij.at; 2nd aor., KaT€ — K€vo-8ogia Kar-ex^i Karacrxvo't'}, to seize on, to hold fasty to retain, possess, to prevent, from doing a thing {rod, p.-i), with inf.), to repress, K,om. i. 18; rh Kar^xov, the hindrance, z Thess. ii. 6, 7 ; Karelx^^ **^ "^^^ alyiakSv, they held for the shore. Acts xxvii. 40. KaTT}yop€j>, (a, r) {16s), to consume by rust, James v. 3. KaT-iaxva, to prevail against, to get the upper hand of (gen. ), Matt. xvi. 1 8 ; Luke xxiii. 23. KOT-ot/ce'w, w, ( I ) intrans. , to dwell., with h, ils (const, praeg.), iirl, gen. or adverbs of place; (2) trans., to dwell in, to inhabit, ace. ; fig. , of qualities or attributes, as abiding (spoken of Christ, dwelling in his saints, Eph. iii. 17). ^ Kar-oiKf](ns, cws, 7], a dwelling, luibita- tion, Mark v. 3. Kar-oiKrjTijpiov, ov, no, a dwelXing-plxice, Eph. ii. 22 ; Rev. xviii. z. Kar-oiKia, as, rj, « dwelling, a habita- tion. Acts xvii. 26. KaT-oTrTpl((a, mid., to behold, as in a mirror, 2 Cor. iii. 18, Ko.T.6p8ttiixa, aros, r6, an honourable act well performed, Acts xxiv. 3. /cciro), adv., doiouicards, down. Matt, iv, 6 ; the lower part, Mark xiv. 66 ; with relation to time, under, Matt, ii. 16; couiparat., kotwtc/jw, yet louKr. KUTUTepos, a, ov (/fciTw), loioer, Eph. iv. 9 (on which see 259). Kavfia, arSs, t6 (koiw), heat, scorching heat, burning. Rev. vii. 16, xvi. 9. KavixaTi^o), CO), to scorch, burn, torture by fire. Matt. xiii. 6 ; Mark iv. 6. Kavais, 6WS, 7}, a burning, burning up, Heb. vi. 8. KavaSo), a, to set on fire, pass., to be burned, 2 Pet. iii. ic, 12. Kavacou, wvos, ^, ( i ) scorching /teat ; (2) perh. an arid wind, from the E., James i. 11 (see Hos. xii. i, &c.). Ka\nr\piaQa, to brand, or sear, as with a hot iron ; fig., pass., i Tim. iv. 2. Kauxdo/xai, upLai, 2nd pers., Kavxaaai ; fut,, i](rofj.ai, to glory, to boast, to exult, both in a good sense and in a bad, i Cor. i. 29 ; Eph. ii. 9 ; followed with prep., iv, rrepl, gen., inrep, gen., iiri, dat. KavxVH^ (i^os, t6, (i) glorying, boast- ing; (2) the object, or ground of boasting, Rom. iv. 2. Kavxvo'^s, cws, 71, the act of boasting, gtorying. Kacpapvaovfi (see Katrepvaovfi), Caper- naum. Key XPfai, Mv, at, Cenchrece, the port of Corinth, Acts xviii. 18 ; Rom. xvi. I. Kedpos, ov, 71, a cedar, John xviii. i ; proiiably a mistaken reading for following. KeSpdov, 6 (Heb., dark, or turbid), Cedron, a turbid brook between the Mount of Olives and Jerusalem. Kel/xai, aai, rai; impf., iKeifxrjv, cto, to; to lie, to recline, to be laid, Luke xxiii. 53 ; i John v. 19; met., to be given, as laws, i Tim. i. 9. Keipia, as, r}, a band, or a roller, of linen, John xi. 44. Kclpci}, Kfpw, to shear, as sheep, to cut off, as the hair; mid., to shave. Acts viii. 32, xviiL 18; i Cor. xi. 6. Ke\fv, ^(TU), to empty oneself, or divest oneself of r).ghtful dignity, Phil. li. 7; to render useless, i Cor. i. ij ; to falsfy, as ground of boasting. Kevrpou, ov, t6, a goad, a spike, a sting, as of a scorpion, i Cor. xv. 55, 56 ; Acts ix. 5. K^vTvpiwu, covos, S, Latin (see 154, c), a centurion, the commander of a hundx-ed foot soldiers. Kepaia, as, rj, a horn, a point, a flourish at the extremity of a letter ; met. , tlie minutest part. Matt. v. 18 ; Luke xvi. 17. KepafiGvs, ewy, 6, a potter. KepafjLiKSs, i], 6v, 'made of potter's clay, earthen, Eev. ii. 27. Kepd/jLiov, iov, t6, an earthen vessel, a pitcher, Mark xiv. 1 3. Kipa/jLos, ov, 6, a tile, of potter's clay, Luke V. 19. KepdvvvfjLi (see 113, 114), to mix, to prepare a draught, to fill one! 8 cup. Rev. xiv. 10, xviii. 6. Kcpas, oTos, T<{, a horn, as Rev. v. 6, &c. ; fig., for strength, Luke i. 69; a projecting point, Rev. ix. 13. Kepdriov, lou, r6, a pod, a kind of sweet broad bean, Luke xv. 1 6. Kepdaiva, avw, ist aor., iKdp^rjaa, to gain by trading, to obtain, to par- take of to win over^ to gain, to Christ, to virtue, to religion, Mark viii. 36; I Cor. ix. 19-22. Kep^Sos, ovs, t6, gain, profit, Phil. i. 21, iii. 7 ; Tit. i, 1 1. Kepfia, aros, r6 [Kelpco), a small piece of money, John ii. 1 5. KepixartcTTifs, ov, 6, a money-changer. K^(pd\aiou, aiov, t6, {1) a sum of money. Acts XX. 28 ; (2) a sum, summary recapitulation. K«pa\ai6u, S), diffca, to smite on the. head, Mark xii. 4. Ki, (i) to proclaim, to pub- lish, Mark vii. 36 ; (2) specially, to preach, the Gospel, abs., or ace. and dat. KrjTos, ovs, t6, a large fish, a tohale, a sea monster. Matt. xii. 40. K77^as, a, 6 (from Aramaic), Cephas, or Peter, a rock, or stone. Ki^wTos, ov, 71, a hollow vessel, an ark, both of Noah, or of the ark of the covenant. Kiddpa, as, 7), a harp, a lyre, "guitar." KidafjlCo}, to play upon a harp, or lyre. Kidapa)^6s, ov, 6, a harper, lyrist, singer to the harp. KiAiKia, as, t], Cilicia. Kivd/jLODfiov, ov, t6, cinnamon, Eev. xviii. 13. KivSvpevw, aw, to be in danger, Luke viii. 23. Kiv^vvos, ov, 6, danger, peril, 2 Cor. xi. 26. 72 VOCABULARY. [kiV^O) KoSpdvTTJS Kivew, u, ^crw, to move, to stir, to shake, as the head, in mockery, Matt. xxviL 39 ; to remove, to excite ; pass., to he excited, to he put into commotion. Kivriffis, em, rj, motion, commotion, John V. 3. Kis, 6 (Heb.), Kish, father of Saul, Acts xiii. 21. KKdSos, ov, d, a hranch; met., Rom. xi. 16- 19, posterity. K\aio) (of), avaw, (i) abs., to wail, to lament; (2) trans, (ace), to weep for. K\d., , S), in mid., to obtain by lot, Eph. i. II. K\r}(ris, €«s, fi, a calling, i.e., God's call to godhness and spiritual bless- ings, Rom. xi. 29 ; Eph. iv. 4. kXtjtSs, 6v, verbal adj. (KoAfw), called^ invited. Matt. xx. 16, xxii. 14; of Christians, the. called, Rom. i. 6, 7, viii. 28 ; of the apostolic vocation, Rom. i I ; I Cor. i. i. KXi&avos, ov, 6, an oven, a furnaxx^ Matt. vi. 30. K\ifia, aros, r6, a climate, a tract of country, a region. kKivri, 7}s, tj, a portable bed, a couch for reclining a^ meals. Matt. ix. 2, 6 ; Luke xvii. 34. KXivlSiov, ov, t6 (dim.), a little bed, or couch, Luke v. 19, 24. kKivw, vS), perf., K^KKina, trans., (i) to bow, in reverence, Luke xxiv. 5; in death, John xix. 30; (2) to lay dorrni, as the head, to rest. Matt. viii 20 ; (3) to turn to flight, Heb. xi 34; intrans., to decline, as the day, Luke ix. 12. K\i(Tla, as, fj, a table party, a company, Luke ix. 14. KKowf}, Tjs, v, theft. Matt. xv. 19. KXiSav, uvos, 6, the raging, of the sea ; a wave, a surge, Luke viii 24; James i. 6. K\vSuvi(ofjt.ai, to be tossed, as waves, by the -wind, Eph. iv. 14. KAwTTuj, a, 6, Clopas, John xix. 25. Ky-hdeo, to tickle; pass., to he tickled, to itch, 2 Tim. iv. 3. KviSos, ov, ri, Cnidus, Acts xxvii. 7. KoSpavTTjs, ov, b, Lat. (see 154, a), a farUdng, tiie smallest coin in use. KOiXCa — Koiros] VOCABULARY. 73 KoiXla, as, v, (i) t^^ belly f Matt. XV. 17 ; (2) the stomach, Matt, xii. 40; (3) the womb, Matt. xix. 12; (4) fig., the inner man, as the heart, &c., John vii. 38. KOI flaw, u), in mid., to fall asleep, Luke xxii. 45 ; pass., to be asleep, to be asleep in death, John xi. 12. Kol(xr)(Ti5, 6«s, ■T], sleep, repose, John xi. 13. K9iv6s, ii, 6v^ common^ i.e., shared by all, Acts iv. 32 ; unclean, cere- monially. Acts X. 15 J unconse- crated, Heb. x. 29. KoivSw, w, v6s, "fi, 6v, as subst., a partner, a sliarer with, gen. obj. /coiTTj, 17s, fj, a bed, Luke xi. 7 ; met. , marriage bed, Heb. xiii. 4; sexual intercourse (as illicit), Rom. xiii. 13; Koirtju ex^iv, to conceive, Rom. ix. 10. KoiTdov, wvos, 6, a bed-chamber, Acts xii. 20. k6kkivos, rj, Of, dyed from the kSkkos, crimson, KOKKos, ov, 6, a kernel, a grain, or seed. Ko\d(o}, aw, mid. , to chastise, to punish. Acts iv. 21 ; pass., 2 Pet. ii. 9. Ko\aK€La, as, t], flattery, adulation, 1 Thess. ii. 5. nSXacTis, ecus, rj, punishment, Matt. XXV. 46. KoAatraai, wv, al (see KoXocrcrat). Ko\a(pi(w, aw, to strike with the fist, to bujfet, to maUreat, Mark xiv. 65. KoWdw, w, i\aw, mid. and pass., to cleave to, to be joined with, to adhere. KoXKovpiov, or KoKKvpiov, tov, t6, eye- salve, " colly rium," Rev. iii. i8. KoWvBKTT-fis, OV, 6 {kSwv^os, Small coin), a money-changer, John ii, KoKo&dw, daw, to cut of, to shorten, as days of trouble, Mark xiii. 20. KoXoaaaevs, ews, plur., KoKoaaaeTSf Golossians, only in the subscription to the Epistle. Ko\oaaai, wv, at, or KoXdaaai, Colossce, KdAiros, ov, 6, the bosom, the chest, (i) of the body, John xiii. 23 ; in the bosom of Abraham, i.e., next to him at the heavenly banquet, Luke xvi. 22, 23 ; (2) of the dress, used as a bag or pocket, Luke vi. 38 ; (3) a bay, a gulf, an inlet of the aea^ Acts XX vii. 39. Ko\v/x&dw, w, ijaw, to swim, Acts xxvii. 43. KoXv/xfiTjOpa, as, rj, a pool, a swimming- place, a bath. KoXdvia, as, 7], or KoXwvia, a colony, Philippi is so called, Acts xvi. 12. KOfxdw, w, to nourish the hair, to wear the hair long, i Cor. xi. 14, 15. k6ij.7], 7]s, v, hair of the head. KofiiCw, aw, mid. fut., Kofxlconai or KOfiiovfiai, to bear, to bring, Luke vii. 37; mid., to bring to oneself ie., to acquire, to obtain, as a recom- pense, Heb. X. 36 ; to receive again, to recover, Heb. xi. 19. KOfM^STcpov (comp. of k6iv^os), better, of convalescence, adverbially, John iv. 52. Kovidw, to white-wash. Matt, xxiii. 27 ; pass.. Acts xxiii. 3. Kovi-opr6s, ov, 6 {upwixi), dust. Matt. X. 14; Acts xiii. 51, &c. Koird^w, aw, to be quieted, to rest, as the wind lulling, Mark iv. 39. Koireros, oD, 6 {kStttw), vehement lamen- tation. Acts viii. 2. KOTrf), rjs, f)., smiting, slaughter, Heb. vii. I. Koiridw, w, daw, to toil, Luke v. 5 ; to be fatigued, or spent, with labour, Matt. xi. 28; to labour, in the gospel, Rom. xvi. 6, 12 ; i Cor. XV. 10. k/itos, ov, 6, labour, toil, trouble, un- easiness. 74 VOCABULARY. [Koirpia — Kpeio-cruy Koirpia, as, t], filth, a dunghill, Luke xiv. 35. Kdirpiov, ov, t6, dung, manure, in some . MSS. ; Lukexiii. 8. KSirrco, mid. fut., KSipofiai, to cut down, as branclies, trees, &c. ; mid., to beat, or cut oneself in grief, to bewail. Matt. xi. 17. K6pa^, aKos, 6, a raven, Luke xii. 24. Kopdaiov, lov, TO (dim. from K6p7)), a girl, a damsel, Mark vi. 22, 28. *w8Sj/ (indecl.) and Kop^avas, a, 6 (from Heb.), (i) a gift, something offered to God, Mark vii. 11; (2) tJie sacred treasury. Matt, xxvii. 6. Kope, 6 (Heb.), Korah, Jude 11. Kopevvvfj.1, 4(Tu, pass, perf., KeKSpeafiai, to satiate ; pass. , to be full, 1 Cor. iv. 8. KopivGios, lov, Corinthian, a Corinthian, Acts xviii. 8. Kopivdos, ov, 7], Corinth. Kopvf]\ios, iov, 6, Cornelius. Kopos, ov, 6 (from Heb.), a cor, the largest dry measure, equal to ten fidroi, or nearly fifteen English bushels, Luke xvi, 7. Koafieco, «, ■f](Tia, to set in order, to gar- nish, Matt, xxiii. 29 ; i Tim. ii. 9 ; to trim, as lamps. Matt. xxv. 7 ; met., to adorn, with honour, Tit. ii. jo; I Pet. iii. 5. ko(tixik6s, i], 6v, (i) terrestrial, opp. to iirovpdvios, Heb. ix. i ; (2) worldly, i.e., vicious, Titus ii. 12. kSctuios, ov, orderly, decorous, i Tim. iL 9, iii 2. Kofffio-Kp&Twp, opos, 6, prince of the world, appl. to evil spirits, Eph. vi. 12 ; or (?) to worldly rulers, as supporters of heathenism. KSfffjLos, ov, 6, {j) ornament, decoration, I Pet. iii. 3 ; hence (2) the material universe, Luke xi. 50, as well ordered and beautiful; (3) tlie loorld, John xi. 9 ; the world, in opposition to the heavenly and the good, John viii. 23 ; (4) tlie inJtabitants of the world, I Cor. iv. 9; ($) the present life, as distinguished from life eternal ; (6) a vast collection, of anything, James iii. 6 ; 2 Pet. ii. 5. Kovdpros, ov, 6 (Latin, see 159), Quartus, Rom. xvi. 23. Kovixi (a Hebrew imperative, in Greek form). Arise. Kovarwdia, as, 7], (Latin, see 154, 0), custodia, a guard. Matt, xxvii. 65. Kovs, contr., Kpdots), r6, pi., Kptara, Kpia, fiesh, flesh-meat, Kom. xiv. 21 ; I Cor. viii. 13. Kpeia), to wallow, or roll, Mark ix. 20. KvwSs, 71, 6v, crippled, lame, especially iu the hands, Matt. xv. 30, 31. 76 VOCABULARY. [Kvfia — Xa{i.pdvc* icD/ua, aros, neut., a wave, a billow, Matt. viii. 24 ; Acts xxvii. 41. icifi^aKov, Oil, r6 {kv/jl^os, hollow), a cymbal. K6iiivov, ov, r6 (from Heb.), cumin. Kvvapiov, ov, t6 (dim. of kvwv), a little dog, a cur. Matt. xv. 26. Kiirpios, ov, 6, a Cyprian, or Cypriot. KjJirpos, ov, 7], Cyprus. tciirTw, \J/«, to bend, to stoop down, Mark i. 7 ; John viii. 6. 8. Kvfnjvaios, ov, 6, a Cyrenian. Kvpjtvn, -qs, v, a prop, name, Gyrene, a city of Africa. Kvpiivios, ov, d, a prop, name, Cyreniv^ or Quirinus. Kvpia, as, r}, Cyria (a proper name), z John I, 5. KvpiaK6s, ii, 6v, of, or pertaining to the Lord, Christ, as the supper, 1 Cor. xi. 20 ; the day, Rev. i. 10. Kvpifvw, evarw, to have authority, aha., to ride over, Luke xxii. 25 ; i Tim. vL 15. Kvpios, iov, 6, (i) a lord, possessor of, and having power over, a title of honour, Sir, i Pet. iii. 6 ; (2) The Lord (Heb., Jehovah); (3) 2'he Lord (employed in the Epp. con- stantly of Christ (see 217, b). Kvpi6T7js, TITOS, ri, lordship, dominion; plur. concr., lords, princes, Eph. i. 21 J 2 Pet. ii 10. KvpSw, u>, to confirm, ratify, GaL iii. 15; 2 Cor. ii. 8. Ki(t}u, Kvv6s, 6, V, o, dog, Luke xvi. 2 r ; fig'j 0/ shameless persons, Phil. iii. 2. Kw\ov, ov, r6, in plur. only; rcfc KuKa, Heb. iii. 17, , awos, 71, a whirlwind, a violent . storm. Aa/few and XrjKeu, to burst with a loud report. Acts i. 1 8. Aa/cTifcw (Ao|, adv., with the Jied), to kick, Acts ix." 5, xxvi. 14. AoAe'tw, u, Tja-o), (i) to speak, absolutely; (2) to speak, to talk, generally, with ace. of thing spoken, also with modal dat. and dat. of person addressed. Hence, according to the nature of the case, met,, to declare, by other methods than vivd voce, Rom. vii i, &c. ; to preach, to publish, to announce. See Synon)rms. XaKid, as, t}, (1) speecJi, talk, John viii 43 ; hence (2) report, John iv. 42 ; (3) manner of speech, dialect, Matt, xxvi 73. Kaixd, or Kafxiui. (Heb.), why. Matt, xxvii 46; Mark xv. 34 (Ps. xxii. i). \ap.B6.vu, \r}\popai (\r]iuL\l>opMt in MSS.), €l\r}(pa, €\aBou, (i) to take, as in the hand. Matt. xiv. 19; hence, (z) to receive, obtain, of things material or spiritual, to accept, "take up," Matt. X. 38 ; (3) to take by force, seize, Matt. xxi. 35; (4) to take away, violently or fraudulently. Matt. V. 40; (5) to choose. Acts xv. 14; {6) to receive, or accept, as a friend, and as a teacher ; (7) in certain Ad|j.€X — X^)t a receivinQy Phil. iv. 15. Xiav, adv., very mucJi, with adj., very. Matt. iv. 8. \i^avo5, ov, 6, frankincense^ Matt. ii. II ; Rev. xviii. 13. \i^av(ji}T6s, ov, 6, a censer for burning frankincense. Rev. viiL 3, 5. Xififprlvo^, ov, 6 (Lat.), a freed -man. Acts vi. 9. Probably Jews who had been slaves at Rome, after- wards freed. Ai&v-n, 7JS, 7), Libya, Acts ii. to, \i9dC(o, cw, to sionej to execute by stoning. \ieiyos, 7], ov, made of stone, John ii. 6 ; 2 Cor. iiL 3 ; Rev. ix. 20. \i6o-^o\f(o, S>, Tiffw, to throw stones at, so as to wound or kill, Matt. xxiii. 37; Mark xii. 4, \i6os, ou, 6, a stone, i.e., (i) loose and lying about, Matt. iv. 3, 6 ; (2) buiU into a wall, &c., Mark xiiL 2 ; (4) a precious stone. Rev. iv. 3 ; (5) a statue, or idol of stone. Acts xvii. 29. \i66-(TrpwTou, ov, r6 (prop, adj., strewed witk slane-s), tfie pavement, part of a Roman court of justice. XiKfidd), 0), TJao, to scatter, as corn in winnowing, to reduce to particles, that may be scattered, Luke xx. 18. Xi/i^v, ivos, 6, harbour^ Jiaven, Acts xxvii. 12. \ifiin/), rjy, tj, a lake, e.g., Gennesareth, l^uke V. I. KifJLos, ov, 6, (i) hunger, 2 Cor. xL 27; (2) a famine. Matt. xxiv. 7. hivuv, ou, t6, Jiax, linen made of flax. Rev. XV. 6 ; a lamp- wick. Matt. xiL 20. hlpos, or Aivos, ov, 6, Linus, 2 Tim. iv. 21. Mirap^s, d, 6v, sumptuous, precious, delicate, Rev. xviii. 14, Klrpa, as, tj, « pound weight, John xii. 3. \iyp, \i&6s, 8, the S. W. wind. Acts xxvii. 12. (To look ^^ down the S.W.," is to look toward the north- east.) \oyia, as, tj, a collection, t.e., of money, 1 Cor. xvi. I. 2. \oyl(ofiat, (Tofxat, dep. with mid. and pass, aor., (1) to reckon; (2) to place to the account of, to charge vntA, ace. and dat., or with cli (see 298, 6); (3) to reason, argue, to infer, conclude, compute, from rea- soning; (4) to think, suppose. \oyiK6s, 7}, 6v, rational, i.e., belonging to the sphere of the reason, Rom. xii. I ; I Pet. ii. 2. \6yiov, ov, t6, something spoken, in N.T., of divine communicatiorts, e.g., the Old Testament, Acts vii. 38 ; Rom. iii. 2 ; and the doctrines of Christ, Heb. v. 1 2 ; i Pet. iv. 1 1. \6yioi, ov, eloquent. Acts xviii. 24. Koyia-fi6s, ov, 6, (i) reasoning, tJiought, 2 Cor. X. 5 ; (2) counsel, the result of thought, Rom. ii. 15. \oyo-fiax^cD, w, to strive about words^ 2 Tim. ii. 14. \oyofjLaxla, as, ^, contention about words, "logomachy," 1 Tim. vi. 4. \6yos, ov, 6, (1) a speaking, a saying, a word, i.e., the uttering of the word. Matt. viii. 8 ; (2) the thing spoken, Matt. vii. 24, 26 ; whether doctrine, i Tim. iv. 6 ; prophecy, 2 Pet. i. 1 9 ; question. Matt. xxi. 24 ; a common saying, or proverb, John iv. 37 ; a precept, a command, John viii. 55; tlie truth, Mark viii. 38; conversation, Luke xxiv. 17; teach- ing, I Cor. iL 4; a narrative. Acts i. I ; a public rumour. Matt, xxviii. 15; an argument. Acts ii. 40 ; rt cluxrge, or accusation. Acts xix. 38; (i) recbson. Acts xviiL 14; (4) account, reckoning, Heb. iv. 13; Acts XX. 24; Matt. xviiL 23; Acts X. 29. l\.6yos is used by John as a name of Christ, the word of God, %.€., the expression or manifestation of his thoughts to man, John i. i, &c. Xo'YX'n — |ia0T]Tev w] VOCABULARY. 79 X6yx'n, vs, v> G, latice, a spear, John xix. 34. XotSopectf, cD, to revile, to rail at, to re- proach, John ix. 28; Acts xxiiL 4. \oiSopia, as, 17, reproach, reviling, 1 Tim. V. 14 ; i Pet. iii. 9. XoiSopos, ov, 6, one who rails at, a reviler, i Cor. v. 11, vi. 10. A6iju«^s, ov, 6, a plague, pestilence, Panl so called, Acts xxiv. 5. \oiir6s, i\, 6v, remaining, the rest. Matt. XXV. II ; adv., rh Konr6v, as for the rest, i Cor. i. 1 6 ; rov Kontov, from henceforth, Gal. vi. 17. AovKas, a, b (from l\.ovKav6s, see 159, d), Luke. AovKios, iov, 6 (Latin), Lucius. \ovTp6v, ov, t6, a hath, a washing, Eph. V. 26 ; Tit. iii. 5. \ov(o, a (JO, to bathe, to wash. Acts ix. 37; xvi. 33, to cleanse, to purify, E,ev. i. 5. AvdSa, rj$, ri, Lydda, Acts ix. 32, 53. AuSi'a, OS, T], Lydia, Acts xvi. 14, 40. AvKaovia, as, r}, Lycaonia, Acts xiv. 6. AvKaouia-Ti, adv., in the. speech of Lycaonia. AvKia, as, 7}, Lycia, Acts xxvii. 5. AiJkos, ov, 6, a wolf; fig., Acts xx. 29. Kvixaivoixai, to ravage, Acts viii. 3. AuTrew, w, to grieve; pass., to be grieved, saddened, to he aggrieved, or offtnded, Matt. xiv. 9 ; Eom. xiv. 15. Kvin], r]s, 7], gi/^^f sorrow, aversion, ■z Cor. ix. 7 ; cause of grief, 1 Pet. ii. 19. Avadvias, ov, 6, Lysanias, Luke iii. i. Avcxias, ov, b, Lysias. Averts, ews, 7], a loosening, divorce, I Cor. vii. 27. Au, (TOO, to loosen, as (i) lit., to unbind, Mark i. 7 ; Rev. v. 2 ; (2) to set at liberty; {i)to pronounce not binding, e.g., a law. Matt, xviii. 18 ; (4) to disobey, or nullify, the Divine word, John vii. 23, x. 35; (5) to destroy, e.g., the temj^le, John ii. 19 ; (6) to dismvis, i.e., an assembly, Acts xiii. 43. Aots, I'Sos, 7), Lois, 2 Tim. i. 5. AdoT, 6 (Heb.), Lot, Luke xvii. 28. M. M, [I, Mv, Mu, m, the twelfth letter. As a numeral, u' = ^o; jx= ^0,000. Maa0, 6 (Heb.), Maath, Luke iii. 26. Mtt7Sa\c{, ^ (Heb., Chald.), in MSS., Ulaya^tdv, Magdala, Matt. xv. 39. MaydahTiuTj, tjs, tj, Magdalene, i.e., a woman of Magdala. fiayeia, as, 7], magic, plur. . magic arts. Acts viii. II. ixayevw, (TOO, to practise magical arts^ Acts viii. 9. Mdyos, ov, 6, (1) magus, Persian astrologer, Matt. ii. i ; (2) a cod- juror, Acts viii. 9. Ma7w7, b (Heb.), Magog (see Vdy). Madidv, or MadidfjL, b (Heb.), MadiaUy or Midian, Acts vii. 29. fia67]Tivco, ato, (i) trans., to make a disciple of (ace), to instruct, Matt. xxviii. 19; Acts xiv. 21; (2) in- trans.,. to he a disciple. Matt. xxvii 57. m m 8C VOCABULARY. [na0i]Ti^S — |i.apTvp4« /*a0TjT^s, ov, 6 {ficwOdvu), a disciple. Matt. X. 24, xxii. 16, ix. 14; ol fiadrjTai, specially, the twelve. Matt. ix. 19. Had-r^Tpia, as, rj, a female disciple, Acts ix. 36. MadouffdXa, 6 (Heb.), Methmelah, Luke iii. 37. Ula'ivdv, 6 (Heb.), Mainan, Luke iii. 31. uaivofjLcu, dep., to be mad, to rave, John X. 20 ; Acts xxvi. 24, 25. HaKapi((a, f ut. , iw, to pronounce happy, congratulate, Luke i. 48 ; James V. II. fjuzKapios, ia, lov, happy, blessed, Luke i. 45, vi. 20; fiaKapiwTfpos, compar., Tnore happy, i Cor. vii. 40. naKapia-fMSs, ov, 6, congratulation, a pronouncing happy, Rom. iv. 6, 9. MaKidovia, as, ij, Macedonia. Maii€d(t>v, 6vos, 6, a Macedonian. HOLKiXKov, ov, r6, a slaughter-house, shambles, i Cor. x. 25. fiaKpdy, adv. (ace. of ixaKp6s, so. 656v), afar, fis preced.. Acts ii. 39 ; a.n6 folL, Acts xvii. 27. fianpSdey, adv., from afar, Mark viii. 3; with aTr6, as Matt. xxvi. 58. fiaKpo-dvfieco, w, ^n, gain, wealth (from Chald.). MavaTjj/, 6 (Heb.), Manaen), Acts xiii. I. Uavaffaris, gen. and ace, tj, b. Ma- nasseh. ixauddvo), jxad-fiarofiai, 2nd aor., cfiaOov ; perf., /xefiddriKa, to learn, to under- stand, to know, to be informed, to comprehend. Used abs., or with ace. (air6, Tropci (gen.), with the teacher, iu with example, i Cor. iv. 6.) fiayia, as, rj, madness, insanity. Acts xxvi. 24. fidpya, t6 (Heb.) manna (Heb., What is this ?), the food of the Israelites in the desert. fiavTevofjLai, dep., to utter responses, propfiecy, Acts'xvi. 16. fiapalya, avu>, fut. pass., fjuipav6-f}»] VOCABULARY. as alternately, one after another ; airS liepovs, partly ; Ik fiepovs, indivi- dually, of persons, partially, imper- fectly, of things ; KaTo, f^^pos, par- ticularly, in detail, Heb. ix. 5. aea-w^p'^a, as, rj, midday, noon, the south. Acts viii. 26, xxii. 6. Ix^aiTivo), (TO), to mediate, to he a mediator, to compose a difference, to intervene, to interpose, Heb. vi. 17. ^ietrtTT/y, ov, 6, a mediator, a legate, an interpreter of the will of another, Gal. iii. 19; Heb. xii. 24.; one who interposes between parties and recon- ciles them, I Tim. ii. 5. jjLfao-vvKrioy, lov, t6, midnight, Luke xi. 5. Meo-o-TTOTa/ifa, os, 7), a proper name, Mesopotamia, the region between the Euphrates and the Tigris. fieiros, t], ov, middle, of time or place, in the midst of (gen.), John i. 26 ; neut., rb fiicrov, the middle part; adverbial phrases, with prepositions (art. generally om. ), e/c ix4aov, from among, away. So iu fi^orcf, ava fxecrou, &c. (See preps.) u€a6-Toixov, ov, r6, a middle wall, a separation, Eph. ii. 14. fi^a--ovpdv7]ixa, aros, t6, mid-heaven, Eev. viii, 13, xiv. 6, xix. 17. fj.€(r6co, w, to he in tlie middle, or midst, John vii. 14. Me(r, to fill; pass., to he full of, gen., Acts iL 13. fierd (akin to fj-earos), prep,, gov. the gen. and accus. Gen., with, among; ace, after (see 301). With ace, fxtTo. indicates motion, succession. In composition, jttera denotes partici- pation, change, or succession, heing near to ; often like the Latin prefix tra7is, as in the words transfer, translate. fiera-^aivo), to go, or pass over, to pass away, to remove, Luke x. 7 ; Matt. xi. i /i(Ta-Pd\\ci), in mid., to change on£t mind. Acts xxviii. 6. (ler-ayw, to move, or turn about, as horses, ships, James iii. 3, 4. /xeTa-SiSu'^t, to impart, to communicate, Eph. iv. 28 ; & fierayiSovs, a dis- tributor of alms, e.g., of the church, Rom. xii. 8. /xerd-Oeffis, fas, 7), (i) a removal, a translation, Heb. xi. 5 ; (2) a change, or substitution, Heb. vii. 12. jx^T-aipb), to remove, intrans., to depart. Matt. xiii. 53. juera- KoAeoj, w, in mid., to call, or send for, to invite to oneself. Acts vii. 14. fiera-Kiveco, u, to move away, pass., to be removed. Col. i. 23. fiera-kafifidyw, to take a share of. Acts ii. 46; partake, gen., 2 Tim. ii. 6; to obtain (ace). Acts xxiv. 25. fifrd-Xiqyf/is, eas, rj, participation (pass.), 1 Tim. iv. 3. (lir-aKKdaaw, to clmnge, to put one thing for another, Kom. i. 25, 26 (eV, els). [x^Ta-fxcXopiai, fJ.f\ri, ii ^ (Heb., wlw (is) like God?), Michael, an archangel, Jude 9 ; Rev. xii. 7. fxva, as, Ti, a mina, silver money =100 Spax^tat, or about 3Z. 1 5s. ; of ac- count, Luke xix. 13, 16. fivdoixai (see {xi^ivricrKw). mvicrwv, uvos, 6, Mnason, Acts xxi. 16. fivela, as, rj, remembrance, recollection, Phil. i. 3 ; I Thess. iii. 6 ; ixveiav TTomffdai, to mention, to hear in mind, Rom. i. 9. IxyrjfjLa, aros, t6, a memorial, a monu- ment, a tomb, Mark v. 5; Luke xxiii. 53. nvfiixelov, ov, t6, a tomb, a grave. Matt. viii. 28 ; John xi. 31. (xviifXT), 7]s, 7], remembrance, mention; IJLvhmv iroLeia-Qai, to make mention, 2 Pet. i. 15. pivnixovevoi, to remember (Srt), recollect, call to mind (gen. or ace), Matt, xvi. 9 ; Acts XX. 31; to be mind- ful of Heb. xi. 15; to make men- tion of (gen., or irepi, gen.), Heb. xi. 22. pivi]!x6(Tvvov, ov, t6, a memorial, honour- able remembrance, fame. Matt. xxvi. 1 3 ; Mark xiv. 9. lxv7](TTev{a, to ask in marriage; mid., to woo ; pass. , to be betrothed. Matt. i. 18. fjioyi-KdXos, ov, one who can scarcely speak, a stammerer, Mark vii. 32. fjL6yi5, adv. (like ix6\is), with difficulty scarcely, hardly, Luke ix, 39. 86 VOCABULARY. [|Ji,<$8 lOS — pLupoS u6dios, ov, 6, a dry measure (16 sex- tarii), containing about a peck; a modins, Matt. v. 15; Mark iv. a i ; Luke xi. 33. fioixa^ls, ISos, 7], an adulteress, Eom. vii. 3 ; fig. for departure from God, Matt. xvi. 4 ; James iv. 4. fioixdofiai, wnat, to commit adultery, to be guilty of adultery. Matt. V. 32. fioixeia, oj, 71, adultery. Matt. xv. 19. fioixevo), , to form tlie image of a calf. Acts vii. 41. IxScrxos, ov, 6, Tj, a calf, a young bullock, Luke xv. 23 j Heb. ix. 12, 19. fiovffiKSs, "ii, 6v, skilled in wiAsic, a musician. Rev. xviii. 22. 1x6x^0%, ov, 6, wearisome labour, toil, with pain and sorrow, 2 Cor. xi 27; I Thess. ii. 9 ; 2 Thess. iii, 8. fxv€\6s, ov, 6, the marrow, Heb. iv. 12. juve'o), «, to instruct, to initiate intOf Phil. iv. 12. IxvOos, ov, 6, a word, hence a tale^ fable, or figment, 1 Tim. iv. 7, "myth." fivKaofxai, ufxai, to low, to bellow, as a bull, to roar, as a lion, Rev. x. 3. fivKT7]plC(o, to contract the nostrils in contempt, to mock, sneer, or deride. Gal. vi. 7. (ivKikSs, it, 6v, pertaining to a mill, Mark ix. 42. IxvXos, ov, d, a millstone. Matt. xviii. 6. fivKcov, S>vo5, 6, a mill-house, the place where corn was ground, Matt. xxiv. 41. /xvpids, dSos, 71, cb myriad, ten thousand, a vast multitude (gen.), indefinite, Luke xii. i ; Acts xxi. 20. fivpi^o), a-co, to anoint, for burial, Mark xiv. 8. fxvpioi, at, a, ten thousand. Matt. xviii. 24 ; fivploi, iai, *Ia, innume- rable. fivpov, ov, r6, a perfumed ointment^ Matt. xxvi. 7. Mi'o-fa, OS, 7], Mysia, Acts xvi, 7. /jLVffriipiov, iov, t6, a mystei'y, anything hidden, a secret. Matt. xiii. 11 ; Rom. xi. 25. Often in N.T. of the truths of the Gospel as mysteries revealed, i Tim. iii. 16. /iuwTrci^co, to wink, to be dim-sighted, 2 Pet. i. 9. /««>A«t|/, wttos, 6, the mark of a stripe; met., pain, anguish, i Pet. ii. 24. fxwfiao^iai, ufxai, dep., aor., raid, and pass., to blame, to find fault witfi, 2 Cor. viii. 20. fxufios, ov, 6, a spot, a blemish; met., disgrace, 2 Pet. ii. 13. |Jl6)paiV0i) V€4)€Xt|] VOCABULARY. 87 ficopaivw, avu, to infatuate, to mahe foolvih, I Cor. i. zo; pass., to he- come foolish, Eom. i. 22 ; to become insipid, tasteless, like spoiled salt, Matt. V. 13. jxwpia, OS, 7}, folly, absurdity, con- temptihleness, i Cor. i. 18, 21, 23. fiMpo-Aoyla, as, 7), foolish talking, babble, Eph. v. 4. Ii.(»p6s, a, 6v, stupid, foolish. Matt, vii. 26, xxiii. 17, 19; as subst., a wicked, graceless, abandoned person. Matt. V. 22 ; rh fiaphv, foolish- ness. But see 153, ii. Moxr^s, or Ma)j>o-7js, ecoy, dat., u, or y) ace. irji' (once e'a, Luke xvi. 29), d, Moses, met., the books of Moses, thePento^eztc/i, Lukexvi. 29; 2 Cor. iii. 15, &c. N. N, r, yv, nu, n, the thirteenth letter. As a numeral, 1/ = 5c ; ^x/ = 50, 000. Haaacrdov, 6 (Heb.), Naasson, Matt, i. 4; Luke iii. 31. Na77ai, 6 (Heb.), Naggce, Luke iii. 25. "Na^apeO, or Na^apeV, ^, Nazareth. I^a(ap7tv6s, ov, 6, a Nazarene, as Mark i. 24.^ Na^ctjparos, ow, b, a Nazarene, an ap- pellation of Christ. Christians are called 01 Na^ccpaloi, Acts xxiv. 5. Na0av, 6 (Heb. ), Natlian, Luke iii. 3 1. tia^apaiiX, 6, Nathanael, probably the same as Bartholomew. vai, adv., affirming, yes, Matt. ix. 28; even so, Matt. xi. 26 ; Luke x. 21 ; Kev. xxii, 20 ; yea, strongly affirm- ing, Luke vii. 26. NaiV, 17, Nain, Luke vii. 1 1. vaos, ov, 6 [vaica), a temple, a shrine, or small model of a temple, the abode of deity, pretended. Acts xix. 24; the temple. Matt, xxiii. 16; used of Jesus Christ, John ii. 19, 20 ; of Christians generally, i Cor. iii. 16; 2 Cor. vi. 1 6. See Syno- nyms. tiaovfx., 6 (Heb.), Nahum, Luke iii. 25 (not the prophet). vdpdos, ov, 7], nard, spikenard, a costly ointment, Mark xiv. 3 ; John xii. 3. NapKiaaos, ov, 6, Narcissus, Rom. xvi. 1 1. yav-ayeoo, u {&yvvfxi), to make ship- wreck, to be shipwrecked, 2 Cor. xi. 25; fig., I Tim. i. 19. vav-K\7]po9, ov, 6, a ship-muster, or owner. Acts xxvii. 11. vavs, j/ecos, acc. vavv, rj, a ship. Acts xxvii. 41. vavTrjs, ov, 6, a sailor. Acts xxvii. 27, 30. 'iiax(^p, 6 (Heb.), Nahor, Luke iii. 34. vtavias, ov, 6, a young man, a youthy Acts XX. 9 ; one in the prime of lifey Acts vii. 58. veaviaKOi, ov, 6, a young man, Matt, xix. 20 ; plur., of soldiers, Mark xiv. 51; of the middle stage in the divine life, i John ii. 13, 14. NectTToAty, ewy, rj, Neapolis. Neefxdu, 6 (Heb.), Naaman, Luke iv. 27. veKp6s, d, 6v, dead, (i) lit., as Matt, xi. 5 ; 01 veKpol, the dead generally ; (2) fig., dead, spiritually, Eph. ii. i; inactive, inoperative, Rom. vii. 8 ; unaffected by, or utterly indifferent to (dat.), Rom. vi. ii. v€Kp6w, w, to put to death — so, to "mortify" — to deprive of power, to render weak, and impotent, Rom. iv. 19; Col. iii. 5; Heb. xi. 12. viKpcaa-is, ecas, t], death, a being put to death, 2 Cor. iv. 10 ; deadness, im- potency, Rom. iv. 19. vios, a, ov, (i) new, fresh. Matt, ix. 17 ; new, in disposition and cha- racter; (2) young, of persons, Titus ii. 4. Compar,, vedorepoT, younger, Luke XV. 12, 13. See Synonyms. viO(Ta6s, ov, 6, the young of birds, a youngling, a chicken, Luke ii. 24. ve6T7]s, rjTos, 7], youth, youthfulness, Luke xviii. 21 ; i Tim. iv. 12. vc6-^vTos, ov, newly -planted ; fig., a recent convert, "neophyte," i Tim. iii. 6. yeuw, i\ri, Tjs, 7), a clovd. 88 VOCABULARF. [Ne<}>9(xX€f)i. — v<$p.ur|ia f^efeaXdfjL, 6 (Heb.), Naphthali, Matt. iv. 14; Rev. vii. 6. vf(t>os, ovs, t6, a cloud; met., a mul- titude, a great company, Heb. xii. i. vf, to warn, to admonish, to counsel. Acts xx. 31. vov-firimC', ots, Ti, the new moon, or month, as a festival. Col. ii. 1 6. vovv-exci>s, SudiV., under standingly, wisely, judiciously. Matt. xii. 34. vovs, or vo6s, vov, vol, vovv, 6, the mind, i.e., the understanding, or in- tellect, Luke xxiv. 45 ; Rom. xii. 2 ; Phil. iv. 7. Hence, any affection of the mind — as modes of thought — inclinations, or dispositions, Rom. xiv. 5; 1 Cor. i. 10; presence of mind, 2 Thess. ii. 2 ; more widely, the rational soul, with its powers and affections, Rom. vii. 25. Nvfji.(l>as, a, 6, Nymphas, Col. iv. 15. vvfKprj, 7JS, Tj, a bride. Rev. xviii. 23 ; a daughter-in-law. Matt. x. 3 5. vvfKpios, ov, 6, a bridegroom, John iii. 29. vvfxcpdou, uvos, 5, a bridal chamber ; viol rod vvfx, to nod, as asleep, to be drowsy. Matt. xxv. 5; fig., to de- lay, 2 Pet. ii. 3. vvxd-r}ix€pov, ov, t6, a day and a nighty twenty-four hours, 2 Cor. xi 25. NcSe, 6 (Heb.), Noah. vo)Qp6s, a, 6v, slow, dull, stupid, Heb. V. II, vi. 12. VWTOS, ov, 6, the back of men or animals, Rom. xi. 10. 90 VOCABULARY. [a-60(Jn E, {, Is xi, X, or gs, the fourteenth letter. As numeral, I' = 60 ; ^ = 60,000. ^tvia, asy r], hospit.ality, entertainment, a lodging, Acta xxviii 3 ; Philem. az. {6>/iX«, trw, (i) to receive as a guest (ace); pass., to he. entertairmi, to lodge as a guest witli, Acts x. 6, xxi. 16; (2) to appear strange to. Acts xvii. 20 ; pass., to think strangely of, to he surprised at (datj, I Pet. iv. 12. {ero-Soxfw, «, to entertain guests, to practise hospitality, i Tim. v. 10. IcVos, ?7, oj/, strange, foreign. Acts xvii. 18; 1 Pet. iv. iz ; with gen., Eph. ii. 12; as subst., a stranger, a guest, a host, Kom, xvi. 23. ^4arrji, ov, 6 (the Latin sextarius), a measure, about a pint and a half English ; met. , a cup, or pUcher, of any size, Mark vii. 4, 8. Itipcdvo), avS>, ist aor., i^-fipava, perf. pass., i^-fipafifiai, to dry, to make dry, to wither, James i. 11 ; pass., to be or hecome dry, wiHiered, Matt, xiii. 6 ; to he dried up. Rev. xvi. 12 ; to 6e ripened, as corn, Rev. xiv. 1 5 ; to pine away, Mark ix. 18. ^'r]p6s, d, 6v, dry, withered, as a tree, Luke xxiii. 3 i ; as a diseased and useless limb, Matt. xii. 10 ; Luke vi. 6, 8. ^vMvos, ivf], ivov, wooden, 2 Tim. ii. 20. IvKov, ov, t6, wood, e.g., timber in building, i Cor. iii. 12; or for burn- ing ; anything made of wood, e.g., Hie stocks. Acts xvL 24; a staff, Matt xxvi. 47, 55; « cross, or gibbet, Acts xiii. 29; Gal. iii. 13; a living tree. Rev. il 7. ^vpdot, w, i]vw, perf. pass., i^^prjfMu, to shear, or shawe, e.g., the locks and the beard, Acts xxL 24; i Cor. XL 5, 6. O. O, 0, hfiiKpSv, omlcron, short o, the fifteenth letter. As a numeral, 0' = 70 ; ^0 = 70, 000. 6, ^, T(o), intr^ns., to emit an odour j John xi. 39. '6Qev, adv. , whence, of place or source. oQ6ini, rjy, v, « linen cloth, hence, a sfieet. Acts x. 1 1. SBoviov — oXi-yiJ-tf/vxos] VOCABULARY. 91. o66viov, ov, r6 (dim. of oddvrj), a linen swathe, a bandage, Luke xxiv. 12. oUa (fi5-), / know (see 103, 4). otKeitt/co's (see 01/cio/cJs). otKctoy, o, ov, domestic, pertaining to a family, Eph. ii. 19; associated with, geu., Gal. vi. 10. ot/ceVrjj, ov, 6, one living in the house with, a domestic, a servant. oi/ceo), cD, i](TO), to inhabit, to dwell in, Rom. viii. 9; i Tim. vi. 16. oXKTjfxa, aros, t6, a dwelling, used of a prison. Acts xii. 7. oiK-nTrjpiov, ov, t6, a domicile, of the spiritual body as the habitation of the soul, 2 Cor. v. 2. oiKia, as, 7], (i) a house; (2) met., a household, a family, goods, i.e., a house and what is in it. olKiaKSs, ov, 6, otie of a family, whether child, relative, or servant, Matt. X. 36. oiKo-deffiroTfo}, w, to govern a house- Iwld, 1 Tim. V. 14. otKo-Seo-TrJrTjs, ov, 6, a householder, a head of a family, Matt. x. 25. olKo-dofx4o}, w, to erect a building, Luke | xiv. 30; to rebuild, to found, to establish ; fig. , of increase in know- ledge and piety, i Cor. x. 23; to encourage, to embolden, 1 Cor. viii. 10. olKo-SofiT}, 71$, 7] {Se/Mco), « buHding, structure, of the spiritual body, 2 Cor. V. I ; of the church, Eph. ii. 21 ; met., edification, spiritual advancement, E.om. xv. 2. oi/co-5o/x.ia, as, t], edification, 1 Tim. i. 4, rec. (prob. olKovoixiav). olKovQjx'ia, as, management of family affairs, stewardship, an "economy," or dispensation. olKo-vSfios, OV {v€fj.(a), a house manager, a steward, an administrator of funds for another ; often of the Christian stewardship. sSkos, ov, 6, a house, a building, for any purpose (gen. ) ; met. , a family resident in one house, a family per- petuated by succession, the house of God, i.e., the temple; the family of God, i.e., the church. otKovfxevT}, 7JS, pres., part., pass., fem. (-7^) of oIkcw, the inhabited land, or world, of (i) tlie Roman empire; (2) prob. the Syrian province, Luke ii. i; (3) the world at large; {%) met., the inhabitants of the tvorld ; (5) a state, or economy, Heb. ii. 5. olK-ovp6s, ov, 6, 71 {odpos, keeper), a house-manager, Titus ii. 5. oiKreipoa, riaw, to pity, to have com- passion, Rom. ix. 15; LXX. olKTip(x6s, ov, 6, kindness in relieving sorrow. Col. iii. 1 2 ; favour, benignity, compassion, Rom. xii. i. oiKripfiuv, ovos, 6, 7], pitiful, compas- sionate, merciful. olfxai (see olofiai). oivo-ir6r7is, ov, 6, a wine-bibber, one who drinks to excess. Matt. xi. 19. ohos, ov, 6, wine, Mark ii. 22, &c. ; met., the vine. Rev. vi. 6; fig., of that which excites or inflames, Rev. xiv. ic, xvii. 2. olvo-cpXvyia, as, Tf {tpxia), to be hot), the state of being heated with wine, oXofiai and o?/iai, to think, to suppose, ace. and inf., or '6ti. oXos, a, ov, rel. pron. correl. to roiov' ros, of what kind, or sort, olco (see , iiffw, to be slothful, to delay, to be loth. Acts ix. 38. 0KV7]p6s, d, 6v, slothful, indolent, tedious, Rom. xii. 11 ; Phil. iii. i. oKTa-7](xepos, ov, 6, 7), of or belonging to the eighth day, Phil. iii. 5. oKTcij, num. indecl., eight. o\e6pos, ov, 6, destruction, perdition. misery, i Cor. v. 5. oXiyo-TciffTos, ov, 6, 7], of little faith. Matt. vi. 30. oKlyos, 7], ov, (i) little, small, brief, (2) in plur., few, sometimes with gen.; (3) neut. as adv., bxiyov, of time, soon; of space, a little way ; (3) with prepositions preced. in various phrases, as eV oxlycp, in st short time, or with little trouble. Acts xxvi. 28. o\i'y6-y^vxos, adv., small-souled, faint- Jiearted, 1 Thess. v. 14, 92 VOCABULARY. [6Xi7-»pl« — ^*OvTi(ri-4>opoS oXiy-wpiai, w, to make little of, to despise (gen. ), Heb. xii. 5 ; LXX. oKodpevrrjs, ov, 6, a destroyer, i Cor. x- 10. oXoQpevo}, to destroy, caiise to perish, Heb, xi. 28. dKo-KavTWfm, aros, t6 (fcofw), a burnt offering, the whole being consumed, "holocaust," Mark xii. 33. d\o-K\7]pia, as, i], perfect soundness. Acts iiL 16. 6\6-K\rjpos, ov, whole in every part, sound, perfect, i Thess. v. 23 ; James i. 4. o\o\v(fi), as from the cry, oK-o\ ! to howl, to yell, to lament aloud, James V. I. oKos, 77, ov, all, the whole (see 225 ; adv., -us, wivolly, altogether ; with ueg.^xeGedi.,notataIl. 6\o-T€h.r]s, 4s, perfect, complete, i Thess. V. 13. 'OAvfj-TTcis, a, &, Olympas, Kom. xvi. 1 5. 8\vvdo5, ov, 6, an unseasonable fig, one which, not ripening in due time, hangs till nearly "ynnter, Rev. vi. 13. ofiPpos, ov, 6, a heavy rain, Luke xii. 54. hfiiKiO), a, rij-ira9i)s, ovs, d, t], being affected like another (dat.), having like pas- sions, or fedings. Acta xiv. 15 ; James v. 1 7. o^oios, oia, oiov, like, similar to, re- sembling (dat.), ofequcd rank. Matt, xxii. 39. Once with gen., John viii. 55. Adv., -as, in like munner, likewise 6fjLoi6Tr]s, 7JT0S, 7], likeness, similitude, Heb. iv. 15. 6fxoi6a), u, {i) to render like. Matt, vi. 8 ; pass. , to be like, or to re- semble, Matt. xiii. 24 ; (2) to liken, to compare. Matt. vii. 24 ; Mark iv. 30 ; with ace. and dat. dfiolu/jLo, arcs, r6, likeness, similitude, Phil. ii. 7 ; Eev. ix. 7 ; Rom. V. 14. See Synonyms. Sju-oicoais, eus, t], likeness, reaemblancCf James iii. 9. vfjLo-\oy4(a, S), -flaw, ist aor., &fji.o\6- Atjco, to speak (he same thing, hence, (i) to confess, in the sense of conceding or admitting, generally with on; (2) to profess, or acknow- ledge openly, ace, once with iv, Matt. X. 32; (3) as i^ofioKoyea), to praise, to give thanks (dat.), Heb. xiii. 15. d/xoXoyia, as, r], a profession, either the act of professing (Heb. iii. i), or (generally) the truth professed, Heb. iv. 14. SfxoXoyovfxevws, adv., by consent of all, confessedly, without controversy, . I Tim. iii. 16. ^^J-T€x»'os, ov, of the same art, or craft, Acts xviii. 3. Sfiov, adv., together, at the same place or time. bjx6-, (TO), N.T., mid., to arm one- self with, ace, fig., I Pet. iv. i. UttXov, ov, t6, an instrument. Hence plur., (i) arms, armour, John xviii. 3 ; (2) instruments, Rom. vi. 13. biToios, oia, oiov, relat. pron., of what kind, or manner, i Cor. iii. 13 ; correL to ruiovros, Acts xxvi. 29. 6ir6T€, part, of time, when, Luke vi. 3. tJTTou, adv. of place, where, whither; where, referring to state, Col. iii. 1 1 ; whereas, i Cor. iii 3. oTTToivo}, in pass. , to appear (see opaco). OTTTaa-ia.^ as, 7], a vision, a supernatural appearance, Luke i. 22, xxiv. 23 ; 2 Cor. xii. I. oirT6s, r], 6v, roasted, broiled, Luke xxiv. 42. oTTTo/xai (see Spaa). OTT-dopa, as, 7) (perh., ottSs, juice), the autumn, autumnal fruits. Rev. xviii 14. '6irus, rel. adv., how, Luke xxiv. 20. As conj., in such manner that, to the end that, so that ; with av. Acts iii. 19 (see 384, 2). After verbs of beseeching, and the like, with demonstrative force, that. Matt. ix. 38 ; Mark iii. 6. Upcifxa, aros, r6, (i) a spectacle, Acts vii. 31; (2) a vision. Acts ix. 10, 12. dpdprj(Tis, fas, the sense of smelling, the organ of smelling, i Cor. xii. 17. 6a€Xos] VOCABULARY. 95 ov {ovK before a vowel, ovx if the vowel is aspirated), no, not (see 134, 401). ova, inter j., ah/ aha I derisive, Mark XV. 29. ovai, inter j., wo! alas! uttered in ^rief or indignation, i Cor. ix. 16; Matt. xi. 21 ; r] ovai, as subst., Kev. ix. 12, a woe, a calamity. So/icSs, adv., by no means, not in anywise. ov-5h, conj., disj. neg., neither, nor, not, not even (see 401). oifS-ils, ovSefiia, ouSeV, neg. adj., not one, no one, none, nothing, of no moment, of no value, vain. ovde-TTOTc, adv., not ever, never, 1 Cor. xiii. 8, Matt. vii. 23. ouSe'-TTO), adv., not ever yet, not yet, never, Luke xxiii. 53. ovK-iTi, adv., 710 furtlier, no more, no longer. ovK-ovv ; adv. , not so then ? interrog. , or oijKovy, ironical, John xviii. 37, art thou not then a king ? 01J fx-f], an emphatic negative (see .377). odu, conj., therefore, then, Matt, xii. 12. Employed espec. (i) in arguing, i Cor. iv. 16 ; (2) in ex- hortation, Matt. xxii. 9, 17, 21 ; (3) in interrogation, Matt. xiii. 27 ; Gal. iii. 19, 21 ; (4) to resume an interrupted subject, Mai'k iii. 31 ; and (5) to indicate mere transition from one point to another, most frequently in John, as viii. 13. oij-ircD, adv. , not yet, Matt. xv. 1 7. oypd, a$, T], the tail of an animal. ovpdvios, ov, heavenly, celestial, in, or pertaining to heaven, Luke ii. 13; Acts XX vi. 19. ovpav6dev, adv. , from heaven. ovpay6s, ov, b, heaven, (i) of the visible heavens (both sing, and plur.), through their whole extent, the atmosphere, the sky, the starry Jieavens ; (2) the spiritual heavens, the abode of G od and holy beings, ? Matt. vi. 10 ; 2 Cor. xii. 2; "the third heaven," above the atmo- spheric and the sidereal; met., for the inhabitants of heaven. Rev, xviii. 20 ; especially for God, Luke XV. 18. Ovp^av6s, ov, 6, Urban, E.om. xvi. 9. Ovpias, ov, 6, Uriah, Matt. i. 6. ovs, u)r6$, t6, (i) the ear. Matt. x. 27; (2) met., the faculty of apprelcen- sion. Matt. xi. 15. ovffia, as, 7) i&p), substance, wealth, Luke XV. 12, 13. ot-Te, conj., not even, Mark v. 3 ; nor, with a negative preced. ouTos, aiJTTj, TovTo, dcmoustr. pron. , this (near), appl. to })ersons and things, sometimes emphatic, Matt. V. 19; sometimes contemptuous, this fellow. Matt. xiii. 55 (see 338 — 342 ; also eKs7vos and oSe). ovTws (and before a consonant in some edd., ovTCti), adv., thus, in this wis^ so, (i) in reference to anteceden or following statement ; (2) corre lative with ws or Kaddas, so ... as, (3) qualifying adjectives, adverbs, or verbs, so, Heb. xii. 21 ; Matt, ix. 33 ; ovTtas ... ovtws, I Cor. vii. 7, in this manner and that. ovxi, adv., (i) an intensive form ot ov, John xiii. 10, by no means, no, nay ; (2) interrog., as Matt. v. 46, expecting an undoubtedly affirma- tive answer. o^eiXeTTjs, ov, a debtor. Matt, xviii. 24; one who owes morally, i.e., to the law, e.g., obedience. Gal. v. 3 ; a delinquent. Matt. vi. 12. (xpeiX-f], ^s, V, a debt, a duty, Matt, xviii. 32 ; Rom. xiii. 7. 6(peiXriixa, aros, r6, a debt, what is justly due, Rom. iv. 4 ; fig., an offence, a fault, a failure in duty. Matt. vi. ,12. 6(j>€i\i\ov (see 378), interj., thai! I wish ! would that ! i Cor. iv. 8 ; Gal. V. 12. otpeXos, ov-s, t6 (o, to disturb, to vex, only in pass., Luke vi. 18. oxA-o-TTOiew, CO, to gather a crowd, Acts xviL 5. SxAos, ov, 6, a crowd, the common people, the multitude, plur., crowds. dx-'poiiJ-a, aros, r6, a fortress, a strong place of defence, 2 Cor. x. 4. oT^idpiov, ov, t6 (a relish with bread), a little fish, John vi. 9. oi^e, adv., late in the evening, Mark xi. 19; at the end of, after, gen., Matt, xxviii. i. l^ifios, ov, latter, of the raiu, James V. 7. i^^ios, la, lov, late, Mark xL 11; as subst., ^ 6\l/ia, evening, i.e., the former of the two evenings reckoned among the Jews, Matt. viii. 16 ; the latter evening is mentioned, Matt. xiv. 23 ; comp. ver. 15. i^is, (COS, 7], the aspect, the countenance, John xi. 44; external appearance, John vii. 24. o^civiov, ov, r6 ("relish, sauce"), like 6yf/dpiou), (i) plur., the rations of soldiers, their wages, Luke iii. 14 ; 1 Cor. ix. 7. Hence, (2) recom- pense, generally, Horn. vi. 23 ; 2 Cor. XI. 8. IT. IT, nl, pi, p, the sixteenth letter. As a numeral, tt' = 80 ; pr = 80, 000. 7ro7tS6i;c«), (ru, to ensnare, to lie in wait for, fig.. Matt. xxii. 15. Ka-y'is, Idas, r), a snare, a trap, Luke xxi. 35 ; a device of Satan, 1 Tim. iii. 7 ; cause of evil, or destruction, Rom. xi. 9. Trdd-niMt, aros, t6, {1) suffering, ojjliction, (2) affection of mind, passion, Rom. vii. 5 ; Gal. v. 24. ira077T, in mid. , to pass along, by, or aioay, 1 John ii. 8 ; to disappear, 1 John ii. 17; I Cor. vii. 31. ■fropo-5€i7/40TiXw, to make a public ex- ample of, to expose to ignominy. Matt. i. 19; Heb. vi. 6. UapaZiiffos, ov, 6 (a Persian word, "garden," "park"). Paradise, Luice xxiii, 43 ; 2 Cor. xii. 4 ; Rev. ii. 7. iropo-Sexo^ot, dep., mid., to receive, admit, approve, Mark iv. 20 ; Acts xvi. 2 1 ; Heb. xii. 6. irapa-ha-Tpi&ii, r^s, r}, useless occupation, or agitation about trifles, 1 Tim. vi. 5. irapa-Uhcani, acc. and dat., (i) to de- liver over, as to prison, judgment, or jmnishment. Matt. iv. 12; spec, of the betrayal by Judas ; (z) to hand over, entrust, as the talents, &c. ; (3) to surrender, abandon one's self, Eph. iv. 19; (4) to commend to kindness, Acts xiv. 26 ; (5) to recount, tell, Luke i. 2 ; to insti-uct. Acts xvi. 4; (6) to give, or prescribe, as laws, &c.. Acts vi. 14 ; (7) prob. to permit, in Mark iv. 29, wlitn the frmt jyei'mits, or allows. Trapi-Zolos, ov, strange, wonderful, Luke V. 26 ("paradox"). ■jrapd-So(ri5, €ws, i], an instruction, or tradition. Matt. xv. 2 ; 1 Cor. xi. 2; 2 Thess. ii. 1 5, iii. 6. xapo-^7jA(Ja>, w, to ezcite to emidafion, Uom. xi. II, 14; to jealousy, Kom. x. 19 ; to anger, 1 Cor. x. 22. irapa-eoKdaaios, by the seaside, Matt. iv. 13. 7rapa-6fupf(D, w, to overlook, neglect, Acts vi. I. irapa-drjK'n, 77s, ^, a deposit, anything committed to one's charge, i Tim. vi. 20 ; 2 Tim. i. 12, 14. Tco.p-a.iViu>, w, to exiiort, admonish. Acts xxvii. 9, 22. irap-aireofiai, ovfiai, dep., mid., (i) to deprecate, to beg off; (2) to decline, to endeavour to avoid. Acts xxv. 1 1 ; Heb. xii. 19 ; (3) to refuse, to reject; (4) to excuse oneself, Luke xiv. 18, 19. irapa-KadiCco, intrans., to sit by the side of, Luke x. 39. TTopa-KotAew, w, etrw, (i) to send for, in- vite. Acts xxviii. 20 ; (2) to beseech, entreat, Mark i. 40; (3) to exhoi-t, admonish. Acts xv. 32 ; i Tim. vi. 2 ; (4) to comfort, 2 Cor. i. 4 ; pass., to be glad, to rejoice, Luke xvi. 25. TTapa-KaKviTTca, to veil, to hide, Luke ix. 45. irapa-KaTa-O-fjKT], r]s, 7], a trust, a de- posit, I Tim. vi. 20 ; 2 Tim. i. 14. Trapa-KeLfiai, to be at hand, Rom. vii. J 8. vapd-KXrja-is, €ws, tj, a calling for, "a summons to one's side." Hence, (i) exiwrtation, Heb. xii. 5 ; (2) en- treaty, 2 Cor. viii. 4; (3) encourage- ment, Phil. ii. I ; (4) consolation, Rom. XV. 4 ; met., of the Consoler, Luke ii. 25; {5) generally, of the power of imparting all these, Acts iv. 36. irapd-K\7]Tos, ou, 6, (i) an advocate, Intercessor, 1 John ii. i ; (2) a consoler, comforter, helper, John xiv. 16; "paraclete." irap-aKOT], i)s, rj, disobedience, Rom. V. 19 ; 2 Cor. X. 6. vap-aKo\ov64w, S>, i)(T(a, (i) to follow closely, to accompany (dat.), Mark xvi. 17; (2) to follow so as to trace oujt, to examine, Luke i. 3 ; to adhere to, I Tim. iv. 6 ; to imitate, z Tim. iii. 10. nap-uKovu, to hear negligently, to dis- regard. Matt, xviii. 17. irapa-KvTTTu, »|/«, to stoop down to (fis); fig., to search into, James i. 25. rapa-Xa|xpdv&> — irdpSaXis] VOCABULARY. 99 irapa-Ka.jj.&ava, K'i\i^oixai, (i) to take to oneself, to take with one, to assume, obtain; (2) to take upon oneself, to engage in; fig., to receive intel- lectually, to learn, Mark vii. 4 ; to assent to, to acknowledge, to seize, to take, to carry captive. Trapa-Atjca, N.T., in mid,, to Jay one's course near, in sailing, Acts xxvii. 8. Trap-akios, ov, adjacent to the sea, on the coast, Luke vi. 17. Tap-aXKayi], tjs, t], change, vicissitude, James i. 17. Trapa-Xoyi^ofjiai, dep., to impose upon, to delude, ace. , Col. ii. 4. irapa-KvriK6s, ^, 6v, palsied, "para- lytic," in the whole or a part of the body. irapa-Xvo), t) relax, to enfeeble, only perf., part., pass., TrapaX^Kvpiivos, enfeebled, ' ' paralyzed. " ■jrapa-piSua), pt-^vS), to remain [by, dat. or TTpos, ace), to abide; fig., to remain constant in, James i. 25. irapa-pivdeopLai, ov/xai, dep. mid., to speak kindly to, to cheer, to en- courage. Trapa-pLvdia, as, v, encouragement, com- fort, I Cor. xiv. 3. Trapa-p.vdiov, lov, t6, comfort, Phil. ii. i. TTapa-vopLiw, So, abs., to act contrary to law, Acts xxiii. 3. Trapa-vopLia, as, 7], violation of law, transgression, 2 Pet. ii. 16. ■jrapa-iriKpaivw, auSi, ist aor., irapevi- Kpdva, to provoke {God) to anger; so, to rebel, Heb, iii. 16. Trapa-'jriKpa(rpL6s, ov, 6, provocation (of God) J so, rebellion, Heb. iii. 8, 15. irapa-iriirTd), 2nd aor., Trapeneffou, to fall away from, Heb. vi. 6. irapa-irXia, S) (f), eiaopLai, to sail past, ace. Acts XX. 16. TTapaTrK-fjo-iov, adv., near to (gen.), Phil, ii. 27. TrapaTrXrjffioos, adv., likewise, in like manner. ■jrapa-TTopevopLai, dep. mid., to pass by, to pass along by. irapd-TTTcopLa, aros, r6 {ttItttci)), a falling awayj or aside, a transgression. See Synonyms. irapa^-pica, (f), ^ivaopLai, 2nd aor. pass., Trapeppvrju, pass., to be borne away from, to lose, Heb. ii. i. irapd-oTjpi.os, ov, marked on the side {with, dat.). Acts xxviii. 11. ■Kixpa fFKeva^b}, cru), perf., mid., irape- ffKevaa-pLai, to prepare, to make ready. Acts X. ic; mid., to prepare one- self I Cor. xiv. 8 ; to be in readinesSy 2 Cor. ix. 2. Trapa-CKfUTj, rjs, r], a preparation, i.e. the time immediately before a Sab- bath or other festival, the eve. Matt, xxvii. 62. Trapa-reivw, to extend, to prolong. Acts XX. 7. Trapa-TTjpeco, S), ■i]a irap-6ijtii, to he near by, to he present, to licive come; part., irapciv, present; rh irapSv, the present time; to ■sapSvra, pi^esent things, e.g., pos- sessions, Heb. xiii. 5. Tap-etcr-d^w, |a, to introduce, to bring in clandestinely, 2 Pet. ii. i. Trap-dff-oKTos, ov, brought in clajides- tinely, surreptitious. Gal. ii. 4. vap-^KT-hvb}, or -vva, v(Tu>, to come in by stealth, to enter secretly, Jude 4. ■rap-ucr-fpxo/JLai (see 103, 2), (0 to enter clandestinely, Gal. ii. 4; (2) to come in addition, to be sui>eradded, Ivora. V. 20, vap-fi(r-(p4pci}, to bnng in besides, super- raduce, z Pet. i. 5. Trao-eKT6s, adv., on the outside, besides; TO irapeKTSs, things in addition. With a gen. following, except, Matt. V. 32. xap-€fjL-&oXrj, Tjs, tj (^SoAAw), (i) a camp, Heb. xiii. 11, 13; (2) soldiers^ quarters, Acts xxi. 34, 37 ; (3) the encam]yments of Israel in the wilder- ness, Heb. xiii. 1 1 ; (4) an army in an-ay, Heb. xi. 34. 7rop-€i/-oxA.e«, S>, to cau^e disturbance to, to disquiet (dat.), Acts xv. 19. irap-€irl-^7]fji.os, ov, residing in a strange counti-y ; as subst., a stranger, foreigner, Heb. xi. 13. vap-epxo/Jiai (see 103, 2), (i) to pass by, with ace. of pei*s. or place; (2) to pass, elapse, as time ; (3) , to smite, to strike, to smite to death, to afflict, Acts xii. 23. vario), w, i\ody, 2 Thess. iii. 11. irepi-epyos, ov, act., overdoing, inter- meddling, 1 Tim. V. 1 3 ; pass. , over- wrought, curious. Acts xix. 19. TTcpi-epxofjiai (see 103, 2), to go about, Acts xix. 13 ; Heb. xi. 37; to tack, as a ship. Acts xxviii. 1 3. trepi-^xo, to encompass ; so, to contain, as a writiag. Acts xxiii. 25 ; in- trans., to 5e contained, 1 Pet. ii. 6; to seiae, as astonishment, Luke v. 9. irepi-^ctiuyu/xi (see 114), to griro? oneself around, pass., perf., part., ^ir^, Luke xii. 35. ireoi-dea-Ls, ews, ^, a putting around, i.e., ornaments, i Pet. iii. 3. TTtpi-iffT-nfii, (see 107), in intrans. tenses of act., to stand around; mid., to stand aloof from (ace), 2 Tim. ii. 16 ; Titus iii. 9. irepi-Kdeapfia, aros, t6, refuse, offscour- ing, I Cor. iv. 13. ■jrepi-KaXviTTOi), to cover round about, to cover, as the face. irepi-Kitfj-ai, to lie about, surround, dat., or irepi, acc. ; to be encompassed, or surrounded with, acc. Trepi-Kf(pa\cda, as, 7], a helmet, 1 Thess. V. 8. Tr€pi-KpaT-f)5, es, being entire master of, Acts xxvii. 16. Trepi-KpvTrrco, to hide entirely, Luke i. 24. Trepi-KuK\6(a, u, to encircle, surround. TTcpi-KafxTTU}, to shine around. •jrept-AetTTftj, to leave; pass., to survive, I Thess. iv. 15, 17. ire/i-XvTTos, ov, greatly sorrowful. TT^pL-jxevo), to await (acc), Acts i. 4. Tre^r^, adv., 7'ound about; with art., circumjacent. Acts v. 1 6. Trepi-oiKeo), u, to dwell around, to be neighbouring to (aoc). Trepl-oiKos, ov, neighbouring, Luke i. 58. irepiovo-ios, ov, svperabundant, peculiar, Titus ii. 14 (LXX.). ^ irepi-ox'h, VS, V (see Trepte'xw), a section, or passage, of Scripture, Acts viii. 32. irepi-iraTeo}, cc, i]eca, to walk, to walk about, to roam, as animals for prey; fig., as Heb., to pass one^s life, to conduct oneself [adv. or nom. pred.), to live according to {iv, dat. ; koto, acc. ). wepi-Treipu}, to piei'ce through, transfix, fig., I Tim. vi. JO. TrepL-ir'nrTO}, to fall into the midst of (dat.), as robbers, Luke x. 30; and temptations, James i. 2. irepi-irot4(o, w, N.T., in raid., to get for oneself, i Tim. iii. 1 3 ; to reserve, to Xmrchase. irepi-TTolria-is, eas, tj, (i) an acquisition, I Thess. V. 9 ; (2) a preservation, Heb. X. 39 ; (3) a possession pur- chased, Eph. i. 14; I Pet. ii. 9. TTspi^-^yvvfii, to tear off, as garments, Acts xvi. 22. irept-airdo), w, "to drag around f hence, fig., pass., to be distracted in mind, Luke x. 40. irepicrada, as, rj, abundance, super- fluity ; ih irepicrffeiav, as adv. irepi(rpov€co, CO, to look down upon, to contemn, to despise. nepi-xopos, ov, circumjaxent ; as subst. {t)), the country round about, the inhabitants of such a country. Matt, iii. 5. Trept-if/Tjjiia, aTos, t6, scrapings, scum. -jrepTTfpevoixa.1, dep., in trans., to vaunt, 1 Cor. xiii. 4. Uepa-Ls, idos, r], Persi% Rom. xvi. 12. vepviTi, adv., during the year just passed, a year ago. vtraonai, ufxai, or viTOfJLui, to fly, as a bird. 'iTeriiv6v, ov, t6, a bird, a fowl; only in plur., the birds. ireVo/xo* (see veTaofjLai). irerpa, as, 7], a rock, with art., the rocky substratum of the soil, other- wise, any large block of stone ; met. for caverns. Rev. vL 15; fig. , Rom. ix. 33. See also Matt. xvi. 18. Uirpos, ov, 6, Peter, Greek for the Heb. (Chald.) kepha, rock. Same with trhpa, but with the termina- tion of a masc. name. ireTpwdris, (s, rocky, stony. Matt, xiii. 5 ; Mark iv. 5. ■jr-fiyauoy, ov, t6, rue, Luke xi. 42. ■rrr}yf}, rjs, r}, a fountain, source, well; fig. of "the water of life," ajiow, of blood, Mark v. 29. 'irfiyvuixt, 7n^|w, to fix, as a tent, Heb. viii. 2. Ttri^a.Xiov, iov, r6, the rudder of a ship. Acts xxvii. 40. TTT/Aj/coy, 7j, ov, how great, Heb. vii. 4 ; how large, Gal. vi. 7 (see ypafifia). TTTjA-Js, ov, b, clay, mire, mortar, John ix. 6 ; Rom. ix. 21. ir-Zipa, as, r}, a bag, wallet, for carrying provisions. irrjxvs, fas, o, a cubit, the length from the elbow to the tip of the middle finger. TTLoiCco, , only N.T., in pass., to he assured of, 2 Tim. iii. 14. irXavdco, cD, ija-co, to lead astray, to cause to wander; fig., to deceive; pass., to he misled, to err, to mistake. ■trXdvTf], 77s, 7], wandering, fig., deceit, delusion, error. ir\av^T7]s, ov, 6, wandering; tt., intrans., to have more than enough, to superahound; trans., to increase, to cause to abound. TrXeov-eKTeca, u> (ex«), to have more than another, to desire to have more, so, to defraud ; pass., to he deluded, 2 Cor. ii. 1 1. irXfov-eKr7]s, ov, 6, a covetous or avaricious perscm, one devoted to carnal lusts, a libertine, Eph. v. 5. TrXeov-eiia, as, 7], covetousness, avarice, inordinate lust, Eph, iv. 19. ■TrXevpd, as, tj, the side of the Jiuman body, John xix. 34. irAew (see irX7]d(i}). TtXeco (f), impf., eTrXeov ; fut., irXeiao- fiat ; to sail, with ace. of direction, Acts xxvii. 2. TrXTjyft, Tjs, 7} {7rX7}(T(TU}), a stroke, a stripe, a wound. Acts xvi. 33 ; Eev. xiii. 14; an affiiction. Rev, ix. 20. 106 VOCABULARY. [•7rXfj0o vX^dos, ovs, t6, (i) a multitude, crowd, throng; (2) population, Acts xiv. 4; (3) a quantity, Acts xxviii. 3. vXrfdvuw, vS>, (1) intrans., to increase; (2) trans., to multiply, augment; pass. , to he increased. ttAtjOco (or TriixirXruii), irX-i]aw ; ist aor. pass., iirKriad-qv, (i) to fill {with, gen.); fig., of emotions, as Luke iv. 28 ; or of the Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 4; (2) pass., to he fulfilled, as time, Luke i. 23. TrArJ/cTTjs, ov, 6, a striker, a conten- tious person, 1 Tim. iii. 3 ; Titus i- 7- TrXrujLfjLvpa, as, tj, afiood, an inundation, Luke vi. 48. irXi/iu, adv. (akin to 7r\eW), besides, moreover, except; as prep, with gen., besides, excepting. TTA^prjy, €s, {i)full, abs., Mark iv. 28; {z)full of (gen.), abounding in. Tr\7ipo-(popeco, w ((pcpa), (i) to h'ing to completion, hence, to perform per- fectly, 2 Tim. iv. 5 ; or to bring to a close, perh. Luke i. i ; (2) to fill with conviction, hence, pass , to he fully persuaded, E,om. iv. 21. vX-npo-fpopia, as, t), fulness, entire pos- session, full conviction or assurance. vXripSo}, w, d!)cr(i), to fill (material, by gen. ), to fill up, to pervade, to com- plete, either time or number; to bestow abundantly, to furnish libe- rally, Phil. iv. 18 ; Eph. iii. 19 ; to accomplish, to perform fully, as prophecies, &c. ; pass., to be full of, 2 Oor. xdi. 4 ; Eph. v. 18; to be made full, complete, or perfect, John iii. 29 ; Col. iv. 12. rrXT^pwfjLa, otos, t6, fulness, plenitude, i.e., that which fills, '1 Cor. x. 26, 28 ; so, the full number, Kom. xi. 25; the completion, i.e., that which makes full. Matt. ix. 16; the fulness of time. Gal. iv. 4, is the com})letion of an era ; the fulness of Chrut, Eph. i. 23, that which is filled by Christ ; Hie fulness of the Godhead, all Divine attributes. nX-naiov, adv., near, near by; with the ai-t., b vXrjffiov, a neighbour. irXriffixoin^, ^s, t], the full satisfying, Col. ii. 23. irXija-a-o}, |w, 2nd aor. pass., iirXifiy-qv, to smite, Rev. viii. 12. irXotdpLOV, iov, t6 (dim. of irXotov), a small boat, as the fishing boats on the lake of Galilee. irXolov, ov, t6, a ship, a vessel, a bark, large or small. irx6os, ovs, gen., ov, or 06s, navigation, voyage. Acts xxi. 7 ; xxvii. 9. nXovcrios, la, lov, rich, abounding in {iv); adv., -ws, richly, abundantly. Col. iii. 16. nXovTcw, u, T^ffca, to become rich, to be rich, to abound in. irXovTi^co, to make rich, to enrich, to cause to abound in. ttXovtos, ov, 6 (see 32, a), riches, wealth, abundance; spiritually, en- richment, Rom. xi. 12. TtXvpoo, vSi, to wash, as garments, Eev. vii. 14 (xxii. 14). Ttvevfj.a, arcs, t6, (i) properly, the wind, or the air in motion, John iii. 8 ; hence, (2) the human spirit, dist. from arUfMa and ^vxii, 1 Thess v. 23 ; (3) a temper or disposition of the soul, Luke ix. 55; Rom. viii. 15; (4) any intelligent, incorporeal being, as (a) the human spirit, separated from the body, the undying soul ; {b) angels, good and bad ; (c) God, the immaterial One, John iv. 24; {d) THE Holy Ghost (see 217, /). Used of the infiuence of whidi tJie Holy Ghost is tlie author, in respect of Jesus, Luke iv. i ; Acts x. 38, in respect of prophets and apostles ; and in respect of saints generally, Eph. i. 17. irvfVfiaTiKSs, 7f, 6v, spiritual, (1) relating to the mind, not corporeal; (2) to the disposition or gifts imparted by the Holy Spirit, i Cor. ii. 13, 15; TO vvevfiaTtKo, spiritual gifts, i Cor. xiL I ; adv., -ws, spiritually, i.e., (i) mystically. Rev. xi. 8; (2) by the aid of the Holy Spirit, i Cor. ii. 14. wft'co (f), fvacD, to blow, as the wind, to breathe. trvi-yw — ir<5|j.a] VOCABULARY. 107 TTvlyo), to choke, to seize by the throat. Try I KT 6s, 17, 6v, strangled. TTj/oTj, 7]s, T), (i) breath. Acts xvii. 25; (2) a breeze, or blast, Acts ii. 2. iroSr^pTjy, es, reaching to the feet; as subst., a long robe, Rev, i. 13. Todiv, adv., interrog., whence, of place — as, from what quarter ? Matt. XV. 33 — from what cause; how? Matt. xiii. 27. Indicating surprise, admiration, &c., Luke i. 43 ; also strong negation, Mark xii. 37. iroia, as, 7], grass, herbage, James iv. 14 (or fern, of ttolos, wltat!). Ttoiica, w, r^aco, (i) to make, i.e., to foi^m, to bring about, to cause; spoken of religious festivals, &c. , to observe, to celebrate; of trees and plants, to germinate, to produce ; to cause to be, or to become. Matt, xxi. 13 ; to declare to be, John viii. 53 ; to assume, Matt, xii, 33 ; (2) to do, generally, to do, i.e., habitually, to perform, to execute, to exercise, to practise, i.e., to pursue a course of action, to be active, to work, to spend, to pass, i.e., time, or life, Acts xv. 33. trolrifia, aros, r6, a thing made, work- manship. TToirjffis, ews, t], doing, James i. 25. TToi-nTrjs, ov, 6, {i) a maker, doer (Rom. ii. 13); (2) a poet. Acts xvii. 28. TToiKiXos, 71, OV, various, of different colours, diverse, iroifiaivu, avS), (i) to feed a flock, Luke xviL 7 ; hence, (2) to tend, to nourish, cherish, Jude 12 ; of pas- tors. Acts XX. 28 ; {i) to rule. Matt, ii. 6 ; Rev. ii. 27. Troiixi]v, evos, 6, (i) a shepherd; (2) tig. , a pastor. Used of Christ and of his ministers. ■noifxvT), Tf\s, 7], (i) a flock of sheep; (2) a band of Christ's discijyles. TToifxviov, iov, t6 (dim. of Troifj.v7}), (1) a little flock; (3) Christ's flock, i.e., discipl&i. volos, TToia, iro7ov, a correl. pron. cor- responding with ohs and ro7os, wliat ? of what kind, sort, species ? wfuzt one ? which ? I 7rti\ejuew, £, 7](T(i3, to make war, to con- tend (/JLerd, gen.), to quarrel. TrShe/jLos, ov, b, (1) war, a .war ; (2) a battle; (3) strife. 7t6Kis, eojy, t], a city, a availed town; met., the inhabitants of a city ; with art. , the city Jerusalem, the heavenly city, of 'which Jerusalem was a symbol. 7ro\iT-a.pxy\s, ov, 6, the ruler of a city, a city magistrate, ' ' politarch, " Acts xvii. 6, 8. TToKiTcia, as,' 71, (i) citizenship. Acts xxii. 28 ; (2) a state, or common- wealth, Eph. ii. 12. TToXirev/jLa, aros, r6, a community, as of a city, a commonwealth, Phil, iii. 20. TToXiTfia), in mid., to be a citizen; hence, to live, i.e., to order one's life. Acts xxiii. i ; Phil. i. 27. iroAiTTjj, ov, 6, a citizen, an inhabitant of a city. Acts xxi. 39; with gen., aiiTov, a fellow- citizen. TToXkcLKis, adv., many times, often. TToWa-irXaaiwv, ov, gen., ovos, mani- fold, many times more. 7ro\v-Aoyia, as, % much speaking, loquacity. Matt. vi. 7. iroXv-fiepccs, adv., in many parts, in manifold ways, Heb. i. 1. ttoXv-ttoIkiXos, ov, very varied, mani- fold, Eph. iii. 10. TToKvs, TtoKKT], TToKv (sec 39, 2), mary^ numerous; ttoKv, much, greatly, as adv. ; TToWoi, many, often with par- titive genitive, or e/c ; 01 iroAAoi, the many (see 227); ttoAAo, in like manner, Tnuch, very much, ofttn, many times; 7roAA o> harlot, a prostitute; fig. in Rev., an idolatrous com- munity. vSpyos, ov, 6, one who prostitutes him- self, an impure person. v6^p (Acts xvii. 7), |«, pf., neirpaxa, iriirpayfiai, (i) to do, per- form, accomplish, with ace. ; (2) to be in any condition, i.e., to fare. Acts XV. 29; Eph. vi. 21; (3) to exact, to require, e.g., money lent, or tribute, Luke iii. 13; xix. 23. irpavs, -vTt]s (see irpS-os, -6t7]s). TT/jeVet, impers. (see 101), it becomes, it is fitting to, dat. irpea-^eia, as, 7}, an embassy, ambas- sadors. irpeaBevu, aco (lit., to be aged, elder men being chosen for the office), to act as ambassador, 2 Cor. v. 20. Trpea-^vTfpLou, iov, to, an assembly of elders, the Sanhedrim, Luke xxii. 66 ; officers of the church assembled, I Tim. iv. 14. irpiaBvrepos, repa, repov (compar. of Trpea^vs, old), elder, (i) in age, Acts ii. 17 ; i Tim. v. i ; plur., often, ancestors, as Heb. xi. 2 ; (2) in dignity and office, whether of the Jewish community (Matt. xvi. 21); or the Christian (Acts xx. 17), " Presbyter." ■jrpea^vTTjs, ov, 6, an old man, Luke i. 18. irp«T&vTi5, idos, 7], an aged woman, Titus ii. 3 . vprjvfjs, es, prone, falling headlong. Acts i. 18. irpi^co, or TTpicj, ist aor. pass., ^irpiTSriv, to saw, to kaw asunder, Heb. xi. 37. TTpiv, adv., of time, before, as conj, in N.T,, with or without ^, sooner than; generally with ace. and inf., also with subj. aor. (as fut. perf.), Lulie ii 26 ; opt. in Act3 xxv. 16. lipiaKa, rjs, tj, and dim. npta-«iAAa, as, a prop, name, Prisca, or Priscilla. irpS, prep., gov. the gen., before, i.e., of place, time, or superiority (see 294). In composition, it retains the same meaning. TTpo-dyco, to go before, to lead the way, to precede, in place. Matt. ii. 9 ; in time, Mark vi. 45; part., irpodywv, preceding, jirevious, 1 Tim. i. 18; Heb. vii. 18. irpo-aipeca, «, N.T., in mid., to pi'opose to oneself, resolve, 2 Cor. ix. 7. irpo-aiTidofjLai, wfiai, to allege, or prove beforehand, Rom. iii. 9. irpo-aKovb), to hear before. Col. i. 5. irpo-afiapTavco, to sin before, 2 Cor. xii. 21, xiii. 2. TTpo-avKiov, ov, t6, the court before a building, tJie vestibule, Mark xiv. 68. TTpo-^aivca, to go forward. Matt. iv. 21 ; pf. part., nrpoQefirjKd^s, advanced in life, Luke i. 7. irpo-BdXXoa, to put forth, as trees their leaves, Luke xxi. 30 ; to thrust for- ward. Acts xix. 33. irpo^aTiKSs, % 6v, pertaining to sheep, John V. 2. Trp6$arov, ov, t6 {-npo^alva)), a sheep; fig., a follower of Christ. irpo-^ifidQa, au, to put forward, Acts xix, 3 3 ; to instigate. Matt. xiv. 8. irpo-^xdwca, N.T., in mid., to provide, Heb. xi. 40. irpo-ylvofxai, to be, or be done before, Rom. iii. 25. irpo-yiv'JxTKw, to know beforeliand. Acta xxvi. 5 ; of the Divine foreknow- ledge, Rom. viii. 29 ; i Pet. i. 20. rrpS-yvwais, ecos, 7], foreknowledge, Acts ii. 23 ; I Pet. i. 2. Tcpii-youos, ou, 6, a progenitor, plur., ancestors, i Tim. v. 4 ; 2 Tim. i. 3. Trpo-ypdipo}, \p(a, to write before, in time, Eph. iii. 3 ; to write up, exhibii before any one. Gal. iii. i ; to pre- ordain, Jude 4. vpo-lTjXos, ov, manifest to all, con- spicuous. TTpo-diSafii, (i) to give before, Rom, xi. 35; {2) to betray. See following word. 110 VOCABULARY. [irpo-8(5Ti]s — irpos irpo-BoTTjs, ov, 6, a betrayer, Lxike vi. i6; Acts vii, 52; 2 Tim. iii. 4. itp6-dpoiJ.os, ov, 6, i] (see Trporpexaj), a precursor, forerunnei', Heb. vi. 20. irpo-etSor, 2nd aor. of nrpoopau}. -irpo-elirov, 2nd aor. of Trp6(pr]fii, perf., TrpoeipTjKO. •jrpo-eATriXco, to hope before, Eph. i. 12. irpo-€u-dpxoiJ.ai, to begin be/ore, 2 Cor. viii. 6, 10. Trpo-iTT-ayyfKXo), in mid., to promise before, Eom. i. 2. irpo-4pxoiJ.ai (see 103. 2), (i) to go forward, advance; (2) to go befwe, precede, in time or place (gen. or ace. ) . Trpo-eroifidCco, (ra), to appoint before- hand, to predestine, E,om. ix. 23. ■n-po-ev-ayyeAl^ofiai, to foretell glad tidings. Gal. iii. 8. irpo-e'xw, in mid., to hold before one- self to be superior, Rom. iii. 9 (see 358). ^ 7rp()-7j7€o/xat, ovytiot, to take the lead, to lead onward by example, Rom. xii. 10. vp6-Q€(Tis, ecus, 1) {rLe-f]/xi), (i) a setting before ; ol &pToi rrjs irpodeaews, the loaves of the presentation, or th^ show bread, compare Heb. ix. 2 ; (2) a 2^^^dete)vnination, purpose. Acta xi. 23. TTpo-Oeafnos, ia, tov, set beforehand, ajypointed before. Gal. iv. 2. irpo-dufjLia, as, t], alacrity, willingness. rrp6-dvfji.os, ov, predisposed, ready, willing. Matt. xxvi. 41 ; rb ■jrp6- dvfiov, alacrity, Horn. i. 15; adv., -us, readily, with alacrity^ 1 Pet. V. 2. vpo-ta-Tijfii, act., 2nd aor. and perf., and mid., (i) to preside over, to govern, gen. ; (2) to care for, prac- ti.se, gen. , Titus iii. 8. irpo-KoAeoj, w, in mid., to ^jrovo^e, stimulate. Gal. v. 26. 7rpo-/caT-o77cAAa), to announce before- hand, to promise. Trpo-KUT-apTlCw, to make ready before- hand. iTp6-Kfi/xai, to lie, or be placed before, to be proposed, as duty, example, re- ward, &c., Heb. vi. 18; to be at hand, to be present, 2 Cor. viii. 12. irpn-ia]pv(r, to announce, or preach beforehand. Acts iii. 20. irpo-Koin^, 77s, rj, urging forward, fur' therance, advance, Phil. i. 12, 25. irpo-KSTTTC}, to make progress in (dat. or iv); to advance to (ivl, ace); of time, Rom. xiii. 12; to be advanced, or far spent. irpd-Kpifia, aros, t6, a forejudging, pre- judice, I Tim, V. 21. irpo-Kupoo), w, to establish, or ratify before. Gal. iii. 17. irpo-XafjL^dvci), to take before, anticipate; pass., to be ovei'taken, or caught. Gal. vi. I. 7rpo-A€7a), to tell beforehand, forewarn. Trpo-fjLapTvpoiJLai, to testify beforeJiand, to predict, 1 Pet. i. 11. vpo-fieXerda, w, to care for beforehand, to jrremeditate, JjVLke xxi. 14. irpo-fiepifxvda), St, to be anxious, or solicitous beforehand, Mark xiii. 11. irpo-voiu, S), to perceive beforehand, to provide for, gen. ; in mid. , to pro- vide for oneself, to practise, ace. irpS-voia, as, i], providence. Acts xxiv. 3 ; care for (gen.), Rom. xiii. 14. TTpo-opdo), u), 2nd aor., vpoelSov, to see beforeJiand, Actsxxi. 29; Gal. iii. 8; mid., to have befoi'e one's eyes. Acts ii. 2<; (LXX.). 7rpo-opiC«j io predetermine, to pre- ordain. Acts iv. 28 ; Rom. viii. 29 ; I Cor. ii. 7 ; Eph. i. 5, 11. TTpo-Trdcxw, to suffer beforehand, 1 Thess. ii. 2. irpo-irifx-KO), to send forward, to accom- pany, to bring one on his way. irpo-TreTi^s, e'j {Triirra)), precipitate, head- long, rash, irpo-iropevoixai, aofxai, in mid., to pre- cede, to pass on before (gen.), Luke i. 76. vpSs (see 307), prep., gov. gen., dat, and accus. cases, general signif., towards. In composition, it de- notes motion, direction, reference, nearness, addition. irpo-o-aPparov — Trpo(r-Kvv6«] VOCABULARY. in vpo-ad^PaTov, ov, t6, the day before the Sabbath, Mark xv. 42. vpoa-ayopevaf, to address by name, to designate, Heb. v. 10. vpoff-dyot, (i) trans., to bring to, to bring near ; (2) in trans., to come to, or toivards, to approach. vpoa-ayuyi], ^s, 7), approach, access, Kom. V. 2 J Eph. ii. 18, iii. iz {ds, irpSs, acc). irpofr-aireco, Si, to beg, to ask earnestly. irpoff-a'iTijs, ov, 6, a beggar, a mendicant. irpoff-ava-^aivo), to go up to (a more honourable place), Luke xiv. 1 o. TTpoff-avaKiffKu, to consume over and above, to spend further. vpo(r-ava-ir\r]p6(a, u, to f II up by adding to, to supply abundantly (acc). vpo, a>, to permit, or suffer furtJier, Acts xxvii. 7. Trpocr-eyyiCco, to approach, to come near to (dat. ), Mark ii. 4. vpoa-eSpivoo, to wait upon, to minister to, dat., I Cor. ix. 13. irpocr-epydCofjLai, dep. mid., to gain by labour in addition, Luke xix. 16. vpoa-4pxop.ai (see 103, 2), (i) gene- rally, to come, or to go to, abs., or dat. of place or person, to visit, to liuve intercourse with; (2) specially, to approach, to draw near to, God or Christ, Heb. vii.. 25 ; (3) to assent to, concur in, i Tim. vi. 3. irpoar-euxf), rjs, V, (0 prayer to God; (2) a place where prayer is offered^ an oratory, "proseucha," Acts xvi. 13. 16. vpu^p» 'irfHKT-Kvvt]TT]s, ov, 6, tt worsIiippeT, John iv. 23. irpoa-'KaXiu, 5>, to speak to, to converse with, Acts xiii. 43. irpoff-\a/j.pduco, N, T., mid., to take to oneself, i.e., food, companions, to receive to fellowship, Rom. xiv. I. Trp6a-\7)il/is, €0)5, 7), an assuming, a, taking to oneself, a reception, E,om. xi. 15. TTpoff-fieva, to continue with or in, to adhere to (dat.), to stay in (iv) a place. 'po io he grieved, or offended with (dat.), Heb. iii 10, 17 (LXX.). •KpSff-ireLvos, ov (Treiva), very hungry), irpoa-irfryvvfxi, to affix, to fasten, applied to Christ's beiug fastened to the cross, Acts ii. 23. ■jrpo(r-vi'jrTa), (i) to fall doivn before (dat. or vp6s, ace); (2) to rush against (dat.). Matt. vii. 25. vpoff-voifU), w, in mid., to fashion one's self to; hence, to pretend (inf.), Luke xxiv. 28. vpoff-iropeiofMi, to come to, approach (dat.). TrpoT-priyvvfii, to dash against, as waves, Luke vi. 48. irpo(r-rd(Taa), |(», abs. or ace, and inf., to enjoin (ace.) upon (dat.); pass., perf., part., constituted. vpo-ffTdTis, L^os, 7], a patroness, Rom. xvi. 2. vpoff-rierifit, to place near, or by the side of to add to (dat. or ini, dat. or ace); mid., with inf., to go on to do a thing, i.e., to do again, Acts xii. 3 ; Luke xix. 11. So ist aor., pass., part., Luke xix. 11 (see 399, d). vpo(T-Tp4x<^, 2nd aor., irpoaeSpafiov, to run to, Mark x. 1 7. vpo(T-(pd'ywv, ov, r6, anything eaten with bread, as fish, meat, &c., John XXL 5. Trp6-a, to touch lightly, Luke xi. 46. vpofp{t>, to bring forUi, Luke vL a*?. . irp<5-4)T) |ii — in>KV<$s] VOCABULARY. 113 •Kp6-(priixi, perf., irpoeipijKa ; 2nd aor., irpoe7TTov; to say before, i.e., at an earlier time, Gal. i. 9 ; in an earlier part of the discourse, 2 Cor. vii. 3 ; or prophetically, Mark xiii. 23. Trpo-cpTiTcia, as, r/, ( i) the gift of pro- phecy ; (2) the exercise of the gift. So piur., prophecies. vpo-^riTivo), acD, to be a prophet, to prophesy, to foretell, to forth-tell, or speak of Divine things ; of false prophets, Matt. vii. 22 ; to divine, used in mockery, Matt, xxvi 68. vpo-riris, ihos, rj, a prophetess, Luke ii. 36 ; used of a pretended pro- phetess. Rev. ii. 20. ■jrpo-\4», £>, iiau, to seU, to trade, Matt. xxi. 12. vwXos, ov, 6, a youngling, a foal, or colt, as Matt. xxL 2. ira-TOTf, adv. , used only after a nega- tive, not yet even, not ai any time. vwpSu, w, ffw, to harden, to render cullous, fig. vdpwais, «a>s, rj, hardness, of heart, callousness. TTus, an enclitic particle, in a manner, by any means. vus, adv., interrog., how? in what manner ? by what means ? Also in exclamations, as Luke xii. 50; John xi. 36 ; with subj. or opt. {dv), implying a strong negative, Matt. xxvi. 54; Acts viii. 31. Often (N.T.) in indirect interro- gations (classical, oTroas) Matt. vi. 28, &c. P. P, p, ftu>, rho, r, and as an initial, p, rh, the seventeenth letter. As a numeral, p' = 100 ; fi= 100,000. 'Pa<£)8, or 'Vaxd&, rj (Heb.), Bahab. 'Pa$^l, 6 (Heb.), "Rabbi," my master, a title of respect in Jewish schools of learning. pafi^ovi, or ^aMowl, 6 (Heb.), like pafffil, but of higher honour, my great master. fiafiSiCo, iffco, to scourge, to beat with rods, Acts xvi. 22 ; 2 Cor. xi. 2 5. pdfiSos, ov, 7), a wand, rod, staff. Rev. xi. I ; I Cor. iv. 21 ; Matt. x. 10; a rod of authority, a sceptre, Heb. i. 8. pa^Z-ovxos, ov, 6 (ex^). ^^ liolder of the rods, a Roman officer, lictor, Acfs xvi. 35, 38, 'Pa7aD, 6 (Heb.), Ragau, Luke iiL 35. fxf.di-ovp'yijiJ.a, oToy, r6 (pdStos, easy, and ipyov, " an easy or careless deed"), a7i act of villainy, Acts xviii. 14. Pa^i-ovp-yia, as, i], craftiness, villainy. Acts xiiL 10. 'Pa/cd (Heb., Chald. form), JRaca f a term of contempt. Matt. v. 22 (see 153, ii.). puKos, 0V5, t6 {priyvvui), a remnant torn off, apiece, Matt. ix. 16. 'Pofia, 7] (Heb.), dat, -^ Rama, Matt ii. 18. pavrLlta — p(ovvv|i,i] VOCABULARY. 115 pavTiCo}, (aa), to sprinkle, to cleanse ceremonially (ace.) by sprinkling, to purify from {aTr6). pavTia^ils, ou, 6, sprinkling, purifica- tion. j5o7r/^a>, iaco, to smite with the hand, distinguished from pa^UCa). pAiTKTixa, aros, t6, a blow with the open hand, a slap. paTa$ax6avi (Chald.), sabachtham, thou hast, or hast thou forsaken me ? Matt, xxvii 46 ; Mark xv. 34 ; from the Chaldee rendering of Ps. xxii. I. K dat., *(Tt{y), at, Sardis, Rev. L II. adpSivos, ov, 6, see next word. adpZiov, lav, r6, a sardine stone, blood or fresh coloured ; or carnelian. , irjcw, to keep silence, to keep a secret, Luke ix. 36; pass., to be concealed, Rom. xvi. 25. (Tiyv, 7)s, ^, silence. aiSijpeos, 4a, €ov, contr., ovs, d, oHv, madeofi7'on, Acts xii. 10. aiS7]pos, ov, 6, iron. Rev. xviii. 12. 2i8c6j/, S)vos, 7), Sidon. 2iSaij'iys, la, 6v, Sidonian, inhabitant of Sidon. aiKdpios, iov, 6 (Lat.), an assassin. Acts xxi. 38. a'lKepa, t6 (Heb. Chald. form), strong, intoxicating drink, Luke i. 15. XiXas, dat. o, ace. av, d, Silas, contr. from Silvanus. "SiiXnvavSs, ov, 6, Silvanus. '^.tXcudfji., 6, Siloam, or Siloah, Luke xiii. 4 ; John ix. 11. aifiLKii/dLov, iov, t6 (Lat., semicinctium), an apron, worn by artizans. Xijxav, avos, 6, Simon. Nine persona of the name appear to be men- tioned, (i) the Apostle Peter; (2) the Apostle Zelotes ; (3) brother of Jesus, Mark vi. 3 ; (4) Simon of Cyrene; (5) father of Judas Iscariot^ 118 VOCABULARY. [Siva — (TKopirfos (6) a "certain Pharisee," Luke vii. 40 ; (7) Simon, the leper, Matt. xxvi. 6 ; (8) Simon Magus, Acts viii. 9 ; (9) Simon, the tanner. Acts ix. 43. Possibly (2) and (3) were identical ; see also (6) and (7). Iiva, t6 (Heb.), Sinai. ffivoKi, 6&>s, t6, mustard, mustard-seed. (TivS^v, 6vos, 17, a linen cloth, a sheet or wrapper of linen. ffmdCca, to sift, as corn, to prove by trials and ajlictions, Luke xxii. 31. ffirevrSs, i], 6v, fed with corn, fatted. c mar 6s, rf, 6v, fed, nourished; ta ffiTiffTd, Matt. xxii. 4, fallings. oriTo-ficTpiov, iov, t6, a corn-ration, Luke xii. 42. cTiTos, ov, 6, wheat, corn ; rh alra, grain. 'Sixdp, see ^vxdp. liictiu, b or t6, Sion, the mountain ; met. (fem. ), for the city Jerusalem ; and fig., for tlie church, the spiritual Jerusalem. cittiiTiju, cD, if, to he silent, whether voluntarily or from dumbness ; to become still, as the sea, Mark iv. 39. rKavSakiCd), iffw, to cau^e to stumble, pervert, to grieve (ace); pass., to stumble, to be provoked, to be in- dignant. ffKdvSaKov, ov, t6, a snare, a stumbling- block; fig., a cause of offence, or perversion. CKaTTTO), ypw, to dig. , pass., perf., earKvX/xai, to trouble, harass, tire. CKvXov, ov, t6, spoil taken from a foe, Luke xi. 22. ffK(i)\r]K6-fipMTos, ov, eaten by worms, Acts xii. 23. (T/cccAtjI, 7]kos, 6, a gnawing worm; fig., torture. ffnapdySivos, Ivrj, ivov, made of emerald. ff/xdpayBus, ov, 6, an emerald, fffivpva, 17 s, 7], myrrh. 'SfM'upj/a, Tjs, 71, Smyrna. '2fjt.vpva7os, ov, 6, i], one of Smyrna, a SmyrwBan. ffiJLvpvl^co, to mingle with myrrh, Mark XV. 23. :S,6SofJLa, tt>y, rd, Sodom. ^oXoficav, or -fiwv, uvTos, or wvos, Solomon. aopos, ov, 6, a bier, an open coffin. a6s, ffi], (t6v, a poss. pron., thy, thine (see 56). (Tovddpiov, lov, t6 (Lat.), a napkin, handkerchief. 'Zowdvva, Tjs, 7], Susanna, Luke viii. 3- ffo(f)ta, as, 7), wisdom, insight, skill, human, Luke xi. 31; or divine, I Cor. i. 21, 24. ffo(^i^(a, la-o), to make wise, to enlighten; pass., to be devised skilfully, 2 Pet. i. 16. , 5}, data, to draw, to draw out, as a sword. ffire'ipa, 7]s, v, (1) a band or cohort of soldiers, the tenth part of a legion, Acts X. I J (2) a military guard, John xviii. 3, 12. (TTTetpw, (TTrepS, ist aor., etTTreipa; perf., pass., icrirappLai; 2nd aor., pass., iffTrdpTjy, to sow, or scatter, as seed; to spread, or scatter, as the word of God. AppKed to giving alms, a Cor. ix. 6 ; to burial, 1 Cor. XV. 42, 43 ; and to spiritual eflfort generally. Gal. vi. 8. ffireKovKdroop, opos, 6 (Lat.), a body guardsman, a soldier in attendance upon royalty, Mark vi. 27. orTreySo), to pour out, as a drink offer- ing, to offer in sacrifice. (nr4p/jLa, aros, ro, a seed, produce. Matt. xiii. 38 ; children, offspring, posterity, John vii. 42 ; a remnant. airepfio-\6yos, ov, 6, t}, a trifler. Acta xvii. 18; i.e., one who picks up trifles, as birds do seed. (TTreuSw, -ai, dep., with ist aor, pass., iaTTKayxv'^<^Hv, to feel com' passion, to have pity on (gen., or iiri, dat. or ace, once irept, Matt, ix. 36). 120 VOCABULARY. [cirXa-yxva — crroixcia flrirAe{7x»'o, av, ra, bowels; the inward parts, " the heart," t/te gentler emotions, Philem. 12. air6yyos, ov, 6, a sponge. (TTro^Ss, ov, 7], ashes. (Tiropd, as, 7], seed, 1 Pet. i. 23. ariropifMos, 6v, sown, neut. plur. ; to airdpLfia, corn-fields, Matt. xii. 1. arirSfjos, ov, 6, seed for sowing. a-7rovddCa>, daw, to hasten, to give dili- gence, to be in earnest (with iuf.). ffTTov^aios, aia, alov, diligent, forward ; adv., -cos, earnestly: neut. corapar., also as adv., 2 Tim. i. 17; -«s, PhU. ii. 28. airovhi], 7JS, Tf, (i) speed, haste; (2) diligence, earnestness. airvpis, iSos, ri, a hand-basket. ffrdSiov, ov, t6, pliir., ffTaSioi, at, (1) a stadium, the eighth part of a E-mail mile, John xi. 18 ; (2) a race-course or circus, for public games, i Cor. ix. 24. ardfivos, ov, 6, f), an urn, or vase, for the manna, Heb. ix. 4. a-rdais, €«s, r} (tVTTjjut)? ^ standing up; hence, (i) continuance, Heb. ix. 8 ; (2) an uproar, Mark xv. 7; (3) a contention, a violent controversy, Acts XV. 2. (TTariip, 4pos, masc, a stater, a silver coin, equal to the SlBpaxfJ-ov, which see ; Matt. xvii. 27. (TTavpSs, ov, 6, a cross ; met. , often of Christ's death. cTavp6w, So, wao), to fix to the cross, to crucify; fig., to mortify, destroy, the corrupt nature. v\-n, 7JS, v, a grape, a clustery or bunch of grapes, ardxvs, vos, 6, an ear of corn, 2T(ixus, vos, d, Stachys, Kom. xvi. 9. , to groan, expressing grief, anger (/cora), or desire. anvds, i}, ov, narrow, Matt. vii. 13; Luke xiii. 24. a-revo-xcp^oj, Qj, in pass., tobestraitenedf to be distressed, 2 Cor. iv. 8. a-T€vo-xcpia, as, tj, great distress or straits, 2 Cor. vi. 4. a-repe6s, a, 6v, solid, as food, Heb. V. 12; ^g., firm, stedfast, i Pet. V. 9. ffTepeoo), «, (aacD, to Strengthen, con- firm, establish. Acts ii. 16, xvL 5. aT€p4ti)ixa, aros, t6, firmness, constancy. ^T€(pauas, a, 6, Stephanas, crriipavos, ov, 6, a crown, a garland, of royalty, of victory in the games, of festal joy ; often used fig. '2,T47-KaTa-ij/T]Lt«] VOCABULARY. 121 (TTOLx^w, CO, r](rci), to walk, to behave oneself {according to, by dat.). (TToXi]^ Tjy, 7), a robe, a long garment, a mark of distinction, Luke xv. 22. (TTOixa, oTos, t6, (1) the mouth, gene- rally; hence, (2) speech, speaking; used for testimony, Matt, xviii. 1 6 ; eloquence, or puwer in speaking, Luke xxi. 15 ; (3) applied to an opening in the parched earth, Rev. xii. 16; (4) the edge, or point, e.g., of a sword, Luke xxi. 24. (rT6^iaxos, ov, 6, the stomach, i Tim. V. 23. (TTpaTeia, as, r], warfare, military ser- vice; of Christian warfare, 2 Cor. X. 4; I Tim. i. 18. ffTpdnvfia, aros, r6, (i) an army; (2) a detachment of troops. Acts xxiii. 10, 27; plur., Luke xxiii, ii. (rrparevoixai, ffojxai, dep. mid., to wage war, as lusts against the soul, James iv. i ; to serve as a soldier, of Christian work, 2 Tim. ii. 4 ; 1 Tim. i. 18. ffTpar-rjySs, ov, 6 (^7«), (1) a leader of an army ; (2) a magistrate, or ruler. Acts xvi. 20 ; (3) the captain of the temple, Acts iv. 1 . (TTpaTid, as, T], an army ; met., a host, of angels, Luke ii. 13; the host of heaven. Acts vii. 42. (TTpaTidoTTis, ov, 6, a soldier, as Matt, viii. 9 ; fig. of Christian teachers, I Tim. ii. 3. o'rpaTO-Xoyea}, w, -fjaa, to collect, or levy an army, to enlist troops, 2 Tim. ii, 4. (TTpaToir^d-dpxv^i 0^, ^1 the prefect, or commander of the emperor's guards. Acts xxviii. 16. (TT par 6iTi^ov, ov, r6, an encamped army, a host, Luke xxi. 20. (TTpe^\6w, w, to rack, to pervert, to wrest, as words from their proper meaning, 2 Pet. iii. 16. aTp4(poi}, \pa}, 2nd aor. pass., iarpdcpriv, to turn, trans. (Matt. v. 39) or intrans. (Acts vii, 42), to change into [els); pass., to turn one's self, John XX. 14; to be converted, to be changed in mind and conduct, Matt. xviii 3. ffrpiqvidio, w, dffw, to live voluptuously, Rev. xviii. 7, 9. arprivos, ovs, t6, profligate luxury, voluptuousness, revel, riot, crrpoudlov, iov, 76 (dim. of (rrpovOSs), a small bird, a sparrow. Matt. x. 29, 3 1. ffTpwvvixa, or -vwixi, (TTpwaoo, pass., perf., effTpwfxai, to strew, to make a bed ; pass. , to be strewed, or covered, with carpets over the couches. (rTiryrjTds, 6v, hateful, odious. (TTvyvd^w, daw, to become gloomy, or lowering, as the sky, Matt. xvi. 3. (TTvKos, or (TTvKos, ov, 6, a pillar, any firm support. Gal. ii. 9 ; i Tim. iii. 15. (TTw'iKos, -fi, 6v, stoic, plur., the Stoics, Acts xvii. 18. ffv, ffov, (Toi, 0-6, plur., vfius, thou, ye, the pers. pron. of second person (see 53). (Tvy-'y4viia, as, rj, kindred, family, Luke i. 61. ffuy-yeuiis, 4s, akin, as subst., a kins- man, relative, a fellow-countryman, Rom. ix. 3. a-vy-yvdofiT], tjs, t], permission, leave, I Cor. vii. 6. crvy-KdO-TjfjLat, to sit down with (dat. or ^i^Td, gen.). (Tvy-Kadi^a, aoi, [i) to cause to Sit doivn with, Eph. ii. 6; (2) to sit doion with, Luke xxii. 55. avy-KaKo-iraBeco, w, to suffer evil or affliction Jointly (with dat. com- mod. , for, 2 Tim. i. 8. (Tvy-KaKeca, w, eVw, to call together; mid. , to call together to oneself. (Tuy-KoAinrTci), rpw, to conceal closely, to hide wh'lly, Luke xii. 2. avy-Kdinrroi, \l/(a, to bow down wholly, to oppress, Rom. xi. 10 (LXX.). arvy-Kara-^aiva, to go down with any one, as from Jerusalem to Csesarea, Acts XXV. 5. (rvy-Kard-deffis, ews, v, consent, agree- ment, 2 Cor. vi. 16. a-vy-KaTa-Tidrifit, in mid,, to give a vote with, to assent to (dat), Luke xxiii. 51. (Tvy-KaTa-^r](l)i^(a, in pass., to be voted or classed with (/terci), Acts L a6. 122 VOCABULARY. [, ist aor., crvpcKe- pcura; pass., perf., ffvyK€Kpafiai ; to mix with, to temper, i Cor. xii. 24; pass. , to he mixed with, Heb. iv. 2. avy-Kivew, w, -f](r(o, to move together, to put into commotion. Acts vi 12. (rvy-K\elci), , to he howed together, or hent double, Luke xiii. 11. (TvyKvpia, as, v> « coincidence, a con- curroice ; Karh avyKvpiav, by chance, Luke X. 3 1. trvy-xa'po, 2nd aor. in pass, form, ffwex^priv, to rejoice with, to rejoice together in, 1 Cor. xiii. 6 ; to con- gratulate, Luke i. 58 ; PhiL iu 17, 18 (dat.). , to plunder, to make a prey of, Col. ii. 8. avxdco, S), -hffu), to rob, to plunder, 2 Cor. xi. 8. crvX-KaXiw, ist aor., , to advise (dat.); mid., to take counsel together (tVo or inf. ). ffvfi-fioiXiov, iov, t6, (i) mutual con- sultation, united counsel; (2) a coun- cil, a gathering of counsellors. ffifx-hovKos, ov, 6, a counsellor, Eom. xi. 34(LXX.). ^v/xedv, 6 (Heb.), Simeon, or Simon (see S/uwj/). The apostle Peter is so called, Acts xv. 14 ; 2 Pet. i. i ; and four others are mentioned, (i) Luke ii. 25; (2) Luke iii. 30 j (3) Acts xiii. I ; (4) E,ev. vii. 7. , So, i](xciovos, ov, luirmonious, agreeing with ; e/c avn<(>d^vov, by agreement. orviJL-\pr]^l(co, to compute, reckon up. Acts xix. 19. o-ifjL-ipvxos, adj., like minded, Phil< ii. 2. 124 yOCABULART. [ ^j or M» or is dropped, according to the initial letter of the word with which it is compounded (see 4, d, 5). avtf-dyco, a|<», {1) to bring together, to assemble; pass., to be assembled, to come together; (2) to receive hos- pitably, Matt. XXV. 35. cvvaywy-f}, r}s, rj, an assembly, a con- gregation, synagogue, either the place, or the people gathered in the place. See Synonyms. (rvv-ay(i>ui^oiJ.ai, aopxti, to exert oneself witli anotJier, to aid (dat.), Rom. XV. 30. ffvy-adKew, u, "hcrw, to strive together for (dat. of thing), Phil. i. 27 ; or with (dat. of pers. ), Phil. iv. 3. evv-aOpoiCo), ffoo, to gather, or collect together, Acts xix. 25 ; pass., to throng together, Luke xxiv. 33. a-w-odpco, to reckon together, to take account with, Matt, xviii, 23, 24. avv-ai-xp-dXcDTos, ov, d, a fellow -cajptive, OT prisoner, Rom. xvi. 7. avy-axoXovBeoo, a, iiffta, to foUow with, to accompany, Luke xxiii. 49. avv-aXi^o), in pass., to be assembled together with (dat.). Acts i. 4. ffvv-ava-^aivw, to go up with (dat.), Mark xv. 41 ; Acts xiii. 31. (rvv-avd-K6ifmi, to recline with, as at a meal, to sup with (dat.); part., ol trvvavaKeifjLevoi, the guests, Mark vi. 22, 26. aw-ava-filyvufii, pass., to mingle to- getJier with, to keep (dat.), 2 Thess. iiL 14, (Tw-ava-iravofiai, trofiai, to be refreshed together with (dat.), Rom. xv. 32. avv-avTOLiji, a, ^, in pass., to be joined fitly or Jiarmoniously together, Eph. ii. 21, iv. 16. , in mid. , to grow together. (jvv-hf(Tfios, ov, 6, a knot, a band; met., a bond. avv-Uw, in pass., to be bound with any one, as fellow- prisoners, Heb, xiii 3. , d(Ta>, in pass., to be glo- rified with {(Tvv), or togetlier, Rom. viii 17. ffvv-hovXos, ov, d, a fellow-slave, a fel- loiv-se'>'vant ; of ministers, the fel- low-servants of Christ, a colleague, Col. i 7. (Tvv-Spofi-f), ris, f), a running together, a concourse. Acts xxi 30. (Tw-eyiipci), fp'2, 1st aor., (Tvvi\y€ipa\ pass., -i(TTrifjLi, to rise together against (Kara), to attack, Acts xvi. 22. (rw-4xo, |«, (i) to press together, con- strain; (2) to hold fast, as a pri- soner, to stop, as the ears, the mouth; (3) to hem in, Luke viii. 45; (4) pass., to be straitened, or re- pressed, as by an unaccomplished purpose, to he pained, Luke xii. 50 ; (5) to he pressed or occupied with a work. Acts xviii. 5. Vw-'^So/iat, to delight in (dat.), Rom. vii. 22. , to adjoin (dat.). Acts xviii. 7. , da-oo, (i) to bring to an end, Luke iv. 13; (2) to fulfil, to accomplish, Rom. ix. 28 ; Mark xiii. 4; (3) to conclude, ratify, Heb. yiii. 8. 126 VOCABULARY. [pa'y^t^ trvv-Ti/jLvcD, to cut short, to bring to svnft fulfilment, Rom. ix. 28. ])ellative, a Syrophenician looman, Mark vii. 26. 'S.ipTis, etws, ace. iv, fj, a quicksand, the Syrtii major. Acts xxvii, 17. ffvf)(i}, to draw, to drag. eru-aTrapd(Ta(o, fw, to convulsc violently (ace. ), Luke ix. 42. aia-ffrniov, ov, t6, a concerted signal, a token agreed upon, Mark xiv. 44. ffva-ffcDiJLOs, ov, united in the same body, \ tig., of Jews and Gentiles, in one church, Eph. iii. 6. ffv-arTaffiaffr-fjs, ov, 6, a feUow-insurgent, Mark xv. 7. (Tv-ffraTiKds, ^, 6v, commendatory ^ 2 Cor. iii i. ffv-aravpSd), u>, to crucify together with (ace. and dat.); lit., as Matt. xxvii. 44; fig., as Gal. ii. 19. ffv-trreWu, (i) to swathe, as a dead body. Acts v. 6 ; (2) to contract, perf., pass., part., contracted, slwrt, I Cor. vii. 29. ffv-aTivd^oa, to groan together, Rom. viii. 22. ffv-ffToix^o), «, to be correspondent vnth (dat.). Gal iv. 25. 7T]s, ov, 6, a fellow -soldier, i.e., in the Christian service, Phil. ii. 25 ; Philemon 2. ffv-ffrpe^ci), \l/a>, to roll or gather together ^ Acts xxviiL 3. dy7iv ; (i) to kill by violence, to slay in sacrifice. Rev. v. 6, 9 ; (2) to wound mortally, Rev. xiiL 3. (rs, adv., veJiemently, Acts xxviL 18. pa'y 's — TaXanrwpew] VOCABULARY. 127 ffipoayis, TSos, ^, (i) a seal, the instru- ment, Rev. vii. 2 ; ^Ae impi-ession, whether for security and secrecy, as ■ Kev. V. I ; or for designation, Rev. ix. 4; (3) the motto of a seal, 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; (4) that which the seal attests, the proof, i Cor. ix. 2. drjv ; (1) to save, from evil or danger, Matt. viii. 25, xvi. 25 ; (2) to heal. Matt. ix. 21, 22; (3) to save, i.e., from eternal death, i Tim. i. 15; part., pass., 01 ffcu^Sfj-eyoi, those who are being saved. Acts ii. 47, i.e., who are in the way of salvation. flrcSjuo, aros, to, a body, i.e., (1) any material body, plants, sun, moon, &c. ; (2) the living body of a man, as I Cor. xii. 12, or animal, James iii. 3 ; the glorified body, the body of Christ; aci^fxara. Rev. xviii. 13, slaves ; (3) a dead body, a corpse. Acts ix. 40; (4.) fig., a community, the church, the mystic body of Christ, CoL i. 24; {5) met., for t/te. entire man, the self, Hom. xii. i ; (6) substance, opp. to shadow, Col. ii. 17. (TwfmTiKos, i], 6u, of or pertaining to the body, i Tim. iv. 8 ; bodily, cor- r>oreal, Luke iii. 22; adv., -cos, corporeally, Col^ ii. 9. Sc^Trorpos, ov, 6, Sopater, or Sosipater, Acts XX. 4 (Rom. xvi. 21). (TwpevcD, aw, to heap up, to load, Rom. xii. 20 ; 2 Tim. iii. 1 6. '2ua66jn}5, ov, 6, Sosthenes, Acts xviii. 17; 1 Cor. i. 1. It is uncertain whether the same person is in- tended in both. ^(ixrlTrarpos, ou, 6, Sosipater or Sopater^ Rom. xvi. 21 (Acts xx. 4). (ra}T-r]p, rjpos, 6, a deliverer, preserver, a Saviour, specially of Christ. ffuTTfpia, as, rj, welfare, prosperity, deliverance, preservation, from tem- poral evils, Acts xxvii. 34 ; Heb. xi. 7; Acts vii. 25; 2 Pet. iii. 15; specially salvation, from spiritual and eternal evils, Luke xix. 9. ff(t)Tr]pio^, 01, saving, healthful; neut., rh acDT-f^piou, salvation, Luke iii. 6; Eph. vi. 17. (rQ}, (ixru, to thrust doum to Tartarus, the classic name for Hell, 2 Pet. ii. 4, rda-trw, ^w, (i) to constitute, arrange; {z) to determine: mid., to appoint. ravpos, ov, 6, a bull, a bullock. ravrd, by crasis for ra avrd, the same things. Ta^Tj, 7JJ, ^ {edTrro)), a burial, a sepul- ture, Matt, xxvii. 7. Td ^^ artificer, a carpenter or smith. rdXfios, fla, elou perfect, as (1) complete, in all its parts ; (z) full grown, of full age ; (3) spe- cially of the completeness of Christian character, mature; adv., -ois, perfectly, to the end, i Pet. i. 13. TeA€j({T7js, TTjTos, ^, perfectuess. Chris- tian maturity, CoL iii. 14; Heb. vi. I. TcXciOO) Tl Wo)] VOCABULARY. 129 i Ti\ei6(i>, u, , (i) to complete, to finish, as a course, a race, or the like ; (2) to accomplish, as time, or prediction, Luke ii. 43 ; John xix. 28 ; (3) to make complete, to expiate perfectly, Heb. vii. 19; pass., to die, Luke xiii. 32 ; TT]s, ov, b, one who makes per- fect, a finisher, Heb. xii. 2 ; coinp. Heb. ii. 10. T€\((T-, to end, to finish, e.g., life ; so, to die. Matt. ix. 18; to be pvt to death, Mark vii. 10. TiXivri], ris, tj, end of life, death. TtXeo), u>, eaoD, rereAtKa, t^t eXeafiai, ireXeadr^v, (1) ^^ end, to finish ; {2) to fulfil, to accomplish, to go through; (3) to pay off in full. TtAos, ovs, t6, (i) an end; (2) an accomplishment. Luke xxii. 37; (3) event or issue. Matt. xxvi. 58 ; (4) the sum,, tlie principal end, or scope ; {5) an impost or tax. Matt. xvii. 25. TiXwuris, ov, 6, a toll-gatherer, a col- lector of customs, one who farms taxes, a *^ publican." reXuv.ov, ov, r6, a toll-house, a col- lector's office. T6pas, arus, to, plur. only, wonders, portents, with atj/xe'ia, signs and wonders. Acts vii. 36; John iv. 48. See Synonyms. TcpTios, vv, 6 (Lat.), Tertius, Kom. xvi. 22. T^prvXKus, ov, 6, Tertullus, Acts xxiv. I. T(.(Toap6.KovTa, forty. TtacrapaK'VTa erijs, €s, of forty years, age or time. ttaoapes, reaaapa, gen., (01/, four. Tiaaapis-Kai-teKUTos, ord. num., four- teenth. TerapToios, ala, aiov, of the fourth (day), John xi. 39. T€TapTos, T], ou, ord. nvim. , fourth. TiTpd-'iwvos, ov, four-cornered. rerpadiov, lov, r6, a quaternion, or guard of four soldiers. r('rpaKia--x''X:oi, ai, a, four thousand. TfrpaKoaioi, ai, a, four hundred. Tirpd-nTji/us, uv, of four months, i.e., a lapse (xpJj/os) of that period, John iv. 35- T€rpa-Tr\6os, ots, rj, ovv, fourfold, Luke xix. 8. TCT/jd-TTtius, ovy, oBos, four-footed. Acta X. 12 ; Jriom. i. 23. T€Tp-opxeaj, , ■^cro), (1) to estimate, to value at a price. Matt, xxvii. 9 ; {z) to honour, to reverence. 71IMT}, 7JS, 7], (i) a price, value, pre- ciousness, i.e., great value, i Pet. ii. 7 ; (2) ho7iour, a state of honoiir, Eom. ix. 21 ; an honourable office, Heb. V. 4 ; an honourable use, 2 Tim, ii. 20, 21. rifuos, ia, toy, of great price, precious, honoured. ri/ju6Tr]5, TijTos, 7), preciou,8ness, costli- ness. Tiu6-6eovl^, demonst. pron. , of this kind, such, 2 Pet. i. 17. TOioinos, TOJOwTTj, tojoDto, demonst. pron., (i) such as, sometimes with olos precedent, i Cor, xv. 48; as... such as, (2) such, i.e., so great, in a good sense, 2 Cor. xii. 2, 3, 5 ; in a bad sense, Acts xxii. 22. With art., see 22.0. roixot, ov, 6, a wall, of a house, Acts xxiii. 3 ; (listing, from Ti^xos, a wall of (I city. r6Kos. oj, 6 (a bringing forth), interest, usury, Matt. xxv. ^^, ToAjiictw, S), i}(T(a, (i) to dare, to venture (inf. ) ; (2) to have courage. ro\ixrjp6Tipov (comp. of roX/xrjpws, adv. , boldly), the more boldly, Rom. XV. IS. ToAftTjT^s, OV, 6, a daring one, one over bold, audacious, or presumptuous, 2 Pet. ii. 10. Tofx6s, 7?, 6v, in comp., TOfidmpos, sharper, keener, Heb. iv. 12. Ts, e*o, V, rough, uneven, as ways, Luke iii. 5 ; as rocks in the sea, Acts xxvii. 29. Tpoxw^iTts, iSoi, T}, Trachonitis, the N, E. of the territory beyond Jordan. rpds, rpia, three* rpi^o) — Tvpos] VOCABULARY. 131 Tpe/jLco, to tremble, to he afraid. Tpecpd), dpeypca, perf., pass., Tedpafiixai, to feed, to nourish, to sustain. Matt. vi. 26; to pamper, James v. 5. Tpe'xo), 2nd aor., eSpafiov, (i) to run, in a race, i Cor. ix. 24 ; {z) to run, making an effort, Rom. ix. 16 ; (3) to run, or spread, as a rumour, 2 Thess, iii, i. TpidKovra, indecl., thirty. TpiaK6(Tioi, at, o, three hundred. rpi^oXos, ov, 6, a triple- thorned shrub, a thistle. Matt. vii. 16. rpi^os, ou, 7), a path worn, a road, a beaten way. rpL-eria, as, tj, « space of three years, Acts XX. 31. Tpi(oo, to grate, to gnash, as the teeth, in severe pain, Mark ix. 18. 7pi-fir]uos, ov, three montlis, neut. as subst., Heb. xi. 23. Tpis, num. adv., thrice. Tpi-ffreyos, ov, having three floors, neut. , the third floor or story, Acts XX. 9. Tpi(T-x'^\ioi, ai, a, three thousand, rpiros, 77, ov, ord. num., third; neut., rh rpirov, the third part. Rev. viii. 7 ; the third time, Mark xiv. 41. Tpi'xes, plur. of 6p;|, which see. rpixtvos, rj, ov, made of hair, Rev. vi. 12. rp6iios, ov, h, a trembling, e.g., from fear; self-disU'ust, Phil. ii. 12. TpoTTT], ris, ri, a turning, a change. TpojTos, ov, 6, (i) manner; hv rpSirov, as. Matt, xxiii. 37, &c. ; (2) course of life, disposition, Heb. xiii. 5. Tpoiro-, to beat or scourge to death when stretched on a ivhed, Heb. xi. 35. rvTTos, ov, 6, (i) a mark, an impression^ produced Ijy a blow ; (z) the figure of a thing, a pattern, "type;" (3) an emblem, an example; (4) the form or contents of a letter; (5) a rule, a form of doctrine. TiiTTTw, \^ft>, to beat, to strike, as the breast in grief, Luke xviii. 13 ; to inflict punishment, Acts xxiii. 3 ; to wound or offend the conscience, I Cor. viii. 12. Tvpavvos, ov, 6, Tyrannus, Acts xix. 9. TvpB'i-Co}, to agitate, or, disturb in mind, Luke X. 41. Tvpios, ov, of Tyre, Tyrian. Tvpos, ov, 7], Tyre, a city of Pheniciau 132 VOCABULARY. [TV(|>Xds — vir-av8poj rv, «, (cffo), to raise a smoJce; pass., lig. , to he proud, to be arrogant and conceited, i Tim. iii. 6. rv(pa}, in pass., part., smoking, dimly burning. Matt. xii. 20. rv(pa)viK6s, i], 6v, violent, tempestuous, like a whirlwind. Acts xxvii. 14. Ti'xiKos, ovj 6 (or Tvxik6s), Tychi- chus. Tvx6v, see rvyx^-vca. r. T, V, v^lKov, upsilon, u, the twentieth letter. As a numeral, v = 400 ; .V = 400,000. At the commence- ment of a word, v is always aspirated. vaKLvQivos, rj, ov, "hyacin thine," of the colour of the hyacinth, dark purple. Rev. ix. 17. v6.KivQos, ov, 6, "hyacinth," a purple gem, "jacinth," Rev. xxL 20. vd\ivo^, T}, ov, glassy, transparent. Rev. iv. 6. vaXos, ov, ri, a pellucid stone, like glass, crystal. Rev. xxi. 21. vBptC<^, , -fja-o), (i) to Sing, or recite hymns to, ace. ; {z) to sing praise. ijfivos, ov, d, a hymn, a saa-ed song. vTr-dyo), to go away, to take oneself away ; imperat., sometimes an ex- pression of aversion, begone. Matt, iv. 10; sometimes a farewell only, Matt. viii. 13, 32; to die, Matt, xxvi. 24. inr-aKoi], r^s, 7], obedience. Rum. vi. 16. inr-aKoixa, , (i) to liaten, as at a door, to tind who seeks admission, Acts xii. 13; (2) to liearken to, so as to obey (dat. ). vTT-avopos, ov, under a husband, married, Rom. vii. 2. vir-avTaci)- VOCABULARY. isa vK-avTOLO}, w, 7), to stretch out overmuch, 2 Cor. X. 14. vTrep-eK-xvvofji.ai, to be poured out over, to overjiow, Luke vL 38. vTrep-ev-rvyxduw, to intercede for, Eom. viii. 26. iirep-exo, to excel, to surpass (gen.), to be supreme, 1 Pet. ii. 13 ; })art., rb vTrepexov, excellency, super- eminence, Phil, ii 8. vTrep-7](pauia, as, 7), pride, an'oqance, Mark vii. 22. xnrep-i\^, to submit to, to undergo (ace). inr-'f]Koos, ov, listening to, obedient to (dat.), submissive. inr-7)peT4co, a>, to minister to, to serve (dat.). inr-rjpeTTjS, ov, 6 (eperrjs, a rower), a servant, attendant, specially {)} an officer, a lictor ; (2) an attendant in a synagogue; (3) a minister of the Gospel. virvos, ov, 6, sleep ; fig. , spiritual sleep, or slothfulness. vir6, prep., gov. gen. and accus., under. With gen., by, generally signifying the agent; with accus., under, beneath, of place, of time, or of subjection to authority (see 304). In composition, inr6 denotes subjection^ diminution, secrecy. 134 VOCABULARY. [^o-pdWo) — viro-xop^ wjTo-jSdXAw, to put under, to suborn. inro-ypafji.fjLds, ov, 6, a pattern, an example, i Pet. ii. 21. tnr6 Seijiia, aros, r6, (i) an example ior imitation, or for warning ; (2) a typical representation, Heb. viii. 5, ix. 23. inro-SeiKPvfii, to show plainly, as by- placing under the eyes, to teach (dat.). inro-dexofiat, to receive as a guest, to entertain (ace. ). vTro-S4w, u), -nao), in mid,, to hind on one's sandals, Eph. vL 15: ^^san- dalled as to the fee f inrS-Sifjixa, aros, t6, a sandal. vKoSiKos, OP, convicted, pronounced guilty, lit., "under penalty to" (dat.), Rom. iii. 19. inro (vjiov, ou, t6, an animal under yoke, an ass. inro-(d!)vi/vfii, to undergird, as a ship for strength against the waves, Acts xxvii, 1 7. inro-Kdria, adv., underneath (as prep. with gen. ). vTro-Kplvofiai, dep., to act under a mask, to personate, to pretend (ace, inf.). fnr6-Kpi, eAcS, ist aor,, virfa-rciXa, to draw back. Gal. ii. 12 ; mid., to shrink, to draw one's self back, Heb. X. 38 (from, by rov /«?, with inf., Acts XX. 27). inro-a-ToK^, r)s, t), a shrinking, a draw- ing back, Heb. x. 39. vTro-, to turn back, to return, intraus. viroffrpwvvvixi, or -wpvvu, to strew under , Luke xix. 36. viro-Toyi], ris, v, subjection, submission. Gal. ii. 5. uiro-To, fa>, 2nd aor. pass., {nre- rd-y-qv, to place under, to subject; mid., to submit oneself , to he obedient. vvo-ridTifjLi, to set or put under; mid., to suggest, to counsel, to advise. VKo-Tpexc, 2nd aor. , inredpafiop, to run under lee or shelter of, Acts xxvii. 16. ^ . inro-rinruffis, e«s, rj, pattern, example, I Tim. i. 16; 2 Tim. i. 13. viro-Tridt» — 4>ap^sJ VOCABULARY. 135 vir-anridCw, to strike under tite eye; hence, (i) to subject to Ivardship, 1 Cor. ix. 27 ; {z) to weary out, by repeated application, Luke xviii. 5. £s, uo$, 6, T}, a hog, hoar, or sow^ 2 Pet. ii. 2z. vffaooTTos, ov, T\. hyssop, a stalk or stem of hyssop, John xix. 29 ; a bunch of hyssop for sprinkling, Heb. ix. 1 9. ucrepeco, w, iiffw, to he heliind, to fall short, John ii. 3 ; to come short of, gen., Rom. iii. 23; to fail of attain- ing {a.Tr6), to he inferior to (gen.), I Cor. viii. 8 ; pass. , to suffer need, Luke XV. 14. \)(Trep7]^ia, fiaros, t6, (i) that which is lacking, or wanting to (gen.). Col. i. 24 ; 1 Thess. iii. 10 ; (2) need, poverty. va-Teprjaris, €w?, rj, poverty, penury, Mark xii. 44. v(TT€pos, a, ov, compar., latter, 1 Tim. iv. I ; neut. as an adv., last, after- wards, with gen.. Matt, xxii, 27 ; Luke XX. 32. v(pauT6s, 7j, 6p {u(palv(i}, to weave), woven, John xix. 23. i^7}\6s, if, 6v, (i) high, elevated: (2) distinguished, pre-eminent. v\pT]\o-((>pou€Ci), S>, to be high-minded, pi'oud, assuming, Rom. xi. 20 ; I Tim. vi. 17. lirj/iffTos, 7j, ou (superlat. of S^t, highly), highest, most elevated; neut., plur., the highest places, the heights, i.e., the heavens ; 6 {Ji/zio-tos, the Most High, i.e., God, as dwelling in the heavens. v^os, ovs, t6, Jieight, opp. to ^dOos, Eph. iii. 18; e| ii\]/ous, from on high, i.e., from God. So els liil/os, to God, Eph. iv. 8 ; fig., elevation, dignity, James i. 9. vxl/oco, a>, uxrca, (i) to raise on high, to elevate, as the brazen serpent, and Jesus on the cross ; (2) to exalt, to set on high. Acts ii. 33; (3) to elevate, i.e., to raise from a lowly to a dignified condition ; (4) to exalt in estimation, Matt, xxiii. 12. vxlxajbLo, cToy, tJ, height, Rom. viiL 39 ; citadel, fig., 2 Cor. x. 5. . *, ' = 500 ; ^^ = 500,000. Matt. xi. (payos, ov, d, a 19. (pdyw, see iaivou.iva^ things seen, "phenomena," Heb. xi. 3 ; mid. , to appear in judgmenty I Pet iv. 18. *oA.e/c, 6 (Heb.), Phaleg, Luke iii. 35- api(raios — 4*^^* api(ra7os, ov, 6 (from the Heb. verb, to separate), a pharisee, one of the Jewish sect so called. ^ap/jLUKeia, as, ^, magic, art, sorcery, enckantment, Gal. v. 20. (papfxaKevs, ecos, 6, a magician, sorcerer, enchanter. Rev. xxi. 8. (papfjLaK6s, ov, 6, 7}, as (pap/xaKeis, Rev. xxii. 15. (pdiris, €005, 7], report, information. Acts xxi. 3 1. (pdffKco (freq. of ^"nfii), to assert, to affirm, to boast, Rom. i. 22. ^oTKTj, 7JS, V, a manger, a crib, Luke ii. 7 ; a stable, Luke xiii. 1 5. (pavAos, 7], ov, vile, wicked, base, opp, to ayaQ6s. , (pdda-eo, perf., %, i]crw, to envy (dat.), GaL V. 26. i\-dyaBos. ov, loving goodness, or good men, Titus i. 8. ^iX-aTiix^eia, as, 7], Philadelphia, Rev. i. II. (pi\-a?€\pa-Y€'XXiov] VOCABULARY. 137 ^i\nr-n"fi(Tios, ov, 6, a Philippian, Phil. IV. 15. 4>iA.i7r7rot, coj/, ol, Philippi. ^i\nnros, ov, 6, Philip. Four of the name are mentioned: (i) John i. 44-47; {2) Acts vi. 5; (3) Luke iii. 1 ; (4) Matt. xiv. 3. , (iffco, to muzzle, i Cor. ix. 9 ; to reduce to silence. Matt. xxii. 34; pass., to be silent. Matt. xxii. 12 ; of a storm, Mark iv. 39. ^Xeywv, ovos, 6, Phlegon, Rom. xvi. 14. oi)877, 7)5, 7], Phoebe, Rom. xvi. r. ^oLviKT), 71 s, 7}, Phenice, or Phenicia. (poivi^, iKos, 6, a palm-tree, a palm branch, John xii. 1 3 ; Rev. vii. 9. *oiVi|, iKos, 7], a prop, name, Phenice, a city of Crete, Acts xxvii. 12. (povevs, €cos, 6, a murderer, a man- slayer. ^ovevca, aco, to murder, to kill. (f)6vos, ov, 6, murder, bloodthirstiness. (popio), a, effo), to bear about, to wear, Rom. xiii. 4 ; John xix. 5. paYa>v£«» p4ap, (ppeuTos, r6, a pit, a well. (ppev-aTTaTdot), w, to deceive the mind, to impose upon (ace. ), Gal. vi. 3. (ppev-aTraTTis, ov, 6, a deceiver, impostor^ Titus i. 10. ^priv, (ppcvSs, 7} (lit., diaphragm), plur., al (pp^yes, the intellect, i Cor. xiv. 20. tpplffa-o}, ^a>, to shudder, to quake from fear or aversion, James ii. 19. > (ppoveco, a, i\(T(a (, (i) to keep guard, or watch over ; (2) to keep in safety; (3) to observe, as a precept ; (4) mid., to keep oneself from (ace or airS), Luke xii. 15 ; Acts xxi. 25. pvKi], ris, 7), (1) a tribe, of Israel; (2) race, or people. vWov, ov, t6, a leaf. ipvpa/xa, aros, t6, a mass, kneaded into consistency, a lump, as of dough, I Cor. V. 6; or clay, Rom. xi. 16. Pv(tik6s, V, 6v, natural, as {i) according to nature; (2) animal; adv., -ws, physically, naturally. , 60, to inflate, to puff^ up ; pass., to be insolent, or arro- gant. (pva-is, €ft)s, 7], generally, nature ; spe- cially, (i) 7iatural birth. Gal. ii. 15 ; (2) natural disposition, instinct, pro- pensity, Eph. ii. 3 ; (3) long-esta- blishtd custom, i Cor. xi. 14; (4) native qualities, or properties. Gal. iv. 8. pvff'mais, eus, ri, elation of mind, boasting, 2 Cor. xii. 20. 0uT6ja, OS, 7], a plant. Matt. xv. 13- , «, ■f)»VTJ XO'P''S] VOCABULARY. 139 avfi, 7JS, V, (i) a sound, musical or otherwise; (2) an articulate sound, a voice, " voices of the prophets," Acts xiii. 27 ; (pa cry, as of pain, a language, dialect, i Cor. xiv. 10. 4>ws, X^ chi, ch, guttural, the twenty- second letter. As a numeral, x' = ^00 ') ,X — 600,000. Xo-ip<^, x«P^<''Oi"a', 2.nd aor., ^x'i-priv, to rejoice, to he joyful; imp., x«"p^> Xaip^re, hail / farewell ! inf., xo'V^"'> greeting. Acts xv. 23: Xd\a(a, as, 7], hail. Xa^-dct), Si, dau), ist aor., pass., e'xaAoJ- (tO-^v, to loosen, Mark ii. 4 ; to let down, Acts ix. 2 7ew, S), to bridle, to re- strain. XaXIu6s, ov, 6, a bit, a curb, James ,'"• 3- , . . Xa\K€os, ovs, rj, ovv, made of brass, or copper. Rev. ix. 20. Xa\Kevs, 4(1)5, 6, a worker in brass, or copper, a coppersmith. Xo.\KTjddou, 6ms, 6, a gem, including several varieties, a chalcedony. Xa^KLov, ov, t6, a brazen vessel. Xa^Ko-\iPavov, ov, r6, fine brass, white (from lahan, Heb. for white), or shining brass. Rev. i. 1 5, ii. 8 ; or frankincense (\i$avos) of a gold colour, distinguished from silver- coloured. XoXkSs, ov, 6, copper, brass, money. Xoi-iJ-ai, adv. , on, or to the ground, Xavadv, r], Canaan. Xavavaios, ai'a, alov, Canaanitish ; ol XavavoLOi, the Canaanites. Xapd, as, 7}, joy, cause of joy, bliss, Matt. XXV. 21, 23. xdpayfia, aros, t6, sculpture, Acts xvii. 29 ; engraving, a stamp, a sign. XapaKrijp, 'qpos, 6, an impress, a per- fect likeness, Heb. i. 3. Xci/'ol, a.Kos, 6, a palisade, a mound for besieging, Luke xix. 43. XapiC^fji-ai, l, to lead by the Jiand, Acts Ix. 8, xxii. 1 1. Xetp-ayoy^s, ov, 6, one who leads by the hand. Acts xiii. 1 1. Xfip^-ypo-), to elect by lifting up the hand, to choose by vote, to appoint. Acts xiv. 23 ; 2 Cor. viii. 19. Xeipojv, ov, compar. of kukSs, worse. Matt. xii. 45 ; worse, severer, Heb. X. 29. Xfpov&'fi (Hebrew plural of cherub), the cherubim, the golden figures on the mercy-seat, Heb. ix. 5. xV«> «5, rj, a widow. X^^es, adv., yesterday. Xi^i-ifX^^j o"i ^1 « commander of a thousand men, a military tribune. Xt^tas, 080$, 7), a thousand (subst.). X^'Atot, at, a, a thousand (adj.). Xios, ov, T], Chios, Acts xx. 1 5. X^Tuv, 03V05, 6, a vest, an inner gar- ment. X^^v, 6vos, rt, snow. X^ol/jlvs, vdos, 7], a Roman officer's cloak, most frequently scarlet, Matt, xxvii, 28, 31. X^€vd((a, to mock, scoffi (ahs.). X^ap6s, d, /)v, warm, lukewarm. X\6tj, rjs, Chloe, i Cor. i. 11. X^(t}p6i, d, 6v, (i) green, verdant; (2) pale or sallow, Rev. vi. 8. Xfr', six hundred and sixty-six. Rev. xiii. 18. XoikSs, {}, 6v, earthy, made of earth, earthly, i Cor. xv. 47-49. X0'^»''|, iKos, 7), a choenix, measure con- taining two sextarii (see ^e'o-TTjs). Xo-pos, ov, d, a pig ; plur., swine. Xo^doo, a, to be angry, to be incensed at (dat.). X0A.T7, rjs, (i) gad, fig., Acts viiL 23; (2) bitter herbs, such as wormwood^ &c.. Matt, xxvii. 34. X^os, see xows. XopaCiv, or XopaCeiv, tj, CJtorazin. Xop-7jjea), to [&-yco), Gk. to SU])ply or furnish a chorus for the games : hence, to funiish, to supply, to give, 2 Cor. ix. 10; I Pet. iv. 11. Xop^s, ov, 6, a dance with singing^ "chorus," plur., Luke xv. 25. Xoprd^o), to feedf to satisfy {wiiJi, by gen. or air6). Xoprda-jxa, aro^, t6, food, sustenance. X^pTos, ov, 6, grass, Jierbage, Matt. vL 30 ; springing grain. Matt xiii. 26. Xoi/^s, 5, 6, Chuza, Luke viii. 3. Xoi's, 06s, ace. xo^^y dust. Xpdo,uai, Cafxai, xP^lO'dai, dep. (prop. mitL of xP'^^)f ^^ ^^^ (dat.), to make use of, to treat. Acts xxvii. 3 ; 2 Cor. xiii. 10 (dat. om.). Xpa«, or Kixpriiii. XP^iO'(»> to lend. XJP^la,, as, 71, (i) u^e, necessity, need, l»lur., necessities; (2) business, Acts ^n. 3. Xpe (i)os — a>ptio|JLai \|/6v5-cJ5€\0os, ou, 6. a false brother, a \ pretended Christian. I }^evS-air ffToXos, ov, 6, a false or pi'e- 1 tended apostle. \ i\/€vir)s, 4s, false, deceiving, lying. i|/eu8o-5t5a(rKaA.os, ou, a false teacher, a teacher of false doctrines. rpev^o-Xoyos, ov, false-speaking. \psv5ofjiai, dep., d towards God, Rev. xxi. 27 ; idolatry, Rom. i. 25 t|/£u5(J-xp'o-Tos, ov, 6, a pretended Mes- siah, Matt. xxiv. z\. ^€v8-(i)vuixi)s, ov, falsely named, falsely called, I Tim. vi. zb. ipev(riJi.a, aros, r6, falsehood, perfidy, Rom. iii. 7. ^^xxTTtis, ov, 6, a deceiver, liar, a per- fidious person. i^y]\a^a, to touch, to feel, to handle (ace), Heb. xii. 18; to feel after, as persons blind, or in the dark, ficf., Acts xvii. 27. rl>r]vyn ^ break in pieces, as ears of corn, Luke vi i. Cl, w, S) fieya, omega, 6, the twenty- fourth letter. As a numeral, «' = 800; ^co = 800,000. 0/n€£/a is put for the last, as Alpha for the first, Rev. i. 8, II, xxi. 6, 13. S, interj., used before the vocative where the apj^eal is emphatic : sometimes in simple address, and once in admiration, Rom. xi. 33. 'fDSyjS, 6 (Heb.), Obed, Matt i. 5. w8f, adv., of place, hither, here. So in this life, Heb. xiii. 14 ; herein, in this matter. Rev. xiii. 10. ; o>5e ^ 556, here or there. Matt. xxiv. (fi^ij, vs, T], an ode, a song, a Jiymiu u8iv, ivos, 71, the pain of childbirth, acute pain, severe calamity. wSlvoa, ivw, to he in the throes, or pain, of childbirth ; fig., Gal. iv. 19. 2:ix(»s, ov, 6, a shoidder. wviofiau, ov/xat, Tforoficu, to buy (gen. of price). w6v, ov, t6, an egg, Luke xii. 1 2. S}pa, OS. 7), (i) a definite space, or time, ■ a season; (2) an liour ; (3) the particular time for anything, Luke xiv. 17; Matt. xxvi. 4H. wpaios, oio, aiiiv. fair, comely, beauti- ful. Matt, xxiii. 27 ; Acts iii. 2. wpvofjLcu, dep., mid., to roar, to Jtowl^ as a beast, i Pet. v. 8. «S — m4>^i|i.os1 VOCABULARY. U3 us, an adv. of comparison, as, like as, about, as it were, according as, 2 Pet. i. 3 ; to wit, z Cor. v. 19; how! Rom. x. 15; as particle of time, when, whilst, as soon as; as intentional particle, so tJiat (inf.), Acts XX. 24 ; ws ^iros thr^lv, so to speak, Heb. vii. 9. *il(rcu/v6,y interj., Hosanna! (Heb., Ps. cxviii. 25) Save now ! a word of joyful acclamation. Matt. xxi. 9. uff-avTus, adv., in the same way, in like manner as, likewise. & A-^ oAAa 375 &AAOS and erepoj, 56; with article .211 afiaprdyti) . . . . .102 &u, potential with optative, 343 ; with relatives or conjunctions, requires subjunctive, 343 ; in conditional sentences, with indicative . 348 &vd 264 avoTcAXw, transitive use of . .318 avr}p, declined . . . .3' &t/dpa>iros, declined . . .19 iwd' &y .... 257, 379 &,yoiyu, augment of . . .109 avTi, 257 ; with infinitive . '359 &|toj, with genitive, 240; with infini- tive 357 iirJ, 258 ; and Sid, 286 ; and ^>e, 287 j adverbial phrases with . . 368 i7ro5tSw,ui, active and middle . 320 AnoWws, declined . . . *5 &pa and ipoj and oil . . •378 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 14- &paryf .... . 379 ''Apa\p, declined . . 30 dp/cew, future of . . 104 &pvas .... . 34 apTL-, in composition . . 162 &PXvy, adverbial . . 368 av^dvco, transitive use of . 318 avrSi, r], 6, declined, 51 ; used for third personal pronoun, 303 ; emphatic nominative, 179 ; meaning self, 304 j with article, the same, 209 ; comple- mentary to the relative, 312; avrhs rpitos . 302 avTov and avrov . . 53 a.u|, declined . . . '3° K\aia), stem and future . .105 K\d(i}, future .... 104 KOfJLiCo), future . 105 tcopeifuu/xi .... . 135 Kpe/xanai . . . . . 125 Kpivw, conjugated, 96 ; its root, deri- vatives, and compounds . . 164 KplvojMi, middle force of . 320 Kvpios, with the article . 203 Kvoiv, irregular . 33 Xalpeiv, as imperative . . .360 Xa\du>, future . . . .104 Xfip, omitted with adjective . 292 X€'», stem, future, and aorist . 105 ■XpAoixai, future of, 104; governg dative 247 XP-h m XpLffrSs, with article . . . 205 Xpvaovs (eos), rj, ovv, declined . 37 D. Dative case, the (singular always in -*, 17); its general senses, 16, 242; obsolete forms of, as adverbs, 144; dative of association, 242 ; of trans- mission, 243; of reference. 245; of accessory, 246 ; of time, 249 ; may be interchanged with eV (dat.), 287'; with €is (ace), 288; usually placed after governing word . .382 "Dative middle" . . .320 Dativus commodi vel incommodi . 245 Death of Christ, prepositions respect- ing 275, 289 Declensions of substantives, the three, 1 6 ; similarity of the first and second, 20 ; nouns of variable . . 34 Defective verbs . . . . n i Deliberative subjunctive . .341 Demonstrative pronouns, 53, 307; with the article, 208 ; as equivalent to a clause . . . . .309 Dependent clauses . . . 343 Deponent verbs . . 83, note, no Design, expressed by genitive of infini- tive, 358 ; by infinitive with its, irpSs, 358. See Intentional. Derivation 159 De Wette, Dr 251 Diaeresis 4 Difficulties of interpretation, 187, 238 Digamma, the, 46 ; in substantives, 29 ; in verbs, 105. See under V. Diminutives . . . .18 Diphthongs, 2 ; regularly long, but often counted short for accentua- tion . . . 21, 24, 107 Disjunctives, the . . .377 Distributive numerals, 49 ; pronouns, 56 Divine names, with the article . 202 Donaldson, Dr. . 225, 242, 249, 253 Double names of persons . .174 Dress, Latin names of in the 'New Testament . . . .171 Dual number, the . . .16 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. U9 Mkvco, stem . 101 SaveiCw, active and middle . . 321 5e, conjunction ot antithesis . 376 Se?, impersonal . . , . Ill SeiKj/ufiL, conjugated . 130 d^vrepSirpwTOS . 164 Sr}\6ci}, conjugated . 80 5ia, 268 ; and e/c, 285 ; and 6Ji- 286; and a-rrS, 286 ; ^nd iv, 286 ; an d trepi, 289 ; with genitive and accusative distinguished . . 270 SiMa-KO), future . . 102 SiSufxi, conjugated . 116 SiKaios, aia, aiov, declined . . 36 AioTrerrjs .... . 292 Ai6s, Aia .... . 34 810TJ, relative causal particle • 379 doK^l, impersonal . . Ill SoKeoD. future of . . 102 56^a, declined . 20 Swafiai .... . 125 Swards, with infinitive • 357 Svuco, stem and second aorist . 103 5vo, declined . 47 Sua--, in composition . . 163 S(adeKds, participle for Io-ttj/cc^s, declined 40 Irepos and SAAos . . . 56,211 €TOi/*os, with mfinitive . '357 €u-, as prefix, 162; how augmented, 106 ivpicTKoo, stem .... 102 -6US, substantives in . . .155 -euw. verbs in . . . .159 ^«^'l 379 ex«, alternative stem, 102 ; construc- tion of, with adverbs . •319 -4(1}, verbs in . . . • ^59 ews, in combination with other adverbs, j6 9 ; with infinitive . •359 ¥1, particle of comparison, 295 ; inter- changed with Ka\ ov, 370 ; disjunc- tive, 377 ; interrogative . .378 9lKto and epxofj-o-t . . • .3^6 ^/xot 125 riixepa, declined, 20 ; ellipsis of . 292 ^/ut-, in composition . . .163 .^y, -4s, adjectives in . . . 158 Festivals, names of, in plural . 220 Final, or intentional clauses . 349 First declension, paradigms . 20 Five clergymen, the, on the Epistle to the Komans . . . .212 Forbes, Rev. Dr., on the Romans, 387 Foreign elements in New Testament Greek 167 Forgetting, verbs of, with genitive, 228 Frequentative verbs . . •159 Fulness, want, &c., by genitive, 228 ; by dative or els . . . 247 Future time, tenses expressing . 60 Future tense, its characteristic, 63; in liquid verbs, 95 ; in pure verbs, 104 ; Attic future, 105 ; second future, 93 ; future imperfect, 330 ; future per- fect (paulo-post future), 87, no; see also 348 ; force of the future, 329, sq. ; with ov ixrj, 330; indica- tive, with iVct, 353 ; infinitive, 354; participle, 364 ; future auxiliary verbs 330 Futurity, certain, by present . 325 G. Galilee, or Tiberias, the Lake of . 241 Gender of nouns, 16 ; rules for deter- mining, 18 ; variable in some sub- stantives 34 General for particular statements . 222 Genitive case, the (plural always in •coy), 17 ; exhibits the stem in the third declension, 26 ; adverbially used, 144 ; of personal pronouns for possessive, 303 ; genitive after the article, 1 90 ; different uses of the, 225, sq. ; usual position of the, 233, 382 ; genitives in differeot relations with the same noun, 241 ; genitive absolute, the, 241, 361; prepositions governing the genitive, 257 ; geni- tive after Sid, compared with accu- sative, 269 ; objective genitive, by possessive pronoun, 303 ; genitive in apposition with possessive pronpun, 307; genitive of infinitive, 357; ex- pressing design or result . .358 Gospel, with genitive in different senses 239 Greek in Palestine . . .167 Greek names in the New Testament, 1 7 5 Greek poetry, quoted by St. Paul, 388 Green, Rev. T. S. . 223, 333, 350 Grotius on fulfilment of prophecy, 332 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 151 ydp . , . , , 379, sq. y^ypdirrcu . . . . • 333 7€Aaw, future of . . . .104 yevos, declined . . . .32 yevofiai, with genitive or accusative, 227 77?, ellipsis of ... . 292 7i'i'0;itat, stem and forms . 102, 110 yipwaKw, stem and forms . .103 ySyu, irregular substantive . .33 ypriyopeca . . . . .159 yvj/'f], irregular substantive, 3 ; ellipsis of 231, 292 H. Hackett, Dr., on the Acts . .237 Hamilton, Sir W., "Logic" . 194 Hebraisms, so called, often to be re- jected 300 Hebraistic use of plural of blood, 220 ; superlative, 299 ; use of els, 301 ; of relative and outJs, 312 ; causal sense in intransitive verbs, 318; use of participles, 364 ; combination of verbs 369 Hebrew, as spoken in Palestine, 167; words, 35; names in the New Tes- tament, 173; poetry, parallelism, 386 Hendiadys (eV Sia Svulu, one idea in two words), unnecessary. 232 (§258), 369 Hiatus 4 Hinton, Rev. J. H., on the Romans, 387 Historic present, the . . -3^5 Historical and principal tenses, 60, 324 Hymns in the New Testament . 387 Hyperbaton . . . .383 Hypothesis, fourfold form of . 347 Imparisyllabic declension, the . 20 Imperative mood, the, 58, 337 ; tenses in, 338 ; subjunctive used for, 340 ; infinitive, 360 ; future indicative in prohibitions . . . .329 Imperfect tense, the, 103, 326 ; distin- guished from aorist, 326; in con- ditional sentences, with &v . 348 Imperfect tenses, properly so called, 60 Impersonal verbs, iii j singular and plural, 1 80 ; often improperly so called 180 Improper prepositions, the . 147, 277 Inchoative acts, by imperfect . 328 Inchoative or inceptive verbs, 102, 159 Indeclinable proper names . . 34 Indefinite article, the . . . 300 Indefinite pronouns, the . 56, 315, 313 Indefinite tenses, the . . .60 Indefiniteness by omission of article, 2 1 7 Indicative mood, 58 ; the objective part of the verb, 323 ; in indirect inter- rogation, 345 ; interchanged with optative, 346; in conditional sen- tences, 348 ; apparent in intentional clauses, 353 ; with So-rf, 359; com- pared with infinitive . .360 Indirect form changed to direct . 385 Indirect interrogation . . -345 Indirect quotation . . .344 I nd i vidual acts in pi ural expressions, 221 Inferential conjunctions . .378 Infiaitive mood, the, 59 ; a verbal substantive, 354 ; with article, 192 ; with accusative subject, 253 ; as sub- ject, 355; as object, 356; expressing result, 356; oblique oases of, 357; with SffTe, 359; for imperative, 3 bo; in modern Greek . . .351 Inseparable declensions, the . 20 Instrument, by dative . . 247,276 Instrumental, iu . Intensive use of participles Intentional or final clauses, tides ... Interjections Interrogative, its sign, 1 1 ; 55) 3H> particles, 149, 11 335; ^, 378; ydp . Interrupted statements, by oAAa Investiture, by eV Irregular substantives . Irregular comparisons . -^a, substantives in . . .154 idofiai, future of . . . .104 'UpoffuKofia, or 'lepovaoK'fifi . '34 -tC«, verbs in . . , .159 'iTflfii, conjugated (in a,transitiveandintransitive,3 1 8 fjLaOtjTijs, declined ... 22 fiiiWov, in comparisons . 44, 296 fiafxfiuivas . . . . .169 fMwijdpo), stem of . . . .102 fxdprvs, irregular in declension . 3 3 fidyas, declined, 40 ; comparison of, 43 fxeiCwy, comparative, declined, 43 ; double comparative from . . 45 fi€\fi, impersonal . . .111 ^fAAw, auxiliary future verb . 330 /LcfV and 5^, 377 ; without 5€ . 379 fi(yovyy€ ..... 379 /A^vw, stems and forms of . . loz ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 153 Mecrcfas . . . . .169 jUeTci, 272, sq. ; distinguished from (Tvj/, 272 ; with infinitive (accusativ^e),359 ^■f] and ov, 148 ; fi-f) in questions, 14.9, 337; with imperative, 337; with optative, 342 ; negative intentional particle, 352; after verbs of fear- .ing 353 /u^ yeyoiTo ! . . . . • 34^ /u-^rrjp, ellipsis of . . . .231 fi-qTi, interrogative . . '337 -fMi, verbs in . . . .114 fjiiyvvfii . . . . • 134 fjLiKpSs, d, 6v, declined, 3 6 ; comparison of . . . . . .44 fiifivriffKoixai, stem of . . .103 -jxSs, substantives in . . •154 -ficDv, -fioy, adjectives in . .158 Mwarjs, declined .... 34 fivffT-fjpiov, predicated of Christ . 311 K Names, proper, in the New Testament, of various languages, 173; use of the article with . . .201 Neander on irpoa-euxh . . • ^37 Negative adverbs, 148, 369 ; joined to predicate, 301 ; emphatic, 330, 341; with infinitive, 3 54 ; with participle, 360; followed by aWd, 375; com- bination of negatives . '370 Negative indefinite pronoun . 317 Negative questions . . • 336 Neuter, forms alike in, 17; plural sub- ject, with singular verb, 181 ; pre- dicate, with masculine or feminine subjunctive . . . .185 Neuter verbs, 58. See Intransitive. Nominative, the case of the subject, 180, 222; of personal pronouns omitted, 303 ; predicate after copu- lative verbs, 185; for vocative, with article, 213, 224; suspended, 223 ; elliptic 223 Number of nouns, 16, 219 ; of verbs, 61 Numbers, comjiound and distribu- tive ...... 49 Numerals, the, 46, 300 ; with geni- tive, 235; adverbs . . .130 V i(pi? 208, 307 oijcetot, ellipsis of . . . .231 oTkos, ellipsis of (or otKio) . .231 6\Kv/jLi . J . . . 1 34 154 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. o\os, with article . . .211 ofivvfii 134 ovivrj/M . . , . .124 ovofia, use of . . . .224 o|ys, -e7a, -v, declined . . -38 Uttoos and 'iua, distinction of . -349 6pdo3, defective, 112; augment of, 103 Ss, ^, 0, declined, 54. See Relative. -05, neuter (stem, -es), substantives in 156 oS'ee Conjunctions. Partitive genitive . . 234, *g. Partitive plural . . . .220 Parts ot speech . . . • 1 5 Passive voice, the, 58, 322 ; sometimes difficult to distinguish from the middle . . . . .322 Past time, tenses expressing . 60 Paul a,nd Saul . . 174, 175, 176 Paul, St. , his name, with the article, 202 Perfect state, tenses expressing . 60 Perfect tense, the, 108 ; of liquid verbs, 95; second perfect, 93, 109; third person plural in -av, 109 ; per- fect passive, 109 ; force of the per- fect, 338 ; distinguished from aorist, 334; aorist may sometimes be ren- dered by, 331; "present-perfect," 335 > perfect imperative . -338 Perispomenon .... 9 Permission, by imperative . •338 Person, in verbs . . . .61 Personal endings, in verbs, origin of 63 Personal pronouns, 51, 303; nomina- tive subject when unemphatic, omit- ted, 303 ; genitive of, for possessive pronoun, 231, 303 ; pleonastic use, 304 ; avrSs for third person . 304 Peter,St.,his name, with the article,202 Place, by genitive, 236 ; by dative, 248; by accusative . . . 254 Pluperfect tense, the, 109, 334; its notion expressed by aorist . 332 Plural verb in general expressions, 180; neuter nominative with sin- gular verb, 181; verb with collective subject, 182 ; with several subjects, 183 ; of substantives, how used, 2 1 9, sq. ; plural forms with singular force Political terms, Latin, in the New Tes- tament 171 Possessive genitive . . 230, 57. Possessive pronouns, the, 52, 306 ; unemphatic, by article, 201 ; with ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 155 the article, 209 ; for objective geni- tive 303 Postpositive particles . . -372 Prayer, its object, hyxepi or inrep, 289; by 'iva . . . . '35° Predicate, the, 177; anarthrous, 193; with article, 193 ; participles with, X. ,. . , 361, sq. Predicative verbs . . .178 Prepositions, use of, 140, 255 ; with genitive, 140, 257 ; with dative, 141, 261 ; with accusative, 141, 264; with genitive and accusative, 141, 268 ; with genitive, dative, and accusative, 142, 277; table of, 142; in composition, 162; combined, 163 ; preposition and case, after article, 190; adverbially used, 144, 368; interchange of prepositions, 256, 285, sq. ; governing several words, 289; with infinitive, 358; corresponding adverbs, 147; adverbs as " improper prepositions " . 147 Prepositional phrases, without article, 207 Present time, tenses expressing . 60 Present tense, its stem, as modified, 90, 95, 10 1 ; force of the tense, 324, sq. ; aorist rendered by, 330; present-perfect, 335 ; present and aorist distinguished in imperative, 338 ; in subjunctive, 340 ; in infini- tive 354 Price, equivalent, &c. , by genitive, 240 Principal and historical tenses, 60, 324 Proclitics, the .... 9 Prohibitions, by future indicative, with ou, 329; by subjunctive aorist, with fiv . . . . . . 340 Pronominal subject, its omission and insertion . . . • i79> 303 Pronouns, the, ci, 303 ; personal, 51, 303 ; possessive, 52, 306 ; demon- strative, 307 ; relative, 309 ; inter- rogative, 314; indefinite, 17, 314; distributive pronouns, with geni- tive 235 Proparoxytone .... 9 Proper names, with article . zoi, sq. Properispomenon ... 9 Prophecy, Old Testament . .352 Punctuation . . . .11 Pure verbs, uncontracted, 78 ; con- tracted 79 iroTy, declined . . . .19 7ro\i»'-, in composition . . .162 Topti . . . . . 282, sq. iras, declined, 39 ; its use with article, 209 ; in Hebraistic negative, 301 ; irai'- in composition . . .162 irar-fp, declined, 31; ellipsis of . 231 iravofiui, perfect passive of, no; with participle . . . .362 ire^eco, conjugated . . .86 ireiuda}, future of . . . .104 irctpaofxai, future of . . .104 Trep/, 273; compared with Sid, 289; with inr4p . . . .289 TTrJxvs, genitive TplaTSi\ vrix^y • 39 trifxvpDixi 124 ■nlvw, present and second aorist of, joi ; future, 105 ; first aorist passive, 108 virrTO), stem of, and second aorist, 103 viareio), conjugated . , .69 irKiO}, stem of, and future . .105 irh-na-arw, second aorist passive . xo8 irKovTus, of variable declension . 34 Uverixa aytov, with article . . 206 irvfco, stem of, and future . .105 iToiixr,v, declined . . . 'Si Tr6Xis, declined . . . • 30 iroKx)s, declined, 40 j comparison of, 44 ; with article . . .212 ir6Tepos . . . . •315 vpaa-ffw, second perfect of . '93 vpaiis, or irpaos (or o) . . .40 irptirei, impersonal . . .111 "TpS, 260; with infinitive . '3 59 Trpos, 283, sq. ; compared with ds, 288; with infinitive (accusative) . 359 Trphs 66yoy, adverbial . . '359 7rpo(r€i/,i(77, si)ecial sense of . -237 irpoffixd}, elliptical use of . .251 irpoalifofmi, with participle (pepu, defective . 6duci), stem of . i\4w, conjugated 362 112 105 124 lOI 80 156 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. , how augmented, 102 ; emphatic future 330 QeSs, with and without article . 202 Oiyyayw, with genitive . .227 ev7}aK(t), stem. And iorma . .102 0pava>, perfect passive . . .110 U. Unconscious versification . .388 SSwp, declension of, 33; omitted after certain adjectives . , .292 vlSs, ellipsis of . , , , a3i 'Tibs &eov, with article , 404 -iJi'w, verbs in . • • • '59 158 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. ^fp, 274, sq. ; distinguished from avrt, 275; from irepi . . • 289 {nr6 176, sq. V. Vaughaii, Dr. C.J. . • 233> 323 Verb, the, 58, 318 ; verhal stem, the, 61 ; denominative verbs, 159 ; classes of verbs, 159; verbal predicate, 178; concord of, 181, sq.; transitive, with accusative object, 249 ; some verbs both transitive and intransitive, 250; verbs with modal dative, 246 ; with cognate accusative, 251; with double accusative object, 252 ; verbs with genitive of secondary object, 226, sq., 235; with dative, 242, sq. ; complemented by participles, 362 ; followed by infinitive, 356; com- bined with adverbial force, 369 ; verbal forms as adverbs . .147 Verbal adjectives in r6s, rios . 69 Vocative case, the . . .224 Voice, the distinction of . 58,318 Vowels, the .... 2 Vowel aorist, the . . .103 Vau, V, a lost letter of the Greek alphabet, called, from its shape, f, Digamma, [ being an old form of the gamma • • . .46 f, as influencing the declension of nouns, 29 J the conjugation ot verbs 105 W. Want, fulness, &c., by genitive . 228 Watts, Dr. . . . .202 Webster, Kev. W. . 255, 328, 35* Webster and Wilkinson's "New Tes- tament" 196 Wilderness of the temptation . 196 Winer's "New Testament Grammar," 197, 203, 216, 220, 239, 257, 269, 272, 295, 297, 298, 304, 321, 328, 3^9' 370, 377» 380, 384 Wish, expressed by optative . 342 Words, formation of . . .153 Words of one language not precisely coincident with those of another, 256 Z. Zeugma 3^3 Zumpt, Dr. A. W., on Quirinius, 294 Cda>, infinitive ; C^^, future . .105 Zfvy, genitive, Ai6s . . .34 ^(iyvu/itf conjugated . . .130 INDEX OF SCEIPTTJEE PASSAGES. [The letter s prefixed denotes the number of the paragraph in the chapter on Synonyms.] I.— OLD TESTAMENT, CHIEFLY THE SEPTUAGINT. CH. VER. 2. 7 24 9. 24 25 22. 17 Exodvs. 4. 19 IG. 15 22. 28 Leviticus. 7. 1 14. 2 15. 32 19. 18 PAGE 266 266 2997* 299 365 222 170 388 2397* 23971 23971 Numbers. 6. 13 . . . 239W 21 , . . 23971 3L 12 . . . 251W. Deuteronomy. 6. 5 ... 287 Kings. Joshua. 15. 25 175 CH. VER. 1. 43 ... 18. 44 . . . 45 . . . PAQK 318/ 198 198 2 Kings. 1. 2 . . . 3 . . . 23. 10 . . . 169 169 169 I Chronicles. 23. 31 . . . Nehemiah. 5. 18 . . . 34 264 Psalms. Proverbs. 9. 2 16. 10 22. 1 25. 11 45. 1 5L 4 68. 18 103. 2 118. 5 22 23 25 • 45 232, 268 170 380 248 321 301 258/1 266, 312 282, 293 . 171 CH. VER. 25. 30 Isaiah. 6. 10 7. 14 9. 1 14. 14 30. 33 40. 4 8 6L 1 65. 1 PA.OE 299 351 197 ^55 233 169 266 221 244 248 Jeremiah. 7. 22 ... 37c 31 . . . 169 Hosea. 6. 6 ... 370 Amos. 5. 26 ... 170 9. 12 . . 313, 323 Jonah. 4. 8 ... 199 Micah. 5. 2 ... 261 r r 160 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. II.— NEW TESTAMENT. M atthew. Matthew. \ MaUhew. CH. VER. PAGE OH. VEB. PAGE CH. VKB, PAOB 1. 1 . 195, 205 3. 15 . ... 379 6. 26 . . . . 171 6 . ... 231 16 . ... 245 27 . ... 329 11 . ... 278 17 . . 106, 223, 28 . ... 179 16 . ... 365 259, 333 29 . . «S2, 235 17 . ... 48 4. 1 . . 196^, 276 30 . ... 552 18 . . 207, 241, 3 . 204, 347, 350 32 . ... 179 362, 379 4 . . 263, 279 33 . ... 329 20 . 241,271,338 7 . ... 329 34 . • 263, 354 21 . • 179, 258, 8 . ... .58 37 . ... 292 3°5, 329, 379 10 . ... 245 38 . ... 257 22 . . 191, 268, 11 . . 244, 327 39 . . 179, 292, 352W 14 . ... 352 313, 319, 374 23 . . 197, 272 15 . ... 255 40 s66, 321, 331 2. 1 . . 197,. 207, 17 . ... 258 41 . ... 172 241, 261, 263 18 . . S70, 289 42 . ... 321 2 . 245, 356, 379 21 . . 231, 249 44 . 179, 275, 337 3 . 34, 1737?., 210 23 . . 239W, 306 45 . ... 3^8 4 . 205, 282, 326 24 . . 293, 319 46 . ... 314 5 . . 190, 379 5. 1-16 ... 13 47 . ... 314 6 . 261, 379, S16 1 . 198, 264 48 . ... 329 7 . 197, s6 2 . . 363, 384 6. Is5 521,285, 359 8 . ... 350 3 . 530,248, 329 2 . 325, 340, 343 9 . ... 310 3-U ... 382 3 . . . .341 10 . ... 251 4-8 ... 179 4 . ... 250 11 . . . . 264 4 . . . .191 5 . ... 329 12 . ... 354 5 . 40, 178, 6 . ... 338 13 . . 242, 330, 194, 329 7 . . . 56, 363 358, 379 6 . . . . 200 8 . • . . 359 14 . ... 236 8 . ... 248 9 . ... 303 15 . ... 352 9 . ... 185 9-11 ... 338 18 . . . . S20 10 . . 201, 329 10 . 277, 303, 374 20 . 222, 334, 379 11 . ... 180 12 . . . . «39 23 . ... 352 13 . 195, 262, 276 13 . . 258, 265, 3 1 . . . . 3Z5 15 . • 172, 190, 292, 3H 2 . ... 379 198, 277, 280 16 . . 350, 362 3 . ... 379 16 . . 214, 338 17 . ... 321 4 . s66, 274 J7 . 340, 375, 377 18 . 263, 362 5 . . . . 17"?^ 18 . . 35, 179, 301, 341 22 . . . 193 . 169, 211, 7 . S3, 234, 280, 24 . 314, «6 19 . ... 343 236, 300, 356 8 . . 240, 379 20 . . 179, 294, 25 . . 244, 345 9 . . 259, 379 341, 343 26 . 230, 265, 372 10 . ... 324 21 . . 179, 248, 27 . ... 364 11 . . 287, 290 288, 329 28 s66, 244, 274, 12 . . 247, 3»2 22 «52, 170, 179, 315, 318 13 . . 258, 358 244, 288 30 . ... 136 14 . . 3^8, 372 25 . ... 55 34 . . 191, 267 IKDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES 161 Matthew. Matthew. Matt/iew. CH. VEE. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE OH. VER. PAGt 7. I . . . . 338 9. 16 . «i3 s%5, 280 12. 21 . . . . 230 2 . . 287 17 . . . . 136 13 . . . . 108 3 ". '. 213, 250, 22 . . . . 158 17 . . • . 352 303, 315 28 . . 336, 344 18 . . . . 86z 6 . 19 h 243, 387 29 . . . . 272 20 . . . . 106 7 . . • . 243 34 . . . . 262 22 . . . . 387 8 . . . . 325 35 . . 2 39W» 293, 23 . . • . 337 9 . . 252, 337 327 24 . . . . 169 11 . . • . 354 36 . . 274, 327 26 . . • 347 13 . . . . 382 37 . . . . 377 29 . . . 196 13-15 . . . 382 10. 1 . . . . 237 33 . . . 378 14 . . . . 315 2 . . . . 190 35 . . . 196 15 . . 251, 313 3 . . . . 174 36 . . 223, 263 16 . 25 8, 287, 337 4 . . • 175 41,42 . 195, 217, 20 . . . . 379 10 . . . . 240 273 21 . . 301, 313 15 . . 263, 295 47 . . . 316 22 . . . . 337 Ifi ' "'5. 377, 377» 13. 2 . . . 198 23 . . 224, 334 20 . . . 370 3 . . 192, 244 24 . 22- 7, 280, 313 21 . . . 181 4 . . 192, 254, 25 . . . . 109 22 . 270, 308, 330 263, 282 26 . . • . 313 24 . . . 276 5 . . . 358 28 . . • • 343 25 . . . 350 8 . . • 327 29 . . 184, 328 26 . . . 361 13 . . • ^5 8. 1 . . • • 304 27 . . . . 312 14 . . 351, 365 «> . . . 344 28 . . «52, 250 20 . . . 227 4 . . 265, 340 29 . 171, 240, 301 20-23 . . 308 8 . . • • 373 31 . . . . 230 23 . . . 189 9 . . • . 380 42 . . 223, 292 24 . . • 333 10 . . . . 179 11. 1 . . . 362 25 . 197, 264, 359 11 . . 179, 207 2 . . 205 25-40 . . 171 16 . . . . 180 3 .* .' 191, 196 26 . . . 197 17 . . . • 352 5 . S30, 291, 323 29 . . . 148 18 . . • . 274 7 . . . 55, 196 30 . . • 359 19 . . . . 300 8 . 136, 252, 375 31 . . . 184 24 . . • . 359 9 . . . 375 32 . . • 359 25 . . 319, 337 10 . . , . 260 35 . . . 352 26 . . • • 315 11 . . . . 297 38 . . 178, 308 28 . . 259> 354 12 . . • 369 39 . . • 194 29 . . . . 246 14 . . •53, 331 47 . . . 570 32 . . . . 270 16 . . . ziin 52 . . . 318 9. 1 . . 198, 307 21 . . • • 349 56 . . . 284 3 . . . . 235 23 . . • 552 14. 3 . . 236, 332 4 . . • . 314 25 . . 363, 384 6 . . . 221 5 . . • . 315 26 . . . . 213 13 . . . 272 6 . . . . 208 28 . . . . 284 17 . . . 221 8 . . . 222 29 . . 40, 258 21 . . . 301 9 . . . . 242 30 . . . 521 22 . . • 355 11 . . . . 314 12. 3 . . 183, 272 26 . . . 258 13 . 3^ ^, 334, 37on 7 . . • 349 27 . . . . 179 16 . . . . 281 10 . . 228, 336 29 . . . 280 162 INDEX OF SCKIPTURE PASSAGE i:^. Ma'thew. Matthew. PAOK CH. TKR. PAOK CH. TER. PAOK • 236 314 18. 26-34 . . . 311 22 10 . . . . 373 . . . 221 28 . . , . 17J 16 . . . . 368 . . . 246 19 4 . . . . 207 17 . . . . 171 08, 196, 308 5 . . 180, 266 20 . . . . 314 . . . 221 8 . . 207, 284 23 . . . . 325 . . . 144 11 . . . . 301 29 . . . . 195 . . . 234 13 . 3c )6, 328, 349 35 . . . . 300 . . . 244 14 . . . . 208 37 . . 555, 287, . . . 198 16 . . . . 300 289, 329 . . . 224 17 . . 29^, 347 39 . . . . 329 . . . 282 18 . . . . 193 42 . . . . 205 . 223, 281 19 . . • • 305 43 . . . . 262 . . . 235 22 . . 328, 363 23. 2 . . . . 331 • . . 377 23 . . . . 376 7 . . . . 170 . . . 315 26 . . . . 282 15 . . «52, 191 . 221, 300 28 . I 62, 277, 280 17 . . . . 315 . 195, 204 20. 2 . . . . ^54 19 . . • • 3'5 . 552, 178, 3 . . 261, 274 24 . . . . 198 377, 386 6 . . . . 254 27 . 6 6, ^45, 377 . . . 30 8 . . . . 376 28 . . . s6, 377 • 330, 342 9 . . . 264 31 . . . . 245 • . • 331 10 . . . . 264 33 . . . . S5» . S55, 331 12 . . 199, 243 34 . . . . 284 . 555, 2" 19 . . . . 249 37 . , . 192 . • . 343 20 . . • . 315 39 . . 196, 258 216, 326 21 . . 259, 300 24. 1 . . . . 221 . 245, 356 22 . . 320, 330 2 . . 280, 341 . . . 214 23 . . 192, 377 6 . . • . 330 . 242, 207 28 . . 2^57, 356 9 . . . . 330 . • . 330 30-34 . . . 221 12 . 2 12, 270, 358 . . . 369 21. 3 . . . . 376 16 . . . . 288 . . . 348 4 . . . 352 18 . . 267, 289 . . . 330 5 . . . 40 21 . . 191, 369 . . . 198 8 . J82, 289 22 . . . . 301 . . . 171 8-11 . . 3^8 27 . . . 207 • . • 379 9 . 171, 196 29 . . . 361 . . . 26s 12 . . . 198 40 . . . 325 . . . 297 16 . . . . 321 45 . . . 358 . . . Z74 18 . . . . 376 25. 1 . «65, 313 . . . 258 19 . . . . 221 4 . . . 273 . 296, 356 23 . . 325, 378 5 . . . 3^7 . «52, 296 25 . . . . 245 8 . . . 3^4 •••35^ 31 . 14 . . . 307^ • . 49. 243 32 . . . . 358 15 . . . . 307 . . . 295 40 . . . . 340 37 . . . . 335 . . . 196 42 . . 266, 282, 40 . . . 281 . . . 369 293, 312 26. 2 . 2 65, i73. 3^5 • 147, 369 22. 2 . . • . 333 8 . . . . 221 . . . 333 5 . , 189, 3o7n 12 . . 278, 359 ... 300 8 . . . . 377 16 . . . . 30a Matihe%e, INDEX OP^ SCIIIPTURE PASSAGES. 163 Matthe\ PAGE . 22i . 337 263, 308 72, 336, 337 11611, 195 195, 366 254, 359 . . 347 63, 341, 342 • 377 . 338 • 319 171, 296 • 341 S35, 281 . 352 . xiin . 269 . 271 . 300 168, 380 . 329 . 320 . 170 • 369 . 336 254, 359 • 3»5 • 315 . 380 . 329 . 17X . 171 . 259 . 170 . 221 . 366 . 221 170, 314 221, 300 . 535 . 204 •S5, 3'^ . 191 . 171 171, 2^73, 148, 236, 301, 376 . . 332 . • 334 Matthew. Mark. CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE 28. 7 ... . 334 5 29 . . . 344 9 .... 374 33 . . . 198 11 . . . . 171 35 . . . 231 19 . . S19, 266, 41 . . 171, 305 i79>305, 318,363 42 . . 246, 380 6. 2 . . . 365 Marh 4 . . • • 290 6 . . . . 270 1. ] .... 20s 7 . . 49. ^37 2 . . . . 260 9 . . . . 385 4 . . . . 239 11 . . . . 277 7 . . 3U» 357 16 . . . . 3'i 13 . . . . 196/^ 21 . . 221, 249 16 . 570, 289 25 . . . . 273 23 . . . . 353 27 . . . . 171 24 . 152, 191 38 . . . . 221 27 . . • . 374 40 . . 223, 264 29 . . . 231 45 . . . . 179 33 . . . . 211» 49 . . . . sS 30 . . . . 190 50 . . ■ . 179 39 . . . 328 56 . . . 343 2. 1 . . 269 7. 4 . 172, 320, 321 4 . . . . 171 11 . . . 170 15 . . • 359 17 . . . 221 19 . . . 263 22 . . . 219 23 . . . 356 25 . . . 313 3. 2 . • • 345 27 . . . 198 5 . . . S32 31 . . . 264 13-26 • • 373 34 . . . 170 17 . . . 169 35 . . . 327 IS . . . 175 36 . . . 44 21 . 282, 344 8. 2 . . . 223 26 . . . 344 10-18 . . 373 4. 12 . • . 351 15 . . . 251 19 . . . 274 25 . . . 162 21 . • . 337 26 . . . 316 24 . . . 250 34 . . • 331 28. . ... 294 35 . . • 33» 31 . . . 230 36 . . . 21 If} 39 . . . 338 38 . . . 250 6. 4 . . . 358 9. 1 . . . 227 7 . . . 246 7 . . . 226 9 . . 171, 184 12 . . 281, 377 11 . . . 284 19 . . • 369 13 . 270, 301 20 . . . . 385 14 . . . 32s 21 . . . • 144 15 . 171, 325 34 . . . 297 21 . . . . 281 37 . . 279. 370 22 . . . . 300 40 . . . . 275 23 . . 319* 340 41 . . 205, 341 164 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. Mark. Mark. OH. TBB. FaUK CH. VER. PAQH CH. VER. PAOS 9. 42 . . . 44, 296 14. 19 . 49, 149, ^72 1 15 . . 35, 170, 43 . . . S52 25 . . . 341 206, 30c 43-47 . . 296 28 . . . 192 19 .284,323», 331 45 . , , . ss^ 31 . 330, 34* 20 . . 257, 330 50 . . . . 262 35 . . . 278 21 . . 328, 359 10. 8 . . . 8, 266 36 . 170, 224 23 . . . . S36 13 . I 80, 306, 328 49 . . . . 35a 29 .... 345 17 . . . . 300 54 . . . . 369 31 ... . 329 18 . . . . 292 55 . . . . 358 33 . . 221, 280 37 . . 207, 300 68 . . 269, 362 35 ... . 204?! 45 . . . . 380 60 . . . • 337 37 .... 301 46-52 . . . 221 61 . S28, 190 41 .... 206 51 . . . . 170 68 . . . . 54 42 .... 299 11. 2 . . . . 23s 71 . . . . 136 46 . . . . *47 7 . • • • 335 15. 1 . . . . 216 46-55 ... 387 8 . . . . 289 6 . . . 55» 326 50 .... 267 9 . . . . 171 9 . . . . «3 51 . . 262, 333 10 . . . . 171 12 . . . . 53 53 . . 228, 333 14 . . . . 342 15 . . . S3, 171 57 357 18 . . . . 3^8 16 . . . . 311 59 .... 328 22 . . . .237 17 . . . . 252 62 .... 193 25 . . . . 270 21 . . . . 207 64 .... 383 27 . . • . 325 22 . . . . 170 67 .... 206 32 . . 346, 385 24 . . . • 345 68-79 . . . 387 12. 4 . . . . 369 29 . . . . 152 75 .... 253 5 . . . . 189 34 . . . . 170 76 .... 260 10 . 266, 312 36 . . . . 221 79 .... 106 14 . . 278, 341 39 . . 171, 204 2. 1 . . 176, 292 17 . . . 190 44 . I 71, 334, 345 2 . . 294, 299 18 . . . . 325 45 . . . 171 4 . «6i, 314, 358 26 . . . 278 47 . . . . 231 6 .... 321 28 . . . 299 16. 1 . 518, 231 6 . » . . 357 30 . 287, 290 2 . 236, 301 8 .... 251 31 . . . 305 4 . . . 380 10 , . 210, 323n 34 . . . 346 5 . . 322 12 .... 217 38 . . . 251 6 . . . 334 13 .... 293 42 . . 171, 300 9 . . 50, 301 18 .... 274 13. 1 . 221, 293 12 . . . . 207 20 .... 311 4 . • . 330 21 . 357,359,374 8 . . . 271 L\ ike. 23 . . . .328 9 . • • 30s 25 .... 206 14 . . . 288 1. 1 . 1 51, 331 379 29-32 ... 387 16 . 2 67, 289, 341 2 . . . 207 31 . . 210, 271 20 . . 30 ». 349 3 . . . . 298 35 .... 208 22 . . . . 359 4 . . . . ei4 37 ... . 49 25 . . 330, 361 6 . . . . 3'6 39 . 190, 272, 332 14. 3 . . . . 270 6 . . . . «49 41 .... 272 4 . . . . 314 9 . . • . 357 48 . . 108, 331 6 . . . . 301 10 . . . . 328 49 . . 232, 315 6 . . . . 263 13 . . . . 329 3. 1 .... 176 Luke. INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 165 Luke. PAGE . 278 . 266 S2, 283 287, 312 293, 323W • 311 . 106 • 370 . S58 • S3 . 209 . 271 . 361 110, 224, 323W, 334 • 362 . 278 . 357 211, 323% . 178 , 362 269, 279 . 328 191, 330 . 385 . 358 . 236 . 273 . 334 320 356 356 6871 64, . 175 . 231 . 3^7 . 265 . 209 . 105 . 209 . 375 . 380 21,350,380 281, 321 . . 341 . . 287 . . 361 287, 307 Luke. 6. 47 48 7. 2 19 25 39 45 46 47 48 8. 1 6 8 10 13 15 23 29 30 33 39 41 45 49 52 54 9. 3 7 8 13 14 16 23 24 25 27 28 30 31 34 35 37 41 45 46 10. 1 8 7 14 97 • 315 . 369 S2, 330 • 317 136, 375 . 348 . 362 . 312 . 272 . 108 . 108 . 351 . 277 «2I, S3I . 327 . 249 182 270 271 373 264 344 359 236 264 • 317 . 317 295, 347^ . 264 . 197 • 331 . 33^ . 2 1 171 171, 213, . 227 . 223 . 314 • 330 . 330 . 226 . 283 • 369 • 351 193, 297 49, 264, 293, 330 • 34 . 196 . 195 CH. VER. 10. 19 20 22 23 24 27 29 31 35 36 37 39 40 41 42 11. 2 4 8 11 12 13 28 35 36 42 12. 1 5 6 7 10 11 20 22 24 26 28 30 33 39 44 47 48 54 65 2 4 9 11 16 Luke. PAGE 330, 342, 357 22 iw, 370 ^•3 179 179 305 373 313 281 235 273 307 63, 247 247 321 22I7» 299W, '98, 13. «39 358 385 237 206 379 353 2iin 375 263, 305 . . 257 «52, 359 171, 301 . . 230 223, 265 . . 216 224, 314 244, 345 . 230 . 244 . 136 . 320 S2, 22 in • 349 . 279 . 285 . 312 207, 326 . 199 . 283 . 48 . 383 . 368 . 49 166 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. Luke, CH. VER. 13. 18 12 22 29 32 14. 3 6 7 17 18 19 24 30 31 15. 4 7 15 19 25 26 27 29 16. 1 3 4 8 9 10 11 13 16 19 22 23 25 26 30 17. 2 3 4 8 12 15 23 30 32 34 35 18. 1 4 PAGE . 243 . 266 . 320 . 207 . i8» - 249 . 165 . 327 . 184 33a, 368 . 332 . 227 . 208 . 261 . 49 . 296 S16, 242 . 357 207, 226 . s6z . 326 . 254 . 365 . 363 . 229 232, 276 69, 259, 320 . 213 169, 382 . 169 . 323W • 453 . 220 «23, 220 191, 308 . 279 . 316 269, 350 ^5', 305 . 236 . 105 . 316 . 344 . 180 . 209 . 228 345 330 359 281 Luke 28] CH. VER. 18. 7 . 8 . 11 . 12 . 13 . 14 . 17 . 26 . 35-43 35 . 19. 3 . 8 . 11 . 18 . 20 . 37 •. 38 . 40 . 42 . 44 . 48 . 20. 2 . 11 . 12 . 16 . 17 . 19 . 20 . 21 . 25 . 35 . 39 . 21. 5 . 11 . 12 . 19 . 22 . 24 . 26 . 34 . 37 . 22. 4 . 14 . 15 . 19 . 20 . 22 . 24 . 33 . 35 . 87, PAGE • 236 151, 336 . 378 236, 335 . 549 296, 307 . 341 • 373 . 222 • 335 ,5871, 346 235» 325 • 369 . S18 . 171 182, 292 193 no . 383 257, 279 • 345 . 378 • 369 . 369 342 . 312 . 358 165, 254 . 221 • 379 236, 354 . 221 . 551 . 386 . 26X 267, 335 . 357 . 178 22in, 290 • 305 . 366 • 193 . 183 246, 359 304, 366 273, 359 . . 377 - . 297 ■ • 357 , . 3»6 Luke. 266, 23. CH. VER. 22. 37 . 41 . 42 . 49 . 50 . 57 . 59 . 67 . 68 . 70 . 5 . 6 . 12 . 14 . 15 . 19 . 24 . 26 . 33 . 47 . 49 . 53 . 1 . 5 . 6 . 10 . 11 . 13 . 18 . 21 . 23 . 25 . 26 . 27 . 29 . 32 . 34 . 35 . 39 . 41 . 46 . 47 . 24. 1. 1 2 4 6 John. 194, 207, 284, 382 . . 207 . . 194 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 167 John. John. John. PAOE CH. VEB. PAQE CH. VER. PAGE ... 224 4. 11 . . 184, 373 6. 42 . 208 , 287, 309 ... 372 14 . . 311, 342 45 . . . . 222 . 220 18 . . . . 312 46 . . . . 308 185,2x8,282 19 . . . . 382 49 . . . . 170 294W, 297, 299 22 . . . . 198 51 . . 221, 377 • a57» 373 23 . 290, 380 57 . . 270, 374 ... 308 25 . . . . 169 58 . . 170, 221 ... 335 27 . ...^73 60 . . . . 382 ... 384 35 . . . . 346 62 . . . . 383 ... 287 36 . • . • 351 66 . . . . 260 ... 325 40 . . . . 197 71 . . . . 231 ... 299 42 . 304, 340W 7. 4 . . . . 347 . 287, 308 43 . . . 197 6 . . . . 209 ... 254 44 . • . 307 14 . . . . 328 . . . 169 52 . . . 254 16 . . ■ . 370 307, 307W, 310 53 . 183, 2im 17 . . . . 331 ... 359 5. 4 . • • 55 22 . . . . 290 ... 183 5 . . . 254 23 . . 2", 351 . 246, 326 6 . . . 331 24 . . . . 251 . . . 3'3 8 . . . . 339 27 . . . 346 . . . 264 11 . . . . 308 34 . . . i27n ... 228 13 . . . . 56 35 . . . 239 ... 339 16 . . . . 327 36 . . . 127?* . . . 227W 17 . . . 369 38 . . . 223 ... 369 18 . . . .307 41 . . . 3«o . 183, 254 22 . . . . 210 45 . . . 308 . . . «35 29 . . . . 239 49 . . . 185 ... 171 30 . . . . 306 8. 4 . . . 108 • . • 339 35 . . . sSs 9 . . 49, 272 ... 237 36 . . . . 294 16 . . . 377 . . 49, 249 40 . . . 331 17 . . . 377 ... 233 42 . . 238, 346 25 . . . 368 ... 348 44 . . . . 385 29 . . 332, 333 206, 290, 348 46 . . . . 348 40 . . • 334 ... 194 47 . . 336, 347 42 . . sio, 349 . . . 196 6. 1 . . . . 241 44 . 207, 306, 331 . . . 196 2 . . 182, 278 51 . . . . 341 ... 301 6 . . . . 330 52 . . 183, 227 . 30J, 359 8 . . . . 221 53 . . . • 314 ... 370 9 . I 6w, 221, 300 58 . . . . 179 ... 384 10 . . . . 252 59 . . . . 204 ... 387 19 . . . . 254 9. 2 . . . . 351 ... 387 20 . . 179. 337 3 . . . . 181 ... 3=^8 22 . . 332, 3^5 16 . . . . 208 ... 361 24 . . 204, 385 22 . . . . 321 ... 246 27 . . . . 371 24 . . . . S47 . . . S24 28 . . • . 341 30 . . . . 380 ... 3^4 31 . . 170, 196 31 . . . . 382 ... 268 37 . . . . 341 33 . . . . 349 ... 259 39 . . . . 301 36 . . . . 373 168 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. John. CH. VEK. 9 40 41 10. 1 3 4 5 6 16 22 24 27 28 30 32 33 35 11. 1 4 6 8 11 12 13 15 17 18 19 21 30 31 32 34 35 38 44 47 61 12. 1 4 13 18 20 23 27 34 40 43 44 45 46 PAGE II 349 308 226 182 342 S46 «72 221 369 182 341 183 289 289 195 287 275 254 221 335 347 328, 334 351 319 48 190 349 332 384 349 336 S20 265 338 341 204 260 221 171 362 366 351 375 205, 362 35» «47, 295 370 «5 301 John, 14 15. OH. VER. 13. 4 . 5 . 6 . 8 . 10 . 11 . 14 . 16 . 18 . 27 . 28 . 31 . 3 . 6 . 7 . 13 . 15 . 16 . 17 . 22 . 26 . 27 . 28 . 1 . 4 . 6 . 8 . 9 . 16 . 17 . 18 . 20 * 22 . 25 . 26 . 27 . 2 . 4 . 13 . 16 . 20 . 23 . 24 . 25 . 27 . 29 . 32 . 2 . 3 . 4 . 16. 17, 171, PAOE 171 198 336 . 341 «i7, 321 . 366 . «I2 . 230 . 352 . 297 . 314 • 333 . 326 . 268 . 349 . Zl^ • 339 . i63» . 206 • 330 163W, 206, 252 214, 387 . 349 . 184 . 261 . 180 • 350 • 304 . 313 . 309 • ^99 . 347 . 349 . 352 , 206 . 377 35ii 375 . 207 198, 206 . 3^5 266, 375 . «9 . 320 . «46 . 282 . «46 . 351 iw, 237, 353 «24, 350 . . 33» John. CH. 17. 18. 19. 20. 7 . 9 . 10 . 12 . 15 . 17 . 20 . 24 . 3 . 6 . 6 . 8 . 9 . 15 . 16 . 20 . 21 . 24 . 28 . 30 . 32 . 34 . 35 . 37 . 3 . 11 . 13 . 17 . 19 . 20 . 24 . 25 . 27 . 28 . 28-«0 29 . 30 . 31 . 32 . 36 . 38 . 41 . 1 . 3-5 4 . 209, . 109 . S9 ill, 306 . 35^ 59, 292 • 194 . 59 . 260 . 198 . 179 . 179 179, 204 352 183 284 263 315 332 231 349 330 305 . 337 336, 337 . 213 . 297 . 169 . 170 [72, 221, 227 . . 172 34o» 35* 142, 174, ^59i 23] «i3i .83 282 232 «i3 35^ 221 106 181 106 35* 193 197 5o» 197. 265, 301 180, 290 ,211,265 . . 328 43W, 145. 265, 294 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 169 John. Acta. AzU, VEB. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VEB. PAGII 5 .... 265 2. 21 . . . . 323 4. 37 . . . . 364 11 . . . . 284 22 . . «45, 311 5. 1 . . . . 23 12 . . 284, 30c 24 . . • . 357 2 . . . . 321 14 . . . . 344 25 . . . . 265 4 . 3 15, 363, 370 16 . . . . 170 27 . 8 52, 231, 268 8 . . . . 3^1 17 . . . . 3^5 29 . . i6i, 373 9 . . . • 315 19 . . . . 301 31 . . 231, 268 15 . . 235, 316 22 . . . . 206 34 . . . . 221 16 . . . . 292 25 . 211, 342 36 . . . . 210 19 . . . . 269 28 . . . 213 38 . 2 05, 266, 279 21 . . 141, 277 30 . . . 293 39 . . . . 321 28 . . . . 246 3 . . . 108 45 . . . . 343 30 . . . . 204 6 . . . 258/1 46 . . . . 272 32 . . . . 241 8 . . . 39 47 . . . 366 34 . . . . 316 10 . . . 258 .3. 1 . . . . 183 35 . . 305» 330 11 . 49, 228 2 . Ii6w, 180, 36 . I 74, 245, 316 13 . . . 384 326, 366 37 . . . . 245 14 . • • 334 3 . . . . 364 41 . . . .' 275 15 . 230, 231 4 . . . 364 42 . 272, 362 15-17 S16, S19 5 . . . 316 6. 1 . S50, 284 16 . . . 231 7 . 234, 364 3 . 206, 277 17 . . . 231 8 . . . . 363 5 . . . 175 18 . • . 33=^ 10 . . . 346 9 . 171, 290 19 . • • 33^ 11 . . . 292 13 . . . 362 23 . • . 3^5 12 . 358, 364 7. 1 . 3i9» 336 25 . . . . 3i4 13 . . . . 308 9 . . . 3^1 ■ J9 . . • 352 12 . . . . 362 Acta. 24 . . . 377 14 . . . 261 25 . . «6x 16 . . . . 231 1 . 225,299,311, 4. 6 . . . 356 19 . . . . 358 3^o, 373» 377 7 . 2 90, 293, 364 20 . . . . 300 2 .... 244 8 . . 206, 364 21 . . 266, 304 3 . 269, 359 9 . . . . 237 26 . . . • 314 4 . 227, 385 13 . . 364, 384 30 . . . . 196 . 206, 287 15 . . . . 364 34 . . . 365 7 . . . 217 16 . . . . 377 35-38 . • . 309 10 . . 3^8, 374 17 . . 246, 281 40 . . . . 223 13 . 175, 231 18 . . . . 364 42 . . 536, 319 16 . . . 225 19 . . 295, 364 43 . . . . 170 18 . 181, 250 20 . . . . 179 48 . . . . S35 19 . . 169 21 . . . . 364 56 . . . «5, 221 22 . 308, 311 22 . . 233, 296 59 . . . . 323 24 . . . 263 23 . . . . 364 8. 1 . . . . 271 1-13 . . . II 25 . . • • 3H 5 . . . . 3c6 1 . . . 281 27 . . . . 562 9 . . . . 316 2 . . . . 361 28 . . • . 383 11 . . . . 249 4 . . . 206 30 . . . . «62 12 . . . • -^73 10 . . . 271 32 . . . . 316 15 . . 206, 314 U . . . 362 35 . . . . 342 17 . . ., . 206 17 . 105, 258 36 . . . . 364 18 . . . . 206 170 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. Acts. Acts. CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAQI 8. 20 . . . . 342 12. 21 ... . 277 16. 25 . . . . 271 21 . . . . 243 23 .... 257 26 . . . . 359 23 . . . . 362 13. 7-12 ... 175 31 . . . . 183 26 . . . . 308 9 . . . . T75 17. 1 . . . . 198 27 . . . . 364 10 . 225, 337, 362 3 . . 205, 385 30 . I 52, 336, 386 13 .... 190 4 . . . • 373 31 . 343> 3^0 15 .... 225 10 . . 269, 314 35 . . . . 334 20 .... 249 11 . . . . 346 40 . . 267, 359 21 . . 173^. 254 12 . • • • ^35 9 3 . . • • 355 22 ... . 266 15 . . 145, 299 7 . . . . 227 23 .... 204 18 . . . . 331 14 . . . 323, 31 .... 281 21 . . 21071, 297 16 . . . 275 33 .... 204 22 . . 544, 297 20 . . . . 3^4 34 . . . . S23 23 . . «37, *'7 21 . • • 3-3 40 .... 222 25 . . . . 386 29 . . .550 42 .... 267 27 . 6 7, 68n, 227, 31 . 2 3I, 248, 271 45 .... 363 3f ' 3^9 33 . . . 260 47 .... 358 28 . . 189, 388 39 . 321, 364 14. 2 ... . 271 30 . . . . «42 10. ] . . . 23 4 . . . . 189 31 . 2 62, 330, 368 3 . 197, 254 .... 357 IS. 3 . . . 252 6 . . . 283 8 .... 248 9 . . . . 3H 7 . . s6o, 235 9 .... 357 13 . . . .\ 283 16 . . . . 281 10 .... 201 14 . . 225, 349 18 . . . 345 12 ... . 34 15 . . . . 329 22 . 197, 227 13 . S67, 34, 260 18 . . . 538 24 . . . 3^8 16 .... 248 25 . 297, 322 32 . . . 185 19 .... 253 26 . . . 296 37 . . . 271 21 . . 250, 318 19. 2 . . . 336 38 . . . . 251 23 .... 335 3 . . . 206 11. 6 . . . 3^8 27 .... 273 7 . . 48, 211 10 . . . . 281 15. 1 ... . 246 12 . . . 171 13 . . . . 197 4 .... 273 14 . . . . 317 15 . . . 207 12 .... 182 15 . . . S4, »78 16 . . zo6, 287 14 .... 174 17 . . . . 2ion 18 . . . . 379 17 . 310, 313, 323 19 . . . . 301 19 . . . 279 ' 21 . . . . 27i 24 . . . . 320 20 . . SCO, 204 23 . . 3"8, 360 25 . . . . 274 23 . . . . 246 28 ... . «6 26 . . . . 208 26 . . . . 211 35 . . S15, 293 27 . . . . 266 28 . . 176, 278 36 . S15, 310, 316, 29 . . . . 21 IW 29 . . . . 310 3i9> 346 32 . . . . 297 30 . . . . 310 16. 2 ... . 3" 34 . . . . 385 12. 2 . . . . ^47 3 . . 185, 384 35 . . 292, 380 3 . . . . 369 4 .... 3^7 39 . . . . 347 6 . . . 200 9 .... 269 40 . . 228, 380 7 . . . . inn 12 . . 171, 3'4 20. 3 . . . . 357 14 . . . . 258W 13 . . «38, 237» 4 . . . . 175 15 . . . . 190 15 .... 347 6 . . . . 197 18 . . . . 345 16 . SJS, 320. 356 7 . . SIS, 30* Acts. CH. VER. 20. 8 9 13 18 24 28 I ' 31 33 35 21. 3 5 11 13 16 26 28 30 31 32 37 38 22 2 9 11 12 16 17 20 21 25 29 30 23. 5 6 9 10 13 14 15 23 26 30 31 32 24. 3 5 6 11 14 cts. PAGE . • . 565 15, 198, 25871 . 197 . . . 2C9/1 . 513, 320 . *i6, H9, 307, 321 362 . . 227 . . . 296 . . s68 . . . 369 . . 307 . 267, 374 • 8ZS, 312 365 ' 334, 363 . . ziin . 211 . 346, 362 336 171, 195 198 167 . . 227 . . 258/i . . . 322 . 321, 330 356 . . 320 • . 265 . . 336 . . 377 . 193 322 • 3^9 388 178 . . . 383 . S33 353 296 . 551 246 . 254, 357 1 . . . 3'7 . 299 360 278 . . 269 . . . 198 . 144 299 367 . . . 209 296, 310 ,364 . . . 309 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. Acts. CH. VER. 24. 17 25. 26. 18 . 19 . 20 . 22 . 23 . 26 . 6 . 7 . 8 . 9 . 10 . 17 . 19 . 21 . 23 . 25 . 26 . 27 . 2-7 2 . 3 . 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 . 12 . 14 . 16 . 17 . 24 . 25 . 29 . SO . 32 . 27. 3 8 9 10 13 14 16 17 20 25 34 37 38 39 43 64, PAGE 269, 376 . . 310 278, 348 . 107 • 297 . 198 . 242 • 277 • 293 . 176 . 278 297, 361 . 320 • S44 . 176 272 . 176 165, 278 . 106 . 217 . 278 255, 271 • 377 . «44 • 335 312, 368 310 167 309 310 212 299 343 183 355 247 298 34 355 298 . 270 247, 353 . 320 . 357 . 225 142, 283 . 21 I . 136 • 348 S3, 229 145, Acts. 28. 4 . 6 . 15 . 16 . 18 . 20 . 26 . 27 . 30 . 171 PAGE 200 124 172 272 314 253 342 351 211 Romans. 1. 1 . 2 . 4 . 5 . 7 . 8 . 9 . 10 . 11 . 13 . 16 . 17 . 20 . 22 . 24 . 25 . t. 26 . 29 . 32 . 2. 1 . 2 . 4 . . 5 . 6 . 8 . 9 . 10 . 12 . 13 . 14 . 15 . 16 . 18 . 19 . 21-23 23 . 25 . 26 . «345 231 239M 204W, 222 . 238 . 204 211, 377 . 320 . 278 244, 317 317, 369 . 219 . 187 S58 356 258 !, 221, 283 232, 283 247, 386 . . 364 . . 224 . . 240 187 263 310, 387 S32, 260 . 219 . 387 . 218 . 282 . 217 . 378 2397*, 269 . «i4 . 254 . 336 . 21S . 2l8 a66, 306 531, 172 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. Romans. Romans. Romans. •H. VER. PAQK CH. VEB. PAGE CH. VER. 2. 27 .... 364 6. 2 . 245, 313, 242 9. 8 . . 2 3. 2 . 253, 322, 377 3 . . 266, 378 9 . . 4 .... 321 4 . . 266, 334 11 . . 9 .... 323 5 . . 347, 376 12 . . 18 .... 238 8 . . 264, 340W 14 . . 20 . 218, 301, 330 10 . . . . 281 15 . . 22 .... 288 13 . . . • 339 18 . . 23 . . 228, 332 14 . . 277, 329 19 . . 25 . . 842, S49, 15 . . . . 342 20 . . J 288, 321 16 . . • 377 29 . . 1 26 . . S31, 288 17 . . 312, 384 30 . . . 28 . . 218, 379 20 . . . 245 10. 1 . . ', 29 .... 378 7. 1 . . . 378 2 . . . 30 . . 285, 379 2 . . 239» ^3 4 . . . 31 . ii6w, 218, 375 3 . . . 358 13 . . , 4. 1-16 ... 12 5 . . . 262 14 . , 1 .... 187 7 . 194, 329, 336 16 . J 2 .... 347 9 . . . . 218 18 . , 3 . . 180, 19s, 10 . . . . 308 20 . 5 266, 376 12 . . «2I, 377 11. 1 . . 5 .... 266 13 . . . . 342 7 . 9 .... 266 14 . . . . 157 9 . , 11 . . 233, 286 18 . . . . 355 13 . 2 34, 12 .... 260 24 . . 224, 233 17 . 13 .... 226 25 . . • 34, 304 18 . , 14 .... 260 8. 3 . 214 255, 2174 24 . , , 18 .... 283 9 . . . . 206 25 . , . 19 .... 301 11 . . . . 270 31 . 20 . . 246, 363 13 . . «54, 330 33 . 22 .... 266 15 . . 170, 384 36 . , 6. 1 . . a59, 269, 18 . . 285, 382 12. 1 . . 340, 340» 20 . . . . 279 3 . 2 .... 340 22 . . . . 369 5 . 3 .... 340 23 . 5^, 233W, 364 9 . . 5 .... 238 24 . . . . 247 15 . , 6 . . 271, 27s 25 . . . . 347 16 . 7 . . S2I, 275, 26 . . 163, 193, 19 . . . 291, 380 209, 345 13. 2 . 8 .... 27s 27 . . . . 272 3 . 9 . . 185, 367 31 . . . . 275 5 . . 10 . . 286, 34on 32 . . . . 55 9 . 1 93, 11 .... 367 33 . . . . 336 10 . 12 . 201, 279, 386 34 . . . . 336 11 . 13 ... , 201 35 . . . . 238 14 . , , 13-17 . . . 386 36 . . . . 239 14 1 . , 15-19 . 212, 347, 39 . . . . 238 4 . , , 386 9. 1 . . 206, 384 6 . , . 17 .... 366 2 . . . . 387 15 . , . 18 . 239, 379, 386 3 . . «38, «5i 20 . . 20 . . 163, 218 6 . . 221, 277 16. 3 . . . INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 173 Romans. I Corinthians. 1 Corinthians. CH. VER. PAGE OH. VER. PAGE OH. VBR. PAOK 15. 4 . 195, 226, 304 3. 6 . . 318, 327 8. 13 . • 34^, 347 5 . . . . 242 7-9. . . . 203 9. 1 . • • • 337 6 .... 216 7 . . 316, 318 2 . . . . 376 8 .... 275 9 . . 234, 382 6 . . . . 183 11 .... 339 10 . . 203, 217 10 . . . . 318 13 .... 206 13 . . . . 291 12 . • 2137, 247 15 . 270, 297, 332 15 . . . . 268 14 . . . . 259 16 .... 206 16 . . . . 635 15 . 2 47, 263, -^32 22 .... 357 17 . . . . 3" 17 . . 253, 322 24 . . 254, 355 20 . . 203, 346 24 . . . . 338 25 .... 364 21 . . . . 237 26 . • • • 379 26 .... 320 4. 4 . . . . 245 10. 1 . . . . 21 on 27 .... 235 5 . 199, 260 2 . . 266, 321 16. 6 ... . 314 6 . . 300, 353 3 . . . . 3^8 9 . . . . 176/1 8 . . 136, 343 4 . . . . 328 12 .... 314 9 . . . . s6 11 . 182, 285 14 .... 175 17 . . • . 333 13 . . . . 199 15 .... 175 21 . . 262, 315 14 . . . . 250 21 .... 175 5. 4 . . . . 264 16 . . . . 312 23 ... . 211W 5 . . . . 308 17 . • 212, 235 25 . . 239W, 249 7 . 525, 380 19 . . . . 316 8 . . . . 262 21 . . . . 235 I Corinthians. 9 . . 199, M4, 25 . . . . 17a 332, 333 26 . . . . «i3 I. 1 ... . 202 13 . . . . 329 29 . • • 314 2 . .. 323, 373 6. 1 . 2 78, 316, 321 31 . . . . 378 3 . . . . 204 2 . • 24o» 347 33 . . . 212 9 .... 269 4 . . . . 308 11. 1 . . . 376 10 ... . 34 5 . . . . 264 2 . «49, 376 11 .... 231 6 . . . . 309 4 . 141, 270 13 . . 266, 336 8 . . 309, 373 9 . . . 270 17 .... 356 11 . . 185, 309, 12 . . . 270 18 .... 234 317, 33^ 13 . • . 356 19 ... . 136% 16 . . 180, 266 14 . . . 200 21 . . 198, 286 18 . . . . 250 18 . 316, 377 25 .... 294 19 . . . 237 22 . . . 341 29 . . . . 301 7. 5 . . 281 23 . . . 328 2. 1 . . 179, 203 10 . . 253 24 . . 265, 366 2 . . 255«, 273 11 . . • 253 25 . J 47, 273, 304 3 .... 179 15 . • 338 26 . • • 147 4 .... 206 16 . . 345 27 . . . . 378 7 . . 203, 366 19 . . 185 30 . . 246, 335 8 .... 349 25 . . 365 31 . . • • 349 13 . . 5 55, 206 28 . • 333 12. 2 . . • . 343 14 . . . . S55 31 . . 247 3 . . . . 551 15 . . . . S55 32-34 . . 244 8 . . . . 286 3. 1 . S55, 157, 179 34 . . . 248 9 . . . . 286 2 .... 383 37 . . . 385 13 . . 266, 380 4 . . S5S, 317 39 . • 357 14 . . . . 380 6 . . 268, 376 40 . . s6, 206 15 . . . . 283 174 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. I CorintJiiam. | I Corinthians. 2 Corinihians. tH. VER, PAGE OH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE 12. 16 . . . . 283 15. 25 . . . . 326 2. 13 ... . 358 18 . . . . 248 27 . . . . 180 14 . . . . 220 20 . . . . 248 29 . . 222, 276 15 . . 192, 367 25 . . . . 244 30 . . . . 179 17 . . 212, 361 27 . . . . 368 31 . ... 304 3. 1 . . . . 305 31 . . . . 297 32 . ... 340 3 . I 57, 184, 206 13. 1 . . 201, 383 33 . 5, *2I, 388 5 . . . . 287 2 . . . . 210 34 . • . . 339 6 . . . . 217 3 . . • . 353 37 . ... 348 11 . . . . 286 4 . . . 200 39 . . . . 301 12 . . . . 247 8 . . . . 320 41 . . . . 229 13 . . ii6», 367 9 . . . . 368 43 . . . . 381 14 . . . . 369 10 . . . . 368 44 . . sss, 381 15 . . . . 280 11 . . . . 326 45 . ... 266 17 . , . . 194 12 . 2 68, 284, 368 46 . . . . sss 18 . . . . 246 13 . . . . 230 49 . . . . 34071 4 2 . . . 209 14. 1 . SIS, 376 50 . ... 183 6 . . . . 23^ 4 . . . . 217 52 . ... 180 14 . . . . 3i3» 5 . ^95. 347» 54-57 ... 387 17 . . . 288 9 . . . 330 55 . ... 552 18 . . . «5 10 . . . 348 16. 2 . ... 301 5. 1 . 233, 241 11 . . . 263 5 . ... 326 2 . . . 364 13 . . . 350 10 . ... 341 4 . 351, 380 15 . . 34, 340W 15 . ... 384 6 . 169, 233 16 . • • 199 17 . ... 304 6 . 367, 385 19 . 34, 207, 296 21 . ... 307 8 . 367, 385 20 '. sss, 248 22 . . «5i, 170 10 . . . 269 22 f. . . 266 11 . . . 238 23 . . . 2im 2 Corinthians. 13 . . . 245 25 . . . 2C7 14 . 238, 275 27 . . 141, 264 I. 3 . ... 216 15 . 2 75, 33^, 334 28 . . . 207 4 . ... 3" 16 . . • 347 30 . . . 299 5 . . . . 269 18 . . . . 203 35 . . 407, 331 8 . . 276, 357 19 . 2 62, 306, 361 36 . . . . 378 9 . 165, 280, 351 6. 2 . . . . 180 38 . . . . 338 10 . ... 54 14 . . . . 243 5 3 . . . . 275 12 . ... 300 18 . . . . 266 4 . • • • 334 13 . 350, 376, 378 7. 1 . . . . 238 6 . 2 81, 2Q7, 301 14 . . 184, 368 4 . . . . 247 8 . . . . 199 16 . ... 286 5 . . . . 367 9 . . . . 235 17 . ... 247 8 . . . . 199 10 . . 247, 264 22 . . 169. 233 9 . . . . 27a 12 . . . . 346 2. 2 . ... 374 10 . . «40, 272 14 . . . . 829 3 . 280,281,333 11 . . , . 272 15 . . . . 271 4 . . 260, 333 12 . . 333, 359 16 . . . . 347 5 . . 347, 368 13 . . . . 279 17 . . . . «29 6 . . 208, 297 14 . . . . 347 19 . . . . 361 9 . ... 333 16 . . . . 220 21 . . . . 200 10 . ... 3^3 8. 2 . . . . 270 24 . . . . 216'' 12 . . 266,376 7 . . . . 340 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 175 2 Corinthians. Galatians. \ Oaiatiam. CH. VER. PAGE OH. VER. PAGE OH. VER. PAGE 8. 9 .... 308 2, 1 . . . . 269 6. 14 ... . 355 10 . . . . 144 2 . . . . 366 15 .... 316 11 . . • . 357 4 . . . . 353 17 . . 144, 236 14 . . . . 266 6 . , . . 316 20 . . 23 . . . . 352 . . 275 7 . . 10 . . 253, 322 . . 310 Efheskms. 9. 2 . . . . 144 11 . . . . 271 1. 1 .... 269 3 . . • . 333 12 . . . . 328 3 . . 191, 216 6 . , . . 279 13 . . 165, 360W 5 . . . . 269 9 . . . . S30 14 . . 159. 375 6 . . . . 232 12 . . . . 361 16 . . 218, 301 10 . , . . 190 10. 2 . 254, 355 17 . 152, 336 13 . . . . 247 5 . . . . 238 19 . . . 218 14 . , . . «49 10 . . . . 180 20 . 214, 275 16 . . . . 262 12 . . . 165 21 . . . 379 20 . . . . 385 16 . . . . 148 3. 1 . 225, 271 21 . . . 276 11. 1 . , • . 343 2 . . . . 218 23 . . . «i3 5 . . . 276 5 . . . 218 2. 3 . . «55, 248 23 . . . 147 6 . . . 266 4 . . . 270 26 . . . 226 9 . . . 260 5 . . . 247 31 . . . 216 10 . . 218, 275 8 . . 247, 269, 33 . . . 107 16 . I 80,278,311 309, 374 12. 2 . 260, 308 18 . . . 218 9 .... 351 3 . . . 346 21 . 214, 349 12 . . . . 229 4 . . . 340 27 . . . . 266 15 . . • «49 6 . . . 227 4 1 . . 196, 230 20 . . . 215 11 . . . 276 6 . . . . 170 21 . . . . 210 12 . . . 196 8 . . . 361 3. 8 . . . 45, 230 19 . , 275, 308 10 . . . . 321 9 . . . S4 20 . • • 353 11 . 346, 353 10 . . . . 351 21 . • ■ • 353 17 . . . • 353 15 . . s6i, 210 13. 1 . . . . 278 19 . . . . 310 18 . 215, 304, 321 4 . . . . 380 22 . . 189, 300 19 . . 238, 247» 5 . 305* 346 24 . . . . 361 4. 1 ... . 240 7 . • 185, 350 25 . • . • 193 1-3 .. . 367 13 . . . . 238 26 . . . . 314 6 .... 286 31 . . . . 217 8 . . 180, 251 Galatians. 5. 12 . 14 . . . . 343 . . . 329 9 . 193, 233, 298 10 .... 276 1. 1 . . 269, 286 17 . . . . 351 11 . . S15, 189 4 . . 274, 289 22 . . . . 381 16 . . 239, 320 6 . . 576, 324 24 . , . . 190 17 . . 292, 309 7 . . . . S76 25 . . . . 347 18 .... 292 8 . . . . 551 6. 1 . . 352, 384 22 . . . . 307W 9 . . «5i> 374 2 . . . . 568 23 . . . . «26 10 . . . . 245 3 . . . . 316 26 . . . . S32 11 . . . . 323^ 5 . . 568, 330 28 . . . . 366 16 . . . . 262 9 . . 2P7, 362 30 . . . . 267 22 . . . . 361 11 . 56, 332, 332n 31 . . . . «32 23 . J28, 361, 366 12 . . . , 246 32 . . . . 262 176 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. Ephesians. Philippians. Colossians. CH. VER. PAQK CH. VEEC PARE CH. VEB. PAGB 6. 2 . . . . «37 2. 13 . . . . 275 2. 5 ... . 369 3 .... 243 15 . . «6, «65,^ 8 . . . . 353 5 . . . . 2i6 148, 310 9 . . «i3, S34 12 . . 306, 355 25 . . . . 234 12 . . 226, 237 14 ... . 117W 26 . . . . 3^8 13 . . 264, 287 16 . . 178, 321 27 . . . . 148 14 . . . . «49 18 .... 206 28 . . . . 297 15 . . . . . 305 19 . «43, 246, 305 30 . . . . 241 18 . . «44, 238 21 .... 238 3. 2 . . . . 251 19 . . 251* S-^o 25 .... 275 3 . s 36, 178, 200 20 . . S49, 264 51 . . 266, 330 5 . . 217, 259 21 . . . . «7 .33 ... . 341 8 . ..•33^ 22 . . ai5, 310 6. 2 .... 262 9 . . . . 306 23 . . 361, 377 9 .... 234 10 . . . 54, 387 3. 1-4 . . . 206 10 .... 3-3 12 . S27, 332, 347W 3 . . 264, 334 14^16 . . .233 13 . . . . 254 5 . . . . «54 16 .... 292 15 . . . . 316 16 . . S43, 367 18 .... 206 16 . . . . 360 4. 1 . . . . 240 21 ... . sz 20 . . 204, 310 10 . . . . 526 22 .... 333 21 . . 3^9* 357 12 . . . . 175 23 .... 204 4. 2 . . . . 175 15 . . . . 175 5 . . . . 248 17 . . 346, 353 Philipp/ins. 6 . 7 . . . . 538 . . . «55 18 . . . . 307 1. 2 .... 290 8 . . . . 282 I Thessalonians. 4 . . . . 320 9 . . . . 240 6 .... 369 10 . . . . 811 1. 2 ... . 27 9 . . . . 350 13 . . . . 211 5 . . . 290 10 . . 166, 267 22 . . . . 176 7 . . . 216 11 . . 252, 269 8 . 195, 216 12 .... 298 13 .... 171 Colossiara. 10 . 2. 1 . . . 366 . . 346 15 . «i5, 290, 317 1. 6 . . . . 385 3 . . . 360 16 . . «i5, 189 7 . . . . 175 4 . . 253. 322 17 .... 189 8 . . . . 206 6 . . . . 287 18-23 ... 206 9 . . 252, 362 12 . . . . 240 18 .... 246 10 . . . . 240 14 . . . . 209 21 ... . 192 10-12 . . . 387 20 . . . . 380 22 . 315, 321, 345 11 . . . . 232 3. 3 . . . . 358 23 ... . 44 13 . . . ^33 4 . . . . 330» 27 .... 240 14 . . . . 381 11 . . . . 342 28 .... 309 15 . . . 210 12 . . . . 342 29 .... 385 16 . 85. *", 334 15 . . . . 366 30 .... 385 17 . . . 261 4. 1 . . . . 193 2. 2 .... 350 23 . 210, 226 5 . . . . 361 4 . . . . 57 26 . . . 385 7 . . . . 279 6 . «i, «56, 356 27 . , . . 3" 8 . . 370, 379 7 . . . . «56 28 . . . . 384 9 . . . . 304 8 . . . . «56 29 . . . . 310 10 . . . . 380 12 ... . 52 2. 1 . . . . 55 15 . IS >5, 263, 342 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 177 I Thcssahnians. ] Timothy. 2 Timothy. CH. VER. PAGE CH VER. PAGK CH . VER PAGE 4. 16 . 191, 217 2. 7 . ... 384 4. 15 320 17 . . . 264 8 . . .S3, 253 16 342 5. 3 . . . . 342 3. 5 . ... 228 17 107 4 . • . 351 11 . . . . «53 19 176 6 . • 340 13 . ... 3^1 21 176 10 . . . . 264 14 . ... 298 11 . . . . 300 16 . 248,311,387 Titus 14 . . . 284 4. 3 . ... 383 1. 3 307 16-22 . . 338 10 . ... 280 7 234 23 . . . S27 14 .... 273 9 365 24 . . .366 5. 3 . ... 214 10 293 25 . . . 274 5 . ... 280 11 211 26 . . . zion 8 . ... 230 12 388 11 . ... 331 2. 1 365 a Thess alonians. 14 . . . . «3 3 «53 1. 8 . 10 . 11 . 12 . 2. 1 . 2 . 3 . 9 . 10 . 11 . 13 . 216, 361 . . 253 216, 350 . . 276 268, 335 6. 21 22 23 24 3 4 5 . ... 165 . ... 23s . . 247, 371 . ... 317 . ... 365 . . 183, 274 . ... 253 3. 4 5 9 11 13 14 5 34> 191 307^* 307 214 216 237 162 • • 199 . . 197 . . 257 . . 197 . . 206 12 13 14 15 . 199, ^51, 382 . . 211, 278 . ... 382 . . S28, 300 6 7 8 10 247, SIJ, 308 228 301 15 . 8. 3. 1 . . 3 . . 5 . . 10 . . 11 . . 14 . . 17 . . I Til ^9. ^53. 3" . . 350 . . 292 238, 342 380, 381 . . 362 . . 321 . . 307 nothij. 1. 2. 2 12 13 17 18 5 8 11 Timothy. • ' 267, 357 . ... 365 . ... 298 . . 145, 298 . ... 348 . . 239W, 334 . • 178, 194, 332, 382 . . . .314 1. 11 . . . 12 . . . 13 . . . Philemc 2 . . . 4 . . . 5 . . . 11 . . . 13 . . . m. 166 175 175 158 278 288 386 ^75 1. 3 . . 363, 386 18 20 22 23 . 124, 342, 386 2 . . . . S41 19 . . . . 203 . . • 350 4 . . . . 386 26 . ... 308 . . . . 183 6 . . . . 229 3. 3 .... J . . . . S53 24 • • 176, 183 8 . . 10 . . 247, 386 . • 365 4 9 . . 183, 274 . ... 308 Hehreu 8. 11 . . *i8, 253 14 . . . . 210 1. 2 . ssS, 217, 278 13 . . 363, 384 16 . . . . 210 3 53, 556, 14 . . . . 384 4. 3 . ... 365 233, 261, 320 16 . . . . 20971 6 . ... 335 4 283, 297 18 . . . . 262 7 . . . . S13 5 . . 266 19 . . 521, 274 10 . ... 213 6 . . . , zicn 2. 6 . . ^55. 307 13 . ... 172 7 . . . . 284 178 INDEX OP SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. Hebrews. Hebrews. Hebrews. CH. VER. PAGB CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE 1. 8 . . . . 213 7. 21 . . 189, 203 11. 21 ... . 364 9 . ai3, 252 22 . . . 234 26 .... 237 14 . . S3, «36 24 . . . 201 28 . 87, 227, 366 2. 1 . . . 297 25 . . . 368 35 .... 199 3 . • . 54 27 . . . 281 37 .... 262 5 . . . 244 8. 2 . . . 836 39 . . . . 286 7 . 280, 316 5 . . 180, 322 12. 1 . 831, 868, 379 8 . . . 55, 211 8 . . . . 112 2 . . 234, 257 9 . 85, 227, 10 . . . . 367 5 .... 228 275, 383 11 . . . . 342 10 .... 235 10 . . . 270 12 . . . . 34* 13 . ... 388 13 . . . 222 13 . . . 525 15 .... 352 14 . 235, 334 9. 1 . . . . 849 16- ... . 352 15 . 269, 358 2 . . . 220 17 . . 840, 273 16 . . . 384 3 . . 273, 300 18 . . . 34, 227 3. 3 . . . 283 4 . . . 170 20 .... 227 5 . . 860 5 . . 849, 170, 24 . . 826, 283 12 . i40» 353 276, 368 27 .... 193 13 . . . . 316 7 . . 839, 236 28 . . . 87, 833 4. 1 . . . 242 10 . . 849, 232 29 .... 381 2 . . . 323n 12 . . 107, 281 13. 2 ... . 362 3 . . . 365 15 . . . 826 5 .... 341 4 . . . 180 21 . . • 239 6 .... 203 6 . . . 323W 23 . . 222, 283 8 . . 178, 221 8 . • • 349 25 . . . 262 12 .... 262 9 . . . 245 10. 1 . . . 856 13 .... 379 12 . 165, 276 2 . . . 362 18 .... 821 16 . . • 34 6 . . . 274 19 .... 298 5. 2 . • • 253 7 . 213, 316, 358 20 .... 214 4 . . . 197 8 . . . 274 21 .... 221 7 . 833, 258 9 . 810, 299, 326 23 . . 298, 362 8 . 3 12, 365, 386 10 . . . 281 11 . . . 310 18 . . . ^74 James. 12 . 270, 380 19 . . . 262 13 . . . 240 25 . . . 362 1. 1 .... 360 6. 1 . • • 233 26 . . . 274 5 .... 228 2 . . . 234 30 . . . 382 6 .... 243 3 . . . 34on 34 . . . 380 11 . . 199, 332 4 . . . 227 37 . . . 196 13 .... 240 5 . . . 227 39 . . . 236 17 . 293, 361, 388 10 . . • . 357 11. 2 . . 286, 322 18 .... 317 13-16 . . 271 4 . . . 283 22 ... . 81 14 . . . 365 8 . . . 330 24 .... 332 16 . . . . 38z 9 . . . 268 25 . . 214, 232 7. 1 . . . . 208 10 . . • 199 26 . . 844, 234 2 . . . 287 12 . . . 309 27 .... 844 4 . 56, 287, 383 13 . . . 272 2. 1 .... 219 5 . . . 365 15 . . 349, 357 2 .... 197 9 . . . . «8 17 . . . 3^8 3 .... 197 20 . . . . 189 20 . . . . ai6 4 . . 232, 305 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 179 James. PAGE . i8i . 3^8 • 376 . 246 . 559 . 54 55, 3^^ . 552 512, 125 216, 292 «55, 361 165 245 369 368 243 218 147, 2o8w, 307, 319* 340W ■ . 359 . 246 147, 319 245, 266 170 196 260 . S31 , 261 . «i8 . 538 . 180 I Peter. . . 234 206, 232 212, 216 246, 364 . . 364 . . 214 . . 213 323, 366 . . 247 . . 278 . 290 203, 214, 22), 32371 . . 2IO/1 . . 162 CH. VER. 2. 5 7 9 13 14 17 18 19 21 23 24 3. 1 4 5 7 10 14 17 19 20 21 4. 1 5 10 11 12 13 17 5. 1 2 7 11 12 1. 1 2 3 4 5 10 12 14 18 19 20 21 I Peter. PAGE . . 523,537 . 197, 312, 383 • SZ2, 547j S49 • 549 . 269 . 367 . 367 ■ 237 . 275 . 327 313* 327 307W, 353 . . 40 . . 307W . . 367 320, 357 a Peter. 25 348 . 348 • 215 2i5» 234 . 382 229, 320 . 319 . 323W 201, 261 no 547, 221 • 247 . 235 . 357 . 261 261 511 221 332 2 Peter. . . 174, 216 ., . . . 342 . ... 247 . ... 298 • • • • 377 .215, 320, 342 . ... 365 . ... 332 . ... 215 • 298, 318, 367 . • 307, 367 . . . . 206 CH. VEB. 2. 1 4 5 6 11 15 20 22 3. 1 2 3 5 11 14 16 18 PAGE . . 163 . . 386 525, 302 ■ • 233 . . 298 . . 248 181, 347 546, 190 166, 310 241, 367 278, 367 . 286 . 219 . 248 . 310 . 267 I John. 1. 1 . 207, 227, 334 3 . • . 377 2. 1 . . . 163W 2 . 274, 3o6« 4 . . . 54 5 . . . 238 13 . . . 292 i4 . . . 292 15 . . . 238 19 . . . 349 21 . 301, 332 3. 1 . • . 350 3 . • . . 53 4 . . . 54, 195 10 . . . 182 12 . . . . 292 4. 2 . . . . 363 4 . . . 54 8 . • 194, 332 10 . . 200, 274 11 . . . . 347 16 . . . . 238 17 . . 273, 350 19 . . . . 238 5. 3 . I 84, 238, 350 6 . . . . 286 19 . 21171, 292 20 . . . . 3«6 2 John. 310 180 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. a John. Revelation. Revelation. CH. VER. PAQK CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. 2 .... 385 2. 2t> . . . 223 12. 17 . . . 3 . . . . 329 27 . . . si6 13. 1 . . 7 . . . . 308 3. 3 . . . 254 5 . . 8 . . . . 305 9 . . • 353 10 . . 10 . . . . 207 10 . . 2 -im, 233 16 . . 11 . . . . 235 12 . . 223, 304 18 . . 12 . 106, 172, 284 15 . . . 343 14. 10 . . 21 . . 223, 261 13 . . 3 John. 4. 1 . . 4 . . . . 109 . • 49 15. 15 . . 2 . . 262 2 . . . . 141 8 . . 196, 264 6 . . 4 . . . 45. 309 9 . . . . 277 16. 9 . . 5 . . . . 309 10 . . . 277 14 . . 6 . . . 240 11 . . . 200 18 . . 7 . . . . 275 5. 2 . . . 200 17. 1 . . 9 . . 306, 333 7 . . . 324 10 . . 13 . 269, 331 12-14 . . 387 18. 4 . . 14 . . . . 284 13 . . 200, 277 6 . . 6. 1 . . . 301 9 . . Jiide. 3 . . . 301 13 . . S5. 6 . . . 240 17 . . 1 .... 231 8 . . . 262 21-23 . 6 . S58, 214 11 . . . 57 22 . . 9 . . . 298 16 . . . 277 19. 1 . . 10 . . . 54 7. 11 . . . 219 3 . . 14 . . . 261 12 . . . . 200 4 . . 18 . . . 278 14 . . 184, 199 6 . . 19 . «55, 206 17 . . . 264 9 . . 24 . . . 387 8. 3 . . . . izm 11 . . 25 . . . 387 7 . . . . 235 12 . . 8-18 . . 235 16 . . Revelation. 9 . . . . «55 20. 2 . . 13 . . . 300 12 . . 1. 4 . . 196, 224 9. 12 . . . 301 21. 1 . . 8 . • 35, 196 15 . . . 267 13 . . 10 . 206, 262 10. 5 . . . . 265 16 . . 13 . • . 284 11. 2 . . 49, ii4 17 . . 18 . . 30, 361 5 . . . 347W 21 . . 2. 10 . . . 199 15 . . . 293 22. 10 . . 14 . . . . 252 16 . . . 219 11 . . 16 . . . 262 12. 3 . . . . .67 14 . . 17 . . . 170 9 . . S25, 21 m 16 . . 20 . . . 128» 12 . . . . 221 PARDON & SON^ PRINTERS, PATERN03TBR ROW, LON»ON. By the same Author. Bible Sketches and their Teachings. For Young People. By £he Rev. Samuel G. Green, b.a. Fcap. 8vo, each 2s. 6d. cloth boards. .First Series. — From the Creation to the Exodus of the Children of Israel. Second Series. — From the Israelites' Entrance into Canaan to the end of the Old Testament. Third Series. — The Life of Christ Paragraph Bible with Emendations. — The Holy Bible, according to the Authorized Versions, in Paragraphs and Sections ; with Emendations of the Text ; also Maps, Chronological Tables and Marginal References. Royal quarto, large type. Complete in one volume. Cloth boards, 35s. • Vol. I. — Genesis to Esther, 16s. Vol. II. — Job to Malachi, IBs. Vol. III. — The New Testament, 10s. 6d. The Annotated Paragraph Bible. — The Old and New Tes- taments, according to the Authorized Versions, arranged in Para- graphs and Parallelisms ; with Explanatory Notes, Prefaces, and New Selection of References. Maps and Engravings. Super-royal 8vo. Old Testament, boards, 14s. New Testament, ditto, 7s. Old and New Testaments, complete in 1 vol. , ditto, 20s. Old and New Testaments, in 3 vols., boards, 22s. Large Paper Edition, 1 vol., 28s. {May he also had in calf and morocco binding, plain and elegant) Pocket Paragraph Bible; with Maps. 3s. cloth boards; 4s. roan gilt ; 5s. French morocco ; 6s. Turkey morocco ; 7s. ditto, flexible back ; 8s. best morocco limp, with flaps ; 9s. with gilt clasp. A Handbook of the English Tongue. By Joseph Angus, D.D., F.R.A.S., Examiner of English History and Literature to the London University. 12mo. 5s. cloth boards. A Handbook of English Literature. By Joseph Angus, D.D., Examiner of English Literature, etc., at the London Univer- sity. 12mo. 5s. boards ; 6s. 6d. extra boards. A Handbook of Specimens of English Literature^ By J. Angus, i>.d. 12mo. 58. 6d, cloth boards. luWkatbtts of t§^ lldtgmus Crart Somfg, A Neiv Introduction to the Study of the Bible. By E. P. Bareows, D.D., Professor of Biblical Literature, New York. With Fac-similes of ancient MSS. 8ve. 6s. cloth boards. The JSistory of England to the Tear 1852. By T. Milner, A.M., F. E.G. s. 12mo. Two Maps. 5s. cloth boards. The Elements of English History, By J. C. Curtis, b.a. For Schools and Families. Is. limp cloth ; Is. 6d. half-bound. The History of Greece. By the Eev. F. Arnold, b.a. With Maps and Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 6s. cloth boards. The History of Rome. By T. Milner, a.m., f.r.g.s. 12mo, Three Maps. 3s. cloth boards. Elements of the History of Rome. By J. 0. Curtis, b.a. 24mo. Is. cloth ; Is. 6d, half-bound. The Elements of Moral Science. By F. Wayland, d.d., Professor of Moral Philosophy. Notes and Analysis by Joseph Angus, d.d. 12mo. 3s. cloth. A Universal Geography : Historical, Mathematical, Physical, and Political. By T. Milner, a.m. Maps. 12mo. 5s. boards. Raley'^s Horce Raulince. With Notes and Supplementary Treatise, entitled HOE^ APOSTOLIC^. By the Rev. Can©n BiKKS, M.A., Professor of Moral Philosophy in the University of Cambridge. With a Map. 12mo. 3s, boards. Paley^s Evidences of Christianity. Introduction, Notes, and Supplement. By the Rev. Canon Birks. 12mo. 3s. cloth boards. The Analogy of Religion. Also Fifteen Sermons. By Joseph Butler, ll.d. With a Life of the Author, Analysis, etc. By J. Angus, d.d. 3s; 6d. boards. The New Biblical Atlas, and Scripture Gazetteer. Twelve superior Maps and Plans, with descriptive Letterpress. Super-royal 8vo. 2s. 6d. plain ; 4s. outlines coloured j 6s. 6d. on imperial drawing paper, full coloured, and bound in boards. 56, PATERNOSTER ROW; 65, ST. PAUL'S CHURCHYARD; AND 164, PICCADILLY. UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY BERKELEY Return to desk from which borrowed. This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 29Apr'49AP r9Feb55Vl^ f ta 7 19.5g » — ^TERLIBRARy LOAN 10ADr'58TS re:c'd l^ APR 1 7 1986 RECORD »JUL5 1972 4: J[- OF CALIF.. BERK. 'OGct's^ji^ REC'D LD M3 79 -m AM 7 /) REC'D LD JNTERLIBR/S RY LOAN OCT 9 1952 AUG 16 1976 UNIV. OF CA LIF., BERK. LD 21-100ot-9,'48(B399s16)476 ^^•JfjQO 325 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY